毗兰若篇章的注释巴利
Verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是“那是什么”,或者“那怎么说”。所谓“非限定指示语”,是因为没有限定,所以叫“非限定”;用这个来指示意义,所以叫“指示”;用这个来说,所以叫“语词”;指示本身就是语词,所以叫“指示语词”;非限定的指示语词,就是“非限定指示语词”,意思是对最初未被限定的时机的指示语词。也有人这样说:“因为不说‘yena’而说‘tena’,所以是不作限定而指示的语词,也就是非限定指示语词。”由于“yaṃ”“taṃ”这类词有恒常关联,所以论主说“即使没有以其自身的形式说出”等等。其中,“其”指的是“tena”这个词。“即使没有以其自身的形式说出”,就是说即使在经文里没有以“yena”这样的形式直接说出。所谓“以意义成立”,是指以后来舍利弗长老生起的思惟这一意义而成立。因为思惟一旦成立,“在什么时机生起了思惟”这个意义自然就成立了。因此说:“后来,作为请求制定戒律之因的具寿舍利弗的思惟已成立”等等。说了“tena”之后,因为从意义上说的正是那个意思,也就是“yena”,所以这个“yena”就成了“tena”的“复注”。“复注”的意思就是详细注释。巴利
.Seyyathidanti taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Aniyamaniddesavacananti natthi etassa niyamoti aniyamo, niddisīyati attho etenāti niddeso, vuccati etenāti vacanaṃ, niddesoyeva vacanaṃ niddesavacanaṃ, aniyamassa niddesavacanaṃ aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ, paṭhamaṃ aniyamitassa samayassa niddesavacananti attho. ‘‘Yenāti avatvā tenāti vuttattā aniyamaṃ katvā niddiṭṭhavacanaṃ aniyamaniddesavacana’’ntipi vadanti. Yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ niccasambandhabhāvato āha ‘‘tassa sarūpena avuttenapī’’tiādi. Tattha tassāti ‘‘tenā’’ti etassa. Sarūpena avuttenapīti ‘‘yenā’’ti evaṃ sarūpato pāḷiyaṃ avuttenapi. Atthato siddhenāti parabhāge sāriputtattherassa uppajjanakaparivitakkasaṅkhātaatthato siddhena. Parivitakke hi siddhe yena samayena parivitakko udapādīti idaṃ atthato siddhameva hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘aparabhāge hi vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūto āyasmato sāriputtassa parivitakko siddho’’tiādi. ‘‘Tenā’’ti vatvā tato tadatthameva ‘‘yenā’’ti atthato vuccamānattā ‘‘yenā’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘tenā’’ti etassa paṭiniddeso nāma jāto. Paṭiniddesoti ca vitthāraniddesoti attho.
“后来”这里的“hi”是表示原因,意思是“因为”。所谓“成为请求制定戒律的原因”,意思是:成为这样生起的请求制定戒律的原因——“世尊,时机到了,善逝,时机到了,愿世尊为弟子们制定学处,诵出巴帝摩卡,使这梵行得以久住、长存。”所谓“思惟”,是指这样生起的思惟:“哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行没有久住?哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行久住了?”因为“yaṃ”“taṃ”这些词有恒常关联,所以接着说“因此,于其时”等等。所谓“以前或以后以义理成立”,是指由以前或以后生起的义理而成立。所谓“应作复注”,与这里的“yadidaṃ”相关联。“应作复注”就是说“yadidaṃ”——这个方式、这个理路,在一切律中都适用,这是意思。或者,“应作复注”就是说“yadidaṃ”——这个理路,在一切律中都适用,这是意思。巴利
Aparabhāge hīti ettha hi-saddo hetumhi, yasmāti attho. Vinayapaññattiyācanahetubhūtoti ‘‘etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yaṃ bhagavā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, uddiseyya pātimokkhaṃ. Yathayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ addhaniyaṃ assa ciraṭṭhitika’’nti evaṃ pavattassa vinayapaññattiyācanassa kāraṇabhūtoti attho. Parivitakkoti ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosi, katamesānaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ ciraṭṭhitikaṃ ahosī’’ti evaṃ pavatto parivitakko. Yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ niccasambandhoti āha ‘‘tasmā yena samayenā’’tiādi. Pubbe vā pacchā vā atthato siddhenāti pubbe vā pacchā vā uppannaatthato siddhena. Paṭiniddeso kattabboti etassa ‘‘yadida’’nti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Paṭiniddeso kattabbo’’ti yadidaṃ yaṃ idaṃ vidhānaṃ, ayaṃ sabbasmiṃ vinaye yuttīti attho. Atha vā ‘‘paṭiniddeso kattabbo’’ti yadidaṃ yā ayaṃ yutti, ayaṃ sabbasmiṃ vinaye yuttīti attho.
这里,“只是略示门径”这句话,是为了按照前面所说的道理加以说明:这只是略示门径,意思是只是标示方法。“门”“入口”和“方法”,从意义上说是一回事。先引出经文“那么,诸比丘,我将为比丘们制定学处”,然后针对那里作复注,说“以彼苏定那”等。“以彼”是表示原因的具格用法,所以那里的复注也同样如此,因此说“因为其行”。所谓“先前以意义成立”,是指由先前生起的、名为行淫法这一意义而成立。所谓“后来以意义成立”,是指由后来生起的、名为未经国王允许而取用木料这一意义而成立。“时”这个词,与“被见到”相关联。巴利
Tatridaṃmukhamattanidassananti tassā yathāvuttayuttiyā paridīpane idaṃ mukhamattanidassanaṃ, upāyamattanidassananti attho. Mukhaṃ dvāraṃ upāyoti hi atthato ekaṃ. ‘‘Tena hi bhikkhave bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti pāḷiṃ dassetvā tattha paṭiniddesamāha ‘‘yena sudinno’’tiādinā. Tenāti hetuatthe karaṇavacanattā tassa paṭiniddesopi tādisoyevāti āha ‘‘yasmā paṭisevī’’ti. Pubbe atthato siddhenāti pubbe uppannamethunadhammapaṭisevanasaṅkhātaatthato siddhena. Pacchā atthato siddhenāti raññā adinnaṃ dārūnaṃ ādiyanasaṅkhātapacchāuppannaatthato siddhena. Samayasaddoti etassa ‘‘dissatī’’ti iminā sambandho.
“和合”是指诸缘的聚集,意思是因缘的和合。“刹那”是指机会。对于“时”这个词来说,和合就是它的含义,这是它们之间的关联。“或许我们明天也能前去,考虑到时间和时机”——在这里,“时间”是指前去所适合的时机。“时机”是指这件事本身的诸缘聚集,从意义上说,就是与它相应的身体力量和没有由这些缘引起的危险。“把握”是指用智慧去抓住、辨认它们,所以“把握了时间和时机”的意思就是:用智慧抓住、审察了时间和时机。这里说的是:如果我们明天有适合前去的时间,身体也有足够的力量,而且不会因为前去这件事而出现其他不适,那么,在审察了这个时间以及这个叫作前去因缘和合的时机之后,或许我们明天就能来。巴利
Samavāyeti paccayasāmaggiyaṃ, kāraṇasamavāyeti attho. Khaṇeti okāse. Assāti assa samayasaddassa samavāyo atthoti sambandho. Appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyāti ettha kālo nāma upasaṅkamanassa yuttapayuttakālo. Samayo nāma tasseva paccayasāmaggī, atthato tadanurūpaṃ sarīrabalañceva tappaccayaparissayābhāvo ca. Upādānaṃ nāma ñāṇena tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ sallakkhaṇaṃ, tasmā kālañca samayañca paññāya gahetvā upadhāretvāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace amhākaṃ sve gamanassa yuttakālo bhavissati, kāye balamattā ceva pharissati, gamanapaccayā ca añño aphāsuvihāro na bhavissati, athetaṃ kālañca gamanakāraṇasamavāyasaṅkhātaṃ samayañca upadhāretvā api eva nāma sve āgaccheyyāmāti.
“刹那”是指机会。因为如来出世等,就是修道与梵行的机会,是获得那种因缘的原因,所以刹那本身就是时机。凡是被称为“刹那”和“时机”的,其实是同一个意思。“大时”是指大集会。“增长了的林”就是森林,在那森林中,意思就是树林。“跋陀利,那时你也没有通达”——这里,“时”是指圆满学处的因。“跋陀利”是那位比丘的名字。这里说的是:跋陀利,有你应该通达的道理,但你却没有通达,没有看清。那是什么道理呢?所以说“世尊”等。巴利
Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā, khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo khaṇoti ca samayoti ca vuccati, so ekovāti hi attho. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Pavuddhaṃ vanaṃ pavanaṃ, tasmiṃ pavanasmiṃ, vanasaṇḍeti attho. Samayopi kho te bhaddāli appaṭividdho ahosīti ettha samayoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetu. Bhaddālīti tassa bhikkhuno nāmaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bhaddāli tayā paṭivijjhitabbayuttakaṃ etaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthi, tampi te na paṭividdhaṃ na sallakkhitanti. Kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘bhagavā kho’’tiādi.
在“在学”等词中,“慢”是那位游方者的本名。不过,因为他有能力学会种种东西,人们就称他为“在学”,所以叫他“在学”。沙门光头子之子,就是沙门光头子子。据说他是提婆达多的侍者。人们在那里宣说各自的教义和见解,所以叫“教义宣说处”,也就是“见解宣说处”的意思。据说在那个地方,以阐基、多罗库、莲花实等为首的婆罗门,以及尼乾子、裸形外道、游方者等各类游方者聚在一起,各自宣说、谈论、阐明自己的教义和见解,所以那座园林就叫“教义宣说处”。也正因为那座园林被一排称为丁杜咖吉拉的柿子树环绕,所以叫“丁杜咖吉拉”。那里有一间讲堂,所以叫“一讲堂”。不过,因为那里最初只建了一间讲堂,后来依靠有大福德的布吒婆楼游方者建了许多讲堂,所以就依据最初那一间讲堂,得了“一讲堂”这个名字。而那座园林是茉莉花王后——波斯匿王的王后——的御园,长满花果,因此被称为“茉莉花后的园林”。就在那个教义宣说处、丁杜咖吉拉、一讲堂、茉莉花后的园林里。他住在那里,意思是他在那里住得安乐。巴利
Uggāhamāno tiādīsu mānoti tassa paribbājakassa pakatināmaṃ, kiñci kiñci pana uggahetuṃ samatthatāya ‘‘uggāhamāno’’ti naṃ sañjānanti, tasmā ‘‘uggāhamāno’’ti vuccati . Samaṇamuṇḍikāya putto samaṇamuṇḍikāputto. So kira devadattassa upaṭṭhāko. Samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti etthāti samayappavādako, tasmiṃ samayappavādake, diṭṭhippavādaketi attho. Tasmiṃ kira ṭhāne caṅkītārukkhapokkharasātipabhutayo brāhmaṇā nigaṇṭhācelakaparibbājakādayo ca paribbājakā sannipatitvā attano attano samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pavadanti kathenti dīpenti, tasmā so ārāmo ‘‘samayappavādako’’ti vuccati, sveva tindukācīrasaṅkhātāya timbarurukkhapantiyā parikkhittattā ‘‘tindukācīra’’nti vuccati. Ekā sālā etthāti ekasālako. Yasmā panettha paṭhamaṃ ekā sālā katā ahosi, pacchā mahāpuññaṃ poṭṭhapādaparibbājakaṃ nissāya bahū sālā katā, tasmā tameva ekaṃ sālamupādāya laddhanāmavasena ‘‘ekasālako’’ti vuccati. Mallikāya pana pasenadirañño deviyā uyyānabhūto so pupphaphalasañchanno ārāmoti katvā ‘‘mallikāya ārāmo’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tasmiṃ samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme. Paṭivasatīti tasmiṃ vāsaphāsutāya vasati.
“在现世”指的是眼前这个生命体。“利益”的意思是增长。“来世的”是指因为业和烦恼而应当去往、应当到达的来世,也就是他方世界;与它相应的,就是“来世的”,即来世的利益。“通达利益”是指如前所说的两种利益——现世利益和来世利益——的获得。因为来世的利益也是由于因缘已经完成而获得的,所以把这两种利益合在一起,说为“通达利益”。以智慧把握的人,就是智者;或者说,拥有智慧,所以叫智者。巴利
Diṭṭhe dhammeti paccakkhe attabhāve. Atthoti vuḍḍhi. Samparāyikoti kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sampāpuṇitabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha niyutto samparāyiko, paralokattho. Atthābhisamayāti yathāvuttaubhayatthasaṅkhātahitapaṭilābhā. Samparāyikopi hi attho kāraṇassa nipphannattā paṭiladdho nāma hotīti tamatthadvayaṃ ekato katvā ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhiyā paññāya rāti gaṇhātīti dhīro. Atha vā dhī paññā etassa atthīti dhīro.
以正通达慢,就是通过正确地断除慢。这里说的“正”,是指以最上道智将慢彻底断除。在“苦的逼迫义”等说法中,苦圣谛的逼迫,就是对具有苦的人造成伤害、使其不得自在;逼迫本身就是“逼迫义”,这是把词尾的 ttha 转成 ṭṭha 来说的。其余几个也是这样。由各种缘和合而成,就是“有为义”。热恼,就是依苦苦等而烧灼、燃烧。变易,就是由于老和死而有两种变坏的方式。应当被通达、应当被证悟的,就是“通达”;通达本身就是“通达义”,也就是逼迫等。因为它们以应当被通达这一点而归为一类,所以说为“通达义”;或者,作为通达、证悟的对象领域,就是“通达义”,因此逼迫等由于同属通达的对象领域这一共同点,而统一说为“通达义”。巴利
Sammā mānābhisamayāti mānassa sammā pahānena. Sammāti iminā mānassa aggamaggañāṇena samucchedappahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭhotiādīsu dukkhasaccassa pīḷanaṃ taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ, pīḷanameva attho pīḷanaṭṭho, tthakārassa ṭṭhakāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Samecca paccayehi katabhāvo saṅkhataṭṭho. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmo jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Abhisametabbo paṭivijjhitabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayova attho abhisamayaṭṭho, pīḷanādīni. Tāni hi abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā ‘‘abhisamayaṭṭho’’ti vuttāni, abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva pīḷanādīni abhisamayassa visayabhāvūpagamanasāmaññato ekattena vuttāni.
在这里,由于前缀只是起到标明的作用,真正表达各个意义的词就是“samaya”本身,所以在解释“samaya”的词义时,也提到了带前缀的“abhisamaya”。其中:
众缘和合、共同成就时,它“sameti”(会合)、“samaveti”(聚集),所以叫 samaya,意思是聚集。
道与梵行在这里、在承载它的补特伽罗身上会合、聚集,所以叫 samaya,意思是刹那。
诸法在这里,或通过它,与俱生法等在生起等方面一起会合,所以叫 samaya,意思是时间。因为时间从究竟义上说并不真实存在,只是法的运作本身,但它被当作法运作的依处,像原因一样,以假立的方式被施设言说。
诸部分平等地、一起地运行、活动、安住,所以叫 samaya,意思是集合,就像“samudāya”(集合)这个词一样。因为集合就是诸部分一起安住。
在其他缘聚合时,果从它这里生起、运作,所以叫 samaya,意思是因,就像“samudaya”(集)这个词一样。
它结合、连结,因为具有结缚的性质,或者因为具有牢固执取的性质,那些与它相应的有情就按照自己的执著而运行、活动,所以叫 samaya,意思是见。因为众生被见结绑得极紧。
聚集、会合、和合,所以叫 samaya,意思是获得。
趋向寂灭,或者正确地趋向、离去、不再运作,所以叫 samaya,意思是舍断。
以智现前,正确地应当趋入、应当证得,所以叫 abhisamaya,意思是诸法不错乱的自性。以现前的方式正确地趋向、行进、觉悟,所以叫 abhisamaya,意思是如实觉了诸法的自性。
应当这样理解“samaya”一词在各个不同意义上的用法。巴利
Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā tassa tassa atthassa vācako samayasaddo evāti samayasaddassa atthuddhārepi saupasaggo abhisamayasaddo vutto. Tattha sahakārīkāraṇasannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyaṃ ettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Samenti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchanti dhammā sahajātadhammehi uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ viya ca parikappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyati. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavena sahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho. Paccayantarasamāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā taṃsaṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhanti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa nirodhassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamo appavattīti samayo, pahānaṃ. Ñāṇena abhimukhaṃ sammā etabbo adhigantabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
难道不是词语依于意义才得以确立,一个词并不能表达许多意义吗?确实如此,但这是就特定的词语而言。因为当考虑到特定词语时,一个词表达多种意义是不可能的。表达“时间”这一意义的“samaya”一词,并不表达“聚集”等意义。然而在这里,是因为那些种种意义都具有可被“samaya”一词所称说的共通性,才说“samaya”一词有多义性。在一切解释词义的地方,都应这样理解其意趣。而在这里,它的意义是“时间”。因为在这里,“samaya”一词的意义是时间,聚集等意义在此处并不适用,而且就像地点、说法者等一样,时间应作为因缘被指出。巴利
Nanu ca atthamattaṃ paṭicca saddā abhinivisanti, na ekena saddena aneke atthā abhidhīyantīti? Saccametaṃ saddavisese apekkhite. Saddavisese hi apekkhiyamāne ekena saddena anekatthābhidhānaṃ na sambhavati. Na hi yo kālattho samayasaddo, soyeva samūhādiatthaṃ vadati. Ettha pana tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ samayasaddavacanīyatāsāmaññamupādāya anekatthatā samayasaddassa vuttā. Evaṃ sabbattha atthuddhāre adhippāyo veditabbo. Idha panassa kālo atthoti assa samayasaddassa idha kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato desadesakādīnaṃ viya nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
这里不用受格和处格来说明,而是用具格来说明,是为了确定它的用意,于是借对方的口提出质问:“此处说……”等等。这里“于彼时”在这个地方,意思是诡辩者所说。“然后”则表明想要提出质问,“不然”和它是同一个意思。为什么用具格来说明?这是连接关系。应当用处格来说明,这是要连接的。这里也要把“如同”引进来连接。“于彼处”是指在那些经和阿毗达摩中。“如此”是指用受格和处格。“此处”是指在这律中。“别的方式”是指用具格。“完全”是指从开始一直到说法结束,始终完全、不间断,这是它的意思。“以悲住”是指以利益他人的修行所称为的悲住。正因为悲是说法之因,这里把利益他人的修行称为“悲住”,而不是指悲与等至之住。因为在说法时,以法为所缘的说法智和以众生为所缘的大悲不可能同时生起,因为所缘不同。所以应当知道,这里“悲住”是指依于悲而转起、称为利益他人修行的住。为了阐明这个意思,也就是为了显示完全结合之义,而作了受格说明,就像“他学习一个月”那样。巴利
Upayogavacanena bhummavacanena ca niddesamakatvā idha karaṇavacanena niddese payojanaṃ niddhāretukāmo parammukhena codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti ‘‘etthāhā’’tiādi. Ettha ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti imasmiṃ ṭhāne vitaṇḍavādī āhāti attho. Athāti codanāya kattukāmataṃ dīpeti, nanūti iminā samānattho. Kasmā karaṇavacanena niddeso katoti sambandho. Bhummavacanena niddeso katoti yojetabbaṃ. Etthāpi ‘‘yathā’’ti idaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tatthāti tesu suttābhidhammesu. Tathāti upayogabhummavacanehi. Idhāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Aññathāti karaṇavacanena. Accantamevāti ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ, tāva accantameva, nirantaramevāti attho. Karuṇāvihārenāti parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tathā hi karuṇānidānattā desanāya idha parahitapaṭipatti ‘‘karuṇāvihāro’’ti vuttā, na pana karuṇāsamaāpattivihāro. Na hi desanākāle desetabbadhammavisayassa desanāñāṇassa sattavisayāya mahākaruṇāya sahuppatti sambhavati bhinnavisayattā, tasmā karuṇāvasena pavatto parahitapaapattisaṅkhāto vihāro idha karuṇāvihāroti veditabbo. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthadīpanatthaṃ upayoganiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
“依处之义”就是所依的意思。“有”指的是作用;用一种作用来说明另一种作用的特征,就是以“有”来说明“有”的特征,这个意思就是以有显示有之特征的含义。那么,在对阿毗达摩中,上面所说的这两种含义怎么能同时成立呢?所以他说“依处即是……”等等。其中,被称为时间的含义就是时间义,被称为集合的含义就是集合义;或者,时间这个词的含义就是时间义,集合这个词的含义就是集合义。那是什么呢?就是“时机”。这里要表达的是:时间义和集合义所构成的时机,就是对阿毗达摩中所说的触等诸法而言的依处、所依;也就是说,在某个时间或某个法聚中,当欲界善心生起时,就在那个时间、那个聚中,触等诸法也存在——这就是这里的意思。巴利
Adhikaraṇatthoti ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, soyevattho bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho. Kathaṃ pana abhidhamme yathāvuttaatthadvayasambhavoti āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhī’’tiādi. Tattha kālasaṅkhāto attho kālattho, samūhasaṅkhāto attho samūhattho. Atha vā kālasaddassa attho kālattho, samūhasaddassa attho samūhattho. Ko so? Samayo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kālattho samūhattho ca samayo tattha abhidhamme vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ādhāroti yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle puñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho.
有人会问:这个时间和集合,本来就是依靠概念施设出来的,只是世俗说法而已,它怎么能成为那里所说诸法的所依呢?这没有过失。就像时间虽然被自性法所限定,从胜义上说本身并不存在,却仍然被施设为所依,因为在它之前和之后都不存在——比如“上午出生,傍晚死去”这类说法;集合虽然离开了各个部分就不存在,只是概念假立而成,却仍然被施设为各个部分的所依——比如“树上有枝条”“从麦堆里长出来”这类说法。这里也应当这样理解。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ upādāya paññatto kālo samūho ca vohāramattako, so kathaṃ ādhāro tattha vuttadhammānanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Yathā hi kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññatto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto sāyanhe gacchatī’’tiādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññapīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsimhi sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evamidhāpīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在阿毗达摩中说明了“依处之义”的存在之后,现在为了说明“以有显示有之相义”的存在,而说“称为刹那、合会、因的”等等。其中,所谓“刹那”,不是指通常说的八刹那,而是指第九种,即名为佛出世的那一刹那;或者,也可以把这里说的“刹那”理解为“空间”之义,就像《增支部》4.31 里说的:“诸比丘,有这四种轮,具足这些轮的天与人能使四轮运转。”这里说的四轮就是:住在合适的地方、亲近善士、自己立正确的志向、过去所积的福德。把这四种轮合在一起,从“作为善法生起的空间”这个意义来说,就应知道为“刹那”,因为它们确实是善法生起的空间。所谓“合会”,就像“缘于眼和诸色,眼识生起”等经文所指示的那样,是以产生眼识等共同果的方式而安立的眼、色等诸缘的集合,因为眼、色等诸缘有眼识等共同的果。所谓“因”,就是能生的因。对于前面所说的称为刹那、称为合会、称为因的那个时机,以“有”——也就是存在——来显示其中触等诸法的“有”,使它们被了知,这就是这里的含义。这里说的是:就像“牛在挤奶时去了,挤完奶时回来了”,通过挤奶这个作用,去和来的作用就被显示出来;同样,这里说“在任何时机,在那个时机”时,“存在”这个含义自然就被了知,因为如果没有那个时机,那些法就不可能存在。也就是说,在如前所说的那个刹那、那个诸缘合会、那个因存在时,欲界的善心就生起;就在那个刹那、那个诸缘合会、那个因存在时,触等诸法也存在。这是为了阐明那个含义,也就是为了说明“所依之义”和“以有显示有之相义”。巴利
Abhidhamme ādhāratthasambhavaṃ dassetvā idāni bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthasambhavaṃ dassento āha ‘‘khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassā’’tiādi. Tattha khaṇo nāma aṭṭhakkhaṇavinimutto navamo buddhuppādasaṅkhāto khaṇo, yāni vā panetāni ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ pavattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) ettha patirūpadesavāso, sappurisūpanissayo, attasammāpaṇidhi, pubbe ca katapuññatāti cattāri cakkāni vuttāni, tāni ekajjhaṃ katvā okāsaṭṭhena khaṇoti veditabbo. Tāni hi kusaluppattiyā okāsabhūtāni. Samavāyo nāma ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.204; 3.421; saṃ. ni. 4.60) evamādinā niddiṭṭhā cakkhuviññāṇādisaṅkhātasādhāraṇaphalanipphādakattena saṇṭhitā cakkhurūpādipaccayasāmaggī. Cakkhurūpādīnañhi cakkhuviññāṇādisādhāraṇaphalaṃ. Hetūti janakahetu. Yathāvuttakhaṇasaṅkhaātassa samavāyasaṅkhātassa hetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena sattāya tesaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ bhāvo sattā lakkhīyati viññāyatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evamidhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte ‘‘satī’’ti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti aññakiriyāya sambandhābhāve padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādibhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyatīti. Ayañhi tattha attho yasmiṃ yathāvutte khaṇe paccayasamavāye hetumhi ca sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe paccayasamavāye hetumhi ca sati phassādayopi hontīti . Tadatthajotanatthanti adhikaraṇatthassa bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthassa ca dīpanatthaṃ.
这里“在此律中”是指在这部律典里。“因”的意思和“作”的意思都可能成立:像“靠食物而住,靠明而住”这类说法里,有“因”的意思;像“用斧头砍,用锄头挖”这类说法里,有“作”的意思。为了说明怎么会这样,就说了“yo hi so”等话。在“以彼时为因、以彼时为作”这句里,各种具体事相的违犯本身就是制戒的因,也是制戒的作。因为当世尊为了制戒,最初在各处观察他们那些成为制戒之因的违犯而安住时,他是观察那些违犯、以那些违犯为目的而安住,所以违犯作为“因”就成立了,就像“靠食物而住,就是观察食物、为了食物而住”那样。而到了制戒的时候,世尊正是依据先前已经发生的那个违犯来制定学处,所以违犯成为完成制戒的手段,它作为“作”也成立了,就像“用剑砍”那样。再者,世尊观察违犯时,也连同与违犯相关的时间一起观察而安住,所以这里时间也有“因”的意义;而世尊制定学处时,不会越过那些违犯发生的时间,正是以那个时间作为手段来制戒,所以作为违犯所依的时间也有“作”的意义。因此,从这个角度说,时间也具备因和作两种意义,所以才说“以彼时为因、以彼时为作”。如果严格按直接含义来说,那就只有违犯本身是因、是作。因为它在违犯的那一刻是因,后来在制戒时又成为作。巴利
Idha panāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavatīti ‘‘annena vasati, vijjāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuattho ‘‘pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Kathaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yo hi so’’tiādi. Tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenāti ettha pana taṃtaṃvatthuvītikkamova sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetu ceva karaṇañca. Tathā hi yadā bhagavā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā paṭhamameva tesaṃ tesaṃ tattha tattha taṃtaṃsikkhāpadapaññattihetubhūtaṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhamāno viharati, tadā taṃ taṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhitvā tadatthaṃ vasatīti siddho vatthuvītikkamassa hetubhāvo ‘‘annena vasati, annaṃ apekkhitvā tadatthāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya. Sikkhāpadapaññattikāle pana teneva pubbasiddhena vītikkamena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sādhakatamattā karaṇabhāvopi vītikkamasseva siddho ‘‘asinā chindatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamaṃ pana apekkhamāno teneva saddhiṃ tannissayakālampi apekkhitvā viharatīti kālassapi idha hetubhāvo vutto, sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ca taṃ taṃ vītikkamakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti vītikkamanissayassa kālassapi karaṇabhāvo vutto, tasmā iminā pariyāyena kālassapi hetubhāvo karaṇabhāvo ca labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenā’’ti. Nippariyāyato pana vītikkamoyeva hetubhūto karaṇabhūto ca. So hi vītikkamakkhaṇe hetu hutvā pacchā sikkhāpadapaññāpane karaṇampi hotīti.
“制定诸学处”是指:先问清违犯的情形,把比丘僧团集合起来,审问那个犯事的人,呵责他之后,不越过事发的那一刻,就以那个时刻作为施设的依据来制定诸学处。“并且顾念制戒的因由”是指:像第三波罗夷等那样,顾念那些成为制戒因由的事在违犯时的情形,以那个时刻为因,世尊就住在各处——这就是它的意思。由于经文说“制定诸学处,并且顾念制戒的因由”,本来应该说“以那个时刻为作、为因”,这里却先说“为因”,是因为此处要表达的是因义。世尊住在毗兰若时,顾念长老心中生起请求制戒之念的那个时分,就以那个时刻为因而住——这在三部《甘提帕达》中都有说明。不过,这事何必靠推理去琢磨呢?应当知道,阿阇梨在这里并没有固定要按某种次第来说的意思,就这样理解即可。所以《长部注》里也说“以那个时刻为因、为作”等等,用的正是这个次第。那里先说“为因”,并不是为了表明在“以那个时刻住在毗兰若”这句里意在因义。也有人这样说:“制定诸学处时,以具因、具作的时刻而住;顾念制戒的因由时,以具因的时刻而住——应当这样建立文脉关联。”“为了阐明那个意思”,是指为了阐明因义或作义。“此处”是指这部律中。“这里有一首偈颂”,是说为了总摄前面所说的义理,在这里有一首偈颂。“在其他处”,则是指经和论藏中。巴利
Sikkhāpadānipaññāpayantoti vītikkamaṃ pucchitvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena karaṇabhūtena sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto. Sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamānoti tatiyapārājikādīsu viya sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetubhūtaṃ taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ vītikkamasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsīti attho. ‘‘Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno’’ti vacanato ‘‘tena samayena karaṇabhūtena hetubhūtenā’’ti evaṃ vattabbepi paṭhamaṃ ‘‘hetubhūtenā’’ti vacanaṃ idha hetuatthassa adhippetattā vuttaṃ. Bhagavā hi verañjāyaṃ viharanto therassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūtaṃ parivitakkasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena vihāsīti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kiṃ panettha yutticintāya, ācariyassa idha kamavacanicchā natthīti evametaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyampi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā) ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenā’’tiādinā ayameva anukkamo vutto. Na hi tattha paṭhamaṃ ‘‘hetubhūtenā’’ti vacanaṃ idha ‘‘tena samayena verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’ti ettha hetuatthassa adhippetabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena samayena vihāsi, sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno hetubhūtena samayena vihāsīti evamettha sambandho kātabbo’’tipi vadanti. Tadatthajotanatthanti hetuatthassa karaṇatthassa vā dīpanatthaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ vinaye. Hoti cetthāti ettha imasmiṃ padese yathāvuttatthasaṅgahavasena ayaṃ gāthā hoti. Aññatrāti suttābhidhammesu.
古师就是注释师。“只是说法上的差别”,意思是仅在言辞上有区别,由此说明在经和律里有格位变化的情况。“我们将在后面解释其义”,是说在后面出现“itipi so bhagavā”等地方时再解释。关于“Verañjā”这个词,有人这样解释:“因为不用暴力征税,所以人民没有受到压迫,没有过失,远离尘垢,所以叫verañjā”;“因为在《塞利商人本生》里,这里是提婆达多生起怨恨的地方,所以这里生起了怨恨,叫verañjā”;“因为对每一个进入的人,用舞乐集会、嚼食啖食和装饰品等种种用具让他们欢喜,所以以种种方式让人欢喜,叫verañjā”;“因为战胜了敌对者而建立,所以是战胜怨恨而生,叫verañjā”;“因为建在名叫verañjā的仙人修行处,所以叫verañjā”。为了说明这些都不是要点,只是那座城的名字,所以说“verañjā是某座城的别名”。“近处义用依格”,就像“在恒河里牛在走,在井里有嘎嘎族”等说法一样。“无差别”是指没有特别的限定,就像“以巴帝摩卡防护而住”“成就初禅而住”“以与慈俱行之心遍满一方而住”“由不作意一切相,成就无相心定而住”等,只是靠相邻词语的关联而成立,没有特别的限定。或者,“无差别”就是没有特别限定,只是就“住”这一共同性质来说的意思。巴利
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattivipariṇāmo katoti dasseti. Parato atthaṃ vaṇṇayissāmāti parato ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā āgataṭṭhāne vaṇṇayissāma. Verañjāyanti ettha ‘‘balikaraggahaṇena janassa pīḷābhāvato niddosattā vigato rajo assāti verañjā, serivāṇijajātake devadattassa veruppannapadese katattā veraṃ ettha jātanti verañjā, paviṭṭhapaviṭṭhe naṭasamajjādīhi khādanīyabhojanīyālaṅkārādīhi ca vividhehi upakaraṇehi rañjanato vividhehi rañjayatīti verañjā, paṭipakkhe abhibhavitvā katabhāvato veraṃ abhibhavitvā jātāti verañjā, verañjassa nāma isino assamaṭṭhāne katattā verañjā’’ti evamādinā keci vaṇṇayanti. Kiṃ iminā, nāmamattametaṃ tassa nagarassāti dassento āha ‘‘verañjāti aññatarassa nagarassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Samīpatthe bhummavacananti ‘‘gaṅgāyaṃ gāvo caranti, kūpe gaggakula’’ntiādīsu viya. Avisesenāti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Mettāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharati. Sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikārā animittaṃ cetosamādhiṃ samāpajjitvā viharatī’’tiādīsu viya saddantarasannidhānasiddhena visesaparāmasanena vinā. Atha vā avisesenāti na visesena, vihārabhāvasāmaññenāti attho.
“威仪……住”:这是指在威仪住、天住、梵住、圣住这四种住当中。这里,“行”就是活动、运转,也就是身业、身体的动作。因为它是这种活动得以进行的途径,所以叫“威仪路”,也就是站立、坐下等姿态。因为如果没有站立、坐下等姿态,任何身体的动作都没法进行——要么是具备站姿的人用身体做某件事,要么是具备行走等其他姿态的人在做。所谓“住”,就是居住,或者依它而住,所以威仪本身就是住,叫“威仪住”。从意义上说,它是由站立、坐下等姿态所引发的四相续色聚的相续。生于天界的就是“天”,这里的意思是,因为多在那里活动,所以生于梵众天等天界。或者,能带来天界威神力的就是“天”;或者因为具足神通、由愿力趋向而有大行境的,就是“天”。既是天又是住,所以叫“天住”;或者能带来天界状态的住就是天住,也就是广大禅那。无色等至也包含在这里面。不过《导论》里说“四无色等至是不动住”,那是像慈心禅那等被称为梵住一样,是就它们修习的特殊状态而说的。而在注释书里,因为同样能带来天界状态,所以它们也被称为“天住”。梵天们的住就是梵住;或者说,梵天们本身就是住,所以叫梵住。意思是:通过施与利益等方式而活动,成为像梵天那样最殊胜的住,也就是慈心禅那等四种无量心。圣者们最殊胜的住就是圣住;或者因为不与其他共通,所以圣者们的住就是圣住,也就是四种果等至。特别是,色界第四禅那、四种无量心,以及第四禅那的果等至,是世尊的天住、梵住、圣住。巴利
Iriyāpatha…pe… vihāresūti iriyāpathavihāro dibbavihāro brahmavihāro ariyavihāroti etesu catūsu vihāresu. Tattha iriyanaṃ pavattanaṃ iriyā, kāyappayogo kāyikakiriyā. Tassā pavattanupāyabhāvato iriyāya pathoti iriyāpatho, ṭhānanisajjādi. Na hi ṭhānanisajjādīhi avatthāhi vinā kañci kāyikakiriyaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkā. Ṭhānasamaṅgī vā hi kāyena kiñci kareyya gamanādīsu aññatarasamaṅgī vāti. Viharaṇaṃ, viharati etenāti vā vihāro, iriyāpathova vihāro iriyāpathavihāro, so ca atthato ṭhānanisajjādiākārappavatto catusantatirūpappabandhova. Divi bhavo dibbo, tattha bahulappavattiyā brahmapārisajjādidevalokabhavoti attho. Tattha yo dibbānubhāvo tadatthāya saṃvattatīti vā dibbo, abhiññābhinīhāravasena mahāgatikattā vā dibbo, dibbo ca so vihāro cāti dibbavihāro, dibbabhāvāvaho vā vihāro dibbavihāro, mahaggatajjhānāni. Āruppasamāpattiyopi hi ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Nettiyaṃ pana ‘‘catasso āruppasamāpattiyo āneñjavihāro’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ mettājhānādīnaṃ brahmavihāratā viya tāsaṃ bhāvanāvisesabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana dibbabhāvāvahasāmaññato tāpi ‘‘dibbavihārā’’tveva vuttā. Brahmānaṃ vihārā brahmavihārā, brahmāno vā vihārā brahmavihārā, hitūpasaṃharādivasena pavattiyā brahmabhūtā seṭṭhabhūtā vihārāti attho, mettājhānādikā catasso appamaññāyo. Ariyā uttamā vihārāti ariyavihārā, anaññasādhāraṇattā ariyānaṃ vā vihārā ariyavihārā, catasso phalasamāpattiyo. Visesato pana rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ catasso appamaññāyo catutthajjhānikaphalasamāpatti ca bhagavato dibbabrahmaariyavihārā.
阐明具足某一种住:就是指阐明在前面所说的各种住当中,具足某一种住的状态。因为当世间贪、嗔、痴增盛的时候,世尊为了用自身的行持来调伏它们,就成就天住、梵住、圣住而安住。具体来说:当众生在欲乐上行为不正时,世尊就以天住而住,为了让他们生起无贪的善根,心想:“也许他们看到这种行持,心生欢喜,就能对欲乐离染。”当众生为了权势而行为不正时,世尊就以梵住而住,为了让他们生起无嗔的善根,心想:“也许他们看到这种行持,心生欢喜,就能以无嗔止息嗔恨。”当出家众因为法务问题而争论时,世尊就以圣住而住,为了让他们生起无痴的善根,心想:“也许他们看到这种行持,心生欢喜,就能以无痴止息愚痴。”这样做了之后,世尊通过这些天住、梵住、圣住,为众生带来、施与、引导、产生、令生起种种利益和安乐,所以说为“住”。巴利
Aññataravihārasamaṅgīparidīpananti yathāvuttavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgībhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Bhagavā hi lobhadosamohussannakāle loke tassa sakāya paṭipattiyā vinayanatthaṃ dibbabrahmaaayavihāre upasampajja viharati. Tathā hi yadā sattā kāmesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā kira bhagavā dibbena vihārena viharati tesaṃ alobhakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha ruciṃ uppādentā kāmesu virajjeyyu’’nti. Yadā pana issariyatthaṃ sattesu vippaṭipajjanti, tadā pana brahmavihārena viharati tesaṃ adosakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā ettha ruciṃ uppādetvā adosena dosaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Yadā pana pabbajitā dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vivadanti, tadā ariyavihārena viharati tesaṃ amohakusalamūluppādanatthaṃ ‘‘appeva nāma imaṃ paṭipattiṃ disvā tattha ruciṃ uppādetvā amohena mohaṃ vūpasameyyu’’nti. Evañca katvā imehi dibbabrahmaariyavihārehi sattānaṃ vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaharati upaneti janeti uppādetīti ‘‘viharatī’’ti vuccati.
不过,他从来不会没有威仪姿态地安住,因为离开威仪姿态就无法维持身体。也正因为如此,威仪姿态的安住也是天住等所共通的,所以说“但在此处”等话。“说明与威仪姿态相结合”这句话,是因为没有对其他住法相结合的特别说明,而与威仪姿态相结合这一说明本身已经成立,所以才这样说。而在“住于这一方面”这句话里,“vi-”这个前缀表示分离的意思,“harati”是引导、推动的意思,所以说“分离后引导”。那么,是谁和什么分离?又是怎样推动谁的?针对这种内在的追问,说了“因为他……”等话。“他”指世尊。虽然世尊即使只用一种威仪姿态也能让身体维持较长时间,但为了说明所执受身体的本质就是如此,所以说了“一种威仪姿态的障碍”等话。“不坠落”就是不倒下。然而,因为世尊无论住在哪里,都为应受调伏的人说法,又以各种等至度过时光,从而为众生和自己带来种种利益与安乐,所以“带来种种”就是“住”的意思,这里应当这样理解。巴利
Iriyāpathavihārena pana na kadāci na viharati taṃ vinā attabhāvapariharaṇābhāvato, tatoyeva ca dibbavihārādīnampi sādhāraṇo iriyāpathavihāroti āha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpananti itaravihārasamāyogaparidīpanassa visesavacanassa abhāvato iriyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanassa ca atthasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Asmiṃ pana pakkhe viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchedatthajotano, haratīti neti pavattetīti attho, vicchinditvā haratīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kassa kena vicchindanaṃ, kathaṃ kassa pavattananti antolīnacodanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Soti bhagavā. Yadipi bhagavā ekenapi iriyāpathena cirataraṃ kālaṃ attabhāvaṃ pavattetuṃ sakkoti, tathāpi upādinnakasarīrassa nāma ayaṃ sabhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Aparipatantanti apatantaṃ. Yasmā pana bhagavā yattha katthaci vasanto vineyyānaṃ dhammaṃ desento nānāsamāpattīhi ca kālaṃ vītināmento vasatīti sattānaṃ attano ca vividhaṃ hitasukhaṃ harati upaneti, tasmā vividhaṃ haratīti viharatīti evampettha attho veditabbo.
在那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下的地方,注释者们这样解说:所谓“那勒噜”,是住在那棵树上的亚卡的名称,所以由他所住的蒲钦曼达树,就叫做“那勒噜的蒲钦曼达”,即“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。另一种说法是,因为生长在芦苇中、从芦苇中生出,所以叫“那勒噜”。这里“那勒”一词指的是空洞,因此因为生长在树的空洞里,它既是那勒噜又是蒲钦曼达,合起来就叫“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。又或者因为生长在那勒林中、从那勒林中生出,所以叫“那勒噜”。据说那棵蒲钦曼达树就是生长在那勒林里的。有巨大空洞的蒲钦曼达树,就是那勒噜蒲钦曼达。这里“噜”是“大”的同义词,“那勒”是“空洞”的同义词,所以具有大空洞的蒲钦曼达树就叫做“那勒噜蒲钦曼达”。不过阿阇梨说:在这里何必多说?为了点明同一个意思,他只说了“那勒噜是一个亚卡的名字”等话。巴利
Naḷerupucimandamūleti ettha vaṇṇayanti – naḷerūti tasmiṃ rukkhe adhivatthayakkhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tena adhivattho pucimando ‘‘naḷerussa pucimando naḷerupucimando’’ti vuccati. Atha vā naḷe ruhattā jātattā naḷeru. Susiramettha naḷasaddena vuccati, tasmā rukkhasusire jātattā naḷeru ca so pucimando cāti naḷerupucimandoti vuccati. Naḷavane ruhattā jātattā vā naḷeru. Naḷavane kira so pucimandarukkho jāto. Urunaḷo pucimando naḷerupucimando. Urusaddo cettha mahantapariyāyo, naḷasaddo susirapariyāyo, tasmā mahantena susirena samannāgato pucimando naḷerupucimandoti vuccatīti. Ācariyo pana kimettha bahubhāsitenāti ekamevatthaṃ dassento ‘‘naḷeru nāma yakkho’’tiādimāha.
这里“根”这个词是取“近旁”的意思,不是用在“根之根”等说法里。为了说明这一点,才说“根就是近旁”等等。严格来说,“根”这个词是用来指那些使具有枝干等的聚合体得以稳固建立的具体部分;但因为惯用法,它也以转喻的方式用在类似的事物和依赖它的地方上。所以在“应拔出根”这句话里,严格来说指的就是根本身。于是用一个“根”字来限定,说“在根之根中可见”,就像说“苦苦”“色色”一样。在“不共因”中,也就是在不共通的因中。因为贪只是与贪俱生的不善心生起的因,所以是不共的;因此,对于与贪俱生的心的生起来说,它作为特有的资助,从使它们稳固建立的意义上,是以“根”的含义起资助作用的缘法中的特殊一类,这就是意思。或者,就像无贪等是善和无记共通的,而贪等却不是这样,因为它们只是不善共通的,所以是不共因。再者,“等”字里,通过“等”也应当理解到包含了无贪等善根和无记根。因为在那些根里,无贪等善根因为不与不善、无记共通,所以是不共因;同样,无贪等无记根也因为不与其余两者共通,所以是不共因。在无风处,就是在没有风的地方,或者在没有风的时候。帕坦提,就是落下,或者这就是读法。拉玛尼约,就是可爱的。帕萨迪卡,就是能带来清净信的,意思是能生起清净信。就像在行使主权一样,这是连接的意思。巴利
Mūla-saddo ettha samīpavacano adhippeto, na mūlamūlādīsu vattamānoti dassento āha ‘‘mūlanti samīpa’’ntiādi. Nippariyāyena sākhādimato saṅghātassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhane avayavavisese pavattamāno mūlasaddo yasmā taṃsadisesu tannissaye padese ca ruḷhīvasena pariyāyato pavattati, tasmā ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyyā’’ti ettha nippariyāyato mūlaṃ adhippetanti ekena mūlasaddena visesetvā āha ‘‘mūlamūle dissatī’’ti yathā ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, rūparūpa’’nti ca. Asādhāraṇahetumhīti asādhāraṇakāraṇe. Lobho hi lobhasahagataakusalacittuppādasseva hetuttā asādhāraṇo, tasmā lobhasahagatacittuppādānameva āveṇike nesaṃ suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanato mūlaṭṭhena upakārake paccayadhammaviseseti attho. Atha vā yathā alobhādayo kusalābyākatasādhāraṇā, lobhādayo pana tathā na honti akusalasseva sādhāraṇattāti asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Atha vā ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena alobhādīnampi kusalābyākatamūlānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tesupi hi alobhādikusalamūlaṃ akusalābyākatehi asādhāraṇattā asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ, tathā alobhādiabyākatamūlampi itaradvayehi asādhāraṇattāti. Nivāteti vātarahite padese, vātassa abhāve vā. Patantīti nipatanti, ayameva vā pāṭho. Ramaṇīyoti manuñño. Pāsādikoti pasādāvaho, pasādajanakoti attho. Ādhipaccaṃ kurumāno viyāti sambandho.
这里说的“在此”,就是指前面所说的“那时,世尊住在毗兰若的那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下”这句话中的“在此”。可能会有——意思是,也许有人会这样想,或者会按照接下来要说的方式提出责难。如果这位责难者对于“世尊”等语的意图是这样的:就像“住在华氏城的宫殿里”等说法那样,如果处所与处所之间是包含关系,那么“住在毗兰若的那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下”这样说出两个处所才合理;但这两个地方是不同的地点,所以说两个处所并不合理。那么,如果说“住在那里”就是指住在那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下,那就不该这样说——因为毗兰若和那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下是不同的地方,而且又说了“那时”,所以不该这样说,这就是他的意思。现在,责难者用“因为不可能”等话把自己的这个意思展开说明。正因为毗兰若和那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下在地区上不同,所以不可能在同一时间住在两个地方;而由于说的是“在两个地方,同一时间”,应当知道,在不同时间居住并没有被排除。巴利
Tatthāti ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti yaṃ vuttaṃ, tattha. Siyāti kassaci evaṃ parivitakko siyā, vakkhamānākārena kadāci codeyya vāti attho. Yadi tāva bhagavātiādīsu codakassāyamadhippāyo – ‘‘pāṭaliputte pāsāde vasatī’’tiādīsu viya adhikaraṇādhikaraṇaṃ yadi bhaveyya, tadā ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti adhikaraṇadvayaniddeso yutto siyā, imesaṃ pana bhinnadesattā na yutto ubhayaniddesoti. Atha tattha viharatīti yadi naḷerupucimandamūle viharati. Na vattabbanti nānāṭhānabhūtattā verañjānaḷerupucimandamūlānaṃ ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti ca vuttattāti adhippāyo. Idāni codako tameva attano adhippāyaṃ ‘‘na hi sakkā’’tiādinā vivarati. Verañjānaḷerupucimandamūlānaṃ bhūmibhāgavasena bhinnattāyeva hi na sakkā ubhayattha teneva samayena viharituṃ, ‘‘ubhayattha teneva samayenā’’ti ca vuttattā nānāsamaye vihāro avāritoti veditabbo.
对方为了指出“这一切都是因为你没有理解正确的含义才说的”,就说了“然而,不应这样看待”等话。其中,“此”指的是“住在毗兰若的那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下”这句话。“这样”,是指您以“如果世尊……”等话所提出的责难,从含义上说,确实不应这样看待,意思并不是要显示在两个地方有非前非后的居住。现在,为了阐明自己所主张的正确含义,并说明这个含义早已说过而对方没有通达,他就说了“我们不是已经说过,处格可用于近处之义吗?”等话。“牛群”,就是牛群。即便如此,也应当说“住在那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下”,而不应说“在毗兰若”。因此,他把“处格用于近处之义,又以两种方式说明缘起,有什么必要?”这一责难记在心里,说道“为了指示行境村落”等。“他的”,指世尊的。巴利
Itaro sabbametaṃ aviparītamatthaṃ ajānantena tayā vuttanti dassento ‘‘na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha etanti ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharati naḷerupucimandamūle’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Evanti ‘‘yadi tāva bhagavā’’tiādinā yaṃ taṃ bhavatā coditaṃ, taṃ atthato evaṃ na kho pana daṭṭhabbaṃ, na ubhayattha apubbaṃ acarimaṃ vihāradassanatthanti attho. Idāni attanā yathādhippetaṃ aviparītamatthaṃ tassa ca paṭikacceva vuttabhāvaṃ tena ca appaṭividdhataṃ pakāsento ‘‘nanu avocumha samīpatthe bhummavacana’’ntiādimāha. Goyūthānīti gomaṇḍalāni. Evampi naḷerupucimandamūle viharaticceva vattabbaṃ, na verañjāyanti, tasmā samīpādhikaraṇatthavasena ubhayathā nidānakittane kiṃ payojananti codanaṃ manasi nidhāyāha ‘‘gocaragāmanidassanattha’’ntiādi. Assāti bhagavato.
这里也必须说明行境村落。就像说明那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下有摄受出家者等多种目的,同样,说明行境村落也有摄受在家者等多种目的。为了显示这一点,他说了“通过说明毗兰若城”等话。其中,摄受在家者,就是让在家人在那里获得资具,给他们提供亲近、侍奉等机会,通过说法让他们安住在皈依和戒中,并随他们的根机引导他们证得更高的殊胜境界,这样来摄受在家人。摄受出家者,就是在这里为他们确定适合学习、提问和修习业处的住所,这样来摄受出家人。巴利
Avassañcettha gocaragāmakittanaṃ kattabbaṃ. Yathā hi naḷerupucimandamūlakittanaṃ pabbajitānuggahakaraṇādianekappayojanaṃ, evaṃ gocaragāmakittanampi gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇādivividhappayojananti dassento ‘‘verañjākittanenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gahaṭṭhānuggahakaraṇanti tesaṃ tattha paccayaggahaṇena upasaṅkamanapayirupāsanādīnaṃ okāsadānena dhammadesanāya saraṇesu sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpanena yathūpanissayaṃ uparivisesādhigamāvahanena ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ. Pabbajitānuggahakaraṇanti uggahaparipucchānaṃ kammaṭṭhānānuyogassa ca anurūpavasanaṭṭhānapariggahenettha pabbajitānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ.
正因为只要取得资具,就已经成就了对资具的受用,所以他说:“同样,由前者……而远离。”其中,“前者”是指关于毗兰若城的那句话。“我慢被安立在这里”中的“我”,就是自体、自身。它的疲劳,也就是疲惫的状态,叫做自我疲劳;自我折磨、自我痛苦,就是这里所说的意思。对它的从事,也就是去做,叫做自我疲劳的修习;通过禁食、荆棘床、卧席等给自己制造痛苦,就是这里所说的意思。远离它,就是远离自我疲劳的修习。因为住在村里的人,即使不愿意,也会遇到不合意的色等所缘;而住在村外合适地方的人,则没有这种情况,所以他说“由后者,因为舍弃了事欲”等。其中,“后者”是指关于那勒鲁蒲七曼达树下的那句话。色等五种欲乐因为是烦恼欲的所依,所以叫事欲;舍弃它,就是舍弃事欲。显示远离欲乐享受之修习的方法:对于与事欲相关的烦恼欲乐的结合、从事、享受,显示远离它的方法。巴利
Paccayaggahaṇeneva paccayaparibhogasiddhito āha ‘‘tathā purimena…pe… vivajjananti. Tattha purimenāti verañjāvacanena. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Tassa kilamatho kilantabhāvo attakilamatho, attapīḷā attadukkhanti vuttaṃ hoti, tassa anuyogo karaṇaṃ attakilamathānuyogo, upavāsakaṇṭakāpassayaseyyādinā attano dukkhuppādananti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa vivajjanaṃ attakilamathānuyogavivajjanaṃ. Antogāme vasantānaṃ anicchantānampi visabhāgarūpādiārammaṇadassanādisambhavato bahigāme patirūpaṭṭhāne vasantānaṃ tadabhāvato āha ‘‘pacchimena vatthukāmappahānato’’tiādi. Tattha pacchimenāti naḷerupucimandamūlavacanena. Kilesakāmassa vatthubhūtattā rūpādayo pañca kāmaguṇā vatthukāmo, tassa pahānaṃ vatthukāmappahānaṃ. Kāmasukhallikānuyogavivajjanupāyadassananti vatthukāmesu kilesakāmasaṃyuttassa sukhassa yogo anuyogo anubhavo, tassa parivajjane upāyadassanaṃ.
他自己主动前往乞食的村落,因为见到了那些适合听他说法、有能力接受法的人,就知道说法的时机到了,由此可以看出他对说法是积极投入的。对说法有热忱,就是说法精勤。住在村外僻静之处的人,因为没有杂居的环境,所以能看出他内心倾向于对身体远离等状态的胜解和向往,因此说“后一句是远离胜解”。巴利
Sayameva gocaragāmaṃ upasaṅkamitvā attano dhammassavanānurūpabhabbapuggalānaṃ dassanato dhammadesanāya kālo sampatto nāma hotīti dhammadesanāya abhiyogo viññāyatīti āha ‘‘purimena ca dhammadesanābhiyoga’’nti. Dhammadesanāya saussāhabhāvo dhammadesanābhiyogo. Bahigāme vivittokāse vasantassa ākiṇṇavihārābhāvato kāyavivekādīsu adhimutti tappoṇatā viññāyatīti āha ‘‘pacchimena vivekādhimutti’’nti.
悲与慧本来就是说法精勤和远离胜解的根本因,它们是前往说法的原因,也是从说法处离开的原因,所以论师说“前句以悲前往”等。因为悲与慧确实是紧接着的那一对法的因。由此应当理解:以悲前往,不是为了利养等目的;以慧离开,不是因为怨恨等理由——这显示了前往和离开都是无杂染的。“胜解”是指倾向于那方面。“无杂染”是指不沾染、不黏着。巴利
Dhammadesanābhiyogavivekādhimuttīnaṃ hetubhūtā eva karuṇāpaññā dhammadesanāya upagamanassa tato apagamanassa kāraṇabhūtā hontīti āha ‘‘purimena karuṇāya upagamana’’ntiādi. Karuṇāpaññāyeva hi anantaradukassa hetū honti. Etena ca karuṇāya upagamanaṃ na lābhādinimittaṃ , paññāya apagamanaṃ na virodhādinimittanti upagamanāpagamanānaṃ nirupakkilesataṃ vibhāvibhanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Adhimuttatanti tanninnabhāvaṃ. Nirupalepananti anupalepanaṃ anallīyanaṃ.
在“依法而得的快乐之不舍离的因由”这一表述中,所谓依法而得的快乐,就是没有过失的快乐。因为它是依靠如法的利得而生起的,所以称为“依法而得的快乐”。与“增上人法的精勤之因由”相关联,意思是安适而住。对人们多所饶益,是指通过接受资具、说法等方式而多所饶益。对天人们多所饶益,是因为远离人群。因为天人们认为人迹罕至的地方是应当前往的。在世间增长,是指通过受用物质而增长的状态。巴利
Dhammikasukhāpariccāganimittanti ettha dhammikasukhaṃ nāma anavajjasukhaṃ. Tañhi dhammikaṃ lābhaṃ paṭicca uppannattā ‘‘dhammikasukha’’nti vuccati. Uttarimanussadhammābhiyoganimittaṃ phāsuvihāranti sambandho. Manussānaṃ upakārabahulatanti paccayapaṭiggahaṇadhammadesanādivasena upakārabahulataṃ. Devatānaṃ upakārabahulataṃ janavivittatāya. Pacurajanavivittañhi ṭhānaṃ devā upasaṅkamitabbaṃ maññanti. Loke saṃvaḍḍhabhāvanti āmisopabhogena saṃvaḍḍhitabhāvaṃ.
这里“一人”当中,“一”是排除第二等的含义,用来限定数量。“人”是随顺世俗的说法,不是胜义的说法。因为世尊的开示有两种:随俗说和胜义说。这个道理前面已经详细讲过,所以这里不再说。既是“一”又是“人”,所以叫“一人”。凭什么含义叫“一人”呢?因为无与伦比、功德超胜、与无等者相等这三个含义。他从对十波罗蜜依次作意开始,以菩提资粮的功德和佛陀的功德,与其余大众无与伦比,所以从无与伦比这一含义来说,是“一人”。他那些功德,也比其他有情的功德超胜,所以从功德超胜这一含义来说,也是“一人”。过去的正自觉者与一切有情都不相等,而唯独他与那些佛在色身功德和名身功德上相等,所以从与无等者相等这一含义来说,也是“一人”。“世间”指有情世间。巴利
Ekapuggaloti ettha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170) ekoti dutiyādipaṭikkhepattho gaṇanaparicchedo. Puggaloti sammutikathā, na paramatthakathā. Buddhassa hi bhagavato duvidhā desanā sammutidesanā paramatthadesanā cāti. Ayamattho pana heṭṭhā vitthāritovāti idha na vuccati. Eko ca so puggalo cāti ekapuggalo. Kenaṭṭhena ekapuggalo? Asadisaṭṭhena guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena asamasamaṭṭhena. So hi dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ paṭipāṭiyā āvajjanaṃ ādiṃ katvā bodhisambhāraguṇehi ceva buddhaguṇehi ca sesamahājanena asadisoti asadisaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Ye cassa te guṇā, tepi aññasattānaṃ guṇehi visiṭṭhāti guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Purimakā sammāsambuddhā sabbasattehi asamā, tehi saddhiṃ ayameva eko rūpakāyaguṇehi ceva nāmakāyaguṇehi ca samoti asamasamaṭṭhenapi ekapuggalo. Loketi sattaloke.
“正在生起者生起”这一说法,也只是未完成的表述。应知这里的含义是:正在生起者是为了大众的利益而生起,不是因为其他原因。而且,这里的这种特征,不能用别的词义特征来否定。再者,应知这里有“正在生起”“生起”“已生起”的区别。从燃灯佛足下获得授记后,他寻求成佛之法,见到十波罗蜜,下定决心“这些法我必须圆满”,即使正在圆满布施波罗蜜,也叫“正在生起”。圆满持戒波罗蜜……乃至舍波罗蜜,圆满这十波罗蜜,圆满十种近波罗蜜,也叫“正在生起”。圆满十种最上波罗蜜,也叫“正在生起”。作五大舍弃时,也叫“正在生起”。圆满亲族利益行、世间利益行、佛利益行时,也叫“正在生起”。历经四阿僧祇劫又十万劫,把成佛之法修到究竟时,也叫“正在生起”。舍弃须大拏身,在兜率天结生,住五十七俱胝又六十万百千年时,也叫“正在生起”。被诸天劝请,观察五大观察,在摩耶夫人胎中结生时,在母胎中住满十个月时,也叫“正在生起”。在家中度二十九年时,也叫“正在生起”。见欲乐的过患和出离的功德,在罗睺罗贤出生那天,与阐那为伴,骑上犍陟良马出离时,也叫“正在生起”。越过三个王国,在阿诺玛河畔出家时,也叫“正在生起”。六年行大精进时,也叫“正在生起”。智成熟时,取粗食时,也叫“正在生起”。傍晚时分,在毗舍佉月圆日,登上大菩提座,摧破魔军,初夜忆念宿住,中夜净化天眼,后夜无间,顺逆思惟十二支缘起,证入入流道时,也叫“正在生起”。在入流果刹那、斯陀含果刹那、阿那含果刹那,也叫“正在生起”。然而,在阿拉汉道刹那,叫“生起”。在阿拉汉果刹那,叫“已生起”。因为诸佛不像声闻那样次第生起神变智等,而是与阿拉汉道一起,一切智等全部功德聚就已经到来,所以因为一切所作已办,在阿拉汉果刹那叫“已生起”。在这部经中,正是就阿拉汉果刹那而说“生起”。这里的意思就是“已生起”。巴利
Uppajjamāno uppajjatīti idaṃ pana ubhayampi vippakatavacanameva. Uppajjanto bahujanahitatthāya uppajjati, na aññena kāraṇenāti evaṃ panettha attho veditabbo. Evarūpañcettha lakkhaṇaṃ na sakkā etaṃ aññena saddalakkhaṇena paṭibāhituṃ. Apica uppajjamāno nāma, uppajjati nāma, uppanno nāmāti ayamettha bhedo veditabbo. Esa hi dīpaṅkarapādamūlato laddhabyākaraṇo buddhakārakadhamme pariyesanto dasa pāramiyo disvā ‘‘ime dhammā mayā pūretabbā’’ti katasanniṭṭhāno dānapāramiṃ pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sīlapāramiṃ…pe… upekkhāpāraminti imā dasa pāramiyo pūrentopi, dasa upapāramiyo pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Dasa paramatthapāramiyo pūrentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Ñātatthacariyaṃ lokatthacariyaṃ buddhatthacariyaṃ pūrayamānopi uppajjamāno nāma. Kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni buddhakārake dhamme matthakaṃ pāpentopi uppajjamāno nāma. Vessantarattabhāvaṃ pahāya tusitapure paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā saṭṭhivassasatasahassādhikā sattapaṇṇāsa vassakoṭiyo tiṭṭhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Devatāhi yācito pañca mahāvilokanāni viloketvā māyādeviyā kucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantopi, anūnādhike dasa māse gabbhavāsaṃ vasantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Ekūnatiṃsa vassāni agāramajjhe tiṭṭhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Kāmesu ādīnavaṃ nekkhamme ca ānisaṃsaṃ disvā rāhulabhaddassa jātadivase channasahāyo kaṇḍakaṃ assavaramāruyha nikkhamantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Tīṇi rajjāni atikkamanto anomanaditīre pabbajantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Chabbassāni mahāpadhānaṃ karontopi uppajjamāno nāma. Paripākagate ñāṇe oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sāyanhasamaye visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ mahābodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha mārabalaṃ vidhametvā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ parisodhetvā pacchimayāmasamanantare dvādasaṅgaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomato sammasitvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhantopi uppajjamāno nāma. Sotāpattiphalakkhaṇepi sakadāgāmiphalakkhaṇepi anāgāmiphalakkhaṇepi uppajjamāno nāma. Arahattamaggakkhaṇe pana uppajjati nāma. Arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma. Buddhānañhi sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīni uppajjanti, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi sabbaññutaññāṇādi guṇarāsi āgatova nāma hoti, tasmā nibbattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma hoti. Imasmimpi sutte arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho.
“为了大众的利益”是指为了大众的利益而生起。“为了大众的安乐”是指为了大众的安乐而生起。“出于对世间的悲悯”是指因为对有情世间的悲悯而生起。是哪个有情世间呢?就是那些听了如来说法、饮下不死甘露、证悟了法的人。世尊在菩提道场度过七七四十九天后,从菩提道场来到仙人堕处,在《转法轮经》中开示“比丘们,出家者不应亲近这两种极端”时,尊者阿若憍陈如长老和一亿八千万梵天一起饮下了不死甘露,世尊就是为了这个有情世间的悲悯而生起。第五天,《无我相经》结束时,五比丘长老证得阿罗汉果,世尊也是为了这个有情世间的悲悯而生起。之后,以耶舍长者子为首的五十名男子证得阿罗汉果;接着在棉布林,三十位贤众青年证得三果和四果,世尊也是为了这个有情世间的悲悯而生起。在象头山,《燃烧法门》结束时,一千名结发外道证得阿罗汉果;之后在杖林,以频婆娑罗王为首的十一那由他婆罗门居士听了大师说法后,证得入流果,一那由他皈依三宝。在《墙外随喜偈》结束时,八万四千众生饮下了不死甘露。在须摩那花鬘匠集会时,八万四千众生;在财护集会时,一万众生;在《佉陀罗炭火本生》集会时,八万四千众生;在豺狼邪命外道集会时,八万四千众生;在阿难陀长者集会时,八万四千众生饮下了不死甘露。在石寺讲说《彼岸道经》那天,十四俱胝众生饮下了不死甘露。双神变日,二十俱胝众生;在三十三天坐在黄毛毯石上,以母亲为身证而开示七论阿毗达摩时,八十俱胝众生;从天降下时,三十俱胝众生;在《帝释问经》中,八万天神饮下了不死甘露。在《大集会经》《吉祥经》《小罗睺罗教诫经》《平等心行道经》这四个地方,证得通达的众生数量无法计算,世尊也是为了这个有情世间的悲悯而生起。直到今天,乃至未来,凡是依靠这个教法而安住于天界和解脱道的人,也应由此理解这个含义。巴利
Bahujanahitāyāti mahājanassa hitatthāya uppajjati. Bahujanasukhāyāti mahājanassa sukhatthāya uppajjati. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokassa anukampaṃ paṭicca uppajjati. Katarasattalokassāti? Yo tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā amatapānaṃ pivi, dhammaṃ paṭivijjhi, tassa. Bhagavatā hi mahābodhimaṇḍe sattasattāhaṃ vītināmetvā bodhimaṇḍā isipatanaṃ āgamma ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, antā pabbajitena na sevitabbā’’ti dhammacakkappavattanasuttante (saṃ. ni. 3.5; mahāva. 13) desite āyasmatā aññāsikoṇḍaññattherena saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasakoṭisaṅkhā brahmāno amatapānaṃ piviṃsu, etassa sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Pañcamadivase anattalakkhaṇasuttantapariyosāne pañcavaggiyattherā arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsu, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Tato yasadārakappamukhe pañcapaṇṇāsa purise arahatte patiṭṭhāpesi, tato kappāsikavanasaṇḍe tiṃsa bhaddavaggiye tayo magge ca phalāni ca sampāpesi, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppanno. Gayāsīse ādittapariyāyapariyosāne (saṃ. ni. 4.28; mahāva. 54) jaṭilasahassaṃ arahatte patiṭṭhāpesi, tato laṭṭhivane bimbisārappamukhā ekādasa nahutā brāhmaṇagahapatikā satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu, ekaṃ nahutaṃ saraṇesu patiṭṭhitaṃ. Tirokuṭṭaanumodanāvasāne (khu. pā. 7. 1 ādayo) caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassehi amatapānaṃ pītaṃ. Sumanamālākārasamāgame caturāsītiyā, dhanapālasamāgame dasahi pāṇasahassehi, khadiraṅgārajātakasamāgame caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassehi, jambukaājīvakasamāgame caturāsītiyāva, ānandaseṭṭhisamāgame caturāsītiyāva pāṇasahassehi amatapānaṃ pītaṃ. Pāsāṇakacetiye pārāyanasuttakathādivase (su. ni. 982 ādayo) cuddasa koṭiyo amatapānaṃ piviṃsu. Yamakapāṭihāriyadivase vīsati pāṇakoṭiyo, tāvatiṃsabhavane paṇḍukambalasilāyaṃ nisīditvā mātaraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā sattappakaraṇaṃ abhidhammaṃ desentassa asīti pāṇakoṭiyo, devorohaṇe tiṃsa pāṇakoṭiyo, sakkapañhasuttante (dī. ni. 2.344 ādayo) asīti devasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsu. Mahāsamayasuttante (dī. ni. 2.331 ādayo) maṅgalasutte (khu. pā. 5.1 ādayo; su. ni. maṅgalasutta) cūḷarāhulovāde (ma. ni. 3.416 ādayo) samacittapaṭipadāyāti (a. ni. 2.33) imesu catūsu ṭhānesu abhisamayappattasattānaṃ paricchedo natthi, etassapi sattalokassa anukampāya uppannoti. Yāvajjadivasā ito parampi anāgate imaṃ sāsanaṃ nissāya saggamokkhamagge patiṭṭhahantānaṃ vasenapi ayamattho veditabbo.
“天与人”并不只是指天和人,也是为了其余那些龙、金翅鸟等的利益、福祉和安乐而生起的。不过,这是为了指出那些有因结生、能够证悟道果的人而这样说的。因此应当知道,世尊也正是为了这些众生的利益、福祉和安乐而生起的。巴利
Devamanussānanti na kevalaṃ devamanussānaṃyeva, avasesānaṃ nāgasupaṇṇādīnampi atthāya hitāya sukhāyeva uppanno. Sahetukapaṭisandhike pana maggaphalasacchikiriyāya bhabbe puggale dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā etesampi atthatthāya hitatthāya sukhatthāyeva uppannoti veditabbo.
“哪一类人?”这是想解说而提出的问题。现在,为了阐明所问的“一类人”,而说“如来、阿拉汉、正自觉者”。“Tadatthaparinipphādananti”是指成就世间利益,也就是完成佛陀事业的意思。第一次在蓝毗尼园,第二次在菩提树下:也就是在蓝毗尼园以色身出生,在菩提树下以法身出生。以“evamādinā”中的“ādi”一词,通过提及毗兰若而显示对色身的摄受,通过提及那勒噜蒲钦曼达树下而显示对法身的摄受。同样,前者显示依他而作的行为,后者显示自主而作的行为;或者,前者是悲悯之业,后者是智慧之业;再者,前者显示具足最上悲悯,后者显示具足最上舍心。如是等义都含摄其中。巴利
Katamo ekapuggaloti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Idāni tāya pucchāya puṭṭhaṃ ekapuggalaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti āha. Tadatthaparinipphādananti lokatthanipphādanaṃ, buddhakiccasampādananti attho. Paṭhamaṃ lumbinīvane dutiyaṃ bodhimaṇḍeti lumbinīvane rūpakāyena jāto, bodhimaṇḍe dhammakāyena. Evamādināti ādi-saddena verañjākittanato rūpakāyassa anuggaṇhanaṃ dasseti, naḷerupucimandamūlakittanato dhammakāyassa. Tathā purimena parādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ, dutiyena attādhīnakiriyākaraṇaṃ. Purimena vā karuṇākiccaṃ, itarena paññākiccaṃ , purimena cassa paramāya anukampāya samannāgamaṃ, pacchimena paramāya upekkhāya samannāgamanti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“最后者”是指功德上排在最后的,这是针对阿难长老说的。“以计数来说”就是从数量上计算。为了阐明“以见和戒的共同性而结合在一起,所以是僧伽”这个意思,注释者说“以被称为见戒共同性的结合,即沙门众”。在这里,关于见,经中说“凡是这种见是圣的、能导出的、能使实行它的人正确地灭尽苦,以这样的见,与见有共同性而住”;关于戒,经中说“凡是这些戒不残缺、不破裂、不斑驳、不杂染、自由、为智者所赞叹、不被执取、能导向定,以这样的戒,与戒有共同性而住”。以这样所说的见和戒的共同性而结合、聚合、一致,就是被称为见戒共同性的结合,即沙门众。也就是说,以见和戒的共同性而结合在一起。确实,正如“比丘们,这是不可能的,没有这种道理:具足见的人会故意夺去有情的生命,这种事不存在”等话所说,因为见和戒有确定不变的本性,所以即使入流者也彼此以见和戒的共同性而结合,更何况一来者等。因为圣者们无论站在多远的地方,都以自身功德的聚合而结合在一起。根据“以这样的见,与见有共同性而住;以这样的戒,与戒有共同性而住”的说法,凡夫也可以有以见和戒的共同性而结合的情况,但这里指的只是圣僧伽,因为说过“在那里谁是最后的,他就是入流者”。以“Etena”一词,即指“以约五百比丘”这句话。“Assā”指约五百比丘的。“Nirabbuda”等词的含义将在后面显现。巴利
Pacchimakoti guṇena pacchimako. Ānandattheraṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Saṅkhyāyapīti gaṇanatopi. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghātena samaṇagaṇenā’’ti. Ettha pana ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356, ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā, ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324; 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttānañca sīlānaṃ sāmaññasaṅkhātena saṅghato saṅghaṭito sametoti diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅkhātasaṅghāto, samaṇagaṇo. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti ādivacanato diṭṭhisīlānaṃ niyatasabhāvattā sotāpannāpi aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatā, pageva sakadāgāmiādayo. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatāyeva. ‘‘Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54), tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) vacanato puthujjanānampi diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvo labbhatiyeva, idha pana ariyasaṅghoyeva adhippeto ‘‘yo tattha pacchimako, so sotāpanno’’ti vacanato. Etenāti ‘‘pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehī’’ti etena vacanena. Assāti pañcamattassa bhikkhusatassa. Nirabbudotiādīnaṃ vacanattho parato eva āvi bhavissati.
这里“听”是指听闻被觉知到,所以说“assosī 就是听、觉知”,意思是“了知”。而这种觉知只是通过听闻才产生的,为了说明这个意思,就说“顺着从耳门传来的语音而了知”。因为“kho”这个词有强调限定的作用,所以整句话都含有强调限定的意思,因此说“kho 只是用来补足音节的虚词”。接着又说“在强调限定的意义上”,这是为了说明即使整句话已经含有强调限定,用“kho”这个词仍然是为了表达所想要强调限定的那一层意思。为了指出这个所想要强调限定的意思,就说“在这里,以强调限定的意义”等等。那么,以补足音节为作用的“kho”这个词,有什么用处呢?回答说“补足音节,只是为了让文句顺畅而已”。因为“assosī”这个词,如果带上“kho”,就好像被装点、修饰、庄严了一样,变得完整圆满;这样一来,前后词语就连贯顺畅了,如果不带上它,就连贯不起来。所以,补足音节的作用,仅仅在于让文句顺畅。这里的“matta”一词有排除差别的作用,借此表明它不表达别的意思;而“eva”这个词,则使“文句顺畅”成为确定无疑的意思。巴利
Assosīti ettha savanamupalabbhoti āha ‘‘assosīti suṇi upalabhī’’ti, aññāsīti attho. So cāyamupalabbho savanavasenevāti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sotadvārasampattavacananigghosānusārena aññāsī’’ti. Avadhāraṇaphalattā saddappayogassa sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti āha ‘‘khoti padapūraṇamatte nipāto’’ti. Avadhāraṇattheti pana iminā antogadhāvadhāraṇepi sabbasmiṃ vākye iṭṭhatovadhāraṇatthaṃ khosaddaggahaṇanti dasseti. Tameva iṭṭhatovadhāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘tattha avadhāraṇatthenā’’tiādi. Atha padapūraṇatthena khosaddena kiṃpayojananti āha ‘‘padapūraṇena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattamevā’’ti. ‘‘Assosī’’ti hi padaṃ khosadde gahite tena phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni siliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva payojanaṃ. Matta-saddo cettha visesanivattiattho, tenassa anatthantaradīpanataṃ dasseti, eva-saddena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikataṃ.
这里,为了依照语音规则显示“Verañja”一词的含义,说“生于Verañjā”等。“Brahmaṃ aṇatī”中,“Brahma”指的是吠陀,而吠陀按咒语、梵书、仪轨分为三种。其中,咒语因为是根本,所以由阿闼婆等宣说;其余两种则依咒语而生,因此这里只取根本的咒语。讽诵咒语,就是讽诵《梨俱吠陀》等咒语典籍。因为《梨俱吠陀》等需要被守护,所以称为“咒语”。用“即此”来限定,是为了排除“从梵天而生”之类的其他词源解释。说“生来的婆罗门”,是为了显示还有别的婆罗门。婆罗门有两种:生来的婆罗门和清净的婆罗门。现在,为了显示其中清净婆罗门的词源,说“然而圣者……”等。巴利
Verañjoti ettha saddalakkhaṇānusārena atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘verañjāyaṃ jāto’’tiādi. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti ettha brahmanti vedo vuccati, so pana mantabrahmakappavasena tividho. Tattha mantā padhānamūlabhāvatoyeva aṭṭhakādīhi pavuttā, itare pana tannissayena jātā, tena padhānasseva gahaṇaṃ. Mante sajjhāyatīti iruvedādike mantasatthe sajjhāyatīti attho. Iruvedādayo hi guttabhāsitabbatāya ‘‘mantā’’ti vuccanti. Idameva hīti avadhāraṇena brahmato jātotiādikaṃ niruttiṃ paṭikkhipati. Jātibrāhmaṇānanti iminā aññepi brāhmaṇā atthīti dasseti. Duvidhā hi brāhmaṇā jātibrāhmaṇā visuddhibrāhmaṇā cāti. Idāni tattha visuddhibrāhmaṇānaṃ niruttiṃ dassento āha ‘‘ariyā panā’’tiādi.
彻底止息了诸恶,意思是完全、毫无剩余、连习气也一并止息了诸恶。这样一来,世尊的止息诸恶,就跟外道中尚未离欲的人、有学、无学那些止息诸恶的人区别开来了。为了用譬喻把前面已经说过的义理阐明出来,所以接着说“即如所说”等话。在这里,有人说:“‘已除诸恶者为婆罗门,因已止息诸恶故名为沙门’——这是把分属不同偈颂的两句合在一起说的。”这话在三部《结文》中也说过:“取‘因已止息诸恶,所以称为沙门’这句话,而说‘因已止息诸恶故名为沙门’。而‘已除诸恶者为婆罗门’这句,则是在另一首偈颂的结集中所说的话。”由于虚词有多种含义,这里取“传闻”之义,所以说“khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto(khalūti是传闻义的虚词)”。“Jātisamudāgatanti”即由生而来,也就是“生来成就”的意思。“Ālapanamattanti”即只是亲爱的称呼语。因为“bho”“āvuso”“devānampiyā”这些是亲爱的称呼语。“Bhovādī nāma so hotīti”即凡是在招呼等场合说“bho bho”而游行者,他就名为“bhovādī”,这是意思。“Sakiñcanoti”即被贪等系缚所系缚。“Rāgādayo hi satte kiñcenti maddanti palibundhantīti ‘kiñcanānī’ti vuccanti.”人们据说让牛踩踏打谷场时,会说“kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā”,因此应知“maddanaṭṭho”就是“kiñcanaṭṭho”之义。巴利
Samitapāpattāti accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattā. Evañhi bāhirakaavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamaṇato bhagavato pāpasamaṇaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Vuttamevatthaṃ udāharaṇena vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Ettha pana ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo, samitapāpattā samaṇoti vuccatīti idaṃ bhinnagāthāsannissitapadadvayaṃ ekato gahetvā vutta’’nti vadanti. Vuttañhetaṃ tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu ‘‘samitattā hi pāpānaṃ, samaṇoti pavuccatīti idaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā ‘samitattā samaṇoti vuccatī’ti vuttaṃ. Bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇoti idaṃ pana aññasmiṃ gāthābandhe vuttavacana’’nti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ idha anussavanatthe adhippetoti āha ‘‘khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti. Jātisamudāgatanti jātiyā āgataṃ, jātisiddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ālapanamattanti piyālāpavacanamattaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete bhoti vā āvusoti vā devānampiyāti vā. Bhovādī nāma so hotīti yo āmantanādīsu ‘‘bho bho’’ti vadanto vicarati, so bhovādī nāma hotīti attho. Sakiñcanoti rāgādīhi kiñcanehi sakiñcano. Rāgādayo hi satte kiñcenti maddanti palibundhantīti ‘‘kiñcanānī’’ti vuccanti. Manussā kira goṇehi khalaṃ maddāpentā ‘‘kiñcehi kapila, kiñcehi kāḷakā’’ti vadanti, tasmā maddanaṭṭho kiñcanaṭṭhoti veditabbo.
关于“依种姓”这句话:这里“种姓”(gotta)的意思是“守护(tāyati)其族(gaṃ)”。而“go”这个音在此处既指称名,也指觉知,所以这里的含义应当这样理解:就“乔达摩(Gotama)”这个正在使用的称名和觉知来说,因为它以决定性的方式守护、保护着对象,所以叫“种姓”。就像觉知不能离开作为所缘的对象而存在一样,称名也不能离开所诠的对象。因此,那个被称为“种姓”的对象守护、保护着那些觉知和称(这里“种姓”是:与他族谱系无涉,由彼族始祖所成,为彼族属所共通的形态)巴利
Gottavasenāti ettha gaṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ. Gosaddena cettha abhidhānaṃ buddhi ca vuccati, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gotamoti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya tāyati rakkhatīti gottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so gottasaṅkhāto attho tāni buddhiabhidhānāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. So pana aññakulaparamparāya asādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca samaṇoti iminā sarikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito samitapāpatākittanato, gotamoti iminā lokiyajanehi uḷārakulasambhūtatādīpanato. Sakyassa suddhodanamahārājassa putto sakyaputto. Iminā ca uditoditavipulakhattiyakulavibhāvanato vuttaṃ ‘‘idaṃ pana bhagavato uccākulapaadīpana’’nti. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūtoti ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenaci pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo. Tathā hi lokanāthassa abhijātiyaṃ tassa kulassa na kiñci pārijuññaṃ, atha kho vaḍḍhiyeva. Abhinikkhamane ca tato samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññāto. Tena ‘‘sakyakulā pabbajito’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavato saddhāpabbajitabhāvaparidīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya pabbajitabhāvasiddhito. Tato paranti ‘‘verañjāyaṃ viharatī’’tiādi.
在“如此状态之表述”这一意义上,用的是业格。所谓“如此状态者”,就是“成了这个样子、达到这种状态的人”;对这样的人的表述,就是“如此状态之表述”;这个意义本身就是“如此状态之表述的意义”。或者也可以说,“如此状态者”就是已经生起、变成这个样子的人,所以“如此状态之表述的意义”,就是“这样说的意义”;在这个意义上用业格,这就是它的意思。这里还要注意,“abbhuggato(已腾起、已传开)”这个词里的“abhi”前缀,因为显示了“超越之后再腾起”的方式,所以它就成了“如此状态之表述意义”的标示者。由于这个关联,尽管“taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ(那位乔达摩尊)”这个业格形式,在属格意义上也能讲得通,但因为它显示了“如此状态之表述”,所以说“于如此状态之表述的意义上”。因此他说:“其义为‘那位乔达摩尊的’。”这里要说明的是:就像在“sādhu devadatto mātaram abhi(善哉,提婆达多,超越其母)”这一句里,因为与“abhi”一词相关联,所以在“如此状态之表述”上用了业格;同样,在这里,“taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggato(那位乔达摩尊,如此善好的称誉之声已传开)”这一句,也是因为与“abhi”一词相关联,所以在“如此状态之表述”上用了业格。因为在“sādhu devadatto mātaram abhi”这一句里,“devadatto mātaram abhi mātari visaye mātuyā vā sādhū”这样,本来应该用处格或属格来表达“在……方面”或“属于……”的意义,但因为与显示“如此状态之表述意义”的“abhi”一词相关联,就用了业格。就像在这里,能理解到“提婆达多在母亲这方面、或与母亲有关联,达到了善好的状态”这个意思;同样,在这里也能理解到“与乔达摩尊有关联的称誉之声已传开,达到了超越之后再腾起的状态”这个意思。其中,这里“称誉之声”的提法,就像那里“提婆达多”的提法;这里“那位乔达摩尊”的提法,就像那里“母亲”的提法;这里“已传开”一词的提法,就像那里“善哉”一词的提法,应当这样理解。巴利
Itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacananti itthaṃ imaṃ pakāraṃ bhūto āpannoti ittambhūto, tassa ākhyānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānaṃ, soyeva attho itthambhūtākhyānattho. Atha vā itthaṃ evaṃ pakāro bhūto jātoti evaṃ kathanattho itthambhūtākhyānattho, tasmiṃ upayogavacananti attho. Ettha ca abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyānatthajotako abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārassa dīpanato. Tena yogato ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samānaṃ itthambhūtākhyānadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotamaṃ abhi evaṃ kalyāṇo kittisaddo uggatoti abhisaddayogato itthambhūtākhyāne upayogavacananti. ‘‘Sādhu devadatto mātaramabhī’’ti ettha hi ‘‘devadatto mātaramabhi mātari visaye mātuyā vā sādhū’’ti evaṃ adhikaraṇatthe sāmiatthe vā bhummavacanassa vā sāmivacanassa vā pasaṅge itthambhūtākhyānatthajotakena abhisaddena yoge upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Yathā cettha ‘‘devadatto mātu visaye mātusambandhī vā sādhuttappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati , evamidhāpi ‘‘bhoto gotamassa sambandhī kittisaddo abbhuggato abhibhavitvā uggamanappakārappatto’’ti ayamattho viññāyati. Tattha hi devadattaggahaṇaṃ viya idha kittisaddaggahaṇaṃ, tathā tattha ‘‘mātara’’nti vacanaṃ viya idha ‘‘taṃ kho pana bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti vacanaṃ, tattha sādhusaddaggahaṇaṃ viya idha uggatasaddaggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“善好”就是贤善。而它的善好性,是因为以善好功德为所缘,所以说“具足善好功德”,意思是:具足善好功德,并因以那些功德为所缘而与之相应。这里,“具足”就是指以善好功德为所缘,也就是依止于善好功德,这是这段话的意旨。“最胜”一词也是同样的道理。称誉之声之所以是最胜,正是因为以最胜功德为所缘,就像“世尊一词最胜”这类说法一样。由于“世尊、应供”等话是在称扬功德,又是可以听闻的,所以称誉之声就是称赞。因此他说“称誉之声就是称誉本身”。因为称赞本身既值得称扬,又是可以听闻的称誉之声,所以也被叫做“声”。实际上,“声”这个词在这里就是“称誉”的同义词,就像说“诸仙有洪大之声,具德而修苦行”。以赞叹的方式发出的声音就是赞叹之声,是表达赞叹的话语。巴利
Kalyāṇoti bhaddako. Kalyāṇabhāvo cassa kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāyāti āha ‘‘kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato’’ti, kalyāṇehi guṇehi samannāgato taṃvisayatāya yuttoti attho. Taṃvisayatā hettha samannāgamo kalyāṇaguṇavisayatāya tannissitoti adhippāyo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Seṭṭhaguṇavisayatāya eva hi kittisaddassa seṭṭhatā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭha’’ntiādīsu viya. ‘‘Bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā guṇānaṃ saṃkittanato saddanīyato ca kittisaddo vaṇṇoti āha ‘‘kittisaddoti kitti evā’’ti. Vaṇṇoyeva hi kittetabbato kittisaddanīyato saddoti ca vuccati. Kittipariyāyo hi saddasaddo yathā ‘‘uḷārasaddā isayo, guṇavanto tapassino’’ti. Abhitthavanavasena pavatto saddo thutighoso, abhitthavudāhāro.
“已升腾”这个词的意思,注疏里没有说明,所以应当这样理解:已升腾,就是超越之后升起来;因为它是依着不共外道的功德而生起的,所以说它遍覆天界世间而运转。那么,声音怎样叫“已升腾”呢?他说“彼世尊即是如此”等等。从这里往后,在类似的地方,凡是需要解释巴利文句意义之处,我就在每一处先说“然而在巴利文中”,然后显示其义。现在为了显示其义,先以词句搭配为前提,他说“然而在‘彼世尊即是如此’等句中,此是其搭配方式”等等。“彼世尊”:那位圆满了三十种波罗蜜、摧破一切烦恼、证得无上正等正觉、为诸天中的最胜天、诸帝释中的最胜帝释、诸梵天中的最胜梵天、世间怙主、因具足吉祥等理由而获得“世尊”之名的,就是那位世尊。因为“世尊”这个词,是对导师名号的称扬。所以具寿法将说:“‘世尊’这不是母亲取的名字”等等。再者,后面“世尊”一词,只是对功德的称扬。正如修禅业处的人,在“阿拉汉”等九个处所,各各配上“即是”一词,随念佛陀功德;同样,这里也显示以称扬佛陀功德来随念,所以他说“即是阿拉汉,即是正等正觉……即是世尊”。这样,由“阿拉汉”等九个词所表明的、在天界世间中极为明显著名的佛陀功德,就从种种方面被阐明了。正如在“此即是实,此即是真”等句中一样,这里的“即”一词表示接近现前的原因,“亦”一词表示总摄,由此也显示了那些功德众多;而那些功德是使有信心、有智慧的人现前观察功德的原因,所以称扬者应当把那些功德呈现在智者心中来称扬,因此他说“以此理由和此理由”,这就是所说的意思。巴利
‘‘Abbhuggato’’ti pana etassa attho aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na dassito, tasmā tassattho evaṃ veditabbo – abbhuggatoti abhibhavitvā uggato, anaññasādhāraṇaguṇe ārabbha pavattattā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ ajjhottharitvā pavattoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kinti saddo abbhuggatoti āha ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādi. Ito paraṃ pana īdisesu ṭhānesu yattha yattha pāḷipāṭhassa attho vattabbo siyā, tattha tattha ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ panā’’ti vatvā atthaṃ dassayissāma, idāni tattha padayojanāpubbakaṃ atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘itipi so bhagavātiādīsu panaayaṃ tāva yojanā’’tiādi. So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi bhagavāti laddhanāmo, so bhagavā. Bhagavāti hi idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tenāha āyasmā dhammasenāpati ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 84). Parato pana bhagavāti guṇakittanameva. Yathā kammaṭṭhānikena ‘‘araha’’ntiādīsu navasu ṭhānesu paccekaṃ itipisaddaṃ yojetvā buddhaguṇā anussarīyanti, evaṃ buddhaguṇasaṃkittakenapīti dassento ‘‘itipi arahaṃ itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti āha. Evañhi sati ‘‘araha’’ntiādīhi navahi padehi ye sadevake loke ativiya pākaṭā paññātā buddhaguṇā, te nānappakārato vibhāvitā honti. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya hi idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakāraṇattho , pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho, tena ca tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvo dīpito, tāni ca guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni saddhāsampannānaṃ viññujātikānaṃ paccakkhāni hontīti tāni saṃkittentena viññunā cittassa sammukhībhūtāneva katvā saṃkittetabbānīti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha.
前面已经说过“是为了阐明经师们语句的含义,使它和经典相符”,所以,虽然《清净道论》(清净道论1.125-128)里已经全面注释过这个含义,现在想在这里也详细展开说明,因此他说出了这里的用意:“如今为持律者们……”等等。其中,“令心欢喜”就是让心满足的意思,也就是要生起净信之心。“因远离”等句中,“因远离”就是极为遥远;“敌”就是烦恼之敌;“辐”就是轮回车轮的辐条;“已摧毁”就是已被彻底粉碎;“资具等”就是衣等资具以及各种供养。巴利
‘‘Suttantikānaṃ vacanānamatthaṃ, suttānurūpaṃ paridīpayantī’’ti heṭṭhā vuttattā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.125-128) sabbākārato saṃvaṇṇitampi atthaṃ idhāpi vitthāretvā dassetukāmo tattha payojanamāha ‘‘idāni vinayadharāna’’ntiādi. Tattha cittasampahaṃsanatthanti cittasantosanatthaṃ, cittappasādajananatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Ārakattā’’tiādīsu ārakattāti suvidūrattā. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ. Arānanti saṃsāracakkassa arānaṃ. Hatattāti viddhaṃsitattā. Paccayādīnanti cīvarādipaccayānañceva pūjāvisesānañca.
现在,为了阐明前面所说的这个含义,他说了“ārakā hi so”等话。所谓“远”,就像“近”一样,是随着所依的对象而说的。为了显示达到最高程度的远,他说“suvidūravidūre ṭhito”,意思是以极其遥远的方式住在远处。而他住在远离烦恼之处,并不是从方位上来说的,而是因为那些烦恼已被完全断除。为了显示这一点,他说“maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā”,即因为以道摧毁了烦恼。难道其他漏尽者不也同样断除了那些烦恼吗?他心里考虑到这个追问,所以说了“savāsanānaṃ”,即连同习气。因为除了世尊以外,其他人无法把烦恼连同习气一起断除。由此显示出,世尊的阿罗汉果与其他阿罗汉是不共的。那么,这个“习气”是什么呢?就像具寿毕陵伽婆蹉喊人“贱民”那样,它是烦恼虽然已被断除,却仍然表现为如同烦恼未断者的行为之因的、依止于烦恼的一种特殊能力。可是,当说“ārakā”(远)时,怎么能得出“从烦恼(远)”这个意思呢?因为以共通的说法提问时,要确定其特殊含义,而特殊含义又不能用在共通说法上,所以这里应当引用“ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā”等经文句子。这里“ārakā”中的长a音变成短音,ka音转为带随韵的ha音,依词源学的方法,应当知道“araha”(应供)一词就是这样成立的。为了让上面所说的含义容易理解,这里说了下面这首偈颂——巴利
Idāni yathāvuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘ārakā hi so’’tiādi. Dūratā nāma āsannatā viya upādāyupādāya vuccatīti paramukkaṃsagataṃ dūrabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘suvidūravidūre ṭhito’’ti āha, suṭṭhu vidūrabhāveneva vidūre ṭhitoti attho. So panassa kilesehi dūre ṭhitabhāvo, na padesavasena, atha kho tesaṃ sabbaso pahīnattāti dassento āha ‘‘maggena kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā’’ti. Nanu aññesampi khīṇāsavānaṃ te pahīnā evāti anuyogaṃ manasi katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘savāsanāna’’nti. Na hi ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ aññe saha vāsanāya kilese pahātuṃ sakkonti. Etena aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ bhagavato arahattanti dassitaṃ hoti. Kā panāyaṃ vāsanā nāma? Pahīnakilesassapi appahīnakilesassa payogasadisapayogahetubhūto kilesanissito sāmatthiyaviseso āyasmato pilindavacchassa vasalasamudācāranimittaṃ viya. Kathaṃ pana ‘‘ārakā’’ti vutte ‘‘kilesehī’’ti ayamattho labbhatīti sāmaññacodanāya visese avaṭṭhānato visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayujjitabbato ‘‘ārakāssa honti pāpakā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 1.434) suttapadānettha udāharitabbāni. Ārakāti cettha ā-kārassa rassattaṃ, ka-kārassa ca hakāraṃ sānusāraṃ katvā niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. Yathāvuttassevatthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idamettha vuccati –
他因此被称为“远离”,因为他与那些事物不相应。
导师不与诸过患相应,因此被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘So tato ārakā nāma, yassa yenāsamaṅgitā; Asamaṅgī ca dosehi, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.125);
以行为无益,烦恼本身就是敌人,所以叫“烦恼敌”。因为已经杀灭了敌人,本该说“arihā”,但按照语言习惯说成了“araha”。在这里也应当知道,这是为了便于把握前面所说的含义:巴利
Anatthacaraṇena kilesā eva arayoti kilesārayo. Arīnaṃ hatattā arihāti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ. Etthāpi yathāvuttassatthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idaṃ veditabbaṃ –
因为被称为贪等的所有怨敌都已被杀灭,
因为被称为贪等的一切怨敌已被持慧剑的导师杀灭,所以他也被认为是阿罗汉。巴利
‘‘Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā; Paññāsatthena nāthena, tasmāpi arahaṃ mato’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.126);
这里说的“轮回轮”,是连接的意思。就像车轮的轴心是车轮的根本部件一样,无明、有、渴爱这两者作为根本部分,在内部和外部都平等地存在,所以经中说“以无明、有、渴爱为轴心”。就像连接轴心和轮辋的辐条一样,福行、非福行、不动行由作为缘和果的无明、渴爱、老死所连接,所以经中说“以福行等诸行为辐”。在各种各样的存在中,老死以边际的方式明显呈现,因此把它当作轮辋,说“以老死为轮辋”。就像车轴是车轮转动的主要因素一样,轮回轮的转动也以漏集为因素,所以说“以漏集所成的轴贯穿”。诸漏本身就是无明等的因,因此称为漏集,正如经中所说“由漏集而有无明集”。由异熟、业、色等差别而分出的欲有等三有,就是车;在这三有之车上,由各自的缘平等地、或从最初就完全地连接起来,所以叫“等连接”。因为没有起点而持续运转,所以说“无始时来运转”。巴利
Yañcetaṃ saṃsāracakkanti sambandho. Rathacakkassa nābhi viya mūlāvayavabhūtaṃ anto bahi ca samavaṭṭhitaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādvayanti vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhī’’ti. Nābhiyā nemiyā ca sambaddhaarasadisā paccayaphalabhūtehi avijjātaṇhājarāmaraṇehi sambaddhā puññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhārāti vuttaṃ ‘‘puññādiabhisaṅkhārāra’’nti. Tattha tattha bhave pariyantabhāvena pākaṭaṃ jarāmaraṇanti taṃ nemiṭṭhāniyaṃ katvā āha ‘‘jarāmaraṇanemī’’ti. Yathā rathacakkappavattiyā padhānakāraṇaṃ akkho, evaṃ saṃsāracakkappavattiyā āsavasamudayoti āha ‘‘āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā’’ti. Āsavā eva avijjādīnaṃ kāraṇattā āsavasamudayo. Yathāha ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103). Vipākakaṭattārūpappabhedo kāmabhavādiko tibhavo eva ratho, tasmiṃ tibhavarathe. Attano paccayehi samaṃ, sabbaso vā ādito paṭṭhāya yojitanti samāyojitaṃ. Ādirahitaṃ kālaṃ pavattatīti katvā anādikālappavattaṃ.
诸蕴的次第,以及诸界、诸处,
无间断地持续转起,这就叫做轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 2.619; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 apasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199) –
这样所说的轮回本身就是轮回之轮。这是世尊所说的。在菩提场:就是在成为菩提的智慧所达到的清净境地之处或之时。菩提就是慧,它在这里清净明净,所以叫菩提场。以精进足:因为它在杂染分和清净分中起着阻止和安放的作用,所以以两种方式运转,靠的是称为精进的足。在戒地上:戒本身就是地,以安立为义,就在那戒地之上。安立之后:以成就的方式安立之后。以信手:信本身就是手,因为能执取无过失的法,所以用信作为手。能灭尽业者:因为能灭尽身业等一切种类的业,所以叫能灭尽业。智斧:在定石上好好磨利的道智之斧,拿起来。巴利
Evaṃ vuttasaṃsārova saṃsāracakkaṃ. Anenāti bhagavatā. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne kāle vā. Bodhīti paññā, sā ettha maṇḍā pasannā jātāti bodhimaṇḍo. Vīriyapādehīti saṃkilesavodānapakkhiyesu sannirumbhanasannikkhipanakiccatāya dvidhā pavatteti attano vīriyasaṅkhātehi pādehi. Sīlapathaviyanti patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena sīlameva pathavī, tassaṃ. Patiṭṭhāyāti sampādanavasena patiṭṭhahitvā. Saddhāhatthenāti anavajjadhammādānasādhanato saddhāva hattho, tena. Kammakkhayakaranti kāyakammādibhedassa sabbassapi kammassa khayakaraṇato kammakkhayakaraṃ. Ñāṇapharasunti samādhisilāyaṃ sunisitaṃ maggañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā.
像这样,在“因为已摧毁辐条”这句话里,把被称为“辐条”的轮回执取为像车轮一样的轮子,作了义理上的连接;现在为了也依照缘起教法的次第来显示它,所以说了“或者”等话。其中,“无始轮回之轮”是指追随辗转、无法得知最初边际的轮回之圈。“其余十法”是指从行开始、到生为止的十法。为什么说这些行等法具有“辐条”的性质呢?回答说:“因为以无明为根本,以老死为终点的缘故。”其中,无明是根本、是主要的原因,那些行等法以无明为根本,它们这种状态就叫“以无明为根本”。老死是边际、是终点,这些行等十法以老死为边际,它们这种状态就叫“以老死为边际”。意思是说,从行开始、到生为止的十法,以无明为根本,以老死为终点。其要旨是:以作为轮毂的无明为根本,以作为轮辋的老死为边际,行等这些辐条与之相连。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘arānaṃ hatattā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ arasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāraṃ cakkaṃ viya cakkanti gahetvā atthayojanaṃ katvā idāni paṭiccasamuppādadesanākkamenapi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭanti anu anu amataggaṃ aviññātapubbakoṭikaṃ saṃsāramaṇḍalaṃ. Sesā dasa dhammāti saṅkhārādayo jātipariyosānā dasa dhammā. Kathaṃ tesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ arabhāvoti āha ‘‘avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyantattā cā’’ti. Tattha avijjā mūlaṃ padhānakāraṇaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ te avijjāmūlakā, tesaṃ bhāvo avijjāmūlakattaṃ. Jarāmaraṇaṃ pariyantaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ etesanti jarāmaraṇapariyantā, saṅkhārādayo dasa dhammā. Tesaṃ bhāvo jarāmaraṇapariyantattaṃ. Saṅkhārādijātipariyosānānaṃ dasadhammānaṃ avijjāmūlakattā jarāmaraṇapariyosānattā cāti attho, nābhibhūtāya avijjāya mūlato nemibhūtena jarāmaraṇena antato saṅkhārādīnaṃ sambandhattāti adhippāyo.
“苦等”指的是苦、集、灭、道。无明,因为它是智慧的对立面,所以叫无明;并不是说它和智慧是两回事,也不是说它仅仅是没有智慧。在这里,对苦等的无明,是因为它让人无法如实通达真相,所以它的作用就是遮蔽。虽然除了出世间的两个真理之外,在其余的地方,无明也可以以所缘的方式生起,但即便如此,这里说的仍然是以遮蔽作用为主。因为它一旦生起,就会遮蔽苦谛而停留,不让人通达真实本质的相状;对集、灭、道也是一样。巴利
Dukkhādīsūti dukkhasamudayanirodhamaggesu. Aññāṇanti ñāṇappaṭipakkhattā moho aññāṇaṃ, na pana ñāṇato aññaṃ, napi ñāṇassa abhāvamattaṃ. Tattha dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ yathāsabhāvappaṭivedhāppadānato tappaṭicchādanavaseneva. Ettha hi kiñcāpi ṭhapetvā lokuttarasaccadvayaṃ sesaṭṭhānesu ārammaṇavasenapi avijjā uppajjati, evaṃ santepi paṭicchādanavaseneva idha adhippetā. Sā hi uppannā dukkhasaccaṃ paṭicchādetvā tiṭṭhati, yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti, tathā samudayaṃ nirodhaṃ magganti.
这里说的“苦”,指的是苦圣谛。把苦按欲有、色有、无色有分成三种之后,同样把遮蔽这个苦的无明也分成三种,为了说明以无明等为缘,在三有中依次生起行等,就说了“于欲有中,无明……”等话。其中,“于欲有中,无明”是指遮蔽欲有过患的无明。“于色有中,无明”“于无色有中,无明”也是同样的道理。“于欲有中,行”是指属于欲地范围的福行、非福行,或者说,是那些应当在欲有中产生的福行、非福行,也就是能引生欲有转生的行。这里,“行”应当理解为世间的善思和不善思。“成为缘”:对福行来说,首先以所缘缘和亲依止缘两种方式成为缘;对非福行来说,如果是俱生的,就以俱生缘等方式成为缘;如果不是俱生的,就以无间缘、等无间缘等方式成为缘;如果不是无间的,就以所缘缘和亲依止缘的方式成为缘。“于无色有中,行”是指不动行。“成为缘”是仅以亲依止缘的方式。不过,如果在这里把这个道理展开来讲,就会太繁琐,所以这里不详细展开。“于其余”是指色有和无色有中的情形。巴利
Dukkhanti cettha dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ adhippetanti taṃ kāmabhavādivasena tidhā bhinditvā tathā tappaṭicchādikañca avijjaṃ tidhā katvā avijjādipaccaye tīsu bhavesu saṅkhārādike paṭipāṭiyā dassento ‘‘kāmabhave ca avijjā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kāmabhave ca avijjāti kāmabhave ādīnavapaṭicchādikā avijjā. Rūpabhave avijjā arūpabhave avijjāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāmabhave saṅkhārānanti kāmabhūmipariyāpannānaṃ puññāpuññasaṅkhārānaṃ, kāmabhave vā nipphādetabbā ye puññāpuññasaṅkhārā, tesaṃ kāmabhavūpapattinibbattakasaṅkhārānanti attho. Saṅkhārāti cettha lokiyakusalākusalacetanā veditabbā. Paccayo hotīti puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayo hoti, apuññābhisaṅkhāresu sahajātassa sahajātādivasena, asahajātassa anantarasamanantarādivasena, anānantarassa pana ārammaṇavasena ceva upanissayavasena ca paccayo hoti. Arūpabhave saṅkhārānanti āneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ. Paccayo hotīti upanissayapaccayavaseneva. Imasmiñca panatthe ettha vitthāriyamāne atippapañco hoti, tasmā taṃ nayidha vitthārayissāma. Itaresūti rūpārūpabhavesu.
“三处”是指眼处、耳处、意处,因为鼻等三处在那里不可能存在。“一处”是指意处,因为其余诸处在那里不可能存在。依照这个方法,“三种触”等说法中的含义也应当这样理解。“六种触”是指眼触、耳触、鼻触、舌触、身触、意触这六种触。“六种受”是指眼触所生的受,同样还有耳触所生的受、鼻触所生的受、舌触所生的受、身触所生的受、意触所生的受,这六种受。“六种渴爱身”是指色渴爱、声渴爱、香渴爱、味渴爱、触渴爱、法渴爱,这六种渴爱身。所谓“在某某处有某某渴爱”,是指按色渴爱等分类,在欲有等各处生起的渴爱。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃāyatanānanti cakkhusotamanāyatanānaṃ ghānādittayassa tattha asambhavato. Ekassāti manāyatanassa itaresaṃ tattha asambhavato. Iminā nayena tiṇṇaṃ phassānantiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Chabbidhassa phassassāti cakkhusamphassasotasamphassaghānasamphassajivhāsamphassakāyasamphassamanosamphassānaṃ vasena chabbidhassa phassassa. Channaṃ vedanānanti cakkhusamphassajā vedanā, tathā sotasamphassajā ghānasamphassajā jivhāsamphassajā kāyasamphassajā manosamphassajā vedanāti imāsaṃ channaṃ vedanānaṃ. Channaṃ taṇhākāyānanti rūpataṇhā saddataṇhā gandhataṇhā rasataṇhā phoṭṭhabbataṇhā dhammataṇhāti imesaṃ channaṃ taṇhākāyānaṃ. Tattha tattha sā sā taṇhāti rūpataṇhādibhedā tattha tattha kāmabhavādīsu uppajjanakataṇhā.
这段以渴爱为根本的说法太简略了,所以为了把取和有等分别开示、详细展开说明,才说了“如何”等话。其中,“我将享受诸欲”这一句,说的是欲渴爱的生起;同样,“我将享受天界成就”等话也是如此。然而,这种渴爱因为以强力执取的方式生起,所以就叫欲取,因此说“以欲取为缘”。“同样地”就是指以欲取为缘。“梵天界成就”是指色界梵天中的成就。由于“一切三地之法,依可意之义而称为欲”,所以有爱也属于欲取,因此说“就是以欲取为缘,修习慈”等。其中,“修习慈”:慈就是柔和、亲切,修习就是增长的意思。或者,具有慈,就叫慈,指心,或指与慈相应的禅那,修习、增长、令生起的意思。“修习悲”等,也应依照同样的方式理解。巴利
Sā taṇhādimūlikā kathā atisaṃkhittāti taṃ upādānabhave ca vibhajitvā vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāme paribhuñjissāmīti iminā kāmataṇhāpavattimāha, tathā saggasampattiṃ anubhavissāmītiādīhi. Sā pana taṇhā yasmā bhusamādānavasena pavattamānā kāmupādānaṃ nāma hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā’’ti. Tathevāti kāmupādānapaccayā eva. Brahmalokasampattinti rūpībrahmaloke sampattiṃ. ‘‘Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā kāmanīyaṭṭhena kāmā’’ti vacanato bhavarāgopi kāmupādānamevāti katvā ‘‘kāmupādānapaccayā eva mettaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha mettaṃ bhāvetīti mijjati siniyhatīti mettā, taṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti attho. Atha vā mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, cittaṃ, taṃsampayuttaṃ jhānaṃ vā, taṃ bhāveti vaḍḍheti uppādeti vāti attho. Karuṇaṃ bhāvetītiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
“其余以取为根本的”是指:在以见取、戒禁取、我语取为根本的连结中,也是同样的道理。这里的连结是这样的:在此,有人执取“没有他世”的断灭见,他因为见取,以身行恶行等等,应当按前面所说的方式连结。另有人执取“在某某成就之身中,自我断灭”的断灭见,他为了往生那里,以身行善行等等,也应当按前面所说的方式连结。另有人执取“成为有色、意所成之后,自我断灭”,便为了往生色界而修习其道,圆满修习。这一切都应当按前面所说的方式理解。又有人执取“往生无色界之后,自我断灭”,便为了往生无色界而修习其道,圆满修习。这一切也都应当按前面所说的方式理解。应当知道,仅凭这些,也已经说明了以我语取为根本的连结。同样地,也应当以现法涅槃论的方式来理解其连结。另有人执取“依戒得清净、依禁得清净”,把不清净之道执取为“清净道”。他因为戒禁取,以身行恶行等等,这一切也应当按前面所说的方式连结。巴利
Sesupādānamūlikāsupīti diṭṭhupādānasīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānamūlikāsupi yojanāsu eseva nayoti attho. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā – idhekacco ‘‘natthi paraloko’’ti natthikadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so diṭṭhupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘asukasmiṃ sampattibhave attā ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so tatrūpapattiyā kāyena sucaritaṃ caratītiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Aparo ‘‘rūpī manomayo hutvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti rūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aparopi ‘‘arūpabhave uppajjitvā attā ucchijjatī’’ti arūpūpapattiyā maggaṃ bhāveti bhāvanāpāripūriyāti sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etāhiyeva attavādupādānamūlikāpi yojanā saṃvaṇṇitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasenapi yojanā veditabbā. Aparo ‘‘sīlena suddhi, vatena suddhī’’ti asuddhimaggaṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto sīlabbatupādānapaccayā kāyena duccaritaṃ caratītiādi sabbaṃ vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
现在,为了开示轮回之轮,大师用“在欲界有中,无明是欲界有中诸行的缘”等说法,已经显示了无明等是缘、诸行等是缘所生法。接着,他引用《无碍解道》的经文,以总结的方式显示这一点,所以说“如此,这……”等。在这里,就像诸行是由因所生起的,无明也同样以欲漏等为因,所以他说“这两者都是由因所生起的”。在“把握缘”中,是指对名色的诸缘——也就是无明等——加以限定而把握。在“应当完成”这个词上,用的是处格。“慧”是指以各种方式了知,也就是所谓的度疑清净。“法住智”:果法依它而住,所以它是“住”,也就是因;诸法的住,就是“法住”;对法住的智,就是“法住智”,意思是缘智,也就是对缘起的通达。虽然在这里,把握缘时的慧本身就是法住智,但是当诸行还没有被见到时,就不可能见到无明是诸行的缘,所以应当理解,这里也把握了“诸行是由因所生起的”这一缘所生法。而“这两者都是由因所生起的”这句话,是为了显示两者都是缘所生法而说的。又,这个法住智是以去除过去、未来、现在三时的疑网的方式生起的,因此说“过去时……”等。应当以这种方法详细解释一切词句。也就是说,应当依照“无明是因”等这样的方式,按照在无明上所说的方法,以“诸行是因,识是因所生”等这样的方式,详细解释一切词句。巴利
Idāni yvāyaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ dassentena ‘‘kāmabhave avijjā kāmabhave saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hotī’’tiādinā avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayuppannabhāvo ca dassito, tameva paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ ānetvā nigamanavasena dassento ‘‘evamaya’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yathā saṅkhārā hetunibbattā, evaṃ avijjāpi kāmāsavādinā sahetukā evāti āha ‘‘ubhopete hetusamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggaheti nāmarūpassa paccayānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ paricchijja gahaṇe. Nipphādetabbe bhummaṃ. Paññāti kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhisaṅkhātā pakārato jānanā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti tiṭṭhanti ettha phaladhammā tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ, dhammānaṃ ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti, dhammaṭṭhitiyā ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, paccayañāṇanti attho, paṭiccasamuppādāvabodhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāmañcettha paccayapariggahe paññāyeva dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, saṅkhāresu pana adiṭṭhesu avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvo na sakkā daṭṭhunti ‘‘saṅkhārā hetusamuppannā’’ti paccayuppannadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Ubhopete hetusamuppannāti idaṃ pana ubhinnampi paccayuppannabhāvaṃ dassetukāmatāya vuttaṃ. Idañca dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ yasmā addhattaye kaṅkhāmalavitaraṇavasena pavattati, tasmā ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Etena nayena sabbapadāni vitthāretabbānīti etena nayena ‘‘avijjā hetū’’tiādinā avijjāyaṃ vuttanayena ‘‘saṅkhārā hetu, viññāṇaṃ hetusamuppanna’’ntiādinā sabbapadāni vitthāretabbāni.
在这里,“简略”是指:无明等和识等,也就是因和果。或者,“因和果”被简略地称为“简略”,也就是无明等和识等。不过应当知道,因为都具有“简略”这一共同性质,所以用了单数。那些简略按时间分为四种:过去的因、现在的果、现在的因、未来的果。因此说“在这里,第一个简略是过去时”等等。“现在时”是连接语。渴爱、取、有已经被包含在内了:在这里,因为无明和渴爱、取同属烦恼这一共同性质,所以把握了无明就等于包含了渴爱和取;因为行和有同属业这一共同性质,所以把握了行就等于包含了有;而且,如果没有它们,无明和行就无法完成各自的作用,所以渴爱、取、有确实已经被包含在内了。或者也可以说,无知的人会恐惧不安,恐惧不安的人会执取,以执取为缘而有有,因此渴爱、取、有也被包含在内了。正如所说的——巴利
Saṃkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, hetu vipāko ca. Atha vā hetuvipākoti saṃkhippatīti saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepabhāvasāmaññena pana ekavacanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Te pana saṅkhepā atīte hetu, etarahi vipāko, etarahi hetu, āyatiṃ vipākoti evaṃ kālavibhāgena cattāro jātā, tenāha ‘‘purimasaṅkhepo cettha atīto addhā’’tiādi. Paccuppanno addhāti sambandho. Taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva hontīti ettha avijjāgahaṇena kilesabhāvasāmaññato taṇhupādānā gahitā, saṅkhāraggahaṇena kammabhāvasāmaññato bhavo gahito, avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ tehi vinā sakiccākaraṇato ca taṇhupādānabhavā gahitāva honti. Atha vā avidvā paritassati, paritasito upādiyati, tassupādānapaccayā bhavo, tasmā taṇhupādānabhavāpi gahitā honti. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
在前世造业的生命状态中,痴就是无明,种种造作就是行。贪求就是渴爱,靠近执取就是取,思就是业有。这样,这五种法在前世造业的生命状态中,是这里投生结生的缘。巴利
‘‘Purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā. Nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo, iti ime pañca dhammā purimakammabhavasmiṃ idha paṭisandhiyā paccayā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.47).
在这里,关于“在前世的业有中”:意思是在前世的业有,也就是在过去生中,正在造作那个业有的时候。“痴是无明”:那时对苦等事理的痴迷,因为被它蒙蔽而造业,这就是无明。“造作是诸行”:对于正在造那个业的人来说,那些先前的思,比如生起“我要布施”的心之后,花一个月甚至一年准备布施用品期间所生起的一系列先前的思;而把布施物交到受施者手中时的那个思,则称为“有”。或者,在一个转向心和六个速行心中的思,称为“造作之行”,第七个速行心的思则是“有”。又或者,任何思都是“有”,与它相应的思则都称为“造作之行”。“欲求是渴爱”:造业的人对那个果报、对投生之有的欲求和渴望,这就是渴爱。“接近是取”:作为业有的条件,以“做了这件事之后,我要在某处享受欲乐,我要断灭”等方式生起的接近、执持、执取,这称为取。“思是有”:应当知道,在下面“对于正在造那个业的人,那些先前的思”等三种解释方案中,凡是被说为“有”的那个思,这个思就是“有”,意思应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 242; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.47) purimakammabhavasminti purime kammabhave, atītajātiyaṃ kammabhave kariyamāneti attho. Moho avijjāti yo tadā dukkhādīsu moho yena mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjā. Āyūhanā saṅkhārāti taṃ kammaṃ karoto yā purimacetanāyo, yathā ‘‘dānaṃ dassāmī’’ti cittaṃ uppādetvā māsampi saṃvaccharampi dānūpakaraṇāni sajjentassa uppannā purimacetanāyo, paṭiggāhakānaṃ pana hatthe dakkhiṇaṃ patiṭṭhāpayato cetanā bhavoti vuccati. Ekāvajjanesu vā chasu javanesu cetanā āyūhanasaṅkhārā nāma, sattamā bhavo. Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, sampayuttā āyūhanasaṅkhārā nāma. Nikanti taṇhāti yā kammaṃ karontassa tassa phale upapattibhave nikāmanā patthanā, sā taṇhā nāma. Upagamanaṃ upādānanti yaṃ kammabhavassa paccayabhūtaṃ ‘‘idaṃ katvā asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne kāme sevissāmi ucchijjissāmī’’tiādinā nayena pavattaṃ upagamanaṃ gahaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ, idaṃ upādānaṃ nāma. Cetanā bhavoti ‘‘taṃ kammaṃ karoto yā purimā cetanāyo’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttesu tīsu atthavikappesu yā cetanā bhavoti vuttā, sā cetanā bhavoti evamattho veditabbo.
现在,为了把无明等这一切法归纳为两种轮转并显示出来,他说:“这五种法,是过去的业轮。”在这里,从严格意义上说,行和业有就是业;而无明等法,因为是业的同伴、与业相似、又能资助业,所以也被说成是业。无明等法由于是能产生果报的法性,所以与业相似,并以俱生缘和亲依止缘两种方式资助业。而业本身,因为彼此相互关联、反复轮转,所以叫业轮。“识等五种”:就是以识开始、以受结尾的五种法,说的是现在,也就是当前、在这一生中。“无明与行已被包含”:这里也像前面一样应当知道,由于烦恼和业有共通性,通过含摄渴爱和取,就含摄了无明;通过含摄有,就含摄了行。或者,含摄了有,有之前的那部分行、或者与有相应的行,就已经被含摄了;而通过含摄渴爱和取,与它们相应的痴,或者被痴蒙蔽而造业的那种痴,本身就是无明,所以通过含摄渴爱、取和有,无明和行就已经被含摄了。因此才这样说——巴利
Idāni sabbepete avijjādayo dhamme dvīhi vaṭṭehi saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘ime pañca dhammā atīte kammavaṭṭa’’nti. Ettha ca nippariyāyato saṅkhārā bhavo ca kammaṃ, avijjādayo pana kammasahāyatāya kammasarikkhakā tadupakārakā cāti kammanti vuttā. Avijjādayo hi vipākadhammadhammatāya kammasarikkhakā sahajātakoṭiyā upanissayakoṭiyā ca kammassa ca upakārakā. Kammameva ca aññamaññasambandhaṃ hutvā punappunaṃ parivattanaṭṭhena kammavaṭṭaṃ. Viññāṇādayo pañcāti viññāṇādayo vedanāpariyantā pañca etarahi idāni imasmiṃ attabhāveti vuttaṃ hoti. Avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva hontīti etthāpi pubbe viya kilesakammabhāvasāmaññato taṇhupādānaggahaṇena avijjā gahitā, bhavaggahaṇena saṅkhārā gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā bhave gahite tassa pubbabhāgā taṃsampayuttā vā saṅkhārā gahitāva honti , taṇhupādānaggahaṇena ca taṃsampayuttā yāya vā mūḷho kammaṃ karoti, sā avijjāva hotīti taṇhupādānabhavaggahaṇena avijjāsaṅkhārā gahitāva honti. Teneva vuttaṃ –
在这里,因为诸处已经成熟,痴就是无明,造作就是诸行,贪爱就是渴爱,执取就是取,思就是业有。像这样,这五种法在这个业有当中,是未来结生的缘。巴利
‘‘Idha paripakkattā āyatanānaṃ moho avijjā, āyūhanā saṅkhārā, nikanti taṇhā, upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ, cetanā bhavo, iti ime pañca dhammā idha kammabhavasmiṃ āyatiṃ paṭisandhiyā paccayā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.47).
在这里,针对“诸处已成熟”这一说法,是在说明诸处成熟的人造业时的痴。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tattha idha paripakkattā āyatanānanti paripakkāyatanassa kammakaraṇakāle sammoho dassito. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
识、名色、六处、触、受的生、老、坏灭状态,被称为生、老、死。因为把握了状态,也就等于把握了具有状态的事物,两者不相分离,所以说“以生、老、死的名称指出了识等”。所谓“以名称”,就是通过生、老、死的说法。这里的“这些”,指的是识等。未来的果报轮转,是因为从现在之因所生的未来法已被包含在内。这里的“那些”,指的是无明等。所谓“行相”,是指虽然没有从自性上直接宣说,但在每一种分类收摄中都被纳入,通过无明、行等的把握而被显示出来,所以叫“行相”;或者指过去因等的类别,所以叫“行相”。由此,从行相来说,有二十种,也就是按过去因五支等分类而成为二十种。巴利
Viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanānaṃ jātijarābhaṅgāvatthā jātijarāmaraṇanti vuttāti avatthānaṃ gahaṇena avatthāvantā gahitāva honti tadavinābhāvatoti āha ‘‘jātijarāmaraṇāpadesena viññāṇādīnaṃ niddiṭṭhattā’’ti. Apadesenāti jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ kathanena. Imeti viññāṇādayo. Āyatiṃ vipākavaṭṭanti paccuppannahetuto bhāvīnaṃ anāgatānaṃ gahitattā. Teti avijjādayo. Ākāratoti sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅgahe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā . Tato ākārato. Vīsatividhā hontīti atīte hetupañcakādibhedato vīsatividhā honti.
在这里,行与识之间有一个连接:因为从因到果是毫无间断地生起的,所以这是因与果相互关联的一个连接;有与生之间也是这样。而受与爱之间,则因为从果到因是毫无间断地生起的,所以这是果与因相互关联的一个连接。因为即使是果法,也能成为其他具有因性的法的缘。巴利
Saṅkhāraviññāṇānañcettha antarā eko sandhīti hetuto phalassa avicchedappavattibhāvato hetuphalassa sambandhabhūto eko sandhi, tathā bhavajātīnamantarā. Vedanātaṇhānamantarā pana phalato hetuno avicchedappavattibhāvato phalahetusambandhabhūto eko sandhi. Phalabhūtopi hi dhammo aññassa hetusabhāvassa dhammassa paccayo hotīti.
所谓“如是”,是回顾前面所说的那种方式。因此说“四种简略”等。“以一切行相”,就是以此处已说和未说的、在缘起分别、《发趣论》等中出现的所有行相。知,就是了知。见,就是以作为见的智眼现前照见。证知,就是通达——这些是同一个意思的不同说法。那“知”,就是以如实知的意思;以了知的意思,就是以无常等行相通达的意思。巴利
Itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘catusaṅkhepa’’ntiādi. Sabbākāratoti idha vuttehi ca avuttehi ca paṭiccasamuppādavibhaṅge anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānādīsu ca āgatehi sabbehi ākārehi. Jānātīti avabujjhati. Passatīti dassanabhūtena ñāṇacakkhunā paccakkhato passati. Aññāti paṭivijjhatīti tesaṃyeva vevacanaṃ. Tanti taṃ jānanaṃ. Ñātaṭṭhenāti yathāsabhāvato jānanaṭṭhena. Pajānanaṭṭhenāti aniccādīhi pakārehi paṭivijjhanaṭṭhena.
现在,为了说明这部有轮为什么被引到这里,就说了“以此”等话。其中,“那些法”指的是无明等法。“如实知”就是用大金刚智如实了知。“厌离”就是靠强有力的观智而厌离。“离染、解脱”就是靠圣道而离染、解脱。“杀敌”是连接语。在这里,当世尊离染、解脱时,就叫做杀敌。之后,又取正觉那一刹那来说“已杀、已摧、已灭”。这样,由于杀掉了敌,所以是阿拉汉;同样,以这种方式,也由于杀掉了前面所说的轮回之轮的诸行等辐,所以是阿拉汉。在这里,这样说——巴利
Idāni yadatthamidaṃ bhavacakkaṃ idhānītaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iminā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha te dhammeti te avijjādike dhamme. Yathābhūtaṃ ñatvāti mahāvajirañāṇena yāthāvato jānitvā. Nibbindantoti balavavipassanāya nibbindanto. Virajjanto vimuccantoti ariyamaggehi virajjanto vimuccanto. Are hanīti sambandho. Tattha yadā bhagavā virajjati vimuccati, tadā are hanati nāma. Tato paraṃ pana abhisambuddhakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘hani vihani viddhaṃsesī’’ti. Evampi arānaṃ hatattā arahanti evaṃ imināpi pakārena yathāvuttasaṃsāracakkassa saṅkhārādiarānaṃ hatattā arahaṃ. Etthedaṃ vuccati –
轮回之轮的辐条,早已被智慧之剑斩断;
因为轮辐被世间怙主这样斩断,所以被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato; Lokanāthena tenesa, arahanti pavuccatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.128);
所谓“最上应供”,就是因为处在最上应供的状态。转轮王的轮宝是无生命的,可一旦出现,世间就在那里供养它,别处的殊胜供养就都断了;更何况正自觉者出现于世呢?为了说明这一点,才说“如来出现时”等话。即使有人说“我要以一一法蕴、一一住处来供养”,因为这是专门针对导师而做的,所以说“为世尊”等。更何况其他殊胜供养呢?也就是说,跟前面所说的相比,那些由威力低劣的天和人所作的不太广大的殊胜供养,在阿拉汉的境界里还有什么可说的呢?因为对资具等应当受用,所以是阿拉汉;又因为前面所说的衣等资具和殊胜供养,以最上应供的状态而与之相称,所以也是阿拉汉。为了便于理解这个含义,才这样说——巴利
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattāti uttamadakkhiṇeyyabhāvato. Cakkavattino acetane cakkaratane uppanne tattheva loko pūjaṃ karoti, aññattha pūjāvisesā pacchijjanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana sammāsambuddhe uppanneti dassento ‘‘uppannetathāgate’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ekekaṃ dhammakkhandhaṃ ekekavihārena pūjessāmī’’ti vuttepi satthāraṃyeva uddissa katattā ‘‘bhagavantaṃ uddissā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ko pana vādo aññesaṃ pūjāvisesānanti yathāvuttato aññesaṃ amahesakkhehi devamanussehi kariyamānānaṃ nātiuḷārānaṃ pūjāvisesānaṃ arahabhāve kā nāma kathā. Paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahanti yathāvuttacīvarādipaccayānaṃ pūjāvisesassa ca aggadakkhiṇeyyabhāvena anucchavikattāpi arahaṃ. Imassapi atthassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ idaṃ vuccati –
“殊胜供养与资具一同”,
因为这位世间导师值得供养;
在世间,他们名副其实地被称为“阿拉汉”。
因此,这位胜者才配得上“阿拉汉”这个名称。巴利
‘‘Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi, Yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho; Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke, Tasmā jino arahati nāmameta’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.129);
“因为怕坏名声”,意思就是怕没有好名声、怕丢脸、怕被人指责。所谓“暗中作恶”,就是想着“别让人知道”,偷偷地干坏事。而这位世尊从来不会这样做——因为他在菩提树下就已经把一切恶的根源彻底断除了,所以任何时候都不会这样做。这里有一首偈颂:巴利
Asilokabhayenāti akittibhayena, ayasabhayena garahābhayenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Raho pāpaṃ karontīti ‘‘mā naṃ koci jaññā’’ti rahasi pāpaṃ karonti. Evamesa na kadāci karotīti esa bhagavā pāpahetūnaṃ bodhimaṇḍeyeva suppahīnattā kadācipi evaṃ na karoti. Hoti cettha –
因为对于如是者(佛陀)来说,在恶业上根本不存在什么隐秘之处;
因为没有任何隐秘,他被人们称为阿罗汉。巴利
‘‘Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino; Rahābhāvena tenesa, arahaṃ iti vissuto’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.130);
现在,为了摄取“乐”的含义,把前面所说的全部含义都总摄起来加以开示,所以说了“于此有……”等话。在“彼牟尼是烦恼敌”这一句里,为了偈颂连缀顺畅,应当看出是省略了随韵;意思是“因为已杀灭烦恼敌”。在“及资具等应受”这一句里,也应当依照前面所说的方式,看出是省略了随韵。巴利
Idāni sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ yathāvuttamatthaṃ sabbampi saṅgahetvā dassento āha ‘‘hoti cetthā’’tiādi. Kilesārīna so munīti ettha gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ niggahītalopo daṭṭhabbo, kilesārīnaṃ hatattāti attho. Paccayādīna cārahoti etthāpi niggahītalopo vuttanayeneva daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,“阿拉汉”还有另一种理解方式应当了解——“远离”就是阿拉汉,意思是处于极其遥远的状态。那么,为什么说是极其遥远的状态呢?因为那些没有修习身体、没有修习戒、没有修习心、没有修习慧的人,正因如此,贪、嗔、痴都还没有断除,他们不熟悉圣法,在圣法中没有受过调伏,没有见过圣法,没有走上正道,反而走上了邪道——正因如此,他们与阿拉汉极其遥远。世尊确实这样说过——巴利
Arahanti ettha ayamaparopi nayo daṭṭhabbo – ārakāti arahaṃ, suvidūrabhāvato icceva attho. Kuto pana suvidūrabhāvatoti? Ye abhāvitakāyā abhāvitasīlā abhāvitacittā abhāvitapaññā, tato eva appahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa akovidā ariyadhamme avinītā ariyadhammassa adassāvino appaṭipannā micchāpaṭipannā ca, tato suvidūrabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,就算有个比丘抓住我僧伽梨的衣角,紧跟在后面,一步一步踩着我的脚印走,但他要是贪求财物、对欲乐有强烈的贪爱,心怀恶意,心存恶念,忘失正念,没有正知,心不专注,心思散乱,六根不收摄,那么他其实离我很远,我也离他很远。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为这样的比丘没有见到法;没有见到法的人,就看不到我。巴利
‘‘Saṅghāṭikaṇṇe cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandho assa pāde pādaṃ nikkhipanto, so ca hoti abhijjhālu kāmesu tibbasārāgo byāpannacitto paduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo muṭṭhassati asampajāno asamāhito vibbhantacitto pākatindriyo, atha kho so ārakāva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu na passati, dhammaṃ apassanto na maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
就像前面说的那样,即使那些人早晚都待在导师身边,也不能因此就说他们“在导师身边”,导师对他们来说也是如此。所以,对不善之人来说,阿拉汉是“远离的、在远处的”。因此这样说——巴利
Yathāvuttapuggalā hi sacepi sāyaṃpātaṃ satthu santikāvacarāva siyuṃ, na te tāvatā ‘‘satthu santikā’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti asappurisānaṃ ārakā dūreti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些志趣低劣的人,没有走在正道上。
世尊远离他们,所以被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Sammā na paṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
同样地,“ārakā”(远离)就是阿罗汉,意思是“亲近”。那么,从哪里说是亲近呢?因为那些已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧的人,正因如此,断除了贪、嗔、痴,通达圣法,在圣法中善受调教,已见圣法,正确行道,所以说是亲近。世尊也这样说过:巴利
Tathā ārakāti arahaṃ, āsannabhāvatoti attho. Kuto pana āsannabhāvatoti? Ye bhāvitakāyā bhāvitasīlā bhāvitacittā bhāvitapaññā, tato eva pahīnarāgadosamohā ariyadhammassa kovidā ariyadhamme suvinītā ariyadhammassa dassāvino sammāpaṭipannā, tato āsannabhāvato. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,即使一位比丘住在离我一百由旬远的地方,只要他不贪求诸欲,没有强烈的贪染,内心没有嗔恨,没有恶意的想法,正念现前,具足正知,入定,心一境性,守护根门,那么他其实就在我身边,我也在他身边。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为那位比丘见到了法,见到法的人就是见到了我。巴利
‘‘Yojanasate cepi me, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vihareyya, so ca hoti anabhijjhālu kāmesu na tibbasārāgo abyāpannacitto apaduṭṭhamanasaṅkappo upaṭṭhitassati sampajāno samāhito ekaggacitto saṃvutindriyo, atha kho so santikeva mayhaṃ, ahañca tassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Dhammañhi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu passati, dhammaṃ passanto maṃ passatī’’ti (itivu. 92).
像这样的人,即使与导师相隔一百由旬,也仍然在导师身边;不能因为距离远,就说他们是“远离导师的人”,导师对他们来说也是如此。所以,对善人而言,阿拉汉就是“虽远却近”。因此这样说——巴利
Tathārūpā hi puggalā satthu yojanasatantarikāpi honti, na tāvatā te ‘‘satthu dūracārino’’ti vattabbā, tathā satthāpi nesaṃ. Iti sappurisānaṃ ārakā āsanneti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些正确修行的人,志向极为高远;
他们离那些人很远,却又近在眼前,因此这位战胜五魔的胜者也被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Ārakā tehi āsanne, tenāpi arahaṃ jino’’ti.
那些贪欲等恶法,在谁的相续中生起,就会给他带来现世和来生的祸害,而且和导向涅槃的修行道路完全是直接对立的。所以,为了圆满自利利他而正确修行的人,应当远远避开、舍弃、断除这些法,因此称为“应离”。而这些法,世尊在菩提树下就已经用圣道完全断尽、彻底根除了。正如经中所说:巴利
Ye ime rāgādayo pāpadhammā yasmiṃ santāne uppajjanti, tassa diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi anatthaṃ āvahanti, nibbānagāminiyā paṭipadāya ekaṃseneva ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ca, te attahitaṃ parahitañca paripūretuṃ sammā paṭipajjantehi sādhūhi dūrato rahitabbā pariccajitabbā pahātabbāti rahā nāma, te ca yasmā bhagavato bodhimūleyeva ariyamaggena sabbaso pahīnā susamucchinnā. Yathāha –
婆罗门,如来的贪已被断除,嗔已被断除,痴已被断除,一切恶不善法都已被断除,连根拔起,像截断的多罗树一样,归于无有,未来不会再产生。巴利
‘‘Tathāgatassa kho, brāhmaṇa, rāgo pahīno doso moho, sabbepi pāpakā akusalā dhammā pahīnā ucchinnamūlā tālāvatthukatā anabhāvaṃkatā āyatiṃ anuppādadhammā’’ti (pārā. 9).
所以,他完全没有这些“应远离的恶法”,因此应当称为“araho”。随着读音变化,把“o”替换成“a”,就说成“araha”。因此这样说:巴利
Tasmā sabbaso na santi etassa rahāti arahoti vattabbe okārassa sānusāraṃ akārādesaṃ katvā ‘‘araha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
恶劣之法就叫“rahā”,因为善人应当远离它们。
因为那些已被彻底断除,所以世尊被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato’’ti.
那些已经完全遍知诸蕴、断尽烦恼、修成圣道、证得灭谛的阿罗汉、诸漏已尽者;那些还在有学阶段、尚未达到究竟心位、正安住于希求无上轭安稳的人;以及那些修行清净、意乐贤善、具足信戒多闻等功德的人——世尊不远离他们,不舍弃他们,因此称为阿罗汉。因为圣者们由于亲自现见了导师所教导的法,所以与导师的法身确实不曾分离。正如具寿宾吉耶所说:巴利
Ye te sabbaso pariññātakkhandhā pahīnakilesā bhāvitamaggā sacchikatanirodhā arahanto khīṇāsavā, ye ca sekhā appattamānasā anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ patthayamānā viharanti, ye ca parisuddhappayogā kalyāṇajjhāsayā saddhāsīlasutādiguṇasampannā puggalā, tehi na rahitabbo na pariccajitabbo, te ca bhagavatāti arahaṃ. Tathā hi ariyapuggalā satthārā diṭṭhadhammassa paccakkhakaraṇato satthu dhammasarīrena avirahitāva honti. Yathāha āyasmā piṅgiyo –
我用内心去看他,就像用眼睛亲眼看见一样,
婆罗门,我日夜都不放逸;
我礼敬着,就这样度过夜晚,
正因为这样,我才觉得自己从未离开过。
信、喜、意、念,
这些不能使我离开乔达摩的教法;
无论这位智慧广大的人走向哪个方向,
我不离他。巴利
‘‘Passāmi naṃ manasā cakkhunāva, Rattindivaṃ brāhmaṇa appamatto; Namassamāno vivasemi rattiṃ, Teneva maññāmi avippavāsaṃ. ‘‘Saddhā ca pīti ca mano sati ca, Nāpentime gotamasāsanamhā; Yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ vajati bhūripañño, Sa tena teneva natohamasmī’’ti. (su. ni. 1148-1149);
正因为这样,他们不另外推举别的导师。就像经里说的——巴利
Teneva ca te aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisanti. Yathāha –
比丘们,这是不可能的,绝无此理:一个见具足的人会认别的导师。这种事不存在。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
即使是善凡夫,大多数也对导师怀有毫不动摇的信心。因为善修行者这样的殊胜之人不会缺少这种信心,而导师也不会缺少他们的信心,所以没有能舍弃他们的“rahā”;或者说,善人们没有应当舍弃他的“rahā”,因此称为阿拉汉。由此而说——巴利
Kalyāṇaputhujjanāpi yebhuyyena satthari niccalasaddhā eva honti. Iti suppaṭipannehi purisavisesehi avirahitabbato tesañca avirahanato na santi etassa rahā pariccajanakā, natthi vā etassa rahā sādhūhi pariccajitabbatāti arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
那些亲证正法的圣者,行境清净;
他不曾离开他们,所以这位救护者被称为阿拉汉。巴利
‘‘Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato’’ti.
“raho”也指“行走”。但世尊并没有在轮回中流转——所谓在种种趣处之间来回游荡的那种“行走”,因为能灭尽业力的圣道已经在菩提树下,把连同一切资粮在内的业力轮转彻底摧毁了。正如经中所说:巴利
Rahoti ca gamanaṃ vuccati, bhagavato ca nānāgatīsu paribbhamanasaṅkhātaṃ saṃsāre gamanaṃ natthi kammakkhayakarena ariyamaggena bodhimūleyeva sabbaso sasambhārassa kammavaṭṭassa viddhaṃsitattā. Yathāha –
依靠这个,我投生为天神,或者成为甘塔拔,或者变成飞鸟;
凭这个,我可能投生为夜叉,或者舍弃人身;
我的诸漏已经灭尽,已被摧毁,已被连根拔除。巴利
‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36);
他没有任何隐秘的行径,在诸趣中也不再受生,因此也称为阿罗汉。所以这样说:巴利
Evaṃ natthi etassa raho gamanaṃ gatīsu paccājātītipi arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
在轮回之中,他完全没有任何隐秘的行走。
已断除生死,是阿罗汉、善逝,被认为是已死。巴利
‘‘Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato’’ti.
世尊也因为值得称赞而称为阿拉汉。文字学家们把“araha”这个词解释为称赞。而世尊值得称赞的特质不是别人共有的,是如实证得的功德,在天人世间牢牢确立。确实,当智者、天人、梵天,或者世尊自己,这样逐一分别称扬他的每一种功德——他具有无上的戒、无上的定、无上的慧、无上的解脱,无与伦比、与无与伦比者相等、无可比拟、无有对等、无有匹敌——的时候,是没办法把这些功德说到底的。所以,世尊也因为值得称赞而称为阿拉汉。因此这样说——巴利
Pāsaṃsattā vā bhagavā arahaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi pasaṃsāyaṃ arahasaddaṃ vaṇṇenti. Pāsaṃsabhāvo ca bhagavato anaññasādhāraṇato yathābhuccaguṇādhigato sadevake loke suppatiṭṭhito. Tathā hesa anuttarena sīlena anuttarena samādhinā anuttarāya paññāya anuttarāya vimuttiyā asamo asamasamo appaṭimo appaṭibhāgo appaṭipuggaloti evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ guṇe vibhajitvā vuccamāne paṇḍitapurisehi devehi brahmehi bhagavatā vā pana pariyosāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarūpo. Iti pāsaṃsattāpi bhagavā arahaṃ. Tenedaṃ vuccati –
在这包括天神的世间里,没有任何众生在功德上能和他相等。
因此,也因为他值得称赞,两足中最尊贵者就是阿罗汉。巴利
‘‘Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo’’ti.
不过,从统摄一切的角度来说——巴利
Sabbasaṅgahavasena pana –
愚钝的人离他很远,有智慧的人也同样离他很远。
因为彻底断除了隐秘之处,所以应受智者供养;
他在各种生命存在状态中没有任何隐秘,所以值得赞叹,是阿罗汉、胜者。巴利
Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, ārakā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jinoti.
到这里,“应供”这个词的全部含义就已经完整解释清楚了。巴利
Ettāvatā ca ‘‘araha’’nti padassa sabbaso attho vibhatto hoti.
现在,为了说明“正自觉者”这个词的含义,世尊说“正确地、自己地”等等。其中,“正确地”是指没有颠倒。“自己地”是指亲自,也就是不靠别人引导的意思。因为在“正觉者”这个词里,“正”这个字应当理解为表示“自己”的意思。“一切法”是指没有剩余的一切应知之法。那么,这里为什么能得出“一切法”这个特定的范围呢?因为这里没有只取一部分。如果不只取一部分,就能知道所取的是完全没有遗漏的,就像“受了戒的人不布施”这种说法一样。这样理解之后,应当知道“佛”这个词的成立只在于主动者,因为这里并没有被动语态的要求。因为在这里,从字面上只能得到“正确地、自己地觉悟,所以是正自觉者”这么多,而“一切法”则是根据义理取来说的。觉悟的作用如果没有对象,那就不合理了。巴利
Idāni sammāsambuddhoti imassa atthaṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘sammā sāmañcā’’tiādi. Tattha sammāti aviparītaṃ. Sāmanti sayameva, aparaneyyo hutvāti attho. Sambuddhoti hi ettha saṃ-saddo sayanti etassa atthassa bodhakoti daṭṭhabbo. Sabbadhammānanti anavasesānaṃ neyyadhammānaṃ. Kathaṃ panettha sabbadhammānanti ayaṃ viseso labbhatīti? Ekadesassa aggahaṇato. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatāva viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti. Evañca katvā atthavisesanapekkhā kattari eva buddhasaddasiddhi veditabbā kammavacanicchāya abhāvato. ‘‘Sammā sāmañca buddhattā sammāsambuddho’’ti ettakameva hi idha saddato labbhati, ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti idaṃ pana atthato labbhamānaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Na hi bujjhanakiriyā avisayā yujjati.
现在,为了把“一切法”这个总说所指的范围分开来讲清楚,所以说了“应证知之法”等话。其中,“应证知”是指应当以殊胜的智慧,从无常等相、从特相等角度去了知的四谛法。“由应证知故为觉者”,意思是:因为具有应证知的性质而觉悟——在前期以观智等了知,在证得的刹那以道智了知,在之后以一切知智等了知。后面几句也是同样的道理。“应遍知之法”,是以无常等角度应当遍知的苦圣谛。“应断除”,是指属于集谛方面的法。“应作证”,是就涅槃而说的。这里用复数来表达,是考虑到有余依等依据理趣而成立的种种差别,或者这也是对四谛法的总说。正如后面会说“眼是苦谛”等等。总说是就那些意义尚未确定界限的法而作的。因为总说只是说出所列举之法的存在,而不是划定界限,所以用没有界限的复数来说,就像“无因法、无为法”那样。或者,“应作证”也包含果与解脱,而不只是涅槃,所以用复数来表达。同样,“应修习”这里也应当理解为包含诸禅那。正因为如此,世尊对塞拉婆罗门证明自己的觉位时,这样说了。巴利
Idāni tassā visayaṃ ‘‘sabbadhamme’’ti sāmaññato vuttaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘abhiññeyye dhamme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyeti aniccādito lakkhaṇarasādito ca abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānitabbe catusaccadhamme. Abhiññeyyato buddhoti abhiññeyyabhāvato bujjhi, pubbabhāge vipassanāpaññādīhi adhigamakkhaṇe maggapaññāya aparabhāge sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi aññāsīti attho. Ito paresupi eseva nayo . Pariññeyye dhammeti aniccādivasena parijānitabbaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccamāha. Pahātabbeti samudayapakkhiye. Sacchikātabbeti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Bahuvacananiddeso panettha sopādisesādikaṃ pariyāyasiddhaṃ bhedamapekkhitvā kato, uddeso vā ayaṃ catusaccadhammānampi. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘cakkhu dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Uddeso ca avinicchitatthaparicchedassa dhammassa vasena karīyati. Uddesena hi uddisiyamānānaṃ atthitāmattaṃ vuccati, na paricchedoti aparicchedena bahuvacanena vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘appaccayā dhammā, asaṅkhatā dhammā’’ti. Sacchikātabbeti vā phalavimuttīnampi gahaṇaṃ, na nibbānassevāti bahuvacananiddeso kato. Evañca bhāvetabbeti ettha jhānānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Teneva cāhāti selabrāhmaṇassa attano buddhabhāvaṃ sādhento evamāha.
那么,世尊是自己证明自己的正自觉吗?是的,他以大悲心证明,因为这不是别人的境界。其中,“我是唯一的正自觉者,我是战胜一切者、了知一切者”等经文,以及这里“应证知”等经文,都是这个意思的证明。其中,用“应证知”说的是苦谛,用“应修习”说的是道谛。而这里的“ca”这个词有集合未说之义的作用,由此应当知道包含了“应作证”。或者,仅凭“应证知”这一项,就以余类智显示了应遍知之法与应作证之法。因此,“我是觉者”的意思是:因为四谛已被我觉悟,而且没有任何离开谛的所知法,所以我觉悟了一切所知,即我已了知。不过在《塞拉经注》中是这样说的——巴利
Kiṃ pana bhagavā sayameva attano sammāsambuddhabhāvaṃ sādhetīti? Sādheti mahākaruṇāya aññesaṃ avisayato. Tattha ‘‘ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sabbābhibhū sabbavidūhamasmī’’tiādīni (ma. ni. 2.341; mahāva. 11) suttapadāni, idameva ca ‘‘abhiññeyya’’ntiādi suttapadaṃ etassa atthassa sādhakaṃ. Tattha abhiññeyyanti iminā dukkhasaccamāha, bhāvetabbanti maggasaccaṃ. Ca-saddo panettha avuttasamuccayattho, tena sacchikātabbassa gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā abhiññeyyanti imināva pārisesañāyena pariññeyyadhamme sacchikātabbadhamme ca dasseti. Tasmā buddhosmīti yasmā cattāri saccāni mayā buddhāni, saccavinimuttañca kiñci ñeyyaṃ natthi, tasmā sabbampi ñeyyaṃ buddhosmi, abbhaññāsinti attho. Selasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana idaṃ vuttaṃ –
“应证知”指的是明与解脱。“应修习”指的是道谛。“应断除”指的是集谛。不过,通过因的说明,由于果的成立,它们的果——灭谛和苦谛——也已经被说到了。这样,“应作证”已作证,“应遍知”已遍知,这一点也包括在这里面了。于是,为了开示四谛的修习、四谛修习的果以及解脱,就以合理的理由成立觉者的身份:“应觉已觉,我已成为觉者。”巴利
‘‘Abhiññeyyanti vijjā ca vimutti ca. Bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ. Pahātabbaṃ samudayasaccaṃ. Hetuvacanena pana phalasiddhito tesaṃ phalāni nirodhasaccadukkhasaccānipi vuttāneva honti. Evaṃ sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikataṃ, pariññātabbaṃ pariññātanti idampettha saṅgahitamevāti catusaccabhāvanaṃ catusaccabhāvanāphalañca vimuttiṃ dassento ‘bujjhitabbaṃ bujjhitvā buddho jātosmī’ti yuttahetunā buddhabhāvaṃ sādhetī’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.399).
在这里,“明”是依最胜的说明方式而说的道明。“解脱”是果解脱。虽然在这里,道明也以应当修习的方式被包含在内,但一切自性法都是应当证知的,所以说到了明是应当证知的。应当知道,正是以这个道理,也说到了这一切都是应当证知的。应当知道,因为离开了果,因性本身就不可能成立,所以通过说因,就说到了果的成就。因为,以能证得涅槃,道才有因的性质;以能产生苦,渴爱才有集的性质。巴利
Tattha vijjāti maggavijjā vuttā ukkaṭṭhaniddesena. Vimuttīti phalavimutti. Kāmañcettha maggavijjāpi bhāvetabbabhāvena gahitā, sabbepi pana sabhāvadhammā abhiññeyyāti vijjāya abhiññeyyabhāvo vutto. Imināva nayena sabbesampi abhiññeyyabhāvo vutto evāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Phalena vinā hetubhāvasseva abhāvato hetuvacanena phalasiddhi vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Nirodhassa hi sampāpanena maggassa hetubhāvo, dukkhassa nibbattanena taṇhāya samudayabhāvoti.
为了用谛的方式,把依通说所说的义理,连同门与所缘、依门而起的诸法以及蕴等,同样以谛的方式分别开示,所以开始说“再者……”等话。所谓“作为根本因”,是说虽然无明等其他因也存在,但以它们根本因的身份来说。因为渴爱既是业种种差别的因,又充当助伴,所以是苦种种差别的首要原因。“能令生起”就是能使之产生。“前渴爱”指前一生已经形成的渴爱。“两者”指眼以及眼的集起。“不转起”指不转起的原因。“遍知灭”指以证得、现观的方式通达灭。“以逐一词句引出”指以“眼、眼集、眼灭”这样的方式,一个范畴一个范畴地分别指出。渴爱虽然也属于应当遍知的范围,又被包含在取蕴中,是行苦,但为了显示它归入苦谛,所以说“色渴爱等六种渴爱身”。因此,在现在这一存在中,渴爱因为被蕴所包含、又是行苦,所以是苦谛。然而,在某一生命体中,作为该生命体的根本因、能令它生起的、前一生已形成的渴爱,则应当理解为集谛。巴利
Evaṃ saccavasena sāmaññato vuttamatthaṃ dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattadhammehi ceva khandhādīhi ca saccavaseneva vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mūlakāraṇabhāvenāti santesupi avijjādīsu aññesu kāraṇesu tesampi mūlabhūtakāraṇabhāvena. Taṇhā hi kammassa vicittabhāvahetuto sahāyabhāvūpagamanato ca dukkhavicittatāya padhānakāraṇaṃ. Samuṭṭhāpikāti uppādikā. Purimataṇhāti purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā. Ubhinnanti cakkhussa taṃsamudayassa ca. Appavattīti appavattinimittaṃ. Nirodhappajānanāti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nirodhassa paṭivijjhanā. Ekekapaduddhārenāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ cakkhusamudayo cakkhunirodho’’tiādinā ekekakoṭṭhāsaniddhāraṇena. Taṇhāyapi pariññeyyabhāvasabbhāvato upādānakkhandhogadhattā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ca dukkhasaccasaṅgahaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘rūpataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā vattamānabhave taṇhā khandhapariyāpannattā saṅkhāradukkhabhāvato ca dukkhasaccaṃ. Yasmiṃ pana attabhāve sā uppajjati, tassa attabhāvassa mūlakāraṇabhāvena samuṭṭhāpikā purimabhavasiddhā taṇhā samudayasaccanti gahetabbā.
“遍处”是指以遍处为所缘的禅那。“三十二行相”是指三十二个身体部分,以及以它们为所缘的禅那。“九有”是指:欲有、色有、无色有、想有、无想有、非想非非想有、一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有,这就是九有。其中,“有”就是存在。与被称为欲贪的欲相结合的存在,或者被称为欲的存在,就是欲有,也就是十一个欲界地。舍弃欲之后,与被称为色贪的色相结合的存在,或者被称为色的存在,就是色有,也就是十六个色界地。舍弃欲和色之后,与被称为无色贪的无色相结合的存在,或者被称为无色的存在,就是无色有,也就是四个无色地。有想者的存在是想有;或者,在那有当中存在想,所以是想有。它包含欲有,以及除了无想有之外的色有,还有除了非想非非想有之外的无色有。不是想有的,就是无想有,它是色有的一部分。因为不存在粗重的想,所以是“非有想”;因为存在微细的想,所以是“非无想”;因此称为非想非非想,与它相应的有就是非想非非想有。或者说,因为粗重的想不存在,而微细的想存在,所以在这个有当中是非有想、非无想,因此是非想非非想有,它是无色有的一部分。与一个色蕴混杂的存在,或者这个有具有一个蕴,所以是一蕴有,它就是无想有。与四个无色蕴混杂的存在,或者这个有具有四个蕴,所以是四蕴有,它就是无色有。与五个蕴混杂的存在,或者这个有具有五个蕴,所以是五蕴有;它既属于欲有,也属于色有的一部分。另外,“蕴”是诸蕴的另一种说法,因此“这个有具有一个蕴,所以是一蕴有”等含义,在这里也应当这样理解。“四禅”是指没有取所缘差别的四种色界禅;或者这是指异熟禅的摄取。在这里应当知道:对于善法来说,作为亲依止、能生起渴爱的,是先前的渴爱。而对于唯作法,则是那些唯作法生起之处,即作为该自体之因的渴爱。“随顺”在这里应当依照“行是苦谛,无明是集谛”这样的次第来连接。巴利
Kasiṇānīti kasiṇārammaṇikajjhānāni. Dvattiṃsākārāti dvattiṃsa koṭṭhāsā tadārammaṇajjhānāni ca. Nava bhavāti kāmabhavo rūpabhavo arūpabhavo saññībhavo asaññībhavo nevasaññīnāsaññībhavo ekavokārabhavo catuvokārabhavo pañcavokārabhavoti nava bhavā. Tattha bhavatīti bhavo, kāmarāgasaṅkhātena kāmena yutto bhavo, kāmasaṅkhāto vā bhavo kāmabhavo, ekādasa kāmāvacarabhūmiyo. Kāme pahāya rūparāgasaṅkhātena rūpena yutto bhavo, rūpasaṅkhāto vā bhavo rūpabhavo, soḷasa rūpāvacarabhūmiyo. Kāmañca rūpañca pahāya arūparāgasaṅkhātena arūpena yutto bhavo, arūpasaṅkhāto vā bhavo arūpabhavo, catasso āruppabhūmiyo. Saññāvataṃ bhavo saññībhavo, saññā vā ettha bhave atthīti saññībhavo, so kāmabhavo ca asaññībhavamutto rūpabhavo ca nevasaññīnāsaññībhavamutto arūpabhavo ca hoti. Na saññībhavo asaññībhavo, so rūpabhavekadeso. Oḷārikattābhāvato nevasaññā, sukhumattassa sabbhāvato nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, tāya yutto bhavo nevasaññānāsaññābhavo. Atha vā oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvā sukhumāya ca bhāvā nevasaññā nāsaññā asmiṃ bhaveti nevasaññānāsaññābhavo, so arūpabhavekadeso. Ekena rūpakkhandhena vokiṇṇo bhavo, ekena vā vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavo, so asaññībhavo. Catūhi arūpakkhandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, catūhi vā vokāro assa bhavassāti catuvokārabhavo, so arūpabhavo eva. Pañcahi khandhehi vokiṇṇo bhavo, pañcahi vā vokāro assa bhavassāti pañcavokārabhavo, so kāmabhavo ca rūpabhavekadeso ca hoti. Vokāroti vā khandhānametamadhivacanaṃ, tasmā eko vokāro assa bhavassāti ekavokārabhavoti evamādināpettha attho veditabbo. Cattāri jhānānīti aggahitārammaṇavisesāni cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni. Vipākajjhānānaṃ vā etaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Ettha ca kusaladhammānaṃ upanissayabhūtā taṇhāsamuṭṭhāpikā purimataṇhāti veditabbā. Kiriyadhammānaṃ pana yattha te kiriyadhammā uppajjanti, tassa attabhāvassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhā. Anulomatoti ettha ‘‘saṅkhārā dukkhasaccaṃ, avijjā samudayasacca’’nti iminā anukkamena yojetabbaṃ.
“随觉者”是指与应当觉知之法相应而觉知的人。因此,因为从总相和别相、以及逐字逐句来说,他都觉知了一切法,所以才这样说。说了什么呢?说的是“因为正确、如实地觉知了一切法”,意思是对一切所知,以一切方式无颠倒地、自己完全现证觉悟。由此显示了:他不依赖他人的教导,能以一切方式通达一切法,其作用系于愿望,被称为无碍智的一切知智的证得。巴利
Anubuddhoti bujjhitabbadhammassa anurūpato buddho. Tenāti yasmā sāmaññato visesato ca ekekapaduddhārena sabbadhamme buddho, tasmā vuttaṃ. Kiṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā’’ti, sabbassapi ñeyyassa sabbākārato aviparītaṃ sayameva abhisambuddhattāti attho. Imināssa paropadesarahitassa sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa adhigamo dassito.
难道除了全知智之外,还有另一种无碍智吗?不然的话,“六种不共智就是佛智”这句话不就矛盾了吗?并不矛盾。因为这是为了显示,同一个智在所缘和生起方式上与其他智不同,所以从两个方面来说。实际上,那同一个智,以无余的有为法、无为法和假名法为所缘,所以叫全知智;又因为在那里面没有障碍,以无执无碍的方式运作,所以叫无碍智。正如《无碍解道》里说的:“能知一切有为、无为、无余,所以叫全知智;在那里面没有障碍,所以叫无碍智。”等等。因此,这两者在意义上没有差别,而且必须完全这样理解。否则的话,全知智和无碍智就会变成共通的智,也会变成不以一切法为所缘。因为世尊的智连极微小的障碍都没有,如果无碍智不以一切法为所缘,那么在他不运作的地方就有障碍存在,这样一来它就不可能真的是无碍了。或者换个说法,就算无碍智和全知智是两回事,但在这里,因为它在一切处都无障碍地运作,所以“无碍智”指的就是全知智本身。而因为证得了这个智,世尊被称为全知者、一切知者、正自觉者,并不是因为只一次通达了一切法。正如《无碍解道》里说的:“这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,与全知智一起证得的、名为‘佛’的施设,也就是解脱的终极。”因为通过证得能通达一切法的智,世尊的相续中才有了无余地通达一切法的能力。巴利
Nanu ca sabbaññutaññāṇato aññaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, aññathā ‘‘cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni buddhañāṇānī’’ti vacanaṃ virujjheyyāti? Na virujjhati visayappavattibhedavasena aññehi asādhāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ ekasseva ñāṇassa dvidhā vuttattā. Ekameva hi taṃ ñāṇaṃ anavasesasaṅkhatāsaṅkhatasammutidhammavisayatāya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha ca āvaraṇābhāvato nissaṅgacāramupādāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti vuttaṃ. Yathāha paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.119) ‘‘sabbaṃ saṅkhatamasaṅkhataṃ anavasesaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi. Tasmā natthi nesaṃ atthato bhedo, ekantena cetaṃ evamicchitabbaṃ. Aññathā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇānaṃ sādhāraṇatā asabbadhammārammaṇatā ca āpajjeyya. Na hi bhagavato ñāṇassa aṇumattampi āvaraṇaṃ atthi, anāvaraṇañāṇassa asabbadhammārammaṇabhāve yattha taṃ na pavattati, tatthāvaraṇasabbhāvato anāvaraṇabhāvoyeva na siyā. Atha vā pana hotu aññameva anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇato, idha pana sabbattha appaṭihatavuttitāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ, tassa cādhigamanena bhagavā sabbaññū sabbavidū sammāsambuddhoti ca vuccati na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhanato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.162) ‘‘vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti. Sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthañāṇasamadhigamena hi bhagavato santāne anavasesadhamme paṭivijjhituṃ samatthatā ahosīti.
这里有人问:那么,这个智在运作时,是对一切境一次性运作,还是次第运作呢?对此,如果它是对一切境一次性运作,那么当过去、未来、现在、内、外等种种不同的有为法,以及无为法和假名法同时呈现时,就像远远看着画布的人一样,无法分辨清楚了。若真是这样,那么对于以“一切法无我”来观照的修行者来说,就会变成:一切法都以未经分辨的形态,成为世尊之智的所缘。有人说:“诸佛之智在一切时,都以一切所知法的住立自相为所缘,远离分别而运作,因此他们被称为一切知者。这样说来,‘行走时大象入定,站立时也入定’这句话也就说得通了。”对这些人来说,上述过失同样无法避免;而且,既然是以住立自相为所缘,而过去、未来和假名法并没有那种住立自相,那么世尊的智就只会以一部分为所缘。所以,“智是一次性运作”是不合理的。巴利
Etthāha – kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedabhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ pekkhantassa viya paṭivibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbadhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇassa visayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitalakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te sabbavidūti vuccanti, evañca katvā ‘caraṃ samāhito nāgo, tiṭṭhantopi samāhito’ti idampi vacanaṃ suvuttaṃ hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vuttadosā nātivatti, ṭhitalakkhaṇārammaṇatāya ca atītānāgatasammutidhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā, tasmā sakiṃyeva ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati.
那么,认为智是依次在一切境域中转起的,这样说也不成立。因为所知对象随着种类、地域、自性等,以及方向、地点、时间等,有着无数差别;如果是要依次去了知,那么由于所知对象没有边际,就不可能对它毫无剩余地完全通达。有些人说:由于不会违背义理,所以世尊先把所知的一部分变成现量了知,然后对剩下的部分也以“同样如此”来决意确定,因此世尊是一切知者;而且那种智不是比量智,因为没有疑惑。世间只有伴随疑惑的,才是比量智。对他们来说,这也不成立。因为如果一切都不是现量,那么靠“不会违背义理”把所知的一部分变成现量了知之后,再对剩下的部分以“同样如此”来决意确定,就不可能成立。因为那所谓“剩下的部分”,并不是现量。巴利
Atha kamena sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti. Evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesappaṭivedho sambhavati apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū bhagavā, tañca ñāṇaṃ na anumānañāṇaṃ saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubaddhañhi loke anumānañāṇa’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttaṃ. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthāvisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanassa asambhavato. Yañhi taṃ sesaṃ, taṃ appaccakkhanti.
那么,难道那也属于现量,而它就不可能是“其余”的部分了吗?这些说法全都没有道理。为什么呢?因为这是不该思惟的境界。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,佛的境界是不应思惟、不可思惟的;谁要是去思惟它,就会落得疯狂、恼乱的下场。”(《增支部》4.77)
不过,这里的定论是这样的:凡是世尊想要了知的,无论是全部还是一部分,智都在那里无碍地运作,所以是以现量的方式生起;而且因为心不散乱,智是恒常等持的。如果所想了知的全部并不属于他的境界,那么智就不会是随愿望而运作的了。因为经上说:“一切法对于佛世尊来说,都是随转向、随愿望、随作意、随心生起而运作的。”(《大义释》69;《无碍解道》3.5)所以必定要这样信受。对于过去和未来的境界,世尊的智也是现量,因为它不经过比量、传闻和思择的取著。巴利
Atha tampi paccakkhaṃ tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘buddhavisayo, bhikkhave, acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yo cinteyya, ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ ekadeso vā, tattha tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato. Ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekantenevassā icchitabbā ‘‘sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanappaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhā manasikārappaṭibaddhā cittuppādappaṭibaddhā’’ti (mahāni. 69; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkagahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
难道在这个主张里,当想一次性了知一切时,世尊的智就会以尚未分辨一切所缘的形态生起,因此前面说的过失就逃不掉吗?不是这样,因为那个领域已经被净除。佛的领域已被净除,所以不可思议。否则,如果诸佛世尊的智和凡夫的智作用一样,那它就不是不可思议的了。所以,即使以一切法为所缘,它也能像以单一法为所缘那样,把那些法极其清晰地确定下来之后才生起——这一点在这里就是不可思议的。正如所说:“所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为边际,所知以智为边际。”(《无碍解道》3.5)同样,无论是总合地、各别地、一次性还是按次序,都能随其所愿,正确、亲自通达一切法,因此是正自觉者。巴利
Nanu ca etasmimpi pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosā nātivattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā, tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ, ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyya’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.5) evamekajjhaṃ visuṃ sakiṃ kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ sammā sāmaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho.
在这里,“明”是指:能知道应当知道的东西,所以叫“明”,意思是如实了知。或者,从摧毁自己对立面的角度叫“明”,也就是破除黑暗蕴等的意思。也正因为这样,从让自己的对象被了知的角度,也叫“明”。“具足”是指具备、圆满,或者完整无缺的意思。这里说的是《庵婆咤经》。“意所成神通”在这里是指:按照“比丘从这个身体化现出另一个身体,有色、由意所成、一切肢节俱全、诸根不缺”这种方式所说的神通,因为是在自身内部由禅那之意所生起的另一个意所成身,所以就它生起这一点,称为意所成神通。“六神通”是指神变等五种神通,再加上漏尽智。三明和八明在各地经中的不同说法,应当理解为是随所化众生的意乐而说的。七正法就是信、惭、愧、多闻、精进、念、慧。经中就是针对这些而说:“在这里,比丘有信、有惭、有愧、多闻、精进、念现前、有慧。”“四禅”是指任何四种色界禅那。巴利
Vijjāhīti ettha vindiyaṃ vindatīti vijjā, yāthāvato upalabbhatīti attho. Attano vā paṭipakkhassa vijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā, tamokkhandhādikassa padālanaṭṭhenāti attho. Tato eva attano visayassa viditakaraṇaṭṭhenapi vijjā. Sampannattāti samannāgatattā paripuṇṇattā vā, avikalattāti attho. Tatrāti ambaṭṭhasutte. Manomayiddhiyāti ettha ‘‘idha bhikkhu imamhā kāyā aññaṃ kāyaṃ abhinimmināti rūpiṃ manomayaṃ sabbaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ahīnindriya’’nti (dī. ni. 1.236) iminā nayena āgatā iddhi sarīrabbhantare aññasseva jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayassa sarīrassa nibbattivasena pavattā manomayiddhi nāma. Cha abhiññāti āsavakkhayañāṇena saddhiṃ iddhividhādikā pañcābhiññāyo. Tissannaṃ aṭṭhannañca vijjānaṃ tattha tattha sutte gahaṇaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Satta saddhammā nāma saddhā hirī ottappaṃ bāhusaccaṃ vīriyaṃ sati paññā ca. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘idha bhikkhu saddho hoti, hirimā, ottappī, bahussuto, āraddhavīriyo, upaṭṭhitassati, paññavā hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.330). Cattāri jhānānīti yāni kānici cattāri rūpāvacarajjhānāni.
那么,为什么这里只说戒等十五法为“行”呢?针对这个问难,回答说“就是这些”等等。因为十五法含摄三学,所以在趣向涅槃时,它们确实是成就之因。现在为了证明这个道理,引经说“如所说”等等。“世尊”等语句,是用来总结前面所说的内容。难道这种明行具足在声闻弟子身上也能得到吗?虽然也能得到,但并不像世尊那样。为了说明这一点,所以说“其中,明具足”等等。因为以漏尽明成就了一切知,所以说“明具足圆满,安住于世尊的一切知”。悲梵住含摄在四禅之中,属于行法所摄,而且依大悲等至的力量,在世尊身上有不共的特性,所以说“行具足圆满,安住于大悲性”。就像要让众生远离不利、投入有利,没有智慧是不可能的;同样,导师了知众生的利与不利,没有悲心也是不可能的。所以两者在各自的作用上都是不可或缺的。为了说明在什么地方以哪一个为主,所以说“他以一切知”等等。“如那明行具足者”这里,“如”只是个虚词,意思是:就像其他明行具足的人也能让人这样投入,这位也是这样。由此说明,这是明行具足者特有的修行方式。为了说明世尊这种明行具足是教法能导向出离、是声闻弟子正确修行的决定性原因,所以说“因此,他的”等等。其中“自苦”等的“等”字,包括了“他苦”和“自他俱苦”。其余内容容易理解。巴利
Kasmā panettha sīlādayoyeva pannarasa ‘‘caraṇa’’nti vuttāti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘imeyeva hī’’tiādi. Tena tesaṃ sikkhattayasaṅgahato nibbānupagamane ekaṃsato sādhanabhāvamāha. Idāni tadatthasādhanāya āgamaṃ dassento ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādimāha. Bhagavātiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Nanu cāyaṃ vijjācaraṇasampadā sāvakesupi labbhatīti? Kiñcāpi labbhati, na pana tathā, yathā bhagavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha vijjāsampadā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āsavakkhayavijjāya sabbaññubhāvasiddhito āha ‘‘vijjāsampadā bhagavato sabbaññutaṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Catūsu jhānesu antogadhabhāvena caraṇadhammapariyāpannattā karuṇābrahmavihārassa yathārahaṃ tassa ca mahākaruṇāsamāpattivasena asādhāraṇasabhāvassa bhagavati upalabbhanato āha ‘‘caraṇasampadā mahākāruṇikataṃ pūretvā ṭhitā’’ti. Yathā sattānaṃ anatthaṃ parivajjetvā atthe niyojanaṃ paññāya vinā na hoti, evaṃ nesaṃ atthānatthajānanaṃ satthu karuṇāya vinā na hotīti ubhayampi ubhayattha sakiccakameva siyā. Yattha pana yassā padhānabhāvo, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘so sabbaññutāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā taṃ vijjācaraṇasampannoti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ, yathā aññopi vijjācaraṇasampanno niyojeti, tathā ayanti attho. Tena vijjācaraṇasampannassevāyaṃ āveṇikā paṭipattīti dasseti. Sā panāyaṃ satthu vijjācaraṇasampadā sāsanassa niyyānikatāya sāvakānaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyā ekantakāraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tenassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha attantapādayoti ādi-saddena parantapaubhayantapā gahitā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在这里,通过明具足,显示了世尊智慧的广大;通过行具足,显示了悲悯的广大。在这两者当中,依靠智慧,世尊获得了法王的地位;依靠悲悯,则分享佛法。依靠智慧,厌离轮回之苦;依靠悲悯,忍受轮回之苦。依靠智慧,了知他人的苦;依靠悲悯,着手解除他人的苦。依靠智慧,朝向般涅槃;依靠悲悯,证得般涅槃。依靠智慧,自己渡过;依靠悲悯,令他人渡过。依靠智慧,成就佛果;依靠悲悯,成就佛的事业。或者,依靠悲悯,在菩萨阶段面向轮回;依靠智慧,对轮回不生喜乐。同样,依靠悲悯,令他人不受到伤害;依靠智慧,自己不被他人所畏惧。依靠悲悯,保护他人就是在保护自己;依靠智慧,保护自己就是在保护他人。同样,依靠悲悯,不折磨他人;依靠智慧,不折磨自己。因此,在为自利而行等四种人中,成就了第四种人的身份。同样,依靠悲悯,成为世间的依怙;依靠智慧,成为自己的依怙。依靠悲悯,有谦下的表现;依靠智慧,没有高慢的表现。同样,依靠悲悯,对一切众生起摄受之心;因为随顺智慧,并非于一切处心都离染。依靠智慧,对一切法心离染著;因为随顺悲悯,并非不为了摄受一切众生而运作。正如世尊的悲悯远离爱著与忧悲,智慧也脱离我执与我所执,两者互相净化,成为极其清净的殊胜功德,这是由明行具足所显示的,应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca vijjāsampadāya satthu paññāmahattaṃ pakāsitaṃ hoti, caraṇasampadāya karuṇāmahattaṃ. Tesu paññāya bhagavato dhammarajjappatti, karuṇāya dhammasaṃvibhāgo. Paññāya saṃsāradukkhanibbidā, karuṇāya saṃsāradukkhasahanaṃ. Paññāya paradukkhaparijānanaṃ, karuṇāya paradukkhapatikārārambho. Paññāya parinibbānābhimukhabhāvo, karuṇāya tadadhigamo. Paññāya sayaṃ taraṇaṃ, karuṇāya paresaṃ tāraṇaṃ. Paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakiccasiddhi. Karuṇāya vā bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ saṃsārābhimukhabhāvo, paññāya tattha anabhirati, tathā karuṇāya paresaṃ abhiṃsāpanaṃ, paññāya sayaṃ parehi abhāyanaṃ. Karuṇāya paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati, paññāya attānaṃ rakkhanto paraṃ rakkhati. Tathā karuṇāya aparantapo, paññāya anattantapo, tena attahitāya paṭipannādīsu catūsu puggalesu catutthapuggalabhāvo siddho hoti. Tathā karuṇāya lokanāthatā, paññāya attanāthatā. Karuṇāya cassa ninnatābhāvo, paññāya unnamābhāvo. Tathā karuṇāya sabbasattesu janitānuggaho, paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto, paññāya sabbadhammesu virattacitto, karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbasattānuggahāya pavatto. Yathā hi karuṇā bhagavato sinehasokavirahitā, evaṃ paññā ahaṃkāramamaṃkāravinimuttāti aññamaññavisodhitā paramavisuddhā guṇavisesā vijjācaraṇasampadāhi pakāsitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
现在,为了说明“善逝”这个词的含义,世尊说“因善妙行故”等等。在“已行、住立”等说法中,行也被称为已行,所以说“行也被称为已行”。善妙就是美善,美善的状态来自清净,清净来自断除过失,所以说“清净无过”。而所谓行有多种,为了指出这里所指的行,所以说“圣道”。因为圣道既是趣向涅槃的行,也是证得涅槃的行,所以被称为已行和行。现在为了说明这行的原因,说了“因此,彼”等。安稳之处就是涅槃。无滞著,是因为没有障碍,即使在善趣之行中也不滞著、不执取,更何况在其他地方。或者,因为在一坐之间,以速疾证通之力证得四道,所以无滞著、无系缚而行。凡是能带来一切行的利益,并能成就一切无上成就的行,才叫善妙。世尊依此而行,所以说“如是,因善妙行故为善逝”,善字就是表示善妙之义。巴利
Idāni sugatoti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘sobhanagamanattā’’tiādi. ‘‘Gate ṭhite’’tiādīsu gamanampi gatanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘gamanampi hi gatanti vuccatī’’ti. Sobhananti subhaṃ, subhabhāvo visuddhatāya, visuddhatā dosavigamenāti āha ‘‘parisuddhamanavajja’’nti. Gamanañca nāma bahuvidhanti idhādhippetaṃ gamanaṃ dassento ‘‘ariyamaggo’’ti āha. So hi nibbānassa gati adhigamoti ca katvā gataṃ gamananti ca vuccati. Idāni tasseva gamane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tena hesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Khemaṃ disanti nibbānaṃ. Asajjamānoti paripanthābhāvena sugatigamanepi asajjanto saṅgaṃ akaronto, pageva itarattha. Atha vā ekāsane nisīditvā khippābhiññāvaseneva catunnampi maggānaṃ paṭiladdhabhāvato asajjamāno abajjhanto gato. Yaṃ gamanaṃ gacchanto sabbagamanatthaṃ āvahati, sabbañca anuttaraṃ sampattiṃ āvahati, tadeva sobhanaṃ nāma, tena ca bhagavā gatoti āha ‘‘iti sobhanagamanattā sugato’’ti sobhanattho susaddoti katvā.
因为那些不美的、由诸行运转的苦已经不存在,所以是毕竟乐,从绝对意义上说,无为界才名为美妙。因此说“他到达了那美妙之处,即不死、涅槃”。所以世尊说“涅槃是至高之乐”。正是善妙地到达。所谓善妙地到达,就是不被对立面所制伏的到达,所以说“已断烦恼,不再退转”,也就是已断的烦恼不再以现行方式生起。为了显示已经说过的义理并引证教说来阐明,说了“此亦为所说”等。“此”指由各各道所断的烦恼不再退转,而这又是达到顶点的正行,是由那能令到达的行道所成就的,那道本身也就是正行。为了显示世尊也依此义而为善逝,所以说了“或正去”等。“以正行道”指以证得正等觉的无颠倒行道。“常作一切世间的利益安乐”,以此显示大菩提的行道,总括来说,是以常为一切众生带来利益安乐的方式而转起。“不去到常见、断见这两个极端”,以此显示缘起之趣。“不去到欲乐、自苦这两个极端”,以此显示圣道之趣。巴利
Asundarānaṃ dukkhānaṃ saṅkhārappavattīnaṃ abhāvato accantasukhattā ekantato sundaraṃ nāma asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ gato amataṃ nibbāna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘nibbānaṃ paramaṃ sukha’’nti (ma. ni. 2.215; dha. pa. 203-204). Sammāti suṭṭhu. Suṭṭhu gamanañca nāma paṭipakkhena anabhibhūtassa gamananti āha ‘‘pahīne kilese puna apaccāgacchanto’’ti, pahīnānaṃ puna asamudācāravasena apaccāgacchanto. Vuttamevatthaṃ āgamaṃ dassetvā vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādi. Etanti tena tena maggena pahīnakilesānaṃ puna apaccāgamanaṃ, idañca sikhāppattaṃ sammāgamanaṃ, yāya āgamanīyapaṭipadāya siddhaṃ, sāpi sammāgamanamevāti evampi bhagavā sugatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘sammā vā āgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammāpaṭipattiyāti sammāsambodhiyā sampāpane aviparītapaṭipattiyā. Sabbalokassa hitasukhameva karontāti etena mahābodhiyā paṭipadā avibhāgena sabbasattānaṃ sabbadā hitasukhāvahabhāveneva pavattatīti dasseti. Sassataṃ ucchedanti ime ante anupagacchanto gatoti etena paṭiccasamuppādagatiṃ dasseti. Kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime anupagacchanto gatoti etena ariyamaggagatiṃ dasseti.
这里“于此”是指在合适的场合说合适的话。这是针对应当成就、应当完成的事,用处格来说的。“不实”就是不真实的意思。言语到底是不真实还是真实,是就它的内容来说的。“不真”只是同一个意思的另一种说法。“与无义相连”是指跟现世或来世的无益相连,也就是带来无益。“非义”就是无义,是义的反面,也是义的不存在;跟它相连的,就是离间语和杂秽语,这就是这里的意思。应当知道,这样就把四种语恶行都含摄进来了。
其中,第一种语,可以看作是对持戒的人说“你是破戒者”,对不是旃陀罗等的人说“你是旃陀罗”之类。第二种,是对破戒的人不如法地说“你是破戒者”,对旃陀罗等的人说“你是旃陀罗”之类。第三种,是说明地狱众生等的状态,比如“提婆达多是堕恶趣者、是地狱众生”这样的话。第四种,是迷惑世间的说法,比如“按照吠陀规定的祭祀仪轨去杀生等,能带来善趣”。第五种,是拿真实的事去挑拨离间的话。第六种,应当知道是在合适、恰当的场合说的布施、持戒等话。
像这样,因为说得善妙,也就是避开上面说的不实等,而说真实、如实、与义相应、可爱、可意的话,所以从这层意义上说,他善妙地说,因此是善逝。即使世尊的某些话,仅仅从入耳这一点来说,对某些人并不可爱,但因为能成就义利,能给世间带来利益和安乐,所以仍然是可爱的、可意的。这里还应看到,是把 da 音变成了 ta 音,所以说成“sugato”。巴利
Tatrāti yuttaṭṭhāne yuttasseva bhāsane. Nipphādetabbe sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Abhūtanti abhūtatthaṃ. Atthamukhena hi vācāya abhūtatā bhūtatā vā. Atacchanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Anatthasaṃhitanti diṭṭhadhammikena samparāyikena vā anatthena saṃhitaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃ, anatthāvahaṃ. Na atthoti anattho, atthassa paṭipakkho abhāvo ca, tena saṃhitaṃ, pisuṇavācaṃ samphappalāpañcāti attho. Evamettha catubbidhassapi vacīduccaritassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamā vācā sīlavantaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, acaṇḍālādiṃ ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā bhāsamānassa daṭṭhabbā. Dutiyā dussīlaṃ ‘‘dussīlo’’ti, caṇḍālādimeva ‘‘caṇḍālo’’tiādinā avinayena bhāsamānassa. Tatiyā nerayikādikassa nerayikādibhāvavibhāvanīkathā yathā ‘‘āpāyiko devadatto nerayiko’’tiādikā. Catutthī ‘‘vedavihitena yaññavidhinā pāṇātipātādikataṃ sugatiṃ āvahatī’’ti lokassa byāmohanakathā. Pañcamī bhūtena pesuññupasaṃhārā kathā. Chaṭṭhā yuttapattaṭṭhāne pavattitā dānasīlādikathā veditabbā. Evaṃ sammā gadattāti yathāvuttaṃ abhūtādiṃ vajjetvā bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ atthasaṃhitaṃ piyaṃ manāpaṃ tato eva sammā suṭṭhu gadanato sugato. Āpāthagamanamattena kassaci appiyampi hi bhagavato vacanaṃ piyaṃ manāpameva atthasiddhiyā lokassa hitasukhāvahattā. Ettha pana da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘sugato’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
另一种解释:所谓“善逝”,意思是他的去、他的行是美妙的。因为世尊前往应当受教化的众生那里,完全是为了给他们带来利益和安乐,所以他的行是美妙的、吉祥的。同样,他的身行——以相和随好庄严的色身,远离急促、迟缓、蹒跚、拖拽、挤压、蜷缩、弯曲、混乱等过失,像嬉戏的天鹅王、象王、鹿王行走那样——是美妙的;他的智行——具备广大、清净、悲、念、精进等种种殊胜功德,从发愿直到大菩提,都没有过失,并且能给众生带来利益和安乐——也是美妙的。
或者,以自然智,通过遍知现观而遍知整个世间,正确地去了、正确地解了,所以叫善逝。同样,通过断现观而断除世间集,使其达到不再生起的状态,正确地去了、超越了,所以叫善逝。通过证现观而正确地去了、证得了世间灭——涅槃,所以叫善逝。通过修现观而正确地去了、行走在通向世间灭的道路上,所以叫善逝。
同样,这个包括天在内的世间中,凡是所见、所闻、所觉、所识、所得、所寻、所知、以意所伺察的一切,世尊都像掌中的余甘子果一样,以现量正确地去了、正确地了知,所以叫善逝。巴利
Aparo nayo – sobhanaṃ gataṃ gamanaṃ etassāti sugato. Bhagavato hi veneyyajanupasaṅkamanaṃ ekantena tesaṃ hitasukhanipphādanato sobhanaṃ bhaddakaṃ. Tathā lakkhaṇānubyañjanappaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya dutavilambitakhalitānukaḍḍhananippīḷanukkuṭikakuṭilākulatādidosavirahitaṃ vilāsitarājahaṃsavasabhavāraṇamigarājagamanaṃ kāyagamanaṃ ñāṇagamanañca vipulanimmalakaruṇāsativīriyādiguṇavisesahitamabhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anavajjatāya sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahatāya ca sobhanameva. Atha vā sayambhūñāṇena sakalampi lokaṃ pariññābhisamayavasena parijānanto sammā gato avagatoti sugato. Tathā lokasamudayaṃ pahānābhisamayavasena pajahanto anuppattidhammataṃ āpādento sammā gato atītoti sugato. Lokanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena sammā gato adhigatoti sugato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvanābhisamayavasena sammā gato paṭipannoti sugato. Tathā yaṃ imassa sadevakassa lokassa diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ ñātaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sammā paccakkhato gato abbhaññāsīti sugato.
现在,为了说明“世间解”这个词的意思,他说了“以一切方式了知世间”等等。其中,“以一切方式”就是“以一切种类”,意思是:无论哪个世间、应该以哪种方式被了知,就以那种方式了知。为了展示这些方式,又说了“从自性”等等。其中,“从自性”就是从苦的自性来说。因为一切世间都以苦为自性。正如经中所说:“简而言之,五取蕴就是苦。”“从集”就是从它生起的地方,也就是从渴爱等。“从灭”就是从它息灭的地方,也就是从无,“从灭之道”就是从证得彼灭的方法,即从圣道,因为除此之外没有其他方式。“以步行”就是以脚行走。“世间尽头”就是作为行世间之边际的涅槃。“应知”就是应被了知。“应见”就是应被看见。“应证”就是应被证得。“此”就是希求涅槃者。巴利
Idāni lokavidūti imassa atthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘sabbathā viditalokattā’’tiādi. Tattha sabbathāti sabbappakārena, yo yo loko yena yena pakārena veditabbo, tena tena pakārenāti attho. Te pana pakāre dassetuṃ ‘‘sabhāvato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sabhāvatoti dukkhasabhāvato. Sabbo hi loko dukkhasabhāvo. Yathāha ‘‘saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti. Samudayatoti yato samudeti, tato taṇhādito. Nirodhatoti yattha so nirujjhati, tato visaṅkhārato. Nirodhūpāyatoti yena vidhinā so nirodho pattabbo, tato ariyamaggato ito aññassa pakārassa abhāvā. Iti ‘‘sabbathā lokaṃ avedī’’ti vatvā tadatthasādhakaṃ suttaṃ dassento ‘‘yattha kho, āvuso’’tiādimāha. Idañca suttaṃ ‘‘yattha kho, bhante, na jāyati…pe… na upapajjati, sakkā nu kho so, bhante, gamanena lokassa anto ñātuṃ vā daṭṭhuṃ vā pāpuṇituṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45) okāsalokassa gatiṃ sandhāya rohitadevaputtena puṭṭho bhagavā abhāsi. Tattha na jāyatītiādinā ujukaṃ jātiādīni paṭikkhipitvā na cavati na upapajjatīti padadvayena aparāparaṃ cavanupapatanāni paṭikkhipati. Keci pana ‘‘na jāyatītiādi gabbhaseyyakādivasena vuttaṃ, itaraṃ opapātikavasenā’’ti vadanti. Tanti jātiādirahitaṃ. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Lokassantanti saṅkhāralokassa antabhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Ñāteyyanti jānitabbaṃ. Daṭṭheyyanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Patteyyanti pattabbaṃ. ‘‘Ñātāyaṃ diṭṭhāyaṃ pattāya’’nti vā pāṭho, tattha gamanena lokassantaṃ ñātā ayaṃ diṭṭhā ayaṃ pattā ayanti na vadāmīti attho. Ayanti nibbānatthiko.
就算真的靠双脚走过去,也不可能以此了知、看见或到达世间的尽头;不过,我可以在一个有限、有范围的处所里把它指出来、显示出来——为了说明这一点,世尊才说了“然而”等那段话。其中,“在这仅一寻长的有识之身中”,意思是说在这个只有一寻大小的身体里。这是用来说明色蕴。“有想”,是指与想在一起。这是以想为代表,说明受、想、行这三蕴,因为它们都与想相伴。“有识”,就是有识。这是用来说明识蕴。背后的意思是:在没有识的、仅仅由时节所生的色聚上,是无法施设(世间)的。“世间”,指蕴等构成的世间。“世间灭”,指那个世间的息灭,也就是涅槃。因为涅槃也是依着蕴来施设的,所以就在这个身体里指出它。涅槃本身虽然没有方位,但对于那些已灭尽烦恼的人,也可以随顺着他们,从方位上、从方便上加以说明,就像经里说的:“眼是世间中可爱、可意的,就在这里,渴爱被断除时即被断除,就在这里,被息灭时即息灭。”巴利
Kāmaṃ padasā gamanena gantvā lokassantaṃ ñātuṃ daṭṭhuṃ pattuṃ vā na sakkā, api ca parimitaparicchinnaṭṭhāne taṃ paññāpetvā dassemīti dassento ‘‘api cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha byāmamatte kaḷevareti byāmappamāṇe attabhāve. Iminā rūpakkhandhaṃ dasseti. Sasaññimhīti saññāya sahite. Iminā saññāsīsena vedanādayo tayo khandhe dasseti saññāsahitattā eva. Samanaketi saviññāṇaketi attho. Iminā viññāṇakkhandhaṃ dasseti, aviññāṇake pana utusamuṭṭhānarūpasamudāyamatte paññāpetuṃ na sakkāti adhippāyo. Lokanti khandhādilokaṃ. Lokanirodhanti tassa lokassa nirujjhanaṃ nibbānameva vā. Nibbānampi hi khandhe paṭicca paññāpanato sarīrasmiṃyeva paññāpeti. Adesampi hi taṃ yesaṃ nirodho, tesaṃ vasena desatopi upacāravasena niddisīyati yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃ loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ, etthesā taṇhā pahīyamānā pahīyati, ettha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.401; ma. ni. 1.134; vibha. 204).
“以步行”是指以普通的步行。“世间尽头”是指行世间的尽头,也就是作为到达边际之因的涅槃。“任何时候”是指无论何时。“未证得”是指没有通过最高之道证得。“解脱”是指释放、出离。“因此”是指:因为未证得世间尽头,就没有从轮回之苦中解脱,所以。“have”只是语助词。“世间解”是指从自性等方面了知一切世间的人。“善慧”是指拥有美好智慧的人。“达世间边者”是指以遍知现观了知世间之后,再以断现观而到达世间尽头的人。由于道梵行已经圆满,所以是“已住梵行者”。由于一切烦恼已经寂灭,或者由于四谛之法已经现证,所以是“寂灭者”。“不希求”是指不渴望,即既不希求此世间,也不希求他世间,因为不再受生。巴利
Gamanenāti pākatikagamanena. Lokassantoti saṅkhāralokassa anto antakiriyāya hetubhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Kudācananti kadācipi. Appatvāti aggamaggena anadhigantvā. Pamocananti pamutti nissaraṇaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā lokantaṃ appatvā vaṭṭadukkhato mutti natthi, tasmā. Haveti nipātamattaṃ. Lokavidūti sabhāvādito sabbaṃ lokaṃ vijānanto. Sumedhoti sundarapañño. Lokantagūti pariññābhisamayena lokaṃ viditvā pahānābhisamayena lokantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa pariniṭṭhitattā vusitabrahmacariyo. Sabbesaṃ kilesānaṃ samitattā catusaccadhammānaṃ vā abhisamitattā samitāvī. Nāsīsatīti na pattheti, yathā imaṃ lokaṃ, evaṃ parañca lokaṃ nāsīsati appaṭisandhikattā.
虽然“世间解”这个称号已经从自性等方面毫无遗漏地显示出来了,但世间毕竟只是部分地提到,所以为了毫无遗漏地显示它,又说了“另外还有三种世间”等话。其中,与根相连的诸蕴的集合与相续,就是“有情世间”。在色等事物中,因为有情贪著,所以叫“有情”;在这里,善、不善以及它们的异熟被了知,所以叫“世间”。不与根相连的色等的集合与相续,就是“器世间”,因为在这里,动的和不动的众生被了知,而且它是它们的处所。由于它是它们的依止,所以也被称为“器世间”。这两种情况中的诸蕴都是“行世间”,因为它们被诸缘所造作、所破坏、所毁坏。“依食而住”是指依缘而住,意思是依赖诸缘而存在。这里“食”这个词是“缘”的意思,就像“此食是未生之欲贪的生起之缘”等处那样。这样一来,用“一切有情”这个词,无想有情也被包含在内了。然而,这个依食而住性,从严格意义上说是行法,不是有情法,所以他说:“在提到‘依食而住’的地方,应当知道是指行世间。”巴利
Evaṃ yadipi lokavidutā anavasesato dassitā sabhāvādito dassitattā, loko pana ekadeseneva vuttoti taṃ anavasesato dassetuṃ ‘‘api ca tayo lokā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha indriyabaddhānaṃ khandhānaṃ samūho santāno ca sattaloko. Rūpādīsu sattavisattatāya satto, lokīyati ettha kusalākusalaṃ tabbipāko cāti loko. Anindriyabaddhānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ samūho santāno ca okāsaloko lokīyanti ettha jaṅgamā thāvarā ca tesañca okāsabhūtoti katvā. Tadādhāratāya hesa ‘‘bhājanaloko’’tipi vuccati. Ubhayepi khandhā saṅkhāraloko paccayehi saṅkharīyanti lujjanti palujjanti cāti. Āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā, paccayāyattavuttikāti attho. Paccayattho hettha āhārasaddo ‘‘ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā kāmacchandassa uppādāyā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.232) viya. Evañhi ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti iminā asaññasattāpi pariggahitā honti. Sā panāyaṃ āhāraṭṭhitikatā nippariyāyato saṅkhāradhammo, na sattadhammoti āha ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikāti āgataṭṭhāne saṅkhāraloko veditabbo’’ti.
如果这样,那“一切众生”这句话又怎么讲呢?这是依人而说的教法,所以没有过失。可是,为什么世尊有时依人而说法,有时又依法而说法呢?这是因为说法的方式善巧,也因为所化众生的意乐不同。诸佛世尊已经达到了说法善巧的境界,所以他们随自己的意愿,有时依人而说法,有时依法而说法。再者,对于那些还没有进入教法次第的所化众生,就为他们说依人的教法;对于已经进入的,就说依法的教法。依人的教法属于世俗谛的范围,另一种则属于胜义谛的范围。前者随顺悲心,后者随顺智慧。前者也是为随信行者这一类人说的,因为他们以人为标准;后者是为随法行者这一类人说的。或者说,因为世间增上者信行的性格,所以依人而说;因为法增上者智行的性格,所以依法而说。前者是应被引导释义的不了义说,后者是了义说。应当知道,世尊就是观察到这些种种差别,才在各处宣说这两种教法的。巴利
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘sabbe sattā’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanāti nāyaṃ doso. Kasmā pana bhagavā katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ deseti, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desetīti? Desanāvilāsato veneyyajjhāsayato ca. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te yathāruci katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Ye vā pana veneyyā sāsanakkamaṃ anotiṇṇā, tesaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ desanaṃ desenti. Ye ca otiṇṇā, tesaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sammutisaccavisayā puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā, itarā paramatthasaccavisayā. Purimā karuṇānukūlā, itarā paññānukūlā. Saddhānusārīgottānaṃ vā purimā. Te hi puggalappamāṇikā, pacchimā dhammānusārīgottānaṃ. Saddhācaritatāya vā lokādhipatīnaṃ vasena puggalādhiṭṭhānā, paññācaritatāya dhammādhipatīnaṃ vasena dhammādhiṭṭhānā. Purimā ca neyyatthā, pacchimā nītatthā. Iti bhagavā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ apekkhitvā tattha tattha duvidhaṃ desanaṃ desetīti veditabbaṃ.
执常见等邪见的人,以“世间是常”等方式构想“我、世间”,大多是以有情为对象,而不是以诸行为对象,所以说“在说到‘世间是常’或‘世间是无常’的地方,应当知道是指有情世间”。所谓“日月所运行之处”,是指日月回转、周行的所有地方。所谓“照耀诸方而发光”,是说由于日月运行,各个方向变得明亮而发光。或者,“诸方”是受格复数,因此意思是:自身发光的日月照耀、照亮了各个方向。所谓“千重世间”,是以此度量,有一千个这样的器世间,意思是千世界界。或者读作“具千”,即“它拥有如此千数”,所以叫“具千”。在此,是指名为千世界界的世间。巴利
Diṭṭhigatikānaṃ sassatādivasena ‘‘attā loko’’ti parikappanā yebhuyyena sattavisayā, na saṅkhāravisayāti āha ‘‘sassato lokoti vā asassato lokoti vāti āgataṭṭhāne sattaloko veditabbo’’ti. Yāvatā candimasūriyā pariharantīti yattake ṭhāne candimasūriyā parivattanti paribbhamanti. Disā bhanti virocamānāti tesaṃ paribbhamaneneva tā tā disā pabhassarā hutvā virocanti. Atha vā disāti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, tasmā sayaṃ virocamānā candimasūriyā yattakā disā bhanti sobhenti obhāsayantīti attho. Tāva sahassadhā lokoti tattakena pamāṇena sahassappakāro okāsaloko, sahassalokadhātuyoti attho. ‘‘Tāvasahassavā’’ti vā pāṭho, tāva tattakaṃ sahassaṃ assa atthīti tāvasahassavā. Etthāti sahassalokadhātusaṅkhāte loke.
“那也”是指三种世间。“以一切方式了知”是指从一切方面通达。如何通达呢?回答说“因为这样……”等等。“因为这样,对他来说”这句,是与“以一切方式了知”相关联的。“对他来说”指的是这位世尊。“一种世间:一切众生依食而住”——通过这个以人为立足点的说法,说明了一切诸行都依赖条件而运转,因此,由于没有别的类别,整个行世间就是一种。“二种世间”等也应当按这个道理来理解。这里,提到“名”并没有把涅槃包括进去,因为涅槃不具有世间的性质。难道不是这样吗?在“依食而住”这句里,由于依赖条件而运转,道和果的法不也变成了世间吗?不会。因为这里所说的“世间”,是指应当被遍知的苦谛诸法。或者这样说:所谓“不坏、不灭”,并不是那样被执取的,那就是“世间”,因此,远离那种执取的出世间法,并没有世间性。巴利
Tampīti tividhampi lokaṃ. Sabbathā avedīti sabbappakārato paṭivijjhi. Kathaṃ paṭivijjhīti āha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi. Tathā hissāti imassa ‘‘sabbathā vidito’’ti etena sambandho. Assāti anena bhagavatā. Eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti yāya puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavuttitā vuttā, tāya sabbo saṅkhāraloko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphaladhammānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha lokoti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃgahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā.
三受,就是按乐、苦、舍来分。四食,就是段食、触食、意思食、识食这四种食。其中,段食能带来以食素为第八支的色法,所以叫食;触能带来三受,所以叫食;意思能带来三有中的结生,所以叫食;识在结生那一刻能带来名色,所以叫食。成为执取对象的诸蕴,就是取蕴。六内处,就是从眼处一直到意处。七识住,就是:身异想异、身异想一、身一想异、身一想一,再加上下面三种无色界。这七种被称为识住,因为识安住于其中。其中,众生的身体各不相同,或者身体有差异,所以叫身异;他们有各不相同的想,所以叫想异。按照这个方式,其余几个词句的意思也应该这样理解。巴利
Tisso vedanāti sukhadukkhaupekkhāvasena. Cattāro āhārāti kabaḷīkārāhāro phassāhāro manosañcetanāhāro viññāṇāhāroti cattāro āhārā. Tattha kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakaṃ rūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Phasso tisso vedanā āharatīti āhāro. Manosañcetanā tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhiṃ āharatīti āhāro. Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe nāmarūpaṃ āharatīti āhāro. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Cha ajjhattikāni āyatanānīti cakkhāyatanādimanāyatanapariyantāni. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, ekattakāyā ekattasaññino, heṭṭhimā ca tayo āruppāti imā satta ‘‘viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti vuccanti. Tattha nānattaṃ kāyo etesaṃ, nānatto vā kāyo etesanti nānattakāyā, nānattasaññā etesaṃ atthīti nānattasaññino. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo.
一切人类、六欲天的天神,以及某些堕入恶趣的众生,被称为“身异想异”。在无量的轮围世界中,无量人类的肤色、形体等,没有两个是完全相同的。即使在某处有双胞胎,肤色或形体相似,他们看、视、说话、笑、行走、站立等方面也一定有差别;而且他们的结生识可能是三因、二因或无因的,所以一切人类都是身异想异。在六欲天的天神中,有些身体是蓝色的,有些是黄色等各种颜色,他们的结生识也有二因或三因的差别,所以那些天神也是身异想异。而所谓“某些堕入恶趣的众生”,应当理解为已经脱离四恶趣的,比如郁多罗母夜叉、彼扬卡拉母、法护等。这些众生的身体,有白、黑、黄褐等肤色差别,也有瘦、胖、矮、高等差别,所以身体各不相同;他们的结生识也像人类一样,有三因、二因、无因的差别。但他们不像天神那样有大威神力,而像可怜人一样,威势微小,难得食物和衣服,生活在痛苦逼迫之中。有些在黑分月时受苦,在白分月时享乐。因为他们从乐聚中堕落了,所以说他们“有从乐聚中堕落”;虽然名为天,却没有天界的妙乐,所以称为堕恶趣者。不过,其中具足三因的人,也能证悟诸法。比如彼扬卡拉母夜叉,在黎明时分听到阿那律长老诵法……巴利
Sabbe manussā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.127; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.7.44-45) chakāmāvacarā ca devā ekacce ca vinipātikā ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Aparimāṇesu hi cakkavāḷesu aparimāṇānaṃ manussānaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena dvepi ekasadisā natthi. Yepi katthaci yamakabhātaro vaṇṇena vā saṇṭhānena vā ekasadisā honti, tesampi ālokitavilokitakathitahasitagamanaṭhānādīhi viseso hotiyeva, paṭisandhisaññā ca nesaṃ tihetukāpi duhetukāpi ahetukāpi hoti, tasmā sabbepi manussā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Chakāmāvacaradevesu ca kesañci kāyo nīlo hoti, kesañci pītādivaṇṇo, paṭisandhisaññā ca nesaṃ duhetukāpi tihetukāpi hoti, tasmā tepi nānattakāyā nānattasaññino. Ekacce vinipātikā pana catuapāyavinimuttakā uttaramātā yakkhinī, piyaṅkaramātā, dhammaguttāti evamādayo daṭṭhabbā. Etesañhi odātakaāḷamaṅguracchavisāmavaṇṇādivasena ceva kisathūlarassadīghādivasena ca kāyo nānā hoti, manussānaṃ viya tihetukaduhetukāhetukavasena paṭisandhisaññāpi, te pana devā viya na mahesakkhā , kapaṇamanussā viya appesakkhā dullabhaghāsacchādanā dukkhapīḷitā viharanti, ekacce kāḷapakkhe dukkhitā juṇhapakkhe sukhitā honti, tasmā sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā sukhasamussayato vinipāto etesaṃ atthīti vinipātikāti vuttā satipi devabhāve dibbasampattiyā abhāvato. Ye panettha tihetukā, tesaṃ dhammābhisamayopi hoti. Piyaṅkaramātā hi yakkhinī paccūsasamaye anuruddhattherassa dhammaṃ sajjhāyato sutvā –
别出声,毕央嘎拉,比丘正在诵说法句。
再说,明白了法句之后,我们应当依之修行,这才是对我们有利益的。
我们要在众生方面约束自己,明知是虚妄的话绝不说。
我们应当修学自身的善戒,也愿能脱离毕舍遮鬼类。巴利
‘‘Mā saddaṃ kari piyaṅkara, bhikkhu dhammapadāni bhāsati; Apica dhammapadaṃ vijāniya, paṭipajjema hitāya no siyā. ‘‘Pāṇesu ca saṃyamāmase, sampajānamusā na bhaṇāmase; Sikkhema susīlyamattano, api muccema pisācayoniyā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.240) –
这样开导儿子之后,她当天就证得了入流果。而郁多罗的母亲一听闻世尊说法,就成为了入流者。同样,这些众生也因为身体和结生识的差异,被归入“身异想异”这一类。巴利
Evaṃ puttakaṃ saññāpetvā taṃ divasaṃ sotāpattiphalaṃ pattā. Uttaramātā pana bhagavato dhammaṃ sutvāva sotāpannā jātā. Evamimepi kāyassa ceva paṭisandhisaññāya ca nānattā ‘‘nānattakāyā nānattasaññino’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.
不过,由初禅所生、分为下品、中品、上品而称为梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天的那些梵类诸天,以及四恶趣中的有情,都被称为“身异想一”。因为在那些梵类诸天当中,梵辅天的身体在大小上比梵众天更广大,而大梵天的身体在大小上又比梵辅天更广大。虽然从他们的光明来看,身体也是越往下越殊胜,但这里说的并不是光明的大小。同样地,少光天等和少净天等虽然身体和光明各有差别,却仅依同一性来安立,所以它们被称为“身一”。这样一来,这些梵类诸天由于身体有种种差异,但依初禅果报和结生识来说则是同一的,所以是“身异想一”。四恶趣中的有情也是如此。在地狱里,有些有情的身体是半由旬,有些是一由旬,提婆达多的身体则达到一百由旬;在畜生中,有些小,有些大;在饿鬼中,有些是六十肘,有些是八十肘,有些金色,有些丑陋,黑暗饿鬼也是如此。而且这里还有叫作长背饿鬼的,身体甚至长达六十由旬,但一切有情的结生识都是不善果报的无因心。因此,恶趣中的有情也被算作“身异想一”。巴利
Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmasaṅkhātā pana hīnamajjhimapaṇītabhedabhinnena paṭhamajjhānena nibbattā brahmakāyikā ceva catūsu apāyesu sattā ca ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Etesu hi brahmakāyikesu brahmapurohitānaṃ kāyo brahmapārisajjehi pamāṇato vipulataro hoti, mahābrahmānaṃ kāyo pana brahmapurohitehipi pamāṇato vipulataro hoti. Kāmañca nesaṃ pabhāvasenapi kāyo heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimehi uḷārataro hoti, taṃ pana idha appamāṇaṃ. Tathā hi parittābhādīnaṃ parittasubhādīnañca kāye satipi pabhāvematte ekattavaseneva vavatthapīyatīti ‘‘ekattakāyā’’tveva te vuccanti. Evamime brahmakāyikā kāyassa nānattā paṭhamajjhānavipākavasena pana paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekattā nānattakāyā ekattasaññino. Yathā ca te, evaṃ catūsu apāyesu sattā. Nirayesu hi kesañci gāvutaṃ, kesañci aḍḍhayojanaṃ, kesañci yojanaṃ attabhāvo hoti, devadattassa pana yojanasatiko jāto. Tiracchānesupi keci khuddakā, keci mahantā, pettivisayepi keci saṭṭhihatthā, keci asītihatthā honti, keci suvaṇṇā, keci dubbaṇṇā, tathā kālakañcikā asurā. Api cettha dīghapiṭṭhikapetā nāma saṭṭhiyojanikāpi honti, paṭisandhisaññā pana sabbesampi akusalavipākāhetukāva hoti. Iti āpāyikāpi ‘‘nānattakāyā ekattasaññino’’tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti.
属于第二禅地的少光天、无量光天、光音天,则被称为“身一想异”。因为这一切天人的身体都是同一个大小,而结生识则由于第二禅、第三禅果报的不同而有差别。巴利
Dutiyajjhānabhūmikā pana parittābhā appamāṇābhā ābhassarā ‘‘ekattakāyā nānattasaññino’’ti vuccanti. Nesañhi sabbesaṃ kāyo ekappamāṇova hoti, paṭisandhisaññā pana dutiyatatiyajjhānavipākavasena nānā hoti.
少净天、无量净天和遍净天属于第三禅地,它们是身一想一。按照前面所说的道理,它们的身是同一的,而且因为第四禅的果报,结生识也是同一的。有人说:“广果天也归入这第四识住,因为它们的身体和结生识都由于第五禅的果报而成为同一形态。但净居天因为不再退转、安住于还灭的一方,所以并非一切时候都存在。即使在百千劫乃至无数劫中没有佛出世,它们也不会出现;只有在佛出世的十六千劫之内,它们才会出现,就像转法轮世尊的营帐所在地一样,因此它们既不属于识住,也不属于有情居。”但大尸婆长老依据这部经——“舍利弗啊,那样的住处实在不容易得到,在我这漫长的轮回中,除了净居天之外,我未曾住过那样的住处”——而说:“净居天也归入第四识住、第四有情居。”因为这部经没有被驳斥,所以这个说法得到认可。因此,除了无想有情之外,在从少净天到阿迦腻咤天的九地中,有情应当被理解为“身一想一”。巴利
Parittasubhā appamāṇasubhā subhakiṇhā pana tatiyajjhānabhūmikā ekattakāyā ekattasaññino. Tesaṃ vuttanayena kāyassa ceva catutthajjhānavipākavasena paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekattā. ‘‘Vehapphalāpi imaṃyeva catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ bhajanti kāyassa ceva pañcamajjhānavipākavasena paṭisandhisaññāya ca ekarūpattā. Suddhāvāsā pana apunarāvattanato vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhitā, na sabbakālikā. Kappasatasahassampi asaṅkhyeyyampi buddhasuññe loke nuppajjanti, soḷasakappasahassabbhantare buddhesu uppajjantesuyeva uppajjanti, dhammacakkappavattissa bhagavato khandhāvāraṭṭhānasadisā honti, tasmā neva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ, na sattāvāsaṃ bhajantī’’ti vadanti. Mahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘na kho pana so sāriputta āvāso sulabharūpo, yo mayā anāvuṭṭhapubbo iminā dīghena addhunā aññatra suddhāvāsehi devehī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.160) iminā suttena ‘‘suddhāvāsāpi catutthaviññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ catutthasattāvāsaṃ bhajantī’’ti vadati, taṃ appaṭibāhiyattā suttassa anuññātaṃ. Tasmā asaññasattaṃ apanetvā parittasubhādīsu akaniṭṭhapariyosānāsu navasu bhūmīsu sattā ‘‘ekattakāyā ekattasaññino’’ti gahetabbā.
无想有情因为完全没有识,所以不算在识住里面。就像在佛还没出世的时代,有些人在外道那里出家,取风遍作修行所缘,修成第四禅,出定之后生起这样的接受和喜好:“心真可恶,心真可恶!没有心才是好的。正因为有心,才有杀害、捆绑等苦产生;如果没有心,这些就不会有。”他们保持禅那不退失,命终之后以无想的色法结生,投生到无想有情天。他在人间习惯用什么姿势,就以那个姿势投生,然后或站、或坐、或躺,这样经过五百大劫。就是这样,因为他们修的是厌离心的修行,所以在那里不生起识,因为没有识,就不属于识住。而非想非非想处呢,就像想很微细一样,识也很微细,所以不算在识住里。因为就像想一样,识也达到了只有行蕴残余的微细状态,没有明显的识的作用,既不能说有识,也不能说完全无识,所以叫非想非非想,因此不算在具有明显识作用的识住里面。所以,包括恶趣众生在内的六欲天众生和人类,是身异想异;初禅地的众生和恶趣众生,是身异想一;第二禅地的众生,是身一想异;第三禅地的众生,除了无想有情之外,其余第四禅地的众生,是身一想一。这四种识住,再加上除了非想非非想处之外的空无边处等三个无色界,应当知道就是“七识住”。巴利
Asaññasattā pana viññāṇābhāvā ettha saṅgahaṃ na gacchanti. Tathā hi anuppanne buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘dhī cittaṃ, dhī cittaṃ, cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu. Cittañhi nissāya vadhabandhādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, citte asati nattheta’’nti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṃ katvā rūpapaṭisandhivasena asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vā hoti. Evaṃ cittavirāgabhāvanāvasena tesaṃ tattha viññāṇuppatti na hotīti viññāṇābhāvato viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ te na bhajanti. Nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pana yatheva saññāya, evaṃ viññāṇassapi sukhumattā viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Tañhi saññāya viya viññāṇassapi saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattattā paribyattaviññāṇakiccābhāvato neva viññāṇaṃ , na ca sabbaso aviññāṇaṃ hotīti nevaviññāṇā nāviññāṇaṃ, tasmā paripphuṭaviññāṇakiccavantīsu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Tasmā vinipātikehi saddhiṃ chakāmāvacaradevā manussā ca nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, paṭhamajjhānabhūmikā apāyasattā ca nānattakāyā ekattasaññino, dutiyajjhānabhūmikā ekattakāyā nānattasaññino, tatiyajjhānabhūmikā asaññasattaṃ vajjetvā sesā catutthajjhānabhūmikā ca ekattakāyā ekattasaññinoti imā catasso viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vajjetvā ākāsānañcāyatanādiheṭṭhimāruppattayena saddhiṃ ‘‘satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo’’ti veditabbā.
八种世间法,就是:得、失、誉、毁、称、讥、乐、苦。这八种因为是世间的法则,所以叫世间法。这些法对有情世间来说必定存在,所以没有任何一个有情能脱离它们。它们有时追逐世间,有时又被世间追逐。经里也说:“比丘们,这八种世间法跟着世间转,世间也跟着这八种世间法转。”(《增支部》8.6)得到饮食、衣服等,或者那些应当得到的东西本身,就叫“得”。这些不存在,就叫“失”。这里用“得”来涵盖对它的贪著,用“失”来涵盖对它的抗拒。誉等其余几种,也应当同样理解为涵盖了相应的贪著和抗拒。不过,当“得”来的时候,“失”其实也一起来了,所以说“得与失”。“誉”等也是这样。就像有血液时,因为血液的败坏便会生脓一样,当对“得”等有贪著时,对“失”等的抗拒就得到了现起的机会。巴利
Aṭṭha lokadhammāti lābho alābho yaso ayaso nindā pasaṃsā sukhaṃ dukkhanti ime aṭṭha lokassa dhammattā lokadhammā. Ime hi sattalokassa avassaṃbhāvino dhammā, tasmā etehi vinimutto nāma koci satto natthi. Te hi aparāparaṃ kadāci lokaṃ anupatanti, kadāci te loko ca anupatati. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.6). Ghāsacchādanādīnaṃ laddhi, tāni eva vā laddhabbato lābho. Tadabhāvo alābho. Lābhaggahaṇena cettha tabbisayo anurodho gahito, alābhaggahaṇena virodho. Evaṃ yasādīsupi tabbisayaanurodhavirodhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Lābhe pana āgate alābho āgatoyeva hotīti lābho ca alābho ca vutto. Yasādīsupi eseva nayo. Tathā ca lohite sati tadupaghātavasena pubbo viya lābhādīsu anurodhe sati alābhādīsu virodho laddhāvasaro eva hoti.
九有情居:就是前面说过的七识住,再加上无想有情和第四无色界,合起来称为“九有情居”。有情居住在这些地方,所以叫有情居,也就是种种身、种种想等各类有情群体。这些有情群体,对于属于它们之中的有情来说,因为这种摄属关系,就像“树上的枝干”一样,可以被称为依止处。至于为什么把净居天也算进有情居,前面已经说过了。巴利
Nava sattāvāsāti heṭṭhā vuttasattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo eva asaññasattacatutthāruppehi saddhiṃ ‘‘nava sattāvāsā’’ti vuccanti. Sattā āvasanti etesūti sattāvāsā, nānattakāyanānattasaññīādibhedā sattanikāyā. Te hi sattanikāyā tappariyāpannānaṃ sattānaṃ tāya eva tappariyāpannatāya ādhāro viya vattabbataṃ arahanti samudāyādhāratāya avayavassa yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā’’ti. Suddhāvāsānampi sattāvāsaggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
所谓十处,就是先排除非色法的意处,以及色与非色等混合在一起的法处,单单依色法来安立眼处等五处和色处等五处,这五处加上那五处,合起来就叫十处;如果再加上意处和法处,这同样的十处就被称为十二处。巴利
Dasāyatanānīti arūpasabhāvaṃ manāyatanaṃ rūpārūpādimissakaṃ dhammāyatanañca ṭhapetvā kevalaṃ rūpadhammānaṃyeva vasena cakkhāyatanādayo pañca, rūpāyatanādayo pañcāti dasāyatanāni vuttāni, manāyatanadhammāyatanehi pana saddhiṃ tāniyeva ‘‘dvādasāyatanānī’’ti vuttāni.
为什么在这里眼等被称为“处”呢?从“处”的词义来看,它既可以表示“生起”,也可以表示“延展”,还可以表示“引导漫长的事物”。在眼、色等当中,那些依各自的门和所缘而生起的心与心所法,以各自领纳等作用而生起、现起、努力、精勤;而这些处又让那些已生起的法延展、扩展开来;并且,只要无始轮回中这极其漫长的轮回之苦还没有止息,它们就引导它、使它继续运转。因此,它们被称为“处”。另外,从住处、矿藏、汇集处、出生地、原因这些意义来说,也可以称为“处”。就像世间说“自在天处”“婆薮天处”等,这里的“处”是住处的意思;“金处”“银处”等,这里的“处”是矿藏的意思;在佛教教法中,“在可爱的处所,鸟群依止它”等,这里的“处”是汇集处的意思;“南印度是牛的出生地”等,这里的“处”是出生地的意思;“在每一个有适合证据的地方,都能证得自证通智”等,这里的“处”是原因的意思。在眼等当中,那些心与心所法依眼等而住、随眼等而转起,所以眼等是它们的住处。那些心与心所法遍布于眼等,依眼等而住,又以眼等为所缘,所以眼等就是它们的矿藏。由于它们依各自的依处、门、所缘而汇集,所以眼等就是它们的汇集处。由于它们依眼等而生起,以眼等为依止和所缘,就在眼等那里生起,所以眼等就是它们的出生地。因为没有眼等,它们就不存在,所以眼等就是它们的原因。按照上面所说的这些意义,眼就是处,所以叫“眼处”。其余诸处也是这样。巴利
Kasmā panettha cakkhādayo ‘‘āyatanānī’’ti vuccanti? Āyatanato (vibha. aṭṭha. 154) āyānaṃ vā tananato āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanāni. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭanti vāyamanti, te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti vitthārenti, idañca anamatagge saṃsāre pavattaṃ ativiya āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ yāva na nivattati, tāva nayanti pavattayanti, tasmā ‘‘āyatanānī’’ti vuccanti. Api ca nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ākaraṭṭhena samosaraṇaṭṭhena sañjātidesaṭṭhena kāraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanāni. Tathā hi loke ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ āyatananti vuccati. ‘‘Suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ rajatāyatana’’ntiādīsu ākaro. Sāsane pana ‘‘manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Dakkhiṇāpatho gunnaṃ āyatana’’ntiādīsu sañjātideso. ‘‘Tatra tatreva sakkhibhabbataṃ pāpuṇāti sati satiāyatane’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.158; a. ni. 3.102; 5.23) kāraṇaṃ āyatananti vuccati. Cakkhuādīsu ca te te cittacetasikā dhammā nivasanti tadāyattavuttitāyāti cakkhādayo tesaṃ nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Cakkhādīsu ca te ākiṇṇā tannissitattā tadārammaṇattā cāti cakkhādayova nesaṃ ākaro. Tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇavasena samosaraṇato cakkhādayova nesaṃ samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Tannissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito cakkhādayova nesaṃ sañjātideso. Cakkhādīnaṃ abhāve abhāvato cakkhādayova nesaṃ kāraṇanti yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ sesānipi.
这十二处再加上眼识等六识,从“安立”等意义来说,就称为“十八界”。因为在眼等每一种法中,各随其情形而安立、被保持、有安立,或依它而安立,或安立在其中,所以称为“界”。世间的诸界作为原因被确定下来之后,就像金、银等矿藏产出金、银那样,产生种种轮回之苦;又像搬运者背负货物一样,被众生执持、担持;而且它们只是苦的安立,因为它们受他者支配。由于这些界作为因,轮回之苦被众生随顺地安立,这样被安立的苦又保持在、安放在这些界当中,所以称为“界”。另外,不像外道所说的“我”那样在自性上根本不存在,这些界保持着自己的自性,所以是界。又像世间把色彩斑斓的雌黄、雄黄等岩石成分称为“界”一样,这些界也像界一样,因为它们是智与所知中色彩斑斓的成分。或者,就像在名为身体的集合体中,对味、血等部分,由于它们彼此不同、各自被自己的特相所限定,而得到“界”这个名称;同样,在名为五蕴的自身中,对眼等部分,也应知道有“界”这个名称,因为眼等彼此不同、各自被自己的特相所限定。再者,“界”这个说法是指纯粹没有生命的东西。因为世尊在“这个比丘是由六界组成的男子”等教导中,为了消除“有生命”的想法而宣说界。所以,从“没有生命”这一意义来说,也称为“界”。巴利
Imāneva pana dvādasāyatanāni cakkhuviññāṇādichaviññāṇehi saddhiṃ aṭṭhārasa vidahanādito ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti. Tathā hi cakkhādīsu ekeko dhammo yathāsambhavaṃ vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ, vidhīyate etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātūti vuccati. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitāva hutvā suvaṇṇarajatādidhātuyo viya suvaṇṇarajatādiṃ, anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti, bhārahārehi ca bhāro viya sattehi dhīyanti dhārīyanti, dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā avasavattanato. Etāhi ca kāraṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati, tathāvihitañca taṃ etāsveva dhīyati ṭhapīyati, tasmā ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti. Api ca yathā titthiyānaṃ attā nāma sabhāvato natthi, na evametā, etā pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Yathā ca loke vicittā haritālamanosilādayo selāvayavā ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti, evametāpi dhātuyo viya dhātuyo. Vicittā hetā ñāṇañeyyāvayavāti. Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evametesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa avayavesu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Aññamaññavisabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnā hete cakkhādayoti. Api ca dhātūti nijjīvamattassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tathā hi bhagavā ‘‘chadhāturo ayaṃ bhikkhu puriso’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.343) jīvasaññāsamūhananatthaṃ dhātudesanamakāsi. Tasmā nijjīvaṭṭhenapi dhātuyoti vuccanti.
在这里,通过“依食而住”这一说法——也就是诸行依赖条件而持续运作——说明了诸行的无常性;又依据“凡是无常的,那就是苦;凡是苦的,那就是无我”这句话,说明了苦性和无我性,因此三种共相都被包含在内了。“名”指四种无色蕴,从实际含义上说就是触等。“色”指四大种以及所造色,从实际含义上说就是地等。这样,从共相的角度,诸行已经被无差别地涵盖。而在涵盖它们的同时,那些有差别的善等、因等,也同样被涵盖了。所以说:“如此,这个行世间也已经在一切方面被了知了。”巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti paccayāyattavuttitāvacanena saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatā, tāya ca ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhaṃ, yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato dukkhānattatā ca pakāsitā hontīti tīṇipi sāmaññalakkhaṇāni gahitāni. Nāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā, te ca atthato phassādayo. Rūpanti bhūtupādāyarūpāni, tāni ca atthato pathavīādayoti aviseseneva salakkhaṇato saṅkhārā gahitā. Taggahaṇeneva ye te savisesā kusalādayo hetuādayo ca, tepi gahitā eva hontīti āha ‘‘iti ayaṃ saṅkhāralokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
像这样,先显示了行世间在一切方面都已了知,现在为了显示有情世间在一切方面也已了知,而说了“然而,由于此……”等话。其中,“了知随眠倾向”的意思是:心依止于此而住,所以这里是“随眠倾向”,就像野兽的栖息处一样。比如野兽出去觅食,回来后就在那片密林里躺下,那里就是它的栖息处;同样,心即使以别的方式活动之后,也会依止某处而住,那里就被称为它的“随眠倾向”。而这个随眠倾向按常见等分为四种。正如所说:巴利
Evaṃ saṅkhāralokassa sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sattalokassapi sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘yasmā panesā’’tiādimāha. Tattha āsayaṃ jānātīti āgamma cittaṃ seti etthāti āsayo migāsayo viya. Yathā migo gocarāya gantvā paccāgantvā tattheva vanagahane sayatīti so tassa āsayo, evaṃ aññathā pavattitvāpi cittaṃ āgamma yattha seti, so tassa āsayoti vuccati. So pana sassatadiṭṭhiādivasena catubbidho. Vuttañca –
常见与断见,以及随顺忍;
如实了知本来面目的那种智,这就叫随眠倾向。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhī ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti.
在这里,因为一切见都被常见和断见所涵盖,所以一切执持邪见的众生都依附于这两种见。正如经中所说:“迦旃延,这个世间大多数都依止于两种见:有和无。”所谓“有”,指的是执取常见;所谓“无”,指的是执取断见。这是依止轮回的凡夫的倾向。而依止还灭的清净众生,则有随顺忍和如实智两种倾向。其中,《迷惑冰消·分别论注释》中说:“随顺忍是观智,如实智是道智。”佛陀了知众生这四种倾向,并且在那些见和那些智尚未生起的刹那,他也了知。正如经中所说:巴利
Tattha sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ sassatucchedadiṭṭhīhi saṅgahitattā sabbepi diṭṭhigatikā sattā imā eva dve diṭṭhiyo sannissitā. Yathāha ‘‘dvayanissito khvāyaṃ kaccāna loko yebhuyyena atthitañceva natthitañcā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.15). Atthitāti hi sassataggāho adhippeto, natthitāti ucchedaggāho. Ayaṃ tāva vaṭṭanissitānaṃ puthujjanānaṃ āsayo, vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ pana suddhasattānaṃ anulomikā khanti yathābhūtañāṇanti duvidho āsayo. Tattha ‘‘anulomikā khanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇaṃ pana maggañāṇa’’nti sammohavinodaniyā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 815) vuttaṃ . Taṃ catubbidhampi sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, jānanto ca tesaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ tesañca ñāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
正在享受欲乐时,他就知道:这个人的心以欲为重、以欲为依止、倾向于欲;正在享受欲乐时,他就知道:这个人的心以出离为重、以出离为依止、倾向于出离。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo kāmagaruko kāmāsayo kāmādhimutto’ti, kāmaṃ sevantaññeva jānāti ‘ayaṃ puggalo nekkhammagaruko nekkhammāsayo nekkhammādhimutto’’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.113).
他了知随眠:不断不断地潜伏,所以叫随眠;意思是说,一旦遇到合适的因缘,它们就会生起。由此说明,它们在遇到因缘时是有可能生起的。因为未被断除的烦恼,在遇到因缘时就会生起。那么,这些烦恼是哪些呢?就是欲贪等七种未来的烦恼;过去和现在的烦恼,因为性质相同,也被这样称呼。因为诸法的本质并不会因为时间不同而有所差别。他了知这七种随眠,在各个有情的相续中,以强弱不同的方式现起。巴利
Anusayaṃ jānātīti anu anu sayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena nesaṃ kāraṇalābhe uppajjanārahataṃ dasseti. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Ke pana te? Kāmarāgādayo satta anāgatā kilesā, atītā paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi, taṃ sattavidhaṃ anusayaṃ tassa tassa sattassa santāne paroparabhāvena pavattamānaṃ jānāti.
“了知行”:这里的“行”指善行和恶行。这在《分别论》的“行分别”中已经说明。或者,“行”也可以理解为行为方式。这些行为方式按贪、嗔、痴、信、慧、寻来分,有六种根本行;它们内部的分化无量无边,而按接触方式的分化则有六十三种。他从行的本质、杂染、清净、生起、果报、等流等方面,这样来了知此行。巴利
Caritaṃ jānātīti ettha caritanti sucaritaduccaritaṃ. Tañhi vibhaṅge (vibha. 814 ādayo) caritaniddese niddiṭṭhaṃ. Atha vā caritanti cariyā veditabbā. Tā pana rāgadosamohasaddhābuddhivitakkavasena cha mūlacariyā, tāsaṃ apariyanto antarabhedo, saṃsaggabhedo pana tesaṭṭhividho. Taṃ caritaṃ sabhāvato saṃkilesato vodānato samuṭṭhānato phalato nissandatoti evamādinā pakārena jānāti.
了知胜解:这里的“胜解”指意乐界。它有两种:劣胜解和优胜解。由于这种胜解,劣胜解的众生只亲近劣胜解者,优胜解的众生也只亲近优胜解者。假如戒师、依止师不持戒,而同住弟子持戒,这些弟子就不会去亲近自己的戒师和依止师,只会去亲近与自己同类、相称的比丘。假如戒师和依止师是相称的比丘,而其他人不相称,那些人也不会去亲近戒师和依止师,只会去亲近与自己相同的劣胜解者。据说,三藏小无畏长老带着五百位比丘去龙岛礼塔,在一个村子里受到人们邀请。当时随长老同行的有一位不相称的比丘,常住寺院里也有一位不相称的比丘。比丘僧团进村时,这两个人虽然客僧与住僧、住僧与客僧从未见过面,却还是凑到一起,有说有笑地站着交谈。长老看到后说:“正自觉者了知之后,宣说了《界相应》。”就这样,这种决定劣胜解者等人互相亲近等的意乐界、意乐状态,就叫做“胜解”。他了知这个胜解,他透彻地知道:“这个人的胜解是劣的,那个人的胜解是胜的。其中,这个人的是柔软的,那个人的是更柔软的,另一个人的是最柔软的”等等。而胜解的锐利、柔软等,应当通过根的锐利、柔软等来了解。巴利
Adhimuttiṃ jānātīti ettha adhimuttīti ajjhāsayadhātu. Sā duvidhā hīnādhimutti paṇītādhimuttīti. Yāya hīnādhimuttikā sattā hīnādhimuttikeyeva sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā ca paṇītādhimuttike eva. Sace hi ācariyupajjhāyā na sīlavanto honti, saddhivihārikā sīlavanto honti, te attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise sāruppabhikkhūyeva upasaṅkamanti. Sace ācariyupajjhāyā sāruppabhikkhū, itare asāruppā, tepi na ācariyupajjhāye upasaṅkamanti, attanā sadise hīnādhimuttike eva upasaṅkamanti. Tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero kira nāgadīpe cetiyavandanāya pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ gacchanto ekasmiṃ gāme manussehi nimantito therena ca saddhiṃ eko asāruppabhikkhu atthi, dhuravihārepi eko asāruppabhikkhu atthi, bhikkhusaṅghesu gāmaṃ osarantesu te ubho janā kiñcāpi āgantukena nevāsiko, nevāsikena vā āgantuko na diṭṭhapubbo, evaṃ santepi ekato hutvā hasitvā hasitvā kathayamānā aṭṭhaṃsu. Thero disvā ‘‘sammāsambuddhena jānitvā dhātusaṃyuttaṃ (saṃ. ni. 2.85 ādayo) kathita’’nti āha. Evamayaṃ hīnādhimuttikādīnaṃ aññamaññopasevanādiniyāmikā ajjhāsayadhātu ajjhāsayabhāvo adhimuttīti vuccati, taṃ adhimuttiṃ jānāti. ‘‘Imassa adhimutti hīnā, imassa paṇītā. Tatthāpi imassa mudu, imassa mudutarā, imassa mudutamā’’tiādinā paṭivijjhati. Adhimuttiyā pana tikkhamudubhāvādiko indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvādinā veditabbo.
“少尘垢者”的意思是:在由智慧所成的慧眼中,这些人的贪、嗔、痴尘垢极少,所以是“少尘垢者”;或者说,这些人的贪等尘垢极少,所以是“少尘垢者”,也就是随眠的贪等尘垢微薄的众生,他们是少尘垢者。“多尘垢者”在这里也同样理解:贪等尘垢增盛的众生就是多尘垢者。“了知”是指:他以“这个人的贪尘少,这个人的嗔尘少”等等方式,了知少尘垢者等各类众生。巴利
Apparajakkheti paññāmaye akkhimhi appaṃ parittaṃ rāgadosamoharajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, appaṃ vā rāgādirajaṃ etesanti apparajakkhā, anussadarāgādirajā sattā. Te apparajakkhe. Mahārajakkheti etthāpi eseva nayo, ussadarāgādirajā mahārajakkhā. Jānātīti ‘‘imassa rāgarajo appo, imassa dosarajo appo’’tiādinā apparajakkhādike jānāti.
“利根”是指信等诸根锐利。“钝根”是指信等诸根迟钝。这两者说的都是作为依止的诸根。“善相”是指相貌美好,也就是本性良善、有还灭的意乐;或者,那些随眠倾向等行相、部分美好的人,就是“善相”。与此相反的是“恶相”。“易教化”是指容易让他领悟正性决定,也就是具足信心和智慧的人;或者,能领会所说道理、容易教导的人,就是“易教化”。与此相反的是“难教化”。“堪能”与“不堪能”中,适合证悟圣道、具足依止、没有业障、烦恼障和异熟障的人,就是“堪能”;与此相反的是“不堪能”。因此,世尊能无余地了知无量众生的随眠倾向等,所以这位世尊对有情世间的一切方面也都了知。巴利
Tikkhindriyeti tikhiṇehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Mudindriyeti mudukehi saddhādīhi indriyehi samannāgate. Ubhayatthāpi upanissayabhūtindriyāni adhippetāni. Svākāreti sundarākāre, kalyāṇapakatike vivaṭṭajjhāsayeti attho. Yesaṃ vā āsayādayo ākārā koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā. Viparītā dvākārā. Suviññāpayeti sammattaniyāmaṃ viññāpetuṃ sukare saddhe paññavante ca, ye vā kathitaṃ kāraṇaṃ sallakkhenti, sukhena sakkā honti viññāpetuṃ, te suviññāpayā. Viparītā duviññāpayā. Bhabbe abhabbeti ettha ye ariyamaggappaṭivedhassa anucchavikā upanissayasampannā kammāvaraṇakilesāvaraṇavipākāvaraṇarahitā, te bhabbā. Viparītā abhabbā. Tasmāti yasmā bhagavā aparimāṇe satte āsayādito anavasesetvā jānāti, tasmā assa bhagavato sattalokopi sabbathā vidito.
难道不也应该了知众生是有限量等等的吗?是的,但那种了知不是为了厌离、离欲、灭尽,所以这里没有采用。不过世尊对那一点也是完全了知、完全确定的,只是因为没有必要,所以没有纳入教导。因此说——巴利
Nanu ca sattesu pamāṇādipi jānitabbo atthīti? Atthi, tassa pana jānanaṃ na nibbidāya virāgāya nirodhāyāti idha na gahitaṃ, bhagavato pana tampi suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitameva, payojanābhāvā desanaṃ nāruḷhaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ –
那时,世尊把一点点泥土放在指甲尖上,对比丘们说:“比丘们,你们怎么想?是我放在指甲尖上的这一点点泥土多,还是这大地多?”等等。巴利
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā parittaṃ nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsuṃ āropetvā bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho bahutaraṃ yo vāyaṃ mayā paritto nakhasikhāyaṃ paṃsu āropito, ayaṃ vā mahāpathavī’’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 5.1121).
像这样,先显示了有情世间在一切方面都是被了知的,现在为了显示器世间也同样是被了知的,而说“正如有情世间”等。意思是:器世间也在一切方面被了知,这是上下文的关系。“轮围”就是世界。因为它被形如轮圈的轮围山从四周完全围绕,所以称为“轮围”。“三个半”就是三个半百,也就是三百五十。“那由他”就是一万。“所说”就是所宣说的。因为这片大地的横向没有边际,所以只从厚度上说“这片大地被说为有这么厚”。难道各个轮围的大地不是被轮围山限定住的吗?不是,因为这片大地与其他轮围的大地是连成一体的。就像三片叶子之间的空隙那样,每三个世界之间没有大地,因为那里是世界中间的地狱;而轮围山与轮围山相接的地方,大地则是连成一片的。成劫时形成的大地,也和已经形成的大地连成一体而形成。巴利
Evaṃ sattalokassapi sabbathā viditabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni okāsalokassapi tatheva viditabhāvaṃ dassento āha ‘‘yathā casattaloko’’tiādi . Okāsalokopi sabbathā viditoti sambandho. Cakkavāḷanti lokadhātu. Sā hi nemimaṇḍalasadisena cakkavāḷapabbatena samantato parikkhittattā ‘‘cakkavāḷa’’nti vuccati. Aḍḍhuḍḍhānīti upaḍḍhacatutthāni, tīṇi satāni paññāsañcāti attho. Nahutānīti dasasahassāni. Saṅkhātāti kathitā. Yasmā pathavī nāmāyaṃ tiriyaṃ aparicchinnā, tasmā ‘‘ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā’’ti bahalatoyeva paricchedo vutto. Nanu cakkavāḷapabbatehi taṃtaṃcakkavāḷapathavī paricchinnāti? Na tadaññacakkavāḷapathaviyā ekābaddhabhāvato. Tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇañhi pattānaṃ antarāḷasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antareyeva pathavī natthi lokantaranirayabhāvato, cakkavāḷapabbatānaṃ pana cakkavāḷapabbatantarehi sambaddhaṭṭhāne pathavī ekābaddhāva, vivaṭṭakāle saṇṭhahamānāpi pathavī yathāsaṇṭhitapathaviyā ekābaddhāva saṇṭhahati.
“安立”是指从下方到上方,一切方向都安住。“如是安立”就是如此住立。“此处”指轮围之中。“沉入”就是没入、进入之后安住。“高出”就是恰好高出八万四千由旬。而且这里不只是高度如此,它的长度和宽度也同样如此。正如所说——巴利
Saṇṭhitīti heṭṭhā uparito cāti sabbaso ṭhiti. Evaṃ saṇṭhiteti evaṃ avaṭṭhite. Etthāti cakkavāḷe. Ajjhogāḷhoti ogāhitvā anupavisitvā ṭhito. Accuggato tāvadevāti tattakameva caturāsīti yojanasatasahassāniyeva uggato. Na kevalañcettha ubbedhova, atha kho āyāmavitthārāpissa tattakāyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,须弥山王纵向长八万四千由旬,横向宽八万四千由旬。巴利
‘‘Sineru, bhikkhave, pabbatarājā caturāsīti yojanasahassāni āyāmena, caturāsīti yojanasahassāni vitthārenā’’ti (a. ni. 7.66).
须弥山王,就是诸山中最高的;或者说,山本身就是最高的,所以叫山王;以须弥为名的这座最高的山,就是须弥山王,也就是所说的须弥山王。这座山的东面是银做的,所以当它的光芒覆盖过来时,东方的大海水看起来就像乳汁一样。南面则是蓝宝石做的,所以南方的大海水看起来大多呈现蓝色,天空也是这样。西面是水晶做的,北面是黄金做的。四大海也正是被须弥山的光芒划分开来的。也就是说,从东面和南面发出的银光和宝石光汇合在一起,铺过大海表面,碰到轮围山就停在那里;从南面和西面发出的宝石光和水晶光也是这样;从西面和北面发出的水晶光和黄金光也是这样;从北面和东面发出的黄金光和银光汇合在一起,铺过大海表面,碰到轮围山就停在那里。在这些光芒之间,就是四大海。巴利
Sinerupabbatuttamoti pabbatesu uttamo, pabbatoyeva vā uttamo pabbatuttamo, sinerusaṅkhāto pabbatuttamo sinerupabbatuttamo, sinerupabbatarājāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa ca pācīnapassaṃ rajatamayaṃ, tasmā tassa pabhāya ajjhottharantiyā pācīnadisāya samuddodakaṃ khīraṃ viya paññāyati. Dakkhiṇapassaṃ pana indanīlamaṇimayaṃ, tasmā dakkhiṇadisāya samuddodakaṃ yebhuyyena nīlavaṇṇaṃ hutvā paññāyati, tathā ākāsaṃ. Pacchimapassaṃ phalikamayaṃ. Uttarapassaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ. Cattāro samuddāpi sinerurasmīhi eva paricchinnā. Tathā hi pubbadakkhiṇapassehi nikkhantā rajatamaṇirasmiyo ekato hutvā mahāsamuddapiṭṭhena gantvā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti, dakkhiṇapacchimapassehi nikkhantā maṇiphalikarasmiyo, pacchimuttarapassehi nikkhantā phalikasuvaṇṇarasmiyo, uttarapācīnapassehi nikkhantā suvaṇṇarajatarasmiyo ekato hutvā mahāsamuddapiṭṭhena gantvā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti, tāsaṃ rasmīnaṃ antaresu cattāro mahāsamuddā honti.
“从那里”是指从须弥山向下和向上的量,就像前面所说的那样。“一半又一半”,就是用一半再一半。这里说的是:瑜干达罗山沉入大海四万二千由旬,也同样高出海面四万二千由旬;伊萨达罗山沉入大海二万一千由旬,也同样高出海面二万一千由旬。按照这个方式,其余诸山也应该知道都是一半一半的量。就像大海逐渐低下去,一直到轮围山脚下;同样,一直到须弥山脚下,瑜干达罗山虽然只有须弥山量的一半,也稳稳地立在大地上,伊萨达罗等山也应该这样理解。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,大海是逐渐低下的,逐渐倾斜的,逐渐深陷的。”在须弥山、瑜干达罗山等山之间,有叫做“沉没中间海”的海。据说那里的水极其细微,即使投进像孔雀羽毛那么轻的东西也停不住,立刻就沉下去,所以叫沉没海。不过据说它们的宽度依次等于须弥山等山高出海面的量。“沉入高出”就是既沉入又高出。“大”就是巨大。巴利
Tatoti sinerussa heṭṭhā upari ca vuttappamāṇato. Upaḍḍhupaḍḍhenāti upaḍḍhena upaḍḍhena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dvācattālīsa yojanasahassāni samudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva upari uggato yugandharapabbato, ekavīsati yojanasahassāni mahāsamudde ajjhogāḷho tattakameva ca upari uggato īsadharo pabbatoti iminā nayena sesesupi upaḍḍhupaḍḍhappamāṇatā veditabbā. Yathā mahāsamuddo yāva cakkavāḷapādamūlā anupubbaninno, evaṃ yāva sinerupādamūlāti heṭṭhā sineruppamāṇato upaḍḍhappamāṇopi yugandharapabbato pathaviyaṃ suppatiṭṭhito, evaṃ īsadharādayopīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘mahāsamuddo, bhikkhave, anupubbaninno anupubbapoṇo anupubbapabbhāro’’ti (cūḷava. 184; udā. 45). Sineruyugandharādīnaṃ antare sīdantarasamuddā nāma honti. Tattha kira udakaṃ sukhumaṃ morapattamattampi pakkhittaṃ patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti sīdateva, tasmā te sīdasamuddā nāma vuccanti. Te pana vitthārato yathākkamaṃ sineruādīnaṃ accuggamasamānapaamāṇāti vadanti. Ajjhogāḷhuggatāti ajjhogāḷhā ca uggatā ca. Brahāti mahantā.
“须弥山周围”是指以环绕的方式站在须弥山四周。首先,环绕须弥山站立的是瑜干达罗山;再环绕它站立的是伊萨达罗山。就这样,每一座山都环绕着前一座山站立,所以说“须弥山周围”。不过,在某些地方也出现了另一种次序的说法:“环绕须弥山站立着名为阿沙干那的山,环绕它站立着名为毗那多迦的山。”正如《尼弥本生》中所说——巴利
Sinerussa samantatoti parikkhipanavasena sinerussa samantato ṭhitā. Sineruṃ tāva parikkhipitvā ṭhito yugandharo, taṃ parikkhipitvā īsadharo. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitā ‘‘sinerussa samantato’’ti vuttā. Katthaci pana ‘‘sineruṃ parikkhipitvā assakaṇṇo nāma pabbato patiṭṭhito, taṃ parikkhipitvā vinatako nāma pabbato’’ti evaṃ aññoyeva anukkamo āgato. Tathā hi nimijātake –
“千骏牵引的天车,登临其上。”
大王正行进时,看见群山沉入大海之中。
看见之后,他问御者:这些叫什么山?巴利
‘‘Sahassayuttaṃ hayavāhiṃ, dibbayānamadhiṭṭhito; Yāyamāno mahārājā, addā sīdantare nage; Disvānāmantayī sūtaṃ, ime ke nāma pabbatā’’ti. (jā. 2.22.566)
被尼弥大王询问的摩多利天子这样说道:巴利
Evaṃ nimimahārājena puṭṭhena mātalidevaputtena –
善见山、迦罗毗迦山、伊湿陀罗山、持轭山,
尼民达罗山、毗那多迦山、阿沙干那山,都是巍峨的大山。
这些山从海里一座接一座地升起来,
大王,您看到的那些地方,是诸大王的住处。巴利
‘‘Sudassano karavīko, īsadharo yugandharo; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo girī brahā. ‘‘Ete sīdantare nagā, anupubbasamuggatā; Mahārājānamāvāsā, yāni tvaṃ rāja passasī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.568-569)
对此,注释书中是这样说的:巴利
Tattha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ –
大王,这些山最外面的一座名叫善见山,紧接着它后面的是迦罗毗迦山,它比善见山更高。这两座山之间,各隔着一个等距的大海。迦罗毗迦山后面是伊沙驮罗山,它比迦罗毗迦山更高。它们之间也隔着一个等距的大海。伊沙驮罗山后面是瑜干驮罗山,它比伊沙驮罗山更高。它们之间也隔着一个等距的大海。瑜干驮罗山后面是尼民驮罗山,它比瑜干驮罗山更高。它们之间也隔着一个等距的大海。尼民驮罗山后面是毗那多迦山,它比尼民驮罗山更高。它们之间也隔着一个等距的大海。毗那多迦山后面是阿沙干那山,它比毗那多迦山更高。它们之间也隔着一个等距的大海。这七座山依次从等距的大海中升起,像阶梯一样排列着。巴利
‘‘Ayaṃ, mahārāja, etesaṃ sabbabāhiro sudassano pabbato nāma, tadanantare karavīko nāma, so sudassanato uccataro. Ubhinnampi pana tesaṃ antare ekopi sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Karavīkassa anantare īsadharo nāma, so karavīkato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Īsadharassa anantare yugandharo nāma, so īsadharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Yugandharassa anantare nemindharo nāma, so yugandharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Nemindharassa anantare vinatako nāma, so nemindharato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Vinatakassa anantare assakaṇṇo nāma, so vinatakato uccataro. Tesampi antare eko sīdantaramahāsamuddo. Ete sīdantaramahāsamudde satta pabbatā anupaṭipāṭiyā samuggatā sopānasadisā hutvā ṭhitā’’ti (jā. aṭṭha. 6.22.569).
雪山高五百由旬——意思是雪山这座山的高度是五百由旬。这里说的“雪山”,是因为在下雪的时候与雪相应,它有雪,所以叫雪山;到了热季,它把雪吐出来,所以叫雪山。“山”就是岩石。岩石因为具有叫做“节”的突出部分而被称为“山”,又因为水等从它流出,以及它是水的精华——各种药物等的依托之处,所以也被叫做“山”。长宽各三千由旬——意思是长度和宽度都是三千由旬,也就是说,从长度和宽度两方面来说,都是三千由旬。巴利
Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbatoti himavā pabbato pañca yojanasatāni ucco, ubbedhoti attho. Tattha himavāti himapātasamaye himayuttatāya himaṃ assa atthīti himavā, gimhakāle himaṃ vamatīti himavā. Pabbatoti selo. Selo hi sandhisaṅkhātehi pabbehi sahitattā ‘‘pabbato’’ti vuccati, pasavanādivasena jalassa sārabhūtānaṃ bhesajjādīnaṃ vatthūnañca giraṇato ‘‘girī’’ti ca vuccati. Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthatoti yojanānaṃ tīṇi sahassāni āyāmato ca vitthārato cāti attho, āyāmato ca vitthārato ca tīṇi yojanasahassānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
由八万四千座山峰所庄严——也就是由善见峰、杂色峰等八万四千座山峰所庄严,意思是美妙。此外,这里还有一个虽未明说但应当知道的特别之处:这座雪山四周有五百条奔流的河点缀其间,其中有七个大湖——阿耨达池、迦那文达池、罗他迦罗池、六牙池、鸠那罗池、曼达基尼池、狮子崖池——每个湖长宽各五十由旬,周围一百五十由旬。其中,阿耨达池被善见峰、杂色峰、黑峰、香醉峰、开拉萨峰这五座山环绕。善见峰纯金所成,高二百由旬,山峰向内弯曲,形如乌鸦嘴,遮蔽着这个湖而立。杂色峰由一切宝物所成。黑峰由锑所成。香醉峰由石所成,内部呈绿豆色,以黑沉香等根香、旃檀等心材香、松等肤香、丁香等皮香、迦比他等薄皮香、树脂等味香、多摩罗等叶香、龙藏红花等花香、肉豆蔻等果香,因在一切方面都充满香气,所以称为香醉——它以这十种香而充盈,覆盖着种种药草,在黑半月的布萨日,像炽燃的火炭一样光焰赫赫地立着。巴利
Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍitoti sudassanakūṭacitrakūṭādīhi caturāsītikūṭasahassehi paṭimaṇḍito, sobhitoti attho. Apicettha avuttopi ayaṃ viseso veditabbo (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.31; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.8.19; su. ni. aṭṭha. selasuttavaṇṇanā) – ayaṃ himavā nāma pabbato samantato sandamānapañcasatanadīvicitto, yattha āyāmavitthārena ceva gambhīratāya ca paṇṇāsa paṇṇāsa yojanā diyaḍḍhayojanasataparimaṇḍalā anotattadaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladaho mandākinīdaho sīhappapātadahoti satta mahāsarā patiṭṭhitā. Tesu anotatto sudassanakūṭaṃ citrakūṭaṃ kāḷakūṭaṃ gandhamādanakūṭaṃ kelāsakūṭanti imehi pañcahi pabbatehi parikkhitto. Tattha sudassanakūṭaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ dviyojanasatubbedhaṃ antovaṅkaṃ kākamukhasaṇṭhānaṃ tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ. Citrakūṭaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ. Kāḷakūṭaṃ añjanamayaṃ. Gandhamādanakūṭaṃ sānumayaṃ abbhantare muggavaṇṇaṃ kāḷānusāriyādimūlagandho candanādisāragandho saralādipheggugandho lavaṅgāditacagandho kapiṭṭhādipapaṭikagandho sajjādirasagandho tamālādipattagandho nāgakuṅkumādipupphagandho jātiphalādiphalagandho sabbathā gandhabhāvato gandhagandhoti imehi dasahi gandhehi ussannaṃ nānappakāraosadhasañchannaṃ kāḷapakkhauposathadivase ādittamiva aṅgāraṃ jalantaṃ tiṭṭhati.
就在那里,有一座名叫欢喜根的山崖,是独觉佛居住的地方。那里有三座洞窟:金窟、宝窟和银窟。其中,宝窟门口有一棵名叫曼殊沙的树,高一由旬,宽一由旬。凡是水里或陆地上的花,这棵树全都开得出来,尤其在独觉佛到来的那天更是如此。树的上面会显现出一切珍宝所成的楼阁。在那里,有扫地的风把垃圾吹走,有平整地面的风把一切宝砂铺平,有洒水的风从阿耨达池取来水洒下,有造香的风把一切香树的香气带过来,有采花的风把花采下来撒落,有铺花的风把花铺满各处,那里始终都有已经铺好的座位。在独觉佛出世的日子和布萨日,所有的独觉佛都会聚集到这里,坐在这些座位上,这是那里的常态。一位已经证得菩提的独觉佛来到那里,坐在铺好的座位上。如果那时还有其他独觉佛在,他们也会立刻聚集过来,坐在各自的座位上,坐下后进入某种定,然后出定。接着,僧团中的长老为了让大众随喜,就问新来的独觉佛:“您是怎么证得的?”也就是问他的业处,那时他就说出自己感兴的偈颂。应当知道,香醉峰就是这样成为独觉佛的住处。巴利
Tattheva nandamūlakaṃ (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.35) nāma pabbhāraṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ vasanokāso. Tisso guhāyo suvaṇṇaguhā maṇiguhā rajataguhāti. Tattha maṇiguhādvāre mañjūsako nāma rukkho yojanaṃ ubbedhena, yojanaṃ vitthārena, so yattakāni udake vā thale vā pupphāni, sabbāni pupphati visesena paccekabuddhāgamanadivase, tassūparito sabbaratanamāḷo hoti. Tattha sammajjanakavāto kacavaraṃ chaḍḍeti, samakaraṇavāto sabbaratanamayaṃ vālikaṃ samaṃ karoti, siñcanakavāto anotattadahato ānetvā udakaṃ siñcati, sugandhakaraṇavāto sabbesaṃ gandharukkhānaṃ gandhe āneti, ocinakavāto pupphāni ocinitvā pāteti, santharaṇakavāto sabbattha santharati, sadā paññattāneva cettha āsanāni honti. Yesu paccekabuddhuppādadivase uposathadivase ca sabbapaccekabuddhā sannipatitvā nisīdanti, ayaṃ tattha pakati. Abhisambuddhapaccekabuddho tattha gantvā paññattāsane nisīdati. Tato sace tasmiṃ kāle aññepi paccekabuddhā saṃvijjanti, tepi taṅkhaṇaṃ sannipatitvā paññattāsanesu nisīdanti, nisīditvā kiñcideva samāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhahanti. Tato saṅghatthero adhunāgataṃ paccekabuddhaṃ sabbesaṃ anumodanatthāya ‘‘kathamadhigata’’nti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchati, tadā so attano udānabyākaraṇagāthaṃ bhāsati. Evamidaṃ gandhamādanakūṭaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ āvāsaṭṭhānaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ.
不过,开拉萨峰是银做的。所有这些杂色峰等,都和善见峰一样高、形状相同,挡在湖的前面立着。据说,这些山宽度都是五十由旬,长度则和高度一样,是二百由旬。它们全都靠天众和龙众的威神力而安住,河流在它们之间流淌,那些水全都流入阿耨达池。日月天子向南或向北运行时,光芒会从山与山之间照到那里;如果笔直走,就照不到,因此它才得名“阿耨达”。在那里,有各种宝物做成的可爱石阶和石板地面,没有鱼也没有鳖,水像水晶一样清净,是享用此处的众生凭共同业力自然准备好的、妥善形成的沐浴处。佛、独觉佛、漏尽者和有神通的仙人在那里沐浴,天众、夜叉等则在那里作园林嬉戏。巴利
Kelāsakūṭaṃ pana rajatamayaṃ. Sabbāni cetāni citrakūṭādīni sudassanena samānubbedhasaṇṭhānāni tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitāni. Sabbāni pana puthulato paññāsayojanāni, āyāmato pana ubbedhato viya dviyojanasatānevāti vadanti. Tāni sabbāni devānubhāvena nāgānubhāvena ca ṭhassanti, nadiyo ca tesu sandanti, taṃ sabbampi udakaṃ anotattameva pavisati, candimasūriyā dakkhiṇena vā uttarena vā gacchantā pabbatantarena tattha obhāsaṃ karonti, ujuṃ gacchantā na karonti, tenevassa ‘‘anotatta’’nti saṅkhā udapādi. Tattha ratanamayamanuññasopānasilātalāni nimmacchakacchapāni phalikasadisanimmalūdakāni nhānatitthāni tadupabhogīsattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammunāva suppaṭiyattāni susaṇṭhitāni honti, yesu buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā ca iddhimanto ca isayo nhāyanti, devayakkhādayo uyyānakīḷaṃ kīḷanti.
它有四个口,分别是狮面口、象面口、马面口和牛面口,四条大河就从这四个口流出来。从狮面口流出的河,两岸狮子特别多;从象面口等流出的河,两岸则是象、马、牛特别多。从东面流出的那条河,绕阿耨达池右旋三圈之后,不经过另外三条河,独自沿着东雪山,走非人行走的路线,流入大海。从西面和北面流出的河也一样,右旋三圈之后,分别沿着西雪山和北雪山,走非人行走的路线,流入大海。但从南面流出的那条河,绕池右旋三圈之后,向南沿着石壁直直地流了六十由旬,撞上山后腾涌而起,形成周长约三由旬的水柱,在空中飞行六十由旬,落到一块叫“三闩”的岩石上,岩石被水流的冲力击碎。那里因此形成了一个五十由旬大的池子,名叫“三闩池”。水流冲破池岸,钻进岩石,又走了六十由旬;然后冲破坚硬的地层,通过暗渠走了六十由旬,撞上一座叫“频阇”的横山,变成像手掌上五根手指一样的五股水流,奔泻而下。这条河绕阿耨达池右旋三圈后经过的那一段,叫“旋恒河”;沿着石壁直直走了六十由旬的那一段,叫“黑恒河”;在空中飞行六十由旬的那一段,叫“空恒河”;停在“三闩”岩石处五十由旬的地方,叫“三闩池”;冲破池岸、钻进岩石走了六十由旬的那一段,叫“厚恒河”;通过暗渠走了六十由旬的那一段,叫“暗渠恒河”。撞上叫“频阇”的横山、变成五股水流奔泻而下的那一段,就分成了恒河、耶牟那河、阿夷罗跋提河、萨罗浮河、摩希河这五条。这五条大河就是这样从雪山发源的。巴利
Tassa catūsu passesu sīhamukhaṃ hatthimukhaṃ assamukhaṃ usabhamukhanti cattāri mukhāni honti, yehi catasso nadiyo sandanti. Sīhamukhena nikkhantanadītīre sīhā bahutarā honti, hatthimukhādīhi hatthiassausabhā. Puratthimadisato nikkhantanadī anotattaṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā itarā tisso nadiyo anupagamma pācīnahimavanteneva amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisati. Pacchimadisato ca uttaradisato ca nikkhantanadiyopi tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pacchimahimavanteneva uttarahimavanteneva ca amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti. Dakkhiṇadisato nikkhantanadī pana taṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇena ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭheneva saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā pabbataṃ paharitvā vuṭṭhāya parikkhepena tigāvutappamāṇā udakadhārā hutvā ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā tiyaggaḷe nāma pāsāṇe patitā, pāsāṇo udakadhārāvegena bhinno. Tattha paññāsayojanappamāṇā tiyaggaḷā nāma mahāpokkharaṇī jātā, mahāpokkharaṇiyā kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisitvā saṭṭhi yojanāni gatā, tato ghanapathaviṃ bhinditvā umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā hatthatale pañcaṅgulisadisā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattati. Sā tikkhattuṃ anotattaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gataṭṭhāne ‘‘āvaṭṭagaṅgā’’ti vuccati, ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘kaṇhagaṅgā’’ti, ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘ākāsagaṅgā’’ti, tiyaggaḷapāsāṇe paññāsayojanokāse ṭhitā ‘‘tiyaggaḷapokkharaṇī’’ti, kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisitvā saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘bahalagaṅgā’’ti, umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘umaṅgagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattaṭṭhāne pana gaṅgā yamunā aciravatī sarabhū mahīti pañcadhā saṅkhyaṃ gatā. Evametā pañca mahānadiyo himavantato pabhavanti.
在六牙池的中央,方圆十二由旬之内,没有苔藓,也没有浮萍,只有像宝石堆一样颜色的水静静停在那里。紧接着,是一片宽一由旬的纯白睡莲林,环绕着这片水。再接着,是一片同样宽一由旬的纯青睡莲林,环绕着它。再往外,依次是各宽一由旬的红睡莲林、白睡莲林、红莲花林、白莲花林和白拘物头林,每一层都环绕着前一层。这七片林之外,是一片宽一由旬的杂色林,由前面说的白睡莲等所有花混杂而成,环绕而立。再往外,是一片宽一由旬的红稻林,水深到龙的腰部。再往外,在水边,是一片宽一由旬的矮丛林,里面散布着青、黄、红、白各色芳香细小的花。这样,这十片林各宽一由旬。之后是小豆林、大豆林、绿豆林;再往外是黄瓜、甜瓜、葫芦、南瓜的藤林;之后是甘蔗林,高得像槟榔树;之后是芭蕉林,果实像象牙那么大;之后是沙罗林;再往外是波罗蜜林,果实像瓮那么大;之后是甜果芒果林;之后是酸角林;之后是象耳林;之后是杂大丛林;最后是竹林。竹林外面,有七重山环绕而立。从最外面数起,第一重叫小黑山,第二重叫大黑山,之后叫水触山,之后叫月触山,之后叫日触山,之后叫宝触山,第七重叫金触山。这座山高七由旬,围绕六牙池而立,就像钵口的边缘一样。它的内侧一面是金色的,从那里发出的光照得六牙池就像刚升起的太阳一样。外侧的那些山,一座高六由旬,一座高五由旬,一座高四由旬,一座高三由旬,一座高二由旬,一座高一由旬。巴利
Chaddantadahassa pana (jā. aṭṭha. 5.16.chaddantajātakavaṇṇanā) majjhe dvādasayojanappamāṇe ṭhāne sevālo vā paṇakaṃ vā natthi, maṇikkhandhavaṇṇaṃ udakameva santiṭṭhati, tadanantaraṃ yojanavitthataṃ suddhakallahāravanaṃ taṃ udakaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadanantaraṃ yojanavitthatameva suddhanīluppalavanaṃ taṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, yojanayojanavitthatāneva rattuppalasetuppalarattapadumasetapadumakumudavanāni purimaṃ purimaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitāni, imesaṃ pana sattannaṃ vanānaṃ anantaraṃ sabbesampi kallahārādīnaṃ vasena vomissakavanaṃ yojanavitthatameva tāni parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ, tadanantaraṃ nāgānaṃ kaṭippamāṇe udake yojanavitthatameva rattasālivanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ udakapariyante nīlapītalohitodātasurabhisukhumakusumasamākiṇṇaṃ khuddakagacchavananti imāni dasa vanāni yojanayojanavitthatāneva. Tato khuddakarājamāsamahārājamāsamuggavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ tipusaeḷālukaalābukumbhaṇḍavallivanāni, tato pūgarukkhappamāṇaṃ ucchuvanaṃ, tato hatthidantappamāṇaphalaṃ kadalivanaṃ, tato sālavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ cāṭippamāṇaphalaṃ panasavanaṃ, tato madhuraphalaṃ ambavanaṃ, tato ciñcavanaṃ, tato kapiṭṭhavanaṃ, tato vomissako mahāvanasaṇḍo, tato veṇuvanaṃ, veṇuvanaṃ pana parikkhipitvā satta pabbatā ṭhitā, tesaṃ bāhirantato paṭṭhāya paṭhamo cūḷakāḷapabbato nāma, dutiyo mahākāḷapabbato nāma, tato udakapassapabbato nāma, tato candapassapabbato nāma, tato sūriyapassapabbato nāma, tato maṇipassapabbato nāma, sattamo suvaṇṇapassapabbato nāma. So ubbedhato sattayojaniko chaddantadahaṃ parikkhipitvā pattassa mukhavaṭṭi viya ṭhito. Tassa abbhantarimapassaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ, tato nikkhantena obhāsena chaddantadaho samuggatabālasūriyo viya hoti. Bāhirimapabbatesu pana eko ubbedhato cha yojanāni, eko pañca, eko cattāri, eko tīṇi, eko dve, eko yojanaṃ.
在那座被七重山环绕的湖的东北角,水风吹拂的地方,有一棵大榕树。它的树干周长五由旬,高七由旬。四条枝干朝四个方向伸展,每条长六由旬;向上伸展的枝干也同样是六由旬。这样,从根部算起,整棵树高十三由旬;枝干从这一端到那一端宽十二由旬;八千条气根垂下来装饰着它,像摩尼宝珠山一样光彩夺目地矗立着。在六牙湖的西面,金山上有一个十二由旬大的金洞。六牙龙王在雨季的夜晚,由八千条龙围绕,住在金洞里;到了热季,就迎着水风,站在大榕树根部的气根之间。巴利
Evaṃ sattapabbataparikkhittassa pana tassa dahassa pubbuttarakaṇṇe udakavātappaharaṇokāse mahānigrodharukkho, tassa khandho parikkhepato pañcayojaniko, ubbedhato sattayojaniko. Catūsu disāsu catasso sākhāyo chachayojanikā, uddhaṃ uggatasākhāpi chayojanikāva. Iti so mūlato paṭṭhāya ubbedhena terasayojaniko sākhānaṃ orimantato yāva pārimantā dvādasayojaniko aṭṭhahi pārohasahassehi paṭimaṇḍito muṇḍamaṇipabbato viya vilāsamāno tiṭṭhati. Chaddantadahassa pana pacchimadisābhāge suvaṇṇapabbate dvādasayojanikā kañcanaguhā. Chaddanto nāgarājā vassāratte aṭṭhasahassanāgaparivuto kañcanaguhāyaṃ vasati, gimhakāle udakavātaṃ sampaṭicchamāno mahānigrodhamūle pārohantare tiṭṭhati.
在曼陀吉尼湖中央大约二十五由旬的地方,没有苔藓,也没有浮萍,水本身就是水晶那样的颜色。再往后,在龙齐腰深的水里,有一片宽半由旬的白莲花林,环绕着那片水域。那里的藕根有犁头那么大,藕茎有大鼓面那么大。每一节藕茎里都有大约一阿罗迦量的乳汁。莲花盛开的时候,风吹起花粉,落在莲叶上,水滴也落在上面,经过太阳晒熟,就像煮熟的酸奶罐一样,变成了莲花蜜。紧接着,是一片同样广大的红莲花林,再接着是红睡莲林,再接着是白睡莲林,再接着是青莲花林,再接着是红莲花林,再接着是香稻林,再接着是黄瓜、葫芦、南瓜等甜味的藤果,再接着是一片同样宽半由旬的甘蔗林,那里的甘蔗有槟榔树干那么粗。再接着是芭蕉林,在那里吃两根熟芭蕉就会饱。再接着是果实像大罐子那么大的波罗蜜林,再接着是芒果林、阎浮林、迦毗陀林。总之,不应当说那个湖里没有可吃的水果。应当这样理解:存在于这雪山中的七大湖等的数量、形状等一切差别,世尊以一切方式了知、遍知、通达。巴利
Mandākiniyā pana majjhe pañcavīsatiyojanamatte ṭhāne sevālo vā paṇakaṃ vā natthi, phalikavaṇṇaṃ udakameva hoti, tato paraṃ pana nāgānaṃ kaṭippamāṇe udake aḍḍhayojanavitthataṃ setapadumavanaṃ taṃ udakaṃ parikkhipitvā ṭhitaṃ. Tattha muḷālaṃ naṅgalasīsamattaṃ hoti, bhisaṃ mahābheripokkharappamāṇaṃ hoti. Tassa ekekasmiṃ pabbantare āḷhakappamāṇaṃ khīraṃ hoti. Padumānaṃ pupphasamaye vāto reṇuvaṭṭiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā paduminīpattesu ṭhapeti, tattha udakaphusitāni patanti, tato ādiccapākena paccitvā pakkaayoghaṭikā viya pokkharamadhu tiṭṭhati, tadanantaraṃ tāvamahantameva rattapadumavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattakumudavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ setakumudavanaṃ , tadanantaraṃ nīluppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ rattuppalavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sugandhasālivanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ eḷālukaalābukumbhaṇḍādīni madhurarasāni valliphalāni, tadanantaraṃ aḍḍhayojanavitthatameva ucchuvanaṃ, tattha pūgarukkhakkhandhappamāṇaṃ ucchu. Tadanantaraṃ kadalivanaṃ, yato duve pakkāni khādantā kilamanti. Tadanantaraṃ cāṭippamāṇaphalaṃ panasavanaṃ, tadanantaraṃ ambavanaṃ, jambuvanaṃ, kapiṭṭhavananti saṅkhepato tasmiṃ dahe khāditabbayuttakaṃ phalaṃ nāma natthīti na vattabbaṃ. Iti imasmiṃ himavati vijjamānakasattamahāsarappabhutīnaṃ pamāṇasaṇṭhānādibhedaṃ sabbameva visesaṃ bhagavā sabbathā avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“十五由旬的树干围量”,意思是树干周围长达十五由旬,也就是说树干的围量是十五由旬。所谓“名为树”,是指可以用“树”这个词来称呼它,也就是树木的名称。因为树不会走动,所以称为naga(树)。应当连起来理解为“名为树的阎浮树”。“树干和枝条高五十由旬”,意思是树干向上高五十由旬,向四周伸展的枝条也各长五十由旬。正因如此,它向四周伸展达一百由旬,高度也同样是那样。阎浮树从根部一直到枝叶顶端是五十由旬,再往上直生的枝条又是五十由旬,四周每一根枝条也各伸展五十由旬。在那些枝条之间,有大河流淌。河流两岸,在阎浮果掉落的地方,会生出金芽。这些金芽被河水冲走,逐渐流入大海。因为这种金子是在阎浮河中产生的,所以称为“阎浮金”。巴利
Tipañcayojanakkhandhaparikkhepāti pannarasayojanappamāṇakkhandhaparikkhepā, khandhassa pariṇāho pannarasayojanappamāṇoti vuttaṃ hoti. Nagavhayāti nagasaddena avhātabbā, rukkhābhidhānāti attho. Rukkho hi na gacchatīti nagoti vuccati. Nagavhayā jambūti yojetabbaṃ. Paññāsayojanakkhandhasākhāyāmāti ubbedhato paññāsayojanappamāṇakkhandhāyāmā ubbedhato samantato ca paññāsayojanasākhāyāmā ca. Tato eva satayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā. Jamburukkhassa hi mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva sākhāviṭapā, tāva paṇṇāsa yojanāni, tato parampi ujukaṃ uggatasākhā paṇṇāsa yojanāni, samantato ca ekekā sākhā paṇṇāsa paṇṇāsa yojanāni vaḍḍhitāni. Tāsu pana mahantā mahantā nadiyo sandanti, tāsaṃ nadīnaṃ ubhayatīre jambupakkānaṃ patitaṭṭhāne suvaṇṇaṅkurā uṭṭhahanti, te nadījalena vuyhamānā anupubbena mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti, tatoyeva jambunadiyaṃ nibbattattā ‘‘jambunada’’nti taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ vuccati.
凭借它的威力,也就是凭借它广大、能维持一劫等那样的力量。而阎浮树有多大,阿修罗的质多波咤厘树就有多大,金翅鸟的绢绵树就有多大,西牛货洲的迦昙婆树就有多大,北俱卢洲的劫波树就有多大,东胜身洲的尸利沙树就有多大,三十三天的波利质多罗树就有多大。因此古人说:巴利
Yassānubhāvenāti yassā mahantatā kappaṭṭhāyikādippakārena pabhāvena. Yañcetaṃ jambuyā pamāṇaṃ, etadeva asurānaṃ cittapāṭaliyā, garuḷānaṃ simbalirukkhassa, aparagoyāne kadambassa, uttarakurūsu kapparukkhassa, pubbavidehe sirīsassa, tāvatiṃsesu pāricchattakassāti. Tenāhu porāṇā –
喇叭花树、绢绵树、阎浮树,还有诸天的波利质多罗树;
迦昙婆树和如意树,加上尸利沙树就是第七个。巴利
‘‘Pāṭalī simbalī jambū, devānaṃ pārichattako; Kadambo kapparukkho ca, sirīsena bhavati sattama’’nti. (visuddhi. 1.137; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.322);
这里,“与尸利沙树共为第七”中的“sirīsena”是具格,用作主格之义。“第七”是因为词性变化而说的,意思是尸利沙树是第七。巴利
Ettha sirīsena bhavati sattamanti ettha sirīsenāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ. Sattamanti liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ, sirīso bhavati sattamoti attho.
“轮围石山”就是轮围山。它环绕那一切之后而安立,意思是:环绕前面所说的那整个世间界之后,轮围石山安立,这就叫作一个世间界。“ma”这个音是为了词语连接而加进来的。他们说,这里的关联应当这样理解:“环绕那整个世间界之后,这轮围石山安立。”即使这样说,也应当知道轮围山本身就是世间界的一部分。巴利
Cakkavāḷasiluccayoti cakkavāḷapabbato. Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, lokadhātumayaṃ ṭhitoti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sabbampi taṃ parikkhipitvā cakkavāḷasiluccayo patiṭṭhito, ayaṃ ekā lokadhātu nāmāti attho. Ma-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. ‘‘Taṃ sabbaṃ lokadhātuṃ parikkhipitvā ayaṃ cakkavāḷasiluccayo ṭhito’’ti evampettha sambandhaṃ vadanti, evaṃ vuttepi cakkavāḷapabbatopi lokadhātuyevāti veditabbaṃ.
这里说的“其中”,是指在那个世间界中。月轮直径是四十九由旬:从纵向、横向和高度来说,都是四十九由旬;但从圆周来说,则是一百五十由旬少三由旬。日轮直径是五十由旬:这里也应当依照月轮所说的方式理解,纵、广都是五十由旬,而圆周则是一百五十由旬。巴利
Tatthāti tissaṃ lokadhātuyaṃ. Candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojananti ujukaṃ āyāmato vitthārato ubbedhato ca ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, parimaṇḍalato pana tīhi yojanehi ūnadiyaḍḍhasatayojanaṃ. Sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojananti etthāpi candamaṇḍale vuttanayeneva ujukaṃ paññāsayojananti veditabbaṃ, parimaṇḍalato pana diyaḍḍhasatayojanaṃ.
在这两者之中,月轮在下,日轮在上,两者之间相隔一由旬。从月轮的下缘到日轮的上缘,是一百由旬。月宫内部是宝石所成,外部为银所环绕,内外都是清凉的。日宫内部是黄金所成,外部为水晶所环绕,内外都是炎热的。月亮纵向运行缓慢。因为在朔日,它与太阳一同运行,之后一天一天地渐渐落后,到满月时便落后了半程;而横向运行则很快。同样,它在一个月里,有时从南边、有时从北边被看到。月亮两侧有星宿群在运行,月亮像母牛靠近牛犊一样靠近那一个又一个星宿;但星宿们不离开自己的运行位置,只沿着自己的轨道运行。而太阳的纵向运行迅速,横向运行缓慢。所谓横向运行,就是从南方向北方、从北方向南方的运行,这种运行缓慢,要六个月才能完成。巴利
Tesu pana candamaṇḍalaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.121) heṭṭhā, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ upari, antarā nesaṃ yojanaṃ hoti. Candassa heṭṭhimantato sūriyassa uparimantaṃ yojanasataṃ hoti, candavimānaṃ anto maṇimayaṃ, bahi rajatena parikkhittaṃ, anto ca bahi ca sītalameva hoti. Sūriyavimānaṃ anto kanakamayaṃ, bāhiraṃ phalikaparikkhittaṃ hoti, anto ca bahi ca uṇhameva. Cando ujukaṃ saṇikaṃ gacchati. So hi amāvāsiyaṃ sūriyena saddhiṃ gacchanto divase divase thokaṃ thokaṃ ohīyanto puṇṇamāsiyaṃ upaḍḍhamaggato ohīyati, tiriyaṃ pana sīghaṃ gacchati. Tathā hesa ekasmiṃ māse kadāci dakkhiṇato, kadāci uttarato dissati, candassa ubhosu passesu nakkhattatārakā gacchanti, cando dhenu viya vacchaṃ taṃ taṃ nakkhattaṃ upasaṅkamati, nakkhattāni pana attano gamanaṭṭhānaṃ na vijahanti, attano vīthiyāva gacchanti. Sūriyassa pana ujukaṃ gamanaṃ sīghaṃ, tiriyaṃ gamanaṃ dandhaṃ. Tiriyaṃ gamanaṃ nāma dakkhiṇadisato uttaradisāya, uttaradisato dakkhiṇadisāya gamanaṃ, taṃ dandhaṃ chahi chahi māsehi ijjhanato.
太阳在黑分斋戒日与月亮一起运行之后,从第二天初日那天起,因为自己走得快、月亮走得慢,就甩下月轮十万由旬向前行,这时月亮看起来就像一条细线。再往后,到半月的第二天,又甩下月轮十万由旬。就这样一天一天过去,直到白分斋戒日,每天都甩下十万由旬,月亮就渐渐变大,到斋戒日那天变成满月。这里说的渐渐变大,应当理解为:从上方落下的阳光,在下方生起的月影,因为太阳一天比一天离得更远而逐渐减弱,于是月轮那一块地方看起来就好像在一天天变大;所以月亮像是渐渐变大,到斋戒日满月那天,显现为圆满的月轮。然后,太阳在初日那天跑了十万由旬,又追上月轮,因为月亮走得慢、自己走得快;第二天同样又是十万由旬。就这样一直到斋戒日,每天都跑十万由旬去追上它。于是月亮渐渐亏减,到黑分斋戒日就完全看不见了。这里说的渐渐亏减,应当按前面说过的渐渐变大的道理来理解。不过,那边是因为月影减弱,月轮看起来在变大;这边是因为月影增强,月轮看起来在变小,所以月亮像是渐渐亏减,到斋戒日就完全看不见。太阳把月亮放在下面,自己在上方,月轮就像大钵盖住小碗一样被遮住,月亮的影子像正午时屋子的影子一样看不见。当影子看不见时,月亮自己也像白天放在远处的灯一样,完全显现不出来。巴利
Sūriyo kāḷapakkhauposathe candena saheva gantvā tato paraṃ pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya gacchati attano sīghagāmitāya tassa ca dandhagāmitāya, atha cando lekhā viya paññāyati. Tato parampi pakkhassa dutiyāya yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya gacchati. Evaṃ divase divase yāva sukkapakkhauposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ ohāya gacchati, atha cando anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā uposathadivase paripuṇṇo hoti. Anukkamena vaḍḍhanañcettha uparibhāgato patitasūriyālokatāya heṭṭhato pavattāya sūriyassa dūrabhāvena divase divase anukkamena parihāyamānāya attano chāyāya vasena anukkamena caṇḍamaṇḍalappadesassa vaḍḍhamānassa viya dissamānatāyāti veditabbaṃ, tasmā anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā viya uposathadivase puṇṇamāyaṃ paripuṇṇamaṇḍalo hutvā dissati. Atha sūriyo pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā puna candamaṇḍalaṃ gaṇhāti candassa dandhagatitāya attano ca sīghagatitāya, tathā dutiyāya satasahassanti evaṃ yāva uposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā gaṇhāti. Atha cando anukkamena hāyitvā kāḷapakkhauposathadivase sabbaso na paññāyati, anukkamena hāyamānatā cettha anukkamena vaḍḍhamānatāya vuttanayena veditabbā. Tattha pana chāyāya hāyamānatāya maṇḍalaṃ vaḍḍhamānaṃ viya dissati, idha ca chāyāya vaḍḍhamānatāya maṇḍalaṃ hāyamānaṃ viya dissati, tasmā anukkamena hāyitvā viya uposathadivase sabbaso na paññāyati. Candaṃ heṭṭhā katvā sūriyo upari hoti, mahatiyā pātiyā khuddakabhājanaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ pidhīyati, majjhanhike gehacchāyā viya candassa chāyā na paññāyati. So chāyāya apaññāyamānāya dūre ṭhitānaṃ divā padīpo viya sayampi na paññāyati.
不过,这些又有三条运行路线:羊道、龙道和牛道。其中,羊道的水让羊觉得厌恶,龙象却觉得喜欢,牛则因为冷热均衡而感到舒适。同样,当太阳沿着某条路线运行时,如果雨云天子们被太阳的灼热逼得难受,不从自己的宫殿出来,只顾着玩乐而不四处游走,那时候日宫据说就会从平常的路线往下偏行;日宫往下偏行时,月宫也跟着往下偏行,因为月宫是跟着日宫走的。所以这条路线因为缺水、与羊相应,就得到了羊道这个名称。而当太阳沿着另一条路线运行时,如果雨云天子们没有受到太阳灼热的逼迫,频频从自己的宫殿出来,专心玩乐,到处游走,那时候日宫据说就会从平常的路线往上偏行;日宫往上偏行时,月宫也跟着往上偏行,因为月宫是跟着日宫走的。所谓跟着走,就是走同样的路线,因为风轮会推动宫殿。所以这条路线因为水多、与龙相应,就得到了龙道这个名称。当太阳既不往上偏行也不往下偏行,只沿着平常的路线运行时,雨云天子们便按时、随自己的心意从宫殿出来,安乐地游走,因此按时降雨,世间的时节就变得均衡。由于这个时节均衡作为原因,日月的运行与牛相应,就得到了牛道这个名称。所以,当日月走上羊道时,天上一滴雨也不下。当它们走上龙道时,天空就像裂开一样倾泻雨水。当它们走上牛道时,时节均衡就得以实现。巴利
Imesaṃ pana ajavīthi nāgavīthi govīthīti tisso gamanavīthiyo honti. Tattha ajānaṃ udakaṃ paṭikūlaṃ hoti, hatthināgānaṃ manāpaṃ, gunnaṃ sītuṇhasamatāya phāsu hoti. Tathā ca yāya vīthiyā sūriye gacchante vassavalāhakadevaputtā sūriyābhitāpasantattā attano vimānato na nikkhamanti, kīḷāpasutā hutvā na vicaranti, tadā kira sūriyavimānaṃ pakatimaggato adho otaritvā vicarati, tassa oruyha caraṇeneva candavimānampi adho oruyha carati taggatikattā, tasmā sā vīthi udakābhāvena ajānurūpatāya ‘‘ajavīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Yāya pana vīthiyā sūriye gacchante vassavalāhakadevaputtā sūriyābhitāpābhāvato abhiṇhaṃ attano vimānato bahi nikkhamitvā kīḷāpasutā hutvā ito cito ca vicaranti, tadā kira sūriyavimānaṃ pakatimaggato uddhaṃ āruhitvā vicarati, tassa uddhaṃ āruyha caraṇeneva candavimānampi uddhaṃ āruyha carati taggatikattā, taggatikatā ca samānagati nāma vātamaṇḍalena vimānassa phellitabbattā, tasmā sā vīthi udakabahubhāvena nāgānurūpatāya ‘‘nāgavīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Yadā sūriyo uddhaṃ anārohanto adho ca anotaranto pakatimaggeneva gacchati, tadā vassavalāhakā yathākālaṃ yathāruciñca vimānato nikkhamitvā sukhena vicaranti, tena kālena kālaṃ vassanato loke utusamatā hoti, tāya utusamatāya hetubhūtāya sā candimasūriyānaṃ gati gavānurūpatāya ‘‘govīthī’’ti samaññā gatā. Tasmā yaṃ kālaṃ candimasūriyā ajavīthiṃ āruhanti, tadā devo ekabindumpi na vassati. Yadā nāgavīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā bhinnaṃ viya nabhaṃ paggharati. Yadā govīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā utusamatā sampajjati.
不过,当国王们不如法的时候,由于他们不如法,副王、将军等人,以及所有天人和梵天也都不如法。那时,由于他们不如法,日月天子就偏离正道运行。因为那时,前面说过的、被称为“不如法”的共业恶业之力——它是多病等不可爱果报的依止——以这股力量,风不正当地吹,日月天子被风吹动,绕着须弥山偏离正道运行,不沿着正常的轨道走。风不沿正常轨道吹,而是沿不正常的方向吹;沿不正常的方向吹时,就摇动空中的宫殿;宫殿被摇动时,天人们没有心情嬉戏;没有心情嬉戏时,寒暑等季节就不能按时正常到来;季节不正常时,天就不能正常降雨:有时下,有时不下;有的地方下,有的地方不下。即使下雨,在播种时、发芽时、抽茎时、开花时、灌浆等时候,雨也是该下的时候不下、该停的时候不停,不能适时地利益庄稼。因此,庄稼成熟得不均匀,失去了香气、味道等好处。即使放进同一个器皿里的米粒,也会有的地方夹生,有的地方太烂,有的地方刚好煮熟。吃下去之后,在肚子里也完全不能正常消化,有的部分消化了,有的部分完全消化了——就这样以三种方式消化,不能正常地消化吸收。因此,众生就多病而且短寿。巴利
Yadā pana rājāno adhammikā honti, tesaṃ adhammikatāya uparājasenāpatippabhutayo sabbe devā brahmāno ca adhammikā honti, tadā tesaṃ adhammikatāya visamaṃ candimasūriyā parivattanti. Tadā hi bahvābādhatādianiṭṭhaphalūpanissayabhūtassa yathāvuttassa adhammikatāsaññitassa sādhāraṇassa pāpakammassa balena visamaṃ vāyantena vāyunā phelliyamānā candimasūriyā sineruṃ parikkhipantā visamaṃ parivattanti, yathāmaggena na pavattanti. Vāto yathāmaggena na vāyati, ayathāmaggena vāyati, ayathāmaggena vāyanto ākāsaṭṭhavimānāni khobheti, vimānesu khobhitesu devatānaṃ kīḷanatthāya cittāni na namanti, cittesu anamantesu sītuṇhabhedo utu yathākālena na sampajjati, tasmiṃ asampajjante na sammā devo vassati, kadāci vassati, kadāci na vassati, katthaci vassati, katthaci na vassati. Vassantopi vappakāle aṅkurakāle nāḷakāle pupphakāle khīraggahaṇādikālesu yathā yathā sassānaṃ upakāro na hoti, tathā tathā vassati ca vigacchati ca. Tena sassāni visamapākāni honti vigatagandharasādisampadāni, ekabhājane pakkhittataṇḍulesupi ekasmiṃ padese bhattaṃ uttaṇḍulaṃ hoti, ekasmiṃ atikilinnaṃ, ekasmiṃ samapākaṃ. Taṃ paribhuttaṃ kucchiyampi sabbaso apariṇataṃ, ekadesena pariṇataṃ, supariṇatanti evaṃ tīhiyeva pakārehi paccati, pakkāsayaṃ na sammā upagacchati. Tena sattā bahvābādhā ceva honti appāyukā ca.
但在如法国王的时代,情况与前面所说的相反:日月平稳地运转,沿着正道运行,季节也变得均衡。日月有六个月从须弥山外面出来运行,六个月在须弥山里面运行。具体来说,它们靠近须弥山向右绕行,六个月里从那条运行轨道向外,以自身横向的行进朝向轮围山方向出去。就这样,在六个月中,每一刹那都在远离须弥山,从那里出去,到达轮围山附近。从那里起,又有六个月,每一刹那都在远离,从那里出去,到达须弥山附近,在里面运行。它们在阿沙荼月靠近须弥山运行,之后两个月出去在外面运行。在初迦提迦月走在正中间,之后朝向轮围山前进,三个月靠近轮围山运行,然后再出去,在质多罗月走在正中间,之后两个月朝向须弥山趋入,再在阿沙荼月靠近须弥山运行。这里应当知道:当它们走在须弥山与轮围山之间的中点、以及须弥山那边的中点时,就说它们靠近须弥山运行,并不是紧贴着须弥山顶的平台;靠近轮围山运行也应当按同样的道理来理解。而当它们笔直地走在须弥山与轮围山的正中间时,就应当知道是在正中间运行。巴利
Dhammikānaṃ pana rājūnaṃ kāle vuttavipariyāyena candimasūriyā samaṃ parivattanti, yathāmaggena pavattanti, utusamatā ca sampajjati, candimasūriyā cha māse sineruto bahi nikkhamanti, cha māse anto vicaranti. Tathā hi sinerusamīpena taṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gacchantā cha māse tato gamanavīthito bahi attano tiriyaṃ gamanena cakkavāḷābhimukhā nikkhamanti . Evaṃ cha māse khaṇe khaṇe sineruto apasakkanavasena tato nikkhamitvā cakkavāḷasamīpaṃ pattā. Tatopi cha māse khaṇe khaṇe apasakkanavasena nikkhamitvā sinerusamīpaṃ pāpuṇantā anto vicaranti. Te hi āsāḷhīmāse sinerusamīpena caranti, tato dve māse nikkhamitvā bahi caranti. Paṭhamakattikamāse majjhena gacchanti, tato cakkavāḷābhimukhā gantvā tayo māse cakkavāḷasamīpena vicaritvā puna nikkhamitvā citramāse majjhena gantvā tato pare dve māse sineruabhimukhā pakkhanditvā puna āsāḷhe sinerusamīpena caranti. Ettha ca sinerussa cakkavāḷassa ca yaṃ ṭhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ, tassa sinerussa ca yaṃ ṭhānaṃ vemajjhaṃ, tena gacchantā sinerusamīpena carantīti veditabbā, na sinerussa aggālindaṃ allīnā, cakkavāḷasamīpena caraṇampi imināva nayena veditabbaṃ. Yadā pana sinerussa cakkavāḷassa ujukaṃ vemajjhena gacchanti, tadā vemajjhena vicarantīti veditabbaṃ.
他们这样运行时,一下子就能照亮三个大洲。每一个方向都能驱散九十万由旬的黑暗,显现光明。怎么做到的呢?在这个洲太阳升起的时候,东胜身洲正是正午,北俱卢洲正是日落,西牛货洲正是中夜;东胜身洲日出的时候,北俱卢洲正是正午,西牛货洲正是日落,这个洲正是中夜;北俱卢洲日出的时候,西牛货洲正是正午,这个洲正是日落,东胜身洲正是中夜;西牛货洲日出的时候,这个洲正是正午,东胜身洲正是日落,北俱卢洲正是中夜。在这个洲正午的时候,东胜身洲的居民因为日落只看到半个日轮,西牛货洲的居民因为日出也只看到半个日轮。其他洲也照这样类推。应当知道,日月就是以这种方式同时照亮三个大洲的。巴利
Evaṃ vicarantā ca ekappahārena tīsupi dīpesu ālokaṃ karonti. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dassenti. Kathaṃ? Imasmiñhi dīpe sūriyuggamanakālo pubbavidehe majjhanhiko hoti, uttarakurūsu atthaṅgamanakālo, aparagoyāne majjhimayāmo, pubbavidehamhi uggamanakālo uttarakurūsu majjhanhiko, aparagoyāne atthaṅgamanakālo, idha majjhimayāmo, uttarakurūsu uggamanakālo aparagoyāne majjhanhiko, idha atthaṅgamanakālo, pubbavidehe majjhimayāmo, aparagoyānadīpe uggamanakālo idha majjhanhiko, pubbavidehadīpe atthaṅgamanakālo, uttarakurūsu majjhimayāmo. Imasmiñhi dīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, aparagoyānavāsīnaṃ uggamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ paññāyati. Evaṃ sesadīpesupi. Iti imināva pakārena tīsu dīpesu ekappahāreneva candimasūriyā ālokaṃ dassentīti veditabbaṃ.
不过换一种情况,就只在两个洲同时显现光明。因为在某个洲,由于日落而只看得见半个日轮,太阳落下去之后那里就看不见了,也不再放光;而在两个洲,则同时两者都出现。每一个方向驱散九十万由旬黑暗的道理,也应当按这个方式来理解。在这个洲正午的时候,东胜身洲的居民由于日落而只看得见半个日轮,于是就在东胜身洲九十万由旬的范围里驱散黑暗、显现光明;西牛货洲也一样,由于日出,那里也只看得见半个日轮。而东胜身洲日落之后,就看不见了,于是在两个洲到处驱散黑暗、显现光明;西牛货洲日出时也一样,因为太阳一升起,就到处驱散黑暗。巴利
Ito aññathā pana dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahāreneva ālokaṃ dassenti. Yasmiñhi dīpe atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyati, atthaṅgamite tattha na paññāyati, ālokaṃ na dasseti, dvīsu eva dīpesu ekappahārena ubhayaṃ. Ekekāya disāya nava nava yojanasatasahassāni andhakāravidhamanampi imināva nayena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imasmiñhi dīpe ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ atthaṅgamanavasena upaḍḍhaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāyatīti pubbavidehe navayojanasatasahassappamāṇe ṭhāne andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dasseti, tathā aparagoyāne uggamanavasena tatthāpi upaḍḍhasseva paññāyamānattā. Pubbavidehānaṃ pana atthaṅgamite na paññāyatīti dvīsu dīpesu sabbattha andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā ālokaṃ dasseti aparagoyānepi uggate sūriye sabbattha andhakāravidhamanato.
日月出现的时候,是同时在这个世间出现的,其中太阳先被认出来。因为初劫众生的自身光明消失后,黑暗就出现了。他们又怕又慌,心想:“要是能有别的光明出现,那该多好啊。”于是,能让大家生起勇气的日轮升了起来,因此它就得名叫“太阳”。那天太阳照亮之后落下了,黑暗又回来了。他们又怕又慌,心想:“要是能有别的光明出现,那该多好啊。”这时,月轮像是知道了他们的心愿一样升了起来,因此它就得名叫“月亮”。日月这样出现之后,星辰、星宿也显现出来,从那时起,昼夜就能分清了。渐渐地,月份、半月、季节、年岁也就有了。还应知道,日月出现的那一天,须弥山、轮围山、雪山以及四大洲也同时出现,而且它们是在颇勒具那月满月那天同时出现的。巴利
Pātubhavantā ca candimasūriyā ekatova loke pātubhavanti, tesu sūriyo paṭhamataraṃ paññāyati. Paṭhamakappikānañhi sattānaṃ sayaṃpabhāya antarahitāya andhakāro ahosi. Te bhītatasitā ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa, sace añño āloko bhaveyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Tato mahājanassa sūrabhāvaṃ janayamānaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi, tenevassa ‘‘sūriyo’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Tasmiṃ divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgamite puna andhakāro ahosi. Te bhītatasitā ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa, sace añño āloko uppajjeyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya candamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi, tenevassa ‘‘cando’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi. Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti , tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti. Anukkamena ca māsaḍḍhamāsautusaṃvaccharā jāyanti. Candimasūriyānaṃ pana pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā cattāro ca dīpā pātubhavanti, te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavantīti veditabbaṃ.
因为这里注释书中说:“一个轮围世界,长和宽各有十二万三千四百五十由旬。”所以,按照所说的这个尺寸,在须弥山所立之处,除去八万四千由旬,直到轮围山北面部分的量,在这南面——巴利
Yasmā cettha ‘‘ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato ca vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni tīṇi sahassāni cattāri satāni paññāsañca yojanānī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1 verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ, tasmā vuttappamāṇato imassa cakkavāḷassa sinerupatiṭṭhitokāse caturāsīti yojanasahassāni parato yāva cakkavāḷapabbatā uttaradisābhāgappamāṇañca pahāya imissā dakkhiṇadisāya –
须弥山与轮围山之间的间距大小,
五十五万九千。
七百二十五由旬。
名为“行于中道”的,在那里,太阳正行于正中。
从正中间一直到须弥山,在诸轮围山之间;
当它处在正中间时,那时它就在两端之间。
从正中间一直到须弥山,以及轮围山和群山;
二十七万九千
八百六十二由旬又二伽浮陀。
在须弥山和轮围山两边之间。
十三万九千
九百三十一由旬,再加上一伽浮他。
按尺寸来说,周围一圈以及中道的环形范围;
十九个十万加三十一千。
一百以及另外七十五,应当了知;
太阳向南或向北运行时,
它正好按中道的尺度,以圆形的方式运行。
他这样行走时,又从下方一再下来、下来。
一次次向上攀升、再攀升,他就这样始终向前行去。
从那以后,以他行进的速度来说,那段路程对他来说很遥远。
三百万由旬,按长度算;
因此,他每天四处行走,正好就是那么远。
一千五百五十四由旬。
三十三肘,还有三牛呼与十三牛呼。
太阳一天里横向走八指宽,
四万六千六百,以及三牛呼。
他一个月走四十三由旬。
九万三千二百八十七。
他走两个拘卢舍,要花两个月时间。
以这样的速度,从这条路的尽头走到另一条路的尽头。
他走完这段路要六个月,走中间那段则要三个月。
太阳确实在须弥山附近的边道中运行。
来的时候要花两个月,才能到那座岛的中央。
因此,从锡兰岛中央到须弥山之间,
另外还有二十万零二百。
三万三千,加上十八由旬又三迦浮陀。
它也在轮围界之间,以及诸洲的正中央。
三十万,两万六千;
五百零六俱卢舍。巴利
Sinerucakkavāḷānaṃ, antaraṃ parimāṇato; Pañca satasahassāni, sahassānūnasaṭṭhi ca. Satāni satta ñeyyāni, pañcavīsuttarāni ca; Majjhavīthigato nāma, tattha vemajjhago ravi. Majjhato yāva merumhā, cakkavāḷānamantare; Vemajjhago yadā hoti, ubhayantagato tadā. Majjhato yāva merumhā, cakkavāḷā ca pabbatā; Duve satasahassāni, sahassānūnasīti ca. Aṭṭhasataṃ duve saṭṭhi, yojanāni dvigāvutaṃ; Ubhato antato meru-cakkavāḷānamantare. Ekaṃ satasahassañca, sahassānūnatālīsaṃ; Navasatānekatiṃsa, yojanāni ca gāvutaṃ. Pamāṇato samantā ca, maṇḍalaṃ majjhavīthiyā; Satasahassānūnavīsa, sahassānekatiṃsa ca. Satamekañca viññeyyaṃ, pañcasattati uttaraṃ; Dakkhiṇaṃ uttarañcāpi, gacchanto pana bhāṇumā. Majjhavīthippamāṇena , maṇḍaleneva gacchati; Gacchanto ca panevaṃ so, oruyhoruyha heṭṭhato. Āruyhāruyha uddhañca, yato gacchati sabbadā; Tato gativasenassa, dūramaddhānamāsi taṃ. Tiṃsa satasahassāni, yojanāni pamāṇato; Tasmā so parito yāti, tattakaṃva dine dine. Sahassamekaṃ pañcasataṃ, catupaññāsayojanaṃ; Tigāvutaṃ terasūsabhaṃ, tettiṃsa ratanāni ca. Aṭṭhaṅgulāni ca tiriyaṃ, gacchatekadine ravi; Chatālīsasahassāni, cha satāni tigāvutaṃ. Yojanānaṃ titālīsaṃ, māsenekena gacchati; Tenavutisahassāni, dvisataṃ sattasīti ca. Gāvutāni duve cāpi, dvīhi māsehi gacchati; Imāya gatiyā anta-vīthito vīthiantimaṃ. Gacchati chahi māsehi, timāsehi ca majjhimaṃ; Sinerusantike anta-vīthito pana bhāṇumā; Āgacchanto dvimāsehi, assa dīpassa majjhago. Tasmā sīhaḷadīpassa, majjhato meruantaraṃ; Duve satasahassāni, dvisatenādhikāni tu. Tettiṃsañca sahassāni, aṭṭhārasa tigāvutaṃ; Cakkavāḷantarañcassa, dīpasseva ca majjhato. Tīṇi satasahassāni, sahassāni chavīsati; Cha uttarāni pañceva, satānekañca gāvutanti.
在这里,也应该知道这一点同样是一种差别。巴利
Evamettha ayampi viseso veditabbo.
三十三天宫有一万由旬:这里,三十三位共同修福的人生在这里,所以他们共同居住的地方就叫“三十三”,那正是三十三天;他们的住处就是三十三天宫。据说,摩伽童子和摩遮罗村的同伴们命终之后投生到那里,因为那三十三位天子的缘故,这个天界就有了这个名称。另一种说法是,因为其他轮围世界里也有六欲天,经中也说“一千个四大王天、一千个三十三天”,所以应该知道,这只是对这个天界的一个名称施设。而“一万由旬”这句话,应该理解成是指帝释城说的。也就是说,三十三天的天人们,有的住在山上,有的住在虚空中,他们一层层延续,一直到轮围山;四大王天、夜摩天等也是这样。即使是在同一个天界里,天人们一层层延续,没有不遍及轮围山的。不过,这三十三天宫应该理解成位于须弥山顶一万由旬的地方。它东门到西门之间有一万由旬,南门到北门之间也是这样。那座城有一千座门,园林和池塘点缀其间。巴利
Tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojananti ettha tettiṃsa sahapuññakārino ettha nibbattāti taṃsahacaritaṭṭhānaṃ tettiṃsaṃ, tadeva tāvatiṃsaṃ , taṃ nivāso etesanti tāvatiṃsā, devā, tesaṃ bhavanaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ. Tathā hi maghena māṇavena saddhiṃ macalagāmake kālaṃ katvā tattha uppanne tettiṃsa devaputte upādāya assa devalokassa ayaṃ paṇṇatti jātāti vadanti. Atha vā yasmā sesacakkavāḷesupi cha kāmāvacaradevalokā atthi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘sahassaṃ cātumahārājikānaṃ sahassaṃ tāvatiṃsāna’’nti. Tasmā nāmapaṇṇattiyevesā tassa devalokassāti veditabbā. Dasasahassayojananti idaṃ pana sakkapuraṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi tāvatiṃsakāyikā devā atthi pabbataṭṭhakā, atthi ākāsaṭṭhakā, tesaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ pattā, tathā cātumahārājikānaṃ yāmādīnañca. Ekadevalokepi hi devānaṃ paramparā cakkavāḷapabbataṃ appattā nāma natthi. Idaṃ pana tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ sinerussa uparimatale dasasahassayojanike ṭhāne patiṭṭhitanti veditabbaṃ. Tassa pācīnapacchimadvārānaṃ antarā dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti, tathā dakkhiṇuttaradvārānaṃ. Taṃ kho pana nagaraṃ dvārasahassayuttaṃ ahosi ārāmapokkharaṇīpaṭimaṇḍitaṃ.
在它中央,有一座名叫最胜殿的宫殿,是帝释的宫殿,由七宝制成,高七百由旬,装饰着高三百由旬的旗幡。在那里,金柱上挂着宝旗,宝柱上挂着金旗,珊瑚柱上挂着珍珠旗,珍珠柱上挂着珊瑚旗,七宝柱上挂着七宝旗。巴利
Tassa majjhe (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.29 maghavatthu) tiyojanasatubbedhehi, dhajehi paṭimaṇḍito sattaratanamayo sattayojanasatubbedho sakkassa vejayanto nāma pāsādo. Tattha suvaṇṇayaṭṭhīsu maṇidhajā ahesuṃ, maṇiyaṭṭhīsu suvaṇṇadhajā, pavāḷayaṭṭhīsu muttadhajā, muttayaṭṭhīsu pavāḷadhajā, sattaratanamayāsu yaṭṭhīsu sattaratanamayā dhajā.
胜车长一百五十由旬(《相应部注》1.1.249等)。它的西端是五十由旬,中间的车厢是五十由旬,从车辕连接处到车头也是五十由旬。把这一尺寸翻倍,他们又说成“长三百由旬”。那上面实际有一由旬大小的座垫。在那里有一顶三由旬的白伞盖,同一副车轭上套着上千匹良马。其余装饰品的尺寸没有限量。而它的幢幡高二百五十由旬,被风吹动时,发出的声音就像五种乐器同时奏响一样。巴利
Diyaḍḍhayojanasatāyāmo vejayantaratho (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.249 ādayo). Tassa hi pacchimanto paṇṇāsayojano, majjhe rathapañjaro paṇṇāsayojano, rathasandhito yāva rathasīsā paṇṇāseva yojanāni. Tadeva pamāṇaṃ diguṇaṃ katvā ‘‘tiyojanasatāyāmo’’tipi vadantiyeva. Tasmiṃ yojanikapallaṅko atthato tiṭṭhati. Tattha tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ, ekasmiṃyeva yuge sahassaājaññayuttaṃ. Sesālaṅkārassa pamāṇaṃ natthi. Dhajo panassa aḍḍhatiyāni yojanasatāni uggato, yassa vātāhatassa pañcaṅgikatūriyasseva saddo niccharati.
帝释天还有一头名叫伊罗婆那的象,身长一百五十由旬,它其实也是天子。因为天界里没有畜生道众生,所以它在出园游玩的时候,就舍掉自己的天身,变成一头一百五十由旬长的、名叫伊罗婆那的象。它化出三十三个象头,每个头按旋纹算有半由旬到一由旬半那么大,在所有这些头的正中间,它为帝释天化出一个名叫善见的三十由旬大的头。那上面有一个十二由旬大的宝帐,帐中各处竖立着高一由旬的七宝旗幡。周边垂挂着璎珞网,被微风一吹,就发出像五种乐器合奏、又像天歌一样的声音。宝帐中央为帝释天铺设了一个一由旬大的宝座,帝释天就坐在那里。在三十三个头的每一个头上,各化出七根象牙,每根象牙长五十由旬。每一根象牙上有七个莲池,每一个莲池有七丛莲花,每一丛莲花有七朵花,每一朵花有七片花瓣,每一片花瓣上有七位天女在跳舞。就这样,周围五十由旬的地方,光是在象牙上就有歌舞集会的场面。巴利
Sakkassa pana erāvaṇo nāma hatthī diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko, sopi devaputtoyeva. Na hi devalokasmiṃ tiracchānagatā honti, tasmā so uyyānakīḷāya nikkhamanakāle attabhāvaṃ vijahitvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko erāvaṇo nāma hatthī hoti. So tettiṃsakumbhe māpeti āvaṭṭena gāvutaaḍḍhayojanappamāṇe, sabbesaṃ majjhe sakkassa atthāya sudassanaṃ nāma tiṃsayojanikaṃ kumbhaṃ māpeti. Tassa upari dvādasayojaniko ratanamaṇḍapo hoti. Tattha antarantarā sattaratanamayā yojanubbedhā dhajā uṭṭhahanti. Pariyante kiṅkiṇikajālā olambanti, yassa mandavāteritassa pañcaṅgikatūriyasaddasadiso dibbagītasaddo viya ravo niccharati. Maṇḍapamajjhe sakkassa yojaniko maṇipallaṅko paññatto hoti, tattha sakko nisīdati. Tettiṃsāya kumbhānaṃ ekekasmiṃ kumbhe satta satta dante māpeti, tesu ekeko paṇṇāsayojanāyāmo. Ekekasmiñcettha dante satta satta pokkharaṇiyo honti, ekekāya pokkharaṇiyā satta satta paduminīgacchā, ekekasmiṃ gacche satta satta pupphāni honti, ekekassa pupphassa satta satta pattāni, ekekasmiṃ patte satta satta devadhītaro naccanti. Evaṃ samantā paṇṇāsayojanaṭṭhāne hatthidantesuyeva naccanaṭasamajjo hoti.
难陀莲池宽五十由旬,也有人说是五百由旬。巴利
Nandā nāma pana pokkharaṇī paññāsayojanā. ‘‘Pañcasatayojanikā’’tipi vadanti.
杂色林苑方圆六十由旬,也有人说它有五百由旬。这座林苑点缀着上千棵天树,欢喜苑和帕鲁沙迦苑也一样。帝释天王在天女众的围绕下,降临到那条六十由旬长的黄金大道上,观赏星宿,在欢喜苑等处游玩。巴利
Cittalatāvanaṃ pana saṭṭhiyojanikaṃ. ‘‘Pañcayojanasatika’’ntipi vadanti. Taṃ pana dibbarukkhasahassapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ, tathā nandanavanaṃ phārusakavanañca. Sakko panettha accharāsaṅghaparivuto saṭṭhiyojanikaṃ suvaṇṇamahāvīthiṃ otaritvā nakkhattaṃ kīḷanto nandanavanādīsu vicarati.
不过,那棵名叫巴利恰答卡的拘毗罗树,四周方圆三百由旬,树干周长十五由旬,高一百由旬。在它树下,有一块长六十由旬、宽五十由旬、高十五由旬的般杜甘巴拉石,颜色像胜利茉莉花。这块石头非常柔软,帝释坐下时,半个身体会陷进去;起身时,凹陷的地方又恢复平整。巴利
Pāricchattako pana koviḷāro samantā tiyojanasataparimaṇḍalo pañcadasayojanapariṇāhakkhandho yojanasatubbedho. Tassa mūle saṭṭhiyojanāyāmā paññāsayojanavitthārā pañcadasayojanubbedhā jayasumanapupphakavaṇṇā paṇḍukambalasilā, yassā mudutāya sakkassa nisīdato upaḍḍhakāyo anupavisati, uṭṭhitakāle ūnaṃ paripūrati.
有一座名叫善法的天众会堂,长三百由旬,宽三百由旬,周长九百由旬,高五百由旬。它的地面是水晶做的,柱子、横梁、接合处等地方用来连接猛兽形装饰的钉子都是宝石做的,柱子是金做的,柱础和接合处是银做的,猛兽形装饰是珊瑚做的,椽子、翼墙和檐口是七宝做的,屋顶用青玉砖覆盖,屋顶的装饰是金做的,塔尖是银做的。巴利
Sudhammā nāma devasabhā āyāmato ca vitthārato ca tiyojanasatikā, parikkhepato navayojanasatikā, ubbedhato pañcayojanasatikā, tassā phalikamayā bhūmi, thambhatulāsaṅghāṭādīsu vāḷarūpādisaṅghaṭṭanakaāṇiyo maṇimayā, suvaṇṇamayā thambhā, rajatamayā thambhaghaṭakā ca saṅghāṭañca, pavāḷamayāni vāḷarūpāni, sattaratanamayā gopānasiyo ca pakkhapāsā ca mukhavaṭṭi ca, indanīlaiṭṭhakāhi chadanaṃ, sovaṇṇamayaṃ chadanavidhaṃ, rajatamayā thupikā.
有一株名叫阿萨瓦蒂的藤蔓,天人们为了看它开花,会去守候侍奉一千年;而巴利恰答卡树开花时,他们只守候侍奉一年。从这棵树的叶子变黄等阶段开始,他们就心生欢喜。正如所说:巴利
Āsāvatī nāma ekā latā atthi, ‘‘sā pupphissatī’’ti devā vassasahassaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti, pāricchattake pupphamāne ekaṃ vassaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ gacchanti. Te tassa paṇḍupalāsādibhāvato paṭṭhāya attamanā honti. Yathāha –
比丘们,当三十三天的波利质多罗树(珊瑚树)叶子变黄的时候,比丘们,那时三十三天的天人们就会心生欢喜:“波利质多罗树的叶子现在变黄了,不久之后就要落叶了。”等等。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ, bhikkhave, samaye devānaṃ tāvatiṃsānaṃ pāricchattako koviḷāro paṇḍupalāso hoti, attamanā, bhikkhave, devā tāvatiṃsā tasmiṃ samaye honti ‘paṇḍupalāso dāni pāricchattako koviḷāro, na cirasseva dāni pannapalāso bhavissatī’’’tiādi (a. ni. 7.69).
这棵巴利恰答卡树(koviḷāra,即合欢树)完全盛开时,光明向四周遍照五百由旬,香气顺风飘送一百由旬。当巴利恰答卡树开花时,不需要爬上去,不需要拿钩子把枝条拉下来,也不需要为了采花而准备篮子。这时会生起一种“断梗风”,把花朵从花梗上吹断;一种“承接风”接住花朵;一种“送入风”把花送进善法天众的集会厅;一种“清扫风”把旧花清走;一种“铺陈风”把花瓣、花蕊、花须铺得整整齐齐,像装饰一样。中央设有法座,是一由旬大小的宝榻,上方撑着三由旬的白伞盖。紧接着铺设帝释天王的座位,再接着是三十二位天子的座位,再接着是其他大威德天神的座位。至于其余的天众,则只以花蕊为座。天众们进入集会厅后,各自坐下。这时,花粉的尘柱从花中升起,升到上方碰到花蕊后又落下来,把天众们三伽乌塔大的身体涂抹得像是上了漆一样光洁。他们这样娱乐,要过四个月才结束。应当知道,世尊完全了知具备这些种种圆满的三十三天住处。巴利
Sabbapāliphullassa pana pāricchattakassa koviḷārassa samantā pañca yojanasatāni ābhā pharati, anuvātaṃ yojanasataṃ gandho gacchati. Pupphite pāricchattake ārohaṇakiccaṃ vā aṅkusaṃ gahetvā nāmanakiccaṃ vā pupphāharaṇatthaṃ caṅkoṭakakiccaṃ vā natthi. Kantanakavāto uṭṭhahitvā pupphāni vaṇṭato kantati, sampaṭicchanakavāto sampaṭicchati, pavesanakavāto sudhammadevasabhaṃ paveseti, sammajjanakavāto purāṇapupphāni nīharati, santharaṇakavāto pattakaṇṇikakesarāni racento santharati, majjhaṭṭhāne dhammāsanaṃ hoti yojanappamāṇo ratanapallaṅko, tassa upari dhāriyamānaṃ tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ, tadanantaraṃ sakkassa devarañño āsanaṃ attharīyati, tato bāttiṃsāya devaputtānaṃ, tato aññesaṃ mahesakkhadevatānaṃ. Aññesaṃ devatānaṃ pana pupphakaṇṇikāva āsanaṃ hoti. Devā devasabhaṃ pavisitvā nisīdanti. Tato pupphehi reṇuvaṭṭi uggantvā upari kaṇṇikaṃ āhacca nipatamānā devatānaṃ tigāvutappamāṇaṃ attabhāvaṃ lākhāparikammasajjitaṃ viya karoti, tesaṃ sā kīḷā catūhi māsehi pariyosānaṃ gacchati. Iti imāhi sampattīhi samannāgataṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ bhagavā sabbathā avedīti veditabbaṃ.
同样,关于阿修罗界:在这里,像天人一样不勇健、不自在、不闪耀的,就是阿修罗。所谓“修罗”就是天人,或者说是与天人敌对的那些,就是阿修罗。据说,帝释从前在摩遮拉村时,是一个名叫摩伽的青年,他带着三十三个人一起做善事,圆满了七种义务,在那里命终后,和随从们一起生到了天界。那些原本就住在那里的天人就说:“外来天子们来了,我们来款待他们吧。”于是献上天界的莲花,又用半个王国来邀请他。帝释对半个王国并不满足。于是原住的天人们又说:“我们来给外来天子们准备香酒作为款待吧。”帝释对自己的随从示意说:“诸位,不要喝香酒,只做出喝的样子就行。”他们就照做了。原住的天人们用金杯献上香酒,尽情喝下,喝醉后纷纷倒在金地上睡着了。帝释说:“抓住这些恶徒,把这些恶徒赶走!”叫人抓住他们的脚,把他们扔到须弥山脚下。靠着帝释的福德威力,那些跟随他的人也全都落在了那里。那时,由于他们的业和时节因缘,在须弥山下方一万由旬处,出现了阿修罗界,有被巴利恰答卡树遮蔽般的彩绘帕塔莉树作为庄严。帝释为了让他们回去后再也不来,设置了防护。关于这件事,有这样的说法:巴利
Tathā asurabhavananti ettha devā viya na suranti na īsaranti na virocantīti asurā. Surā nāma devā, tesaṃ paṭipakkhāti vā asurā. Sakko kira macalagāmake magho nāma māṇavo hutvā tettiṃsa purise gahetvā kalyāṇakammaṃ karonto satta vattapadāni pūretvā tattha kālakato devaloke nibbatti saddhiṃ parisāya. Tato pubbadevā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtā āgatā, sakkāraṃ nesaṃ karomā’’ti vatvā dibbapadumāni upanāmesuṃ, upaḍḍharajjena ca nimantesuṃ. Sakko upaḍḍharajjena asantuṭṭho ahosi, atha nevāsikā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtānaṃ sakkāraṃ karomā’’ti gandhapānaṃ sajjayiṃsu. Sakko sakaparisāya saññaṃ adāsi ‘‘mārisā mā gandhapānaṃ pivittha, pivamānākāramattameva dassethā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu. Nevāsikadevatā suvaṇṇasarakehi upanītaṃ gandhapānaṃ yāvadatthaṃ pivitvā mattā tattha tattha suvaṇṇapathaviyaṃ patitvā sayiṃsu. Sakko ‘‘gaṇhatha dhutte, haratha dhutte’’ti te pādesu gāhāpetvā sinerupāde khipāpesi. Sakkassa puññatejena tadanuvattakāpi sabbe tattheva patiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhimatale dasayojanasahassaṃ asurabhavanaṃ nibbatti pāricchattakapaṭicchannabhūtāya citrapāṭaliyā upasobhitaṃ. Sakko tesaṃ nivattitvā anāgamanatthāya ārakkhaṃ ṭhapesi. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
在两座不战城(即天城与阿修罗城)之间,设置了五种防护。
龙、金翅鸟、饮乳者,以及四位令人迷醉的大威力者。巴利
‘‘Antarā dvinnaṃ ayujjhapurānaṃ, pañcavidhā ṭhapitā abhirakkhā; Uragakaroṭipayassa ca hārī, madanayutā caturo ca mahatthā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.247; jā. aṭṭha. 1.1.31);
这里,“两座不战城之间”意思是天城和阿修罗城这两座城之间。据说这两座城因为无法用战争攻取,所以被称为“不战城”。当阿修罗强大时,天人逃跑进入天城,关上城门,即使有十万阿修罗也什么都做不了。当天人强大时,阿修罗逃跑进入阿修罗城,关上城门,即使有十万帝释也什么都做不了。因此,这两座城就叫作“不战城”。在它们之间,帝释在龙等五个地方设置了守护。其中,“蛇”这个词指的是龙。龙在水中力量很大,所以在须弥山的“颅”指的是金翅鸟,据说它们的饮食名为“颅”,因此得名,在第二层阶台设置它们的守卫。“饮乳者”指的是鸠槃荼,据说是施主罗刹,在第三层阶台设置它们的守卫。“迷醉者”指的是夜叉,据说行踪不定、好战,在第四层阶台设置它们的守卫。巴利
Tattha dvinnaṃ ayujjhapurānanti dvinnaṃ devāsuranagarānaṃ antarāti attho. Dve kira nagarāni yuddhena gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ayujjhapurāni nāma jātāni. Yadā hi asurā balavanto honti, atha devehi palāyitvā devanagaraṃ pavisitvā dvāre pihite asurānaṃ satasahassampi kiñci kātuṃ na sakkoti. Yadā devā balavanto honti, atha asurehi palāyitvā asuranagaraṃ pavisitvā dvāre pihite sakkānaṃ satasahassampi kiñci kātuṃ na sakkoti. Iti imāni dve nagarāni ayujjhapurāni nāma. Tesaṃ antarā etesu uragādīsu pañcasu ṭhānesu sakkena ārakkhā ṭhapitā. Tattha uragasaddena nāgā gahitā. Te udake mahabbalā honti, tasmā sinerussa paṭhamālinde etesaṃ ārakkhā. Sinerussa kira samantato bahalato puthulato ca pañcayojanasahassaparimāṇāni cattāri paribhaṇḍāni tāvatiṃsabhavanassa ārakkhāya nāgehi garuḷehi kumbhaṇḍehi yakkhehi ca adhiṭṭhitāni. Tehi kira sinerussa upaḍḍhaṃ pariyādinnaṃ, etāniyeva ca sinerussa ālindāni mekhalāni ca vuccanti. Karoṭisaddena supaṇṇā gahitā. Tesaṃ kira karoṭi nāma pānabhojanaṃ, tena nāmaṃ labhiṃsu, dutiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Payassahārīsaddena kumbhaṇḍā gahitā. Dānavarakkhasā kira te, tatiyālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Madanayutasaddena yakkhā gahitā. Visamacārino kira te yuddhasoṇḍā, catutthālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā. Caturo ca mahatthāti cattāro mahārājāno vuttā. Te hi sinerussa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ passe yugandharādīsu pañcasataparittadīpaparivāre mahādīpe ca sāsitabbassa mahato atthassa vasena ‘‘mahatthā’’ti vuccanti, pañcamālinde tesaṃ ārakkhā.
那些阿修罗在寿命、容貌、名声、财富方面,和三十三天众完全一样。因此,他们分不清中间地带,当波咤厘花盛开时,心想:“这不是天城——那里的波利质多树正在开花,这里却是花波咤厘。我们被老帝释灌了酒欺骗,天城也没能夺到手。走,我们跟他打一仗!”于是他们登上象、马、战车,手持金、银、宝石盾牌,整装待战,敲响阿修罗战鼓,把大海的水劈成两半,从海中涌出。天人一退走,他们就像白蚁从蚁冢里涌出来一样,开始往须弥山上爬。这时,他们首先和龙交战。可是在那场战斗中,没有谁的皮肤或肌肉被割破,也没有流血,只不过像小孩玩木羊游戏一样,只是互相吓唬吓唬而已。纵然有百千亿条龙和他们交战,也只是把他们逼回阿修罗城,然后就撤回来。但如果阿修罗势力强大,龙就退下来,在第二层阶台上和金翅鸟会合在一起作战。金翅鸟等也是这样。当阿修罗击破这五处据点时,那五支力量即使集结在一起,也会退却。于是四大天王前去向帝释报告情况。帝释听了他们的话,登上宽一百五十由旬的胜利战车,或者亲自出阵,或者派一个儿子去。有一天,他这样出阵后,在战斗中将阿修罗击退,把他们扔进大海,并在四座城门各安置了一尊和自己一模一样的雕像。因此,阿修罗即使战胜了龙等回来,一看到帝释的雕像,就以为“帝释出来了”,吓得逃跑。如此,与天人敌对的便是阿修罗,即毗波质多打击者等,他们的住处就是阿修罗住处。为了说明那住处长宽各一万由旬,所以说“阿修罗住处也是如此”。巴利
Te pana asurā āyuvaṇṇayasaissariyasampattīhi tāvatiṃsasadisāva. Tasmā antarā attānaṃ ajānitvā pāṭaliyā pupphitāya ‘‘nayidaṃ devanagaraṃ, tattha pāricchattako pupphati, idha pana cittapāṭalī, jarasakkena mayaṃ suraṃ pāyetvā vañcitā, devanagarañca no gahitaṃ, gacchāma tena saddhiṃ yujjhissāmā’’ti hatthiassarathe āruyha suvaṇṇarajatamaṇiphalakāni gahetvā yuddhasajjā hutvā asurabheriyo vādentā mahāsamudde udakaṃ dvidhā bhinditvā uṭṭhahanti. Te deve vuṭṭhe vammikamakkhikā vammikaṃ viya sineruṃ abhiruhituṃ ārabhanti. Atha nesaṃ paṭhamaṃ nāgehi saddhiṃ yuddhaṃ hoti. Tasmiṃ kho pana yuddhe na kassaci chavi vā cammaṃ vā chijjati, na lohitaṃ uppajjati, kevalaṃ kumārakānaṃ dārumeṇḍakayuddhaṃ viya aññamaññaṃ santāsanamattameva hoti. Koṭisatāpi koṭisahassāpi nāgā tehi saddhiṃ yujjhitvā asurapuraṃyeva pavesetvā nivattanti. Sace pana asurā balavanto honti, atha nāgā osakkitvā dutiye ālinde supaṇṇehi saddhiṃ ekato hutvā yujjhanti. Esa nayo supaṇṇādīsupi. Yadā pana tāni pañcapi ṭhānāni asurā maddanti, tadā ekato sampiṇḍitānipi tāni pañca balāni osakkanti . Atha cattāro mahārājāno gantvā sakkassa pavattiṃ ārocenti. Sakko tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatikaṃ vejayantarathaṃ āruyha sayaṃ vā nikkhamati, ekaṃ vā puttaṃ peseti. Ekasmiṃ pana divase evaṃ nikkhamitvā asure yuddhena abbhuggantvā samudde pakkhipitvā catūsu dvāresu attanā sadisā paṭimā māpetvā ṭhapeti, tasmā asurā nāgādayo jinitvā āgatāpi indapaṭimā disvā ‘‘sakko nikkhanto’’ti palāyanti. Iti surānaṃ paṭipakkhāti asurā, vepacittipahārādādayo, tesaṃ bhavanaṃ asurabhavanaṃ. Taṃ pana āyāmato ca vitthārato ca dasasahassayojananti dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā asurabhavana’’nti vuttaṃ.
无间大地狱和阎浮提也是这样,这里也要接上“同样”这个词,意思是:无间大地狱和阎浮提同样都是一万由旬。这里,无间大地狱的内部,长和宽各是一百由旬,铁地、铁盖,每一面墙各有九由旬。从东墙生起的火焰,扑到西墙,穿透西墙之后,又向外延伸一百由旬。其余各方也是这样。这样一来,以火焰之网为边界,长宽合计是三百一十八由旬,周围是九百五十四由旬。如果连同四周的附属地狱一起算,就是一万由旬。那么,这个地狱为什么被称为“无间”呢?“间”是指间隙,而那个地方无论是火焰、众生还是苦痛,都没有间隙,所以称为“无间”。从它的东墙生起的火焰,互相缠绕着延伸一百由旬,穿透墙壁之后,又向外延伸一百由旬。其余各方也是这样。如此,由于火焰没有间隙,所以是无间。在它内部一百由旬的地方,众生像把芝麻捣碎装满竹筒一样,密密麻麻没有间隙,不能说“这个地方有众生,那个地方没有众生”,对于行走的、站立的、坐着的、躺着的以及正在受苦的众生来说,内部没有空隙,行走的不会妨碍站立的、坐着的或躺着的。如此,由于众生没有间隙,所以是无间。而在身门,生起六种舍俱心,一种苦俱心。尽管如此,譬如在舌尖上放六滴蜜,再放上一滴铜液,由于铜液燃烧的力量强大,只有那一滴铜液显现,其余的蜜都变得无足轻重;同样,由于燃烧的力量强大,这里只有苦没有间隙,其余的(舍俱心)都变得无足轻重。如此,由于苦没有间隙,所以称为无间。他们说:“这无间大地狱位于阎浮提的下方。”巴利
Avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo cāti etthāpi tathā-saddo yojetabbo, avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo ca tathā dasasahassayojanamevāti attho. Ettha ca avīcimahānirayassa abbhantaraṃ āyāmena ca vitthārena ca yojanasataṃ hoti, lohapathavī lohachadanaṃ ekekā ca bhitti navanavayojanikā hoti. Puratthimāya bhittiyā acci uṭṭhahitvā pacchimaṃ bhittiṃ gahetvā taṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Iti jālapariyantavasena āyāmavitthārato aṭṭhārasayojanādhikāni tīṇi yojanasatāni honti, parikkhepena nava yojanasatāni catupaṇṇāsañca yojanāni. Samantā pana ussadehi saddhiṃ dasayojanasahassaṃ hoti. Kasmā panesa narako ‘‘avīcī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatoti? Vīci nāma antaraṃ vuccati, tattha ca aggijālānaṃ vā sattānaṃ vā dukkhassa vā antaraṃ natthi, tasmā so ‘‘avīcī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tassa hi puratthimabhittito jālā uṭṭhahitvā saṃsibbamānayojanasataṃ gantvā bhittiṃ vinivijjhitvā parato yojanasataṃ gacchati. Sesadisāsupi eseva nayo. Evaṃ jālānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci. Abbhantare panassa yojanasatike ṭhāne nāḷiyaṃ koṭṭetvā pūritatipupiṭṭhaṃ viya sattā nirantarā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne satto atthi, imasmiṃ ṭhāne natthī’’ti na vattabbaṃ, gacchantānaṃ ṭhitānaṃ nisinnānaṃ nipannānañca paccamānānaṃ anto natthi, gacchantā ṭhite vā nisinne vā nipanne vā na bādhenti. Evaṃ sattānaṃ nirantaratāya avīci. Kāyadvāre pana cha upekkhāsahagatāni cittāni uppajjanti, ekaṃ dukkhasahagataṃ. Evaṃ santepi yathā jivhāgge cha madhubindūni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ tambalohabindumhi ṭhapite anudahanabalavatāya tadeva paññāyati, itarāni abbohārikāni honti, evaṃ anudahanabalavatāya dukkhamevettha nirantaraṃ, itarāni abbohārikānīti evaṃ dukkhassa nirantaratāya avīcīti vuccati. ‘‘Ayañca avīcimahānirayo jambudīpassa heṭṭhā patiṭṭhito’’ti vadanti.
阎浮提洲的长度和宽度都是一万由旬。其中,有一块四千由旬大的地方,因为享用这片土地的众生福报耗尽,被水淹没,所以被称为“海”。人类住在三千由旬大的地方,雪山则矗立在三千由旬大的地方,应当这样理解。巴利
Jambudīpo pana āyāmato ca vitthārato ca dasasahassayojanaparimāṇo. Tattha ca catusahassayojanappamāṇo padeso tadupabhogīsattānaṃ puññakkhayā udakena ajjhotthaṭo ‘‘samuddo’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gato. Tisahassayojanappamāṇe manussā vasanti, tisahassayojanappamāṇe himavā patiṭṭhitoti veditabbo.
在“西牛货洲七千由旬”等说法中,应当知道这是从长度和宽度两方面来显示它的量度。其中,阎浮提洲的形状像一辆车,拥有九十六个十万座港口、五十六座宝殿、九十九个十万个河口,以及三遍六万三千座城镇。据说阎浮提洲最初出现了六万三千座城镇,第二遍也是这样,第三遍也是这样。把这些合并计算,就是十万,此后又有八万九千。所谓河口,是指作为大城镇得以产生和存续的主要屋舍。西牛货洲的形状像一面镜子,东胜身洲的形状像半月,北俱卢洲的形状像座位。有人说:“各洲居民以及各附属岛屿居民的面貌,也各自像他们所在洲的形状。”巴利
Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanantiādīsu āyāmato ca vitthārato ca pamāṇaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha jambudīpo sakaṭasaṇṭhāno, channavutiyā paṭṭanakoṭisatasahassehi chapaṇṇāsaratanāgārehi navanavutiyā doṇamukhasatasahassehi tikkhattuṃ tesaṭṭhiyā nagarasahassehi ca samannāgato. Jambudīpe kira ādito tesaṭṭhimattāni nagarasahassāni uppannāni, tathā dutiyaṃ, tathā tatiyaṃ. Tāni pana sampiṇḍetvā satasahassaṃ, tato paraṃ asīti sahassāni ca nava sahassāni ca honti. Doṇamukhanti ca mahānagarassa āyuppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ padhānagharaṃ vuccati. Aparagoyāno ādāsasaṇṭhāno, pubbavideho aḍḍhacandasaṇṭhāno, uttarakuru pīṭhasaṇṭhāno. ‘‘Taṃtaṃnivāsīnaṃ taṃtaṃparivāradīpavāsīnañca manussānaṃ mukhampi taṃtaṃsaṇṭhāna’’nti vadanti.
在这里,还应当知道北俱卢洲人福报威力所成就的另一种殊胜。据说,在那里各个地方,树木枝叶茂密、层层交叠,像楼阁一样令人愉悦,为那里的人们充当住所,他们就在其中安乐地居住。那里还有其他长得好的树,永远都开着花、花满枝头。水池里也开满了莲花、白莲、香睡莲等各种花,一切时候都极其芬芳,香气向四周弥漫。巴利
Api cettha uttarakurukānaṃ puññānubhāvasiddho ayampi viseso veditabbo. Tattha kira tesu tesu padesesu ghananicitapattasañchannasākhāpasākhā kūṭāgārupamā manoramā rukkhā tesaṃ manussānaṃ nivesanakiccaṃ sādhenti. Yattha sukhaṃ nivasanti, aññepi tattha rukkhā sujātā sabbadāpi pupphitaggā tiṭṭhanti. Jalāsayāpi vikasitapadumapuṇḍarīkasogandhikādipupphasañchannā sabbakālaṃ paramasugandhā samantato pavāyantā tiṭṭhanti.
他们的身体也没有过长等缺陷,身材高矮、胖瘦都很匀称,因为不被衰老所压倒,所以没有皱纹、白发等衰老的迹象,直到寿命终结,敏捷、力量和勇健之美始终不曾减退。他们靠自然成熟的果实维持生命,不必劳作,所以没有农耕、经商等谋生的辛苦,也因此没有奴婢、仆从等所属。那里也没有寒冷、炎热、蚊虫、虻蝇、风、日晒、爬虫、猛兽等危险。就像这里热季最后一个月黎明时分冷暖适中一样,那里一切时候气候都同样冷暖适中,他们也不会遭受任何伤害或烦扰。巴利
Sarīrampi tesaṃ atidīghatādidosarahitaṃ ārohapariṇāhasampannaṃ jarāya anabhibhūtattā valitapalitādidosavirahitaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ aparikkhīṇajavabalaparakkamasobhameva hutvā tiṭṭhati. Anuṭṭhānaphalūpajīvitāya na ca tesaṃ kasivaṇijjādivasena āhārapariyeṭṭhivasena dukkhaṃ atthi, tato eva na dāsadāsīkammakarādipariggaho atthi. Na ca tattha sītuṇhaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapavāḷādiparissayo atthi. Yathā nāmettha gimhānaṃ pacchime māse paccūsavelāyaṃ samasītuṇho utu hoti, evameva sabbakālaṃ tattha samasītuṇhova utu hoti, na ca nesaṃ koci upaghāto vihesā vā uppajjati.
他们只吃自然长成、没人耕种过的稻米,这种米没有碎粒、没有糠壳,纯净又清香,以米粒为食。他们用没有烟的炭火煮熟了就吃。据说那里有一种叫“光石”的石头,他们把三块石头摆好,再把锅架上去,石头生出火来把饭煮好。不用另外做什么汤或配菜,吃的时候那味道自然就合他们的心意。他们吃了这种饭,不会得麻风、疮肿、白斑、痨病、咳嗽、癫痫、衰老之类的任何疾病。凡是来到那个地方的人,他们都会布施食物,心里根本不会有吝啬的念头,佛陀、独觉佛等有大神通的人也会去那里接受施食。他们当中没有驼背的、矮小的、独眼的、手蜷曲的、跛脚的、半身不遂的、肢体残缺的,也没有感官功能不全的人。巴利
Akaṭṭhapākimameva sāliṃ akaṇaṃ athusaṃ suddhaṃ sugandhaṃ taṇḍulaphalaṃ niddhūmaṅgārena agginā pacitvā paribhuñjanti. Tattha kira jotikapāsāṇā nāma honti, atha te tayo pāsāṇe ṭhapetvā tattha ukkhaliṃ āropenti, pāsāṇehi tejo samuṭṭhahitvā taṃ pāceti, añño sūpo vā byañjano vā na hoti, bhuñjantānaṃ cittānukūloyevassa raso hoti. Taṃ pana bhuñjantānaṃ nesaṃ kuṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍo kilāso soso kāso apamāro jaroti evamādiko na koci rogo uppajjati. Te taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ dentiyeva, macchariyacittaṃ nāma neva hoti, buddhapaccekabuddhādayopi mahiddhikā tattha gantvā piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhanti. Na ca te khujjā vā vāmanā vā kāṇā vā kuṇī vā khañjā vā pakkhahatā vā vikalaṅgā vā vikalindriyā vā honti.
那里的女人也不太高、不太矮,不太瘦、不太胖,不太黑、不太白,容貌端正美丽。她们手指纤长,指甲呈铜色,乳房不松垂,腰身纤细,脸像满月,眼睛宽大,身体柔软,大腿像芭蕉树干,牙齿洁白,肚脐深,小腿修长,头发又长又黑又卷,臀部宽大丰满,体毛不多不少,容貌美丽,触感舒适,皮肤细滑,说话温和,佩戴各种装饰到处走动,任何时候都像十六岁的少女一样。巴利
Itthiyopi tattha nātidīghā nātirassā nātikisā nātithūlā nātikāḷikā nāccodātā sobhaggappattarūpā honti. Tathā hi dīghaṅgulī tambanakhā alambathanā tanumajjhā puṇṇacandamukhī visālakkhī mudugattā sahibhorū odātadantā gambhīranābhī tanujaṅghā dīghanīlavellitakesī puthulasussoṇī nātilomā nālomā subhagā utusukhasamphassā saṇhā sakhilasambhāsā nānābharaṇavibhūsitā vicaranti, sabbadāpi soḷasavassuddesikā viya honti.
男子们也一样,就像二十五岁的人,子女不会贪恋父母等亲人,这是那里的自然规律。那里的男女只以七天享受情欲之乐,之后就像已经离欲的人一样,随心所欲地离去。在那里,没有像这里那样因入胎、怀胎或生产而产生的痛苦。婴儿就像从红色布套里取出的金像,不被痰等污物沾染,安然地从母胎中出来,这是那里的自然规律。母亲生下儿子或女儿后,把他们放在人们活动的地方,就毫无牵挂地随意离去。看见他们躺在那里的男人或女人,会把自己的手指伸过去,凭着他们的业力,乳汁就从手指中流出,婴儿靠这个活下来。这样成长,仅仅几天就有了力气,女孩便走向女人,男孩便走向男人。巴利
Purisāpi pañcavīsativassuddesikā viya, na puttā mātādīsu rajjanti, ayaṃ tattha dhammatā. Sattāhikameva ca tattha itthipurisā kāmaratiyā viharanti , tato vītarāgā viya yathāsukhaṃ gacchanti, na tattha idha viya gabbhokkantimūlakaṃ gabbhapariharaṇamūlakaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vijāyanamūlakaṃ vā dukkhaṃ hoti, rattakañcukato kañcanapaṭimā viya dārakā mātukucchito amakkhitā eva semhādinā sukheneva nikkhamanti, ayaṃ tattha dhammatā. Mātā pana puttaṃ vā dhītaraṃ vā vijāyitvā tesaṃ vicaraṇakappadese ṭhapetvā anapekkhā yathāruci gacchati. Tesaṃ tattha sayitānaṃ ye passanti purisā vā itthiyo vā, te attano aṅguliyo upanāmenti, tesaṃ kammabalena tato khīraṃ pavattati, tena te dārakā yāpenti. Evaṃ pana vaḍḍhantā katipayadivaseyeva laddhabalā hutvā dārikā itthiyo upagacchanti, dārakā purise.
他们的衣服和饰物都直接从如意树中产生。各种颜色鲜艳、色彩斑斓的衣服,质地细软,触感舒适,悬挂在各处的如意树上。各种光芒交织、镶满种种色彩宝石的金制饰物,以种种花环工艺、藤蔓工艺、壁饰工艺装饰得绚丽多彩,有戴在头上的、脖子上的、胸前的、手上的、脚上的,也都从如意树上垂挂下来。同样,维那琴、木鼓、小鼓、铜钹、螺贝、竹笛、大鼓等弦乐器和打击乐器,也都从那里垂挂下来。那里还有许多果树,结出像瓮那么大的果实,味道甘甜,吃了之后,他们七天都不会受到饥饿和口渴的困扰。巴利
Kapparukkhato eva ca tesaṃ tattha vatthābharaṇāni nipphajjanti. Nānāvirāgavaṇṇavicittāni hi vatthāni sukhumāni mudusukhasamphassāni tattha tattha kapparukkhesu olambantāni tiṭṭhanti. Nānāvidharaṃsijālasamujjalavividhavaṇṇaratanavinaddhāni anekavidhamālākammalatākammabhittikammavicittāni sīsūpagagīvūpagakaṭūpagahatthūpagapādūpagāni sovaṇṇamayāni ābharaṇāni ca kapparukkhato olambanti. Tathā vīṇāmudiṅgapaṇavasammatāḷasaṅkhavaṃsavetāḷaparivārādīni vallakīpabhautikāni tūriyabhaṇḍānipi tato olambanti. Tattha ca bahū phalarukkhā kumbhamattāni phalāni phalanti, madhurarasāni yāni paribhuñjitvā te sattāhampi khuppipāsāhi na bādhīyanti.
那里的河流水质极其清净,有平缓宜人的河岸,令人欢喜;河底没有淤泥,是细沙铺成的,水不太冷也不太热。水面上覆盖着散发芳香的水生花朵,常年有香风吹拂流动。那里没有带刺的、粗糙的灌木和藤蔓,全都是没有刺、被花果覆盖的树木;旃檀树和龙脑香树自己就渗出汁液。想洗澡的人把衣服和饰物一起放在河岸边,下河洗完澡上岸后,各自拿回自己放在上面的衣服和饰物,不会想“这是我的,那是别人的”。正因为如此,他们之间没有任何争吵或争执。他们的欲乐嬉戏正好持续七天,之后就像离贪的人一样四处游走。他们想在哪棵树下睡觉,那里就会出现床铺。巴利
Najjopi tattha suvisuddhajalā supatitthā ramaṇīyā akaddamā vālukatalā nātisītā nātiuṇhā surabhigandhīhi jalajapupphehi sañchannā sabbakālaṃ surabhī vāyantiyo sandanti, na tattha kaṇṭakinā kakkhaḷagacchalatā honti, akaṇṭakā pupphaphalasacchannā eva honti, candananāgarukkhā sayameva rasaṃ paggharanti. Nahāyitukāmā ca nadītitthe ekajjhaṃ vatthābharaṇāni ṭhapetvā nadiṃ otaritvā nahāyitvā uttiṇṇā uttiṇṇā upariṭṭhimaṃ upariṭṭhimaṃ vatthābharaṇaṃ gaṇhanti, na tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘idaṃ mama, idaṃ parassā’’ti. Tato eva na tesaṃ koci viggaho vā vivādo vā, sattāhikā eva ca nesaṃ kāmaratikīḷā hoti, tato vītarāgā viya vicaranti. Yattha ca rukkhe sayitukāmā honti, tattheva sayanaṃ upalabbhati.
对于死去的众生,他们不哭泣也不悲伤,把遗体装饰好后就安放一旁。随即有那样的飞禽飞来,把死者带往别的岛屿,所以那里没有墓地,也没有不净之处;而且从那里死后,不会投生到地狱、畜生道或饿鬼界。他们说:“凭借法尔成就的五戒之力,他们投生到天界。”他们的寿命固定为一千年。应当知道,这一切对他们来说,和他们的五戒一样,都是法尔成就的。巴利
Mate ca satte na rodanti na socanti, tañca maṇḍayitvā nikkhipanti. Tāvadeva ca tathārūpā sakuṇā upagantvā mataṃ dīpantaraṃ nenti, tasmā susānaṃ vā asuciṭṭhānaṃ vā tattha natthi, na ca tato matā nirayaṃ vā tiracchānayoniṃ vā pettivisayaṃ vā upapajjanti. ‘‘Dhammatāsiddhassa pañcasīlassa ānubhāvena te devaloke nibbattantī’’ti vadanti. Vassasahassameva ca nesaṃ sabbakālaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, sabbametaṃ nesaṃ pañcasīlaṃ viya dhammatāsiddhamevāti veditabbaṃ.
“在它们之间”是指那些轮围山之间。“世界中间地狱”是指世界与世界界之间的空隙裂缝,那个空隙叫世界中间,存在于那里的地狱就叫世界中间地狱。就像三个车轮或三个轮子紧挨着放在一起,彼此之间留下的缝隙那样,每三座轮围山之间,各有一个世界中间地狱。它的量度是八千由旬,永远敞开着,下方和上方都没有任何东西遮盖。就像下方没有大地来盖住水一样,世界中间地狱也没有遮拦;上方也同样,因为轮围山之上没有像天宫那样的东西,所以没有覆盖、没有遮蔽,而且充满能阻碍眼识生起的黑暗。据说在那里,因为没有光明,眼识不会生起。即使日月能一下子照亮三洲,也无法在那里显现光明。因为日月运行在与持双山等高的虚空区域,是在轮围山中间运行的,而世界中间地狱已经超出了轮围山,所以日月不在那里显现光明,因此眼识不生起。但当一切知菩萨入胎等时,光明会生起,那时眼识就生起。那一天,他们互相看见,说:“哎呀,原来还有别的众生投生在这里!”可是这光明连喝一碗粥的时间都维持不了,只像闪电一样刹那闪出,在人们正说着“这是什么”的时候,就消失了。巴利
Tadantaresūti tesaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu. Lokantarikanirayāti lokānaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antaro vivaro lokantaro, tattha bhavā lokantarikā, nirayā. Tiṇṇañhi sakaṭacakkānaṃ pattānaṃ vā aññamaññaṃ āsannabhāvena ṭhapitānaṃ antarasadisesu tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ cakkavāḷānaṃ antaresu ekeko lokantarikanirayo. So pana parimāṇato aṭṭhayojanasahassappamāṇo hoti niccavivaṭo heṭṭhā upari ca kenaci na pihito. Yathā hi heṭṭhā udakassa pidhāyikā pathavī natthīti asaṃvutā lokantarikanirayā, evaṃ uparipi cakkavāḷesu viya devavimānānaṃ abhāvato asaṃvutā apihitā cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇasamatthena ca andhakārena samannāgatā. Tattha kira cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na jāyati ālokassa abhāvato. Tīsu dīpesu ekappahārena ālokakaraṇasamatthāpi candimasūriyā tattha ālokaṃ na dassenti. Te hi yugandharasamappamāṇe ākāsappadese vicaraṇato cakkavāḷapabbatassa vemajjhena vicaranti, cakkavāḷapabbatañca atikkamma lokantarikanirayā, tasmā te tattha ālokaṃ na dassentīti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nuppajjati. Yadā pana sabbaññubodhisattassa paṭisandhiggahaṇādīsu obhāso uppajjati, tadā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati. ‘‘Aññepi kira bho santi sattā idhūpapannā’’ti taṃ divasaṃ aññamaññaṃ passanti. Ayaṃ pana obhāso ekaṃ yāgupānamattampi na tiṭṭhati, accharāsaṅghāṭamattameva vijjobhāso viya niccharitvā ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti bhaṇantānaṃyeva antaradhāyati.
那么,众生是造了什么业才投生到那里去的呢?他们造了沉重、残酷、严重的业——对父母以及如法的沙门、婆罗门犯下罪过,还日复一日地造作杀生等暴行,因此投生到那里,就像铜掌岛上的无畏盗贼、龙盗贼之类一样。他们的身体有三由旬那么大,指甲长得像蝙蝠一样。他们像蝙蝠那样,用指甲钩挂在轮围山的山壁上。当他们爬行到彼此伸手可及的地方时,就以为“我们找到食物了”,于是扑上去想抓住对方来吃,结果一个翻身,掉进了支撑世界的水中。风吹过来时,他们也像蜜果一样被吹断,落入水中。刚一落进去,就在那极度咸的水里像面团一样溶解了,因为水极其寒冷,没有阳光的温热。所谓“极度咸”,其实是在说极度寒冷。因为那支撑劫的水,并不是带来繁荣的大雨所降下的、能承载大地的水,不像毁劫时的那种水那样可能变咸。如果真是那样,大地也会溶解。或者说,由于他们恶业的力量,就像饿鬼眼中平常的水会变成脓血一样,那时那水就变成了咸的,所以说“在那极度咸的水中像面团一样溶解”。巴利
Kiṃ pana kammaṃ katvā tattha sattā nibbattantīti? Bhāriyaṃ dāruṇaṃ garukaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇānañca upari aparādhaṃ aññañca divase divase pāṇavadhādiṃ sāhasikakammaṃ katvā uppajjanti tambapaṇṇidīpe abhayacoranāgacorādayo viya. Tesaṃ attabhāvo tigāvutiko hoti, vaggulīnaṃ viya dīghanakhā honti. Te rukkhe vagguliyo viya nakhehi cakkavāḷapāde lagganti, yadā saṃsappantā aññamaññassa hatthapāsagatā honti, atha ‘‘bhakkho no laddho’’ti maññamānā khādanatthaṃ gaṇhituṃ upakkamantā viparivattitvā lokasandhārake udake patanti, vāte paharantepi madhukaphalāni viya chijjitvā udake patanti, patitamattāva accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ viya vilīyanti atisītalabhāvato ātapasantāpābhāvena. Atisītalabhāvameva hi sandhāya accantakhāratā vuttā. Na hi taṃ kappasaṇṭhahanaudakaṃ sampattikaramahāmeghavuṭṭhaṃ pathavīsandhārakaṃ kappavināsakaudakaṃ viya khāraṃ bhavituṃ arahati. Tathā hi sati pathavīpi vilīyeyya, tesaṃ vā pāpakammabalena petānaṃ pakatiudakassa pubbakheḷabhāvāpatti viya tassa udakassa tadā khārabhāvappatti hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘accantakhāre udake piṭṭhapiṇḍaṃ viya vilīyantī’’ti.
“无量”就是不可计量,无法被其他人用“只有这么多”来测量。世尊以无边的佛智了知这些,说:“虚空无边,众生界无边,轮围山无边。”因为佛智本身也是无边的,所以它能界定这三种无边。所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为极限,所知以智为极限。因此说“以无边的佛智了知”等等。而它的无边性,应当理解为:正是由于通达无边的所知,且在其中行动无有障碍。现在,为了总结上面所说的义理,他说:“如是,世间空间也于一切方面为他所了知。”巴利
Anantānīti aparimāṇāni, ‘‘ettakānī’’ti aññehi minituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni. Tāni ca bhagavā anantena buddhañāṇena avedi ‘‘ananto ākāso, ananto sattanikāyo, anantāni cakkavāḷānī’’ti. Tividhampi hi anantaṃ buddhañāṇena paricchindati sayampi anantattā. Yāvatakañhi ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakameva ñeyyaṃ. Ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘anantena buddhañāṇena avedī’’tiādi. Anantatā cassa anantañeyyappaṭivijjhaneneva veditabbā tattha appaṭihatacārattā. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘evamassa okāsalokopi sabbathā vidito’’ti.
在这里,也应该说明对成劫等的了知,因此成劫等从一开始就应该这样理解:坏劫、坏住劫、成劫、成住劫,这是一个劫的四个不可计数阶段。其中,坏灭、毁灭就是坏劫,正在毁灭的阶段是一个不可计数劫。它实质上就是时间,应该理解为依那时正在进行的诸行而有的毁灭。坏劫之后同样安住的时期是坏住劫。生成、产生或增长就是成劫,正在增长的阶段是一个不可计数劫。它实质上也是时间,应该理解为依那时正在进行的诸行而有的增长。成劫之后同样安住的时期是成住劫。其中,坏劫有三种:火坏劫、水坏劫、风坏劫。坏劫的三种界限是:光音天、遍净天、广果天。当劫被火毁灭时,从光音天以下被火焚烧。当被水毁灭时,从遍净天以下被水消融。当被风毁灭时,从广果天以下被风摧毁。巴利
Api cettha vivaṭṭādīnampi viditatā vattabbā, tasmā vivaṭṭādayopi ādito pabhuti evaṃ veditabbā – saṃvaṭṭo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī vivaṭṭo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti kappassa cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni. Tattha saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vinassanaṃ saṃvaṭṭo, vinassamāno asaṅkhyeyyakappo. So pana atthato kāloyeva, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa vināso veditabbo. Saṃvaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyīkālo saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Vivaṭṭanaṃ nibbattanaṃ vaḍḍhanaṃ vā vivaṭṭo, vaḍḍhamāno asaṅkhyeyyakappo. Sopi atthato kāloyeva, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa vaḍḍhi veditabbā. Vivaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyīkālo vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Tattha tayo saṃvaṭṭā tejosaṃvaṭṭo āposaṃvaṭṭo vāyosaṃvaṭṭoti. Tisso saṃvaṭṭasīmā ābhassarā subhakiṇhā vehapphalāti. Yadā kappo tejena saṃvaṭṭati, tadā ābhassarato heṭṭhā agginā ḍayhati. Yadā āpena saṃvaṭṭati, tadā subhakiṇhato heṭṭhā udakena vilīyati. Yadā vāyunā saṃvaṭṭati, tadā vehapphalato heṭṭhā vātena viddhaṃsati.
如果详细来说,在三种坏劫时期,都会有一个佛刹毁灭。佛刹有三种:诞生刹、教令刹、境界刹。
其中,诞生刹的范围是一万个轮围世界。如来入胎等时候,这个范围会震动。凡是如来的入胎智等智慧的威神力,被福德果报所激发而自然显现的地方,这一切都叫做诞生刹,也就是佛刹。
教令刹的范围是百千俱胝个轮围世界。在这个范围内,《宝经》《蕴护卫》《幢顶护卫》《阿咤那胝耶护卫》《孔雀护卫》这些护卫经的威力都能起作用。有神通、心得自在的人,站在教令刹所包含的任何一个轮围世界里,为自己念诵护卫经之后,即使去到别的轮围世界,也仍然算是已经受到护卫的人。如果在一个轮围世界里为一切众生念诵护卫经,那么护卫的威力就能遍及教令刹内的一切众生,因为那里的天神会接受护卫。所以这叫教令刹。
境界刹则是无边的、不可计量的。在无边不可计量的轮围世界中,如来想什么就能知道什么,因为佛智是随着意愿而运作的。
在这三种佛刹中,一个教令刹会毁灭。当它毁灭时,诞生刹也必定同时毁灭。它们毁灭时是一起毁灭的,安住时也是一起安住的。应当这样理解它们的毁灭与安住。巴利
Vitthārato pana tīsupi saṃvaṭṭakālesu ekaṃ buddhakkhettaṃ vinassati. Buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividhaṃ hoti jātikkhettaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ visayakkhettañca. Tattha jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ hoti, yaṃ tathāgatassa paṭisandhiggahaṇādīsu kampati. Yattake hi ṭhāne tathāgatassa paṭisandhiñāṇādiñāṇānubhāvo puññaphalasamuttejito saraseneva paṭivijambhati, taṃ sabbampi buddhaṅkurassa nibbattanakkhettaṃ nāmāti buddhakkhettanti vuccati. Āṇākkhettaṃ pana koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷapariyantaṃ, yattha ratanasuttaṃ (khu. pā. 6.1 ādayo; su. ni. 224 ādayo) khandhaparittaṃ (a. ni. 4.67; jā. 1.2.105-106; cūḷava. 251 ādayo) dhajaggaparittaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.249) āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ (dī. ni. 3.275 ādayo) moraparittanti (jā. 1.2.17-18) imesaṃ parittānaṃ ānubhāvo vattati. Iddhimā hi cetovasippatto āṇākkhettapariyāpanne yattha katthaci cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā attano atthāya parittaṃ katvā tattheva aññaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ gatopi kataparitto eva hoti. Ekacakkavāḷe ṭhatvā sabbasattānaṃ atthāya paritte kate āṇākkhette sabbasattānampi abhisambhuṇāteva parittānubhāvo tattha devatāhi parittānaṃ sampaṭicchitabbato, tasmā taṃ āṇākkhettanti vuccati. Visayakkhettaṃ pana anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ. Anantāparimāṇesu hi cakkavāḷesu yaṃ yaṃ tathāgato ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ jānāti ākaṅkhappaṭibaddhavuttitāya buddhañāṇassa. Evametesu tīsu buddhakkhettesu ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassati, tasmiṃ pana vinassante jātikkhettaṃ vinaṭṭhameva hoti. Vinassantampi ekatova vinassati, saṇṭhahantampi ekatova saṇṭhahati, tassevaṃ vināso saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被火毁灭时,一开始会生起劫灭大云,在百千俱胝轮围世界里降下一场大雨。人们满心欢喜,拿出所有种子来播种。可是,当庄稼才长到像被牛啃过那么一点时,雷声像驴叫一样响起来,却连一滴雨也不下,从此雨水就彻底断了。世尊正是针对这种情况说:“比丘们,会有那样的时候,许多年、许多百年、许多千年、许多百千年,天不下雨。”(《增支部》7.66)靠雨水活命的众生,死后投生到少光天等梵天界;靠花果活命的天神也一样。这样经过漫长的时间,各处的水逐渐枯竭,然后鱼、龟等也陆续死后投生到梵天界。地狱众生也是如此。不过,有人认为地狱众生是在第七个太阳出现时才毁灭的。巴利
Yasmiṃ samaye kappo agginā nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho uṭṭhahitvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷe ekaṃ mahāvassaṃ vassati , manussā tuṭṭhā sabbabījāni nīharitvā vapanti, sassesu pana gokhāyitamattesu jātesu gadrabharavaṃ ravanto ekabindumpi na vassati, tadā pacchinnapacchinnameva hoti vassaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya hi bhagavatā ‘‘hoti so, bhikkhave, samayo yaṃ bahūni vassāni bahūni vassasatāni bahūni vassasahassāni bahūni vassasatasahassāni devo na vassatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.66) vuttaṃ. Vassūpajīvinopi sattā kālaṃ katvā parittābhādibrahmaloke nibbattanti, pupphaphalūpajīviniyo ca devatā. Evaṃ dīghe addhāne vītivatte tattha tattha udakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchati, athānupubbena macchakacchapāpi kālaṃ katvā brahmaloke nibbattanti nerayikasattāpi. Tattha nerayikā sattamasūriyapātubhāve vinassantīti eke.
不过,如果没有禅那,就无法投生到梵天界。这些人当中,有些被饥荒逼迫,有些没有能力证得禅那,那他们又怎么能投生到那里呢?他们是靠着在天界获得的禅那之力。那时候,名为“世界劝化者”的欲界天神们,头发散乱,满脸泪水,用手擦着眼泪,身穿红衣,打扮得极其丑陋可怕,在人间道路上行走,这样宣告:“诸位贤友,诸位贤友,从今往后十万年后,劫灭将会发生,这个世界将会毁灭,大海也会干涸,这大地和须弥山王都将被烧毁、毁灭,直到梵天界,整个世界都会坏灭。诸位贤友,请修习慈心;诸位贤友,请修习悲心、喜心、舍心;请侍奉母亲,侍奉父亲,尊敬家族中的长辈。”这些天神劝化世间、集合世间,所以被称为“世界劝化者”。据说人们见到他们之后,不管原本是站着还是坐着,都会生起悚惧,惊慌失措,聚集到他们附近的地方。巴利
Jhānaṃ pana vinā natthi brahmaloke nibbatti, etesañca keci dubbhikkhapīḷitā, keci abhabbā jhānādhigamāya, te kathaṃ tattha nibbattantīti? Devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena. Tadā hi ‘‘vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti lokabyūhā nāma kāmāvacaradevā muttasirā vikiṇṇakesā rudammukhā assūni hatthehi puñchamānā rattavatthanivatthā ativiya virūpavesadhārino hutvā manussapathe vicarantā evaṃ ārocenti ‘‘mārisā mārisā ito vassasatasahassassa accayena kappavuṭṭhānaṃ bhavissati, ayaṃ loko vinassissati, mahāsamuddopi ussussissati, ayañca mahāpathavī sineru ca pabbatarājā ḍayhissanti vinassissanti, yāva brahmalokā lokavināso bhavissati, mettaṃ mārisā bhāvetha, karuṇaṃ, muditaṃ, upekkhaṃ mārisā bhāvetha, mātaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, pitaraṃ upaṭṭhahatha, kule jeṭṭhāpacāyino hothā’’ti. Te pana devā lokaṃ byūhenti sampiṇḍentīti ‘‘lokabyūhā’’ti vuccanti. Te kira disvā manussā yattha katthaci ṭhitāpi nisinnāpi saṃvegajātā sambhamappattāva hutvā tesaṃ āsanne ṭhāne sannipatanti.
他们又是怎么知道世界将要毁灭的呢?老师们说,是被法性所推动的。有些人说,是因为看到了那样的征兆。还有些人说,是被梵天神催促的。听了他们的话之后,大多数人和地居天人都生起了警醒之心,彼此以柔和的心修习慈心等福德,死后往生到天界。在那里吃了天界的甘露美食之后,以风遍作为修行所缘,证得了禅那。据说,因为天人容易接触到舒适的触感之风,所以修风遍的禅那很容易成就。除此之外,其他恶趣的众生也凭着后后受报的业往生到天界。因为在这轮回中,没有哪个众生是没有后后受报之业的。他们也在那里同样证得禅那。这样,一切众生都凭着在天界证得的禅那之力,往生到梵天界。这只是就大多数情况而言的。巴利
Kathaṃ panete kappavuṭṭhānaṃ jānantīti? ‘‘Dhammatāya sañcoditā’’ti ācariyā. ‘‘Tādisanimittadassanenā’’ti eke. ‘‘Brahmadevatāhi uyyojitā’’ti apare. Tesaṃ pana vacanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena manussā ca bhummadevatā ca saṃvegajātā aññamaññaṃ muducittā hutvā mettādīni puññāni karitvā devaloke nibbattanti. Tattha dibbasudhābhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā tato vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Devānaṃ kira sukhasamphassavātaggahaṇapaacayena vāyokasiṇe jhānāni sukheneva ijjhanti. Tadaññe pana āpāyikā sattā aparāpariyavedanīyena kammena devaloke nibbattanti. Aparāpariyavedanīyakammarahito hi saṃsāre saṃsaranto nāma satto natthi. Tepi tattha tatheva jhānaṃ paṭilabhanti. Evaṃ devaloke paṭiladdhajjhānavasena sabbepi brahmaloke nibbattanti. Idañca yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ.
有些论师则说:恶趣的众生也会在别的世界毁灭时,投生到其他世界去。因为并不是所有恶趣众生那时都投生到色界、无色界,这一点是可以理解的,因为恶趣中长寿的众生不可能投生到天界。可是,具有决定邪见的人,即使世界在毁灭,也绝不会从地狱中解脱出来,所以他不会投生到那里,而是投生到轮围山外面去。因为具有决定邪见的人,根本不可能从轮回中超越出来。具有这种邪见的人,既没有天界,也没有道路,所以他在轮围山世界毁灭时,投生到别处的地狱里受苦。有人问:轮围山外面难道不被烧毁吗?回答说:也被烧毁。即使那里被烧毁,他也在虚空的某个地方受苦。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘apāyasattā saṃvaṭṭamānalokadhātūhi aññesu lokadhātūsupi nibbattanti. Na hi sabbe apāyasattā tadā rūpārūpabhavesu uppajjantīti sakkā viññātuṃ apāyesu dīghāyukānaṃ devalokūpapattiyā asambhavato. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhiko pana vinassamānepi kappe nirayato na muccatiyeva, tasmā so tattha anibbattitvā piṭṭhicakkavāḷe nibbattati. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā hi samannāgatassa bhavato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Tāya hi samannāgatassa neva saggo atthi, na maggo, tasmā so saṃvaṭṭamānacakkavāḷato aññattha niraye nibbattitvā paccati. Kiṃ pana piṭṭhicakkavāḷaṃ na jhāyatīti? Jhāyati. Tasmiṃ jhāyamānepi esa ākāse ekasmiṃ padese paccatī’’ti vadanti.
雨停之后,又过了很长很长的时间,第二个太阳出现了。它一出现,黑夜和白天的界限都分不出来了。一个太阳升起,另一个太阳落下,世界始终被太阳的热力持续炙烤着,没有间断。就像世界形成之前,太阳宫殿里会有一位太阳天子;但在世界毁灭时的太阳里,并没有天子。而在世界形成的时候,太阳天子就像其他欲界天神一样,修成禅那后往生到梵天界。至于日轮,则变得比平常更加明亮、更加炽热地运行着。也有人说,那个日轮消失后,另一个新的日轮才生起。平常太阳运行时,天空中还有云和烟焰;坏劫的太阳运行时,天空没有烟也没有云,就像擦干净的镜面一样澄净。除了五大河之外,其余小河等的水都干涸了。巴利
Vassūpacchedato pana uddhaṃ dīghassa addhuno accayena dutiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, pātubhūte pana tasmiṃ neva rattiparicchedo, na divāparicchedo paññāyati. Eko sūriyo uṭṭheti, eko atthaṃ gacchati, avicchinnasūriyasantāpova loko hoti. Yathā ca kappavuṭṭhānakālato pubbe uppannasūriyavimāne sūriyadevaputto hoti, evaṃ kappavināsakasūriye natthi. Kappavuṭṭhānakāle pana yathā aññe kāmāvacaradevā, evaṃ sūriyadevaputtopi jhānaṃ nibbattetvā brahmalokaṃ upapajjati. Sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pana pabhassaratarañceva tejavantatarañca hutvā pavattati. Taṃ antaradhāyitvā aññameva uppajjatīti apare. Tattha pakatisūriye vattamāne ākāse valāhakāpi dhūmasikhāpi vattanti, kappavināsakasūriye vattamāne vigatadhūmavalāhakaṃ ādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya nimmalaṃ nabhaṃ hoti. Ṭhapetvā pañca mahānadiyo sesakunnadiādīsu udakaṃ sussati.
此后又经过漫长的岁月,第三个太阳出现了。由于它的出现,连大河也干涸了。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena tatiyo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā mahānadiyopi sussanti.
从那以后,又过了很长很长的时间,第四个太阳出现了。由于它一出现,雪山中那些大河的源头——狮崖湖、曼达基尼湖、甘那蒙达湖、车匠湖、阿耨达池、六牙湖、拘那罗湖,这七座大湖全都干涸了。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena catuttho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā himavati mahānadīnaṃ pabhavā sīhappapātadaho mandākinīdaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho anotattadaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladahoti ime satta mahāsarā sussanti.
从那以后,又过了很长很长的时间,第五个太阳出现了。由于它出现,大海里的水就一步一步地减少,最后连一根手指节那么高的水都留不住。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena pañcamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā anupubbena mahāsamudde aṅgulipabbatemanamattampi udakaṃ na saṇṭhāti.
从那以后,又经过极其漫长的时间,第六个太阳出现了。由于它出现,整个轮围世界变成一团浓烟,所有湿润都被浓烟耗尽。因为水界本来让地界在各处凝结、聚合成团而维持着,而这水界因为第六个太阳的出现而彻底灭尽。就像这一个轮围世界一样,百千俱胝个轮围世界也都是如此。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena chaṭṭho sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekadhūmaṃ hoti pariyādinnasinehaṃ dhūmena. Yāya hi āpodhātuyā tattha tattha pathavīdhātu ābandhattā sampiṇḍitā hutvā tiṭṭhati, sā chaṭṭhasūriyapātubhāvena parikkhayaṃ gacchati. Yathā cidaṃ, evaṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānipi.
从那以后,又过了极其漫长的时间,第七个太阳出现了。由于它一出现,整个轮围世界连同百千俱胝数的轮围世界一起,变成了一片火海。高耸的须弥山峰等,高广百由旬不等,全都崩塌毁坏,在空中就消失不见了。那火焰生起之后,蔓延到四大王天。在那里烧尽了金宫、宝宫、珠宫,又烧到了三十三天宫。就这样一路烧上去,直到初禅地,在那里焚毁了三个梵天世界后,一直烧到放光天便停住了。只要还有哪怕极微细的行法存在,这火就不会熄灭。当一切行法彻底灭尽时,它就像烧尽了酥油的灯焰一样,连灰烬都不剩地熄灭了。下方的虚空和上方的虚空连成一片,变成了一片巨大的黑暗。巴利
Tatopi dīghassa addhuno accayena sattamo sūriyo pātubhavati, yassa pātubhāvā sakalacakkavāḷaṃ ekajālaṃ hoti saddhiṃ koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷehi, yojanasatikādibhedāni sinerukūṭāni palujjitvā ākāseyeva antaradhāyanti. Sā aggijālā uṭṭhahitvā cātumahārājike gaṇhāti. Tattha kanakavimānaratanavimānamaṇivimānāni jhāpetvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gaṇhāti. Etenevūpāyena yāva paṭhamajjhānabhūmiṃ gaṇhāti, tattha tayopi brahmaloke jhāpetvā ābhassare āhacca tiṭṭhati. Sā yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na nibbāyati. Sabbasaṅkhāraparikkhayā pana sappitelajjhāpanaggisikhā viya chārikampi anavasesetvā nibbāyati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāro.
当世界安住在一个无量又空旷的状态时,为了形成世界的样貌,天就开始下雨。最初降下的雨,像中劫时的降雪一样。之后,雨滴依次变得像芥子那么大、像米粒那么大、像绿豆那么大、像黑豆那么大、像枣子那么大、像余甘子那么大、像黄瓜那么大、像葫芦那么大、像大瓜那么大;再往后,依次变成一乌萨巴、两乌萨巴、半俱卢舍、一俱卢舍、半由旬、一由旬、两由旬……乃至百由旬、千由旬那么大,充满百千俱胝轮围的内部,一直到达尚未毁坏的梵天界,然后消失。那些水,下方和横向都有风生起,把水凝聚成坚实的一团,呈圆形,就像莲叶上的水珠一样。巴利
Evaṃ ekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ ekaṅgaṇaṃ hutvā ṭhite lokasannivāse lokassa saṇṭhānatthāya devo vassituṃ ārabhati, āditova antaraṭṭhake himapāto viya hoti. Tato kaṇamattā taṇḍulamattā muggamāsabadaraāmalakaeḷālukakumbhaṇḍaalābumattā udakadhārā hutvā anukkamena usabhadveusabhaaḍḍhagāvutagāvutaaḍḍhayojanayojanadviyojana…pe… yojanasatayojanasahassamattā hutvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷagabbhantaraṃ yāva avinaṭṭhabrahmalokā pūretvā antaradhāyati. Taṃ udakaṃ heṭṭhā ca tiriyañca vāto samuṭṭhahitvā ghanaṃ karoti parivaṭumaṃ paduminīpatte udakabindusadisaṃ.
有人问:那么,这么巨大的水聚,怎么会被风聚成坚硬密实的呢?因为风能让水聚出现空隙。风在那里的各处,给水留出空隙。水这样被风聚拢、压紧、变得密实,又逐渐消耗,慢慢向下退去。水每退下一层,在原本属于梵天界的位置,梵天界就显现出来;在原本属于上层四欲界天众住处的位置,天界也显现出来。不过,四大王天和三十三天的宫殿因为跟大地相连,这时还没有显现。当水退到先前大地所在的地方时,强烈的风生起,把那些水像封闭了门窗的滤水囊里的水一样,压得毫无空隙,彻底挡住。甜水逐渐耗尽时,在上方生出了地味,大地就像睡莲叶浮在水面上那样安住下来。这大地颜色美好,香气和味道也都具足,就像没有水的乳粥表面结出的那层膜一样。在这里要知道:大菩提金刚座那个地方,在世界毁坏时是最后毁坏的,在世界形成时是最先形成的。巴利
Kathaṃ tāvamahantaṃ udakarāsiṃ ghanaṃ karotīti ce? Vivarasampadānato vātassāti. Tañhissa tahiṃ tahiṃ vivaraṃ deti. Taṃ evaṃ vātena sampiṇḍiyamānaṃ ghanaṃ kariyamānaṃ parikkhayamānaṃ anupubbena heṭṭhā otarati. Otiṇṇe otiṇṇe udake brahmalokaṭṭhāne brahmaloko, uparicatukāmāvacaradevalokaṭṭhāne ca devalokā pātubhavanti. Cātumahārājikatāvatiṃsabhavanāni pana pathavīsambandhatāya na tāva pātubhavanti. Purimapathaviṭṭhānaṃ otiṇṇe pana balavavātā uppajjanti, te taṃ pihitadvāre dhammakaraṇe ṭhitaudakamiva nirussāsaṃ katvā rumbhanti . Madhurodakaṃ parikkhayaṃ gacchamānaṃ upari rasapathaviṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, udakapiṭṭhe uppalinīpattaṃ viya pathavī saṇṭhāti. Sā vaṇṇasampannā ceva hoti gandharasasampannā ca nirudakapāyāsassa upari paṭalaṃ viya. Ettha pana mahābodhipallaṅkaṭṭhānaṃ vinassamāne loke pacchā vinassati, saṇṭhahamāne paṭhamaṃ saṇṭhahatīti veditabbaṃ.
那时,最初化生在光音天梵天世界的众生,有的因为寿命尽了,有的因为福报尽了,从那里死后,化生到这里。他们自己身上发光,能在空中飞行。他们尝了那地味之后,被贪爱压倒,就开始用手捧着吃。接着,他们自身的光消失了,黑暗出现。他们看到黑暗就害怕起来。于是,为了消除他们的恐惧、让他们生出勇气,一个圆满五十由旬的日轮出现了。他们看到它,欢欢喜喜地说:我们得到光明了!又说:它为我们这些害怕的众生消除恐惧、生出勇气而升起,所以就叫它太阳吧。于是给它取名为太阳。巴利
Tadā ca ābhassarabrahmaloke paṭhamatarābhinibbattā sattā āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā tato cavitvā opapātikā hutvā idhūpapajjanti, te honti sayaṃpabhā antalikkhacarā, te taṃ rasapathaviṃ sāyitvā taṇhābhibhūtā āluppakārakaṃ paribhuñjituṃ upakkamanti. Atha tesaṃ sayaṃpabhā antaradhāyati, andhakāro hoti. Te andhakāraṃ disvā bhāyanti. Tato tesaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayantaṃ paripuṇṇapaññāsayojanaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā ‘‘ālokaṃ paṭilabhimhā’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ bhītānaṃ bhayaṃ nāsetvā sūrabhāvaṃ janayanto uṭṭhito, tasmā sūriyo hotū’’ti sūriyotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
后来,太阳带来白天的光明,等到它落下去之后,他们又害怕起来,说:“我们之前得到的光明,现在也没了。”他们心里想:“要是能再得到另一种光明,那该多好啊。”仿佛知道了他们的心思,一个四十九由旬大的月轮就出现了。他们看见它,更加欢喜雀跃,说:“它像是知道了我们的愿望才升起来的,所以就让它叫月亮吧。”于是给它取名叫月亮。巴利
Atha sūriye divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgate ‘‘yampi ālokaṃ labhimha, sopi no naṭṭho’’ti puna bhītā honti. Tesaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘sādhu vatassa, sace aññaṃ ālokaṃ labheyyāmā’’ti. Tesaṃ cittaṃ ñatvā viya ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ pātubhavati. Te taṃ disvā bhiyyoso mattāya haṭṭhatuṭṭhā hutvā ‘‘amhākaṃ chandaṃ ñatvā viya uṭṭhito, tasmā cando hotū’’ti candotvevassa nāmaṃ karonti.
当月亮和太阳出现时,星宿和群星也随之显现。从那时起,昼夜开始能够分辨,逐渐有了月、半月、季节和年。就在月亮和太阳出现的那一天,须弥山、轮围山、雪山、岛屿和大海也同时出现。它们不是先后依次出现的,而是在颇勒具那月满月那一天一同出现。是怎么出现的呢?就像煮粟米饭时,泡沫一下子同时冒出来,有些地方高高鼓起,有些地方低低凹陷,有些地方平平整整;同样,高高鼓起的地方就成了山,低低凹陷的地方就成了大海,平平整整的地方就成了岛屿。巴利
Evaṃ candimasūriyesu pātubhūtesu nakkhattāni tārakarūpāni pātubhavanti, tato pabhuti rattindivā paññāyanti, anukkamena ca māsaḍḍhamāsautusaṃvaccharā, candimasūriyānaṃ pātubhūtadivaseyeva sinerucakkavāḷahimavantapabbatā dīpasamuddā ca pātubhavanti. Te ca kho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ phagguṇapuṇṇamadivaseyeva pātubhavanti. Kathaṃ? Yathā nāma kaṅgubhatte paccamāne ekappahāreneva pubbuḷakā uṭṭhahanti, eke padesā thūpathūpā honti, eke ninnaninnā, eke samasamā, evameva thūpathūpaṭṭhāne pabbatā honti, ninnaninnaṭṭhāne samuddā, samasamaṭṭhāne dīpāti.
那时,那些众生吃地味的时候,因为业的关系,有的长得好看,有的长得难看。长得好看的就看不起长得难看的。由于这种傲慢,那地味也消失了,地上长出了一层薄膜。接着,用同样的方式,那层薄膜也消失了,蔓草出现了。蔓草也以同样的方式消失后,不用耕种自然成熟的稻米出现了,没有糠、没有壳,香气好,米粒饱满。接着,他们的容器也出现了。他们把稻米放进容器,再放到石板上,火焰自己生起来把饭煮熟。煮出来的饭像素馨花一样,不需要汤也不需要菜,想吃什么味道,饭就是那个味道。当他们开始吃这种粗的食物之后,从那时起就有了大小便。要知道,地味、地膜、蔓草这些东西被吃下去时,就像天界的食物一样能解除饥饿,只是通过味觉来滋养身体、维持生命,因为它们的物质非常细微,所以没有排泄物,细微到只是被身体吸收而已。但饭虽然味道更丰富,却因为物质粗重,会排出残渣,产生大小便。巴利
Atha tesaṃ sattānaṃ rasapathaviṃ paribhuñjantānaṃ kammena ekacce vaṇṇavanto honti, ekacce dubbaṇṇā honti. Tattha vaṇṇavanto dubbaṇṇe atimaññanti, tesaṃ atimānapaccayā sāpi rasapathavī antaradhāyati, bhūmipappaṭako pātubhavati. Atha nesaṃ teneva nayena sopi antaradhāyati, atha padālatā pātubhavati. Teneva nayena sāpi antaradhāyati, akaṭṭhapāko sāli pātubhavati akaṇo athuso sugandho taṇḍulaphalo. Tato nesaṃ bhājanāni uppajjanti. Te sāliṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā pāsāṇapiṭṭhiyaṃ ṭhapenti, sayameva jālasikhā uṭṭhahitvā taṃ pacati. So hoti odano sumanajātipupphasadiso, na tassa sūpena vā byañjanena vā karaṇīyaṃ atthi, yaṃ yaṃ rasaṃ bhuñjitukāmā honti, taṃtaṃrasova hoti. Tesaṃ taṃ oḷārikaṃ āhāraṃ āharayataṃ tato pabhuti muttakarīsaṃ sañjāyati. Tathā hi rasapathavī bhūmipappaṭako padālatāti ime tāva paribhuttā sudhāhāro viya khudaṃ vinodetvā rasaharaṇīhi rasameva paribyūhentā tiṭṭhanti vatthuno sukhumabhāvena, na nissandā, sukhumabhāveneva gahaṇindhanameva ca hoti. Odano pana paribhutto rasaṃ vaḍḍhentopi vatthuno oḷārikabhāveneva nissandaṃ vissajjento passāvaṃ karīsañca uppādeti.
这时,为了让他们排泄,他们的疮口裂开了。男人的男性特征、女人的女性特征都显现出来。原来,在过去生中,依靠修习近行定的力量,只要众生相续中的欲贪还被镇伏之力压住,以粗重欲贪为依托的男女根就不会出现。但当欲贪因为(定力)中断而得到机会时,那些以它为依托的根便在众生身体里生起。那时,女人过度盯着男人看,男人也过度盯着女人看。由于这样过度相看,欲贪的热恼便生起,于是他们就行淫欲之事。他们因为做这种非法之事,被有智慧的人责备、羞辱。为了掩盖这种非法之事,他们便建造房屋。住进房屋之后,他们又渐渐跟着某个懒惰众生的样子学,开始囤积东西。从那时起,糠和壳盖住了米粒,收割过的地方也不再长出来。巴利
Atha tesaṃ nikkhamanatthāya vaṇamukhāni pabhijjanti. Purisassa purisabhāvo, itthiyā itthibhāvo pātubhavati. Purimattabhāvesu hi pavattaupacārajjhānānubhāvena yāva sattasantānesu kāmarāgo vikkhambhanavegena samito , na tāva bahalakāmarāgūpanissayāni itthipurisindriyāni pāturahesuṃ. Yadā panassa vicchinnatāya bahalakāmarāgo laddhāvasaro ahosi, tadā tadupanissayāni tāni sattānaṃ attabhāvesu sañjāyiṃsu, tadā itthī purisaṃ, puriso ca itthiṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyati. Tesaṃ ativelaṃ upanijjhāyanapaccayā kāmapariḷāho uppajjati, tato methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevanti. Te asaddhammapaṭisevanapaccayā viññūhi garahiyamānā viheṭhiyamānā tassa asaddhammassa paṭicchādanahetu agārāni karonti. Te agāraṃ ajjhāvasamānā anukkamena aññatarassa alasajātikassa sattassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantā sannidhiṃ karonti. Tato pabhuti kaṇopi thusopi taṇḍulaṃ pariyonandhanti, lāyitaṭṭhānampi na paṭiviruhati.
他们聚在一起,悲叹说:“诸位贤友,恶法确实已经在众生中出现了,因为我们从前是意所成的。”这要按《阿迦那经》(《长部》3.128)里说的方式详细展开。然后他们划定了界限。那时,有一个众生没被给就拿了别人的一份,他们两次呵责他,到第三次就用手、土块和棍棒打他。在不与取、争吵、妄语和杖罚这些事发生之后,他们又聚在一起商量:“我们不如推选一个众生,让他该谴责的就谴责,该呵责的就呵责,该驱逐的就驱逐,我们则把米谷的一份分给他。”就在这个劫里,在这样作出决定的众生当中,这位世尊当时还是菩萨,在那些众生中最端正、最悦目、最有大威德,又有智慧,有能力惩恶扬善。他们走到他那里,请求他,推选了他。他因为被大众推选,就叫“大众推选者”;因为是田地的领主,就叫“刹帝利”;因为以法、以平等让别人欢喜,就叫“王”——他以这三个名字为人所知。凡是世间有希奇之处,菩萨就是那里最初的人。这样以菩萨为开端,刹帝利阶层成立之后,婆罗门等种姓也渐渐成立起来。巴利
Te sannipatitvā anutthunanti ‘‘pāpakā vata bho dhammā sattesu pātubhūtā, mayañhi pubbe manomayā ahumhā’’ti, aggaññasutte (dī. ni. 3.128) vuttanayena vitthāretabbaṃ. Tato mariyādaṃ ṭhapenti, athaññataro satto aññassa bhāgaṃ adinnaṃ ādiyati, taṃ dvikkhattuṃ paribhāsetvā tatiyavāre pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍehi paharanti. Te evaṃ adinnādāne kalahamusāvādadaṇḍādānesu uppannesu ca sannipatitvā cintayanti ‘‘yannūna mayaṃ ekaṃ sattaṃ sammanneyyāma, yo no sammā khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyya, garahitabbaṃ garaheyya, pabbājetabbaṃ pabbājeyya, mayaṃ panassa sālīnaṃ bhāgamanuppadassāmā’’ti. Evaṃ katasanniṭṭhānesu pana sattesu imasmiṃ tāva kappe ayameva bhagavā bodhisattabhūto tena samayena tesu sattesu abhirūpataro ca dassanīyataro ca mahesakkhataro ca buddhisampanno paṭibalo niggahapaggahaṃ kātuṃ. Te taṃ upasaṅkamitvā yācitvā sammanniṃsu. So tena mahājanena sammatoti mahāsammato, khettānaṃ adhipatīti khattiyo, dhammena samena paresaṃ rañjetīti rājāti tīhi nāmehi paññāyittha. Yañhi loke acchariyaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisattova tattha ādipurisoti evaṃ bodhisattaṃ ādiṃ katvā khattiyamaṇḍale saṇṭhite anupubbena brāhmaṇādayopi vaṇṇā saṇṭhahiṃsu.
其中,从劫灭大云一直到火焰断绝,这一段叫第一个不可数,称为坏劫。从劫灭火焰断绝一直到充满百千俱胝轮围的成就大云,这一段叫第二个不可数,称为坏住劫。从成就大云一直到日月出现,这一段叫第三个不可数,称为成劫。从日月出现一直到再次的劫灭大云,这一段叫第四个不可数,称为成住劫。这个成住不可数包含六十四个中间劫,有些人说是包含二十个中间劫。其余几个不可数在时间量上跟它完全相等。这四个不可数合起来就是一个大劫。以上便是以火坏灭与成立的论述,应当如此了知。巴利
Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva jālopacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭoti vuccati. Kappavināsakajālopacchedato yāva koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaparipūrako sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ vivaṭṭoti vuccati. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva puna kappavināsakamahāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīti vuccati. Vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīasaṅkhyeyyaṃ catusaṭṭhiantarakappasaṅgahaṃ. ‘‘Vīsatiantarakappasaṅgaha’’nti keci. Sesāsaṅkhyeyyāni kālato tena samappamāṇāneva. Imāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ tāva agginā vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被水毁灭时,一开始是劫灭大云生起,然后应当依照前面所说的方式详细展开。不过这里有一个差别:前面那里出现的是第二个太阳,而这里生起的是能毁灭劫的碱水大云。它一开始下着细细的雨,然后渐渐变成大雨流,充满百千俱胝个轮围世界。凡是碰到碱水的地方,大地、山等全都消融,水被四面来的风托住。水从大地最下方开始,一直上升到第二禅天。因为大地、山等一碰到碱水就像丢进水里的盐块一样消融,所以有人说,它和支撑大地的水合成了同一个水体。另一些人则说:它把支撑大地的水和支撑水的风蕴彻底毁灭之后,在一切处自己单独成为一团坚实的状态而安住。这个说法是合理的。在上方,它消融了六个梵天界,到达遍净天就停住了。只要还有极微量的行法存在,它就不会平息;一旦超越了一切随水而行的行法,它就顿时平息、消失。下方的虚空和上方的虚空合为一体,成为一片大黑暗,这些都与前面所说的一样。只是这里是以光音天梵界为起点,世界重新显现。众生从遍净天命终后,投生到光音天等处。其中,从劫灭大云到劫灭碱水断绝,这是第一个不可数。从水断绝到成就大云,这是第二个不可数。从成就大云到日月出现,这是第三个不可数。从日月出现到劫灭大云,这是第四个不可数。这四个不可数合为一个大劫。以上就是以水毁灭和形成的过程,应当这样理解。巴利
Yasmiṃ pana samaye kappo udakena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsako khārudakamahāmegho vuṭṭhāti. So ādito sukhumaṃ sukhumaṃ vassanto anukkamena mahādhārāhi koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷānaṃ pūrento vassati. Khārudakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo vilīyanti, udakaṃ samantato vātehi dhārīyati. Pathaviyā heṭṭhimantato pabhuti yāva dutiyajjhānabhūmiṃ udakaṃ gaṇhāti. Tena hi khārudakena phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhā pathavīpabbatādayo udake pakkhittaloṇasakkharā viya vilīyanteva, tasmā pathavīsandhārakaudakena saddhiṃ ekūdakameva taṃ hotīti keci. Apare pana ‘‘pathavīsandhārakaudakaṃ taṃ sandhārakavāyukkhandhañca anavasesato vināsetvā sabbattha sayameva eko ghanabhūto tiṭṭhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ. Upari pana chapi brahmaloke vilīyāpetvā subhakiṇhe āhacca tiṭṭhati, taṃ yāva aṇumattampi saṅkhāragataṃ atthi, tāva na vūpasammati, udakānugataṃ pana sabbaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ abhibhavitvā sahasā vūpasammati, antaradhānaṃ gacchati. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Kevalaṃ panidha ābhassarabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Subhakiṇhato cavitvā ābhassaraṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakakhārudakopacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ . Udakupacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Sampattimahāmeghato yāva candimasūriyapātubhāvo, idaṃ tatiyamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Candimasūriyapātubhāvato yāva kappavināsakamahaāmegho, idaṃ catutthamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Imāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni eko mahākappo hoti. Evaṃ udakena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
当劫被风毁灭时,一开始也是劫灭大云生起,然后应当依照前面所说的方式详细展开。但这里有一个不同之处:前面那里出现的是第二日轮,而这里为了毁灭劫,生起的是风。这风首先扬起粗大的尘土,接着扬起细尘、细沙、粗沙、砾石、岩石等,甚至扬起像尖顶屋那么大的岩石,以及长在高低不平处的大树。这些东西从地面升到空中后,就不再落下来,当场碎成粉末,消失不见。然后,风从大地下方逐渐生起,把大地翻转过来,让根基朝上,抛向空中。即使是一百由旬那么大的大地板块,乃至两百、三百、四百、五百、六百、七百由旬那么大的板块,也都碎裂开来,被风力抛向空中,就在空中碎成粉末,消失不见。风还把轮围山和须弥山举起来抛到空中。它们互相撞击,碎成粉末而毁灭。就用这种方式,风摧毁了地上的天宫和空中的天宫,摧毁了六欲天界之后,又摧毁了百千俱胝个轮围世界。在那里,轮围世界与轮围世界、雪山与雪山、须弥山与须弥山互相碰撞,碎成粉末而毁灭。风从大地一直影响到第三禅天,摧毁了九个梵天界之后,停在广果天。就这样,风连同持地之水以及持水之风,把一切行法都摧毁了,它自己也因为没有了依托而息灭。下方的虚空和上方的虚空合为一体,变成一片大黑暗,这些和前面所说的一样。但这里是以遍净梵天界为起点,世界重新显现。众生从广果天死后,投生到遍净天等处。其中,从劫灭大云到劫灭之风停止,这是一个不可数劫。从风停止到成就大云,这是第二个不可数劫。其余按照前面所说的方式理解。应当知道,以上就是以风毁灭和成立的过程。巴利
Yasmiṃ samaye kappo vātena nassati, āditova kappavināsakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvāti pubbe vuttanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yathā tattha dutiyasūriyo, evamidha kappavināsanatthaṃ vāto samuṭṭhāti. So paṭhamaṃ thūlarajaṃ uṭṭhāpeti, tato saṇharajaṃ sukhumavālikaṃ thūlavālikaṃ sakkharapāsāṇādayoti yāvakūṭāgāramatte pāsāṇe visamaṭṭhāne ṭhitamahārukkhe ca uṭṭhāpeti. Te pathavito nabhamuggatā na puna patanti, tattheva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Athānukkamena heṭṭhā mahāpathaviyā vāto samuṭṭhahitvā pathaviṃ parivattetvā uddhaṃ mūlaṃ katvā ākāse khipati. Yojanasatappamāṇāpi pathavippadesā dviyojanatiyojanacatuyojanapañcayojanachayojanasattayojanappamāṇāpi pabhijjitvā vātavegukkhittā ākāseyeva cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā abhāvaṃ gacchanti. Cakkavāḷapabbatampi sinerupabbatampi vāto ukkhipitvā ākāse khipati. Te aññamaññaṃ abhihantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Etenevūpāyena bhūmaṭṭhakavimānāni ca ākāsaṭṭhakavimānāni ca vināsento chakāmāvacaradevaloke vināsetvā koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷāni vināseti. Tattha cakkavāḷā cakkavāḷehi, himavantā himavantehi, sinerū sinerūhi aññamaññaṃ samāgantvā cuṇṇavicuṇṇā hutvā vinassanti. Pathavito yāva tatiyajjhānabhūmi vāto gaṇhāti, navapi brahmaloke vināsetvā vehapphale āhacca tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ pathavīsandhārakaudakena taṃsandhārakavātena ca saddhiṃ sabbasaṅkhāragataṃ vināsetvā sayampi vinassati avaṭṭhānassa kāraṇābhāvato. Heṭṭhāākāsena saha upariākāso eko hoti mahandhakāroti sabbaṃ vuttasadisaṃ. Idha pana subhakiṇhabrahmalokaṃ ādiṃ katvā loko pātubhavati. Vehapphalato cavitvā subhakiṇhaṭṭhānādīsu sattā nibbattanti. Tattha kappavināsakamahāmeghato yāva kappavināsakavātupacchedo, idamekamasaṅkhyeyyaṃ. Vātupacchedato yāva sampattimahāmegho, idaṃ dutiyamasaṅkhyeyyantiādi vuttanayameva. Evaṃ vātena vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca veditabbaṃ.
那么,世界为什么会这样毁灭呢?虽然诸行的自性灭不需要原因,因为没有能毁坏的东西;但相续的灭不可能没有原因。正如在众生群体中那样,器世界也必定有原因才会毁灭。所以问:世界毁灭的原因是什么?原因是不善根。正如在那里,投生到该处的众生凭着福德之力,世界最初形成;同样,凭着他们的恶业之力,世界坏灭。因此,当不善根增盛时,世界就这样毁灭。正如贪、嗔、痴特别强盛时,依次出现疾疫劫、刀兵劫、饥馑劫,这三种中间劫在住劫的不可数劫中发生。同样,上面所说的三种坏劫,也都是因为贪等特别强盛才发生的。巴利
Atha kiṃkāraṇā evaṃ loko vinassati. Yadipi hi saṅkhārānaṃ ahetuko sarasanirodho vināsakābhāvato, santānanirodho pana hetuvirahito natthi. Yathā taṃ sattanikāyesūti bhājanalokassapi sahetukena vināsena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā kimevaṃ lokavināse kāraṇanti? Akusalamūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Yathā hi tattha nibbattanakasattānaṃ puññabalena paṭhamaṃ loko vivaṭṭati, evaṃ tesaṃ pāpakammabalena saṃvaṭṭati, tasmā akusalamūlesu ussannesu evaṃ loko vinassati. Yathā hi rāgadosamohānaṃ adhikabhāvena yathākkamaṃ rogantarakappo satthantarakappo dubbhikkhantarakappoti ime tividhā antarakappā vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyimhi asaṅkhyeyyakappe jāyanti. Evamete yathāvuttā tayo saṃvaṭṭā rāgādīnaṃ adhikabhāveneva honti.
在这里,贪更增盛时,世界被火毁灭;嗔更增盛时,世界被水毁灭。因为嗔更增盛时,就像以更强的嗔、以更剧烈的碱水来毁灭,才说得通。不过有些人说:“嗔更增盛时被火毁灭,贪更增盛时被水毁灭。”据说他们的意思是:嗔像明显的敌人,所以跟火相似;贪像不明显的敌人,所以跟碱水相似,这样才合理。愚痴更增盛时,世界被风毁灭。这样毁灭时,连续七次被火毁灭,第八次被水毁灭;再七次被火毁灭,第八次被水毁灭。像这样每到第八次就被水毁灭,经过七次水灭之后,又七次被火毁灭。到这时,六十三劫已经过去。在这期间,虽然已经到了水灭那一轮,却被挡住,得到机会的风摧毁了寿命满六十四劫的遍净天,毁灭了世界。不过在这里,因为贪在众生中大量生起,所以应当知道世界多数是被火毁灭的。像这样,世尊如实了知以这些原因毁灭、毁灭后又形成、形成后安住的器世界,所以应当知道,世尊以一切方式了知器世界。巴利
Tattha rāge ussannatare agginā vinassati, dose ussannatare udakena vinassati. Dose hi ussannatare adhikatarena dosena viya tikkhatarena khārudakena vināso yuttoti. Keci pana ‘‘dose ussannatare agginā, rāge udakenā’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ kira ayamadhippāyo – pākaṭasattusadisassa dosassa aggisadisatā, apākaṭasattusadisassa rāgassa khārudakasadisatā ca yuttāti. Mohe pana ussannatare vātena vinassati. Evaṃ vinassantopi ca nirantarameva satta vāre agginā nassati, aṭṭhame vāre udakena, puna satta vāre agginā, aṭṭhame udakenāti evaṃ aṭṭhame aṭṭhame vāre vinassanto sattakkhattuṃ udakena vinassitvā puna satta vāre agginā nassati. Ettāvatā tesaṭṭhi kappā atītā honti. Etthantare udakena nassanavāraṃ sampattampi paṭibāhitvā laddhokāso vāto paripuṇṇacatusaṭṭhikappāyuke subhakiṇhe viddhaṃsento lokaṃ vināseti. Ettha pana rāgo sattānaṃ bahulaṃ pavattatīti aggivasena bahuso lokavināso veditabbo. Iti evaṃ imehi kāraṇehi vinassitvā saṇṭhahantaṃ saṇṭhahitvā ṭhitañca okāsalokaṃ bhagavā yāthāvato avedīti evampissa sabbathā okāsaloko viditoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
前面已经说过“因为以一切方式了知世间,所以是世间解”,现在总结这句话,就说“如此,因为以一切方式了知世间,所以是世间解”。这里“以一切方式”的意思是:从特相等各种差别来了知行世间,从意乐等各种差别来了知有情世间,从数量、形状等各种差别来了知器世间,像这样以一切种类了知世间。巴利
Yaṃ pana heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū’’ti, idāni taṃ nigamento āha ‘‘evaṃ sabbathā viditalokattā lokavidū’’ti. Tattha sabbathāti lakkhaṇādippabhedato saṅkhāralokassa, āsayādippabhedato sattalokassa, parimāṇasaṇṭhānādippabhedato okāsalokassāti evaṃ sabbappakārena viditalokattāti attho.
现在解释“无上”这个词的含义,说“以他自己的功德”等等。其中,“自己”是表示来源的属格,意思是“从自己”。“以功德,比他自己更殊胜”应当这样连接。这里加“更”是为了解释“无上”这个词的含义,并不是说真有一个更殊胜的存在。因为在包括天在内的世间中,连与如来相似的人都没有,何况相等的人,更不用说更殊胜的人了。“任何人”就是无论哪个人。“超胜”是指:世尊的戒德从证得以来就不与他人共通,因为断除了连同习气在内的敌对法,达到了究竟的顶点;这是由戒具足所依托的惭、愧、慈、悲等殊胜条件,以及信、念、精进、慧达到顶点而成就的。以此,世尊完全超胜包括天在内的世间而住,不被任何人所超胜,这就是要表达的意思。对于定德等,也应按照相应的方式来说。这些戒等功德应当知道是世间与出世间混合的,而解脱智见则只是世间的、属于欲界的。巴利
Idāni anuttaroti padassa atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇento āha ‘‘attano pana guṇehī’’tiādi. Tattha attanoti nissakkatthe sāmivacanametaṃ, attatoti attho. Guṇehi attano visiṭṭhatarassāti sambandho. Taraggahaṇañcettha ‘‘anuttaro’’ti padassa atthaniddesatāya kataṃ, na visiṭṭhassa kassaci atthitāya. Sadevake hi loke sadisakappopi nāma koci tathāgatassa natthi, kuto sadiso, visiṭṭhe pana kā kathā. Kassacīti kassacipi. Abhibhavatīti sīlasampadāya upanissayabhūtānaṃ hirottappamettākaruṇānaṃ visesapaccayānaṃ saddhāsativīriyapaññānañca ukkaṃsappattiyā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya na aññasādhāraṇo savāsanapaṭipakkhassa pahīnattā ukkaṃsapāramippatto satthu sīlaguṇo, tena bhagavā sadevakaṃ lokaṃ aññadatthu abhibhuyya pavattati, na sayaṃ kenaci abhibhuyyatīti adhippāyo. Evaṃ samādhiguṇādīsupi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Sīlādayo cete lokiyalokuttaramissakā veditabbā, vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ pana lokiyaṃ kāmāvacarameva.
如果问:那么,他又是如何超胜包括诸天在内的世间呢?这也是因为他的威神力无可比拟。因为那解脱功德无论从所缘、从生起方式,还是从运作形态来看,都更加殊胜。它确实是依着佛陀不共于他人的解脱功德而生起,生起时超越思惟所行、极其深奥、微细、柔和、精妙、殊胜;又因为敌对法已被彻底断除,它生起时极为明显、极其光显;还因为对自在驾驭的纯熟,以及有分间隔极其短暂,所以它极其迅速地生起。巴利
Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ tena sadevakaṃ lokaṃ abhibhavatīti? Tassapi ānubhāvato asadisattā. Tampi hi visayato pavattito pavattiākārato ca uttaritarameva. Tañhi anaññasādhāraṇaṃ satthu vimuttiguṇaṃ ārabbha pavattati, pavattamānañca atakkāvacaraṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ sātisayaṃ paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ suppahīnattā suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ vibhūtataraṃ katvā pavattati, sammadeva ca vasībhāvassa pāpakattā bhavaṅgaparivāsassa ca atiparittakattā lahu lahu pavattatīti.
像这样,先用戒等功德说明世尊没有比他更高的,接着为了说明连跟他相等的人也没有,就说了“以戒功德也无等”等话。这里,“无等”的意思是:在任何一个时候,都没有人在戒等功德上跟他相等或相似,所以叫无等。同样,跟无等的人相等,就叫无等等;或者说,他拥有与无等者相等的境界,所以叫无等等。在戒等功德上,没有人能跟他相比,所以叫无喻。剩下两个词也按同样的道理理解。其中,可以用来比喻的东西叫“喻”,相似的比喻叫“映照”,以对举方式成立的人叫“对者”,应当这样理解。巴利
Evaṃ sīlādiguṇehi bhagavato uttaritarassa abhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni sadisassapi abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlaguṇenapi asamo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha asamoti ekasmiṃ kāle natthi etassa sīlādiguṇena samo sadisoti asamo. Tathā asamehi samo asamasamo. Asamā vā samā etassāti asamasamo. Sīlādiguṇena natthi etassa paṭimāti appaṭimo. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha upamāmattaṃ paṭimā, sadisūpamā paṭibhāgo, yugaggāhavasena ṭhito paṭipuggaloti veditabbo.
比丘们,在“我确实不见……”这类话里,意思是:我虽然用一切眼看见整个世间,就像看掌中的余甘子一样,但在包括诸天……乃至……众生之中,我确实看不到有哪一个人的戒比我自己的戒更圆满、更具足,因为这样的人根本不存在。巴利
Na kho panāhaṃ bhikkhave samanupassāmītiādīsu mama samantacakkhunā hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbaṃ lokaṃ passantopi tattha sadevake…pe… pajāya attano attato sīlasampannataraṃ sampannatarasīlaṃ kañcipi puggalaṃ na kho pana passāmi tādisassa abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
关于《最上净信经》等,在这里——巴利
Aggappasādasuttādīnīti ettha –
比丘们,无论哪一类众生,无足的、两足的、四足的、多足的,有色的、无色的,有想的、无想的、非想非非想的,如来都被称为它们当中最上的,也就是阿拉汉、正自觉者。比丘们,凡是对佛生起净信的人,就是对最上者生起了净信。而对最上者生起净信,果报也就是最上的。巴利
‘‘Yāvatā, bhikkhave, sattā apadā vā dvipadā vā catuppadā vā bahuppadā vā rūpino vā arūpino vā saññino vā asaññino vā nevasaññīnāsaññino vā, tathāgato tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati arahaṃ sammāsambuddho. Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā. Agge kho pana pasannānaṃ aggo vipāko hotī’’ti (a. ni. 4.34; itivu. 90) –
这是《最胜净信经》。用“等”这个字来说——巴利
Idaṃ aggappasādasuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena –
比丘们,在包括诸天在内的世间……中略……在包括诸天与人的世间,如来是征服者、不被征服者、确实是一切所见者、自在主,因此被称为如来。巴利
‘‘Sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthu daso vasavattī, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23; dī. ni. 3.188) –
像这样的经文句子应当理解为:以“等”字开头的偈颂,就是:巴利
Evamādīni suttapadāni veditabbāni. Ādikā gāthāyoti –
我在世间是应供,我是无上的导师;
我是世间唯一的正自觉者,已经清凉,已经寂灭。
我已调伏,在能调伏众人的人当中最为殊胜;我已寂静,在能令众人寂静的人当中是仙人。
我已解脱,在能令解脱者中最上;我已度脱,在能令度脱者中最胜。
在这个世间或他方世间,都没有。
在这个世间或别的世间,都找不到一个能跟佛陀相比或一样的人。
他达到了应受供养者中最上供养的境地,
为了那些想要求福德、追求广大果报的人。巴利
‘‘Ahañhi arahā loke, ahaṃ satthā anuttaro; Ekomhi sammāsambuddho, sītibhūtosmi nibbuto. (mahāva. 11; ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341); ‘‘Danto damayataṃ seṭṭho, santo samayataṃ isi; Mutto mocayataṃ aggo, tiṇṇo tārayataṃ varo. (itivu. 112) ‘‘Nayimasmiṃ loke parasmiṃ vā pana, Buddhena seṭṭho sadiso ca vijjati; Āhuneyyānaṃ paramāhutiṃ gato, Puññatthikānaṃ vipulapphalesina’’nti. (vi. va. 1047; kathā. 799) –
像这样的偈颂,应当详细展开来讲。巴利
Evamādikā gāthā vitthāretabbā.
在“调御丈夫”这类词里,“应当被调御的”就是“dammā”,意思是适合被调御的。那些人既是人,又是应当被调御的,所以叫“purisadammā”。这里是把修饰语放在后面来解释,意思就是“应当被调御的人”。有人说:“即使女人也有应当被调御的性质,但这里用‘人’这个词,是为了以最殊胜者作为界定标准。”为了说明“sāreti”(引导)的意思,所以说“dameti”(调御)等等。其中,“dameti”的意思是令其平息,即通过身等调御使之相应。然而,那通过身等调御使之相应,是依适当情况而安立于彼分断等之中,所以说“vineti,这就是所说的意思”。所谓“未调御的”,这是就完全未达到调御状态的人而说他们是“purisadammā”。而那些已开始调御、尚未完全超越应当调御状态的人,他们也是“purisadammā”,因为导师调御他们。世尊确实为具足清净戒者宣说初禅,为获得初禅者宣说第二禅等,如此依次宣说种种殊胜,即使对已部分调御者也令其调御。因此,《清净道论》中说:“而且,那位世尊为具足清净戒等者宣说初禅等,为须陀洹等宣说更高道之修行,即使对已调御者也令其调御。”或者,应知完全未调御者和部分已调御者,在这里都已由“未调御”一词所摄。适合调御者,即值得调御者。巴利
Purisadammasārathītiādīsu damitabbāti dammā, damituṃ araharūpā. Purisā ca te dammā cāti purisadammā. Visesanassa cettha paranipātaṃ katvā niddeso, dammapurisāti attho. ‘‘Satipi mātugāmassapi dammabhāve purisaggahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenā’’ti vadanti. Sāretīti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘dametī’’tiādi. Tattha dametīti sameti, kāyasamādīhi yojetīti attho. Taṃ pana kāyasamādīhi yojanaṃ yathārahaṃ tadaṅgavinayādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vinetīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Adantāti idaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ damataṃ anupagatā purisadammāti vuttāti katvā vuttaṃ. Ye pana vippakatadammabhāvā sabbathā dametabbataṃ nātivattā, tepi purisadammā eva, yato te satthā dameti. Bhagavā hi visuddhasīlassa paṭhamajjhānaṃ ācikkhati, paṭhamajjhānalābhino dutiyajjhānantiādinā tassa tassa uparūpari visesaṃ ācikkhanto ekadesena dantepi sameti. Teneva vuttaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.139) ‘‘api ca so bhagavā visuddhasīlādīnaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīni sotāpannādīnañca uttarimaggappaṭipadaṃ ācikkhanto dantepi dametiyevā’’ti. Atha vā sabbena sabbaṃ adantā ekadesena dantā ca idha adantaggahaṇeneva saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Dametuṃ yuttāti damanārahā.
“畜生人”等词中,不向上走、而是横着弯曲行走、横着生长的,就是畜生;意思是说,不像天和人那样向上长得高,而是横向长得长。畜生本身就是人,所以叫“畜生人”。“人”是因为心意高涨。由于勇猛、具念、堪任梵行等功德,其心增盛,成为具有殊胜功德之心。那他们是谁呢?是住在赡部洲的一类特殊众生。因此世尊说:巴利
Tiracchānapurisātiādīsu uddhaṃ anuggantvā tiriyaṃ añcitā gatā vaḍḍhitāti tiracchānā, devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghaṃ ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghāti attho. Tiracchānāyeva purisā tiracchānapurisā. Manassa ussannatāya manussā. Satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasā ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittā. Ke pana te? Jambudīpavāsino sattavisesā. Tenāha bhagavā –
比丘们,赡部洲的人以三种情况胜过北俱卢洲的人和三十三天的天人。是哪三种呢?勇敢、有正念、在这里修梵行。巴利
‘‘Tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke ca manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21).
正因为这样,诸佛、世尊、独觉佛、上首弟子、大弟子、转轮王以及其他有大神力的众生,都只出生在那里。有些人说:因为他们和那些有大神力的众生具有相同的形态等,所以其他大洲的居民和这个小岛的居民一样,也只被认作是人。另一些人则说:因为与贪等和不贪等相应的心特别强盛,所以称为人。因为在属于人类这一类众生中,贪等和不贪等特别强盛,他们由于贪等强盛而走上恶趣之路,由于不贪等强盛而走上善趣之路以及通向涅槃之路。因此,由于与贪等和不贪等相应的心特别强盛,四大洲的众生和这个小岛的居民一起,被特别称为人。不过,世间论者说:“因为是摩奴的后代,所以称为人。”所谓摩奴,是劫初之人,是世间规范的创始者,是众生利害的制定者,处于父亲的位置,他在教法里被称为大选出者。由于直接或间接地安住在他的教诫和教导中,就像他的儿子一样,所以被称为人,也叫摩奴的后代。正因如此,那些年轻人也被称作摩奴所生。而他们既是人又是男子,所以叫人中之男子。巴利
Tathā hi buddhā bhagavanto paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā cakkavattino aññe ca mahānubhāvā sattā tattheva uppajjanti. Tehi samānarūpāditāya pana saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussātveva paññāyiṃsūti eke. Apare pana bhaṇanti – lobhādīhi ca alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā. Ye hi sattā manussajātikā, tesu visesato lobhādayo alobhādayo ca ussannā, te lobhādiussannatāya apāyamaggaṃ, alobhādiussannatāya sugatimaggaṃ nibbānagāmimaggañca pūrenti, tasmā lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya parittadīpavāsīhi saddhiṃ catumahādīpavāsino sattavisesā manussāti vuccanti. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Manu nāma paṭhamakappiko lokamariyādāya ādibhūto hitāhitavidhāyako sattānaṃ pituṭṭhāniyo, yo sāsane mahāsammatoti vuccati, paccakkhato paramparāya ca tassa ovādānusāsaniyaṃ ṭhitā tassa puttasadisatāya manussā mānusāti ca vuccanti. Tato eva hi te māṇavā ‘‘manujā’’ti ca voharīyanti, manussā ca te purisā cāti manussapurisā.
“非人男子”在这里指不是人的众生,也就是“非人”。这里强调的是他们与人相似。因此,他们并不真正具有人的身份,而是与人相似的另一种众生,这里指的就是夜叉等非人。并不是任何与人不同的众生都算,因为畜生道男子已经另外列出。这里明确指的是夜叉等。住在雪山的阿波罗罗龙,住在龙岛的朱罗陀罗龙和大腹龙,住在狮子岛的火焰顶龙和烟顶龙,都因去除嗔恚之毒而被调伏。因此说:“他们被安置于皈依与戒中。”“曲齿等”中的“等”字,应当理解为包括了恐怖面、优婆离居士等。“帝释等”中的“等”字,应当理解为包括了阿阇迦罗婆夜叉、婆迦梵天等。然而,对他们的调伏,正如各处所说那样,是帝释等所能了知的,因此由于过于繁琐,这里不再说明。而此处的经文应详加展开:这部《凯西经》,依“以种种奇妙之调御方便而得调御”这一意义,应详加展开,因为它是依柔和方法等适宜方式而显示调御的。巴利
Amanussapurisāti ettha na manussāti amanussā. Taṃsadisatā ettha jotīyati. Tena manussattamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti yakkhādayo amanussāti adhippetā. Na ye keci manussehi aññe, tathā tiracchānapurisānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yakkhādayo eva ca niddiṭṭhā. Apalālo himavantavāsī, cūḷodaramahodarā nāgadīpavāsino, aggisikhadhūmasikhā sīhaḷadīpavāsino nibbisā katā dosavisassa vinodanena. Tenāha ‘‘saraṇesu ca sīlesu ca patiṭṭhāpitā’’ti. Kūṭadantādayoti ādi-saddena ghoramukhaupāligahapatiādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sakkādayoti ādi-saddena ajakalāpayakkhabakabrahmādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Etesaṃ pana damanaṃ tattha tattha vuttanayeneva sakkā viññātunti atippapañcabhāvato idha na vuccati. Idañcettha suttaṃ vitthāretabbanti idaṃ kesīsuttaṃ ‘‘vinītā vicitrehi vinayanūpāyehī’’ti etasmiṃ atthe vitthāretabbaṃ yathārahaṃ saṇhādīhi upāyehi vinayanassa dīpanato.
“义句”是指能显示意义的句子,而“语句”本身就是意义。因为意义是通过语句显示出来的,不是只靠名词等单词;而且,仅凭这一个词,就显示出导师作为“调御丈夫”的不共特质,所以接着说“世尊”等。“八方”是指八等至。它们虽然彼此相关联,却以互不混杂的方式显现、表现出来,就像方位一样,所以叫“方”。“无著”是指不黏著,因为得到自在而无所滞碍地行动。“驰骋”是指因为有快速运行的功用,所以说驰骋。“只向一个方向驰骋”的意思是自身不转动;但被导师调御过的应调御者,仅以同一个威仪姿势就能向八方驰骋,所以说“仅以一个结跏趺坐”。而所说的“八方”只是举例,因为还能趣入世间人从未到过的灭尽定之方和不死之方。巴利
Atthapadanti atthābhibyañjanakaṃ padaṃ, vākyanti attho. Vākyena hi atthābhibyatti, na nāmādipadamattena, ekapadabhāvena ca anaññasādhāraṇo satthu purisadammasārathibhāvo dassito hoti. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi. Aṭṭha disāti aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Tā hi aññamaññaṃ sambandhāpi asaṃkiṇṇabhāvena dissanti apadissanti, disā viyāti vā disā. Asajjamānāti na sajjamānā vasībhāvappattiyā nissaṅgacārā. Dhāvantīti javanavuttiyogato dhāvanti. Ekaṃyeva disaṃ dhāvatīti attano kāyaṃ aparivattantoti adhippāyo, satthārā pana damitā purisadammā ekiriyāpatheneva aṭṭha disā dhāvanti. Tenāha ‘‘ekapallaṅkeneva nisinnā’’ti. Aṭṭha disāti ca nidassanamattametaṃ lokiyehi agatapubbaṃ nirodhasamāpattidisaṃ amatadisañca pakkhandanato.
在“现世的、来世的、究竟的义利”等说法中:“现世”指的是眼前可见的自身,与它相关联的,就是“现世的”,即此世的利益。“来世”是因为依着业与烦恼而应当转生而去、应当正确前往,所以叫“来世”,也就是他世;与它相关联的,就是“来世的”,即他世的利益。最上、最殊胜的义利叫“究竟义利”,也就是涅槃。以这些现世的、来世的、究竟的义利。“如其所应”就是随顺相应,在种种义利中,哪个人适合哪一种,就按那一种相应地(“教诫”就是调御,使他们安立在对自己有利益的状态中)。“与义利俱”而进行,就是“商队”,即带着货物本钱为经商而前往他方的人群。以利益教诫等而应当保护、应当教导,他具有这种意义,所以叫“导师”,即商队主,这是依词源规则来说的。像他一样,世尊也是如此,所以说“如导师一样,就是导师;世尊是商队主”。巴利
Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehītiādīsu diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo, tattha niyuttoti diṭṭhadhammiko, idhalokattho. Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sammā gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha niyuttoti samparāyiko, paralokattho. Paramo uttamo attho paramattho, nibbānaṃ. Tehi diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi. Yathārahanti yathānurūpaṃ, tesu tesu atthesu yo yo puggalo yaṃ yaṃ arahati, tadanurūpaṃ. Anusāsatīti vineti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe patiṭṭhāpeti. Saha atthena vattatīti sattho, bhaṇḍamūlena vaṇijjāya desantaraṃ gacchanto janasamūho. Hitupadesādivasena paripāletabbo sāsitabbo so etassa atthīti satthā satthavāho niruttinayena. So viya bhagavāti āha ‘‘satthā viyāti satthā, bhagavā satthavāho’’ti.
现在为了用释义巴利的方式说明这件事,就说了“如商队主”等话。其中,“于商队”指商队中的人。“令谁渡水”,这里就是“荒野”,指没有水的林野地带。按惯用法,别的林野地带也这样叫。“贼寇荒野”指被贼寇占据的荒野,同样还有“猛兽荒野”。“饥馑荒野”指难以得到食物的荒野。“令渡”就是让人越过不安稳的地方。“令出渡”等,是加上前缀扩展而成的说法。或者也可以说:“令出渡”是让人接近安稳之处而渡过去;“令离渡”是从不安稳的地方使人出离而渡过去;“令遍渡”是摄持而渡过去,犹如用手摄持而渡过去一样,意思是令渡过去。这一切都无非是令渡、令出渡等,即安立于安稳之处,因此说“令到达安稳之地”。令渡众生,指所化众生。由于是大密林、大无益、难渡越,生本身就是荒野,所以是“生荒野”,即那生荒野。巴利
Idāni tamatthaṃ niddesapāḷinayena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā satthavāho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sattheti satthike jane. Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāro, nirudako araññappadeso. Ruḷhīvasena pana itaropi araññappadeso tathā vuccati. Corakantāranti corehi adhiṭṭhitakantāraṃ, tathā vāḷakantāraṃ. Dubbhikkhakantāranti dullabhabhikkhaṃ kantāraṃ. Tāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānaṃ atikkāmeti. Uttāretītiādi upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā uttāretīti khemantabhūmiṃ upanento tāreti. Nittāretīti akhemantaṭṭhānato nikkhāmento tāreti. Patāretīti pariggahetvā tāreti, hatthena pariggahetvā tāreti viya tāretīti attho. Sabbampetaṃ tāraṇuttāraṇādi khemaṭṭhāne ṭhapanamevāti āha ‘‘khemantabhūmiṃ sampāpetī’’ti. Satteti veneyyasatte. Mahāgahanatāya mahānatthatāya dunnittharatāya ca jātiyeva kantāro jātikantāro, taṃ jātikantāraṃ.
“以最胜的界限来说”,就是以最胜的众生的界限来说。因为只有天与人是最胜的众生,不是畜生等类。“此”就是指“天与人”这句话。“以堪能之人的界限来说”,就是以能进入正定聚的相应之人的界限来限定。“世尊”是表示从属关系的属格,就像“从戒师那里学习”一样,意思是“在世尊跟前”。“具足亲依止”,是指三因结生等,是证得道果的强大因缘。“伽伽拉”:是名叫伽伽拉的国王的王后,或者因为是由她所建,所以得到了“伽伽拉”这个名字。“于声取相”:就是以“这被称为法”的法想而取声相;取相的时候,他满怀净信,躺在集会边缘。“压住而立”:他没有看见杖已经放在自己头上,就在那里把杖压下去站着。青蛙即使杖被放上去、被压住,也因为对法生起的净信而不出声,就这样命终了。生在天的众生有这样一种规律:会省察“我从哪里生到这里?在那里造了什么业?”因此,由于看见了自己的前生,他说:“啊!我也竟然生到了这里。”他以头礼拜世尊的双足:以因知恩而增长的慈爱、恭敬与尊重而顶礼。巴利
Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasenāti ukkaṭṭhasattaparicchedavasena. Devamanussā eva hi ukkaṭṭhasattā, na tiracchānādayo. Etanti ‘‘devamanussāna’’nti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhabbapuggalaparicchedavasenāti sammattaniyāmokkamanassa yogyapuggalassa paricchindanavasena. Bhagavatoti nissakke sāmivacanaṃ yathā ‘‘upajjhāyato ajjhetī’’ti. Bhagavato santike vāti attho. Upanissayasampattinti tihetukapaṭisandhiādikaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa balavakāraṇaṃ. Gaggarāyāti gaggarāya nāma rañño deviyā, tāya vā kāritattā ‘‘gaggarā’’ti laddhanāmāya. Sare nimittaṃ aggahesīti ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti dhammasaññāya sare nimittaṃ gaṇhi, gaṇhanto ca pasannacitto parisapariyante nipajji. Sannirumbhitvā aṭṭhāsīti tassa sīse daṇḍassa ṭhapitabhāvaṃ apassanto tattha daṇḍaṃ uppīḷetvā aṭṭhāsi. Maṇḍūkopi daṇḍe ṭhapitepi uppīḷitepi dhammagatena pasādena vissaramakarontova kālamakāsi. Devaloke nibbattasattānaṃ ayaṃ dhammatā, yā ‘‘kutohaṃ idha nibbatto, tattha kinnu kho kammamakāsi’’nti āvajjanā. Tasmā attano purimabhavassa diṭṭhattā āha ‘‘are ahampi nāma idha nibbatto’’ti. Bhagavato pāde sirasā vandīti kataññutāsaṃvaḍḍhitena pemagāravabahumānena vandi.
明知故问:世尊为了让大众亲眼看到业果和佛的威力,用偈颂问道:“谁在礼敬我?”这里,“谁”是指天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等当中的哪一位,意思是“哪一个”。“我”就是“我的”。“足”就是双脚。“以神通”就是以此种天神通。“以名声”就是以此种名声和随从。“照耀”就是闪闪发光。“以殊胜”就是极其可爱、令人欢喜、美妙的。“以色”就是以肤色和身体的色泽。“照亮一切方”:就是让十个方向全都一片光明、一片光亮,像月亮、像太阳一样照耀的意思。巴利
Jānantovapucchīti mahājanassa kammaphalaṃ buddhānubhāvañca paccakkhaṃ kātukāmo bhagavā ‘‘ko me vandatī’’ti gāthāya pucchi. Tattha (vi. va. aṭṭha. 857) koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko, katamoti attho. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena yasena ca parivārena ca. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kāmanīyena sundarena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti sabbā dasapi disā pabhāsento, cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti attho.
世尊这样一问,那位天子就表明自己的身份,说出“我前世曾是青蛙”这个偈颂。其中“前世”指过去生。“在水里”是为了显示当时自己出生的地方。“水里的青蛙”这样就排除了在陆地上鼓胀之类的青蛙。牛走动的地方就是“行境”,也就是牛找食物的地方。但这里说“像行境一样”,水就是它的行境,所以叫“水行境”。因为有些生活在水里的众生,比如龟之类,也可能不是以水为行境,所以特别标明“水行境”。“听你说法”是指你用梵音、像迦陵频伽鸟鸣一样美妙的声音说法时,它通过“这就是法”的声音来取相而听。这里的属格表示不敬。“牧牛童杀了我”是说一个看牛的牧童来到我身边,拄着棍子站着,把棍子压在我头上,把我弄死了。巴利
Evaṃ pana bhagavatā pucchito devaputto attānaṃ pavedento ‘‘maṇḍūkohaṃ pure āsi’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha pureti purimajātiyaṃ. Udaketi idaṃ tadā attano uppattiṭṭhānadassanaṃ. Udake maṇḍūkoti tena uddhumāyikādikassa thale maṇḍūkassa nivattanaṃ kataṃ hoti. Gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ ghāsesanaṭṭhānaṃ. Idha pana gocaro viyāti gocaro, vāri udakaṃ gocaro etassāti vārigocaro. Udakacārīpi hi koci kacchapādi avārigocaropi hotīti ‘‘vārigocaro’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Tava dhammaṃ suṇantassāti brahmassarena karavīkarutamañjunā desentassa tava dhammaṃ ‘‘dhammo eso vuccatī’’ti sare nimittaggāhavasena suṇantassa. Anādare cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Avadhī vacchapālakoti vacche rakkhanto gopālakadārako mama samīpaṃ āgantvā daṇḍamolubbha tiṭṭhanto mama sīse daṇḍaṃ sannirumbhitvā maṃ māresīti attho.
他心生喜悦与满足,心想:“以这样极微小的福德之力,竟然能得到如此极其宏大的世间与出世间成就。”于是露出微笑,那更为明亮洁白的牙齿放出光芒,把那个地方照耀得更加灿烂。他确实是因为喜悦与满足——巴利
Sitaṃ katvāti ‘‘tathā parittatarenapi puññānubhāvena evaṃ ativiya uḷārā lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo labbhantī’’ti pītisomanassajāto bhāsurataradhavaḷavipphurantadasanakhakiraṇāvaḷīhi bhiyyoso mattāya taṃ padesaṃ obhāsento sitaṃ katvā. Pītisomanassavasena hi so –
只要片刻内心清净,就能看到我的神通与名声。
看看我的神通威力,看看我的相貌和光芒。
乔达摩啊,那些长久以来听闻你法的人,
他们已经到达了不动摇的境界,到了那里就不会再忧愁。巴利
‘‘Muhuttaṃ cittapasādassa, iddhiṃ passa yasañca me; Ānubhāvañca me passa, vaṇṇaṃ passa jutiñca me. ‘‘Ye ca te dīghamaddhānaṃ, dhammaṃ assosuṃ gotama; Pattā te acalaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha gantvā na socare’’ti. (vi. va. 859-860) –
说完这两首偈颂后,就离开了。巴利
Imā dve gāthā vatvā pakkāmi.
在这里,“凡任何”中的“凡”是不确定语气的词,“任何”也是这样。“而”只是说话上的修饰。因此,“凡任何”就把所应知道的一切毫无剩余地全部包括了。或者,“而”是显示特殊含义的虚词。通过“正自觉者”这个词,从简略和详细两方面说明了导师对四圣谛的正觉。而通过“佛”这个词,则说明了对其他所应知道之法的觉悟。或者,前者说明导师证悟智慧的威力,后者说明说法智慧的威力。“也”字所要表达的差别,下面会说明。依解脱究竟智之力——这里“解脱”是指从一切对立面彻底解脱,也就是最上道;它的终点就是最上果;在应当获得那个果位时,因为是从那里获得的,所以称为“解脱究竟”;这种智连同一切知智在内,就是全部的佛智。巴利
Yaṃ pana kiñcīti ettha yanti aniyamitavacanaṃ, tathā kiñcīti. Panāti vacanālaṅkāramattaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ kiñcīti ñeyyassa anavasesapariyādānaṃ kataṃ hoti. Panāti vā visesatthadīpako nipāto. Tena ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā saṅkhepato vitthārato ca satthu catusaccābhisambodho vutto. Buddhoti pana iminā tadaññassapi ñeyyassa avabodho. Purimena vā satthu paṭivedhañāṇānubhāvo, pacchimena desanāñāṇānubhāvo. Pī-ti upari vuccamāno viseso jotīyati. Vimokkhantikañāṇavasenāti ettha sabbaso paṭipakkhehi vimuccatīti vimokkho, aggamaggo, tassa anto, aggaphalaṃ, tasmiṃ laddhe laddhabbato tattha bhavaṃ vimokkhantikaṃ, ñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena saddhiṃ sabbampi buddhañāṇaṃ.
这里说的“如此转起”,是指——巴利
Evaṃ pavattoti ettha –
因为具足一切知,所以是佛;因为具足一切见,所以是佛;因为不须他人引导,所以是佛;因为开显真理,所以是佛;因为诸漏已尽,所以是佛;因为无所染着,所以是佛;因为彻底远离贪,所以是佛;因为彻底远离嗔,所以是佛;因为彻底远离痴,所以是佛;因为彻底没有烦恼,所以是佛;因为已走上唯一之道,所以是佛;因为独自证得无上正等觉,所以是佛;因为摧破无明、获得智慧,所以是佛。佛这个名称,不是母亲取的,不是父亲取的,不是兄弟取的,不是姐妹取的,不是朋友同伴取的,不是亲戚血亲取的,不是沙门婆罗门取的,不是天神取的。这是诸佛世尊在菩提树下,与证得一切知智同时现证的安立,也就是佛。巴利
‘‘Sabbaññutāya buddho, sabbadassāvitāya buddho, anaññaneyyatāya buddho, visavitāya buddho, khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddho, nirupalepasaṅkhātena buddho, ekantavītarāgoti buddho, ekantavītadosoti buddho, ekantavītamohoti buddho, ekantanikkilesoti buddho, ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddho, eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddho, abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddho. Buddhoti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kataṃ, na pitarā kataṃ, na bhātarā kataṃ, na bhaginiyā kataṃ, na mittāmaccehi kataṃ, na ñātisālohitehi kataṃ, na samaṇabrāhmaṇehi kataṃ, na devatāhi kataṃ, vimokkhantikametaṃ buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ bodhiyā mūle saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ buddho’’ti (mahāni. 192) –
这是义注圣典的方法。因为在这里,它和《无碍解道》圣典并没有差别,所以为了说明依两者中任何一种都能成就义理,就说“或无碍解道的方法”,这里的“或”字表示不确定的意思。巴利
Ayaṃ niddesapāḷinayo. Yasmā cettha tassā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.162) bhedo natthi, tasmā dvīsu ekenapi atthasiddhīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭisambhidānayo vā’’ti aniyamattho vāsaddo vutto.
在这里,就像世间有见识的人被称为“有见识的人”一样,觉知诸谛的人被称为佛陀,这是从纯粹主动者的角度来说的。就像吹落树叶的风被称为“落叶风”一样,令众生觉悟的人被称为佛陀,这是从原因作为主动者的角度来说的。这里“因”的含义已经包含在其中了。由于一切知性而称为佛陀,意思是凭借能觉知一切法的智慧而称为佛陀。由于一切见性而称为佛陀,意思是凭借能觉悟一切法的智慧而称为佛陀。由于不从他闻性而称为佛陀,意思是不是由他人使他觉悟,而是自己觉悟,所以称为佛陀。由于开敷性而称为佛陀,意思是像莲花绽放一样,以种种功德开显的意义而称为佛陀。由于称为漏尽者而称为佛陀,通过这六种表述,意思是说,由于断除了使心收缩的诸法,就像从睡眠中完全醒来的人一样,因为从一切烦恼的睡眠中完全觉醒,所以称为佛陀。其中,“称为”和“被称为”在意义上是一回事,所以“以称为”就是“以这一部分”的意思。由于没有贪着和见着,所以称为无着。因为一切烦恼连同习气都已断除,所以用绝对的说法特别指出“绝对离贪”等。绝对无烦恼,就是远离贪、嗔、痴等一切残余烦恼而无烦恼。已行唯一之道而称为佛陀,就像“行”的意义可以理解为“觉”的意义一样,“觉”的意义也可以获得“行”的意义,所以因为已行唯一之道而称为佛陀,意思是说,已行唯一之道故称为佛陀。独自证得无上正等觉而称为佛陀,意思是不是因为他人使他觉悟而称为佛陀,而是因为自己证得了无上正等觉,所以称为佛陀。由于无明已除而获得智慧,所以称为佛陀,智慧、觉、菩提这三者没有区别。这里就像因为具有红色的品质而称为红布一样,因为具有佛陀的品质而称为佛陀,这是为了让人知道而说的。此后“佛陀不是名字”等,是为了让人知道随顺意义的施设而说的。这样,在这里也应该通过这个理由,知道世尊是佛陀。巴利
Tattha (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.162; mahāni. aṭṭha. 192) yathā loke avagantā ‘‘avagato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ bujjhitā saccānīti buddho suddhakattuvasena. Yathā paṇṇasosā vātā ‘‘paṇṇasusā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ bodhetā pajāyāti buddho hetukattuvasena. Hetuattho cettha antonīto . Sabbaññutāya buddhoti sabbadhammabujjhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Sabbadassāvitāya buddhoti sabbadhammabodhanasamatthāya buddhiyā buddhoti attho. Anaññaneyyatāya buddhoti aññena abodhito sayameva buddhattā buddhoti attho. Visavitāya buddhoti nānāguṇavisavanato padumamiva vikasanaṭṭhena buddhoti attho. Khīṇāsavasaṅkhātena buddhoti evamādīhi chahi padehi cittasaṅkocakaradhammappahānena niddākkhayavibuddho puriso viya sabbakilesaniddākkhayavibuddhattā buddhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha saṅkhā saṅkhātanti atthato ekattā saṅkhātenāti vacanassa koṭṭhāsenāti attho. Taṇhālepadiṭṭhilepābhāvena nirupalepasaṅkhātena. Savāsanānaṃ sabbakilesānaṃ pahīnattā ekantavacaneneva visesetvā ‘‘ekantavītarāgo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantanikkilesoti rāgadosamohāvasesehi sabbakilesehi nikkileso. Ekāyanamaggaṃ gatoti buddhoti gamanatthānaṃ buddhiatthatā viya buddhiatthānampi gamanatthatā labbhatīti ekāyanamaggaṃ gatattā buddhoti vuccatīti attho. Eko anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhoti buddhoti na parehi buddhattā buddho, atha kho sayameva anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddhattā buddhoti attho. Abuddhivihatattā buddhipaṭilābhā buddhoti buddhi buddhaṃ bodhoti anatthantaraṃ. Tattha yathā rattaguṇayogato ratto paṭo, evaṃ buddhaguṇayogato buddhoti ñāpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ buddhoti netaṃ nāmantiādi atthānugatāyaṃ paññattīti bodhanatthaṃ vuttanti evamettha imināpi kāraṇena bhagavā buddhoti veditabbo.
现在,为了说明“世尊”这个词的含义,论师说:“世尊,这就是他的……”等等。其中,“他的”指的是世尊的。“具足功德、最为殊胜、在众生中最为上首、值得恭敬的称呼”,意思是:因为具足戒等一切功德而殊胜,因此是一切众生中最上首的、值得恭敬的,这是出于恭敬而使用的称呼,这就是“世尊”。确实如此,世间怙主因为具足无量、无可比拟的威德与戒等种种殊胜功德,以先去除一切不利为先导,致力于带来毫无遗漏的利益与安乐,以无与伦比的修行成就,对包括天人在内的众生作最极究竟的饶益,所以在无量世界中、对无量众生来说,他就是最上的恭敬对象。巴利
Idāni bhagavāti imassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavāti idaṃ panassā’’tiādi. Tattha assāti bhagavato. Guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacananti sabbehi sīlādiguṇehi visiṭṭhassa tato eva sabbasattehi uttamassa garuno gāravavasena vuccamānavacanametaṃ bhagavāti. Tathā hi lokanātho aparimitanirupamappabhāvasīlādiguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānanti.
“世尊”这个词是最殊胜的,也就是说,它是表达最胜者的词语,因为与最胜的功德相伴,所以称为“最胜”。或者也可以说,“说”就是言语、含义,因此,用“世尊”这个词所说出的含义,那就是最胜的——这就是它的意思。“世尊”这个词是无上的,这里也是同样的道理。“应受尊敬者”,就是具备值得尊敬的品质,因为具有值得尊敬的功德。或者说,特别值得恭敬,所以叫“应受尊敬者”,意思是值得尊敬。有人说:“传授技艺等的老师是‘师’,但不一定是应受尊敬者,而这位世尊不是那样,所以先称‘师’,再称‘应受尊敬者’。”巴利
Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato ‘‘seṭṭha’’nti vuttaṃ. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho, tasmā yo ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vacanena vacanīyo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato. Garukaraṇaṃ vā sātisayaṃ arahatīti gāravayutto, gāravārahoti attho. ‘‘Sippādisikkhāpakā garū honti, na ca gāravayuttā, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hoti, tasmā ‘garū’ti vatvā ‘gāravayutto’ti vutta’’nti keci.
以功德殊胜为因,这个“世尊”就是世尊的名号。想要把这段简略说出的含义详细展开分析,先以提取义理的方式显示名号本身,于是说“名有四种”等。其中,“依状态而立的”,就是依某种状态而被认知,依各种不同的状态而施设、称呼。“依相而立的”,就是依各种不同的相而称呼。“依征兆而立的”,就是从征兆而来。“随意而生的”,就是随欲而出现、随欲而来、随意而成。现在为了显示依状态而立的等名号的具体形态,又说“其中,如犊、幼牛、牡牛”等。在这里,第一个词中的“等”字涵盖了“愚者、青年、老者”等;第二个涵盖了“剃发者、结发者”等;第三个涵盖了“多闻者、说法者、禅修者”等;第四个涵盖了“恶行燃烧、圣教”等。为了以遮遣的方式确立“依征兆而立的”这一含义,说了“非因大幻”等。而“以解脱为终的”,则是显示这个名号在圣者出生的那一刹那就已经生起了。如果是以解脱为终的,那为什么与其他漏尽者不共呢?回答说:“与获得一切知智同时。”因为诸佛证得阿拉汉果时,是与一切知智等一切佛陀功德一同成就的,所以说“以解脱为终的”。“现证施设”,就是为现证一切法而有的施设。或者说,“现证施设”就是现前成就的施设。因为它是依彼功德之相而有的,那些功德对导师来说是现前存在的,所以这个施设也就像那些功德一样,是已被现证的,而不是仅凭他人的称呼而已——这是其意旨。巴利
Guṇavisesahetukaṃ ‘‘bhagavā’’ti idaṃ bhagavato nāmanti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato vibhajitukāmo nāmaṃyeva tāva atthuddhāravasena dassento ‘‘catubbidhañhi nāma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āvatthikanti avatthāya viditaṃ taṃ taṃ avatthaṃ upādāya paññattaṃ voharitaṃ. Tathā liṅgikaṃ tena tena liṅgena voharitaṃ. Nemittikanti nimittato āgataṃ. Adhiccasamuppannanti yadicchāya pavattaṃ, yadicchāya āgataṃ yadicchakaṃ. Idāni āvatthikādīni nāmāni sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘tattha vaccho dammo balibaddo’’tiādi. Tattha paṭhamena ādi-saddena bālo yuvā vuḍḍhoti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti, dutiyena muṇḍī jaṭīti evamādiṃ, tatiyena bahussuto dhammakathiko jhāyīti evamādiṃ, catutthena aghapadīpanaṃ pāvacananti evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Nemittikanti vuttamatthaṃ byatirekavasena patiṭṭhāpetuṃ ‘‘na mahāmāyāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vimokkhantikanti iminā pana idaṃ nāmaṃ ariyāya jātiyā jātakkhaṇeyeva jātanti dasseti. Yadi vimokkhantikaṃ, atha kasmā aññehi khīṇāsavehi asādhāraṇanti āha ‘‘saha sabbaññutaññāṇassa paṭilābhā’’ti. Buddhānañhi arahattaphalaṃ nipphajjamānaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇādīhi sabbehi buddhaguṇehi saddhiṃyeva nipphajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vimokkhantika’’nti. Sacchikā paññattīti sabbadhammānaṃ sacchikiriyāya nimittā paññatti. Atha vā sacchikā paññattīti paccakkhasiddhā paññatti. Yaṃguṇanimittā hi sā, te satthu paccakkhabhūtā, taṃguṇā viya sāpi sacchikatā eva nāma hoti, na paresaṃ vohāramattenāti adhippāyo.
说“他们称颂”时,因为对大长老怀有尊重,所以用复数来说;或者是针对结集者们所作的随顺称说。“有分”是指他有自在等种种分,所以叫“有分”。“受用”是指他以戒亲近、奉侍道果等圣法宝,以及少声等功德所庄严的阿兰若、林野、偏僻住处,所以叫“受用”,意思是具有受用的习性。“有份”是指他是衣服、饮食等四种资具的份,也是义、法、解脱之味以及增上戒等的份,这就是“有份”的意思。“分别了法宝”是指已分别、广分别法宝。“令破裂”是指令贪等恶法破裂,所以叫“世尊”,这就是其含义。世间也称世尊为“尊重者”,所以说“重”。因为尊重,所以称为世尊。“iti”这个词表示原因。凡是像“有分”等没有“iti”这个词的地方,应当各自相应地配合。“有福”是指具有福德。“以多种方法”是指以身修习等种种修习次第。“善修自性”是指正确修习其自性。这里的“自性”是与格,所以说“善修自性”,意思是善修其自性。而《大疏结》中说:“善修自性,善修其身。”“到达诸有的尽头涅槃”是指抵达涅槃,涅槃是诸有的终边。巴利
Vadantīti mahātherassa garubhāvato bahuvacanenāha, saṅgītikārehi vā katamanuvādaṃ sandhāya. Issariyādibhedo bhago assa atthīti bhagī. Maggaphalādiariyadhammaratanaṃ araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddādiguṇayuttāni bhaji sevi sīlenāti bhajī, bhajanasīloti attho. Bhāgīti cīvarapiṇḍapātādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānañceva atthadhammavimuttirasassa ca adhisīlādīnañca bhāgīti attho. Vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti vibhattavā. Akāsi bhagganti rāgādipāpadhammaṃ bhaggaṃ akāsīti bhagavāti attho. Garupi loke bhagavāti vuccatīti āha ‘‘garū’’ti. Yasmā garu, tasmāpi bhagavāti vuttaṃ hoti. Hetuattho hi iti-saddo. So ca yattha iti-saddo natthi bhagītiādīsu, tattha paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Bhāgyamassa atthīti bhāgyavā. Bahūhi ñāyehīti kāyabhāvanādikehi anekehi bhāvanākkamehi. Subhāvitattanoti sammadeva bhāvitasabhāvassa. Paccatte cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, tena subhāvitattāti vuttaṃ hoti, subhāvitasabhāvoti attho. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘subhāvitattano subhāvitakāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhavānaṃ antaṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti bhavantago.
按照《义释》里讲的方式,这里《义释》的方式是——巴利
Niddesevuttanayenāti etthāyaṃ niddesanayo –
“世尊”这个词是表达敬重的称呼。此外,因为已经破除贪,所以是世尊;因为已经破除嗔,所以是世尊;因为已经破除痴,所以是世尊;因为已经破除慢,所以是世尊;因为已经破除邪见,所以是世尊;因为已经破除渴爱,所以是世尊;因为已经破除烦恼,所以是世尊;因为已经分析、分别、广泛开演法宝,所以是世尊;因为终结了一切存在,所以是世尊;因为已修身、已修戒、已修心、已修慧,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊亲近阿兰若、森林、偏僻的住处——那些声音少、喧闹少、远离人群、适合独处、适宜宴坐的地方,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是衣服、食物、住处、生病时所需药物等资具的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是义味、法味、解脱味、增上戒、增上心、增上慧的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是四禅、四无量、四无色定的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是八解脱、八胜处、九次第定住的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是十种想修习、十种遍处定、入出息念定、不净定的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道的受用者,所以是世尊。又或者,世尊是十种如来力、四无畏、四无碍解、六神通、六种佛法的受用者,所以是世尊。“世尊”这个词,不是……(中略)……现证的施设,也就是这个“世尊”。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti gāravādhivacanametaṃ. Apica bhaggarāgoti bhagavā, bhaggadosoti bhagavā, bhaggamohoti bhagavā, bhaggamānoti bhagavā, bhaggadiṭṭhīti bhagavā, bhaggataṇhoti bhagavā, bhaggakilesoti bhagavā, bhaji vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratananti bhagavā, bhavānaṃ antakaroti bhagavā, bhāvitakāyo bhāvitasīlo bhāvitacitto bhāvitapaññoti bhagavā, bhaji vā bhagavā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni appasaddāni appanigghosāni vijanavātāni manussarāhasseyyakāni paṭisallānasāruppānīti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārānanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā attharasassa dhammarasassa vimuttirasassa adhisīlassa adhicittassa adhipaññāyāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ catunnaṃ appamaññānaṃ catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ abhibhāyatanānaṃ navannaṃ anupubbavihārasamāpattīnanti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ dasannaṃ kasiṇasamāpattīnaṃ ānāpānassatisamādhissa asubhasamāpattiyāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ catunnaṃ sammappadhānānaṃ catunnaṃ iddhipādānaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ pañcannaṃ balānaṃ sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassāti bhagavā. Bhāgī vā bhagavā dasannaṃ tathāgatabalānaṃ catunnaṃ vesārajjānaṃ catunnaṃ paṭisambhidānaṃ channaṃ abhiññānaṃ channaṃ buddhadhammānanti bhagavā. Bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ…pe… sacchikā paññatti yadidaṃ bhagavā’’ti (mahāni. 84).
在这里,虽然“尊敬的称呼”等词并没有按照偈颂中出现的词序逐一说明,但仍应依照各自适当的方式,把它们全都理解为具有解释的性质。其中,“尊敬的称呼”是指表达对尊长恭敬之意的说法。“亲近”是指按类别来宣说。因此说“分别、细分法宝”。道、果等圣法本身就是法宝。再者,“亲近”在这里是“亲近、侍奉”的意思。“有份者”是指有资格被称为拥有者。再者,这里的“有份者”是“有亲近的习惯”的意思。“义味”是指与义理相关的滋味。因为安住在解脱门的开头而说法时,以及听法时,针对那个义理而生起的喜悦和欢欣,就是义味。针对法而生起的,就是法味。这就是所说的“得到义知,得到法知”。“解脱味”是指以解脱为本性,或者与解脱相关的滋味。“想修习”是指无常想等十种想的修习。“六种佛法”是指六种不共智。各处“世尊”一词的成立,应当只依照语源学的方式来理解。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘gāravādhivacana’’ntiādīni yadipi gāthāyaṃ āgatapadānukkamena na niddiṭṭhāni, yathārahaṃ pana tesaṃ sabbesampi niddesabhāvena veditabbāni. Tattha gāravādhivacananti garūnaṃ garubhāvavācakaṃ vacanaṃ. Bhajīti bhāgaso kathesi. Tenāha ‘‘vibhaji pavibhaji dhammaratana’’nti. Maggaphalādi ariyadhammoyeva dhammaratanaṃ. Puna bhajīti imassa sevīti attho. Bhāgīti bhāgābhidheyyavā. Puna bhāgīti ettha bhajanasīloti attho. Attharasassāti atthasannissayassa rasassa. Vimuttāyatanasīse hi ṭhatvā dhammaṃ kathentassa suṇantassa ca tadatthaṃ ārabbha uppajjanakapītisomanassaṃ attharaso. Dhammaṃ ārabbha dhammaraso. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammaveda’’nti (a. ni. 6.10). Vimuttirasassāti vimuttibhūtassa vimuttisannissayassa vā rasassa. Saññābhāvanānanti aniccasaññādīnaṃ dasannaṃ saññābhāvanānaṃ . Channaṃ buddhadhammānanti cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha tattha bhagavātisaddasiddhi niruttinayeneva veditabbā.
虽然用“有福者”等词所表达的意思,已经包含在《大义释》的“bhagī bhajī”等偈颂的解说里,但配合词的形成、意义的辨别、意义的连接等来注释的方式,和那种方式不同,所以说“这是另一种方式”。所谓“vaṇṇavipariyāyo”等,这里的“iti”是“等”的意思,因此包含了音变、音失、以及依词根义来连接这三种特征。所谓“依词的方式”,就是依词语特征的方式。因为“pisodara”等词属于不规则类,所以说“取pisodara等插入的特征”。插入本身就是特征,因为令其归入此类就是插入。所谓“到彼岸”,就是达到最高、到达波罗蜜的状态。所谓“bhāgya”,就是善。其中,道善能产生出世间乐,其余的善能产生世间乐;或者,其余的善也可以成为还灭的亲依止,间接地产生出世间乐。巴利
Yadipi ‘‘bhāgyavā’’tiādīhi padehi vuccamāno attho ‘‘bhagī bhajī’’ti (mahāni. 84) niddesagāthāya saṅgahito eva, tathāpi padasiddhiatthavibhāgaatthayojanādisahito saṃvaṇṇanānayo tato aññākāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ pana aparo nayo’’ti. Vaṇṇavipariyāyoti etanti ettha itisaddo ādiattho, tena vaṇṇavikāro vaṇṇalopo dhātuatthena niyojanañcāti imaṃ tividhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Saddanayenāti saddalakkhaṇanayena. Pisodarādīnaṃ saddānaṃ ākatigaṇabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘pisodarādipakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā’’ti. Pakkhipanameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Tappariyāpannatākaraṇañhi pakkhipanaṃ. Pārappattanti paramukkaṃsagataṃ pāramībhāvappattaṃ. Bhāgyanti kusalaṃ. Tattha maggakusalaṃ lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ, itaraṃ lokiyasukhanibbattakaṃ, itarampi vā vivaṭṭupanissayaṃ pariyāyato lokuttarasukhanibbattakaṃ siyā.
现在,世尊为了分析并显示“世尊”这个词的含义,说了“因为……”等话。其中,贪等是以单个的方式举出的,同样,颠倒作意是以与颠倒共通的性質举出的,无惭等则是以成对的方式举出的。其中,以发怒为特相的怒,它从九种怨恨事中产生。由于“他骂了我、打了我”等,一再发怒而使心被缠覆的,是怨恨。这两者其实都只是嗔恚,但因为生起的状态不同而分开说。一次生起的怒就只是怒,之后持续的是怨恨。曾这样说:“前时是怒,后时是怨恨。”对于在家者或出家者,破坏别人为他所做善行的,是抹恩。因为在家者有时被某个怜悯他的人从贫穷中提拔到高位,后来却说“你为我做过什么”,从而破坏那人的善行。出家者也是这样,从做沙弥时起,被阿阇梨或和尚用四种资具、教授、教诫等摄受,被教导说法、理趣、论藏善巧等,后来得到国王、大臣等的恭敬尊重,却对阿阇梨和和尚不恭敬,行为傲慢,被人说“这个人是我们从小这样摄受养育的,现在却变得这么无情”,他却说“你们为我做过什么”,从而破坏他们的善行。对他而言,这种破坏先前所做、以功德为特相的善行,就像用擦水的布擦去附着在身上的水一样,这就是抹恩。因此,它以抹杀他人的功德为义,被称为“抹恩”。所谓“覆藏”,就是覆藏;意思是把别人的功德展示出来,然后用自己的功德与之等同。它是在面对多闻的人时,压过对方说“像这样多闻的人归宿也不确定,你和我有什么差别”;面对久住、长期出家的人时,压过对方说“你也是在这教法中出家的,我也是出家的,你只是停留在戒律上,我也一样”等等,以这种方式生起的覆藏。因为以覆藏为特相的,就是覆藏。巴利
Idāni bhagavāti imassa atthaṃ vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi. Tattha lobhādayo ekakavasena gahitā, tathā viparītamanasikāro vipallāsabhāvasāmaññena, ahirikādayo dukavasena. Tattha kujjhanalakkhaṇo kodho, so navavidhaāghātavatthusambhavo. ‘‘Akkocchi maṃ avadhi ma’’ntiādinā (dha. pa. 3-4) punappunaṃ kujjhanavasena cittapariyonandhano upanāho. Ubhayampi paṭighoyeva, so pavattinānattato bhinditvā vutto. Sakiṃ uppanno kodho kodhoyeva, taduttari upanāho. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘pubbakāle kodho, aparakāle upanāho’’ti (vibha. 891). Agāriyassa (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.71) anagāriyassa vā sukatakaraṇavināsano makkho. Agāriyopi hi kenaci anukampakena daliddo samāno ucce ṭhāne ṭhapito aparena samayena ‘‘kiṃ tayā mayhaṃ kata’’nti tassa sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti. Anagāriyopi sāmaṇerakālato pabhuti ācariyena vā upajjhāyena vā catūhi paccayehi uddesaparipucchādīhi ca anuggahetvā dhammakathānayappakaraṇakosallādīni sikkhāpito aparena samayena rājarājamahāmattādīhi sakkato garukato ācariyupajjhāyesu acittīkato caramāno ‘‘ayaṃ amhehi daharakāle evaṃ anuggahito saṃvaḍḍhito ca, atha ca panidāni nissineho jāto’’ti vuccamāno ‘‘kiṃ mayhaṃ tumhehi kata’’nti tesaṃ sukatakaraṇaṃ vināseti, tasseso pubbakāritālakkhaṇassa guṇassa vināsano udakapuñchaniyā viya sarīrānugataṃ udakaṃ nipuñchanto makkho. Tathā hi so paresaṃ guṇānaṃ makkhanaṭṭhena ‘‘makkho’’ti vuccati. Paḷāsatīti paḷāso, parassa guṇe dassetvā attano guṇehi same karotīti attho. So pana bahussutepi puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘īdisassa ca bahussutassa aniyatā gati, tava vā mama vā ko viseso’’ti, rattaññū cirapabbajite puggale ajjhottharitvā ‘‘tvampi imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajito, ahampi pabbajito, tvampi sīlamatte ṭhito, ahampī’’tiādinā nayena uppajjamāno yugaggāho. Yugaggāhalakkhaṇo hi paḷāso.
对他人的恭敬等感到不满、嫉妒,这是嫉妒。隐藏自己的成就,无法忍受与他人共享,这是悭吝。欺骗性的行为就是谄,它的特相是掩盖自己的过失。正因为如此,它因为掩盖自身确实存在的过失,就像障眼幻术一样,所以被称为“谄”。以显示自身根本不存在的功德为特相,以欺诈的方式生起的,是诡诈。因为显示不实的功德,就被称为“欺诈”。欺诈的人就像阿耶那鱼一样。所谓阿耶那鱼,是一种蛇头鱼尾的鱼。据说,它向鱼展示尾巴,向蛇展示头部,来表示“我和你们是一样的”。同样,欺诈的人无论接近哪位经师或论师,都会这样说:“我是您的弟子,您是我的依靠,我不离开您。”这样,他们就会认为“此人对我们有恭敬、有顺从”。对他而言,如此以欺诈的方式生起的,就是诡诈。巴利
Paresaṃ sakkārādīni khīyamānā usūyamānā issā. Attano sampattiyā nigūhanaṃ parehi sādhāraṇabhāvaṃ asahamānaṃ macchariyaṃ. Vañcanikacariyabhūtā māyā, sā sakadosapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā. Tathā hi sā attano vijjamānadosapaṭicchādanato cakkhumohanamāyā viyāti ‘‘māyā’’ti vuccati. Attano avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ. Asantaguṇadīpanañhi ‘‘kerāṭiya’’nti vuccati. Kerāṭiko hi puggalo āyanamaccho viya hoti. Āyanamaccho nāma sappamukhamacchavālā ekā macchajāti. So kira macchānaṃ naṅguṭṭhaṃ dasseti, sappānaṃ sīsaṃ ‘‘tumhākaṃ sadiso aha’’nti jānāpetuṃ, evameva kerāṭiko puggalo yaṃ yaṃ suttantikaṃ vā ābhidhammikaṃ vā upasaṅkamati, taṃ taṃ evaṃ vadati ‘‘ahaṃ tumhākaṃ antevāsī, tumhe mayhaṃ anukampakā, nāhaṃ tumhe muñcāmī’’ti. Evamete ‘‘sagāravo ayaṃ amhesu sappatisso’’ti maññissanti, tassevaṃ kerāṭikabhāvena uppajjamānaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ.
完全缺乏柔软,就像被风吹满的皮囊一样僵硬,又像不肯弯曲的棍子一样,让头高高昂起、身体也不肯随顺——这就是“傲”。在此基础上更进一步,就是“好胜”。好胜有两种情况:依于不善,和依于善。
其中,在家人看到别人做了装饰等事,就想要做两倍、三倍地超过对方,这样生起的是不善;出家人看到别人学了多少或讲了多少,以慢心想要做两倍、三倍地超过对方,这样生起的也是不善。因为具有这种好胜心的人,就会做两倍、三倍的事。在家人中,一个人准备好了一处房舍,另一个人就准备两处,再一个准备四处,再一个准备八处,再一个准备十六处。出家人中,一个人掌握了一部尼柯耶,心想“我不能比他低”,另一个人就掌握两部,再一个三部,再一个四部,再一个五部。以好胜心去多学,是不应该的。这属于不善的一方,是通往地狱的路。
不过,在家人看到别人布施一份筹食,自己就想布施两份或三份,这样生起的是善;出家人看到别人掌握了一部尼柯耶,不依靠慢心,仅仅因为看到这个就克服了自己的懈怠,想要掌握两部尼柯耶,这样生起的也是善。因为在善的一方,有人布施一份筹食时,布施两份是应该的;有人布施两份时,布施四份是应该的。比丘看到别人掌握了一部尼柯耶,站在还灭的一方想:“我掌握两部尼柯耶,读诵修习,会让我安稳舒适。”这样进一步多学是应该的。但在这里,属于不善一方的“在此基础上更进一步”,就称为“好胜”。巴利
Sabbaso maddavābhāvena vātabharitabhastasadisassa thaddhabhāvassa anonamitadaṇḍasadisatāya paggahitasiraanivātavuttikāyassa ca kārako thambho. Taduttarikaraṇo sārambho. So duvidhena labbhati akusalavasena ceva kusalavasena ca. Tattha agāriyassa parena kataṃ alaṅkārādiṃ disvā taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca yattakaṃ yattakaṃ paro pariyāpuṇāti vā katheti vā, mānavasena taddiguṇataddiguṇakaraṇena uppajjamāno akusalo. Tena hi samannāgato puggalo taddiguṇaṃ taddiguṇaṃ karoti. Agāriyo samāno ekenekasmiṃ gharavatthusmiṃ sajjite aparo dve vatthūni sajjeti, aparo cattāro, aparo aṭṭha, aparo soḷasa. Anagāriyo samāno ekenekasmiṃ nikāye gahite ‘‘nāhaṃ etassa heṭṭhā bhavissāmī’’ti aparo dve gaṇhāti, aparo tayo, aparo cattāro, aparo pañca. Sārambhavasena hi gaṇhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Akusalapakkho hesa nirayagāmimaggo. Agāriyassa pana paraṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dentaṃ disvā attano dve vā tīṇi vā dātukāmatāya uppajjamāno, anagāriyassa ca parena ekanikāye gahite mānaṃ anissāya kevalaṃ taṃ disvā attano ālasiyaṃ abhibhuyya dve nikāye gahetukāmatāya uppajjamāno kusalo. Kusalapakkhavasena hi ekasmiṃ ekaṃ salākabhattaṃ dente dve, dve dente cattāri dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhikkhunāpi parena ekasmiṃ nikāye gahite ‘‘dve nikāye gahetvā sajjhāyantassa me phāsu hotī’’ti vivaṭṭapakkhe ṭhatvā taduttari gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati, idha pana akusalapakkhiyo taduttarikaraṇo ‘‘sārambho’’ti vutto.
依于出生等,以“我优越”等心态抬高自己、推崇自己而生起的,就是“慢”。以极度抬高自己的方式生起的,是“过慢”。先前把自己和某人看成同等,后来却认为自己比对方更高,这样生起的,应当知道就是“过慢”。依于出生等而陶醉的心态,是“骄”,从意义上说,它其实也就是慢。而这种骄又有很多种:出生骄、种姓骄、健康骄、青春骄、生命骄、利得骄、恭敬骄、尊重骄、推崇骄、随从骄、财富骄、容貌骄、多闻骄、辩才骄、耆旧骄、常乞食骄、不轻慢骄、威仪骄、神通骄、名声骄、戒骄、禅定骄、技艺骄、身高骄、体围骄、体形骄、圆满骄。巴利
Jātiādīni nissāya seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā unnativasena paggaṇhanavasena pavatto māno. Abbhunnativasena pavatto atimāno. Pubbe kenaci attānaṃ sadisaṃ katvā pacchā tato adhikato dahato uppajjamānako atimānoti veditabbo. Jātiādiṃ paṭicca majjanākāro mado, sopi atthato māno eva. So pana jātimado gottamado ārogyamado yobbanamado jīvitamado lābhamado sakkāramado garukāramado purekkhāramado parivāramado bhogamado vaṇṇamado sutamado paṭibhānamado rattaññumado piṇḍapātikamado anavaññattimado iriyāpathamado iddhimado yasamado sīlamado jhānamado sippamado ārohamado pariṇāhamado saṇṭhānamado pāripūrimadoti anekavidho.
在这里,依出生而生起、以陶醉的方式现起的慢,叫出生骄。它在刹帝利等四种姓中都会生起。因为出身好的刹帝利会生起这样的慢心:“没有别人像我这样,其余的都是中途冒出来的刹帝利,而我却是世代相传的刹帝利。”婆罗门等也是这样。依种姓而生起、以陶醉的方式现起的慢,叫种姓骄。它也在刹帝利等四种姓中都会生起。刹帝利也会生起慢心:“我是憍陈如种姓”“我是太阳族种姓”。婆罗门也会生起慢心:“我是迦叶种姓”“我是跋罗堕阇种姓”。吠舍和首陀罗也各自依自己的家系种姓而生起慢心。在健康骄等当中,以“我健康,其余的人多病,我连一点痒病都没有”这种陶醉的方式而生起的慢,叫健康骄。以“我年轻,其余众生的身体就像立在悬崖边的树,而我正处在青春初期”这种陶醉的方式而生起的慢,叫青春骄。以“我长寿,我活得久,我还会活得久,我活得安乐,我正安乐地活着,我将安乐地活着”这种陶醉的方式而生起的慢,叫生命骄。以“我得到很多利养,其余众生利养很少,而我的利养多得没有限度”这种陶醉的方式而生起的慢,叫利得骄。巴利
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 843-844) jātiṃ nissāya uppanno majjanākārappavatto māno jātimado, so khattiyādīnaṃ catunnampi vaṇṇānaṃ uppajjati. Jātisampanno hi khattiyo ‘‘mādiso añño natthi, avasesā antarā uṭṭhāya khattiyā jātā, ahaṃ pana vaṃsāgatakhattiyo’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇādīsupi eseva nayo. Gottaṃ nissāya uppanno majjanākārappavatto māno gottamado, sopi khattiyādīnaṃ catunnampi vaṇṇānaṃ uppajjati. Khattiyopi hi ‘‘ahaṃ koṇḍaññagotto, ahaṃ ādiccagotto’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Brāhmaṇopi ‘‘ahaṃ kassapagotto, ahaṃ bhāradvājagotto’’ti mānaṃ karoti. Vessopi suddopi attano attano kulagottaṃ nissāya mānaṃ karoti. Ārogyamadādīsupi ‘‘ahaṃ arogo, sesā rogabahulā, kaṇḍuvanamattampi mayhaṃ byādhi nāma natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno ārogyamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ taruṇo, avasesasattānaṃ attabhāvo papāte ṭhitarukkhasadiso, ahaṃ pana paṭhamavaye ṭhito’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno yobbanamado. ‘‘Ahaṃ ciraṃ jīviṃ, ciraṃ jīvāmi, ciraṃ jīvissāmi, sukhaṃ jīviṃ, sukhaṃ jīvāmi, sukhaṃ jīvissāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno jīvitamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ lābhī, avasesā sattā appalābhā, mayhaṃ pana lābhassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno lābhamado nāma.
心想“其他众生只能得到这样那样的东西,而我得到的是善作、精良的衣服等资具”,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做恭敬慢。心想“人们踩着其他比丘的脚背走过去,连‘这是沙门’都不礼敬一下,但一见到我就顶礼,把我当作石伞盖一样沉重、当作火堆一样难以靠近”,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做尊重慢。心想“生起的问题都由我亲口解决,出去乞食和回来时,人们都以我为先、围绕着我走”,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做推崇慢。对在家者来说,以庞大的随从自居,心想“上百人乃至上千人围绕着我”;对出家者来说,心想“上百沙门乃至上千沙门围绕着我,其他人随从很少,而我随从众多又清净”,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做随从慢。心想“其他众生连自己受用的东西都得不到,而我储藏的财富多得无法计量”,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做财富慢。心想“其他众生容貌丑陋、形色低劣,而我容貌俊美、令人欢喜”,又心想“其他众生没有德行、名声不显,而我的名声在天界和人间都广为人知——‘这位长老博学多闻,这位长老持戒清净,这位长老具足头陀功德’”,像这样,缘于身体容貌和功德名声,以这种陶醉而生起的慢,叫做容貌慢。巴利
‘‘Avasesā sattā yaṃ vā taṃ vā labhanti, ahaṃ pana sukataṃ paṇītaṃ cīvarādipaccayaṃ labhāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sakkāramado nāma. ‘‘Avasesabhikkhūnaṃ pādapiṭṭhiyaṃ akkamitvā gacchantā manussā ‘ayaṃ samaṇo’tipi na vandanti, maṃ pana disvā vandanti, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaṃ katvā aggikkhandhaṃ viya ca durāsadaṃ katvā maññantī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno garukāramado nāma. ‘‘Uppanno pañho mayhameva mukhena chijjati, bhikkhācāraṃ gacchantāpi āgacchantāpi mameva purato katvā parivāretvā gacchantī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno purekkhāramado nāma. Agāriyassa tāva mahāparivārassa ‘‘purisasatampi purisasahassampi maṃ parivāretī’’ti, anagāriyassa ‘‘samaṇasatampi samaṇasahassampi maṃ parivāreti, sesā appaparivārā, ahaṃ mahāparivāro ceva suciparivāro cā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno parivāramado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā attano paribhogamattakampi na labhanti, mayhaṃ pana nidhānagatasseva dhanassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno bhogamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā dubbaṇṇā durūpā, ahaṃ abhirūpo pāsādiko’’tipi ‘‘avasesasattā nigguṇā patthaṭaakittino, mayhaṃ pana kittisaddo devamanussesu pākaṭo ‘itipi thero bahussuto, itipi sīlavā, itipi dhutaguṇayutto’’’ti, evaṃ sarīravaṇṇaṃ guṇavaṇṇañca paṭicca majjanavasena uppanno māno vaṇṇamado nāma.
心想“其他众生少闻,而我多闻”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫闻慢。心想“其他众生没有辩才,而我的辩才没有限度”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫辩才慢。心想“我是久历岁月的老参,我知道某某佛的传承、某某王统的传承、某某地方的传承、某某村落的传承,也知道昼夜的划分和星宿时辰的配合”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫耆旧慢。心想“其他比丘是半路出家才成了常乞食者,而我从出生起就是常乞食者”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫常乞食慢。心想“其他众生被人轻蔑、被人看不起,而我却不被人轻视”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫不轻慢慢。心想“其他众生的威仪不令人欢喜,而我的威仪令人欢喜”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫威仪慢。心想“其他众生就像断了翅膀的乌鸦,而我有大神通、大威力”,或者心想“我无论做什么事,件件都能成功”,因为陶醉而生起的慢,名叫神通慢。巴利
‘‘Avasesā sattā appassutā, ahaṃ pana bahussuto’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sutamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā appaṭibhānā, mayhaṃ pana paṭibhānassa pamāṇaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno paṭibhānamado nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ rattaññū asukaṃ buddhavaṃsaṃ rājavaṃsaṃ janapadavaṃsaṃ gāmavaṃsaṃ rattindivaparicchedaṃ nakkhattamuhuttayogaṃ jānāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno rattaññumado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā bhikkhū antarā piṇḍapātikā jātā, ahaṃ pana jātipiṇḍapātiko’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno piṇḍapātikamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā uññātā avaññātā, ahaṃ pana anavaññāto’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno anavaññattimado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ iriyāpatho apāsādiko, mayhaṃ pana pāsādiko’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno iriyāpathamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā chinnapakkhakākasadisā, ahaṃ pana mahiddhiko mahānubhāvo’’ti vā ‘‘ahaṃ yaṃ yaṃ kammaṃ karomi, taṃ taṃ ijjhatī’’ti vā majjanavasena uppanno māno iddhimado nāma.
名声慢无论是在家人还是出家人身上,都应该说明。因为有些在家人是十八种行会中某一行的首领,他心里想“其余的人由我来安排,由我来调度”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,就叫名声慢。有些出家人也在某个地方当首领,他心里想“其余的比丘都听从我的教导,我是首领”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,也叫名声慢。心里想“其余的众生破戒,而我持戒”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫戒慢。心里想“其余的众生哪怕在像鸡喝水那么短的时间里都得不到心一境性,而我却得到了近行定和安止定”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫禅那慢。心里想“其余的众生没有技艺,而我有技艺”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫技艺慢。心里想“其余的众生矮,而我高”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫身高慢。心里想“其余的众生不是矮就是高,而我像榕树一样圆满匀称”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫体态慢。心里想“其余众生的身形丑陋难看,而我的身形可爱悦目”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫相貌慢。心里想“其余众生的身体有很多缺陷,而我的身体连毛发尖那么大的过失都没有”,这种以抬高自己而生起的慢,叫圆满慢。这样一来,所有依靠出身等、以抬高自己的方式生起的慢,在这里就称为“慢”。在五种欲乐上放纵心,就是放逸;也就是说,在五种欲乐上不约束念而放纵心,这就是念的缺失。渴爱和无明则是显而易见的。巴利
Yasamado pana agārikenapi anagārikenapi dīpetabbo. Agārikopi hi ekacco aṭṭhārasasu seṇīsu ekissā jeṭṭhako hoti, tassa ‘‘avasese purise ahaṃ paṭṭhapemi, ahaṃ vicāremī’’ti, anagārikopi ekacco katthaci jeṭṭhako hoti, tassa ‘‘avasesā bhikkhū mayhaṃ ovāde vattanti, ahaṃ jeṭṭhako’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno yasamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā dussīlā, ahaṃ pana sīlavā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sīlamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ kukkuṭassa udakapānamattepi kāle cittekaggatā natthi, ahaṃ pana upacārappanānaṃ lābhī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno jhānamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā nissippā, ahaṃ sippavā’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno sippamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā rassā, ahaṃ dīgho’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno ārohamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesā sattā rassā vā honti dīghā vā, ahaṃ nigrodhaparimaṇḍalo’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno pariṇāhamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ virūpaṃ bībhacchaṃ, mayhaṃ pana manāpaṃ pāsādika’’nti majjanavasena uppanno māno saṇṭhānamado nāma. ‘‘Avasesānaṃ sattānaṃ sarīre bahū dosā, mayhaṃ pana sarīre kesaggamattampi vajjaṃ natthī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno pāripūrimado nāma. Evamayaṃ sabbopi jātiādiṃ nissāya majjanākāravasappavatto māno idha ‘‘mado’’ti vutto. Kāmaguṇesu cittassa vossaggo pamādo, pañcasu kāmaguṇesu satiyā aniggaṇhitvā cittassa vossajjanaṃ, sativirahoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṇhāvijjā pākaṭāyeva.
贪等又被以“三种不善根”的方式归为三类。在恶行等项目中,“三种”这个词要分别搭配。其中,身恶行等是三种恶行,渴爱杂染等是三种杂染,贪垢等因为是令心染污的染污状态,所以是三种垢。贪等确实使心染污,让心执取垢秽,因此称为“垢”。按照“贪是不平,嗔是不平,痴是不平”以及“身不平、语不平、意不平”的说法,贪等和身恶行等就是三种不平。然而,因为众生在贪等和身恶行等当中颠踬,颠踬之后又从教法和善趣中堕落,所以从它们是颠踬和堕落的原因这一点来说,称为“不平”。按照“欲想、嗔恚想、害想”的说法,与欲等相应的想是三种想。同样,按照“欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻”的说法,是三种寻。渴爱戏论、见戏论、慢戏论,这些是三种戏论。因为渴爱等让众生在轮回中不断延展,所以称为“戏论”。巴利
Lobhādayo ca puna tividhākusalamūlanti tikavasena gahitā. Duccaritādīsupi tividha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha kāyaduccaritādīni tividhaduccaritāni. Taṇhāsaṃkilesādayo tividhasaṃkilesā. Rāgamalādayo malīnabhāvakarattā tividhamalāni. Rāgādayo hi cittaṃ malīnaṃ karonti, malaṃ gāhāpenti, tasmā ‘‘malānī’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Rāgo visamaṃ, doso visamaṃ, moho visama’’nti (vibha. 924) evaṃ vuttā rāgādayo ‘‘kāyavisamaṃ vacīvisamaṃ manovisama’’nti (vibha. 924) evamāgatā kāyaduccaritādayo ca tividhavisamāni. Tāni pana yasmā rāgādīsu ceva kāyaduccaritādīsu ca sattā pakkhalanti, pakkhalitā ca sāsanatopi sugatitopi patanti, tasmā pakkhalanapātahetubhāvato ‘‘visamānī’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Kāmasaññā byāpādasaññā vihiṃsāsaññā’’ti (vibha. 911) evamāgatā kāmādipaṭisaṃyuttā saññā tividhasaññā. Tathā ‘‘kāmavitakko byāpādavitakko vihiṃsāvitakko’’ti evamāgatā tividhavitakkā. Taṇhāpapañco diṭṭhipapañco mānapapañcoti ime tividhapapañcā. Vaṭṭasmiṃ satte papañcentīti taṇhādayo ‘‘papañcā’’ti vuccanti.
在“四种颠倒”等说法里,“四种”这个词要分别搭配。其中,把无常等事物以颠倒的方式当成常等来寻求,所以叫“颠倒”。像“于无常而想为常,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于苦而想为乐,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于不净而想为净,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒;于无我而想为我,是想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒”这样所说的十二种颠倒,是依无常等四种事物而称为“四种颠倒”。在这里要了解:当心运作的功能微弱、而缺乏见的善或不善想自身功能强盛时,是想颠倒;当缺乏见的不善心自身功能强盛时,是心颠倒;当它和见相应时,是见颠倒。因此,想颠倒最弱,心颠倒比它强,见颠倒最强。想颠倒就像还不会分辨的幼童看见钱币,只取所缘呈现出来的样子;心颠倒就像村里人看见钱币,能把握其特征;见颠倒就像铁匠用大钳子夹铁,是以执取和把持的方式紧抓不放。其中,四种见颠倒,以及在无常、无我上生起“常”等想法的四种想颠倒和心颠倒,这八种颠倒由入流道断除。于不净而想为净的想颠倒和心颠倒,由一来道变薄,由不来道断除。于苦而想为乐的想颠倒和心颠倒,由阿罗汉道断除。应当这样了解。巴利
Catubbidhavipariyesātiādīsu catubbidha-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tattha aniccādīni vatthūni niccantiādinā nayena viparītato esantīti vipariyesā. ‘‘Anicce niccanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso , dukkhe sukhanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso, asubhe subhanti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso , anattani attāti saññāvipariyeso cittavipariyeso diṭṭhivipariyeso’’ti evamāgatā dvādasa vipallāsā catunnaṃ aniccādivatthūnaṃ vasena ‘‘catubbidhavipariyesā’’ti vuttā. Ettha pana cittakiccassa dubbalaṭṭhāne diṭṭhivirahitāya akusalasaññāya sakakiccassa balavakāle saññāvipallāso veditabbo, diṭṭhivirahitasseva akusalacittassa sakakiccassa balavakāle cittavipallāso, diṭṭhisampayuttacitte diṭṭhivipallāso. Tasmā sabbadubbalo saññāvipallāso, tato balavataro cittavipallāso, sabbabalavataro diṭṭhivipallāso. Ajātabuddhidārakassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya saññā ārammaṇassa upaṭṭhānākāramattagahaṇato. Gāmikapurisassa kahāpaṇadassanaṃ viya cittaṃ lakkhaṇappaṭivedhassapi sampādanato. Kammārassa mahāsaṇḍāsena ayogahaṇaṃ viya diṭṭhi abhinivesaparāmasanato. Tattha cattāro diṭṭhivipallāsā, aniccānattesu niccantiādivasappavattā cattāro saññācittavipallāsāti ime aṭṭha vipallāsā sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti. Asubhe subhanti saññācittavipallāsā sakadāgāmimaggena tanukā honti, anāgāmimaggena pahīyanti. Dukkhe sukhanti saññācittavipallāsā arahattamaggena pahīyantīti veditabbā.
“欲漏、有漏、见漏、无明漏”,出自《小义释·阇都干耳摩纳婆问义释》第69节。这里所说的欲爱等四种漏,从眼等根门流出来、不断生起,所以叫漏。虽然从眼等根门也有善法等生起,但只有欲漏等这几种,像伤口流出脓水那样,以流出不净的方式在流转,因此只有它们被称为“漏”。因为在这里,“漏”这个词就是专门用在流出的不净物上的。或者从法来说,它们流到种姓地为止;从处所说,它们流到有顶天为止,以执取所缘的方式在活动,所以叫漏——意思是它们把那些法和那个处所都包含在内而流转。因为前缀“ā”有“界限”的意思。界限又分两种:边际和遍摄。边际是把行为排除在外而说,比如“雨下到巴咤厘子城为止”;遍摄是覆盖整个行为而说,比如“世尊的声誉传布到有顶天”。这里取的是遍摄义的“ā”,所以它们把那些法和那个处所都包含在内,以执取所缘的方式流转,因此叫“漏”。另外,因为久住的意思,像酒等放久了叫“āsava”一样,这些也叫漏。世间确实把放久了的酒等叫做“āsava”。如果按久住义叫漏,那只有这些才配得上。正如经上说:“比丘们,无明的起点不可知,在此之前并没有无明”等等(《增支部》10.61)。至于其他那些慢等法,虽然也以所说的法和处所为所缘而生起,也有我、我所等执取,但只有这四种漏以遍满、迷醉的方式与“āsava”相似,其他法不是。所以在两种解释里,都应知道“漏”这个词只专门用在这些法上。或者,它们让漫长的轮回之苦流出来、涌出来,所以也叫漏。因为没有任何轮回之苦能在没有漏的情况下生起。巴利
‘‘Kāmāsavo bhavāsavo diṭṭhāsavo avijjāsavo’’ti (cūḷani. jatukaṇṇimāṇavapucchāniddesa 69) evamāgatā kāmataṇhādayo cattāro āsavanti cakkhuādito sandanti pavattantīti āsavā. Kiñcāpi cakkhuādito kusalādīnampi pavatti atthi, kāmāsavādayo eva pana vaṇato yūsaṃ viya paggharaṇakaasucibhāvena sandanti, tasmā te eva ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Tattha hi paggharaṇakaasucimhi niruḷho āsavasaddoti. Atha vā dhammato yāva gotrabhuṃ, okāsato yāva bhavaggaṃ savanti gacchanti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena pavattantīti āsavā, ete dhamme etañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā pavattantīti attho. Avadhiattho hi ā-kāro. Avadhi ca mariyādābhividhibhedato duvidho. Tattha mariyādaṃ kiriyaṃ bahikatvā pavattati yathā ‘‘āpāṭaliputtaṃ vuṭṭho devo’’ti, abhividhi pana kiriyaṃ byāpetvā pavattati yathā ‘‘ābhavaggaṃ bhagavato yaso pavattatī’’ti, abhividhiattho cāyaṃ ā-kāro idha gahito, tasmā te dhamme tañca okāsaṃ antokaritvā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena savantīti ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādayo āsavā viyātipi āsavā. Lokasmiñhi cirapārivāsikā madirādayo ‘‘āsavā’’ti vuccanti. Yadi ca cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā, eteyeva bhavitumarahanti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosī’’tiādi (a. ni. 10.61). Aññesu pana yathāvutte dhamme okāsañca ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānesu mānādīsu ca vijjamānesu attattaniyādiggāhavasena abhibyāpanaṃ madanakaraṇavasena āsavasadisatā ca etesaṃyeva, na aññesanti dvīsupi atthavikappesu etesuyeva āsavasaddo niruḷhoti daṭṭhabbo. Āyataṃ vā saṃsāradukkhaṃ savanti pasavantītipi āsavā. Na hi taṃ kiñci saṃsāradukkhaṃ atthi, yaṃ āsavehi vinā uppajjeyya.
贪欲身系、嗔恚身系、戒禁取身系、此实执取身系——这四种从贪欲开始的身系,如果存在于某人身上,就会以死亡与投生的方式把他绑在轮回里、缠在轮回里,所以叫“系”。欲暴流、有暴流、见暴流、无明暴流——这四种从欲贪开始的暴流,如果存在于某人身上,就会在轮回里把他冲走、让他沉没,所以叫“暴流”。同样的这四种法,又叫欲轭、有轭、见轭、无明轭,因为它们在轮回里把人套住,所以叫“轭”。圣者不通过它们而行,所以叫“非行处”;这非行处按欲等分为四种。比丘因为衣服而生起的渴爱,或者因为钵食、因为住处、因为这样那样的有与无有而生起的渴爱——这四种就是所说的渴爱生起。其中“因为这样那样的有与无有”里的“这样”是表示举例的虚词,意思是:就像因为衣服等一样,也因为种种有与无有。“有与无有”在这里指的是上等、更上等的油、蜜、糖浆等。欲取等四种就是取。巴利
‘‘Abhijjhā kāyagantho byāpādo kāyagantho sīlabbataparāmāso kāyagantho idaṃsaccābhiniveso kāyagantho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.175; mahāni. 29, 147) evamāgatā abhijjhādayo cattāro yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vaṭṭasmiṃ ganthenti ghaṭentīti ganthā. ‘‘Kāmogho bhavogho diṭṭhogho avijjogho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.172; mahāni. 14; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 21) evamāgatā cattāro kāmataṇhādayo yassa saṃvijjanti, taṃ vaṭṭasmiṃ ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Teyeva ‘‘kāmayogo bhavayogo diṭṭhiyogo avijjāyogo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.173; a. ni. 4.10) evamāgatā vaṭṭasmiṃ yojentīti yogā. Ariyā etāya na gacchantīti agati, sā chandādivasena catubbidhā. ‘‘Cīvarahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjati, piṇḍapāta, senāsana, itibhavābhavahetu vā bhikkhuno taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.9) evamāgatā cattāro taṇhuppādā. Tattha itibhavābhavahetūti ettha itīti nidassane nipāto, yathā cīvarādihetu, evaṃ bhavābhavahetupīti attho. Bhavābhavoti cettha paṇītapaṇītatarāni telamadhuphāṇitādīni adhippetāni. Kāmupādānādīni cattāri upādānāni.
在“五种心荒芜”等条目中,所谓“对佛有疑惑,对法有疑惑,对僧有疑惑,对学处有疑惑,对同梵行者心怀忿怒、不满、心受伤害、心如枯桩”——这样提到的五种心荒芜,因为心被它们弄得荒芜、变得僵硬,所以叫“心荒芜”。在“心系缚”等条目中,“五”这个数字要分别配到每一项上。“对诸欲未离贪,对身未离贪,对诸色未离贪,吃饱喝足直到撑胀,然后沉溺于躺卧之乐、触受之乐、睡眠之乐,并且发愿投生到某个天众中去而修梵行”——这样提到的五种,把心绑住,像攥在拳头里一样抓住心,所以叫“心系缚”。因为这些法以贪爱的活动方式生起,使善法没有生起的机会,像捆绑一样把心包围、抓住。从词义上说,心被这些扭曲地绑住、抑制,所以叫“心系缚”。欲贪等五种法障碍、遮蔽善法,所以叫“盖”。对色的欢喜等五种,是“欢喜”。巴利
Pañca cetokhilātiādīsu ‘‘buddhe kaṅkhati, dhamme, saṅghe, sikkhāya kaṅkhati, sabrahmacārīsu kupito hoti anattamano āhatacitto khilajāto’’ti (ma. ni. 1.185; dī. ni. 3.319) evamāgatāni pañca cetokhilāni, ceto khilayati thaddhabhāvaṃ āpajjati etehīti cetokhilāni. Vinibandhādīsupi pañca-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. ‘‘Kāme avītarāgo hoti, kāye avītarāgo, rūpe avītarāgo, yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.186; dī. ni. 3.320) āgatā pañca cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantīti cetovinibandhā. Ete hi taṇhāppavattibhāvato kusalappavattiyā avasarāppadānavasena cittaṃ bandhaṃ viya samorodhetvā gaṇhanti. Saddatthato pana ceto virūpaṃ nibandhīyati saṃyamīyati etehīti cetovinibandhā. Kāmacchandādīni pañca kusaladhamme nīvārenti āvarantīti nīvaraṇāni. Rūpābhinandanādayo pañcābhinandanā.
在“六诤根”等项目中,忿怒、抹恩、嫉妒、诳诈、恶欲、执取己见,这六种是诤论的根本。因为一个被忿怒控制的人,或者由于忿怒的力量……(中略)……或者执取己见的人,由于执取己见,就陷入争斗、纷争、诤论,所以忿怒等这些法被称为“六诤根”。色爱、声爱等六种是六爱身。欲贪、嗔恚、邪见、疑、有贪、慢、无明,是七随眠。它们以强有力、未被断除的状态潜伏着,所以叫随眠。邪见、邪思惟、邪语、邪业、邪命、邪精进、邪念、邪定,是八邪行。巴利
Chavivādamūlātiādīsu kodho makkho issā sāṭheyyaṃ pāpicchatā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsoti imāni cha vivādamūlāni. Yasmā kuddho vā kodhavasena…pe… sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī vā sandiṭṭhiparāmasitāya kalahaṃ viggahaṃ vivādaṃ āpajjati, tasmā kodhādayo ‘‘cha vivādamūlānī’’ti vuccanti. Rūpataṇhāsaddataṇhādayo cha taṇhākāyā. Kāmarāgapaṭighadiṭṭhivicikicchābhavarāgamānāvijjā sattānusayā. Thāmagataṭṭhena appahīnaṭṭhena ca anusentīti anusayā. Micchādiṭṭhimicchāsaṅkappamicchāvācāmicchākammantamicchāājīvamicchāvāyāmamicchāsatimicchāsamādhī aṭṭha micchattā.
依靠渴爱,就有寻求;依靠寻求,就有得到;依靠得到,就有决断;依靠决断,就有欲贪;依靠欲贪,就有执著认定;依靠执著认定,就有占有;依靠占有,就有悭吝;依靠悭吝,就有保护;由于保护,就生起拿棍、拿刀、争吵、纷争、争论、互相辱骂、挑拨离间、说妄语等种种恶不善法。经中这样说到,寻求等九法都是以渴爱为根本。其中,长部注解释说:依靠渴爱,就是依止渴爱。寻求,是对色等所缘的寻求;因为有渴爱,寻求才会生起。得到,是对色等所缘的得到;因为有寻求,得到才会生起。决断,这里指的是寻思;得到之后,就以寻思来判断可爱不可爱、美好不美好:这些会为我带来色所缘,这些会为我带来声等所缘;这些会属于我,这些会属于别人;这些我会享用,这些我会储存。所以说依靠得到,就有决断。欲贪,是指以这样的不善寻思去寻思对象时,生起的弱贪和强贪;这里的欲,是弱贪的别名。执著认定,是以我、我所而作的强烈认定。占有,是以渴爱和邪见而作占有。悭吝,是无法忍受和别人共同享有。因此,古师这样解释它的词义:因为生起这是我的稀有之物、不要成为别人的,所以称为悭吝。保护,是以关门户、守护箱箧等方式好好守护。令生起,所以叫因,这是对原因的称呼。由于保护,这是修辞上的中性词,意思是保护为因。在拿棍等当中,为了制止别人而拿棍,叫拿棍;拿单刃刀等刀器,叫拿刀。争吵,有身体争吵,也有言语争吵。前前的对立叫纷争,后后的对立叫争论。互相辱骂,是不恭敬的话,意思是你、你。巴利
‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, vinicchayaṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, chandarāgaṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, ajjhosānaṃ paṭicca pariggaho, pariggahaṃ paṭicca macchariyaṃ, macchariyaṃ paṭicca ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādatuvaṃtuvaṃpesuññamusāvādā aneke pāpakā akusalā dhammā sambhavantī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.103; 3.359) evamāgatā pariyesanādayo nava taṇhāmūlakā. Tattha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.103) taṇhaṃ paṭiccāti taṇhaṃ nissāya. Pariyesanāti rūpādiārammaṇapariyesanā. Sā hi taṇhāya sati hoti. Lābhoti rūpādiārammaṇapaṭilābho. So hi pariyesanāya sati hoti. Vinicchayoti idha vitakko adhippeto. Lābhaṃ labhitvā hi iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ sundarāsundarañca vitakkeneva vinicchinati ‘‘ettakaṃ me rūpārammaṇatthāya bhavissati, ettakaṃ saddādiārammaṇatthāya, ettakaṃ mayhaṃ bhavissati, ettakaṃ parassa, ettakaṃ paribhuñjissāmi, ettakaṃ nidahissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘lābhaṃ paṭicca vinicchayo’’ti. Chandarāgoti evaṃ akusalavitakkena vitakkite vatthusmiṃ dubbalarāgo ca balavarāgo ca uppajjati. Chandoti hi idha dubbalarāgassādhivacanaṃ. Ajjhosānanti ahaṃ mamanti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇaṃ. Macchariyanti parehi sādhāraṇabhāvassa asahanatā. Tenevassa porāṇā evaṃ vacanatthaṃ vadanti ‘‘idaṃ acchariyaṃ mayhameva hotu, mā aññassa acchariyaṃ hotūti pavattattā macchariyanti vuccatī’’ti. Ārakkhoti dvārapidahanamañjusagopanādivasena suṭṭhu rakkhaṇaṃ. Adhikarotīti adhikaraṇaṃ, kāraṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Ārakkhādhikaraṇanti bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ, ārakkhahetūti attho. Daṇḍādānādīsu paranisedhanatthaṃ daṇḍassa ādānaṃ daṇḍādānaṃ. Ekatodhārādino satthassa ādānaṃ satthādānaṃ. Kalahoti kāyakalahopi vācākalahopi. Purimo purimo virodho viggaho. Pacchimo pacchimo vivādo. Tuvaṃ tuvanti agāravavacanaṃ, tvaṃ tvanti attho.
杀生、不与取、欲邪行、妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语、贪欲、嗔恚、邪见,这十种是不善业道。四种常住论、四种一分常住论、四种有边无边论、四种诡辩论、两种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非有想非无想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论,这些是六十二种邪见。色爱等六种爱,每一种又按欲爱、有爱、无有爱分为三种,所以共有十八种。具体来说:缘于色的爱,或者对色的爱,就是色爱。它如果以欲贪的状态,贪着色而现起,就是欲爱;如果以和常见相应的贪的状态,这样贪着“色是常、是恒、是常住”而现起,就是有爱;如果以和断见相应的贪的状态,这样贪着“色断灭、坏灭,死后就不存在了”而现起,就是无有爱。这样就成了三种。色爱是这样,声爱等等也是这样。这些就是十八种爱行。它们在内色等上有十八种,在外色等上有十八种,合起来是三十六种。这样,过去的三十六种、未来的三十六种、现在的三十六种,总共是一百零八种爱行,也就是一百零八种爱行。“分别”这个词要和每一项各自搭配。这里的搭配是:“贪的分别、嗔的分别……乃至一百零八种爱行的分别”。一切恼害、热恼的烦恼有百千种,也就是一切让众生恼害、热恼的烦恼,有无数百千种。因为从所缘等的区分和现起方式的区分来看,烦恼有无量种类。巴利
Pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācāramusāvādapisuṇavācāpharusavācāsamphappalāpaabhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhī dasa akusalakammapathā. Cattāro sassatavādā cattāro ekaccasassatavādā cattāro antānantikā cattāro amarāvikkhepikā dve adhiccasamuppannikā soḷasa saññīvādā aṭṭha asaññīvādā aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā satta ucchedavādā pañca paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti etāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni. Rūpataṇhādichataṇhāyeva paccekaṃ kāmataṇhābhavataṇhāvibhavataṇhāvasena aṭṭhārasa honti. Tathā hi rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe vā taṇhāti rūpataṇhā, sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā, sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, evaṃ saddataṇhādayopīti etāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti, tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni, aṭṭhuttarasatataṇhāvicaritānīti attho. Pabheda-saddo paccekaṃ sambandhitabbo. Tatthāyaṃ yojanā ‘‘lobhappabhedo dosappabhedo yāva aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritappabhedo’’ti. Sabbadarathapariḷāhakilesasatasahassānīti sabbāni sattānaṃ darathapariḷāhakarāni kilesānaṃ anekāni satasahassāni. Ārammaṇādivibhāgato hi pavattiākāravibhāgato ca anantappabhedā kilesā.
在“简略来说”等句中:因为烦恼给众生的现在和未来都带来不利,以杀害和恼害的作用来说,烦恼本身就是魔,所以叫烦恼魔。以杀害的作用来说,五蕴本身就是魔,所以叫蕴魔。正如经中所说:“他不能如实了知‘色是杀害者,色是杀害者’”等等。因为行产生生、老等大灾祸,行本身就是魔,所以叫行魔。它成为杂染的标记,以杀害功德的作用来说,天子本身就是魔,所以叫天子魔。因为死令众生的生命和维持生命的条件都遭到破坏,是极大的祸患,死本身就是魔,所以叫死魔。其中,通过彻底断除的方式,使烦恼魔完全不再生起;通过断因和遍知的方式,破除蕴魔;通过令助伴缺失的方式,使行魔完全不再生起;通过摧伏威力和超越领域的方式,破除天子魔和死魔。已经破除、已经摧毁,就是这个意思。“诸患难”就是各种灾祸。巴利
Saṅkhepato vātiādīsu sampati āyatiñca sattānaṃ anatthāvahattā māraṇaṭṭhena vibādhanaṭṭhena kilesāva māroti kilesamāro. Vadhakaṭṭhena khandhāva māroti khandhamāro. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vadhakaṃ rūpaṃ, vadhakaṃ rūpanti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātī’’tiādi. Jātijarādimahābyasananibbattanena abhisaṅkhārova māro abhisaṅkhāramāro. Saṃkilesanimittaṃ hutvā guṇamāraṇaṭṭhena devaputtova māroti devaputtamāro. Sattānaṃ jīvitassa jīvitaparikkhārānañca jānikaraṇena mahābādharūpattā maccu eva māroti maccumāro. Tattha samucchedappahānavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena kilesamāraṃ, samudayappahānapariññāvasena khandhamāraṃ, sahāyavekallakaraṇavasena sabbaso appavattikaraṇena abhisaṅkhāramāraṃ, balavidhamanavisayātikkamanavasena devaputtamaccumārañca abhañji, bhagge akāsīti attho. Parissayānanti upaddavānaṃ.
“具有百福之相者”,意思是:具有由无数百种福业所生的大人相。在这里,注释师们不认可“仅仅以一百个福业就生起每一个相”这个说法,因为“如果这样的话,任何人都能成佛了”。他们认可的是:在无量世界中,所有众生各自修了一百次布施等福业,这些福业有多少,大士对其中每一个福业都以百倍去做,这才叫“百”。所以这里的“百”这个词是表示“众多”的意思,不是表示一个确定的数字,就像“百价”“百天与人”等说法中的用法一样。这样阐明了色身的成就,因为它是其余果报成就的根本和依处。“阐明了”这句话也适用于法身成就等。其中应当知道,法身成就的阐明,是以断德成就为先导,而有智德成就等。在“为世间与同梵行者所尊重”这一句中,应当这样理解:因为具足福德,所以为世间所尊重;因为断除了过失,所以为同梵行者所尊重。此后的语句也应当按这个次第类推理解。巴利
Satapuññajalakkhaṇadharassāti aneka sata puñña nibbattamahā purisalakkhaṇadharassa. Ettha hi ‘‘kevalaṃ satamattena puññakammena ekekalakkhaṇaṃ nibbatta’’nti imamatthaṃ na rocayiṃsu aṭṭhakathācariyā ‘‘evaṃ sante yo koci buddho bhaveyyā’’ti, anantāsu pana lokadhātūsu yattakā sattā, tehi sabbehi paccekaṃ satakkhattuṃ katāni dānādīni puññakammāni yattakāni, tato ekekaṃ puññakammaṃ mahāsattena sataguṇaṃ kataṃ satanti adhippetanti imamatthaṃ rocayiṃsu. Tasmā idha sata-saddo bahubhāvapariyāyo, na saṅkhyāvisesavacanoti daṭṭhabbo ‘‘satagghaṃ sataṃ devamanussā’’tiādīsu viya. Rūpakāyasampatti dīpitā hoti itarāsaṃ phalasampadānaṃ mūlabhāvato adhiṭṭhānabhāvato ca. Dīpitā hotīti idaṃ dhammakāyasampattītiādīsupi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha pahānasampadāpubbakattā ñāṇasampadādīnaṃ dhammakāyasampatti dīpitā hotīti veditabbaṃ. Lokiyasarikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti ettha bhāgyavantatāya lokiyānaṃ bahumatabhāvo, bhaggadosatāya sarikkhakānaṃ bahumatabhāvoti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ ito paresupi yathākkamaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
有福德的人,在家人、刹帝利等都会来亲近他;他已经断除了过失,为了帮别人断除过失而说法,所以出家人、苦行者和游方者等也会来亲近他。因此说“为在家人和出家人所亲近”。应当知道,对那些前来亲近的人,他有能力用财施和法施来利益他们,从而消除他们身心的痛苦:他们用清净信的眼看见他的色身,用智慧的眼看见他的法身之后,两种苦就止息了。因为具足福德,他给前来的人财施;因为断除了过失,他给前来的人法施,所以说“以财施和法施来利益”。同时,也说明了能让前来的人与世间和出世间的快乐相连接的能力:“过去我靠财施和法施证得了这世间最殊胜的身份,所以你们也应该这样去做。”通过这样劝导他们正确修行,就说明了能让前来亲近的人与世间和出世间的快乐相连接的能力。巴利
Puññavantaṃ gahaṭṭhā khattiyādayo abhigacchanti, pahīnadosaṃ dosavinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti pabbajitā tāpasaparibbājakādayo abhigacchantīti āha ‘‘gahaṭṭhapabbajitehi abhigamanīyatā’’ti. Abhigatānañca tesaṃ kāyacittadukkhāpanayane paṭibalabhāvo āmisadānadhammadānehi upakārasabbhāvato rūpakāyaṃ tassa pasādacakkhunā, dhammakāyaṃ paññācakkhunā disvā dukkhadvayassa paṭippassambhanatoti veditabbo. Bhāgyavantatāya upagatānaṃ āmisadānaṃ deti, bhaggadosatāya dhammadānaṃ detīti āha ‘‘āmisadānadhammadānehi upakāritā’’ti. Lokiyalokuttarasukhehi ca saṃyojanasamatthatā dīpitā hotīti ‘‘pubbe āmisadānadhammadānehi mayā ayaṃ lokaggabhāvo adhigato, tasmā tumhehipi evameva paṭipajjitabba’’nti evaṃ sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ niyojanena abhigatānaṃ lokiyalokuttarasukhehi saṃyojanasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti.
所谓“于自心得自在”,就是让自己的心能够自主。在厌恶等对象上,能安住在不厌恶想等状态,这种修行的成就,以及决意神通等各类神变,也都是靠心得自在才成办的,因为这些都是通过修心达到自主而得以实现。“等”这个字,涵盖了微细、轻快、大身、到达、所作、自在、自主、所欲处成就这六种。其中,让身体变得微细,是微细;因为能在空中行走等而让身体变得轻快,是轻快;让身体变得广大,是大身;到达想去的地方,是到达;通过决意等力量成办想要的事,是所作;自身成为主宰、能自主的状态,是自在;在神变中获得自主,是自主;在空中行走或做其他任何事时,在任何地方都能达到究竟,是所欲处成就。也有人说是“示现童子形等”。这样,这就是世间共许的八种自在。然而,世尊的这种自在虽然包含在神变之中,却是不共于他人的,所以说“具足一切行相”。同样,出世间法也是存在的,应当这样连接理解。如此,“有”这个字也应当连到“名声”等之后。巴利
Sakacitte issariyaṃ nāma attano cittassa vasībhāvāpādanaṃyeva, paṭikūlādīsu appaṭikūlasaññitādivihārasiddhi, adhiṭṭhāniddhiādiko iddhividhopi cittissariyameva cittabhāvanāya vasībhāvappattiyā ijjhanato. Aṇimālaghimādikanti ādi-saddena mahimā patti pākammaṃ īsitā vasitā yatthakāmāvasāyitāti ime chapi saṅgahitā. Tattha kāyassa aṇubhāvakaraṇaṃ aṇimā. Ākāse padasā gamanādīnaṃ arahabhāvena lahubhāvo laghimā. Mahattaṃ mahimā kāyassa mahantatāpādanaṃ. Iṭṭhadesassa pāpuṇanaṃ patti. Adhiṭṭhānādivasena icchitanipphādanaṃ pākammaṃ. Sayaṃvasitā issarabhāvo īsitā. Iddhividhe vasībhāvo vasitā. Ākāsena vā gacchato aññaṃ vā kiñci karoto yattha katthaci vosānappatti yatthakāmāvasāyitā. ‘‘Kumārakarūpādidassana’’ntipi vadanti. Evamidaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ lokiyasammataṃ issariyaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato iddhividhantogadhaṃ anaññasādhāraṇañcāti āha ‘‘sabbakāraparipūraṃ atthī’’ti. Tathā lokuttaro dhammo atthīti sambandho. Evaṃ yasādīsupi atthi-saddo yojetabbo.
有些人的名声只限于局部,而且因为依靠的是不真实的功德,所以不清净;但如来不是这样。为了说明这一点,才说“遍满三界”。在这里,那些在此教法中证得大师功德、生于无色界的人,通过“彼世尊如此……”等语句,使世尊的名声显扬开来,所以说“遍满三界”。“依真实功德而证得”,就是由真实的功德所证得。“极其清净”,正是因为依真实功德而证得,所以是绝对清净。“具足一切行相”,是因为无余地具足相、随好等成就,在一切方面都圆满。“一切肢节庄严”,就是所有大小肢节的美妙。“凡彼所希愿、所期望者”,就是通过“已度脱者令度脱”等语句,说明这位世间怙主以心和语的愿求所希愿的、以身的行为所期望的一切。“即如彼”,就是完全随顺愿求而成就。“名为正精进之努力”,就是已达到精进波罗蜜的程度、属于圣道的、名为正精进的勤奋。巴利
Kesañci yaso padesavutti ayathābhūtaguṇasannissayattā aparisuddho ca hoti, na evaṃ tathāgatassāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha idha adhigatasatthuguṇānaṃ āruppe uppannānaṃ ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā bhagavato yaso pākaṭo hotīti āha ‘‘lokattayabyāpako’’ti. Yathābhuccaguṇādhigatoti yathābhūtaguṇehi adhigato. Ativiya parisuddhoti yathābhūtaguṇādhigatattā eva accantaparisuddho. Sabbākāraparipūrāti anavasesalakkhaṇānubyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākārehi paripuṇṇā. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasirīti sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sobhā. Yaṃ yaṃ etena icchitaṃ patthitanti ‘‘tiṇṇo tāreyya’’ntiādinā yaṃ yaṃ etena lokanāthena manovacīpaṇidhānavasena icchitaṃ kāyapaṇidhānavasena patthitaṃ. Tathevāti paṇidhānānurūpameva. Sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto payattoti vīriyapāramibhāvappatto ariyamaggapariyāpanno ca sammāvāyāmasaṅkhāto ussāho.
“以善等分类”是指被一切三法、二法句所包含的善等分类。“以缘起等”中的“等”字,应当知道不仅包含了《分别论》中出现的念处等,还包含了总摄等、时解脱等、安立等以及三法发趣等。再者,在“压迫、有为、热恼、变易之义为苦圣谛”等句中,压迫义是指对具有该苦的众生造成伤害、令其不得自在。有为义是指由诸缘共同聚集、和合而造作。热恼义是指以苦苦等烧灼、燃烧。变易义是指因老与死两种方式而变易。集谛的聚集义是指以令苦生起的方式而积集。因缘义是指如同指示“这就是苦”一般地令苦生起。结缚义是指与轮回之苦相结合。障碍义是指障碍道的证得。灭谛的出离义,是因为舍弃一切依着的自性而从中脱离,或者成为其出离之因。远离义是指不与一切行相结合。无为义是指不由任何缘所造作。不死义,是因为常恒的自性而无死,或者是众生无死的因。道谛的出离义是指从轮回之苦中出离。因义是指令到达涅槃。见义是指对极微细的涅槃作证。增上义是指在四圣谛的见上对相应法作增上,或者是指所缘增上的状态,特别是因为说“道增上”。因为即使禅那等也有所缘增上的状态,却不称为“禅那增上之法”等,而只说“道增上之法”,因此可以知道“道的所缘增上状态有特殊之处”。这些压迫等十六种行相,就称为十六行相。巴利
Kusalādīhi bhedehīti sabbattikadukapadasaṅgahitehi kusalādippabhedehi. Paṭiccasamuppādādīhīti ādi-saddena na kevalaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ āgatā satipaṭṭhānādayova saṅgahitā, atha kho saṅgahādayo samayavimuttādayo ṭhapanādayo tikapaṭṭhānādayo ca saṅgahitāti veditabbaṃ. Pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmaṭṭhena vā dukkhamariyasaccantiādīsu pīḷanaṭṭho taṃsamaṅgino sattassa hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Saṅkhataṭṭho samecca saṅgamma sambhūya paccayehi katabhāvo. Santāpaṭṭho dukkhadukkhatādīhi santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ. Vipariṇāmaṭṭho jarāya maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbatā. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho dukkhassa nibbattanavasena sampiṇḍanaṃ. Nidānaṭṭho ‘‘idaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti nidassentassa viya samuṭṭhāpanaṃ. Saṃyogaṭṭho saṃsāradukkhena saṃyojanaṃ. Palibodhaṭṭho maggādhigamassa nivāraṇaṃ. Nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho sabbūpadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggasabhāvattā tato vinissaṭatā, taṃnissaraṇanimittatā vā. Vivekaṭṭho sabbasaṅkhāravisaṃyuttatā. Asaṅkhataṭṭho kenacipi paccayena anabhisaṅkhatatā. Amataṭṭho niccasabhāvattā maraṇābhāvo, sattānaṃ maraṇābhāvahetutā vā. Maggassa niyyānaṭṭho vaṭṭadukkhato nikkamanaṭṭho. Hetuattho nibbānassa sampāpakabhāvo. Dassanaṭṭho accantasukhumassa nibbānassa sacchikaraṇaṃ. Ādhipateyyaṭṭho catusaccadassane sampayuttānaṃ ādhipaccakaraṇaṃ, ārammaṇādhipatibhāvo vā visesato maggādhipativacanato . Satipi hi jhānādīnaṃ ārammaṇādhipatibhāve ‘‘jhānādhipatino dhammā’’ti evamādiṃ avatvā ‘‘maggādhipatino dhammā’’icceva vuttaṃ, tasmā viññāyati ‘‘atthi maggassa ārammaṇādhipatibhāve viseso’’ti. Eteyeva ca pīḷanādayo soḷasākārāti vuccanti.
在“天住、梵住、圣住”等说法中,以遍处等为所缘的色界禅那,是天住。以慈心等为所缘的禅那,是梵住。果等至是圣住。由于远离诸欲而身体独处,这是身远离。通过初禅等而令心从盖等中脱离,这是心远离。依着的远离就是涅槃。这里所说的“依着”有四种:欲依着、蕴依着、烦恼依着、行依着。因为诸欲是乐的立足处——正如所说“依于五欲功德而生起的乐与喜悦,这就是诸欲的滋味”——由于乐“依止于此”这一含义,所以称为“依着”;诸蕴因为是蕴所根本之苦的立足处,诸烦恼因为是恶趣之苦的立足处,诸行因为是生存之苦的立足处,都按上述方式称为“依着”。而由于远离这四种依着,涅槃被称为“依着远离”。巴利
Dibbabrahmaariyavihāretiādīsu kasiṇādiārammaṇāni rūpāvacarajjhānāni dibbavihāro. Mettādijjhānāni brahmavihāro. Phalasamāpatti ariyavihāro. Kāmehi vivekaṭṭhakāyatāvasena ekībhāvo kāyaviveko. Paṭhamajjhānādinā nīvaraṇādīhi vivittacittatā cittaviveko. Upadhiviveko nibbānaṃ. Upadhīti cettha cattāro upadhī kāmupadhi khandhupadhi kilesupadhi abhisaṅkhārupadhīti. Kāmāpi hi ‘‘yaṃ pañca kāmaguṇe paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ kāmānaṃ assādo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.166) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato upadhīyati ettha sukhanti iminā vacanatthena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti, khandhāpi khandhamūlakassa dukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, kilesāpi apāyadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, abhisaṅkhārāpi bhavadukkhassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vuttanayena ‘‘upadhī’’ti vuccanti. Imehi pana catūhi upadhīhi vivittatāya nibbānaṃ ‘‘upadhiviveko’’ti vuccati.
以空的方式把涅槃作为所缘而生起的圣道,就是空解脱。因为它是由空界而生起的,所以是“空”;又因为从烦恼中解脱出来,所以是“解脱”。按同样的道理,以无愿的方式把涅槃作为所缘而生起的,是无愿解脱;以无相的方式把涅槃作为所缘而生起的,是无相解脱。或者也可以说:通过被称为空随观的无我随观而证得的圣道,从它进入的方式来说,称为“空解脱”;同样,通过被称为无愿随观的苦随观而证得的,是无愿解脱;通过被称为无相随观的无常随观而证得的,应当知道就是“无相解脱”。这确实已经说过:巴利
Suññatākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto ariyamaggo suññatavimokkho. So hi suññatāya dhātuyā uppannattā suññato, kilesehi ca vimuttattā vimokkho. Eteneva nayena appaṇihitākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto appaṇihitavimokkho. Animittākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto animittavimokkho. Atha vā suññatānupassanāsaṅkhātāya anattānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho ariyamaggo āgamanavasena ‘‘suññatavimokkho’’ti vuccati. Tathā appaṇihitānupassanāsaṅkhātāya dukkhānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho appaṇihitavimokkho. Animittānupassanāsaṅkhātāya aniccānupassanāya vasena paṭiladdho ‘‘animittavimokkho’’ti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
以无常作意的人,因为胜解力强,证得无相解脱;以苦作意的人,因为轻安力强,证得无愿解脱;以无我作意的人,因为智慧力强,证得空解脱。巴利
‘‘Aniccato manasikaronto adhimokkhabahulo animittavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhati, dukkhato manasikaronto passaddhibahulo appaṇihitavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhati, anattato manasikaronto vedabahulo suññatavimokkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.223).
“其他”指的是世间神通这一类。巴利
Aññeti lokiyaabhiññādike.
因为烦恼和行的力量,众生在诸有中轮回流转,而这种流转以渴爱为主导,所以经中说“称为渴爱的流转”。已吐出,是指通过圣道之门吐出、以不再返回的方式舍弃。为了说明“世尊”这个称呼是依照语言习惯来说的,所以说了“如世间”等话。意思是:就像在世间依照语言习惯,从每个词取一个字母,而说成“腰带”一样,这里也是如此。“Mehana”指隐秘部位,“Kha”指空间。巴利
Kilesābhisaṅkhāravasena bhavesu paribbhamanaṃ, tañca taṇhāpadhānanti āha ‘‘taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamana’’nti. Vantanti ariyamaggamukhena uggiritaṃ puna apaccāgamanavasena chaḍḍitaṃ. Bhagavāti vuccati niruttinayenāti dassento āha ‘‘yathā loke’’tiādi. Yathā loke niruttinayena ekekapadato ekekamakkharaṃ gahetvā ‘‘mekhalā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpīti attho. Mehanassāti guyhappadesassa. Khassāti okāsassa.
另一种解释方式:世尊,就是“具足诸分者”。世尊,就是“受奉养者”。世尊,就是“于诸分中寻求者”。世尊,就是“于诸分中寻求者”。世尊,就是“具足奉养者”。世尊,就是“于诸分中吐出者”。世尊,就是“于诸分中吐出者”。巴利
Aparo nayo (itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) – bhāgavāti bhagavā. Bhatavāti bhagavā. Bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Bhage vanīti bhagavā. Bhattavāti bhagavā. Bhage vamīti bhagavā. Bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
世尊是分享者,是受供养者,在诸分享中,也在诸分享中寻求者。
世尊在诸分中,也如此在诸分中;因为已排泄,所以是世尊、胜者。巴利
Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino.
在这里,怎样才是“具足分”而称为世尊呢?如来确实拥有并可证得那些戒等法蕴、功德之分,它们不为他人共有,无与伦比。也就是说,他有戒、定、慧、解脱、解脱知见,有惭、愧,有信、精进,有念、正知,有戒清净、见清净,有止、观,有三善根,三善行,三正思惟,三无过失想,三界,四念处,四正勤,四神足,四圣道,四圣果,四无碍解,四胎藏简别智,四圣种,四无畏智,五勤支,五支正定,五智正定,五根,五力,五出离界,五解脱处智,五解脱成熟想,六随念处,六恭敬,六出离界,六常行住,六无上,六决择分想,六神通,六不共智,七不退法,七圣财,七觉支,七善士法,七消尽事,七想,七应供人施说,七漏尽力说,八慧得因说,八正道,八世间法超越,八发勤事,八非时说,八大人思惟,八胜处说,八解脱,九如理作意根法,九遍净勤支,九众生居说,九嗔恚调伏,九想,九种种,九次第住,十作护法,十遍处,十善业道,十正法,十圣居,十无学法,十如来力,十一慈心功德,十二法轮相,十三头陀功德,十四佛智,十五解脱成熟法,十六种入出息念,十六后际能引法,十八佛法,十九观察智,四十四种智事,五十种生灭智,五十二种善法,七十七种智事,二十四亿百千种等至所行大金刚智,以及无量无边、种种差别、以无边方式遍观缘起抉择的教说智,还有在无量世界界中为无量众生显示种种意乐等差别之智。像这样等等,无量无数、种种差别、不为他人共有、无与伦比的功德之分、功德之部分,都存在、都可证得。因此,由于他具有如上所说的种种功德之分,本应说“bhāgavā”,但把那个音节的元音缩短,就说成了“bhagavā”。这样,首先就是“具足分者”为世尊。巴利
Tattha kathaṃ bhāgavāti bhagavā? Ye te sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā guṇakoṭṭhāsā, te anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā tathāgatassa atthi upalabbhanti. Tathā hissa sīlaṃ samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ, hirī ottappaṃ, saddhā vīriyaṃ, sati sampajaññaṃ, sīlavisuddhi diṭṭhivisuddhi, samatho vipassanā, tīṇi kusalamūlāni, tīṇi sucaritāni, tayo sammāvitakkā, tisso anavajjasaññā, tisso dhātuyo, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, cattāro ariyamaggā, cattāri ariyaphalāni, catasso paṭisambhidā, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇāni, cattāro ariyavaṃsā, cattāri vesārajjañāṇāni, pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi, pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanañāṇāni, pañca vimuttiparipācanīyā saññā, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gāravā, cha nissāraṇīyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihārā, cha anuttariyāni, chanibbedhabhāgiyā saññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihānīyā dhammā, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅgāni, satta sappurisadhammā, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta saññā, sattadakkhiṇeyyapuggaladesanā, sattakhīṇāsavabaladesanā, aṭṭhapaññāpaṭilābhahetudesanā, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭhalokadhammātikkamo, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭhaakkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakkā, aṭṭhaabhibhāyatanadesanā, aṭṭha vimokkhā, nava yonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, navasattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātappaṭivinayā, nava saññā, nava nānattā, nava anupubbavihārā, dasa nāthakaraṇā dhammā, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathā, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāsā, dasa asekkhadhammā, dasa tathāgatabalāni, ekādasa mettānisaṃsā, dvādasa dhammacakkākārā, terasa dhutaguṇā, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā, soḷasavidhā ānāpānassati, soḷasa aparantapanīyā dhammā, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammā, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paññāsa udayabbayañāṇāni, paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcārimahāvajirañāṇaṃ, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānapavicayapaccavekkhaṇadesanāñāṇāni, tathā anantāsu lokadhātūsu anantānaṃ sattānaṃ āsayādivibhāvanañāṇāni cāti evamādayo anantāparimāṇabhedā anaññasādhāraṇā niratisayā guṇabhāgā guṇakoṭṭhāsā saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti, tasmā yathāvuttavibhāgā guṇabhāgā assa atthīti bhāgavāti vattabbe ākārassa rassattaṃ katvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vutto. Evaṃ tāva bhāgavāti bhagavā.
因为一切戒等功德之分,在世尊身上完全具备,毫无遗漏;
这些功德存在于善逝之中,因此他被称为世尊。巴利
Yasmā sīlādayo sabbe, guṇabhāgā asesato; Vijjanti sugate tasmā, bhagavāti pavuccati.
世尊为什么被称为“已承载者”呢?那些为了利益一切世间而发起精勤的人们,具足了人趣等八法,从发大誓愿、为成正等觉而立下大愿的大菩萨们所应当圆满的:布施波罗蜜、持戒波罗蜜、出离波罗蜜、智慧波罗蜜、精进波罗蜜、忍耐波罗蜜、真实波罗蜜、决意波罗蜜、慈波罗蜜、舍波罗蜜,这十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,共三十种波罗蜜;布施等四种摄众之法,四种决意;舍弃自身、舍弃眼睛、舍弃财富、舍弃王国、舍弃子女妻子,这五种大舍;前行、前所行、说法、利益亲族之行、利益世间之行、利益佛之行等等。简要来说,这些就是福德资粮和智慧资粮等能成佛的诸法。从发大誓愿开始,历经四阿僧祇又十万劫,它们不会变成退失分、杂染分或停滞分,而只会越来越殊胜。他这样恭敬地、不间断地、无余地承载、完全承载了这些法,所以被称为“已承载者”。这是依照词源规则,把 ta 音转成 ga 音,而成为“bhagavā”(世尊)。或者,“已承载者”的意思是:他按照所说的方式,承载、完全承载、圆满了那些成佛之法。因此,“已承载者”就是世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhatavāti bhagavā? Ye te sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannehi manussattādike aṭṭha dhamme samodhānetvā sammāsambodhiyā katamahābhinīhārehi mahābodhisattehi paripūretabbā dānapāramī sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramīti dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsa pāramiyo, dānādīni cattāri saṅgahavatthūni, cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni, attapariccāgo nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāgoti pañca mahāpariccāgā, pubbayogo, pubbacariyā, dhammakkhānaṃ, ñātatthacariyā, lokatthacariyā, buddhatthacariyāti evamādayo saṅkhepato vā puññasambhārañāṇasambhārā buddhakarā dhammā, te mahābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya kappānaṃ satasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni yathā hānabhāgiyā saṃkilesabhāgiyā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na honti, atha kho uttaruttari visesabhāgiyāva honti, evaṃ sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ anavasesato bhatā sambhatā assa atthīti bhatavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā. Atha vā bhatavāti teyeva yathāvutte buddhakare dhamme vuttanayena bhari sambhari, paripūresīti attho. Evampi bhatavāti bhagavā.
因为对于正等觉来说,布施波罗蜜等一切(资粮),
这位救护者已经修积了种种资粮,因此也被称为世尊。巴利
Yasmā sambodhiyā sabbe, dānapāramiādike; Sambhāre bhatavā nātho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊如何是“分享部分”呢?那些每天受用的等至部分,数目有二十四万百千亿那么多,他为了利益世间,也为了自己现法乐住,恒常不断地分享、亲近、多修习,所以世尊是“分享部分”。或者,在应证知的诸法中——比如善法等、蕴等——那些按应遍知等方式简略说为四种现观部分的;详细说则有“眼应遍知,耳应遍知……乃至老死应遍知”等许多应遍知部分,有“眼之集应断……乃至老死之集应断”等应断部分,有“眼之灭……乃至老死之灭应作证”等应作证部分,有“眼灭之道”以及“四念处”等许多不同种类的应修部分——所有这些法,他都随宜以行境修习和亲近的方式分享、受用了。这样,世尊也是“分享部分”。或者,那些戒等法蕴,是与弟子们共通的功德部分、功德份额,他以大悲心分享、祈愿:“怎样才能把这些建立在应调伏者的相续中呢?”而他的这个祈愿也如愿带来了果报。这样,世尊也是“分享部分”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vanīti bhagavā? Ye te catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhā devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattibhāgā, te anavasesato lokahitatthaṃ attano ca diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ niccakappaṃ vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā abhiññeyyadhammesu kusalādīsu khandhādīsu ca ye te pariññeyyādivasena saṅkhepato vā catubbidhā abhisamayabhāgā, vitthārato pana ‘‘cakkhu pariññeyyaṃ, sotaṃ pariññeyyaṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ pariññeyya’’ntiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.21) aneke pariññeyyabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa samudayo pahātabbo…pe… jarāmaraṇassa samudayo pahātabbo’’tiādinā nayena pahātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodho…pe… jarāmaraṇassa nirodho sacchikātabbo’’tiādinā sacchikātabbabhāgā, ‘‘cakkhussa nirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’tiādinā ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā ca anekabhedā bhāvetabbabhāgā ca dhammā vuttā, te sabbe vani bhaji yathārahaṃ gocarabhāvanāsevanānaṃ vasena sevi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā. Atha vā ye ime sīlādayo dhammakkhandhā sāvakehi sādhāraṇā guṇakoṭṭhāsā guṇabhāgā, kinti nu kho te vineyyasantānesu patiṭṭhapeyyanti mahākaruṇāya vani abhipatthayi, sā cassa abhipatthanā yathādhippetaphalāvahā ahosi. Evampi bhāge vanīti bhagavā.
因为如来分享了应知、等至和功德这些部分;
世尊侍奉并渴求众生的利益,世尊那样做了。巴利
Yasmā ñeyyasamāpatti-guṇabhāge tathāgato; Bhaji patthayi sattānaṃ, hitāya bhagavā tato.
世尊为什么叫“bhaga(受用部分)”呢?简单来说,有福之人以精勤具足的方式,随各自的能力去受用世间与出世间的成就,这些成就就叫“bhaga”。其中,在世间方面,如来在成正觉之前还是菩萨时,就受用了最殊胜的部分,依靠它完整地修习成佛之法,使佛之法成熟。成佛之后,他也受用了那些没有过失、带来安乐、不与外道共通、乃至出世间的部分。再详细说,他以地方王权、自在、转轮王成就、天王成就等,以及禅那、解脱、定、等至、智见、修道、证果等超越常人的法,受用了种种不与外道共通的受用部分。因此,世尊就叫“bhaga(受用部分)”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā? Samāsato tāva katapuññehi payogasampannehi yathāvibhavaṃ bhajīyantīti bhagā, lokiyalokuttarasampattiyo. Tattha lokiye tāva tathāgato sambodhito pubbe bodhisattabhūto paramukkaṃsagate vani bhaji sevi, yattha patiṭṭhāya niravasesato buddhakaradhamme samannānento buddhadhamme paripācesi. Buddhabhūto pana te niravajjasukhūpasaṃhite anaññasādhāraṇe lokuttarepi vani bhaji sevi. Vittārato pana padesarajjaissariyacakkavattisampattidevarajjasampattiādivasena jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiñāṇadassanamaggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādiuttarimanussadhammavasena ca anekavihite anaññasādhāraṇe bhage vani bhaji sevi. Evaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā.
世间那些成就,以及种种出世间的成就,
正等觉者已经受用了那一切,所以他也被称为世尊。巴利
Yā tā sampattiyo loke, yā ca lokuttarā puthu; Sabbā tā bhaji sambuddho, tasmāpi bhagavā mato.
世尊为什么被称为“有饭食者”呢?因为他有许多坚定追随、靠他吃饭的人,所以叫“有饭食者”。如来具足大悲、一切知智等无量、无可比拟的威德功德殊胜,是一切众生中最上的;他以去除一切不利为先导,致力于给众生带来无余的利益和安乐,具足无上的精进成就,对包括天人在内的众生作最大的饶益;他具足三十二大丈夫相、八十随形好、一寻身光等不共外道的殊胜庄严身相;他以如实证得的功德,具足“彼世尊即是如此”等语道所起的、遍满三界、广大清净的赞声,因而达到极致的顶点,在少欲知足等法中善得安立;他具足十力、四无所畏等无上功德殊胜,所以是“以色为量者则以色为欢喜,以声为量者则以声为欢喜,以粗涩为量者则以粗涩为欢喜,以法为量者则以法为欢喜”。如此,在具有四种量者的世间中,他于一切方面都能引发净信,故为“周围可敬信者”;对无量众生,包括天人在内,他是恭敬、尊重、承事的处所,是最上之爱的依处。凡安住于他的教诫、具足不坏净信者,任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵都不能夺其信心。因为他们即使舍弃自己的生命,也不舍弃对他的净信,或由于对他的教令具有坚定信心。因此说——巴利
Kathaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā? Bhattā daḷhabhattikā assa bahū atthīti bhattavā. Tathāgato hi mahākaruṇāsabbaññutaññāṇādiaparimitanirupamappabhāvaguṇavisesasamaṅgībhāvato sabbasattāuttamo, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya dvattiṃsa mahāpurisalakkhaṇāsīti anubyañjana byāmappabhādi anaññasādhāraṇavisesapaṭimaṇḍitarūpakāyatāya yathābhuccaguṇādhigatena ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinayappavattena lokattayabyāpinā suvipulena suvisuddhena ca thutighosena samannāgatattā ukkaṃsapāramippattāsu appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāādīsu suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato dasabalacatuvesārajjādiniratisayaguṇavisesasamaṅgībhāvato ca rūpappamāṇo rūpappasanno, ghosappamāṇo ghosappasanno, lūkhappamāṇo lūkhappasanno, dhammappamāṇo dhammappasannoti evaṃ catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse sabbathāpi pasādāvahabhāvena samantapāsādikattā aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sadevamanussānaṃ ādarabahumānagāravāyatanatāya paramapemasambhattiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye cassa ovāde patiṭṭhitā aveccappasādena samannāgatā honti, kenaci asaṃhāriyā tesaṃ sambhatti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vāti. Tathā hi te attano jīvitapaaccāgepi tattha pasādaṃ na pariccajanti tassa vā āṇaṃ daḷhabhattibhāvato. Tenevāha –
凡是真正知恩、懂得报恩的智者,
他是善友,且具足坚固的忠诚。巴利
‘‘Yo ve kataññū katavedi dhīro, Kalyāṇamitto daḷhabhatti ca hotī’’ti. (jā. 2.17.78);
比丘们,就像大海安住在自己的本性中,不会越过海岸线;同样地,比丘们,我为弟子们制定的学处,我的弟子们即使失去生命也不会违越。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahāsamuddo ṭhitadhammo velaṃ nātivattati, evameva kho, bhikkhave, yaṃ mayā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ mama sāvakā jīvitahetupi nātikkamantī’’ti (udā. 45; cūḷava. 385) ca.
世尊这样被称为“bhattavā”,是因为按照语言的构词方式,把一个 t 省略掉,又把另一个 t 变成了 g。巴利
Evaṃ bhattavāti bhagavā niruttinayena ekassa ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā itarassa ta-kārassa ga-kāraṃ katvā.
因为利益世间的人具备超胜的功德,
世尊有众多共同相处的追随者,因此被称为世尊。巴利
Guṇātisayayuttassa, yasmā lokahitesino; Sambhattā bahavo satthu, bhagavā tena vuccati.
为什么说世尊“吐出”了吉祥呢?因为如来还在菩萨位时,在过去世中修满波罗蜜,就已经把称为“吉祥”的荣光、自在和名声吐了出来、呕了出去,像吐掉一口唾沫那样,毫不留恋地丢弃了。比如他在欢喜童子时(《本生经》1.15.211等)、护象童子时(《本生经》1.15.337等)、铁屋智者时(《本生经》1.15.363等)、默然跛足智者时(《本生经》2.22.1等)、小善月王时(《本生经》2.17.195等),在这些生中,为了圆满出离波罗蜜,他舍弃了堪比天王之位的转轮王荣华,所舍弃的自身存在无法计量。即使在最后一生,他也把已经到手的转轮王荣华、堪比天界主宰的四洲自在,以及依靠转轮王成就而光辉闪耀的七宝名声,视如草芥,毫不留恋地舍弃,出家之后证得了正等正觉。因此,他吐出了这些荣华等吉祥,所以称为世尊。另一种解释是:所谓“bhāni”就是星宿,它们与之平等地运行、转动,所以叫“bhagā”(吉祥)。它们以须弥山、持双山、北俱卢洲、雪山等器世间的殊胜处为依托,其光辉能持续一劫之久。世尊也同样吐出了这些,因为他超越了以那些处所为住处的众生境界,断除了对它们执着的欲贪。这样也可以说:他吐出了吉祥,所以称为世尊。巴利
Kathaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavā? Yasmā tathāgato bodhisattabhūtopi purimāsu jātīsu pāramiyo pūrento bhagasaṅkhātaṃ siriṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami uggiri, kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayi. Tathā hissa somanassakumārakāle(jā. 1.15.211 ādayo) hatthipālakumārakāle (jā. 1.15.337 ādayo) ayogharapaṇḍitakāle(jā. 1.15.363 ādayo) mūgapakkhapaṇḍitakāle (jā. 2.22.1 ādayo) cūḷasutasomakāleti (jā. 2.17.195 ādayo) evamādīsu nekkhammapāramīpūraṇavasena devarajjasadisāya rajjasiriyā pariccattattabhāvānaṃ pamāṇaṃ natthi, carimattabhāvepi hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasaasaṃ catudīpissariyaṃ cakkavattisampattisannissayaṃ sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasañca tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayā sobhā kappaṭṭhāyibhāvato, tepi bhagavā vami taṃnivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
因为转轮王的荣华、名声、自在与快乐,
他舍弃了世间心,因此被称为善逝、世尊。巴利
Cakkavattisiriṃ yasmā, yasaṃ issariyaṃ sukhaṃ; Pahāsi lokacittañca, sugato bhagavā tato.
世尊是怎样“吐出诸部分”的呢?所谓“部分”,是指同类的法聚。这些法聚按蕴、处、界等来分,其中又按色、受等来分,也按过去等来分,所以有多种多样。世尊断除了一切戏论、一切轭、一切系缚、一切结缚,在证得不死界的过程中,把它们吐出、呕出,无所顾念地舍弃,不再回头。
就像他对一切地、水、火、风,眼、耳、鼻、舌、身、意,色、声、香、味、触、法,眼识乃至意识,眼触乃至意触,眼触所生的受乃至意触所生的受,眼触所生的想乃至意触所生的想,眼触所生的思乃至意触所生的思,色爱乃至法爱,色寻乃至法寻,色伺乃至法伺等等,以逐一分别诸法的方式,毫无剩余地把一切法聚都吐出、呕出,以无所顾念的舍离而抛弃。经中确实这样说:“阿难,凡是已舍、已吐、已放、已断、已遣的,如来绝不可能再回头。”这样,世尊也是“吐出诸部分”。
或者,“吐出诸部分”是说:他以圣道智为入口,把一切善与不善、有罪与无罪、低劣与殊胜、黑与白相对的法都吐出、呕出,无所顾念地舍掉、断除,并且为让别人也能达到这样的境地而说法。经中也这样说:“比丘们,连法尚且应当舍,何况非法。”又说:“比丘们,我为你们说像木筏一样的法,是为了渡过,不是为了执取。”这样,世尊也是“吐出诸部分”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāge vamīti bhagavā? Bhāgā nāma sabhāgadhammakoṭṭhāsā, te khandhāyatanadhātādivasena, tatthāpi rūpavedanādivasena atītādivasena ca anekavidhā, te ca bhagavā sabbaṃ papañcaṃ sabbaṃ yogaṃ sabbaṃ ganthaṃ sabbaṃ saṃyojanaṃ samucchinditvā amatadhātuṃ samadhigacchanto vami uggiri, anapekkho chaḍḍayi na paccāgami. Tathā hesa sabbatthakameva pathaviṃ āpaṃ tejaṃ vāyaṃ, cakkhuṃ sotaṃ ghānaṃ jivhaṃ kāyaṃ manaṃ, rūpe sadde gandhe rase phoṭṭhabbe dhamme, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ, cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ saññaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ saññaṃ, cakkhusamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ cetanaṃ, rūpataṇhaṃ…pe… dhammataṇhaṃ, rūpavitakkaṃ…pe… dhammavitakkaṃ, rūpavicāraṃ…pe… dhammavicārantiādinā anupadadhammavibhāgavasenapi sabbeva dhammakoṭṭhāse anavasesato vami uggiri, anapekkhapariccāgena chaḍḍayi. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yaṃ taṃ, ānanda, cattaṃ vantaṃ muttaṃ pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ tathāgato puna paccāgamissatīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.183). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāge vamīti sabbepi kusalākusale sāvajjānavajje hīnapaṇīte kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāge dhamme ariyamaggañāṇamukhena vami uggiri, anapekkho pariccaji pajahi, paresañca tathattāya dhammaṃ desesi. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo, bhikkhave , pahātabbā pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 240). Kullūpamaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.240). Evampi bhāge vamīti bhagavā.
大仙人把诸法分成蕴、处、界等等。
黑法与白法既然都已舍弃,世尊也因此被认为是(世尊)。巴利
Khandhāyatanadhātādi dhammabhedā mahesinā; Kaṇhā sukkā yato vantā, tatopi bhagavā mato.
因此,世尊这样说过:巴利
Tena vuttaṃ –
世尊是吉祥的拥有者,也是吉祥的分享者,在吉祥中他吐出吉祥。
世尊吐出了福分,也同样吐出了那些部分,所以胜者就是世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhāgavā bhatavā bhāge, bhage ca vani bhattavā; Bhage vami tathā bhāge, vamīti bhagavā jino’’ti.
在这里,简要来说,佛陀的功德可以分为两种:自利成就和利他行道。其中,自利成就又分为两种:断德和智德,因为威德成就等不离于此,所以包含在其中。利他行道则分为两种:加行和意乐。其中,加行是指心不顾念利养恭敬等,而教导能出离一切苦的法;意乐是指即使对敌对者也常怀利益之心,以及等待智慧成熟之时等利他行道。以接受财物等而行利益事,也是利他行道。因此,为了阐明这些,应知在经文中采用了“应供”等词。巴利
Ettha ca yasmā saṅkhepato attahitasampattiparahitapaṭipattivasena duvidhā buddhaguṇā, tāsu attahitasampatti pahānasampadāñāṇasampadābhedato duvidhā ānubhāvasampadādīnaṃ tadavinābhāvena tadantogadhattā. Parahitapaṭipatti payogāsayabhedato duvidhā. Tattha payogato lābhasakkārādinirapekkhacittassa sabbadukkhaniyyānikadhammūpadeso, āsayato paṭiviruddhesupi niccaṃ hitesitā ñāṇaparipākakālāgamanādiparahitappaṭipatti. Āmisapaṭiggahaṇādināpi atthacariyā parahitapaapatti hotiyeva, tasmā tesampi vibhāvanavasena pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,用“阿拉汉”这个词,是从断德圆满的角度来说明世尊自利的成就;用“正自觉者”和“世间解”这两个词,则是从智德圆满的角度来说明。难道“世间解”这个词不也能说明正自觉吗?确实能说明,但两者有区别:用“正自觉者”这个词,说明的是一切知智的威力;用“世间解”这个词,说明的则是意乐随眠智等的威力。用“明行具足”这个词,说明的是世尊全部的自利成就。用“善逝”这个词,则是从发心起步开始,说明世尊的自利成就和利他行。用“无上调御丈夫、天人师”这些词,说明的是世尊的利他行。用“佛”这个词,说明的是世尊的自利成就和利他行。这样一来,说了“正自觉者”之后再说“佛”这个词,就有了充分的道理。所以他说:“自己觉悟了,也让其他众生觉悟”等等。用“世尊”这个词,同样是从发心起步开始,说明世尊一切的自利成就和利他行。巴利
Tattha arahanti iminā padena pahānasampadāvasena bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā, sammāsambuddho lokavidūti ca imehi padehi ñāṇasampadāvasena. Nanu ca ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imināpi sammāsambuddhatā vibhāvīyatīti? Saccaṃ vibhāvīyati, atthi pana viseso ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti iminā sabbaññutaññāṇānubhāvo vibhāvito, ‘‘lokavidū’’ti pana iminā āsayānusayañāṇādīnampi ānubhāvo vibhāvitoti. Vijjācaraṇasampannoti iminā sabbāpi bhagavato attahitasampatti vibhāvitā. Sugatoti pana iminā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānanti imehi padehi bhagavato parahitapaṭipatti vibhāvitā. Buddhoti iminā bhagavato attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ti vatvā ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘attanāpi bujjhi, aññepi satte bodhesī’’tiādi . Bhagavāti ca imināpi samudāgamato paṭṭhāya bhagavato sabbā attahitasampatti parahitapaṭipatti ca vibhāvitā.
另一种分类方法:从因、果以及利益众生这三个方面,简要来说,佛的功德有三种。其中,用“阿拉汉、正自觉者、明行足、世间解”这几个词,是从果的成就角度来说明佛的功德。用“无上者、调御丈夫、导师、天人师”这几个词,是从利益众生的角度来说明佛的功德。用“佛陀”这个词,是从果的成就和利益众生两个方面来说明佛的功德。而用“善逝、世尊”这几个词,应当知道是从因、果、利益众生三个方面来说明佛的功德。巴利
Aparo nayo – hetuphalasattupakāravasena saṅkhepato tividhā buddhaguṇā. Tattha arahaṃ sammāsambuddho vijjācaraṇasampanno lokavidūti imehi padehi phalasampattivasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. Anuttaro purisadammasārathi satthā devamanussānanti imehi sattupakāravasena buddhaguṇā pakāsitā. Buddhoti iminā phalavasena sattupakāravasena ca buddhaguṇā vibhāvitā. Sugato bhagavāti pana imehi padehi hetuphalasattupakāravasena buddhaguṇā vibhāvitāti veditabbaṃ.
在“此世间”等句里,“彼世尊”指的是那位以“应供”等名号被称扬功德的世尊。“此世间”并不是只就大众眼前的范围来说,而是为了显示毫无剩余地完全涵盖,才说了“含天神的”等等。因此说“现在要显示应当说的内容”。“已生故”是指各按自己的业和烦恼而出生。通过“含天神的”这一说法,依剩余的方式摄取了五欲界天,因为其余的词已经包含了别的天。“含天神的”是以部分来解释,整体则是复合词的含义。通过“含魔的”这一说法,应当理解为依邻近的方式摄取了第六欲界天,因为魔就出生并住在那里。通过“含梵天的”这一说法,摄取了梵身天等梵天,这里也是同样的道理。“敌对者……中略……摄取了沙门婆罗门”,这只是举例,因为通过“含沙门婆罗门”这一说法,已经摄取了非敌对者以及尚未完全去除恶的沙门婆罗门。虽然依“含天神的”等限定语,可以知道“世间”一词所指的对象是有情,因为它们是同喻所缘;但在“有毛者、有翼者”等说法中,即使不是同喻,也能见到这样的复合词,为了显示这一点,所以说“以‘众生’一词摄取有情世间”。通过“含天神的”等词摄取了化生天,通过“含沙门婆罗门”一词摄取了净居天,因此说“以‘含天人’一词摄取了共许天及其余的人”。其中,共许天就是诸王。“其余的人”是指除沙门婆罗门之外其余的人。“三句”是指“含天神的、含魔的、含梵天的”这些词句;“二句”是指“含沙门婆罗门”和“含天人”这两句。巴利
So imaṃ lokantiādīsu so bhagavāti yo ‘‘araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. Imaṃ lokanti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhāmattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Sadevakavacanena pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyenāti veditabbaṃ itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Samārakavacanena chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha hi so jāto taṃnivāsī ca. Sabrahmakavacanena brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthikā…pe… samaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādivisesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo lokasaddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti. Sadevakādivacanena upapattidevānaṃ, sassamaṇabrāhmaṇīvacanena visuddhidevānañca gahitattā āha ‘‘sadevamanussavacanena sammutidevaavasesamanussaggahaṇa’’nti. Tattha sammutidevā rājāno. Avasesamanussaggahaṇanti samaṇabrāhmaṇehi avasesamanussaggahaṇaṃ. Tīhi padehīti sadevakasamārakasabarhmakavacanehi. Dvīhīti sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ sadevamanussanti imehi dvīhi padehi.
无色界的有情安住于自己不动摇的境界而闪耀,所以得到“天”这个名称,因此说“以‘包括天界’一语摄取了无色界世间”。世尊也正是因此说“生于空无边处天的诸天为伴”等。因为六欲天世间特别处于魔的势力范围之内,所以说“以‘包括魔界’一语摄取了六欲天世间”。由于无色界梵天世间已被单独摄取,所以说“色界梵天世间”。“依四众”是指依刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众这四众,在八众——刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众——之中,依刹帝利等四众。其余四众则已经由“包括魔界”一语所摄取。巴利
Arūpī sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā dibbantīti devāti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaraloko gahito’’ti. Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’ntiādi (a. ni. 3.117). Chakāmāvacaradevalokassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato āha ‘‘samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko’’ti . Arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā āha ‘‘rūpī brahmaloko’’ti. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyaparisā, brāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇacātumahārājikatāvatiṃsamārabrahmaparisāti imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu khattiyādicatuparisavasena. Itarā pana catasso parisā samārakaggahaṇena gahitā evāti.
那么,这里怎么按照四众来理解人世间呢?用“有沙门婆罗门”这句话,就包含了沙门众和婆罗门众;用“有天人”这句话,就包含了刹帝利众和居士众;而“众生”这个词说的正是这四众,也就是被称为四众的众生。那么,又怎么连同共许的天一起来理解人世间呢?这里同样用“有沙门婆罗门”这句话包含了沙门和婆罗门;用“有天人”这句话包含了被称为共许天的刹帝利,以及被称为居士、首陀罗的其余人。由于除了这些人之外没有别的人类众生,所以应该知道,“众生”这个词指的就是以这四种形式存在的人类众生。这样一来,在两种分类方式中,因为“众生”这个词都只包含了依四众等形式存在的人,所以现在为了说明“众生”这个词也把其余有情包含进来,就说“或者其余一切有情世间”。其中,其余有情世间应当理解为龙、金翅鸟等。这里也应该这样搭配:依四众,或者连同共许天一起,或者其余一切有情世间。也就是说:包含了与四众共住的其余龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间,或者与以四种形式存在的人共住的其余龙、金翅鸟、地狱等有情世间。巴利
Kathaṃ panettha catuparisavasena manussaloko gahito? ‘‘Sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā ca gahitā honti, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā khattiyaparisā gahapatiparisā ca gahitā, ‘‘paja’’nti iminā pana imāyeva catasso parisā vuttā, catuparisasaṅkhātaṃ pajanti vuttaṃ hoti, kathaṃ pana sammutidevehi saha manussaloko gahito? Etthāpi ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇi’’nti iminā samaṇabrāhmaṇā gahitā, ‘‘sadevamanussa’’nti iminā sammutidevasaṅkhātā khattiyā, gahapatisuddasaṅkhātā avasesamanussā ca gahitā honti. Ito pana aññesaṃ manussasattānaṃ abhāvato ‘‘paja’’nti iminā catūhi pakārehi ṭhitā eteyeva manussasattā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evaṃ vikappadvayepi pajāggahaṇena catuparisādivasena ṭhitānaṃ manussānaṃyeva gahitattā idāni ‘‘paja’’nti iminā avasesasatte saṅgahetvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘avasesasabbasattaloko vā’’ti. Tattha nāgagaruḷādivasena avasesasattaloko veditabbo. Etthāpi catuparisavasena sammutidevehi vā saha avasesasabbasattaloko vāti yojetabbaṃ. Catuparisasahito avasesasuddhanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko, catudhā ṭhitamanussasahito vā avasesanāgasupaṇṇanerayikādisattaloko gahitoti vuttaṃ hoti.
到这里,已经按类别把握了世间并说明了它的构造;现在为了按种种差别、不再按类别来把握世间并说明其构造,所以说出了“再者,于此……”等话。其中,“以最胜的界定”是指以最胜趣的认知。因为在五趣当中,只有属于天趣的才是最优胜的;而在天趣之中,无色界众生又因为远离了烦恼和苦的逼迫,具足寂静、殊胜、不动的定境,寿命又极其长久等种种殊胜,所以最为优胜。“大梵天有大威神力”是就一万世界的大梵天来说的。因为前面说的是“以最胜的界定”。“无上”是指最殊胜的九种出世间法。“随顺次第”是指义理和文句前后连接的次序。不过古师们对此是这样解释的:“与天同在”是指与诸天一起的其余世间;“与魔同在”是指与魔罗一起的其余世间;“与梵天同在”是指与诸梵天一起的其余世间。这样,把一切三有中的众生,以“与天、魔、梵天共住”为名的三种方式,分别归入“与天同在”等三句当中,然后再用两句来总括,说“与沙门、婆罗门、人天共住的众生”。如此,通过五句,以“与天同在”等种种方式,就把三界全都总括进去了。巴利
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagativijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devagatipariyāpannāva seṭṭhā, tatthāpi arūpino dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya ativiya dīghāyukatāyāti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya ukkaṭṭhā. Brahmā mahānubhāvoti dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ navalokuttaraṃ. Anusandhikkamoti atthānañceva padānañca anusandhānukkamo. Porāṇā panettha evaṃ vaṇṇayanti – sadevakanti devatāhi saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Samārakanti mārena saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Sabrahmakanti brahmehi saddhiṃ avasesaṃ lokaṃ. Evaṃ sabbepi tibhavūpage satte devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu pakkhipitvā puna dvīhi padehi pariyādiyanto ‘‘sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiṃ pajaṃ sadevamanussa’’nti āha. Evaṃ pañcahipi padehi sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti.
“证知”这个说法是省略了 ya 音节的简略表达,在这里的意思是“证知之后”,所以注释者说“以证知、以更殊胜的智慧了知之后”。遮止推理等,就是遮止推理、譬喻、义准等,因为佛智是唯一的量。确实,诸佛世尊以无碍智行于一切处,所以对一切法都是现量。无上的远离之乐,就是果等至之乐。因此,世尊说法时有时也夹杂着心路过程,所以说“舍弃后”,并且加上了“pi”这个字。因为世尊说法时,在听众喝彩或随闻审察法义的那一刻,他会以预备行限定那一刻而入果等至,然后按照所限定的时间从等至出定,从所站之处开始说法。或者说少,或者说多:依利根顿悟者而说少,依广慧者或可引导者而说多。他所开示的法正是初善等样式,也就是说:在开头也使之成为善妙、贤善、无过而开示;在中间、在结尾也使之成为善妙、贤善、无过而开示。这就是所说的意思。因为法的善性在于能引导出离,而能引导出离则在于其完全无过的状态。巴利
Abhiññāti yakāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto. Anuttaraṃ vivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Tena vīthimissāpi kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti hitvāpīti pisaddaggahaṇaṃ. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti. Appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desentoti ugghaṭitaññussa vasena appaṃ vā, vipañcitaññussa neyyassa vā vasena bahuṃ vā desento. Ādikalyāṇādippakārameva desetīti ādimhipi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā deseti. Majjhepi pariyosānepi kalyāṇaṃ bhaddakaṃ anavajjameva katvā desetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammassa hi kalyāṇatā niyyānikatāya niyyānikatā ca sabbaso anavajjabhāvena.
“周遍贤善”是指从一切部分来看都美好。“法”是指教理之法。虽然从究竟真实义上说,并不存在任何脱离组成部分而独立存在的“集合体”,但当那些组成部分被当作一个集合体来看待时,就得到了“偈颂”这个名称。为了说明这一点,把它看作好像与组成部分不同,安立了共通的假名,然后说“以第一句为初善”等等。“同一连贯”是说它没有过多的分类,按照其连贯性而为一连贯。而另一种则按照所应说法义的区分,具有初、中、后各部分。“以序分”是指由阿难长老所安立的、以标明时间、地点、说法者和听众等为特征的序分经文。“以结分”是指以“此是世尊所说”等,或者“如是所说者,是缘于此而说”等,按照所说的意义来作结的经文。因为即使是结集者所安立的序分和结分,也是随顺佛陀的教说,所以都包含在三藏之内。因此,《长部注》中说:“对于同一连贯的经,序分是开头,‘此是世尊所说’是结尾,二者之间是中间。”巴利
Samantabhaddakattāti sabbabhāgehi sundarattā. Dhammassāti pariyattidhammassa. Kiñcāpi avayavavinimutto samudāyo nāma paramatthato koci natthi, yesu pana avayavesu samudāyarūpena apekkhitesu gāthāti samaññā, taṃ tato bhinnaṃ viya katvā saṃsāmivohāraṃ āropetvā dassento ‘‘paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā’’tiādimāha. Ekānusandhikanti idaṃ nātibahuvibhāgaṃ yathānusandhinā ekānusandhikaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Itarassa pana teneva desetabbadhammavibhāgena ādimajjhapariyosānabhāgā labbhantīti. Nidānenāti ānandattherena ṭhapitakāladesadesakaparisādiapadisanalakkhaṇena nidānaganthena. Nigamenāti ‘‘idamavocā’’tiādikena ‘‘iti yaṃ taṃ vuttaṃ, idametaṃ paṭicca vutta’’nti vā yathāvuttatthanigamanena. Saṅgītikārakehi ṭhapitānipi hi nidānanigamanāni dassetvā tīṇi piṭakāni satthu desanāya anuvidhānato tadantogadhāneva. Teneva dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ekānusandhikassa suttassa nidānaṃ ādi, idamavocāti pariyosānaṃ, ubhinnamantarā majjha’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190) vuttaṃ.
像这样,先按照经藏的方式说明了法的初善等,现在把三藏合在一起,为了显示它,就说了“整个……”等话。其中,“教法”是指——巴利
Evaṃ suttantapiṭakavasena dhammassa ādikalyāṇāditaṃ dassetvā idāni tīṇi piṭakāni ekajjhaṃ gahetvā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sāsanadhammoti –
不造作一切恶行,圆满成就善行;
净化自己的心,这就是诸佛的教法。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadā; Sacittapariyodapanaṃ, etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50) –
这样说的导师教法的阐明,就是教理法。因为戒是教法的根本,所以说“以戒为初善”。由于止等是教法成就的中间部分,所以说“以止、观、道、果为中善”。因为证得涅槃之后再也没有什么可做的了,所以说“以涅槃为后善”。在教法中,正确的修行是以慧为核心的,而戒和定是它的根本,所以说“以戒、定为初善”。不过慧有随觉和通达两种,为了把这两种都包括进来,就说“以观、道为中善”。为了显示它的最终成果——现证涅槃,此后无事,所以说“以果、涅槃为后善”。或者以“果”指有余依涅槃,以另一者(涅槃)指另一者(无余依涅槃),此二者为教法成就的究竟,故说“以果、涅槃为后善”。巴利
Evaṃ vuttassa satthusāsanassa pakāsako pariyattidhammo. Sīlamūlakattā sāsanassa ‘‘sīlena ādikalyāṇo’’ti vuttaṃ. Samathādīnaṃ sāsanasampattiyā vemajjhabhāvato āha ‘‘samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti. Nibbānādhigamato uttari karaṇīyābhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Sāsane sammāpaṭipatti nāma paññāya hoti, tassā ca sīlaṃ samādhi ca mūlanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhīhivā ādikalyāṇo’’ti. Paññā pana anubodhapaavedhavasena duvidhāti tadubhayampi gaṇhanto ‘‘vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo’’ti āha. Tassā nipphattiphalakiccaṃ nibbānasacchikiriyā, tato paraṃ kattabbaṃ natthīti dassento āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti. Phalaggahaṇena vā saupādisesaṃ nibbānamāha, itarena itaraṃ tadubhayañca sāsanasampattiyā osānanti āha ‘‘phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo’’ti.
因为佛陀的善觉悟,所以是初善:佛陀的善觉悟就是正等正觉,以这个为因,所以是初善。彻底断除一切杂染、圆满清净,就是法的善法性,以这个为体,所以是中善。按照导师所教导的如实修行,就是僧的善修行,由于这个,教法在世间善得安住,所以是后善。“此”指教法。“为如实性”:就是为了如世尊所说法的如实性、如性。然而,这种觉悟有三种:正等觉、辟支菩提、声闻觉,因为除此之外没有别的途径能证得涅槃。其中,第一种觉悟在一切功德中最为殊胜,又是另外两种觉悟的根本,所以是初善;第二种觉悟的功德处于中等,所以是中善;第三种觉悟兼具前两者,或者作为最终归宿,所以教法的后善是这样说的。巴利
Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇoti buddhassa subodhitā sammāsambuddhatā, tāya ādikalyāṇo tappabhavattā. Sabbaso saṃkilesappahānaṃ vodānapāripūrī ca dhammasudhammatā, tāya majjhekalyāṇo taṃsarīrattā. Satthārā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipatti saṅghasuppaṭipatti, tāya pariyosānakalyāṇo tāya sāsanassa loke suppatiṭṭhitabhāvato. Tanti sāsanadhammaṃ. Tathattāyāti yathattāya bhagavatā dhammo desito, tathattāya tathabhāvāya. So pana abhisambodhi paccekabodhi sāvakabodhīti tividho ito aññathā nibbānādhigamassa abhāvato. Tattha sabbaguṇehi aggabhāvato itarabodhidvayamūlatāya ca paṭhamāya bodhiyā ādikalyāṇatā, guṇehi vemajjhabhāvato dutiyāya majjhekalyāṇatā, tadubhayatāya vā vosānatāya ca sāsanadhammassa tatiyāya pariyosānakalyāṇatā vuttā.
这即是教法。所谓“由于能镇伏诸盖”,意思是:站在解脱处的开端而听闻正法的人,因为诸盖确实被镇伏了。关于这一点已经说过:巴利
Esoti sāsanadhammo. Nīvaraṇavikkhambhanatoti vimuttāyatanasīse ṭhatvā saddhammaṃ suṇantassa nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhanasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,比丘从导师那里,或者从某位值得恭敬的同梵行者那里,以何种方式听闻法的开示,他就以那种方式在那里获得义的理解,获得法的理解。巴利
‘‘Yathā yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti, aññataro vā garuṭṭhānīyo sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tattha labhati atthavedaṃ labhati dhammaveda’’nti.
比丘们,当圣弟子把耳朵倾注于法、聆听法的时候,就在那个时候,他的五种盖障已经被断除了。巴利
‘‘Yasmiṃ , bhikkhave, samaye ariyasāvako ohitasoto dhammaṃ suṇāti, pañcassa nīvaraṇāni tasmiṃ samaye pahīnāni hontī’’ti –
还有“等等”这样的说法。因为能带来止与观的安乐,也就是能让人达到止的安乐和观的安乐。这一点也已经说过:“他远离诸欲,远离不善法,有寻有伺,由远离而生起喜与乐”等等,同样地——巴利
Ca ādi. Samathavipassanāsukhāvahanatoti samathasukhassa vipassanāsukhassa ca sampāpanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘so vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntiādi, tathā –
无论从哪里正念观察,都能看到诸蕴的生起与灭去;
了知不死之境的人,就能得到欢喜和愉悦。
正确观照法的人,会生起非人的喜乐。巴利
‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānataṃ. Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 374-373);
像这样行道的人:教法能带来止观之乐,或者能按照导师所教导的那样去行道。“能带来如如状态”:就是依靠六支舍,在面对可意等境界时,能带来不为世间法所染的如如状态。“以依怙为根源”:从它而生起,就是生起的依处;依怙正是它的根源,所以叫“以依怙为根源”,这种性质就是“以依怙为根源性”,因此教法以依怙为因,这就是它的意思。“以义清净而为中善”:因为无杂染、能出离,所以义清净,以这种义清净作为中善。“以作用清净而为后善”:名为“善行道”的作用清净,后善即是善行道的圆满终结,因为教法以善行道为归宿。为总结上述之义,故说“因此”等。巴利
Tathā paṭipannoti yathā samathavipassanāsukhaṃ āvahati, yathā vā satthārā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā paṭipanno sāsanadhammo. Tādibhāvāvahanatoti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena iṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvassa lokadhammehi anupalepassa āvahanato. Nāthappabhavattāti pabhavati etasmāti pabhavo, uppattiṭṭhānaṃ, nāthova pabhavo etassāti nāthappabhavo, tassa bhāvo nāthappabhavattaṃ, tasmā sāsanadhammassa nāthahetukattāti attho. Atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇoti nirupakkilesatāya niyyānikatā atthasuddhi, tāya majjhekalyāṇo. Kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇoti suppaṭipattisaṅkhātakiccassa suddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo suppaṭipattipariyosānattā sāsanadhammassa. Yathāvuttamatthaṃ nigamento āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
在“教法梵行”等说法里,总的来讲,三学以及全部经教之法就是教法梵行。针对这一点,有这样的话:“尊者,哪些佛陀、世尊的梵行不能久住?”等等。圣八支道则是道梵行。针对这一点,有这样的话:“生已尽,梵行已立,所作已办。”随宜,就是按照各自相应的情况。因为包含三学的教法梵行,从意义的圆满来说是有意义的;道梵行也是这样。而另一种称为经教之法的教法梵行,则按上面所说的意义,既有意义也有文辞。所谓“意义的圆满”,就是意义已经成就;这里“具足”这个词就是成就的意思。所谓“文辞的圆满”,在这里也是同样的道理。如果一个人的说法依赖粥、饭、男女等描述,他就不是在说有意义的法,因为那种说法缺乏出离的意义。但世尊舍弃了那样的说法,宣说依靠四念处等的法,所以说他“以意义的圆满而说有意义的法”。如果一个人的说法,在松、紧等各种文辞中,只以一种或两种文辞来组合,就像达弥罗语那样只有单一文辞等组合;或者像基罗多语那样,因为开口发音不碰嘴唇,所以全是无唇音;或者像臾那语那样,一切处都带送气,所以全是送气音;或者像卑陀私迦等蛮族语那样,一切处都带随韵,所以全是随韵——由于文辞不圆满,那样的说法就称为无文。因为这一切都只是依文辞的一部分而展开,所以文辞并不圆满。然而世尊——巴利
Sāsanabrahmacariyantiādīsu avisesena tisso sikkhā sakalo ca tantidhammo sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘katamesānaṃ kho, bhante, buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyaṃ na ciraṭṭhitikamahosī’’tiādi (pārā. 18). Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jāti, vusitaṃ brahmacariyaṃ, kataṃ karaṇīya’’nti (pārā. 14). Yathānurūpanti yathārahaṃ. Sikkhattayasaṅgahañhi sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, tathā maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Itaraṃ pana tantidhammasaṅkhātaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ yathāvuttenatthena sātthaṃ sabyañjanañca. Atthasampattiyāti sampannatthatāya. Sampattiattho hi idha sahasaddo. Byañjanasampattiyāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yassa hi yāgubhattādiitthipurisādivaṇṇanānissitā desanā hoti, na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Bhagavā pana tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ pahāya catusatipaṭṭhānādinissitaṃ desanaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati . Yassa pana desanā sithiladhanitādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāreneva dvippakāreneva vā byañjanena yuttatāya ekabyañjanādiyuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya, vivaṭakaraṇatāya oṭṭhe aphusāpetvā uccāretabbato sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya, sabbattheva vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā yavanabhāsā viya, sabbattheva sānusāratāya sabbaniggahītabyañjanā vā pādasikādi milakkhubhāsā viya, tassa byañjanapāripūriyā abhāvato abyañjanā nāma desanā hoti. Sabbāpi hi esā byañjanekadesavaseneva pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuccati. Bhagavā pana –
松、紧、长、短、重、轻以及随韵,
结合、确定、解脱,依文辞智分为十种。巴利
‘‘Sithilaṃ dhanitañca dīgharassaṃ, garukaṃ lahukañca niggahītaṃ; Sambandhaṃ vavatthitaṃ vimuttaṃ, dasadhā byañjanabuddhiyā pabhedo’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.190; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.291; pari. aṭṭha. 485) –
他这样说法时,不遗漏所说的十种文辞,而让文辞完全圆满,因此称为“以文辞具足而说有文之法”。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaṃ dasavidhaṃ byañjanaṃ amakkhetvā paripuṇṇabyañjanameva katvā dhammaṃ deseti, tasmā ‘‘byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ desetī’’ti vuccati.
现在,为了用导论的方法说明“有义有文”当中的“义”,所以说了“略示……有文”。在《导论》里,虽然先列出了“通过文句之门而把握文句之义,因此字母、词句……”等文句,但这里因为圣典中出现了“有义有文”,所以为了先说明义句,就说了“略示、开示”等。其中,简要地显示、阐明,就是“略示”。“显示”的意思是被显示、被阐明、被明了。比如“比丘若思量则被魔束缚,不思量则解脱”等,以简要的方式阐明,就叫“略示”,因为仅凭那一点,那位比丘就通达了,所以说“世尊已了知”等。先阐明叫“开示”。比如“诸比丘,一切在燃烧”等,对后面才要说的义理,先用一句话阐明,就叫“开示”。这里的“pa-”前缀用于起始义,如“令知、令安立”等。这两句是针对利根者说的,属于略说的性质,因为利根者能通达简要所说的和先说的义理。对简要所说的加以广说,对已说一次的再次宣说,就是“开显”和“分别”。比如对“善法”这一简要且只说一次的义理,以“哪些法是善?于何时生起欲界善心……”等,通过广说、开显的方式和分别的方式再次宣说。这两句是针对中根者说的,属于细说的性质。对已开显的作更详尽的说明,对已分别的以种种方式令知,令所化众生心生喜悦,就是“令明了”和“令知”。比如对以“有触”等已开显、已分别的义理,以“那时什么是触?那时所有的触、触感、接触……”等,作明了化和令知。这两句是针对钝根者说的,属于再细说的性质。巴利
Idāni ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti ettha nettinayenapi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanaṃ…pe… sabyañjana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha yadipi nettiyaṃ ‘‘byañjanamukhena byañjanatthaggahaṇaṃ hotīti akkharaṃ pada’’ntiādinā byañjanapadāni paṭhamaṃ uddiṭṭhāni, idha pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjana’’nti āgatattā atthapadāniyeva paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkāsanapakāsanā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅkhepato kāsanaṃ dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ. Kāsananti ca kāsīyati dīpīyati vibhāvīyatīti attho. ‘‘Maññamāno kho bhikkhu baddho mārassa amaññamāno mutto’’tiādīsu viya saṅkhepena dīpanaṃ saṅkāsanaṃ nāma. Tattakena hi tena bhikkhunā paṭividdhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Paṭhamaṃ kāsanaṃ pakāsanaṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’nti evamādīsu pacchā kathitabbamatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ vacanena dīpanaṃ pakāsanaṃ nāma. Ādikammasmiñhi ayaṃ pa-saddo ‘‘paññapeti paṭṭhapetī’’tiādīsu viya. Tikkhindriyāpekkhañcetaṃ padadvayaṃ uddesabhāvato. Tikkhindriyo hi saṅkhepato paṭhamañca vuttamatthaṃ paṭipajjati. Saṃkhittassa vitthāravacanaṃ sakiṃ vuttassa puna vacanañca vivaraṇavibhajanāni, yathā ‘‘kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepato sakiṃyeva ca vuttassa atthassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ citta’’ntiādinā vitthārato vivaraṇavasena vibhajanavasena ca puna vacanaṃ. Majjhimindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ niddesabhāvato. Vivaṭassa vitthāratarābhidhānaṃ vibhattassa ca pakārehi ñāpanaṃ vineyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ uttānīkaraṇapaññāpanāni, yathā ‘‘phasso hotī’’tiādinā vivaṭavibhattassa atthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā saṃphusanā’’tiādinā uttānīkiriyā paññāpanā ca. Mudindriyāpekkhametaṃ padadvayaṃ paṭiniddesabhāvato.
或者,先通过“诸比丘,一切都在燃烧”这样一句话把要说的义理点出来,然后再把它讲清楚,也就是用“诸比丘,什么是‘一切都在燃烧’?诸比丘,眼在燃烧,色在燃烧”等等这样的话,把简略说过的内容展开来讲,把已经说过一次的内容再重新说一遍,这就叫开显。对于用“善法”这样简略方式提出的内容,通过“哪些法是善?当欲界善心生起的时候……”这样的详细说明来开显善法,再对已经开显的善法加以区分:“那时候有触、有受……”这就叫分别。对已经开显的内容用更详细的说法来讲,对已经分别的内容用譬喻来说明,使它变得清楚明白,这就叫明了:对通过开显已经讲出来的义理,再进一步详细开示:“那时候什么是触?那时候的触、接触、合触……”;对通过分别已经区分出来的义理,用譬喻来说明:“诸比丘,就像一头被剥了皮的牛,同样地,诸比丘,我说触食也应该这样来看待……”像这样用譬喻来讲,就叫作使清楚明白。让听法的人通过种种不同方式的说法生起喜悦,让智慧极锐利的人以多种方式使智慧更加锐利,这就叫施设——因为能让听者心生满足、让智慧敏锐,所以叫施设。因为具备义句,所以叫有义:由于所学的义理具有略示等义句的性质,又因为具备前面所说的六种义句,所以叫有义。略示、开示等之所以被称为义句,是因为它们具有义理的相貌。义理正是通过文句被略示、被开示、被开显、被分别、被明了、被施设的。巴利
Atha vā ‘‘sabbaṃ, bhikkhave, āditta’’nti evaṃ paṭhamaṃ dīpitamatthaṃ puna pākaṭaṃ katvā dīpanena ‘‘kiñca, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ ādittaṃ? Cakkhu, bhikkhave, ādittaṃ, rūpā ādittā’’ti evamādinā saṃkhittassa vitthārābhidhānena sakiṃ vuttassa punapi abhidhānena vitthāretvā desanaṃ vivaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Kusalā dhammā’’ti saṅkhepena nikkhittassa ‘‘katame dhammā kusalā? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti niddesavasena vivarite kusale dhamme ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti vedanā hotī’’ti vibhāgakaraṇaṃ vibhajanaṃ nāma. Vivaṭassa vitthārābhidhānena vibhattassa ca upamābhidhānena uttāniṃ karotīti vivaraṇena vivaritatthassa ‘‘katamo tasmiṃ samaye phasso hoti? Yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso phusanā saṃphusanā’’ti ativivaritvā kathanaṃ, vibhajanena vibhattassa ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī niccammā, evameva khvāyaṃ bhikkhave phassāhāro daṭṭhabboti vadāmī’’ti evamādiupamākathanañca uttānīkaraṇaṃ nāma. Dhammaṃ suṇantānaṃ dhammadesanena vicittena anekavidhena somanassassa uppādanaṃ atikhiṇabuddhīnaṃ anekavidhena ñāṇatikhiṇakaraṇañca paññatti nāma sotūnaṃ cittatosanena cittanisānena ca paññāpanaṃ paññattīti katvā. Atthapadasamāyogato sātthanti pariyattiatthassa saṅkāsanādiatthapadarūpattā yathāvuttachaatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsanādayo hi atthākārattā ‘‘atthapadānī’’ti vuccanti. Atthoyeva hi byañjanapadehi saṅkāsīyati pakāsīyati vivarīyati vibhajīyati uttānī karīyati paññāpīyati.
“文字、词、句、形态、语义解释、详释的圆满成就”这句话里,在“六万年”这类说法中,就像 sa、du、so 等音一样,在发音还没结束的词里,音素被称为“字”,这是从辗转流转的意义上说的,也是从没有别的名称可说的角度说的。因为音素根本没有别的同义词。就像词因为有同义词,能依意义而流转、游走;音素却不是这样,因为它没有别的名称。或者,单独一个音也能成词,那也叫“字”,比如“不要这样说”等中的 mā 这类音。不过有些人说:“通过三门清净修行,从清净之处由心发动的教说言音,因为音素没有别名、不被宣说,所以称为‘字’。这应当依据《彼岸道品》中婆罗门心中所问的问题,以及世尊坐在宝屋中触证的《发趣大论》来理解。”
带有语尾变化、能让人了解意义的,就是“词”。因为意义通过它被表达出来,所以叫“词”。词有四种:名词、动词、前缀词、不变词。
其中,“触、受、心”这类以实体为主的,是名词。在名词里,实体显现出它的相状,而动作不显现。像“触知、感受、了知”这类以动作为主的,是动词。在动词里,动作显现出它的相状,而实体不显现。比如“久居他乡者”中的 pa 这个音,显示与居住动作相离的特性;像这样,能显示动作和实体的自相差别,就是前缀词。“如是”这类则是不变词。在“应如是作意,不要如是作意”等句中,因为能显示动作的差别,“如是”一词是动作差别的显示者;在“如是姓、如是法”等句中,则显示实体的差别。
简而言之,能表达词所诠之义的就是“句”。比如“四神足”以简略方式所说的义,通过“哪四种?诸比丘,比丘修习欲定勤行成就神足,修习精进、心、观定勤行成就神足”等而变得明了,所以说只有句才是“文”。不过,从句的意义上说,应当知道它是词的集合。他们又说:有动词、有不变词、有宾语、有修饰语的,名为句。
问:词也能表达意义,那么词也应该成为句吗?不是。因为仅仅听到一个词时,必须依靠上下文等,与其他词连接起来,才能获得意义的成就,所以说只有句能表达意义。巴利
Akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyāti ettha ‘‘saṭṭhi vassasahassānī’’ti evamādīsu sa-kāra du-kāra so-kārādi viya uccāraṇavelāya apariyosite pade vaṇṇo akkharaṃ pariyāyavasena akkharaṇato avevacanato. Na hi vaṇṇassa pariyāyo vijjati. Yathā hi padaṃ savevacanatāya atthavasena pariyāyaṃ carantaṃ sañcarantaṃ viya hoti, na evaṃ vaṇṇo avevacanattā. Ekakkharaṃ vā padaṃ akkharaṃ ‘‘mā evaṃ kira ta’’ntiādīsu mā-kārādayo viya. Keci pana ‘‘tīsu dvāresu parisuddhapayogabhāvena visuddhakaraṇaṭṭhānānaṃ cittena pavattitadesanāvācāhi akkharaṇato avevacanato akathitattā akkharanti saññitā. Taṃ pārāyanikabrāhmaṇānaṃ manasā pucchitapañhānaṃ vasena bhagavatā ratanaghare nisīditvā sammasitapaṭṭhānamahāpakaraṇavasena ca gahetabba’’nti vadanti. Vibhattiyantaṃ atthassa ñāpanato padaṃ. Pajjati attho etenāti hi padaṃ. Taṃ nāmapadaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ upasaggapadaṃ nipātapadanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha phasso vedanā cittanti evamādikaṃ dabbapadhānaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Nāmapadehi dabbamāvibhūtarūpaṃ, kiriyā anāvibhūtarūpā. Phusati vedayati vijānātīti evamādikaṃ kiriyāpadhānaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Ākhyātapadehi kiriyā āvibhūtarūpā, dabbamanāvibhūtarūpaṃ. Yathā ‘‘cirappavāsi’’nti ettha pa-saddo vasanakiriyāya viyogavisiṭṭhataṃ dīpeti, evaṃ kiriyāvisesadīpanato kiriyāvisesāvabodhanimittaṃ. Pa-iti evamādikaṃ upasaggapadaṃ. Kiriyāya dabbassa ca sarūpavisesappakāsanahetubhūtaṃ evanti evamādikaṃ nipātapadaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ manasi karotha, mā evaṃ manasākatthā’’tiādīsu hi kiriyāvisesadīpanato kiriyāvisesassa jotako evaṃsaddo, ‘‘evaṃsīlā evaṃdhammā’’tiādīsu dabbavisesassa. Saṅkhepato vuttaṃ padābhihitaṃ atthaṃ byañjetīti byañjanaṃ, vākyaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro iddhipādā’’ti saṅkhepena kathitamatthaṃ ‘‘katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāveti, vīriya, citta, vīmaṃsasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā pākaṭaṃ karotīti vākyameva byañjanaṃ, taṃ pana atthato padasamudāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saākhyātaṃ sanipātaṃ sakārakaṃ savisesanaṃ vākyanti hi vadanti. Nanu ca padenapi attho byañjīyatīti padampi byañjananti āpajjatīti? Taṃ na. Padamattasavanepi hi adhikārādivasena labbhamānehi padantarehi anusandhānaṃ katvāva atthasampaṭipatti hotīti vākyameva atthaṃ byañjayatīti.
按类别区分语句,就是“形态”。比如在“其中,什么是欲?凡是欲、想要、希望去做”这类话里,把已经说出的语句按多种方式加以区分,就叫作“形态”。把形态所表达的内容解释出来,就是“辞”。比如在“触、受”这类话里,把形态所说的内容,通过“能碰触所以是触,能感受所以是受”这样的方式提取出来,再详细展开说明,就叫作“辞”。通过“它趋向涅槃,或者被想求涅槃的人所寻求,或者灭除烦恼而行,所以是道”这样的方式,把辞的解释详细展开,因为毫无遗漏地解说了,所以叫“详释”。或者,在通过“能感受所以是受”这种辞的解释而得到的词中,对于乐、苦、不苦不乐,详细说明“能让人快乐所以是乐,能让人痛苦所以是苦,既不让人痛苦也不让人快乐所以是不苦不乐”这样的含义,因为毫无遗漏地解说了,所以叫“详释”。由于这些字母等、词句的圆满具足,所以是“具足句”。巴利
Pakārato vākyavibhāgo ākāro. ‘‘Tattha katamo chando? Yo chando chandikatā kattukamyatā’’ti evamādīsu kathitasseva vākyassa anekavidhena vibhāgakaraṇaṃ ākāro nāma. Ākārābhihitaṃ nibbacanaṃ nirutti. ‘‘Phasso vedanā’’ti evamādīsu ākārena kathitaṃ ‘‘phusatīti phasso, vedayatīti vedanā’’ti nīharitvā vitthāravacanaṃ nirutti nāma. ‘‘Nibbānaṃ maggati, nibbānatthikehi vā maggīyati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti maggo’’tiādinā nibbacanavitthāro niravasesadesanattā niddeso. Atha vā vedayatīti vedanāti nibbacanaladdhapadesu sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhāsu sukhayatīti sukhā, dukkhayatīti dukkhā, neva dukkhayati na sukhayatīti adukkhamasukhāti atthavitthāro niravasesena kathitattā niddeso nāma. Etesaṃ akkharādīnaṃ byañjanapadānaṃ sampattiyā sampannatāya sabyañjanaṃ.
应当这样理解:义与词的结合,以及词句的圆满成就。其中,世尊用文字让人知晓,用词句让人明了,用文句让人开显,用方式让人分别,用语义解释让人清楚,用详释让人设定。也就是说,通过把握词的组成部分来把握词,而凭借已把握的词,对于先前已有约定的人,就能理解词的含义,所以世尊用文字让人知晓。然而,用文字简要显示的意义,在词结束的时候,因为句子还没有完结,所以先由词来阐明、显示,因此说用词句让人明了。而在句子完结的时候,那个意义就被开显、显露出来,因此说文句让人开显。又因为用种种方式对句子作出区分时,那个意义就被分别开来,所以说用方式让人分别。同样,当对句子的各个部分逐一作出语义解释的区分时,那个意义就变得明显,所以说用语义解释让人清楚。而通过已经作了语义解释的句子部分,以详细的方式毫无遗漏地解说时,就能让所教化的众生心生满足、成就智慧,所以说用详释让人设定。再者,世尊用文字打开后,用词句引导略解者;用文句展开后,用方式引导广解者;用语义解释引导后,用详释引导可引导者。这样,此法在被打开时引导略解者,在被展开时引导广解者,在被引导时引导可引导者。其中,打开是初,展开是中,引导是后。如此,在三个阶段中以三种方式宣说,能消除三种过失,带来三种功德,引导三种所化众生。因此,应当知道,这法具有三种善,因为义与文句都圆满具足,所以有义、有文。对此,在《导论》中已经说过。巴利
Evaṃ panassa atthapadasamāyogo byañjanapadasampatti ca veditabbā. Tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapeti. Tathā hi padāvayavaggahaṇamukhena padaggahaṇaṃ, gahitena ca padena padatthāvabodho gahitapubbasaṅketassa hotīti bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti. Yasmā pana akkharehi saṃkhittena dīpiyamāno attho padapariyosāne vākyassa apariyositattā padena paṭhamaṃ pakāsito dīpito hoti, tasmā padehi pakāseti. Vākyapariyosāne pana so attho vivarito vivaṭo kato hotīti byañjanehi vivarati. Yasmā ca pakārehi vākyabhede kate tadattho vibhatto nāma hoti, tasmā ākārehi vibhajati. Tathā vākyāvayavānaṃ paccekaṃ nibbacanavibhāge kate so attho pākaṭo hotīti niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti. Katanibbacanehi pana vākyāvayavehi vitthāravasena niravasesato desitehi veneyyānaṃ cittaparitosanaṃ buddhinisānañca kataṃ hotīti niddesehi paññapeti. Apica bhagavā akkharehi ugghaṭetvā padehi vineti ugghaṭitaññuṃ, byañjanehi vipañcetvā ākārehi vineti vipañcitaññuṃ, niruttīhi netvā niddesehi vineti neyyaṃ. Evañcāyaṃ dhammo ugghaṭiyamāno ugghaṭitaññuṃ vineti, vipañciyamāno vipañcitaññuṃ, nīyamāno neyyaṃ. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, nayanaṃ ante. Evaṃ tīsu kālesu tidhā desito dosattayavidhamano guṇattayāvaho tividhavineyyavinayanoti evampi tividhakalyāṇoyaṃ dhammo atthabyañjanapāripūriyā sāttho sabyañjanoti veditabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ nettipakaraṇe (netti. 9) –
在这里,世尊用文字让人明白,用词句来显示,用文句来打开,用行相来分析,用语义解释来让意思变得浅显易懂,用详细解说加以施设。在这里,世尊用文字和词句来揭示,用文句和行相来详细阐明,用语义解释和详细解说来展开。在这里,揭示是开头,详细阐明是中间,展开是结尾。这法和律,在揭示的时候,调伏了能通过揭示而领悟的人,因此人们称它为初善;在详细阐明的时候,调伏了能通过详细阐明而领悟的人,因此人们称它为中善;在展开的时候,调伏了需要被引导的人,因此人们称它为后善。巴利
‘‘Tattha bhagavā akkharehi saṅkāseti, padehi pakāseti, byañjanehi vivarati, ākārehi vibhajati, niruttīhi uttāniṃ karoti, niddesehi paññapeti. Tattha bhagavā akkharehi ca padehi ca ugghaṭeti, byañjanehi ca ākārehi ca vipañceti, niruttīhi ca niddesehi ca vitthāreti. Tattha ugghaṭanā ādi, vipañcanā majjhe, vitthāranā pariyosānaṃ. Soyaṃ dhammavinayo ugghaṭiyanto ugghaṭitaññuṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu ādikalyāṇoti. Vipañciyanto vipañcitaññuṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu majjhekalyāṇoti. Vitthāriyanto neyyaṃ puggalaṃ vineti, tena naṃ āhu pariyosānakalyāṇotī’’ti.
在“义深”等说法里,“义”指的是经藏之义,“法”指的是经藏,“通达”指的是对经藏和经藏之义如实了知,“开示”指的是以心确定经藏之后的宣说。不过这些义等,因为像大海对兔子之类一样,对智慧迟钝的人来说难以深入,也找不到立足处,所以说是“深”。另一种说法:“义”指因果,“法”指因,“开示”指施设,也就是如法而说的法语,或者按顺、逆、略、广等方式来说。“通达”指现观,也就是随顺义而于诸法、随顺法而于诸义、随顺施设路径而于诸施设的了知;或者指应当通达的诸法各自之相,即无颠倒的自性。这些义等,也因为像大海对兔子之类一样,对未积集善资粮的劣慧者来说难以深入,也找不到立足处,所以说是“深”。其中,因为通达也依附于义,为了显示义的功德,所以说“以义深与通达深而具义”。因为那些法说依附于文句,为了显示其文句成就,所以说“以法深与开示深而具文”。于义中分类而生的智是义无碍解;于义、法、词无碍解中分类而生的智是辩无碍解——由于此无碍解也以义为境,所以说“以义无碍解与辩无碍解为境而具义”,因为若没有义成就,此则不存在。“法”即经藏;“词”即对经藏词句加以确定后的言说。其中,分类而生的智是法无碍解与词无碍解,所以说“以法无碍解与词无碍解为境而具文”,因为若没有文句成就,此则不存在。巴利
Atthagambhīratātiādīsu attho nāma tantiattho. Dhammo tanti. Paṭivedho tantiyā tantiatthassa ca yathābhūtāvabodho. Desanā nāma manasā vavatthāpitāya tantiyā desanā. Te panete atthādayo yasmā sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo mandabuddhīhi dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Atha vā attho nāma hetuphalaṃ. Dhammo hetu. Desanā paññatti, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpo. Anulomapaṭilomasaṅkhepavitthārādivasena vā kathanaṃ. Paṭivedho abhisamayo, atthānurūpaṃ dhammesu, dhammānurūpaṃ atthesu, paññattipathānurūpaṃ paññattīsu avabodho. Tesaṃ tesaṃ vā dhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo lakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo. Tepi cete atthādayo yasmā anupacitakusalasambhārehi duppaññehi sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo dukkhogāhā alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā ca, tasmā gambhīrā. Tesu paṭivedhassapi atthasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sāttha’’nti atthaguṇadīpanato. Tāsaṃ dhammadesanānaṃ byañjanasannissitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjana’’nti tāsaṃ byañjanasampattidīpanato. Atthesu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā, atthadhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsu pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidāti imissāpi paṭisambhidāya atthavisayattā āha ‘‘atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sāttha’’nti atthasampattiyā asati tadabhāvato. Dhammoti tanti. Niruttīti tantipadānaṃ niddhāretvā vacanaṃ. Tattha pabhedagatāni ñāṇāni dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāti āha ‘‘dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjana’’nti asati byañjanasampattiyā tadabhāvato.
在“令审察者生净信”这句话里,iti这个词表示原因。因为能令审察者——也就是那些寻求什么是善的人——生起净信,所以是“具义”。“义成就”是通过果来推断因,就像看到河水涨满就能推知上游下过雨一样。而它的具义性在于它是智者才能觉知的,这应当理解为因为它极为深奥、微细、精妙。正如所说的“深奥、难见”等等。“令世俗人生净信”所以是“具文”,因为能令世俗人生起净信,所以是“具文”。世俗人确实会因为文句的圆满而满足。这里同样是通过果来推断因。而它的具文性在于它值得信受,这应当从“初善”等状态来理解。或者也可以这样理解:因为是为智者所觉知的,所以“具义”,这是说以智慧为立足处而义成就;由此,能令审察者生净信、值得信受,所以“具文”,这是说以信心为立足处而文句成就;由此,能令世俗人生净信——这里应当这样理解其含义。因为意趣深奥,所以“具义”,是说由于意趣不可测度、没有边际而义成就,否则就不会这样。因为文句浅显,所以“具文”,是说由于音声易于理解而文句成就,因为即使极为深奥的义理,也能让所教化的人容易理解。应当知道,所有这些都是在说:以义成就而“具义”,以文句成就而“具文”,这是对前面最初所说的两层含义的详细展开。各处注释也是这样解释的。同样,这里没有采用“简择”或“合集”的解释。因为没有可添加的东西,也就是没有可加入的、尚未说到的清净之义。kevala这个词是“完整”的同义词,所以说“以完整圆满的状态”,意思是由一切部分而圆满。“应当去除的”,就是指杂染法。巴利
Parikkhakajanappasādakantīti ettha iti-saddo hetuattho. Yasmā parikkhakajanānaṃ kiṃkusalagavesīnaṃ pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sātthaṃ. Atthasampannanti phalena hetuno anumānaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhipavattiyā. Sātthakatā panassa paṇḍitavedanīyatāya, sā paramagambhīrasaṇhasukhumabhāvato veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘gambhīro duddaso’’tiādi. Lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjananti yasmā lokiyajanassa pasādāvahaṃ, tasmā sabyañjanaṃ. Lokiyajano hi byañjanasampattiyā tussati. Idhāpi phalena hetuno anumānaṃ. Sabyañjanatā panassa saddheyyatāya, sā ādikalyāṇādibhāvato veditabbā. Atha vā paṇḍitavedanīyato sātthanti paññāpadaṭṭhānatāya atthasampannataṃ āha, tato parikkhakajanappasādakaṃ saddheyyato sabyañjananti saddhāpadaṭṭhānatāya byañjanasampannataṃ, tato lokiyajanappasādatanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthanti adhippāyato agādhāpāratāya atthasampannaṃ aññathā tadabhāvato. Uttānapadato sabyañjananti subodhasaddakatāya byañjanasampannaṃ paramagambhīrassapi atthassa vineyyānaṃ suviññeyyabhāvāpādanato. Sabbopesa atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjananti sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuttasseva atthadvayassa papañcoti daṭṭhabbo. Tathā ceva tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Tathā hettha vikappassa samuccayassa vā aggahaṇaṃ. Upanetabbassa abhāvatoti pakkhipitabbassa vodānatthassa avuttassa abhāvato. Kevalasaddo sakalādhivacananti āha ‘‘sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvenā’’ti , sabbabhāgehi paripuṇṇatāyāti attho. Apanetabbassāti saṃkilesadhammassa.
在“阐明梵行”这一说法里,“梵行”这个词可以出现在这些含义上:布施、服务、五戒的戒行、四无量心、远离淫欲、满足于自己的妻子、精进、布萨支、圣道、教法。巴利
Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti ettha pana ayaṃ brahmacariya-saddo dāne veyyāvacce pañcasikkhāpadasīle appamaññāsu methunaviratiyaṃ sadārasantose vīriye uposathaṅgesu ariyamagge sāsaneti imesu atthesu dissati.
你的誓愿是什么?你的梵行又是什么?
这是什么样的善行所带来的果报?
神通、光辉、力量与精进的成就,
以及你这如龙象之广大天宫。
我和妻子在人间时,
我们两人都是具足信心的施主。
那时我的家就像一口水井,
沙门婆罗门也都得到了满足。
这就是我的誓愿,这就是我的梵行,
这就是那善修善行的果报;
神通、光辉、力量与精进的成就,
智者啊,这也是我的广大天宫。巴利
‘‘Kiṃ te vataṃ kiṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Kissa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca te nāgamahāvimānaṃ. ‘‘Ahañca bhariyā ca manussaloke, Saddhā ubho dānapatī ahumhā; Opānabhūtaṃ me gharaṃ tadāsi, Santappitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā ca. ‘‘Taṃ me vataṃ taṃ pana brahmacariyaṃ, Tassa suciṇṇassa ayaṃ vipāko; Iddhī jutī balavīriyūpapatti, Idañca me dhīra mahāvimāna’’nti. –
在《布纳迦本生》里,布施被称为“梵行”。巴利
Imasmiñhi puṇṇakajātake (jā. 2.22.1592-1593, 1595) dānaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ.
因为什么,手能布施人所欲求?因为什么,手能像蜜一样甘甜?
你凭什么样的梵行,让福德在手中得以圆满?
因为这样,我的手能施予人所欲求;因为这样,我的手流洒出蜜汁。
以此梵行,功德于我掌中成就。巴利
‘‘Kena pāṇi kāmadado, kena pāṇi madhussavo; Kena te brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhati. ‘‘Tena pāṇi kāmadado, tena pāṇi madhussavo; Tena me brahmacariyena, puññaṃ pāṇimhi ijjhatī’’ti. –
在这部《鹙鹭饿鬼事》(《小部》275、277)里,服侍义务被称为“梵行”。在《鹧鸪本生》(《小部》311)中——“比丘们,那鹧鸪的梵行就是这样的”——五学处之戒被称为“梵行”。在《大 govinda 经》(《长部》2.329)中——“五髻啊,我那个梵行,不是为了厌离,不是为了离欲,不是为了灭尽,只是为了投生梵天界”——四无量被称为“梵行”。在《渐损经》(《中部》1.83)中——“别人会成为非梵行者,我们在这里要当梵行者”——远离淫欲被称为“梵行”。巴利
Imasmiṃ aṅkurapetavatthumhi (pe. va. 275, 277) veyyāvaccaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ kho taṃ bhikkhave tittiriyaṃ nāma brahmacariyaṃ ahosī’’ti (cūḷava. 311) imasmiṃ tittirajātake pañcasikkhāpadasīlaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ kho pana me pañcasikha brahmacariyaṃ neva nibbidāya na virāgāya na nirodhāya yāvadeva brahmalokūpapattiyā’’ti imasmiṃ mahāgovindasutte (dī. ni. 2.329) catasso appamaññāyo ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttā. ‘‘Pare abrahmacārī bhavissanti, mayamettha brahmacārī bhavissāmā’’ti imasmiṃ sallekhasutte (ma. ni. 1.83) methunavirati ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttā.
我们也不越过妻子。
妻子们也不越过我们。
除了跟她们在一起,我们修梵行,
因此,我们的年轻人就不会死。巴利
‘‘Mayañca bhariyā nātikkamāma, Amhe ca bhariyā nātikkamanti; Aññatra tāhi brahmacariyaṃ carāma, Tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti. –
《大法护本生》(《本生》1.10.97)里,满足于自己妻子的状态被称为“梵行”。《身毛竖立经》(《中部》1.155)里说:“舍利弗,我确实记得,我曾修习具备四支的梵行,那时我确实是苦行者。”这里则是把精进称为“梵行”。巴利
Mahādhammapālajātake (jā. 1.10.97) sadārasantoso ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Abhijānāmi kho panāhaṃ, sāriputta, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ brahmacariyaṃ caritā, tapassī sudaṃ homī’’ti lomahaṃsanasutte (ma. ni. 1.155) vīriyaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ.
以低劣的梵行,投生在刹帝利族中;
以中等的梵行投生天界,以殊胜的梵行得到净化。巴利
‘‘Hīnena brahmacariyena, khattiye upapajjati; Majjhimena ca devattaṃ, uttamena visujjhatī’’ti. –
在《尼弥本生》里,以调伏自己而修的八支布萨被称为“梵行”。《大戈宾达经》里说:“五髻,我这种梵行,确实导向彻底的厌离、离欲……乃至……这就是圣八支道。”——这里把圣道称为“梵行”。《清净经》里说:“这种梵行确实成就、兴旺、广布、为众人所知、普遍流行,直到被人们善加宣说。”——这里把含摄三学的整个教法称为“梵行”。在这个地方,所指的也正是这种梵行,所以说“因为被三学所摄持”等等。“最胜者”就是指佛陀等最胜之人。或者,以最胜为义,梵之行持就是梵行。巴利
Evaṃ (jā. 2.22.429) nimijātake attadamanavasena kato aṭṭhaṅgiko uposatho ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Idaṃ kho pana me, pañcasikha, brahmacariyaṃ ekantanibbidāya virāgāya…pe… ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo’’ti mahāgovindasuttasmiṃyeva (dī. ni. 2.329) ariyamaggo ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vutto. ‘‘Tayidaṃ brahmacariyaṃ iddhañceva phītañca vitthārikaṃ bāhujaññaṃ puthubhūtaṃ yāvadeva manussehi suppakāsita’’nti pāsādikasutte (dī. ni. 3.174) sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti vuttaṃ. Imasmimpi ṭhāne idameva ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘sikkhattayapariggahitattā’’tiādi. Seṭṭhehīti buddhādīhi seṭṭhehi. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtaṃ vā cariyaṃ brahmacariyaṃ.
有因缘:以如前所说的特征为因缘,所以有因缘。有因事生起:就是因事而生起。随顺所化者:随顺所化者的行为等。有义利:对所宣说的戒等义利。具足理由与譬喻:以“诸比丘,那是什么原因?譬如”等,随处引用理由与譬喻,所以具足理由与譬喻。以信获得:以“他们听闻了那法后,于如来处获得信”等所说的信获得。以行道:以戒清净等正行道,就是行道的因相。以证得而明达:因为以谛现观而证得明达,所以有义利,不像迦毗罗宗等那样空虚无义,而是具足义利。以教法:以通达教法。以阿含而明达:不像在恶说之法中修习者那样产生迷惑,因为多闻明达而确立,所以有文句。文句具足时,就有阿含的明达。具足戒等五法蕴:因为不远离戒等五种法蕴。完全圆满:无余、周遍地圆满,完全充满。无随烦恼:因为没有见、慢等随烦恼。为渡越:为从轮回之苦中出离。不期望世间利养:因为完全不依止于渴爱,所以清净。这里说的是:如果有人为了“我将由此说法获得利养或恭敬”而说法,他的说法就不清净。而世尊不期望世间利养,以利益遍满的慈心修习,以柔软之心、以救拔为本性的心而说法,所以他的说法是清净的。巴利
Sanidānanti heṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇena nidānena sanidānaṃ. Sauppattikanti saaṭṭhuppattikaṃ. Veneyyānaṃanurūpatoti veneyyānaṃ cariyādianurūpato. Atthassāti desiyamānassa sīlādiatthassa. Hetudāharaṇayuttatoti ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’ti ca ādinā tattha tattha hetupamaggahaṇena hetudāharaṇehi yuttato. Saddhāpaṭilābhenāti ‘‘te taṃ dhammaṃ sutvā tathāgate saddhaṃ paṭilabhantī’’tiādinā vuttasaddhāpaṭilābhena. Paṭipattiyāti sīlavisuddhiyādisammāpaṭipattiyā, paṭipattinimittanti attho. Adhigamabyattitoti saccappaṭivedhena adhigamaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sātthaṃ kapilamatādi viya tucchaṃ niratthakaṃ ahutvā atthasampannanti katvā. Pariyattiyāti pariyattidhammaparicayena. Āgamabyattitoti durakkhātadhammesu paricayaṃ karontassa viya sammohaṃ ajanetvā bāhusaccaveyyattiyasabbhāvato sabyañjanaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā hi sati āgamabyattīti. Sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttatoti sīlādīhi pañcahi dhammakoṭṭhāsehi avirahitattā. Kevalaparipuṇṇanti anavasesena samantato puṇṇaṃ pūritaṃ. Nirupakkilesatoti diṭṭhimānādiupakkilesābhāvato. Nittharaṇatthāyāti vaṭṭadukkhato nissaraṇāya. Lokāmisanirapekkhatoti kathañcipi taṇhāsannissayassa anissayato parisuddhaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo ‘‘imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ nissāya lābhaṃ vā sakkāraṃ vā labhissāmī’’ti deseti, tassa aparisuddhā desanā hoti. Bhagavā pana lokāmisanirapekkho hitapharaṇena mettābhāvanāya muduhadayo ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitena cittena deseti, tasmā tassa desanā parisuddhāti.
“善哉”这个词,在“善哉,尊者,请世尊为我简要地说法”这类句子里,是表示请求。在“那位比丘说‘善哉,尊者’,对世尊所说的话感到欢喜、赞同”这类句子里,是表示接受。在“善哉,善哉,舍利弗”这类句子里,是表示称赞。在“那么,婆罗门,你好好听”这类句子里,是表示强调和命令。巴利
Sādhūti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘sādhu me bhante bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.95) āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Tena hi brāhmaṇa sādhukaṃ suṇohī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 5.192) daḷhīkamme āṇattiyañca dissati.
这位乐于正法的国王真好,这位有智慧的人真好。
善哉,不欺朋友,不作恶,这就是乐。巴利
‘‘Sādhu dhammaruci rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassākaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. –
在“美好”等语中(《本生经》2.18.101),指的是“善妙的”。这里也应当理解为“善妙的”,所以说“善哉,确实是善妙的”。其中,“善妙的”就是吉祥的。而吉祥性对于见到的人来说,具有带来利益与安乐的性质,所以说“带来利益、带来安乐”。其中,“带来利益”指带来现世、来世以及胜义上的利益。“带来安乐”指带来如前所说的三种安乐。“如是等”指那样的。世尊具足怎样的功德,就凭那些功德如实的本性,在任何时候都能让四众世间生起极度的净信,为了显示这一点而说了“如实相”等。其中,通过“如实……阿拉汉”这些,显示依法衡量和依粗劣标准衡量的众生对世尊生起净信,而通过这一显示,也应当知道其余依色衡量、依声衡量的众生同样生起净信,因为他们不离于此。“宣扬梵行”指名声远扬,这里的关联就是这样,所以说“即使仅仅见到也是善妙的,如此作意后”等。其中,“即使仅仅见到也是善妙的”这里应当讲述拘翅鸟的故事。巴利
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. Idhāpi sundareyeva daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho panā’’ti. Tattha sundaranti bhaddakaṃ. Bhaddakatā ca passantassa hitasukhāvahabhāvenāti āha ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Tattha atthāvahanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthasaññitahitāvahaṃ. Sukhāvahanti yathāvuttatividhasukhāvahaṃ. Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ . Yādisehi pana guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato, tehi catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbakālepi accantāya pasādanīyo tesaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvattāti dassento ‘‘yathārūpo’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathābhucca…pe… arahatanti iminā dhammappamāṇānaṃ lūkhappamāṇānañca sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahataṃ dasseti, taṃdassanena ca itaresampi rūpappamāṇaghosappamāṇānaṃ pasādāvahatā dassitā hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ tadavinābhāvato. Brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetīti kittisaddo abbhuggatoti evamettha sambandhoti āha ‘‘dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti evamajjhāsayaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Tattha dassanamattampi sādhu hotīti ettha kosiyasakuṇavatthu kathetabbaṃ.
2 “以某种原因”这句话里,具格形式表达的是原因。因为“原因”指的是行为的起因,不像“工具”那样表示行为的方式。所以,这里说的“前往”这种行为,是为了证得种种功德上的殊胜,因此这个具格形式适合表达原因义——就像“以食物而住”这类说法一样——而不是表达工具义,因为把它当作工具义讲不通。因此说“以某种原因”。由于没有加以区分,世尊被比喻为一棵结着甜美果实、恒常结果的大树,这棵大树持续不断地流出无上、极其甜美的正法果实,其味甘美、丰盛。因为仅仅通过受用甜美果实这一意趣的把握,就已经把握了大树的甜美果实性。所谓“前往”,就是正在前往。因为想要到达,所以走向某个地方时,由于越过一处又一处地方,便获得了“前往、正在前往”这样的说法。因此说“已去,这句话的意思就是”,即“已到达”的意思。所谓“前往之后”,是对先行时行为的说明,所以说“表明前往的结束”。所谓“那里”,就是所到达的那个地方,即从已到达的那个地方。所谓“更近的地方”,就是能够提问或听法的地方。巴利
2.Yena vā kāraṇenāti hetumhi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Hetuattho hi kiriyākāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyattho, tasmā nānappakāraguṇavisesādhigamatthā idha upasaṅkamanakiriyāti ‘‘annena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuatthamevetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ yuttaṃ, na karaṇatthaṃ tassa ayujjamānattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘yena vā kāraṇenā’’ti. Avibhāgato hi satatappavattaniratisayasāduvipulāmatarasasaddhammaphalatāyassa sāduphalaniccaphalitamahārukkhena bhagavā upamito. Sāduphalūpabhogādhippāyaggahaṇeneva hi mahārukkhassa sāduphalatā gahitāti. Upasaṅkamīti upasaṅkamanto. Sampattakāmatāya hi kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃtaṃpadesātikkamanena upasaṅkami upasaṅkamantoti vattabbataṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘gatoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti, upagatoti attho. Upasaṅkamitvāti pubbakālakiriyāniddesoti āha ‘‘upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpana’’nti. Tatoti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patto upasaṅkamīti vutto, tato upagataṭṭhānato. Āsannataraṃ ṭhānanti pañhaṃ vā pucchituṃ dhammaṃ vā sotuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānaṃ.
世尊问“婆罗门,你还安好吗?还能维持吗?”等问候安康的话时,就和那位婆罗门一起生起了交融的喜悦。由于先前已经说过,那位婆罗门也照着这样做,同样和世尊一起生起了交融的喜悦——应当这样连接理解。为了用譬喻说明这种交融的喜悦,才说了“像清凉的水一样”等话。“欢喜欢聚”是指彼此融洽。“成为一体”是指通过欢喜的互动而达到同等、同一的状态。“安好吗”是在问:“这个四轮九门的身体机器,因为苦太多,本质上难以忍受,你能忍受吗?“能维持”是指依缘而活、名为长久延续的维持,你能维持吗?因无头痛等疾病,问是否少病。因无痛苦的生活,问是否少恼。因作种种事务时起身轻快,问是否轻便。因具有与之相应的力量,问是否有力。因有安乐住的生起,问是否有安乐住——应在各处配上“是否”一词来理解其义。达到力量的喜就是喜本身。初生之喜是悦。生起欢喜欢聚,作此作用者名为欢喜欢聚,也就是“可欢喜欢聚的”,所以说“因生起欢喜欢聚”。从可欢喜欢聚的角度说“可欢喜欢聚”,为了显示这个意思,说“因适合欢喜欢聚”。从可忆念的角度说,从可随念的角度。“应忆念”本应说“saraṇīya”,拉长后说成“sāraṇīya”。从听闻时的快乐说,是指当下最为甜美。从随念时的快乐说,是指反复咀嚼的甘美。因文句清净,是指以本性语言的状态,说彼语的言辞善巧。因义理清净,是指义理无有杂染。以多种方式,是指以多种原因。巴利
Yathā khamanīyādīni pucchantoti yathā bhagavā ‘‘kacci te brāhmaṇa khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā khamanīyādīni pucchanto tena brāhmaṇena saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosi. Pubbabhāsitāya tadanukaraṇena evaṃ sopi brāhmaṇo bhagavatā saddhiṃ samappavattamodo ahosīti yojanā. Taṃ pana samappavattamodataṃ upamāya dassetuṃ ‘‘sītodakaṃ viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sammoditanti saṃsanditaṃ. Ekībhāvanti sammodanakiriyāya samānataṃ ekarūpataṃ. Khamanīyanti ‘‘idaṃ catucakkaṃ navadvāraṃ sarīrayantaṃ dukkhabahulatāya sabhāvato dussahaṃ, kacci khamituṃ sakkuṇeyyanti pucchati. Yāpanīyanti paccayāyattavuttikaṃ cirappabandhasaṅkhātāya yāpanāya kacci yāpetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṃ. Sīsarogādiābādhābhāvena kacci appābādhaṃ. Dukkhajīvikābhāvena kacci appātaṅkaṃ. Taṃtaṃkiccakaraṇe uṭṭhānasukhatāya kacci lahuṭṭhānaṃ. Tadanurūpabalayogato kacci balaṃ. Sukhavihārasambhavena kacci phāsuvihāro atthīti tattha tattha kaccisaddaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo . Balappattā pīti pītiyeva. Taruṇapīti pāmojjaṃ. Sammodaṃ janeti karotīti sammodanikaṃ, tadeva sammodanīyanti āha ‘‘sammodajananato’’ti. Sammoditabbato sammodanīyanti idaṃ pana atthaṃ dassento ‘‘sammodituṃ yuttabhāvato’’ti āha. Saritabbabhāvatoti anussaritabbabhāvato. ‘‘Saraṇīya’’nti vattabbe dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘sāraṇīya’’nti vuttaṃ. Suyyamānasukhatoti āpāthamadhuratamāha. Anussariyamānasukhatoti vimaddaramaṇīyataṃ. Byañjanaparisuddhatāyāti sabhāvaniruttibhāvena tassā kathāya vacanacāturiyamāha. Atthaparisuddhatāyāti atthassa nirupakkilesataṃ. Anekehi pariyāyehīti anekehi kāraṇehi.
通过排除过远和过近,就得到了所谓的“不太远也不太近”。这个距离,最低限度应该以两个人伸直手臂能碰到为准。“伸颈”是指转动脖子把颈伸出去。“我”是表示动作执行者的具格,所以经文说“我听闻”。“种姓婆罗门”是指因为出身而成为婆罗门,并不是因为已经断除了恶行,这里说的就是这个意思。“令成缺齿等相”是指造成了牙齿缺损、头发花白这类状态。“达到年长的界限”是指到了年长的分界点,也就是到了年长的终点。“因为种姓而年老”是指因为出生而具有年老的状态。持有“大”之状态者称为“老人”,因出生而年老,并非因财富等而年老,所以是“因种姓而年老”。“长时间”是指长久的时间。那么到底有多久呢?回答说“两三个国王的轮替”,意思是两位或三位国王统治教化的次第。“已到时间”说了之后,为什么取年老要着眼于最后阶段呢?回答说“已到最后的年老阶段”。最后即第三部分,从六十七岁开始是最后年老的阶段。巴利
Atidūraaccāsannapaṭikkhepena nātidūranāccāsannaṃ nāma gahitaṃ, taṃ pana avakaṃsato ubhinnaṃ pasāritahatthāsaṅghaṭṭanena daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gīvaṃ pasāretvāti gīvaṃ parivattanavasena pasāretvā. Meti kattuatthe sāmivacananti āha ‘‘mayā suta’’nti. Jātibrāhmaṇeti jātiyā brāhmaṇe, na bāhitapāpatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Khaṇḍiccādibhāvaṃ āpāditeti khaṇḍitadantapalitakesādibhāvaṃ sampāpite. Vuḍḍhimariyādappatteti vuḍḍhiparicchedaṃ sampatte, vuḍḍhipariyantappatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Jātimahallakatāyāti uppattiyā mahallakabhāvena. Mahattaṃ lāti gaṇhātīti mahallako, jātiyā mahallako, na vibhavādināti jātimahallako. Addhānanti dīghakālaṃ. Kittako pana soti āha ‘‘dve tayo rājaparivaṭṭe’’ti, dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ rājūnaṃ rajjapasāsanapaṭipāṭiyoti attho. ‘‘Addhagate’’ti vatvā kathaṃ vayogahaṇaṃ osānavayāpekkhanti āha ‘‘pacchimavayaṃ anuppatte’’ti. Pacchimo tatiyabhāgoti sattasaṭṭhito paṭṭhāya pacchimavayo koṭṭhāso.
在第二个义释中,“年老”并不是单指年龄上的衰老,而是因为家族世代相传而显得古老,所以说“年老就是古老”等等。这是说明那些婆罗门依家族而有兴衰起落。“年岁已达”这句话,因为接下来要依出生的增长来说,而功德的增长比它更殊胜,所以说“增长就是具足戒行等功德的增长”。同样,因为“年长”也要依这个来说,所以用“年长”这个词来关联财富的广大。“行道者”是指已经进入婆罗门的修行方式、没有偏离其行持的人。“最后时期”是指生命的最后阶段。巴利
Dutiye atthavikappe jiṇṇeti nāyaṃ jiṇṇatā vayomattena, atha kho kulaparivaṭṭena purāṇatāyāti āha ‘‘jiṇṇeti porāṇe’’tiādi. Tena tesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ kulavasena uditoditabhāvamāha. ‘‘Vayoanuppatte’’ti iminā jātivuḍḍhiyā vakkhamānattā guṇavuḍḍhiyā tato sātisayattā ca ‘‘vuḍḍheti sīlācārādiguṇavuḍḍhiyutte’’ti āha. Tathā jātimahallakatāyapi teneva vakkhamānattā mahallaketi padena vibhavamahattatā yojitā. Maggapaṭipanneti brāhmaṇānaṃ paṭipattividhiṃ upagate taṃ avokkamma caraṇato. Antimavayanti pacchimavayaṃ.
所谓“起立”,就是从座位上站起来,所以注释说“不从座位起身”,意思是不从所坐的座位站起来。这里,“年老……年岁已达”是受格,并不是配合从座位起身这个动作,所以应当补上“看见年老……年岁已达的人”来理解它的意思。另一种说法是,这个受格是配合迎接的动作,因此“不起立”应当理解为不起身迎接,因为迎接也叫作“起立”。确实有这样的说法:“远远看见老师就起身去迎接,这叫作起立。”而“不从座位起身”应当看作只是指出没有迎接这一点。在“说明”即所谓“义”中,即在被称为“如实说明”的义中,“不敬礼或”即不应当敬礼,这样审察,便是所说的意思。巴利
Paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāma āsanā vuṭṭhānanti āha ‘‘nāsanā vuṭṭhahatī’’ti, nisinnāsanato na vuṭṭhātīti attho. Ettha ca jiṇṇe…pe… vayoanuppatteti upayogavacanaṃ āsanā vuṭṭhānakiriyāpekkhaṃ na hoti, tasmā jiṇṇe…pe… vayoanuppatte disvāti ajjhāhāraṃ katvā attho veditabbo. Atha vā paccuggamanakiriyāpekkhaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, tasmā na paccuṭṭhetīti uṭṭhāya paccuggamanaṃ na karotīti attho veditabbo. Paccuggamanampi hi paccuṭṭhānanti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ācariyaṃ pana dūratova disvā paccuṭṭhāya paccuggamanakaraṇaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ nāmā’’ti. Nāsanā vuṭṭhātīti iminā pana paccuggamanābhāvassa upalakkhaṇamattaṃ dassitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vibhāvane nāma attheti pakativibhāvanasaṅkhāte atthe, na abhivādeti vāti na abhivādetabbanti sallakkhetīti vuttaṃ hoti.
那“无知”是指:因为不知道“这个人不值得我向他敬礼等”,所以生起的无知。“观察”是指:用智慧之眼观察,就像经里说的那样——“没有恭敬、没有尊重地生活是苦的,我该恭敬、尊重哪位沙门或婆罗门呢?”等等。“应受礼敬者”是指应受合掌礼敬的人。“刚出生”是指刚出生不久,也就是说出生之后紧接着。“面向北方”是指朝着北方,也就是面朝北方。“走了七步之后,观察整个一万世界”:这是根据经典里这样说的——“诸比丘,这是法性:刚出生的菩萨双脚平稳站定,面向北方走七步,白伞盖被举着跟随,他环视一切方向,说出如牛王般的话。”经中这样讲述走七步后环视一切方向,但不应据此认为是在走七步之后才观察方向,因为观察方向是在走七步之前做的。实际上,大士从人们手中脱出后,先看向东方,无数千个轮围世界变成一片平坦,那里的天与人用香、花等供养,并说:“大人,这里没有能和您相比的人,何况更超胜的?”就这样观察了四方、四隅、下方、上方共十个方向,没看到与自己相等的人,然后才说“这是北方”,走了七步。所谓“观察”,意思是:以我的福德威力使世界开阔的神变出现时,用肉眼观察那显现出来的一万世界。巴利
Taṃ aññāṇanti ‘‘ayaṃ mama abhivādanādīni kātuṃ araharūpo na hotī’’ti ajānanavasena pavattaṃ aññāṇaṃ. Olokentoti ‘‘dukkhaṃ kho agāravo viharati appatisso, kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā sakkareyyaṃ, garuṃ kareyya’’ntiādisuttavasena (a. ni. 4.21) ñāṇacakkhunā olokento. Nipaccakārārahanti paṇipātārahaṃ. Sampatijātoti muhuttajāto, jātasamanantaramevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Uttarena mukhoti uttarābhimukho, uttaradisābhimukhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sattapadavītihārena gantvā sakalaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ olokesinti idaṃ ‘‘dhammatā esā, bhikkhave, sampatijāto bodhisatto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā disā viloketi, āsabhiñca vācaṃ bhāsatī’’ti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 2.31) sattapadavītihārūpariṭṭhitassa viya sabbadisānuvilokanassa kathitattā vuttaṃ, na panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, sattapadavītihārato pageva disāvilokanassa katattā. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, anekāni cakkavāḷasahassāni ekaṅgaṇāni ahesuṃ. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā catasso anudisā heṭṭhā uparīti dasapi disā anuviloketvā attano sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti sattapadavītihārena agamāsīti veditabbo. Olokesinti mama puññānubhāvena lokavivaraṇapāṭihāriye jāte paññāyamānaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ maṃsacakkhunāva olokesinti attho.
所谓“大士”,就是按出生、种姓、家族、地域等方面来说的大人物。“最上”,就是按功德来说在一切人中最殊胜。“最年长”,就是按功德来说在一切人中最年长,也就是说在功德上最为成熟。“最优秀”,就是按功德来说在一切人中最值得称赞。从含义上说,应当知道后两个词只是前一个词的另一种说法。“比你”是处格当作具格用。“更超胜”就是更加殊胜。“敬奉”就是供养。“如牛王般的”就是最上的。“应受我敬礼等的人”,就是适合我敬礼等行为的人。然而这里应当看到,由于总是顾念,所以是复合词。“如来”是指从如来、从如来的身边来说的。“这样的”是指具有敬礼等性质的。“由成熟而松弛的束缚”是指由成熟而松弛的束缚。巴利
Mahāpurisoti jātigottakulappadesādivasena mahantapuriso. Aggoti guṇehi sabbapadhāno. Jeṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ vuḍḍhatamo, guṇehi mahallakatamoti vuttaṃ hoti. Seṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ pasatthatamo. Atthato pana pacchimāni dve purimasseva vevacanānīti veditabbaṃ. Tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Uttaritaroti adhikataro. Patimānesīti pūjesi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Mayhaṃ abhivādanādiraho puggaloti mayhaṃ abhivādanādikiriyāya araho anucchaviko puggalo. Niccasāpekkhatāya panettha samāso daṭṭhabbo. Tathāgatāti tathāgatato, tathāgatassa santikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Evarūpanti abhivādanādisabhāvaṃ. Paripākasithilabandhananti paripākena sithilabandhanaṃ.
3 那句话就是“我不是那个婆罗门”等话语。如果对他说“我不是没有味道的人,像我这样的人也不是没有味道的人”,婆罗门可能会变得僵硬。因此说“为了令心柔软”。这里“pariyāya”这个词用在开示、轮转、原因等意义上:在这里,能让应当开示的意义被理解、被觉悟,所以是“开示”;前后轮转,所以是“轮转”;执取自己的果而转起,或者成为它的因,所以是“原因”。应当这样理解“pariyāya”一词在开示、轮转、原因等意义上的运用。“以证知而确立”指在阿罗汉果中确立。“那个是哪个”是期待同义词的阳性指示词,意思是“那个同义词是哪个”。“以出生而言”指以刹帝利等出生而言。“以转生而言”指以在天神中转生而言。“即使是公认最优秀者”中的“即使”一词,显示更不用说非公认最优秀者。“欢喜者”指以有喜贪而喜悦者。“染著者”指以强力贪欲而染著者。由享用色等而生起的、与贪相应的喜受,从色产生后触击于心,犹如芒果味等,所以称为“色味”。“吸引”就是拉拽。在依处、所缘等条件和合之中。“不抬高”指因为自赞对婆罗门来说并不适宜,所以不抬高、不称赞自己。巴利
3.Taṃ vacananti ‘‘nāhaṃ taṃ brāhmaṇā’’tiādivacanaṃ. ‘‘Nāhaṃ arasarūpo, mādisā vā arasarūpā’’ti vutte brāhmaṇo thaddho bhaveyya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittamudubhāvajananattha’’nti. Ayañhi pariyāyasaddo desanāvārakāraṇesu vattatīti ettha pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ avagameti bodhetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati aparāparaṃ parivattetīti pariyāyo, vāro. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā vattati, tassa vā kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti evaṃ pariyāyasaddassa desanāvārakāraṇesu pavatti veditabbā. Aññāya saṇṭhaheyyāti arahatte patiṭṭhaheyya. Katamo pana soti pariyāyāpekkho pulliṅganiddeso, katamo so pariyāyoti attho. Jātivasenāti khattiyādijātivasena. Upapattivasenāti devesu upapattivasena. Seṭṭhasammatānampīti api-saddena pageva aseṭṭhasammatānanti dasseti. Abhinandantānanti sappītikataṇhāvasena pamodamānānaṃ. Rajjantānanti balavarāgavasena rajjantānaṃ. Rūpādiparibhogena uppannataṇhāyuttasomanassavedanā rūpato nibbattitvā hadayatappanato ambarasādayo viya ‘‘rūparasā’’ti vuccanti. Āviñchantīti ākaḍḍhanti. Vatthārammaṇādisāmaggiyanti vatthuārammaṇādikāraṇasāmaggiyaṃ. Anukkhipantoti attukkaṃsanavasena kathite brāhmaṇassa asappāyabhāvato attānaṃ anukkhipanto anukkaṃsento.
在这个意义上,当表达“作格”时,用的是属格,也就是“jahitā”这个词所表达的意思。“Tathāgatassa”是作格中的属格,意思是“被如来舍弃”。“Mūla”就是有的根本。本来应该说“tālavatthuvatthukatā”,但就像“oṭṭhamukho”这类词一样,把中间的词省略掉,又把a音拉长,所以说成“tālāvatthukatā”。因此注释里说:“就像多罗树的基址被作成它们的基址,所以叫tālāvatthukatā。”这里面,多罗树的基址就叫tālavatthu。比如一块地原本是园林的基址,园林没了以后,就被叫作“园林基址”;同样,多罗树扎根的地方,当多罗树被连根拔起,只剩那块地时,因为曾经是多罗树的基址,所以叫“tālavatthu”。“Nesaṃ”指的是色、味等。那为什么说“像多罗树的基址被作成它们的基址”呢?注释说“正如……”等等。因为通过享用色等而生起的、与渴爱相应的喜受,也就是色味等,是心相续的依止处,所以说“它们”。其中,“pubbe”是指先前,也就是有贪的时期,这是所说的意思。被称为“tālāvatthukatā”,是因为像多罗树的基址一样,自己的基址已被作成,所以色、味等被称为“tālāvatthukatā”。以此显示了已断烦恼不再生起。巴利
Etasmiṃ panatthe karaṇe sāmivacananti ‘‘jahitā’’ti etasmiṃ atthe. Tathāgatassāti karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ, tathāgatena jahitāti attho. Mūlanti bhavamūlaṃ. ‘‘Tālavatthuvatthukatā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘oṭṭhamukho’’tiādīsu viya majjhepadalopaṃ katvā akārañca dīghaṃ katvā ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti tālāvatthukatā’’ti. Tattha tālassa vatthu tālavatthu. Yathā ārāmassa vatthubhūtapubbo padeso ārāmassa abhāve ‘‘ārāmavatthū’’ti vuccati, evaṃ tālassa patiṭṭhitokāso samūlaṃ uddharite tāle padesamatte ṭhite tālassa vatthubhūtapubbattā ‘‘tālavatthū’’ti vuccati. Nesanti rūparasādīnaṃ. Kathaṃ pana tālavatthu viya nesaṃ vatthu katanti āha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi. Rūpādiparibhogena uppannataṇhāyuttasomanassavedanāsaṅkhātarūparasādīnaṃ cittasantānassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ pubbe uppannapubbabhāvena vatthumatte cittasantāne kate’’ti. Tattha pubbeti pure, sarāgakāleti vuttaṃ hoti. Tālāvatthukatāti vuccantīti tālavatthu viya attano vatthussa katattā rūparasādayo ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuccanti. Etena pahīnakilesānaṃ puna uppattiyā abhāvo dassito.
因为不再生长的法性,所以是“不再生长的法”。就像一棵顶部被砍断的多罗树,不再是叶子、果实等的依托之处,所以说“像顶部被砍断的多罗树一样被处理了”。由此展示了这样的词义分析:“像多罗树的残桩一样被处理了,所以叫多罗树残桩化”。不过这里应该理解为:本来应该说“像没有依托的多罗树一样被处理了”,也就是“无依托多罗树化”,但把修饰词后置,所以说成“多罗树残桩化”。通过这个意思,这里要表明的是:以“色、味等”这些说法,指的是过去曾作为异熟法生起的善法和不善法;这些法虽然已经生起,但因为像树顶一样的渴爱和无明已经被道的利剑斩断,未来再也没有能力产生像多罗树叶那样的异熟蕴,所以说色、味等“像多罗树的残桩一样被处理了,所以是多罗树残桩化”。在这个意思里,有人说“abhinandantānaṃ”这个词也包含了善的喜受。巴利
Aviruḷhidhammattāti aviruḷhisabhāvatāya. Matthakacchinno tālo pattaphalādīnaṃ avatthubhūto tālāvatthūti āha ‘‘matthakacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Etena ‘‘tālāvatthu viya katāti tālāvatthukatā’’ti ayaṃ viggaho dassito. Ettha pana avatthubhūto tālo viya katāti avatthutālākatāti vattabbe visesanassa padassa paranipātaṃ katvā ‘‘tālāvatthukatā’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Iminā panatthena idaṃ dasseti – rūparasādivacanena vipākadhammadhammā hutvā pubbe uppannā kusalākusaladhammā gahitā, te uppannāpi matthakasadisānaṃ taṇhāvijjānaṃ maggasatthena chinnattā āyatiṃ tālapattasadise vipākakkhandhe nibbattetuṃ asamatthā jātā, tasmā tālāvatthu viya katāti tālāvatthukatā rūparasādayoti. Imasmiñhi atthe ‘‘abhinandantāna’’nti iminā padena kusalasomanassampi saṅgahitanti vadanti.
“Anabhāvaṃkatā”(已令不存在)这里,前缀“anu”和“pacchā”(后来)意思相同,所以注释说“如同他们后来不再有存在”等等。“Anuabhāvaṃ gatā”的意思是:因为具有后来不再生起的性质,所以趣入不存在、归于灭尽,也就是已被断除。“Imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṃsū”(这些寻常的偈颂显现了,《大品》7,8)这里,为了举例说明“anacchariyā”一词,注释说“如同 anuacchariyā、anacchariyā”。其中,“anuacchariyā”的意思是:在听闻时,层层递进而令人惊叹。巴利
Anabhāvaṃkatāti ettha anu-saddo pacchā-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘yathā nesaṃ pacchābhāvo na hotī’’tiādi. Anuabhāvaṃ gatāti pacchā anuppattidhammatāvasena abhāvaṃ gatā vināsamupagatā, pahīnāti attho. ‘‘Imā anacchariyā gāthāyo paṭibhaṃsū’’ti (mahāva. 7, 8) ettha anacchariyasaddaṃ udāharaṇavasena dassento āha ‘‘yathā anuacchariyā anacchariyā’’ti. Tattha anuacchariyāti savanakāle uparūpari vimhayakarāti attho.
你说“你所说的那个并不是因缘”,意思是:你所称说的、那种被称为没有问候等和合之味的无味状态,这个因由并不存在,也找不到。婆罗门难道不是针对那种被称为没有问候等和合之味的因缘,才说“乔达摩尊者是无味的”吗?如果说“那个因缘不存在”,就会得出“世尊会做问候等事”这个不想要的结论。为了显示这一点,才说“那么世尊为什么这样说呢”等等。巴利
Yañca kho tvaṃ vadesi, so pariyāyo na hotīti yaṃ vandanādisāmaggirasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ kāraṇaṃ arasarūpatāya vadesi, taṃ kāraṇaṃ na hoti, na vijjatīti attho. Nanu ca brāhmaṇo yaṃ vandanādisāmaggirasābhāvasaṅkhātaṃ pariyāyaṃ sandhāya ‘‘arasarūpo bhavaṃ gotamo’’ti āha, so pariyāyo natthīti vutte vandanādīni bhagavā karotīti āpajjatīti imaṃ aniṭṭhappasaṅgaṃ dassento āha ‘‘kasmā pana bhagavā evamāhā’’tiādi.
4 4. “在一切情况下”是指在所有情形中。“只是针对那个意思而说”:婆罗门针对某个意思说“乔达摩尊者没有受用”等话,而世尊也针对某个意思认可自己无受用等,那只是针对那个意思而说的。“因欲贪而受用”是指以欲贪为因的受用。“另一个理由”是指另外的原因。巴利
4.Sabbapariyāyesūti sabbavāresu. Sandhāya bhāsitamattanti yaṃ sandhāya brāhmaṇo ‘‘nibbhogo bhavaṃ gotamo’’tiādimāha, bhagavā ca yaṃ sandhāya nibbhogatādiṃ attani anujānāti, taṃ sandhāya bhāsitamattaṃ . Chandarāgaparibhogoti chandarāgavasena paribhogo. Aparaṃ pariyāyanti aññaṃ kāraṇaṃ.
5 家族习俗之业,是指被称为家族习俗的业,也就是所说的家族行仪。不造作,是指不做的状态。恶行,就是恶劣的行为;因为多数是经由身门而转起,所以从身而生的恶行,就是身恶行。为了显示它的自身相状,注释中说“其中”等。在这里,应当知道杀生、不与取、邪淫的思。其中,“有情”,从胜义上说,是命根;从世俗说法上说,是众生。这里的命根,应当按色命根与非色命根来理解。因为色命根被破坏时,与之相关联的非色命根也会随之坏灭。而“众生”,应当理解为蕴的相续,因为在那里安立了“众生”的假名。“pāṇa”这个词本身就有坠落的意思,在它正要自然坠落时,极其迅速地令它坠落,就是“atipāta”,也就是不给它慢慢坠落,而令它快速坠落。或者,“ati”是超越,“pāta”是用刀杖等制伏而令其坠落,合起来就是“atipāta”。对“pāṇa”的“atipāta”,就是“pāṇātipāta”,也就是所说的杀有情、断有情命。从实质上说,这是对有情的杀思:对有情的众生想,为了断绝他人的命根而发起加行,并由身门或语门中的一门所转起。因为,以那种思正在现行时,作为现存命根所依的大种,由于加行所作之因,本应生起的大种不再生起;这种能等起如此加行的思,就是杀生。已经受到加行逼迫的诸大种,不像其他大种那样清净,所以不能成为同类法的因。巴利
5.Kulasamudācārakammanti kulācārasaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ, kulacārittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Akiriyanti akaraṇabhāvaṃ. Duṭṭhu caritaṃ duccaritaṃ, kāyadvāre bāhullavuttito kāyato pavattaṃ duccaritanti kāyaduccaritaṃ. Taṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘tattha cā’’tiādimāha. Pāṇātipātaadinnādānamicchācāracetanāveditabbāti ettha (itivu. aṭṭha. 74) pāṇoti paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ, vohārato satto. Jīvitindriyañcettha rūpārūpavasena veditabbaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassati. Sattoti ca khandhasantāno gahetabbo. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino parassa jīvitindriyupacchedakapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānamaññatarappavattā vadhakacetanā. Yāya hi cetanāya vattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetukamahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni itarabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇāni na honti.
这里有人提出质问:在每一个刹那都自然坏灭的诸行当中,谁是杀者?谁又是被杀者?如果说是心和心所的相续,那它是无形的,根本没有能力用切割、破坏等方式去伤害什么,也不可能被伤害。如果说是色的相续,那它没有意识,就像木头和石块一样,因此对它不可能像对死尸那样用切割等方式构成杀生。再说,杀生的加行,比如打、击等等,如果是对过去、未来或现在的诸行做的,那么对过去和未来的诸行根本不可能成立,因为它们不存在;对现在的诸行呢,诸行是刹那性的,本性就是自然坏灭、正趋向毁灭,加行就成了毫无意义的多余动作。而且毁灭不需要任何原因,所以死并不是由打、击等加行造成的。又因为诸行没有造作者,那这个加行是谁做的呢?由于是刹那性,与杀意同一刹那就已坏灭,那是谁的行为?因为根本找不到一个最终的时刻,又是谁被杀生业所系缚呢?巴利
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hantā, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, napi vikopanīyo. Atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappahārādi atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanato kassa kiriyā, pariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
对此答道:前面说的那个与杀意相应的诸行聚集,也就是被称为“有情”的东西,才是杀者。由它所发动的杀生加行作为缘,那个已经失去命根、识已离开、以“死亡”这一说法得以成立的、应当在上述杀生加行发生时生起的色法与无色法聚集,就被杀害了;或者仅仅是与心、心所相续有关的部分被杀害了。
即使杀生加行的对象并不是色相续,但在五蕴有中,因为心与心所的相续是依靠色相续而运作的,所以当别人对色相续施加断绝命根的加行时,由于能引生与那断绝作用相系的不相似色法,相续就中断了。因此,杀生并不是不可能,杀生也不是无因,加行也不是没有作用。
对于现在的诸行,由于所施加的加行之力,本应在紧接着之后生起的诸行聚,就不能如那样生起。因为这里并不把刹那诸行的刹那灭称为“死”,而相续的死,按照前面所说的道理,是有因的,所以死不是无因。杀生加行也不是没有作者。虽然诸行没有作者,但对于那些只是以现前状态为助缘、各自决定生起相应果的诸缘,依照世间的说法仍可安立“作者”,就像说“灯能照亮”“月亮是夜的主人”一样。
也不应把仅仅与杀意俱起的心与心所聚当作杀生,因为承认的是依相续而安立。依相续而运作的灯等,也能看到它们有作用。所以,确实有以杀生业而被系缚的情况。这个道理,在不与取等其余业道中,也应当随其相应情况加以阐明。巴利
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandhano yathāvuttavadhappayogakaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivinibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, napi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano. Paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katapayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātapayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādaniyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākarova candimā’’ti. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchitabbo santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato. Santānavasena vattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyā dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabaddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
杀生这件事,对于没有功德的众生,比如畜生之类:杀小的众生,罪过轻;杀大的众生,罪过重。为什么?因为加行(下手的方式)有轻有重;即使加行一样,也因为对象本身的大小而有差别。对于有功德的众生,比如人等等:杀功德少的众生,罪过轻;杀功德大的众生,罪过重。不过,当身体大小和功德都相当时,还要知道:因为烦恼和加行柔和的缘故,罪过轻;因为猛烈的缘故,罪过重。巴利
So (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89; dha. sa. aṭṭha. akusalakammapathakathā) ca pāṇātipāto guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahante mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve satipi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
没有通过身体或语言给予的,就是“未给予”;那是属于别人的东西,取走它就叫不与取。夺取别人的东西,就是偷盗,也叫贼行。从意义上说,这是对他人所占有的财物,怀着“这是他人所占有的”想,生起夺取它的加行,通过身体或语言两者之一而发生的偷盗思。对低劣的他人财物,罪过轻;对殊胜的,罪过重。为什么?因为对象殊胜。在对象相同的情况下,对功德更大者的财物,罪过重;相比之下,对功德较次者的财物,罪过轻。巴利
Kāyavācāhi na dinnanti adinnaṃ, parasantakaṃ, tassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ. Parassaharaṇaṃ theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana parapariggahe parapariggahitasaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānamaññataradvārappavattā theyyacetanā. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ, taṃtaṃguṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
邪行就是邪淫,在淫欲行为中完全被呵责的低劣行为。从特征上说,它是出于不善的意图,通过身体表现出来,违越了不该去的地方的思。这个邪淫,对于没有戒等功德的人,在不可行处,过失轻;对于具足戒等功德的人,过失重。它有四个条件:不可行处、对那对象生起行淫的心、行淫的加行、以道入道的忍受。只有一种加行,就是自己亲自做。巴利
Micchā caraṇaṃ micchācāro, methunasamācāresu ekantanindito lāmakācāro. So pana lakkhaṇato asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā. So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇavirahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo, sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā – agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanapayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.
语门中,因为多数时候是通过言语说出来的,所以从言语产生的恶行就是语恶行。为了说明它的本身性质,论中说“应当知道,就是妄语、离间语、粗恶语、杂秽语的思”。其中,“妄”是指不真实、不如实的事情。通过这件事来说虚妄的话,所以叫妄语,也就是想让别人把不真实的事情当成真实来理解,能引发那种表白的思。他破坏的事情,如果事情小,罪就轻;如果事情大,罪就重。另外,在家人因为不想把自己拥有的东西送出去,就说“没有”等等,这样产生的罪轻;作为证人,为了破坏别人的利益而说,罪就重。出家人得到一点点油或酥,开玩笑地说“今天村里的油像河水一样流”,用这种夸张说法,罪轻;如果说“没看见的却说看见了”等等,罪就重。它有四个条件:不真实的事情、欺骗的心、相应的努力、以及让对方了解那件事。只有一种加行,就是亲自去做。这应当理解为:用身体、或身体所系之物、或言语,做出欺骗别人的行为。如果通过那个行为,对方知道了那件事,那么在引发该行为的思生起的那一刹那,就被妄语业所束缚。然而,就像用身体、身体所系之物和言语欺骗别人一样,命令别人说“你去说这个”,或者写了信放在别人面前,或者在墙上等处写下“这个意思应当这样理解”而放在那里,因此在这里,命令、放置、不动等加行也都适用。不过,因为注释书里没有提到,所以应当考察后再采用。巴利
Vacīdvāre bāhullavuttito vācato pavattaṃ duccaritanti vacīduccaritaṃ. Taṃ sarūpato dassento āha ‘‘musāvādapisuṇavācāpharusavācāsamphappalāpacetanā veditabbā’’ti. Tattha musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. Musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti musāvādo, atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Apica gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthīti ādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo. Pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthaviññāpananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādakakiriyākaraṇe daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati. Yasmā pana yathā kāyakāyapaṭibaddhavācāhi paraṃ visaṃvādeti, tathā ‘‘idamassa bhaṇāhī’’ti āṇāpentopi, paṇṇaṃ likhitvā purato nissajjantopi, ‘‘ayaṃ attho evaṃ veditabbo’’ti kuṭṭādīsu likhitvā ṭhapentopi, tasmā ettha āṇattikanissaggiyathāvarāpi payogā yujjanti. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana anāgatattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā.
“离间”就是破坏和睦,意思是把原本和合、像整体一样的众生弄得分裂、对立。或者按词源来说,因为能让亲密关系变得空无,所以叫离间语。因为用某种话对某人说,会让说话的人在自己心里生起对自身的喜爱,同时让听者心中原有的亲爱变成空无,这种话就是离间语。从特相上说,心怀染污的人,为了分裂他人,或者出于想让自己被人喜爱、被人信任的欲望,而发起的身业和语业背后的思,就叫离间语,因为是通过它来说离间的话。它若对被分裂的人功德少,罪过就轻;若功德大,罪过就重。它具备四个条件:有一个要被分裂的对象;以分裂为先行想法——“这样他们就会彼此不同、彼此分离”,或者以想被喜爱、被信任为先行想法——“这样我就会变得可爱、值得信赖”;相应的努力;以及对方明白这个意思。如果对方还没有被分裂,就不构成业道;只有真正被分裂了,才构成。巴利
Pisatīti pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho. Niruttinayena vā piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇā. Yāya hi vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca piyasuññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇavācā. Lakkhaṇato pana saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā pisuṇaṃ vadati etāyāti katvā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Pare pana abhinne kammapathabhedo natthi, bhinne eva hoti.
“pharusayati”就是使粗糙,所以叫粗恶语,也就是言语。因为用那种言语,把自己和对方都弄得粗糙、因为缺乏慈爱而变得粗涩,那就是粗恶语。或者说,这种言语本身就是粗恶的,因为它由忧受所生起,本性就是粗硬的,既不悦耳,也不悦心,所以叫粗恶语。在这里应当知道:由于它是通过割裂他人痛处的方式生起的,由于它一向严厉,又依本性、依原因的通称,所以言语被称为粗恶。用这种话来说粗恶的话,所以叫粗恶语,也就是为了割裂他人痛处而发起身业、语业的思,那是一向粗恶的思。为了说明这一点,有这样一个事例:据说有个男孩不听母亲的话,跑到森林里去,母亲没法叫他回来,就骂他说:“愿凶暴的母水牛追你!”后来在森林里,果然有一头母水牛出现。男孩就作了真实语:“愿我母亲嘴里说的话不要实现,愿她心里想的实现。”那头母水牛就停在那里,像被绑住了一样。可见,即使行为是在割裂痛处,只要心是柔软的,就不成为粗恶语。因为父母有时也会对孩子这样说:“愿盗贼把你们剁成碎片!”可他们连一片莲花瓣落在孩子身上都不愿意。师长和和尚有时也会对依止者这样说:“这些无惭无愧的人到处乱跑,把他们都赶走!”但他们心里却希望他们能在教理和证悟上有所成就。所以,心柔软时不成为粗恶语;同样,言语柔软时也不成为非粗恶语。因为一个想害死人的人说“让他舒服地睡吧”,这话并不成为非粗恶语,由于心是粗恶的,这话就是粗恶语。它针对谁而说,如果对方少德,罪过就轻;如果对方有大德,罪过就重。它有三种条件:对方是应被骂的人、心是嗔怒的、以及骂的行为。巴利
Pharusayatīti pharusā, vācā. Yāya hi vācāya attānampi parampi pharusaṃ sinehābhāvena lūkhaṃ karoti, sā pharusavācā. Atha vā sayampi pharusā domanassasamuṭṭhitattā sabhāvenapi kakkasā neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayasukhāti pharusavācā. Ettha pana paresaṃ mammacchedanavasena pavattiyā ekantaniṭṭhuratāya sabhāvena kāraṇavohārena ca vācāya pharusasaddappavatti daṭṭhabbā. Taṃ pharusaṃ vadati etāyāti pharusavācā, parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusā cetanā. Tassā āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātu vacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetuṃ asakkontī ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tatheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi, taṃ mā hotu. Yaṃ cittena cintesi, taṃ hotū’’ti saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi . Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evampi vadanti ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirikā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti. Atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti, yathā cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusavācāpi na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusavācā hoti, cittapharusatāya pana esā pharusavācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
杂秽语是这样一种不善思:它由身体和语言的行为产生,目的是表达没有意义的话。“杂秽”(sampha)的意思是破坏、消散、毁灭快乐和利益,也就是对自己和他人没有任何好处的东西。用这种杂秽来说话,就叫杂秽语。如果经常做但程度轻,过失就小;如果经常做且程度重,过失就大。它有两种构成条件:一是以谈论婆罗多大战、悉多被掳这类毫无意义的故事为先导,二是实际说出这类话。如果别人不接受这种话,就不构成业道的分别;只有别人接受了杂秽语,才构成。巴利
Saṃ sukhaṃ hitañca phalati visarati vināsetīti samphaṃ, attano paresañca anupakārakaṃ yaṃ kiñci, samphaṃ palapati etāyāti samphappalāpo, anatthaviññāpikakāyavacīpayogasamauṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo. Tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpīkathākathanañca. Pare pana taṃ kathaṃ agaṇhante kammapathabhedo natthi, parena pana samphappalāpe gahiteyeva hoti.
贪欲、嗔恚、邪见:这里,“贪欲”是指面向他人的成就而盘算渴求,也就是对他人的成就有贪心。所谓“面向而专注,故为贪欲”(abhimukhaṃ jhāyati),就是指对他人的成就生起贪。它的特相是像“啊,但愿这个成为我的”这样,对他人的财物盘算渴求。就像不与取一样,有罪过轻的,也有罪过重的。它有两种构成条件:他人的财物,以及把它归到自己名下。因为即使对他人的财物生起了贪,只要还没有把它归到自己名下——“啊,但愿这个成为我的”,就还不算构成业道。巴利
Abhijjhābyāpādamicchādiṭṭhiyoti ettha parasampattiṃ abhimukhaṃ jhāyatīti abhijjhā, parasampattīsu lobho. Sā pana ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā. Adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā – parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañca. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.
伤害、破坏他人的利益和快乐,就叫嗔害,也就是对抗。它的特相是出于想毁灭他人而心生恼害。就像粗恶语一样,有罪过轻的,也有罪过重的。它有两种构成条件:其他有情,以及想毁灭他。因为即使对其他有情生起了愤怒,只要还没有想到“啊,但愿他断灭、毁灭”,就不算构成业道的差别。巴利
Hitasukhaṃ byāpādeti vināsetīti byāpādo, paṭigho. So paravināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo . So pharusavācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā – parasatto, tassa ca vināsanacintā. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjeyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsanaṃ na cinteti.
邪见就是:因为不能如实执取,所以错误地看。它以“没有布施”等这样的方式颠倒看事物为特相。像绮语一样,有轻罪也有重罪。另外,不定的是轻罪,决定的是重罪。它有两种资粮:对所缘执取的方式颠倒,以及按照他执取的那样显现出来。其中,只有以无有见、无因见、非圣见,才构成业道的差别。巴利
Yathābhuccagahaṇābhāvena micchā passatīti micchādiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassa dve sambhārā – vatthuno gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassupaṭṭhānanti. Tattha natthikāhetukaaariyadiṭṭhīhi eva kammapathabhedo hoti.
“种种恶不善法”这句话虽然是概括性的说法,但根据剩余可知,应当把所说的其余不善法也纳入,所以接着说“除了那些法”等等。意思是:除了前面所说的身恶行等不善法之外。种种,就是多种类别。巴利
‘‘Anekavihitānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammāna’’nti sāmaññavacanepi pārisesañāyato vuttāvasesā akusalā dhammā gahetabbāti āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā te dhamme’’tiādi. Te yathāvuttakāyaduccaritādike akusaladhamme ṭhapetvāti attho. Anekavihitāti anekappakārā.
6 这个“世间传统”,就是指对年长者问候行礼等行为为特征的世间习俗。对不来梵天来说,是在装饰品等上面;对不来比丘来说,是在衣等资具上面,由于生起爱着而有贪欲产生,所以应当知道,不来道所断除的只是五种欲贪,因此说“五种欲贪的”。在色等五种欲境——也就是所依欲的各个部分——当中生起的贪,应当理解为“五种欲贪”。这里“部分”一词中的“guṇa”这个字,就像“逐渐舍弃青春之德”等语句中那样,是表示部分的词。在两种不善心中,就是与忧俱行的两种不善心。因为痴通于一切不善,所以说“一切不善的生起”。其余者,就是有身见等。巴利
6.Ayaṃ lokatantīti ayaṃ vuḍḍhānaṃ abhivādanādikiriyālakkhaṇā lokappaveṇī. Anāgāmibrahmānaṃ alaṅkārādīsu anāgāmibhikkhūnañca cīvarādīsu nikantivasena rāguppatti hotīti anāgāmimaggena pañcakāmaguṇikarāgasseva pahānaṃ veditabbanti āha ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassā’’ti. Rūpādīsu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu vatthukāmakoṭṭhāsesu uppajjamāno rāgo ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo’’ti veditabbo. Koṭṭhāsavacano hettha guṇasaddo ‘‘vayoguṇā anupubbaṃ jahantī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.4) viya. Dvīsu akusalacittesūti domanassasahagatesu dvīsu akusalacittesu. Mohassa sabbākusalasādhāraṇattā āha ‘‘sabbākusalasambhavassā’’ti. Avasesānanti sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ.
7 我这样理解:他厌恶地想着“我出身高贵、有容貌、有智慧,怎么能去向别人问讯行礼呢”,于是就像厌恶一样地厌嫌。或者说,我理解为“厌嫌”。从“由不善巧所生”这个意义上说,就是由无明所生。当厌嫌不善法时,也厌嫌与它们相应的状态,所以说“不善法的具足”。“具足”正是这个词的同义词,意思是进入、相应。所谓“好装饰的种类”,就是好装饰的本性,也就是好装饰的习性。“可厌”就是厌嫌的习性。巴利
7.Jigucchati maññeti ‘‘ahamabhijāto rūpavā paññavā, kathaṃ nāma aññesaṃ abhivādanādiṃ kareyya’’nti jigucchati viya jigucchatīti vā sallakkhemi. Akosallasambhūtaṭṭhenāti aññāṇasambhūtaṭṭhena. Akusale dhamme jigucchamāno tesaṃ samaṅgībhāvampi jigucchatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattī’’ti. Samāpattīti etasseva vevacanaṃ samāpajjanā samaṅgibhāvoti. Maṇḍanakajātiyoti maṇḍanasabhāvo, maṇḍanasīloti attho. Jegucchitanti jigucchanasīlataṃ.
8 8. “世间最尊者的业”:就是世间最尊贵的人应当做的事,或者世间公认最殊胜的事。这里的“于此”,是指前面说的两种含义中的任何一种。“由词所表达的意义是词义”,说的就是词义和文义。“或应受调伏”:这里“调伏”就是律,意思是惩治。因此说“即应受惩治之义”。难道不是在前面说的两种含义——自义和应受义中,依照语法规则可以看到派生词缀,而在“为调伏而说法”这个意义中却看不到派生词缀吗?那为什么这里会有派生词缀呢?所以说“因为派生词的用法是多样的”。这种多样性应当依据世间的共许来理解。因为世间在什么意义上使用派生词,派生词的用法就在那个意义上依世间而成立,所以派生词的用法是多样的。因此,就像被告诫“别出声”的人被称为“别出声者”一样,为调伏而说法的人就被称为“调伏者”,这是要旨所在。巴利
8.Lokajeṭṭhakakammanti loke jeṭṭhakānaṃ kattabbakammaṃ, loke vā seṭṭhasammataṃ kammaṃ. Tatrāti yathāvuttesu dvīsupi atthavikappesu. Padābhihito attho padattho, byañjanatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayaṃ vā arahatīti ettha vinayanaṃ vinayo, niggaṇhananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘niggahaṃ arahatīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Nanu ca paṭhamaṃ vuttesu dvīsupi atthavikappesu sakatthe arahatthe ca bhaddhitapaccayo saddalakkhaṇato dissati, na pana ‘‘vinayāya dhammaṃ desetī’’ti imasmiṃ atthe, tasmā kathamettha taddhitapaccayoti āha ‘‘vicitrā hi taddhitavuttī’’ti. Vicitratā cettha lokappamāṇato veditabbā. Tathā hi yasmiṃ yasmiṃ atthe taddhitappayogo lokassa, tattha tattha taddhitavutti lokato siddhāti vicitrā taddhitavutti. Tasmā yathā ‘‘mā saddamakāsī’’ti vadanto ‘‘māsaddiko’’ti vuccati, evaṃ vinayāya dhammaṃ desetīti venayikoti vuccatīti adhippāyo.
9 “可怜人”:因为缺乏功德,所以是悲惨的人。“不审察词句”:就像对“提舍达他”等词一样,没有去审察词句,没有这样审察:“在这个意义中,这个词是这个词缀。”这是依不变化词干来说的。巴利
9.Kapaṇapurisoti guṇavirahitatāya dīnamanusso. Byañjanāni avicāretvāti tissadattādisaddesu viya ‘‘imasmiṃ atthe ayaṃ nāma paccayo’’ti evaṃ byañjanaṃ vicāraṃ akatvā, anipphannapāṭipadikavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
10 说了“天界入胎的成就”之后,因为除了地居天以外,其余诸天都没有入胎这回事,所以这里应当知道:结生本身就是天界的入胎成就。为了把已经说过的这个意思展开说明,就说“能促成获得天界结生”。“它的”(assāti)指的是问候等合宜的行为。为了指出在母胎中结生的过失,也就是显示母亲方面不清净——就像想骂人的人,通过揭出“你是婢女之子”、即生于婢女腹中这个过失来骂人一样,通过显示世尊在母胎中结生这个过失来骂,他也这样说,这就是意图所在。“从胎”(gabbhatoti),是从天界结生而言。因此说“意思是不能达到生到天界”。“或者他的胎是低劣的”,所以是“无胎”(apagabbha)——为了显示这种解释方式的意图,就说“因为被排除在天界入胎之外,未来将得到低劣的胎”。“iti”这个词在这里是原因的意思,因为未来也将得到低劣的胎,所以“或者他的胎是低劣的”就是“无胎”,这是意图所在。巴利
10.Devalokagabbhasampattiyāti vatvā ṭhapetvā bhummadeve sesesu devesu gabbhaggahaṇassa abhāvato paṭisandhiyevettha gabbhasampattīti veditabbāti vuttamevatthaṃ vivaritvā dassento āha ‘‘devalokapaṭisandhipaṭilābhāya saṃvattatī’’ti. Assāti abhivādanādisāmīcikammassa. Mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassentoti mātito aparisuddhabhāvaṃ dassento, akkositukāmassa dāsiyā puttoti dāsikucchismiṃ nibbattabhāve dosaṃ dassetvā akkosanaṃ viya bhagavato mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇe dosaṃ dassetvā akkosantopi evamāhāti adhippāyo. Gabbhatoti devalokapaṭisandhito. Tenevāha ‘‘abhabbo devalokūpapattiṃ pāpuṇitunti adhippāyo’’ti. Hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbhoti imassa viggahassa ekena pariyāyena adhippāyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘devalokagabbhaparibāhirattā āyatiṃ hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgītī’’ti. Iti-saddāe hetuattho, yasmā āyatimpi hīnagabbhapaṭilābhabhāgī, tasmā hīno vā gabbho assāti apagabbhoti adhippāyo.
再者,为了显示同一个词形分析依嗔怒等而……的意趣,与下面所说的方式相应,而显示其意趣,说道:“或者他在母胎中的胎住是低劣的,这就是意趣所在。”“胎”这个词,有时是母胎的同义词,如“青年住在胎中”等。有时是生于母胎中的有情的同义词,如“乃至包括堕胎”等。在这里,取母胎的同义词而显示其义,说道:“未来的胎卧”。胎中的卧就是胎卧。以无上道,即以最上之道。因为业与烦恼已被道摧破,所以说“由于因已被摧破”。其余三种,即卵生、湿生、化生。在这里,虽然依照“无胎者”的适当意义,只应当说胎卧,但依连带关系,凡是可得的都可以说,因此也说了“再有之发生”,应当知道。巴利
Puna tasseva viggahassa kodhavasena…pe… dassentoti heṭṭhā vuttanayassa anurūpaṃ katvā adhippāyaṃ dassento āha ‘‘hīno vāssa mātukucchismiṃ gabbhavāso ahosīti adhippāyo’’ti. Gabbha-saddo atthi mātukucchipariyāyo ‘‘gabbhe vasati māṇavo’’tiādīsu (jā. 1.15.363) viya . Atthi mātukucchismiṃ nibbattasattapariyāyo ‘‘antamaso gabbhapātanaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (mahāva. 129) viya. Tattha mātukucchipariyāyaṃ gahetvā atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘anāgate gabbhaseyyā’’ti. Gabbhe seyyā gabbhaseyyā. Anuttarena maggenāti aggamaggena. Kammakilesānaṃ maggena vihatattā āha ‘‘vihatakāraṇattā’’ti. Itarā tissopīti aṇḍajasaṃsedajaopapātikā. Ettha ca yadipi ‘‘apagabbho’’ti imassa anurūpato gabbhaseyyā eva vattabbā, pasaṅgato pana labbhamānaṃ sabbampi vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti punabbhavābhinibbattipi vuttāti veditabbā.
现在,为了说明“胎”这个词作为有情的同义词时,解释有多种不同,所以说了“再者”等话。不过,在这种解释方案里,“胎卧”和“再有之再生”两者都只是依据“胎卧”来说的,也有人这样主张。难道不会因为“未来的胎卧已断”这种说法,而变成只是“胎的卧”已断、并不是“胎”已断的过失吗?所以说了“正如”等话。那么,为什么不只说“再生”这一个词,还要加上“再有”呢?所以说了“所谓再生”等话。“不再有”就是指一刹那又一刹那生起的诸法的再生。巴利
Idāni sattapariyāyassa gabbhasaddassa vasena viggahanānattaṃ dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana vikappe gabbhaseyyā punabbhavābhinibbattīti ubhayampi gabbhaseyyavaseneva vuttantipi vadanti. Nanu ca ‘‘āyatiṃ gabbhaseyyā pahīnā’’ti (pārā. 10) vuttattā gabbhassa seyyā eva pahīnā, na pana gabbhoti āpajjatīti āha ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi. Atha ‘‘abhinibbattī’’ti ettakameva avatvā punabbhavaggahaṇaṃ kimatthanti āha ‘‘abhinibbatti ca nāmā’’tiādi. Apunabbhavabhūtāti khaṇe khaṇe uppajjamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhinibbatti.
11 11. 说到“法界”:在这里,它能无余地持住一切法,如实去观照,所以叫法界;也就是以诸法各自的真实本性去觉知的那种本性,这是一切知智的另一个名称。“彻证”:就是亲自证得、获得,意思是获得的因。达到说法之妙趣:能随顺听者的喜好而转变、善于说法,这就是说法之妙趣;达到了、证得了它,就是这个意思。以大悲遍满:就是以大悲心遍及一切众生。为了再用譬喻把这些功德相说清楚,所以说“心如大地之平等”。就像大地,在干净与不干净的东西被放置、切割、破裂等情况下,它都不动摇,不会生起贪著或嗔恨;同样,在面对可爱与不可爱、得与不得等等时,因为断除了贪著和嗔恨,心不动摇,所以叫“心如大地之平等”,这就是这里的意思。“不动法”:这里,三部注疏里都说“不动法就是果等至”。但我们这一派的意见是:“当别人辱骂时,自己心如大地平等的那种相状,就是不嗔怒的本性,这里应当这样理解。”为老所追随:就是被老所缠住。成为轮回之桩:因为它成了许多不幸和灾祸坠落的支撑点,所以是轮回的桩子。婆罗门因为年老而临近死亡,所以用推测的语气说“今天死了”等等。以大精进:就是因为“能见到这样的阿拉汉真好”而生起的大精进。无与伦比的先存状态:就是不共于他人的先存状态。没有能和它相等的,所以叫无与伦比,也就是先存状态。巴利
11.Dhammadhātunti ettha dhamme anavasese dhāreti yāthāvato upadhāretīti dhammadhātu, dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato avabujjhanasabhāvo, sabbaññutaññāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Paṭivijjhitvāti sacchikatvā, paṭilabhitvāti attho, paṭilābhahetūti vuttaṃ hoti. Desanāvilāsappatto hotīti rucivasena parivattetvā desetuṃ samatthatā desanāvilāso, taṃ patto adhigatoti attho. Karuṇāvipphāranti sabbasattesu mahākaruṇāya pharaṇaṃ. Tādiguṇalakkhaṇameva puna upamāya vibhāvetvā dassento āha ‘‘pathavīsamacittata’’nti. Yathā pathavī suciasucinikkhepachedanabhedanādīsu na vikampati, anurodhavirodhaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu lābhālābhādīsu anurodhavirodhappahānato avikampitacittatāya pathavīsamacittatanti attho. Akuppadhammatanti ettha ‘‘akuppadhammo nāma phalasamāpattī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Paresu pana akkosantesupi attano pathavīsamacittatālakkhaṇaṃ akujjhanasabhāvatanti evamettha attho gahetabbo’’ti amhākaṃ khanti. Jarāya anusaṭanti jarāya paliveṭhitaṃ. Vaṭṭakhāṇubhūtanti anekesaṃ anayabyasanānaṃ nipātalakkhaṇatthambhabhūtatāya saṃsārakhāṇubhūtaṃ. Brāhmaṇassa vuḍḍhatāya āsannavuttimaraṇanti sambhāvanavasena ‘‘ajja maritvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Mahantena kho pana ussāhenāti ‘‘sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṃ arahataṃ dassanaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ sañjātamahussāhena. Appaṭisamaṃ purejātabhāvanti anaññasādhāraṇaṃ purejātabhāvaṃ. Natthi etassa paṭisamoti appaṭisamo, purejātabhāvo.
不说“api”而说“pi”,是为了说明“pi”这个词也可以单独作为一个不变词使用。在表示可能性的意义上:“莫非真是这样吧”,这种推测的含义就是可能性的含义,而“pi”这个词正是在表达这个含义时起作用。所谓言语流畅,是指言语甜美、柔和的意思。因为这样一来,世间才算是流畅的言语:也就是说,不单说一个数目,而是和另一个数目一起说,世间就认为这是流畅的言语,比如“两滴或三滴水”。所谓正确地卧在上面,是指母鸡用脚等不对蛋造成任何伤害,为了避开外面的风等危险,而好好地卧在蛋上面。这里“adhi”这个词是“在上面”的意思。所谓让它获得温度,是指为了耗尽蛋里湿润的油脂,以自己的体温让蛋获得温度。因此说“令温暖”。所谓正确地培育,是指完完全全地用母鸡的气味熏染。因此说“令带上鸡的气味”。巴利
‘‘Apī’’ti avatvā ‘‘pī’’ti vadanto pi-saddopi visuṃ atthi nipātoti dasseti. Sambhāvanattheti ‘‘api nāmevaṃ siyā’’ti vikappanattho sambhāvanattho, tasmiṃ jotakatāya pisaddo vattati. Vacanasiliṭṭhatāyāti vacanassa madhurabhāvatthaṃ, mudubhāvatthanti attho. Evañhi loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hotīti evaṃ ekameva gaṇanaṃ avatvā aparāya gaṇanāya saddhiṃ vacanaṃ loke siliṭṭhavacanaṃ hoti yathā ‘‘dve vā tīṇi vā udakaphusitānī’’ti. Sammā adhisayitānīti pādādīhi attanā nesaṃ kiñci upaghātaṃ akarontiyā bahivātādiparissayaparihāratthaṃ sammadeva upari sayitāni. Upariattho hettha adhi-saddo. Utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyāti tesaṃ allasinehapariyādānatthaṃ attano kāyusmāvasena utuṃ gaṇhāpentiyā. Tenāha ‘‘usmīkatānī’’ti. Sammā paribhāvitānīti sammadeva sabbaso kukkuṭavāsanāya vāsitāni. Tenāha ‘‘kukkuṭagandhaṃ gāhāpitānī’’ti.
在这里应当明白:正确的温润和鸡味的熏染,是由正确地安卧其上所产生的力量成就的。因为正是靠着正确地安卧其上,另外两件事才能成功。实际上,离开了正确地安卧其上,就没有单独去做到正确温润和正确熏染这回事;正是因为和它一起,另外两件事才能成功,所以说“就这样以三种方式护持那些蛋”。爪尖,就是爪的尖端。嘴喙端,就是嘴的尖端。因为壳薄:在这里应当明白,就像壳薄是光在内部显现出来的原因,同样,壳薄以及爪尖、嘴喙端的锐利,是湿润滑气耗尽的原因,这是说明原因的话。拳缩手足:这里的“手”指的是翅膀。因为鸡除了翅膀之外,并没有别的所谓手。这里:指有光的地方。振翼:就是摇动翅膀。出离:这是表示简别的属格,意思是“在出离者当中”。巴利
Ettha ca sammā parisedanaṃ kukkuṭagandhaparibhāvanañca sammā adhisayananipphattiyā ānubhāvanipphāditanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammā adhisayaneneva hi itaradvayaṃ ijjhati . Na hi sammā adhisayanato visuṃ sammā parisedanassa sammā paribhāvanassa ca karaṇaṃ atthi, tena pana saddhiṃyeva itaresaṃ dvinnampi ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ tīhi pakārehi tāni aṇḍāni paripāliyamānānī’’ti. Nakhasikhāti nakhaggāni. Mukhatuṇḍakanti mukhaggaṃ. Kapālassa tanukattāti ettha yathā kapālassa tanutā ālokassa anto paññāyamānassa kāraṇaṃ, tathā kapālassa tanutāya nakhasikhāmukhatuṇḍakānaṃ kharatāya ca allasinehapariyādānaṃ kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṅkuṭitahatthapādāti ettha hatthāti pakkhā. Na hi kukkuṭānaṃ pakkhato añño hattho nāma atthi. Etthāti ālokaṭṭhāne. Pakkhe vidhunantāti pakkhe cālentā. Nikkhamantānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ, nikkhamantesūti attho.
如果它最先从卵壳里出来,那只小鸡就应该被称为“最年长的”,这是这句话的意思。“令相合”,就是让它们一致。虽然三地所摄的众生也进入了无明壳内,但因为他们在各处都还被未断除的无明缠着,所以说“于入无明壳内之众生中”。“卵壳”,就是种子壳。“世间聚落”,世间本身就是世间聚落。“正等觉”在这里,“正”是不颠倒的意思,“等”这个字显示“自己”的意思,因此以不颠倒的方式,自己觉悟、彻证四圣谛,所以道被称为正等觉。因此说“正且自之觉”,意思是正确而且自己觉悟。或者,“正”是殊胜的说法,“等”是美好的说法,所以说“或殊胜且美好之觉”。为了显示“觉”这个字有多种含义,并确定这里所指的意思,所以说“觉者,树也是,道也是”等等。其中,因为在这里觉悟,所以树称为觉;自己觉悟,或者圣者依靠它觉悟,所以道称为觉;以一切方式觉悟、彻证一切法,所以一切知智称为觉;被觉悟、被作证,所以涅槃称为觉。“中间之觉”,这是第二个例子,是为了显示即使没有“树”这个字,“觉”这个字也可以用在树上。“最胜广慧”,意思是像大地一样广布的殊胜智慧。“因不施一切功德”,就是不施与一切功德。因为不施与一切功德,所以就是不施一切功德者,这个复合词在语法上并不严合,但因为可以理解,就像“不见日之面”等一样。巴利
So jeṭṭho iti assa vacanīyoti yo paṭhamataraṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhanto kukkuṭapotako, soyeva jeṭṭhoti vacanīyo assa, bhaveyyāti attho. Sampaṭipādentoti saṃsandento. Tibhūmakapariyāpannāpi sattā avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhā tattha tattha appahīnāya avijjāya veṭhitattāti āha ‘‘avijjākosassa anto paviṭṭhesu sattesū’’ti. Aṇḍakosanti bījakapālaṃ. Lokasannivāseti loko eva lokasannivāso. Sammāsambodhinti ettha sammāti aviparītattho, saṃ-saddo sāmanti imamatthaṃ dīpeti, tasmā sammā aviparītenākārena sayameva cattāri saccāni bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti sammāsambodhīti maggo vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘sammā sāmañca bodhi’’nti, sammā sayameva ca bujjhanakanti attho. Sammāti vā pasatthavacano, saṃ-saddo sundaravacanoti āha ‘‘atha vā pasatthaṃ sundarañca bodhi’’nti. Bodhisaddassa anekatthataṃ dassetvā idhādhippetamatthaṃ niddhāretvā dassetukāmo āha ‘‘bodhīti rukkhopi maggopī’’tiādi. Tattha abujjhi etthāti rukkho bodhi. Sayaṃ bujjhati, bujjhanti vā tena ariyāti maggo bodhi. Sabbadhamme sabbākārato bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ bodhi. Bujjhīyati sacchikarīyatīti nibbānaṃ bodhi. Antarā ca bodhinti dutiyamudāharaṇaṃ vināpi rukkhasaddena bodhisaddassa rukkhe pavattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Varabhūrimedhasoti mahāpathavī viya patthaṭavarapaññoti attho. Asabbaguṇadāyakattāti sabbaguṇānaṃ adāyakattā. Sabbaguṇe na dadātīti hi asabbaguṇadāyako, ayuttasamāsoyaṃ gamakattā yathā ‘‘asūriyaṃpassāni mukhānī’’ti.
“三明”:对于有近依的人,道连同阿罗汉果一起给予三明。这里难道没有过失吗?因为三明当中的漏尽智是包含在道里面的,那么“道给予三明”这个说法怎么能成立呢?这并没有过失。虽然漏尽智确实包含在道里面,但当八支道存在时,三明与道智一起圆满,所以说“道给予三明”。“六通”在这里也是同样的道理。“声闻波罗蜜智”:是指上首弟子所应证得的全部世间智与出世间智。“缘觉菩提智”也应按照同样的方式来理解其含义。“完全了知”:就是知道。而知道并不是依靠传闻等,所以说“通达”,意思是亲自现量证知。通达也不是像站在远处认识某个特征那样,所以说“我已证得”,意思是到达了。而到达也不是自己走过去,所以说“我已获得”,意思是在自己的相续中生起而获得。巴利
Tisso vijjāti upanissayavato saheva arahattaphalena tisso vijjā deti. Nanu cettha tīsu vijjāsu āsavakkhayañāṇassa maggapariyāpannattā kathametaṃ yujjati ‘‘maggo tisso vijjā detī’’ti? Nāyaṃ doso. Satipi āsavakkhayañāṇassa maggapariyāpannabhāve aṭṭhaṅgike magge sati maggañāṇena saddhiṃ tisso vijjā paripuṇṇā hontīti ‘‘maggo tisso vijjā detī’’ti vuccati. Cha abhiññāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sāvakapāramiñāṇanti aggasāvakehi paṭilabhitabbaṃ sabbameva lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Paccekabodhiñāṇanti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Abbhaññāsinti jāniṃ. Jānanañca na anussavādivasenāti āha ‘‘paṭivijjhi’’nti, paccakkhamakāsinti attho. Paṭivedhopi na dūre ṭhitassa lakkhaṇappaṭivedho viyāti āha ‘‘pattomhī’’ti, pāpuṇinti attho. Pāpuṇanañca na sayaṃ gantvāti āha ‘‘adhigatomhī’’ti, sakasantāne uppādanavasena paṭilabhinti attho.
“譬喻的善巧说明”,就是用所喻之义把譬喻之义正确地说清楚。“以义”,就是以所喻之义。就像母鸡对鸡蛋做三种动作,是鸡雏从蛋壳里出来的根本原因;同样,处在菩萨位的世尊修三种随观,是从无明蛋壳里出来的根本原因,所以说“就像那只母鸡……三种随观的修习”。这里说的“无明卵壳的变薄”,是指依强力的观,无明卵壳变薄,而由于遮蔽作用的共通性,无明具有卵壳的相似性。因为说的是“在相续中”,所以蛋的相似性是指相续,而从蛋壳里出来的鸡雏的相似性是指佛的功德;而佛的功德从意义上说就是佛本身,因为经中说“婆悉咤,如来有这样一[个名称,即法身]”。即使变得柔软,也会成为粗硬的状态,为了断除它,所以说“粗硬的状态”。在“锐利、粗硬、明净、勇敢”中,当所观察的诸行被把握时,观智依定根而顺利进入,这是锐利性;即使未进入,也因念根而不超越,故不钝,这是粗硬性。因为有些锐利的箭射到靶子也会变钝,而此则不然。即使有粗硬性,也因微细运转而远离烦恼现起的扰动,依信根而为明净性;即使有明净性,也因中途不犹豫而善能制伏烦恼敌,依精进根而应知为勇敢性。应当看到,以这些方式,这里所取的正是行舍智。观智的转变时,就是观达到出起趣向的状态,那时它像是怀持着道智的胎儿,所以说“受胎之时”。受胎之后,依行舍智之后以到达顶点的随顺观,为了生起道而受胎。以依次证得,即以初道等次第证得。在神通方面,即在世间神通方面。因为出世神通已裂破无明卵壳。然而在某些书本中写作“六神通方面”,应知那不是正文。长老、最胜,因年长故为长老,因一切功德最上故为最胜。巴利
Opammasampaṭipādananti opammatthassa upameyyena sammadeva paṭipādanaṃ. Atthenāti upameyyatthena. Yathā kukkuṭiyā aṇḍesu tividhakiriyākaraṇaṃ kukkuṭacchāpakānaṃ aṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇaṃ, evaṃ bodhisattabhūtassa bhagavato tividhānupassanākaraṇaṃ avijjaṇḍakosato nikkhamanassa mūlakāraṇanti āha ‘‘yathā hi tassā kukkuṭiyā…pe… tividhānupassanākaraṇa’’nti. ‘‘Santāne’’ti vuttattā aṇḍasadisatā santānassa bahi nikkhantakukkuṭacchāpakasadisatā buddhaguṇānaṃ, buddhaguṇāti ca atthato buddhoyeva ‘‘tathāgatassa kho etaṃ, vāseṭṭha, adhivacanaṃ dhammakāyo itipī’’ti vacanato. Avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvoti balavavipassanāvasena avijjaṇḍakosassa tanubhāvo, paṭicchādanasāmaññena ca avijjāya aṇḍakosasadisatā. Mudubhūtassapi kharabhāvāpatti hotīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘thaddhakharabhāvo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tikkhakharavippasannasūrabhāvoti ettha pariggayhamānesu saṅkhāresu vipassanāñāṇassa samādhindriyavasena sukhānuppaveso tikkhatā, anupavisitvāpi satindriyavasena anatikkamanato akuṇṭhatā kharabhāvo. Tikkhopi hi ekacco saro lakkhaṃ patvā kuṇṭho hoti, na tathā idaṃ. Satipi kharabhāve sukhumappavattivasena kilesasamudācārasaṅkhobharahitatāya saddhindriyavasena pasannabhāvo, satipi ca pasannabhāve antarā anosakkitvā kilesapaccatthikānaṃ suṭṭhu abhibhavanato vīriyindriyavasena sūrabhāvo veditabbo. Evamimehi pakārehi saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇameva gahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vipassanāñāṇassa pariṇāmakāloti vipassanāya vuṭṭhānagāminibhāvappatti, tadā ca sā maggañāṇagabbhaṃ dhārentī viya hotīti āha ‘‘gabbhaggahaṇakālo’’ti. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvāti saṅkhārupekkhāya anantaraṃ sikhāppattaanulomavipassanāvasena maggavijāyanatthaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpetvā. Anupubbādhigatenāti paṭhamamaggapaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena. Abhiññāpakkheti lokiyābhiññāpakkhe. Lokuttarābhiññā hi avijjaṇḍakosaṃ padālitā. Potthakesu pana katthaci ‘‘chaabhiññāpakkhe’’ti likhanti, so apāṭhoti veditabbo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti vuddhatamattā jeṭṭho, sabbaguṇehi uttamattā pasatthatamoti seṭṭho.
现在,为了说明与“婆罗门,我已经发起精进”等教导之间的衔接,说了“世尊这样”等话。其中,“从前行阶段开始”,是指从修行前行阶段的精进努力等开始。“心这样生起”,意思是依照下面将要说的思惟方式,心这样生起。也有写本作“心就只是生起”,那里的意思是:心只是生起了,但还没有对世尊生起净信。“失念的人”,就是念已经丢失的人,意思是缺乏念的人。“身体躁动不安”,就是身体有不安。“在菩提座”,就是在被称为菩提的智慧达到明净状态的那个地方。因为“菩提”指的就是慧,它在那里变得明净、清净,所以那个地方就被称为“菩提座”。“具备四支”,就是像所说的“纵然只剩皮、筋、骨,身体的血肉干枯”那样,具备四支的精进。其中,皮是一支,筋是一支,骨是一支,血肉是一支,应当这样理解。而“皮是一支”,应当理解为:对皮无所顾惜,这就是一支。因为对于专心修精进的人来说,即使皮被破坏,也不会因此退转,这就是那种精进的一支、一个原因。其余几支也应当这样理解。“已策励”,就是不让努力松弛,以坚固勇猛的奋发状态来把握。因此说“不松懈地运作”的意思。巴利
Idāni ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho pana me brāhmaṇa vīriya’’ntiādikāya desanāya anusandhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha pubbabhāgato pabhutīti bhāvanāya pubbabhāgiyavīriyārambhādito paṭṭhāya. Cittamevamuppannanti evaṃ upari vakkhamānaparivitakkavasena cittamuppannanti attho. ‘‘Cittameva uppanna’’ntipi pāṭho, tattha cittameva uppannaṃ, na tāva bhagavati pasādoti attho. Muṭṭhassatināti vinaṭṭhassatinā, sativirahitenāti attho. Sāraddhakāyenāti sadarathakāyena. Bodhimaṇḍeti bodhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa maṇḍabhāvappatte ṭhāne. Bodhīti hi paññā vuccati, sā ettha maṇḍā pasannā jātāti so padeso ‘‘bodhimaṇḍo’’ti paññāto. Caturaṅgasamannāgatanti ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, sarīre upasussatu maṃsalohita’’nti (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; mahāni. 196) evaṃ vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ. Tattha tacoti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ nhāru ekaṃ aṅgaṃ aṭṭhi ekaṃ aṅgaṃ maṃsalohitaṃ ekaṃ aṅganti veditabbaṃ. Taco ekaṃ aṅganti ca tace nirapekkhabhāvo ekaṃ aṅganti gahetabbaṃ. Padhānaṃ anuyuñjantassa hi tace palujjamānepi taṃnimittaṃ avosānāpajjanaṃ tassa vīriyassa ekaṃ aṅgaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi attho veditabbo. Paggahitanti ārambhaṃ sithilaṃ akatvā daḷhaparakkamasaṅkhātussāhanabhāvena gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘asithilappavattitanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
不松弛:就是不蜷缩、不因为懈怠而陷入收缩。近住:就是以称为“沉浸”的不散乱状态,接近所缘并安住下来。因此说“以面向所缘的状态”。不忘失:因为是以摧毁忘失的方式在运作,所以不忘失。虽然单靠心轻安,心就轻安;单靠身轻安,身就轻安,但因为身轻安生起时,是跟心轻安一起生起的,不是没有心轻安而能生起,所以说“由身心轻安”。由于身轻安能让两种身都得到轻安,所以说“色身也轻安”。那个身就是那个身。离不安:就是远离烦恼带来的不安。因为当名身远离不安时,色身也会止息不安和热恼。善安置:就是切断在种种所缘中四处奔逸的散乱,让心在同一个所缘上不散乱,从而妥善地安置、安立。因此说“妥善地安立”等。心的不专一状态,就是由散乱造成的动摇;当有专一时,这种状态就不存在,所以说“专一、不动、不摇”。到这里为止,是通过“已发起精进”等,显示了精进、念、轻安、定这些作用已经成就。巴利
Asallīnanti asaṅkucitaṃ kosajjavasena saṅkocaṃ anāpannaṃ. Upaṭṭhitāti ogāhanasaṅkhātena apilāpabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇābhimukhībhāvenā’’ti. Sammosassa viddhaṃsanavasena pavattiyā na sammuṭṭhāti asammuṭṭhā. Kiñcāpi cittapassaddhivaseneva cittameva passaddhaṃ, kāyapassaddhivaseneva ca kāyo passaddho hoti, tathāpi yasmā kāyapassaddhi uppajjamānā cittapassaddhiyā saheva uppajjati, na vinā, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyacittapassaddhivasenā’’ti. Kāyapassaddhiyā ubhayesampi kāyānaṃ passambhanāvahattā vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpakāyopi passaddhoyeva hotī’’ti. So ca khoti so ca kho kāyo. Vigatadarathoti vigatakilesadaratho. Nāmakāye hi vigatadarathe rūpakāyopi vūpasantadarathapariḷāho hoti. Sammā āhitanti nānārammaṇesu vidhāvanasaṅkhātaṃ vikkhepaṃ vicchinditvā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe avikkhittabhāvāpādanena sammadeva āhitaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suṭṭhu ṭhapita’’ntiādi. Cittassa anekaggabhāvo vikkhepavasena cañcalatā, sā sati ekaggatāya na hotīti āha ‘‘ekaggaṃ acalaṃ nipphandana’’nti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘āraddhaṃ kho panā’’tiādinā vīriyasatipassaddhisamādhīnaṃ kiccasiddhidassanena.
难道信和慧的作用成就,不应当被认可为禅那前行道的一部分吗?确实应当被认可,但它并不是以“无间”的方式被说成已经成就,所以没有被单独提出来。因为如果没有信,精进的发起等根本就不可能出现;如果没有慧的摄持,它们也不会有如理发起等状态;同样,不退缩、不忘失等也属于精进等。因此应当知道,这里仅仅通过列举不退缩等,就已经包含了慧的作用成就。或者,为了说明在禅那的修习中,定的作用更为主要、更应当被认可,所以说禅那的前行道是以定为归宿的,应当这样理解。巴利
Nanu ca saddhāpaññānampi kiccasiddhi jhānassa pubbapaṭipadāya icchitabbāti? Saccaṃ icchitabbā, sā pana nānantarikabhāvena avuttasiddhāti na gahitā. Asati hi saddhāya vīriyārambhādīnaṃ asambhavoyeva, paññāpariggahe ca nesaṃ asati ñāyārambhādibhāvo na siyā, tathā asallīnāsammosatādayo vīriyādīnanti asallīnatādiggahaṇenevettha paññākiccasiddhi gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānabhāvanāyaṃ vā samādhikiccaṃ adhikaṃ icchitabbanti dassetuṃ samādhipariyosānāva jhānassa pubbapaṭipadā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
初禅的讨论巴利
Paṭhamajjhānakathā
现在,为了用注释书的方式解释“已离诸欲”等经文所展开的义理——这也是《分别论》的禅那分别(vibha. 508)中已经说过的——并且要说明为什么没有按照《分别论》经文中所说的方式来讲述,于是说“虽然在那里,什么是欲”等等。
其中,以希求的方式生起的微弱贪,因为具有欲求的含义,所以叫“欲”;比它更强的、以染著为特征的,叫“贪”;比那更强的、浓厚的贪,叫“欲贪”。用它来思惟相和随相,所以叫“思惟”,也就是这样生起的贪。
其中,“相思惟”是指把各个部分凑在一起,以“女人、男人”等方式归为一个整体,然后对更上层烦恼生起的相进行构想。“随相思惟”则是以“手好看、脚好看”这样,按随相分别开来构想。因为对于诸烦恼来说,这些部分是以随顺、分别、明显的方式生起的条件,所以手、脚等部分被称为“随相”。
比它更强的、以染著为特征的,叫“贪”;比那更强、纯粹以思惟方式生起的,叫“思惟贪”。应当知道,这些区分只是就同一种贪的生起方式和阶段差别来说的,就像“犊牛、驯牛、壮牛”那样。
“欲”是指烦恼欲;令人欲求,所以叫“欲”;或者,人们以此而欲求,所以叫“欲”。巴利
Idāni ‘‘vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinayappavattāya pāḷiyā jhānavibhaṅge (vibha. 508) vuttampi atthaṃ aṭṭhakathānayeneva saṃvaṇṇetukāmo vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ vuttanayena avacane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kiñcāpi tattha katame kāmā’’tiādimāha . Tattha patthanākārena pavatto dubbalo lobho chandanaṭṭhena chando, tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, tatopi balavataro bahalarāgo chandarāgo. Nimittānubyañjanāni saṅkappeti etenāti saṅkappo, tathāpavatto lobho. Tattha nimittasaṅkappanā nāma avayave samodhānetvā ‘‘itthī puriso’’tiādinā ekajjhaṃ katvā uparūpari kilesuppattiyā nimittassa kappanā. Anubyañjanasaṅkappanā pana ‘‘hatthā sobhanā, pādā sobhanā’’ti evaṃ anubyañjanavasena vibhajitvā kappanāti. Kilesānañhi anu anu byañjanato paribyañjanato paribyattivasena uppattiyā paccayabhāvato anubyañjanaṃ hatthapādādiavayavā vuccanti. Tato balavā rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo, saṅkappavaseneva pavatto tatopi balavataro saṅkapparāgo. Svāyaṃ pabhedo ekasseva lobhassa pavattiākāravasena avatthābhedavasena ca veditabbo yathā ‘‘vaccho dammo balībaddo’’ti. Kāmāti kilesakāmā, kāmentīti kāmā, kāmenti etehīti vā.
“Seyyathidaṃ”的意思是“那是什么”或“那是怎样”。Viviccitvā 就是分离出来、单独成为。因此说“离了、离开了”,意思是以舍断的方式离去。在“vivicceva kāmehi”中,通过 viviccā 这个词,只是说明在禅那生起的那一刻诸欲不存在。而通过 vivicceva 这个词,则因为表明诸欲必定要被远离,就显示出禅那是诸欲的对立面,以及舍断欲是证得禅那的途径。为了说明这个意思,说了“初禅”等,又为了让这个意思更加清楚,说了“如何”等。就像黑暗中有灯:通过这个比喻说明,如同夜里没有灯时黑暗会占上风,同样,没有禅那时,欲就会在心的相续中占上风。巴利
Seyyathidanti imassa taṃ katamaṃ, taṃ kathanti vā attho. Viviccitvāti visuṃ hutvā. Tenāha ‘‘vinā hutvā apasakkitvā’’ti, pajahanavasena apakkamitvāti attho. Vivicceva kāmehīti ettha viviccāti iminā vivecanaṃ jhānakkhaṇe kāmānaṃ abhāvamattaṃ vuttaṃ. Viviccevāti pana iminā ekaṃsato kāmānaṃ vivecetabbatādīpanena tappaṭipakkhatā jhānassa kāmavivekappahānassa ca jhānādhigamūpāyatā dassitā hotīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhamajjhāna’’ntiādiṃ vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Andhakāre sati padīpo viyāti etena yathā padīpābhāvena rattiyaṃ andhakārābhibhavo, evaṃ jhānābhāvena cittasantatiyaṃ kāmābhibhavoti dasseti.
这里“此”只是在前面的词上表示限定,并不是说应当这样理解:“唯从诸欲”。因为并没有作出“唯从诸欲”这样的限定。“从彼出离”:由它而出、从中出来,或者在这里,出离就是如此。谁出离?诸欲。那些欲的出离、舍断,就是“彼出离”,意思是从欲出离。可是,在同样都是镇伏的情况下,为什么这只是诸欲的出离,而不是嗔恚等的出离呢?为了用正理和圣教成立这个说法,所以说了“欲界”等。其中,“超越欲界”是因为这是超越整个欲有的行道。以此说明这个禅那具有遍知欲的性质。“对治欲贪”是因为对于按“欲求就是欲”等所说而分类的烦恼欲,它是敌对者。以此显示:就像慈对治嗔恚、悲对治害一样,这个禅那直接成为欲贪的正对治。在这里应当知道,超越欲界是通过它的果报,而在它自身生起的刹那对治欲贪则是通过它自身。这样,由于这个禅那在自身生起和果报生起中,都具有从欲贪、从欲界回转的本质,所以它特别只是诸欲的出离。这个意思已经由经文本身而来,因此说“如所说”等。“出离”指初禅。巴利
Etanti pubbapadeyeva avadhāraṇavacanaṃ, na kho pana evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘kāmehi evā’’ti avadhāraṇassa akatattā. Tannissaraṇatoti nissaranti niggacchanti etena, ettha vāti nissaraṇaṃ. Ke niggacchanti? Kāmā. Tesaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ pahānaṃ tannissaraṇaṃ, tato kāmanissaraṇatoti attho. Kathaṃ pana samāne vikkhambhane kāmānamevetaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, na byāpādādīnanti codanaṃ yuttito āgamato ca sādhetuṃ ‘‘kāmadhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kāmadhātusamatikkamanatoti sakalassapi kāmabhavassa samatikkamapaṭipadābhāvato. Tena imassa jhānassa kāmapariññābhāvamāha . Kāmarāgapaṭipakkhatoti ‘‘chando kāmo’’tiādinā (mahāni. 1) vuttavibhāgassa kilesakāmassa paccatthikabhāvato. Tena yathā mettā byāpādassa, karuṇā vihiṃsāya, evamidaṃ jhānaṃ kāmarāgassa ujuvipaccanīkabhūtanti dasseti. Vipākena cettha kāmadhātusamatikkamo attano pavattikkhaṇe kāmarāgapaṭipakkhatā ca veditabbā. Evamattano pavattiyā vipākappavattiyā ca kāmarāgato kāmadhātuto ca vinivattasabhāvattā idaṃ jhānaṃ visesato kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ, svāyamattho pāṭhāgato evāti āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Nekkhammanti paṭhamajjhānaṃ.
在这里,为了说明这个含义,在前一句中已经采用了限定,但为了表明后一句也同样应当采用限定、这样义理才能成立,所以说了“后一句也”等话。“从此”是指从欲贪。“应当这样看待”是指应当这样理解这个规定。“以共通的说法”是指以与一切远离都共通的说法。彼分远离、镇伏远离、正断远离、止息远离、出离远离,这些是彼分远离等;身远离、心远离、依远离,这些是身远离等。在这里,只有这三种应当被看待,因为在禅那的讨论中,正断远离等并不存在。“在释义中”是指在《大释义》中。因为在其中先以摄颂总说“从摄颂来看,欲有两种:事欲和烦恼欲”,然后在那里以“哪些是事欲?可爱的色……乃至……可爱的触”等语句解释了事欲。那些事欲因为可被欲求,所以应理解为“欲”。“就在那里”是指在释义中。“在分别中”是指在禅那分别中。如果这样,在两种欲都被包含时,“从事欲也远离”这个意思也能成立,因此“也”这个词应当理解为合理范围内其他含义的集合义,而不是烦恼欲的集合义。为什么?因为在这里,离烦恼欲已经由第二句说过了。由于那个,也就是由于事欲的远离,身远离就已经被说了;因为显示了舍离子女、妻子等占有,所以身远离就得到了说明。巴利
Kāmañcettha tamatthaṃ dīpetuṃ purimapadeyeva avadhāraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, uttarapadepi pana taṃ gahetabbameva tathā atthasambhavatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘uttarapadepī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Itoti kāmacchandato. Esa daṭṭhabboti esa niyamo daṭṭhabbo. Sādhāraṇavacanenāti sabbavivekasādhāraṇavacanena. Tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇavivekā tadaṅgavivekādayo. Kāyacittaupadhivivekā kāyavivekādayo. Tayo eva idha daṭṭhabbāti tayo eva idha jhānakathāyaṃ daṭṭhabbā samucchedavivekādīnaṃ asambhavato. Niddeseti mahāniddese (mahāni. 1). Tattha hi ‘‘uddānato dve kāmā vatthukāmā kilesakāmā cā’’ti uddisitvā tattha ‘‘katame vatthukāmā manāpiyā rūpā…pe… manāpiyā phoṭṭhabbā’’tiādinā vatthukāmā niddiṭṭhā. Te pana kāmīyantīti kāmāti veditabbā. Tatthevāti niddeseyeva. Vibhaṅgeti jhānavibhaṅge. Evañhi satīti evaṃ ubhayesampi kāmānaṃ saṅgahe sati. Vatthukāmehipīti vatthukāmehi viviccevātipi attho yujjatīti evaṃ yujjamānatthantarasamuccayattho pi-saddo, na kilesakāmasamuccayattho. Kasmā? Imasmiṃ atthe kilesakāmehi vivekassa dutiyapadena vuttattā. Tenāti vatthukāmavivekena. Kāyaviveko vutto hotīti puttadārādipariggahavivekadīpanato kāyaviveko vutto hoti.
“先前者”指的是身远离。“此处”指的是“离欲、离不善法”这两个词。或者,在已经确定的两种远离当中,如果“不善”这个词指的是烦恼欲,或者总摄一切不善法,那么无论哪种情况,都已经说了离烦恼欲,所以说“以后句说离烦恼欲”。“后句”则是指心远离。意思是说,这两句也与心远离相应。所谓“这些”,就是指前面所说的两个词。这里的“这些”是属格,表示从二者中简别。断除贪等烦恼的所依,就是断除烦恼的所依。所谓“贪欲性”,就是在各处对色等生起贪爱,应当知道它的因就是事欲。舍弃愚痴的因,这是关联的意思。所谓“愚痴”,就是无明,或者是恶思惟等,它的因是不如理作意,或者一切不善法都是它的因。以追求欲乐为目标,就会做出杀生等不清净的行为,因此通过远离这些,就显示了行为的清净。通过净化贪烦恼、增长出离的助缘,就净化了意乐、滋养了意乐。所谓“滋养意乐”,就是通过前加行等而成就的、作为修禅助缘的意乐圆满,而那是通过远离贪的灼热而发生的。因此说“通过净化贪烦恼”。所谓“在诸欲中”,是简别处的处格。巴利
Purimenāti kāyavivekena. Etthāti ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti etasmiṃ padadvaye. Ito vā niddhārite vivekadvaye, akusalasaddena yadi kilesakāmā, sabbākusalāpi vā gahitā, sabbathā kilesakāmehi viveko vuttoti āha ‘‘dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato’’ti. Dutiyenāti ca cittavivekenāti attho. Etesanti yathāvuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Taṇhādisaṃkilesānaṃ vatthuno pahānaṃ saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ. Lolabhāvo nāma tattha tattha rūpādīsu taṇhuppādo, tassa hetū vatthukāmā eva veditabbā. Bālabhāvassa hetupariccāgoti sambandho. Bālabhāvo nāma avijjā, ducintitacintitādi vā, tassa ayonisomanasikāro, sabbepi vā akusalā dhammā hetū. Kāmaguṇādhigamahetu pāṇātipātādiasuddhappayogo hotīti tabbivekena payogasuddhi vibhāvitā. Taṇhāsaṃkilesasodhanena vivaṭṭūpanissayasaṃvaḍḍhanena ca ajjhāsayavisodhanaṃ āsayaposanaṃ. Āsayaposananti ca jhānabhāvanāya paccayabhūtā pubbayogādivasena siddhā ajjhāsayasampadā , sā pana taṇhupatāpavigamena hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāsaṃkilesavisodhanenā’’ti. Kāmesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ.
“有多种差别”:从欲漏、欲贪结等方面,以及从色爱等方面来说,有多种多样的差别。“唯是欲贪”:意思是说,这只是以欲为自性的欲,不是想要去做的欲,也不是善法欲。“也摄于不善中”:是说它也包含在“远离诸不善法”这句话所说的不善法当中。“因是禅那的对治”:因为它是禅那的对治,由于这个原因、以此为特征而单独提出;不是按“同属不善”笼统地包含,而是依它自己的相状单独取出。如果前一句说的只是烦恼欲,那怎么会用复数呢?因此说“因有多种差别”等等。“其余的也是”:指见、慢、无惭、无愧等,以及和它们一起生起的触等。“因显示是上面诸禅支的敌对治”:以“有寻有伺”等在下文所说的诸禅支,就是上面的禅支;因为显示诸盖是这些禅支自身敌对的对治,所以说“与彼相敌的盖”。也有“因显示是上面诸禅支的敌对治”这样的读法。其中“因显示是敌对治”,他们解释说:因为显示诸盖是下文所说诸禅支正相违的对治。“诸禅支之敌”:因为阻止禅支生起,所以是禅支之敌。“能坏者”就是破坏者。“定是欲贪的对治”:因为定与贪的执取正相违,又因为能使被种种所缘诱惑而四处游荡的心安定下来,所以定是欲贪的对治。“喜是嗔恚的对治”:因为喜悦与嗔恚相反,同属安稳,所以喜是嗔恚的对治。“寻是昏沉睡眠的对治”:因为寻依如理思择而广泛地生起,所以寻是昏沉睡眠的对治。“乐是掉举追悔的对治”:因为乐的体性是寂止清凉,所以是体性不寂止而恼热的掉举追悔的对治。“伺是疑的对治”:因为伺依于反复审察所缘,其体性近似于慧,所以是疑的对治。大迦旃延长老所说的对三藏的解说《藏释》,就在那《藏释》当中。巴利
Anekabhedoti kāmāsavakāmarāgasaṃyojanādivasena rūpataṇhādivasena ca anekappabhedo. Kāmacchandoyevāti kāmasabhāvoyeva chando, na kattukamyatāchando napi kusalacchandoti adhippāyo. Akusalapariyāpannopīti ‘‘vivicca akusalehī’’ti ettha vuttaakusalesu antogadhopi. Jhānapaṭipakkhatoti jhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvato taṃhetu taṃnimittaṃ visuṃ vutto, akusalabhāvasāmaññena aggahetvā visuṃ sarūpena gahito. Yadi kilesakāmova purimapade vutto, taṃ kathaṃ bahuvacananti āha ‘‘anekabhedato’’tiādi. Aññesampīti diṭṭhimānaahirikānottappādīnaṃ taṃsahitaphassādīnañca. Uparijhānaṅgapaccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā upari vuccamānāni jhānaṅgāni uparijhānaṅgāni, tesaṃ attano paccanīkānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvadassanato tappaccanīkanīvaraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Uparijhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti upari vuccamānajhānaṅgānaṃ ujuvipaccanīkavasena paṭipakkhabhāvadassanatoti atthaṃ vadanti. Jhānaṅgapaccanīkānīti jhānaṅgānaṃ pavattinivāraṇato jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni. Viddhaṃsakānīti vighātakāni. Samādhi kāmacchandassapaṭipakkhoti rāgapaṇidhiyā ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato nānārammaṇehi palobhitassa paribbhamantassa cittassa samādhānato kāmacchandassa samādhi paṭipakkho. Pīti byāpādassāti pāmojjena samānayogakkhemattā byāpādassa pīti paṭipakkhā. Vitakko thinamiddhassāti yoniso saṅkappanavasena savipphārappavattito vitakko thinamiddhassa paṭipakkho. Sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassāti sukhaṃ vūpasantasītalasabhāvattā avūpasamānutāpasabhāvassa uddhaccakukkuccassa paṭipakkhaṃ. Vicāro vicikicchāyāti vicāro ārammaṇe anumajjanavasena paññāpatirūpasabhāvattā vicikicchāya paṭipakkho. Mahākaccānattherena desitā piṭakānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā peṭakaṃ, tasmiṃ peṭake.
“五欲功德差别”的所缘,是指色等五种欲功德各自不同差别的所缘。对于“嗔怒事差别”等的所缘,是通过“离嗔”这一说法,说明对“他对我做了无益之事”等嗔怒事差别所缘的嗔,以镇伏的方式远离;又通过“离昏沉睡眠等”这一说法——这些是痴更重的状态——说明对以隐藏方式存在的、以苦等及前世等为差别的所缘的痴,以镇伏的方式远离。而这能镇伏欲贪、嗔恚以及与之同住的昏沉睡眠等的(定),由于它的自性是对治一切不善法、与一切善法相对,因此虽然它以这样的自性能够断除一切不善法,但它本身的自性就是镇伏欲贪等的自性。所以,不作区分地说镇伏远离诸盖、不善根等,就是这个意思。巴利
Pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassāti rūpādipañcakāmaguṇavisesavisayassa. Āghātavatthubhedādivisayānanti byāpādavivekavacanena ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādiāghātavatthubhedavisayassa dosassa, mohādhikehi thinamiddhādīhi vivekavacanena paṭicchādanavasena dukkhādipubbantādibhedavisayassa mohassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto. Kāmarāgabyāpādatadekaṭṭhathinamiddhādivikkhambhakañcetaṃ sabbākusalapaṭipakkhasabhāvattā sabbakusalānaṃ, tena sabhāvena sabbākusalappahāyakaṃ hontampi kāmarāgādivikkhambhanasabhāvameva hoti taṃsabhāvattāti avisesetvā nīvaraṇākusalamūlādīnaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti āha.
诸法随因缘而转起,其中并没有任何自主掌控性。为了遮止“有自主掌控”这一说法,才说“思维就是寻”。所谓“思维”,就是思维的动作,而这个动作也只是寻依靠自己的诸缘而转起而已。因此,这种对状态的说明,是为了遮止“有自主掌控”的主张。这个思维,就是对所缘构想“是这样、是这样”,所以说“被称为推度”。因为心依靠寻的力量,就好像攀上了所缘一样,所以寻被说成具有“把心安放在所缘上”的特征。就像有人依靠国王宠信的人、亲戚或朋友,而登上、进入王宫;同样,心依靠寻而登上所缘。如果这样,那没有寻的心又怎么登上所缘呢?正是靠寻的力量。就像那个人因为熟悉了,即使没有那人帮助,也能毫无顾虑地进入王宫;同样,因为熟悉,即使没有寻,没有寻的心也能登上所缘。所谓“因为熟悉”,是指相续中不断转起的、被称为“寻的修习”的那种熟悉。因为寻在相续中频繁转起的力量,心登上所缘早已成为长久熟悉的习惯,所以它有时即使没有寻,也仍然在那里转起。就像与智俱行、以思惟方式长久熟悉的心,有时即使没有智,也仍以思惟方式转起;又像与烦恼俱行而转起的心,即使完全没有了烦恼,也会因为熟悉而以烦恼习气的方式转起。应当这样来理解。巴利
Yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ natthi kāci vasavattitāti vasavattibhāvanivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘vitakkanaṃ vitakko’’ti vuttaṃ. Vitakkananti hi vitakkanakiriyā, sā ca vitakkassa attano paccayehi pavattimattamevāti bhāvaniddeso vasavattibhāvanivāraṇāya hoti. Tayidaṃ vitakkanaṃ ‘‘īdisamida’’nti ārammaṇaparikappananti āha ‘‘ūhananti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Yasmā cittaṃ vitakkabalena ārammaṇaṃ abhiniruḷhaṃ viya hoti, tasmā so ārammaṇābhiniropanalakkhaṇo vutto. Yathā hi koci rājavallabhaṃ ñātiṃ vā mittaṃ vā nissāya rājagehaṃ ārohati anupavisati, evaṃ vitakkaṃ nissāya cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohatīti? Vitakkabaleneva. Yathā hi so puriso paricayena tena vināpi nirāsaṅko rājagehaṃ pavisati, evaṃ paricayena vitakkena vināpi avitakkaṃ cittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ārohati. Paricayenāti ca santāne pavattavitakkabhāvanāsaṅkhātena paricayena. Vitakkassa hi santāne abhiṇhaṃ pavattassa vasena cittassa ārammaṇābhiruhanaṃ ciraparicitaṃ, tena taṃ kadāci vitakkena vināpi tattha pavattateva. Yathā taṃ ñāṇasahitaṃ hutvā sammasanavasena ciraparicitaṃ kadāci ñāṇarahitampi sammasanavasena pavattati, yathā vā kilesasahitaṃ hutvā pavattaṃ sabbaso kilesarahitampi paricayena kilesavāsanāvasena pavattati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“击打与遍击的作用”:从最初或从正面进行的击打,叫击打;从周围、或翻转之后进行的击打,叫遍击。应当知道,寻的生起方式就像敲击时喊着“色、色”“大地、大地”那样,这就是击打与遍击。因为当寻把心安放到某个所缘上时,它使那个所缘变得适合被心执取,就好像在敲击一样。既然如此,那先长老为什么说“寻的特相是敲击。大王,就像敲了鼓之后,随后有回响、有回声,同样,大王,应当把寻看作敲击,随后应当把伺看作回响、回声”?这并不矛盾。因为长老是依作用来说特相的。诸法并没有脱离自性的某种作用,但也有应当这样把握的方式。然而,为了随顺应当被教化的众生,即使是胜义上同一的自性法,也会借着各种同义的说法,以许多方式、像假立的形式那样被阐明。这样,它才能被很好地阐明。“引近的现起”:这里,“引近”是指把所缘引到心中,或者拉近。巴利
Āhananapariyāhananarasoti ādito, abhimukhaṃ vā hananaṃ āhananaṃ. Parito, parivattitvā vā āhananaṃ pariyāhananaṃ. ‘‘Rūpaṃ rūpaṃ, pathavī pathavī’’ti ākoṭentassa viya pavatti āhananaṃ pariyāhanananti ca veditabbaṃ. Yasmiñhi ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, taṃ tassa gahaṇayogyaṃ karonto vitakko ākoṭento viya hoti. Yadi evaṃ nāgasenattherena ‘‘ākoṭanalakkhaṇo vitakko. Yathā, mahārāja, bherī ākoṭitā atha pacchā anuravati anusaddāyati, evameva kho, mahārāja, yathā ākoṭanā, evaṃ vitakko daṭṭhabbo. Atha pacchā anuravanā anusaddanā, evaṃ vicāro daṭṭhabbo’’ti ākoṭanalakkhaṇatā vitakkassa kasmā vuttā? Nāyaṃ virodho. Therena hi kiccasannissitaṃ katvā lakkhaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammānañhi sabhāvavinimuttā kāci kiriyā nāma natthi tathā gahetabbākāro ca. Bodhaneyyajanānurodhena pana paramatthato ekībhāvopi sabhāvadhammo pariyāyavacanehi viya samāropitarūpehi bahūhi pakārehi pakāsīyati. Evañhi so suṭṭhu pakāsito hoti. Ānayanapaccupaṭṭhānoti ettha ānayanaṃ citte ārammaṇassa upanayanaṃ, ākaḍḍhanaṃ vā.
随行、随处转动。应当知道,这个差别只有在相续中才能获得,并且只在相续中才明显。其余各处也是同样的道理。随触,就是心对所缘的随触,意思是遍触。正如说过的:“伺就像遍触的手,就像移动的手。”在那里,就是对所缘。对俱生法的策励,应当理解为以对所缘随行、名为随触的方式。随续,就是心对所缘好像不间断地生起。因此它被称为“随续性”。也正因为这样,说“像钟的回响,像旋转”。在哪些地方呢?在初禅以及狭小的心生起时。以粗的意义,就是比伺更粗的意义。就像撞钟的声音是第一次撞击,同样,以面向所缘而安置的意义,寻就像心的第一次撞击,所以说“像撞钟的声音”等等。有震荡:这里“震荡”是寻对治昏沉睡眠,于所缘不退缩、不收缩,但因为它是安置的状态,所以好像动摇,出于这个意思,说“心的散动状态”。像旋转:这里应当理解为,为了审察没有危险而旋转。在《双论注》中则——巴利
Anusañcaraṇaṃ anuparibbhamanaṃ. Svāyaṃ viseso santānamhi labbhamāno eva santāne pākaṭo hotīti daṭṭhabbo. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Anumajjananti ārammaṇe cittassa anumasanaṃ, parimajjananti attho. Tathā hi ‘‘vicāro parimajjanahattho viya sañcaraṇahattho viyā’’ti ca vutto. Tatthāti ārammaṇe. Sahajātānaṃ anuyojanaṃ ārammaṇe anuvicaraṇasaṅkhātaanumajjanavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Anuppabandhanaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa avicchinnassa viya pavatti. Tathā hi so ‘‘anuppabandhanatā’’ti niddiṭṭho. Teneva ca ‘‘ghaṇṭānuravo viya, paribbhamanaṃ viyā’’ti ca vutto. Katthacīti paṭhamajjhāne parittacittuppādesu ca. Oḷārikaṭṭhenāti vicārato oḷārikaṭṭhena. Yathā ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo paṭhamābhinipāto hoti, evaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhaniropanaṭṭhena vitakko cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto viya hotīti āha ‘‘ghaṇṭābhighātasaddo viyā’’tiādi. Vipphāravāti ettha vipphāro nāma vitakkassa thinamiddhapaṭipakkho ārammaṇe anolīnatā asaṅkoco, so pana abhiniropanabhāvena calanaṃ viya hotīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘paripphandanabhāvo cittassā’’ti. Paribbhamanaṃ viyāti ettha parissayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ paribbhamananti veditabbaṃ. Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana –
就像在空中飞行的大鸟,用两只翅膀迎取风之后,把翅膀收拢起来再往前飞;同样,心以把心投向所缘的方式生起活动,这就是寻。又像为了迎取风而不断扇动翅膀往前飞;同样,心以反复触摩所缘的方式生起活动,这就是伺。巴利
‘‘Ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko, vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro’’ti –
上面说的这个道理,放在持续不断地运转的情形里也说得通。因为不管是在近行定还是安止定中,当心以相续不断的方式运转时,寻变得稳定,就像是已经深入所缘之后才运作,而不是在最初撞击所缘的那一刻就显现出来。打个比方,面对一个以前没接触过的所缘,最初撞击的那一下,寻是有明显波动的;但在同一个所缘上以无间断、相续不断的方式运转时就不是这样了,那时候因为已经沉静下来,波动就不太大了。再说“在初禅和第二禅中明显”——寻的特点在于把心安置到所缘上,这个作用因为比较粗,所以在初禅中很明显;由于初禅中没有这个粗的作用,所以在五禅法的体系里,第二禅中伺的特点,也就是随触、反复按摩所缘的作用,就变得明显了。巴利
Vuttaṃ, taṃ anuppabandhanena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. Tathā hi upacāre vā appanāyaṃ vā santānena pavattiyaṃ vitakko niccalo hutvā ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya pavattati, na paṭhamābhinipāte pākaṭo hoti. Yathā hi apubbārammaṇe paṭhamābhinipātabhūto vitakko vipphāravā hoti, na tathā ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ anuppabandhavasena pavattiyaṃ, nātivipphāravā pana tattha hoti sannisinnabhāvato. Paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hotīti vitakkassa viseso abhiniropanākāro oḷārikattā paṭhamajjhāne pākaṭo hoti, tadabhāvato pañcakanaye dutiyajjhāne vicārassa viseso anumajjanākāro pākaṭo hoti.
这里还有一种理解方式:比如有人一只手紧紧抓住沾了污垢的铜器,另一只手拿沾了粉、油、羊毛等的布团去擦它,紧紧抓住的那只手就像寻,擦拭的那只手就像伺。同样,陶匠用棍子转动轮盘来制作器皿时,压紧泥团的那只手就像寻,同一只手来回移动就像伺。同样,在铜器等上面画圆形或圆圈时,固定在中间不动的针就像安立目标的寻,在外围转动的针就像随顺观察的伺。应当这样理解。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aparo nayo – malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelaeḷakalomādikatacumbaṭakena parimajjantassa daḷhaṃ gahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa piṇḍassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, tasseva ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kaṃsabhājanādīsu kiñci maṇḍalaṃ vaṭṭalekhaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāroti veditabbaṃ.
就像离开了花、果、枝等部分,树虽然找不到,仍然可以说它“有花有果”;同样,为了说明离开了寻等支分,禅那虽然找不到,仍然可以说它“有寻有伺”,所以说了“如树”等话。而在《分别论》等中,因为要依人来教导修禅,所以以“在此,比丘远离诸欲……”(《分别论》508)这样依人为主来列举诸禅。虽然《分别论》中是依人而作开示,但那里的意思也应该像这里以“以此寻”等依法而说的那样来理解,因为从胜义上说,人根本不存在,这就是其意旨。或者,通过显示具有禅那的人具有寻伺,而说禅那本身是有寻有伺的,所以说“然而那里的意思也应该这样理解”。巴利
Yathā pupphaphalasākhādiavayavavinimutto avijjamānopi rukkho ‘‘sapuppho saphalo’’ti voharīyati, evaṃ vitakkādiaṅgavinimuttaṃ avijjamānampi jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti voharīyatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘rukkho viyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vibhaṅge panātiādīsu jhānabhāvanāya puggalavasena desetabbattā ‘‘idha bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) puggalādhiṭṭhānena jhānāni uddiṭṭhānīti. Yadipi vibhaṅge puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā, attho pana tatrāpi vibhaṅgepi yathā idha ‘‘iminā ca vitakkenā’’tiādinā dhammavasena vutto, evameva daṭṭhabbo, paramatthato puggalasseva abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Atha vā jhānasamaṅgino vitakkavicārasamaṅgitādassanena jhānasseva savitakkasavicāratā vuttāti āha ‘‘attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
针对“离”这个词是采用存在义释(bhāvasādhana,即把词解释为表示状态或行为本身),所以说“因此从离……”。这里的从格(nissakkavacana)是表示原因的意思,因此意思是“以离为因”。针对“离”这个词是采用作者义释(kattusādhana,即把词解释为表示行为者)还是宾语义释(kammasādhana,即把词解释为表示行为对象),所以说“或于彼离中”。因为“已离”(vivitto)这个词,既指“已离诸盖”,也指“被诸盖所离”,所以两种释法都包含在内了。“令喜悦”(pinayati)的意思是令满足,或者令增长。“遍喜相”的意思是令遍悦意之相。“喜满味”的意思是令充盛之味。“遍满味”的意思是以殊胜色法遍满身体之味。“昂扬状态”就是庆悦。“令乐”(sukhayatīti sukhaṃ)的意思是令自己及相应诸法获得滋味,也就是令享受。这里的作者说(kattuniddeso)是间接得来的,目的是遮止其他作者;而按直接方式,只有存在义释才成立,所以说“乐性即乐”(sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ)。“乐相”(sātalakkhaṇaṃ)——因为具有可爱之本性,所以能令具有它的人、或令相应诸法在自己身上感到滋味,这就是“乐”(sātaṃ),把 da 音变成 ta 音。人们说“乐是甜蜜的”,乐就是它的相,所以叫“乐相”。在“令增盛味”等中,“增盛”是指令相应诸法增长,像对待苦那样不舍弃、像对待不苦不乐那样不漠视,而是一再一再地执取,或者说资助、摄益。在“何处”等中,是指初禅等。“获得之喜”是指因获得而生起的喜悦。“已得味之体验”是指体验已得之所缘的滋味。以此从本性上分析显示了喜与乐。凡是喜存在之处,乐也存在——就像寻与伺的关系一样,说明喜与乐有绝对关联。凡是乐存在之处,喜不一定存在——就像伺与寻的关系一样,说明乐与喜没有绝对关联。以此显示了喜与乐在有无绝对关联上的差别。巴利
Vivekasaddassa bhāvasādhanataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmā vivekā’’ti. Hetuatthe cetaṃ nissakkavacanaṃ, tasmā vivekā hetubhūtāti attho. Vivekasaddassa kattusādhanataṃ kammasādhanataṃ vā sandhāyāha ‘‘tasmiṃ vā viveke’’ti. ‘‘Vivitto’’ti hi iminā nīvaraṇehi vinābhūto tehi vivecitoti ca sādhanadvayampi saṅgahitamevāti. Pinayatīti tappeti vaḍḍheti vā. Sampiyāyanalakkhaṇāti paritussanalakkhaṇā. Pīnanarasāti paribrūhanarasā. Pharaṇarasāti paṇītarūpehi kāyassa byāpanarasā. Udaggabhāvo odagyaṃ. Sukhayatīti sukhaṃ, attanā sampayuttadhamme laddhassāde karotīti attho. Svāyaṃ kattuniddeso pariyāyaladdho dhammato aññassa kattunivattanattho, nippariyāyena pana bhāvasādhanameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhanaṃ sukha’’nti vuttaṃ. Sātalakkhaṇanti iṭṭhasabhāvattā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalaṃ, sampayuttadhamme vā attani sādayatīti sātaṃ da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Sātaṃ madhuranti vadanti, sātaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Upabrūhanarasantiādīsu upabrūhanaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ saṃvaddhanaṃ, dukkhaṃ viya avissajjetvā adukkhamasukhā viya anajjhupekkhitvā anu anu gaṇhanaṃ upakāritā vā anuggaho. Katthacīti paṭhamajjhānādike. Paṭilābhatuṭṭhīti paṭilābhavasena uppajjanakatuṭṭhi. Paṭiladdharasānubhavananti paṭiladdhassa ārammaṇarasassa anubhavanaṃ. Etena pītisukhāni sabhāvato vibhajitvā dassitāni. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhanti vitakkassa viya vicārena pītiyā sukhena accantasaṃyogamāha. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pītīti vicārassa viya vitakkena, sukhassa pītiyā anaccantasaṃyogaṃ. Tena accantānaccantasaṃyogitāya pītisukhānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti.
“什么样的水能让人渡过去?”这里说的就是旷野,也就是没有水的荒凉地方。林就是树林。就像在林荫下、进入水中、享用清水等时候感到快乐一样:譬如有人走上一条大旷野的路,被暑热逼得难受,又渴又饿,在路上看见一个人,就问:“哪里有水?”那人回答说:“越过这片森林,就有一处天然湖泊和树林,到那里就能得到。”他听了这话,立刻欢喜雀跃。然后继续走,看见地上落着莲瓣、莲茎、莲叶等,就更加欢喜雀跃。再往前走,看见衣服湿了、头发也湿了的人,听见林鸡、孔雀等的叫声,看见天然湖边上像宝石网一样的青翠树林,看见湖里生出的青莲、红莲、白莲,也看见清澈明净的水。他越来越欢喜雀跃,走进天然湖,随心所欲地沐浴、喝水,止息了疲劳,吃了藕、莲根等,佩戴上青莲等,把柔软的花根扛在肩上,上岸,穿好下衣,把浴衣放在太阳下晒,在清凉的树荫里、微风轻轻吹拂的地方躺下来,说道:“啊,真快乐!啊,真快乐!”应当知道这个比喻就是这样。这个人从听说天然湖和树林所在之处开始,直到看见水为止的那段欢喜雀跃的时光,就像在前分所缘中欢喜雀跃的喜;沐浴、喝水之后,在清凉树荫下、微风轻轻吹拂的地方,说着“啊,真快乐!啊,真快乐!”躺卧的那段时光,就像已经达到强力、安住在体验所缘之味的乐。巴利
Kaṃ udakaṃ tārenti etthāti kantāraṃ, nirudakamaruṭṭhānaṃ. Vanameva vanantaṃ. Vanacchāyappavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhanti yathā hi puriso mahākantāramaggaṃ paṭipanno ghammapareto tasito pipāsito paṭipathe purisaṃ disvā ‘‘kattha pānīyaṃ atthī’’ti puccheyya, so ‘‘aṭaviṃ uttaritvāva jātassaravanasaṇḍo atthi, tattha gantvā labhissasī’’ti vadeyya, so tassa kathaṃ sutvāva haṭṭhapahaṭṭho bhaveyya, tato gacchanto bhūmiyaṃ patitāni uppaladalanāḷapattādīni disvā suṭṭhutaraṃ haṭṭhapahaṭṭho hutvā gacchanto allavatthe allakese purise passeyya, vanakukkuṭavanamorādīnaṃ saddaṃ suṇeyya, jātassarapariyante jātamaṇijālasadisaṃ nīlavanasaṇḍaṃ passeyya, sare jātāni uppalapadumakumudāni passeyya, acchaṃ vippasannaṃ udakampi passeyya, so bhiyyo bhiyyo haṭṭhapahaṭṭho hutvā jātassaraṃ otaritvā yathāruci nhatvā ca pivitvā ca passaddhadaratho bhisamuḷālapokkharādīni khāditvā nīluppalādīni piḷandhitvā mandālavamūlāni khandhe khipitvā uttaritvā sāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā udakasāṭakaṃ ātape katvā sītacchāyāya mandamande vāte paharante nipannova ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vadeyya, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tassa hi purisassa jātassaravanasaṇḍasavanato paṭṭhāya yāva udakadassanā haṭṭhapahaṭṭhakālo viya pubbabhāgārammaṇe haṭṭhapahaṭṭhākārā pīti, nhāyitvā ca pivitvā ca sītacchāyāya mandamande vāte paharante ‘‘aho sukhaṃ aho sukha’’nti vadanto nipannakālo viya balappattaṃ ārammaṇarasānubhavanākārasaṇṭhitaṃ sukhaṃ.
“在那些时刻”:是指在获得可爱所缘的时候,在体验已得之味的时候,在听闻和看见林荫等的时候,以及在受用的时候。“由于明显”:是指喜和乐依次变得明显。“离生喜乐”:在这里,就前面的含义来说,“离生”指的是禅那。又因为“喜乐”这个词,以及这个禅那有含义和含义的差别,或者在这里应当看到有一个“a”字,就像“arisaso”(无病者)那样。在第二禅中,只有喜乐是离生的,而“离生喜乐”是依他词义复合,并且没有省略自指称;如果省略,则读作“vivekajapītisukhaṃ”,这就是差别。巴利
Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samayeti iṭṭhārammaṇassa paṭilābhasamaye paṭiladdhassa rasānubhavanasamaye vanacchāyādīnaṃ savanadassanasamaye paribhogasamaye ca. Pākaṭabhāvatoti yathākkamaṃ pītisukhānaṃ vibhūtabhāvato. Vivekajaṃpītisukhanti ettha purimasmiṃ atthe vivekajanti jhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Pītisukhasaddato ca atthiatthavisesavato assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāneti ettha akāro daṭṭhabbo yathā arisasoti. Dutiye pītisukhameva vivekajaṃ, vivekajaṃpītisukhanti ca aññapadatthasamāso paccattaniddesassa ca alopo kato, lope vā sati ‘‘vivekajapītisukha’’nti pāṭhoti ayaṃ viseso.
用“按数目顺序,最初”这句话,是在指出说法的次序。也有人写作“按数目顺序的最初”,在那里意思也是“按数目顺序”,或者意思是:仅仅是按数目顺序这一点,就说为“最初”。然而“最初入定,所以叫最初”这个说法,并不是绝对的定义。因为已经修得自在的人,证得八等至时,既能从开头依次修到末尾而入定,也能从末尾依次修到开头而入定,还能在中间随意跳着入定。所以,从“先前生起”的意义来说,最初生起的也叫最初。正因如此,[这里说的是]“燃烧”——燃烧敌对法,即燃烧诸盖等敌对法,是以镇伏的方式断除之义;[“彼”指]彼行处;[“与近行俱”即]与近行定一起;[“以遍所缘近观故”即]如以眼观色般,近观地遍等自己的所缘;[“以相为近观故”即]如理近观无常等三相及涅槃界的真实相;[“真实相”即]涅槃具有不坏之法、无变异之性,因此是无颠倒的自性,即真实相。巴利
Gaṇanānupubbato paṭhamanti iminā desanākkamaṃ ulliṅgeti. ‘‘Gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhama’’ntipi pāṭho, tatthāpi gaṇanānupubbatāyāti attho, gaṇanānupubbatāmattaṃ vā paṭhamanti idaṃ vacananti attho. Paṭhamaṃ samāpajjatīti paṭhamanti idaṃ pana na ekantalakkhaṇaṃ. Ciṇṇavasībhāvo hi aṭṭhasamāpattilābhī ādito paṭṭhāya matthakaṃ pāpentopi samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, matthakato paṭṭhāya ādiṃ pāpentopi samāpajjituṃ sakkoti, antarantarā okkamantopi sakkoti. Evaṃ pubbuppattiyaṭṭhena pana paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Teneva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.75) ‘‘gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhama’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Paccanīkadhamme jhāpetīti nīvaraṇādipaccanīkadhamme dahati, vikkhambhanavasena pajahatīti attho. Gocaranti kasiṇādiālambanaṃ. Tanti taṃ gocaraṃ. Upanijjhāyatīti passati. Saha upacārenāti saddhiṃ upacārajjhānena. Kasiṇārammaṇūpanijjhāyanatoti pathavīkasiṇādino attano ārammaṇassa rūpaṃ viya cakkhunā upanijjhāyanato. Lakkhaṇūpanijjhāyanatoti yathāsambhavaṃ aniccādilakkhaṇattayassa nibbānadhātuyā tathalakkhaṇassa ca upanijjhāyanato. Tenevāha ‘‘ettha hī’’tiādi. Niccādivipallāsappahānena maggo asammohato aniccādilakkhaṇāni upanijjhāyatīti lakkhaṇūpanijjhānanti āha ‘‘vipassanāya upanijjhāyanakicca’’ntiādi. Tathalakkhaṇanti avināsadhammassa nibbānassa anaññathābhāvato aviparītasabhāvo tathalakkhaṇaṃ, maggassapi vā nibbānārammaṇato tathalakkhaṇūpanijjhānatā yojetabbā.
为了说明不同的譬喻,他首先说“如有财者”等话。所谓“另有一个堪作譬喻的人”,意思是:一个人在财富和眷属方面都与众不同,他拥有财富和眷属,与财富和眷属共同生活,所以被称为“有财者、有眷属者”,他堪作譬喻,也就是应当被引来作譬喻的意思。所谓“军队的名称只安立在军支上”,意思是:并没有脱离车兵等军支而单独存在的军队,但因为与车兵、步兵等共同存在,所以称为“有车兵、有步兵的军队”;也就是说,“军队”这个名称仅仅是依靠车兵等军支而施设的。那么,为什么在这段关于禅那的经文中,没有直接提到的心一境性却被提出来了呢?为了回应这个质难,他说“因未说故”等话。“即如此已说”,是指在《分别论》中已经依其自性这样讲过了。“虽在此无有心一境性”这句,意思是:虽然在这段关于禅那的经文中,没有依其自性直接说“有心一境性”,但以“禅那”这个总名来说时,心一境性就已经包含在内了。因此他说“因为……”等话。这段话的意思是:为了显示与寻等俱起的法,世尊在《分别论》中以“心一境性”来解说时,就已经表明了以“有寻有伺”等解说来显示其内涵的同一意趣。因此,不应该认为心一境性在这段关于禅那的经文中没有被提到。巴利
Visadisodāharaṇaṃ tāva dassento āha ‘‘yathā sadhano’’tiādi. Añño apadesāraho hotīti dhanato parijanato ca añño dhanavā parijanavā ca puriso saha dhanena vattati parijanena cāti sadhano saparijanoti apadesaṃ arahatīti apadesāraho hoti , apadisitabbo hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Senaṅgesu eva senāsammutīti rathādisenaṅgavinimuttāya senāya abhāvepi rathehi pattīhi ca saha vattanato sarathā sapatti senāti rathādisenaṅgesuyeva senāvohāroti attho. Kasmā panettha jhānapāṭhe aggahitā cittekaggatā gahitāti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘avuttattā’’tiādi. Evaṃ vuttāyevāti evaṃ sarūpato vibhaṅge vuttāyeva. Sacittekaggatanti idha avuttepīti ‘‘sacittekaggata’’nti evaṃ sarūpato imasmiṃ jhānapāṭhe avuttepīti attho, sāmaññato pana jhānaggahaṇena gahitā eva. Tenevāha ‘‘yena hī’’tiādi . Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yena vitakkādīhi saha vattabbaṃ, taṃ dhammaṃ dīpetuṃ tassa pakāsanādhippāyena ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādinā uddeso kato, so eva adhippāyo tena bhagavatā vibhaṅge (vibha. 569) ‘‘cittassekaggatā’’ti niddisantena pakāsito, tasmā sā jhānapāṭhe aggahitāti na cintetabbanti.
在“证入”这个词里,为了说明前缀upa-和saṃ并不像在“upalabbhati”等词中那样没有意义,先说了“前往”等语;接着为了再次显示它们是有意义的,又说了“使成就”等。因此,“证入”在这里的意思是“到达之后”或“成就之后”。“iriyanti”指行为。“vuttinti”等是它的同义词。一种威仪的损坏,就是以其他威仪来守护、保护它。因为这是诸佛一贯所行的,所以这里只说了入出息念这个业处。他们说,这确实是诸佛一贯所行的。巴利
Upasampajjāti ettha upa-saṃsaddā ‘‘upalabbhatī’’tiādīsu viya niratthakāti dassetuṃ ‘‘upagantvā’’tiādiṃ vatvā puna tesaṃ sātthakabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upasampādayitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tasmā upasampajjāti ettha patvā sādhetvāti vā attho. Iriyanti kiriyaṃ. Vuttintiādīni tasseva vevacanāni. Ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ iriyāpathantarehi rakkhaṇaṃ pālanaṃ. Sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇattā ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānameva vuttaṃ. Tañhi sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇanti vadanti.
“平息”是指平息的原因。这里所说的“平息”,指的是断除,而从意义上说,这种断除就是寻与伺在第二禅那的刹那不再生起,所以他说“由于超越”等。那么,这里所指的是哪些寻与伺的平息呢?是初禅的寻与伺,还是第二禅的寻与伺?对此,如果说是初禅的寻与伺,它们并没有平息,因为初禅任何时候都不可能没有寻与伺。如果说是第二禅的寻与伺,那也谈不上平息,因为在第二禅里它们完全不存在。针对这个诘问,他说“于此,虽然”等。意思是:所谓平息,是指那些已见过患的法在各自禅那的刹那不再生起,而作为禅支的寻等正是这样被对待的,并不是与它们相应的触等其他心所。因此,在禅那中,“平息”一词只用来指寻等的平息。然而,经典中也像对寻等一样,对与寻等相应的法开示“以此,此为粗”等过患,所以在应当说寻等及其相应法的平息等时,如果只说寻等的平息,这个多出来的表述就能让人领会到别的意思,从而显示出某种差别。为了说明这一点,他说“然而,对于粗的”等。这里的意趣是:由于超越那些使初禅成为粗的寻与伺而证得第二禅,并不是由于超越本性上并不粗的触等而证得。这个道理,正是由“寻与伺的平息”这句话所显示的。因此,“这里所指的是初禅的寻与伺的平息,还是第二禅的寻与伺的平息”这样的责难根本没有立足之地。“由喜的离欲”等句中也是同样的道理。所以,超越寻、伺、喜、乐这些说法,是在说明通过超越越来越粗的禅支而证得第二禅等。其中,超越寻与伺这一部分说法,是以部分代表整体的方式来说明整体的。因为即使超越寻与伺等说法各自分开存在,由于它们与“应舍支”的列举有共通性,当以心整体地把握时,超越寻与伺的说法就成为整体的一部分。或者,由超越寻与伺的平息这一说法,即已说明了以超越喜的离欲等说法所表示的、通过超越喜等而证得第三禅等,因此说它说明了那一点。这样,不必借助部分代表整体的方式,单凭超越寻与伺的平息这一说法,就已显示出喜的离欲等说法在自己的范围内具有相同的功用。巴利
Vūpasamāti vūpasamahetu. Vūpasamoti cettha pahānaṃ adhippetaṃ, tañca vitakkavicārānaṃ atikkamo atthato dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe anuppādoti āha ‘‘samatikkamā’’tiādi. Katamesaṃ panettha vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo adhippeto, kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, udāhu dutiyajjhānikānanti, kiñcettha – yadi paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ, natthi tesaṃ vūpasamo. Na hi kadāci paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārarahitaṃ atthi. Atha dutiyajjhānikānaṃ, evampi nattheva vūpasamo sabbena sabbaṃ tesaṃ tattha abhāvatoti imaṃ anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā diṭṭhādīnavassa taṃtaṃjhānakkhaṇe anuppattidhammatāpādanaṃ vūpasamanaṃ adhippetaṃ, vitakkādayo eva ca jhānaṅgabhūtā tathā karīyanti, na taṃsampayuttā phassādayo, tasmā vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamādhivacanaṃ jhāne āgataṃ. Yasmā pana vitakkādīnaṃ viya taṃsampayuttadhammānampi ‘‘etena etaṃ oḷārika’’nti ādīnavadassanaṃ sutte āgataṃ, tasmā avisesena vitakkādīnaṃ taṃsahagatānañca vūpasamādike vattabbe vitakkādīnaṃyeva vūpasamo vuccamāno adhikavacanaṃ aññamatthaṃ bodhetīti katvā kañci visesaṃ dīpetīti dassento ‘‘oḷārikassa panā’’tiādimāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – yehi vitakkavicārehi paṭhamajjhānassa oḷārikatā, tesaṃ samatikkamā dutiyajjhānassa samadhigamo, na sabhāvato anoḷārikānaṃ phassādīnaṃ samatikkamāti ayamattho ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etena dīpito , tasmā ‘‘kiṃ paṭhamajjhānikānaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo idhādhippeto, udāhu dutiyajjhānikāna’’nti edisī codanā anokāsāva. ‘‘Pītiyā ca virāgā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tasmā vitakkavicārapītisukhasamatikkamavacanāni oḷārikoḷārikaṅgasamatikkamā dutiyādiadhigamadīpakānīti tesaṃ ekadesabhūtaṃ vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanaṃ avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇanayena taṃ dīpakaṃ vuttaṃ. Visuṃ visuṃ ṭhitepi hi vitakkavicārasamatikkamavacanādike paheyyaṅganiddesatāsāmaññena cittena samūhato gahite vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanassa tadekadesatā hotīti. Atha vā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva taṃsamatikkamā dutiyādiadhigamadīpakena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ pītiādisamatikkamā tatiyādiadhigamadīpakatā dīpitā hotīti tassa taṃdīpakatā vuttā. Evañhi avayavena samudāyopalakkhaṇaṃ vinā vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena pītivirāgādivacanānaṃ savisaye samānabyāpāratā dassitā hoti.
“内在”指的是属于自己的内在,不是“内内的”等等。为了说明这一点,所以说“‘内在’指的是属于自己的内在”。其中,给出理由说“在《分别论》中亦”等。“pana”这个字也有“api”(也)的意思,就是“在《分别论》中也”的意思。或者,这就是原文的读法。巴利
Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippetaṃ, na ajjhattajjhattādīti dassento āha ‘‘ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ adhippeta’’nti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘vibhaṅgepanā’’tiādi. Pana-saddopi apisaddattho, vibhaṅgepīti attho. Ayameva vā pāṭho.
就像因为与蓝色结合而成为蓝布一样,意思是:就像布因为与蓝色结合而成为蓝色。在这个义理分别中,也就是在“令心明净”这一主张里。“心之”(cetaso)是表示受格的属格。在前一种主张里,也就是在“因为与明净结合,所以禅那也是明净”所说的主张里,“心之”是表示关联的属格。在“乃至我令他人成为一境”等说法中,“一”这个词在世间也被用作最胜的意思,所以说“世间最胜者也称为‘一’”。在“被独行的微小者所胜”等说法中,“一”这个词也被看到有无伴侣的意思,所以说“成为独一无伴”。信等法对于相应法,固然既作为共同的缘,也作为各别的缘;然而,定在禅那的刹那,以不散乱为相,通过发挥主导作用,对相应法成为特别殊胜的缘。为了显示这一点,所以说“对相应诸法……乃至……之增上语”。巴利
Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viyāti nīlayogato vatthaṃ nīlaṃ viyāti adhippāyo. Imasmiñca atthavikappeti ‘‘ceto sampasādayatī’’ti etasmiṃ pakkhe. Cetasoti ca upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Purimasminti ‘‘sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādana’’nti vuttapakkhe. Cetasoti sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. ‘‘Yāva na pare ekagate karomī’’tiādīsu seṭṭhavacanopi ekasaddo loke dissatīti āha ‘‘seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Ekākīhi khuddakehi jita’’ntiādīsu asahāyatthopi ekasaddo diṭṭhoti āha ‘‘eko asahāyo hutvā’’ti. Saddhādayopi kāmaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ sādhāraṇato ca asādhāraṇato ca paccayā hontiyeva, samādhi pana jhānakkhaṇe sampayuttadhammānaṃ avikkhepalakkhaṇe indaṭṭhakaraṇena sātisayaṃ paccayo hotīti dassento ‘‘sampayuttadhamme…pe… adhivacana’’nti āha.
“心的明净”和“心一境性”这两个修饰语,是为了表达禅那的殊胜而采用的。为了显示这种殊胜——它在第二禅中可以获得,在初禅中则不是这样——才说了“难道不是……”等话。寻和伺以撞击、反复撞击所缘的方式,以及随顺、投入的方式活动,即使因为断除了五盖而远离了烦恼的污浊,它们仍然对相应的心法造成某种搅动,并且因为它们的存在,那些相应法并没有完全安定下来,所以说“由于寻伺的搅动……心不明净”。其中,小的波浪叫涟漪,大的叫波涛。即使有定,也不够明显——虽然诸根平衡、精进平等,但因为那种搅动和缺乏明净,定就像浑水中的鱼一样,并不明显。因为没有了寻伺的障碍——这里所说的搅动本身就是障碍。通过上面所说的——也就是《分别论》中以“信解……”等方式说明诸法生起行相差别的文句——正是基于这些法:由信而有“明净”,由心一境性而有“心一境性”,这样才说为禅那。这就是义理的解释:所谓“因为与明净相应,或者因为能令明净,所以叫明净。修习令心专一,所以叫心一境性,这样就说为禅那”,这就是义理的解释。在其他地方,它既能吻合也能一致,应当这样理解。那么,这个义理的解释怎么和《分别论》的文句吻合一致呢?在《分别论》的禅那分别中,抽出“明净”这个词后,用“凡是信、信解……”等话只说了信;抽出“心一境性”这个词后,用“凡是心的住、安住、停留……”等话只解释了定。但在义注中,却说“明净”和“心一境性”指的就是禅那本身,这样不就与《分别论》的文句矛盾了吗?并不矛盾,因为《分别论》也是出于同样的意图而作解释的。也就是说,通过那种明净而与禅那相应,禅那才被称为“明净”;当用“凡是信、信解……”等话显示了那种明净时,以“明净就是禅那”这种同一所指的解释方式,就表明了那个词是用于与它相应的禅那。同样,抽出“心一境性”这个词后,显示了心专一,以“心一境性就是禅那”这种同一所指的解释方式,就说明了禅那有令心专一增长的作用。出于这个意图,不作字句上的分别,只直接解释了法本身,所以并不矛盾。巴利
‘‘Sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti visesanadvayaṃ jhānassa atisayavacanicchāvasena gahitaṃ. Svāyamatisayo yathā imasmiṃ jhāne labbhati, na tathā paṭhamajjhāneti imaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇe āhananapariyāhananavasena anumajjanaanuyujjanavasena ca pavattamānā dhammā satipi nīvaraṇappahānena kilesakālussiyāpagame sampayuttānaṃ kiñci khobhaṃ karontā viya tehi ca te na sannisinnā hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārakkhobhena…pe… na suppasanna’’nti. Tattha khuddikā ūmiyo vīciyo, mahatiyo taraṅgā. Samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭoti satipi indriyasamatte vīriyasamatāya ca teneva khotena sampasādābhāvena ca bahale viya jale maccho samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo. Vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvenāti ettha yathāvuttakhobho eva palibodho. Evaṃ vuttenāti yassā saddhāya vasena sampasādanaṃ, yassā ca cittekaggatāya vasena ekodibhāvanti ca jhānaṃ vuttaṃ, tāsaṃ eva ‘‘saddahanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 574) pavattiākāravisesavibhāvanavasena vuttena tena vibhaṅgapāṭhena. Ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanāti ‘‘sampasādanayogato, sampasādanato vā sampasādanaṃ. Ekodiṃ bhāvetīti ekodibhāvanti jhānaṃ vutta’’nti evaṃ pavattā ayaṃ atthavaṇṇanā. Aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti ca, evaṃ veditabbāti kathaṃ panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā tena vibhaṅgapāṭhena saddhiṃ saṃsandati sameti, nanu jhānavibhaṅge ‘‘sampasādana’’nti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yā saddhā saddahanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 574) saddhāyeva vuttā, ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti ca padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yā cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhiti avaṭṭhitī’’tiādinā samādhisseva niddeso kato, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘sampasādanaṃ ekodibhāva’’nti jhānameva vuttanti aṭṭhakathāya vibhaṅgapāṭhena saddhiṃ virodho āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati vibhaṅgepi imināva adhippāyena niddesassa katattā. Tathā hi yena sampasādanena yogā jhānaṃ ‘‘sampasādana’’nti vuccati, tasmiṃ ‘‘yā saddhā saddahanā’’tiādinā dassite sampasādanaṃ jhānanti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva taṃyogā jhāne taṃsaddappavatti dassitā hoti. ‘‘Ekodibhāva’’nti ca padaṃ uddharitvā ekodimhi dassite ekodibhāvaṃ jhānanti samānādhikaraṇaniddeseneva jhānassa ekodivaḍḍhanatā vuttāva hotīti iminā adhippāyena byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā dhammamattameva niddiṭṭhanti avirodho yutto.
不过,复注师法护长老等人曾这样说:“如果‘心专一’(ekodī)的意思是要指称定,那么把‘心一境性’(ekodibhāva)这个词抽出来之后,就不应该再对定作解释了。所以,‘心一境性’这个词本身就是直接用于定的,就像‘明净’(sampasādana)一词用于禅那那样,这样才合理。”这种说法与义注相违背。因此,应当把那种说法看作是不依赖义注、单独另立的一种义理推测。他们的想法是这样的:因为不被寻和伺所覆盖,所以能单一地生起,因此称为“心专一”;以具备这种定力的禅那心本身作为所取对象,而说“心专一的状态”就是“心一境性”,这样就可以解释为指称定。然而他们所坚持的观点——“如果‘心专一’是指称定,那么把‘心一境性’这个词抽出来之后,就不应该再对定作解释了”——这是不合理的,因为这种推论并不具有普遍性。在其他地方也可以看到,《分别论》大多不做字句上的分别,而只是直接大量解释义理本身。巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ṭīkākārehi ācariyadhammapālattherādīhi ‘‘yadi ekodīti samādhissa gahaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, tadā ‘ekodibhāva’nti padaṃ uddharitvā samādhissa niddeso na kattabbo siyā. Tasmā ekodibhāvasaddo eva samādhimhi pavatto sampasādanasaddo viya jhāne pavattatīti yutta’’nti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Tasmā so aṭṭhakathānirapekkho visuṃyeveko atthavikappoti gahetabbaṃ. Ayañhi nesaṃ adhippāyo – vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā ekaṃ udetīti ekodīti tathāvidhasamādhiyuttaṃ jhānacittameva gahetvā ekodissa bhāvo ekodibhāvoti samādhissa gahaṇaṃ sakkā vattunti. Yo panāyaṃ tesamabhiniveso ‘‘ekodīti samādhissa gahaṇe sati ‘ekodibhāva’nti padaṃ uddharitvā samādhissa niddeso na kattabbo siyā’’ti , so anekantikattā ayutto. Aññatthapi hi byañjanavicāraṃ akatvā atthamattasseva bāhullena vibhaṅge niddeso dissati.
已寂静:已经达到平等的灭尽。已寂止:通过修习,被平等地引向灭尽。已善寂静:正因为如此,才极其安稳寂静。已灭没:已经走向灭没、坏灭。已完全灭没:这是加上前缀来加强语势的说法。已到达:已经被引向、走向坏灭。已干涸:由于被称为相续的流转已不存在,所以达到了干涸、枯竭的状态。已尽除:已经使它的边际消失。巴利
Santāti samaṃ nirodhaṃ gatā. Samitāti bhāvanāya samaṃ gamitā nirodhitā. Vūpasantāti tato eva suṭṭhu upasantā. Atthaṅgatāti atthaṃ vināsaṃ gatā. Abbhatthaṅgatāti upasaggena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuttaṃ. Appitāti gamitā vināsaṃ gatā. Sositāti pavattisaṅkhātassa santānassa abhāvena sosaṃ sukkhabhāvaṃ gatā. Byantīkatāti vigatantā katā.
这个“义”是指:因为通过修习已经断除了,所以寻和伺不存在,这就是这里所说的义。为了接受提问者所说的义理并加以回应,先说了“确实如此,这个义已经成立”,然后才说“然而并非如此”等话。其中,“此”指的是“寻与伺的寂止”这句话。“能显明彼义”是指:它能显明那仅仅是指寻与伺不存在这个义,而不是指烦恼污浊的寂止。意思是说,它不像近行刹那那样,因为止息了称为五盖的烦恼扰动而变得明净。难道不是已经说了“即使前面说过,也仍然应当再说”吗?那为什么还要说这个呢?因为:通过“内明净”“心一境性”这些显示证得第二禅等之因的词句,以及通过“寻与伺的寂止”这一显示无寻无伺之因的词句,寻与伺的不存在已经被表明了,那再用“无寻无伺”这个词又有什么用呢?并非如此,因为还没有被表明。因为“寻与伺的寂止”这句话,并没有说寻与伺不现行。对于寻与伺来说,断除贪爱才是它们的寂止。通过粗支分的方式,以“寻与伺的寂止”等语,显示了对各个禅那的贪欲的镇伏。由于“寻与伺的寂止”这句话是显示对寻与伺离贪的,而那些在诸行中断除贪爱的人,在断除贪爱的道与果中,诸行仍然现行;同样,在这里,对于已镇伏了对寻与伺之贪爱的第二禅,它与寻与伺的相应,可能并没有被前面的话所遮止。为了遮止这一点,以及为了显示作意欲求等的超越就是它们的寂止,才说了“无寻无伺”。第一禅以第二禅的强力支持为条件,所以说“从第一禅的定”。第一也指第一禅。巴利
Ayamatthoti bhāvanāya pahīnattā vitakkavicārānaṃ abhāvasaṅkhāto attho. Codakena vuttamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā pariharituṃ ‘‘evametaṃ siddhovāyamattho’’ti vatvā ‘‘na paneta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha etanti ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ. Tadatthadīpakanti tassa vitakkavicārābhāvamattasaṅkhātassa atthassa dīpakaṃ. Na kilesakālussiyassāti upacārakkhaṇe viya nīvaraṇasaṅkhātassa kilesasaṅkhobhassa vūpasamā na sampasādananti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘purimaṃ vatvāpi vattabbamevā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ. Tathā hi dutiyajjhānādiadhigamūpāyadīpakena ajjhattaṃ sampasādanatāya cetaso ekodibhāvatāya ca hetudīpakena avitakkaavicārabhāvahetudīpakena ca vitakkavicāravūpasamavacaneneva vitakkavicārābhāvo dīpitoti, kiṃ puna avitakkaavicāravacanena katenāti? Na, adīpitattā. Na hi vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanena vitakkavicārānaṃ appavatti vuttā hoti. Vitakkavicāresu hi taṇhāppahānaṃ etesaṃ vūpasamanaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgamukhena hi taṃtaṃjhānanikantiyā vikkhambhanaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanādīhi pakāsitaṃ. Yato vitakkavicāresu virattabhāvadīpakaṃ vitakkavicāravūpasamavacanaṃ, ye ca saṅkhāresu taṇhāppahānaṃ karonti, tesu maggesu pahīnataṇhesu ca phalesu saṅkhārappavatti hoti, evamidhāpi vikkhambhitavitakkavicārataṇhassa dutiyajjhānassa vitakkavicārasampayogo purimena na nivārito siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ āvajjitukāmatādiatikkamo ca tesaṃ vūpasamoti dassanatthañca ‘‘avitakkaṃ avicāra’’nti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamajjhānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa upanissayapaccayena paccayo hotīti āha ‘‘paṭhamajjhānasamādhito’’ti. Paṭhamampīti paṭhamajjhānampi.
关于“依数递增”等语,应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。在这里,说“第二生起的也就是第二”也是可以的。为了用《分别》的经文来证明已经说过的义理,所以说“如所说”等语。然而,《分别》(vibha. 580)中说“禅那,就是净信、喜、乐、心一境性”,这是为了显示带着辅助条件的禅那,才用间接的方式来说的。就像车上的黄色毛毯是车的辅助装饰,而不是禅那的支分一样,所以说“这确实只是间接的说法”。如果按直接的说法,那么依照达到近伺察相的那些支分来说,这禅那只是三支,所以说“然而,除去净信”等语。巴利
Gaṇanānupubbatotiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Etthāpi ‘‘dutiyaṃ uppannantipi dutiya’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Vuttamevatthaṃ vibhaṅgapāṭhena sādhento āha ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi. Yaṃ pana vibhaṅge (vibha. 580) ‘‘jhānanti sampasādo pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetuṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Rathassa paṇḍukambalaṃ viya hi sampasādo jhānassa parikkhāro, na jhānaṅganti āha ‘‘pariyāyoyeva ceso’’ti. Nippariyāyato pana upanijjhānalakkhaṇappattānaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena tivaṅgikamevetaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘sampasādanaṃ pana ṭhapetvā’’tiādi.
离染就是离贪。不过,为了说明那种离染是通过厌离的方式而厌弃,还是断除与它相关联的贪,所以说了“对那喜的厌恶或超越”。“两者之间”是指“喜的离染”这两个词之间,也就是中间的意思。合集就是总合。道就是方法。因为如果不证得第二禅,就无法证得第三禅,所以寻与伺的止息是证得第三禅的方法。“为了证得彼”就是为了证得第三道。巴利
Virajjanaṃ virāgo. Taṃ pana virajjanaṃ nibbindanamukhena hīḷanaṃ vā tappaṭibaddharāgappahānaṃ vāti dassetuṃ ‘‘tassā pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ubhinnamantarāti pītiyā virāgāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antarā, majjheti attho. Sampiṇḍanaṃ samuccayo. Maggoti upāyo. Dutiyajjhānassa hi paṭilābhaṃ vinā tatiyajjhānassa adhigamo na hotīti vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo tatiyajjhānādhigamassa upāyo. Tadadhigamāyāti tatiyamaggādhigamāya.
关于“等至”:因为以平衡的状态、以适当的方式,禅那舍也把平衡纳入其中而运作,所以说“平等地看”。清净:因为远离杂染而明净。广大:因为达到了极其广大的状态,所以广大。有力:因为喜的消失而达到坚固的状态。有人问:这里并没有舍受,那么这位具足第三禅的人,怎么能因为具足舍而被称为“舍者”呢?为了说明并非只有受舍才叫舍,还有其他舍存在,所以说“然而,舍有十种”等等。其中,“诸比丘,在这里,比丘用眼睛看到色之后,不欢喜也不忧愁,具念正知,安住于舍”,像这样所说的,是漏尽者在六门面对可意和不可意的六种所缘时,不放弃清净本性状态的舍,这叫做六支舍。巴利
Upapattitoti samavāhitabhāvena patirūpato jhānupekkhāpi samavāhitameva antonītaṃ katvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘samaṃ passatī’’ti. Visadāyāti saṃkilesavigamena paribyattāya. Vipulāyāti sātisayaṃ mahaggatabhāvappattito mahatiyā. Thāmagatāyāti pītivigamena thirabhāvappattāya. Nanu cettha upekkhāvedanāva na sambhavati, tasmā kathamayaṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī upekkhāya samannāgatattā ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccatīti ce? Na kevalaṃ vedanupekkhāva upekkhāti vuccati, atha kho aññāpi upekkhā vijjantīti dassento āha ‘‘upekkhā pana dasavidhā hotī’’tiādi. Tattha (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 163; visuddhi. 1.84) ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti na dummano, upekkhako viharati sato sampajāno’’ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,对于“以与舍俱行的心遍满一方而住”这句话中所说的、对众生保持平等状态的舍,这叫作梵住舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.308) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.
对于“修习舍觉支,依远离”这样说的、对俱生诸法保持中舍状态的舍,这称为觉支舍。巴利
Yā ‘‘upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita’’nti (ma. ni. 1.27; saṃ. ni. 5.182, 190-191) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.
不过,如果是像“时时作意舍相”这样说的,也就是不过度精进、不过分松懈的那种舍,这就叫精进舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘kālena kālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasi karotī’’ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.
有多少种行舍是靠止(奢摩他)的力量生起的?有多少种行舍是靠观(毗婆舍那)的力量生起的?靠止的力量生起的有八种行舍,靠观的力量生起的有十种行舍。巴利
‘‘Kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti.
哪八种行舍是依止(奢摩他)而生的?为了证得初禅,对诸盖进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得第二禅,对寻与伺进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得第三禅,对喜进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得第四禅,对乐与苦进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得空无边处定,对色想、有对想、种种想进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得识无边处定,对空无边处想进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得无所有处定,对识无边处想进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智;为了证得非想非非想处定,对无所有处想进行审察并安住,这份慧就是行舍中的智。这八种就是依止而生的行舍。巴利
‘‘Katamā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti? Paṭhamajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, dutiyajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya vitakkavicāre paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, tatiyajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya pītiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, catutthajjhānapaṭilābhatthāya sukhadukkhe paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya rūpasaññaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ nānattasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattipaṭilābhatthāya ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, imā aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti.
哪十种行舍是依观而生的?为了证得入流道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼加以审察而安住的慧,就是行舍中的智;为了证得入流果定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生加以审察而安住的慧,就是行舍中的智;为了证得一来道……为了证得一来果定……为了证得不还道……为了证得不还果定……为了证得阿罗汉道,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生、趣、出生、再生、生、老、病、死、愁、悲、恼加以审察而安住的慧,就是行舍中的智;为了证得阿罗汉果定……为了证得空住定……为了证得无相住定,对生起、转起、相、积集、结生加以审察而安住的慧,就是行舍中的智。这十种就是依观而生的行舍。巴利
‘‘Katamā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti? Sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, sakadāgāmimaggapaalābhatthāya…pe… sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… anāgāmimaggapaṭilābhatthāya…pe… anāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… arahattamaggapaṭilābhatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gatiṃ nibbattiṃ upapattiṃ jātiṃ jaraṃ byādhiṃ maraṇaṃ sokaṃ paridevaṃ upāyāsaṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, arahattaphalasamāpattatthāya…pe… suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya…pe… animittavihārasamaāpattatthāya uppādaṃ pavattaṃ nimittaṃ āyūhanaṃ paṭisandhiṃ paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā paññā saṅkhārupekkhāsu ñāṇaṃ, imā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) –
如此现起的、以对诸盖等的审察与安住为本质的舍,就叫做行舍。巴利
Evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.
这里,“审察诸盖”是指以应当断除的方式去审察五盖,也就是把握它们的意思。“安住”是指因为已经面向诸盖的断除,所以在断除它们时不再造作,以中立的态度安住。“于诸行舍”是指在断除诸盖时不造作,从而对被称为“盖”的诸行保持舍,这就是它的含义。这个道理也适用于寻、伺等的生起等。其中,“生起”是指由过去的业为缘,诸蕴在这里产生。“转起”是指这样产生之后的持续运作。“相”是指一切三地行法,以相的状态显现。“积集”是指成为未来结生之因的业。“结生”是指未来的投生。“趣”是指以哪种趣而结生。“出生”是指诸蕴的出生。“再生”是指异熟果报的转起。“生”是指作为老死等之缘、由有缘而有的生。老、死等则显而易见。巴利
Tattha nīvaraṇe paṭisaṅkhāti pañca nīvaraṇāni pahātabbabhāvena paṭisaṅkhāya, pariggahetvāti attho. Santiṭṭhanāti nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānābhimukhībhūtattā tesaṃ pahānepi abyāpārabhāvūpagamanena majjhattatāya santiṭṭhanā. Saṅkhārupekkhāsūti nīvaraṇappahāne byāpārākaraṇena nīvaraṇasaṅkhātānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ upekkhanāsūti attho. Esa nayo vitakkavicārādīsu uppādādīsu ca. Tattha uppādanti purimakammapaccayā khandhānaṃ idha uppattimāha. Pavattanti tathāuppannassa pavattiṃ. Nimittanti sabbampi tebhūmakaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ nimittabhāvena upaṭṭhānato. Āyūhananti āyatiṃ paṭisandhihetubhūtaṃ kammaṃ. Paṭisandhinti āyatiṃ upapattiṃ. Gatinti yāya gatiyā sā paṭisandhi hoti. Nibbattinti khandhānaṃ nibbattanaṃ. Upapattinti vipākappavattiṃ. Jātinti jarādīnaṃ paccayabhūtaṃ bhavapaccayā jātiṃ. Jarāmaraṇādayo pākaṭā eva.
在这里,生起等五个词是就诸行舍智的所缘范围而说的,其余的词则是它们的同义词。其中,“出生”和“生”这两个词,是“生起”和“结生”的同义词;“趣”和“再生”这两个词,是“转起”的同义词;老等则是“相”的同义词。应当这样理解。有人问:在这里的四个道阶段中,说了“生起”等五个根本词,加上“趣”等十个同义词,一共说了十五个词;而在六个果等至阶段中,为什么只说了五个根本词呢?应当知道:当诸行舍智锐利时,由于能断烦恼的道确实存在,为了显示它的锐利,就把根本词连同同义词一起坚固地宣说;而果因为无功用、自性寂静,且依属于道,所以即使诸行舍智较为迟钝,也能成为果的缘,为了说明这一点,就只宣说了根本词。巴利
Ettha ca uppādādayo pañceva saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇassa visayavasena vuttā, sesā tesaṃ vevacanavasena. Nibbatti jātīti idañhi dvayaṃ uppādassa ceva paṭisandhiyā ca vevacanaṃ. Gati upapatti cāti idaṃ dvayaṃ pavattassa, jarādayo nimittassāti veditabbaṃ. Nanu cettha catūsu maggavāresu ‘‘uppāda’’ntiādīni pañca mūlapadāni, ‘‘gatī’’tiādīni dasa vevacanapadānīti pannarasa padāni vuttāni, chasu pana phalasamāpattivāresu pañca mūlapadāneva vuttāni, taṃ kasmāti ce? Saṅkhārupekkhāya tikkhabhāve sati kilesappahānasamatthassa maggassa sabbhāvato tassā tikkhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vevacanapadehi saha daḷhaṃ katvā mūlapadāni vuttāni, phalassa nirussāhabhāvena santasabhāvattā maggāyattattā ca mandabhūtāpi saṅkhārupekkhā phalassa paccayo hotīti dassanatthaṃ mūlapadāneva vuttānīti veditabbāni.
在这里,关于“为了证得入流道”等四个道位的部分,说的是空、无相、无愿三种道当中的某一种。而在“为了证得入流果等至”等四个果位的部分,则应当知道是无愿果等至。为什么呢?因为“为了证得空住等至”和“为了证得无相住等至”这两项,已经把其余两种果等至单独说出来了。按照经教的讲法应当知道:以无常随观为出起,就是无相道,同样在果等至的时候,就是无相果等至;以苦随观为出起,就是无愿道和果等至;以无我随观为出起,就是空道和果等至。这样一来,依空等解脱门而说的、作为道生起原因的观智有四种,同样无愿果等至有四种,依空住和无相住而说的有两种,一共说了十种诸行舍观慧。至于止方面的诸行舍,则是在安止速行临近之前的遍作阶段,力量已经成熟的修所成智。巴利
Tattha ‘‘sotāpattimaggapaṭilābhatthāyā’’tiādīsu catūsu maggavāresu suññatānimittappaṇihitamaggānaṃ aññataro vutto. ‘‘Sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāyā’’tiādīsu catūsu phalavāresu pana appaṇihitaphalasamāpatti veditabbā. Kasmā? Suññatavihārasamāpattatthāya animittavihārasamāpattatthāyāti itarāsaṃ dvinnaṃ phalasamāpattīnaṃ visuṃ vuttattā. Aniccānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena hi animittamaggo, tatheva phalasamāpattikāle animittaphalasamāpatti, dukkhānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasena appaṇihitamaggaphalasamāpattiyo, anattānupassanāvuṭṭhānavasaena suññatamaggaphalasamāpattiyo suttantanayena veditabbā. Evañca katvā suññatādivimokkhavasena magguppattihetubhūtā catasso, tathā appaṇihitaphalasamāpattiyā catasso, suññatavihāraanimittavihāravasena dveti dasa saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanāpaññā vuttā, samathasaṅkhārupekkhā pana appanāvīthiyā āsannapubbabhāge balappattaṃ bhāvanāmayañāṇaṃ.
不过,对于“当欲界善心生起时,它与舍俱行”这样一段话中所说的、被称为不苦不乐的那种舍,这叫作受舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata’’nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.
那种依“凡是存在的、凡是生成的,他都舍断,并获得舍”这样的经文而来的、在简择中处于中立的舍,就叫作观舍。巴利
Yā ‘‘yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.
在这里,所谓“凡存在、已生起的”,就是指五蕴,他用想要解脱的智慧来舍断它。所谓“获得舍”,意思是:就像在观察一条已经见过三种相状的蛇的特征时那样,在观察已经见过三种相状的五蕴的行相特征时,就获得舍。巴利
Tattha yadatthi yaṃ bhūtanti khandhapañcakaṃ, taṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇena pajahati. Upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatīti diṭṭhasovattikattayassa sappassa lakkhaṇavicinane viya diṭṭhalakkhaṇattayassa khandhapañcakassa saṅkhāralakkhaṇavicinane upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatīti attho.
不过,那种出现在欲等随附法当中、作为俱生法平等生起之因的舍,这叫作中舍性舍。巴利
Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samappavattihetubhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.
即使处在最上等的乐受当中,那种依照“住于舍”这句话而来的、能产生不偏袒心态的舍,就叫作禅舍。巴利
Yā ‘‘upekkhako ca viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.230; dha. sa. 163) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.
不过,如果是像“舍念清净,第四禅”这样出现在经文里的舍,它一切对立都已清净,即使在对立的止息中也不起作用,这就叫作清净舍。巴利
Yā pana ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.
在这里,六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、中舍性舍、禅那舍和遍净舍,从含义上来说,其实就是同一种中舍性舍。不过,由于在不同阶段状态下有差别,它才有这样的区分,就像同一个人有幼童、青年、长者、将军、国王等不同身份一样。因此应当知道:在那些舍当中,有六支舍的地方,就没有觉支舍等;反过来,有觉支舍的地方,就没有六支舍等。正如这些舍在含义上是一体的,行舍和观舍也是一样。因为那慧本身按作用分为两种。譬如一个人傍晚进了屋,拿起牧羊杖去找蛇,看见蛇躺在谷壳堆里,正在观察“这到底是不是蛇”的时候,见到三道颈纹后不再犹豫,在“是蛇,不是蛇”的辨别中保持的中立状态;同样,已经开始修观的人以观智见到三法印后,在辨别诸行的无常性等时生起的中立状态,这就是观舍。又譬如那个人用牧羊杖紧紧按住蛇,心里寻找“我怎样才能不伤害这条蛇,也不让它咬到我,而把它放开”的办法时,在抓取中保持的中立状态;同样,由于已经见到三法印,把三界看作像着火一样,在抓取诸行时生起的中立状态,这就是行舍。这样,观舍成就了,行舍也就成就了。不过,这舍按辨别和抓取中的中立状态这一作用,分为两种。精进舍和受舍则彼此不同,跟其余那些舍在含义上也是不同的。巴利
Tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassā ayaṃ bhedo ekassapi sato sattassa kumārayuvatherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya. Tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā. Yathā cetāsaṃ atthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘sappo nu kho, no’’ti avalokentassa sovattikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa ‘‘sappo, na sappo’’ti vicinane majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadena daṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā ‘‘kintāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya’’nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanagahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnā. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti.
对于这十种舍,按照地、人、心、所缘等来区分,应当依照各处已经说过的方式来了知——为了说明这一点,论主说“如此,这十种……”等话。其中,按地、人、心、所缘来分:说“六支舍属于欲界,梵住舍属于色界”等,是按地来分。说“六支舍只有漏尽者才有,梵住舍则凡夫、有学、无学三者都有”等,是按人来分。说“六支舍与喜俱、舍俱之心相应”等,是按心来分。说“六支舍以六种境为所缘,梵住舍以法为所缘”等,是按所缘来分。按蕴来归纳:受舍归入受蕴,其余九种归入行蕴。按同一刹那来分:六支舍、梵住舍、觉支舍、禅那舍、遍净舍和中舍性舍,在意义上是同一个,所以在同一刹那中,有其中一种就不会有其余几种;同样,行舍和观舍也应这样理解;受舍和精进舍则可能在同一刹那生起。按善、不善、无记三性来分:六支舍是无记,梵住舍是善和无记,其余几种也是这样,但受舍也可能是不善。按简要归纳来说:这十种舍,简而言之,按精进、受、中舍性、智来分,只有四种。巴利
Imāsaṃ pana dasannampi upekkhānaṃ bhūmipuggalādivasena vibhāgo tattha tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘evamayaṃ dasavidhāpī’’tiādi. Tattha bhūmipuggalacittārammaṇatoti ‘‘chaḷaṅgupekkhā kāmāvacarā, brahmavihārupekkhā rūpāvacarā’’ti evamādinā bhūmito. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā khīṇāsavasseva, brahmavihārupekkhā tiṇṇampi puthujjanasekkhāsekkhāna’’nti evamādinā puggalato. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā somanassupekkhāsahagatacittasampayuttā’’tiādinā cittato. ‘‘Chaḷaṅgupekkhā chaḷārammaṇā, brahmavihārupekkhā dhammārammaṇā’’tiādinā ārammaṇato. Khandhasaṅgahaekakkhaṇakusalattikasaṅkhepavasenāti ‘‘vedanupekkhā vedanākkhandhena saṅgahitā, itarā nava saṅkhārakkhandhenā’’ti khandhasaṅgahavasena. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā brahmavihārabojjhaṅgajhānapārisuddhitatramajjhattupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tasmā ekakkhaṇe tāsu ekāya sati na itarā, tathā saṅkhārupekkhāvipassanupekkhāpi veditabbā, vedanāvīriyupekkhānaṃ ekakkhaṇe siyā uppattīti evaṃ ekakkhaṇavasena. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā abyākatā, brahmavihārupekkhā kusalābyākatā, tathā sesā, vedanupekkhā pana siyā akusalāpīti evaṃ kusalattikavasena. Dasapetā saṅkhepato cattārova dhammā vīriyavedanātatramajjhattatāñāṇavasenāti evaṃ saṅkhepavasena.
现在,为了确定并展示这里所说的禅那舍的相状等,他说了“然而,从相状等方面来说……”等话。其中,“以无功用为味”的意思是:即使面对殊胜的乐,它也能对治向那乐倾斜的作用。“以无造作为现起”的意思是:即使达到了乐的极致,它仍然以不耽著于那乐的状态而现起;或者说,它令相应法在那方面无造作地现前。由于被那些带来相应法扰动与浮动的寻等所压制,中舍性在那里的作用不明显;而在这里,由于没有那些,所以是明显的,因此说“由于作用不明显”。正因如此,他说了“因为不明显……”等话。巴利
Idāni idhādhippetāya jhānupekkhāya lakkhaṇādiṃ niddhāretvā dassento āha ‘‘lakkhaṇādito panā’’tiādi. Tattha anābhogarasāti paṇītasukhepi tasmiṃ avanatipaṭipakkhakiccāti attho. Abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānāti satipi sukhapāramippattiyaṃ tasmiṃ sukhe abyāvaṭā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, sampayuttānaṃ vā tattha abyāpāraṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti attho. Sampayuttadhammānaṃ khobhaṃ uppilavañca āvahantehi vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā aparibyattaṃ tattha tatramajjhattatāya kiccaṃ, tadabhāvato idha paribyattanti āha ‘‘aparibyattakiccato’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘aparibyattaṃ hī’’tiādi.
现在讲“具念与正知”这里,应当补上“被称为”这个词。用“他忆念”这句话,是在说明“具念”这个词是主动语态、表示行为者。正知,就是正确地了知。以人为立足点,就是依着补特伽罗来说。忆念、思虑、现前是它的特相,所以是“以忆念为特相”。与忘失相反的不忘失是它的作用,所以是“以不忘失为作用”。从烦恼中得到守护而现起,或者令守护现起,所以是“以守护为现起”。不迷昧就是正确地了知,或者与迷昧相反的不迷昧是它的特相,所以是“以不迷昧为特相”。审察是作用的达成。探究就是考察。当然,就近行定、初禅等来说,初禅、第二禅也还是微细的,但这里是相对于更高的禅那,才说“因为那些禅那是粗重的”,而这种粗重应当理解为寻等粗重支分的存在。也有人说是“因为心所众多”。就像人在大地上行走,这里是说像人在大地上行走一样。行走是快乐的,意思是在那些禅那中行走是快乐的。在那里,念与正知的作用不明显,是因为没有什么“这名为难行之事正在被做”可说的,所以才这样说。不过,由于舍断粗重支分而变得微细,这个道理在第二禅里其实也可以成立,但因为在通常不相离而现起的喜与乐中,由于舍断了称为喜的粗重支分而变得微细,所以这里说“人的”等,是为了显示念与慧的作用在这里格外殊胜。饮母牛的奶,就是“近母牛者”,意思是饮母牛的奶。如果又再达到喜,那禅那就会是退分的,意思就是会变成第二禅。因此说“就会与喜相应”。而这是指第三禅的乐为极甘甜之乐,它的极甘甜应当理解为,正是因为没有了那种具有兴奋激动性质的喜。这,就是指“具念、正知”这两个词。巴利
Idānisato ca sampajānoti ettha ‘‘vuccatī’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Saratīti iminā ‘‘sato’’ti padassa kattusādhanatamāha. Sampajānātīti sammadeva pajānāti. Puggalenāti puggalādhiṭṭhānena. Saraṇaṃ cintanaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ lakkhaṇametissāti saraṇalakkhaṇā. Sammussanapaṭipakkho asammussanaṃ kiccaṃ etissāti asammussanarasā. Kilesehi ārakkhā hutvā paccupatiṭṭhati, tato vā ārakkhaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetīti ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammuyhanaṃ sammadeva pajānanaṃ, sammohapaṭipakkho vā asammoho lakkhaṇametassāti asammohalakkhaṇaṃ. Tīraṇaṃ kiccassa pāragamanaṃ. Pavicayo vīmaṃsā. Kāmaṃ upacārajjhānādiṃ upādāya paṭhamadutiyajjhānānipi sukhumāneva, imaṃ pana uparimajjhānaṃ upādāya ‘‘oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānāna’’nti vuttaṃ, sā ca oḷārikatā vitakkādithūlaṅgatāya veditabbā. Keci ‘‘bahucetasikatāyā’’ti ca vadanti. Bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassāti purisassa bhūmiyaṃ gati viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Gati sukhā hotīti tesu jhānesu gati sukhā hoti. Abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ karīyatī’’ti vattabbassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattāti ayamattho kāmaṃ dutiyajjhānepi sambhavati, tathāpi yebhuyyena avippayogībhāvena vattamānesu pītisukhesu pītisaṅkhātassa oḷārikaṅgassa pahānena sukhumatāya idha sātisayo satipaññābyāpāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘purisassā’’tiādi. Dhenuṃ pivatīti dhenupago, dhenuyā khīraṃ pivantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyyāti hānabhāgiyaṃ jhānaṃ siyā , dutiyajjhānameva sampajjeyyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘pītisampayuttameva siyā’’ti. Idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhanti tatiyajjhāne sukhaṃ sandhāyāha, atimadhuratā cassa pahāsodagyasabhāvāya pītiyā abhāveneva veditabbā. Idanti ‘‘sato sampajāno’’ti padadvayaṃ.
“以身体感受乐”这句话里,有人问:如果没有作意,怎么能感受乐呢?于是回答说“虽然……”等等。因为他的名身与乐相应,为了说明这个意思,才说“以身体感受乐”,应当这样连接理解。这里简要的意思是:即使没有“我感受乐”这样的作意,禅那具足者仍然以名身感受心所乐;同时,由于生起身乐之因的色法,他也感受身乐,所以这样说。“他的”,指禅那具足者。或者,“那个”就是指前面所说的与名身相应的乐。由于从它生起的——也就是由它生起的极其殊胜的色法——触及他的色身,为了说明这个意思,应当这样连接。“那个”,指色身。“由于被触及”,意思是由于被遍满。就像身体被水触及时,当那样的触被触及时,乐就会生起;同样,当身体被这些禅那心所生的色法触及时也是如此。即使从禅那出定后,也还能感受乐——也就是通过心所生色法与其余(时节等)所生色法接触而生起的身识,感受身乐。这个意思,就是按照上面所说的方式,感受心所乐与身乐的意义。巴利
Sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesinti ettha kathamābhogena vinā sukhapaṭisaṃvedanāti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedesi’’nti āhāti yojetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – ‘‘sukhaṃ vedayāmī’’ti evamābhoge asatipi nāmakāyena cetasikasukhaṃ, kāyikasukhaheturūpasamuṭṭhāpanena kāyikasukhañca jhānasamaṅgī paṭisaṃvedetīti vuccatīti. Tassāti jhānasamaṅgino. Yaṃ vā tanti yaṃ vā taṃ yathāvuttaṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Taṃsamuṭṭhānenāti tato samuṭṭhitena atipaṇītena rūpena assa jhānasamaṅgino rūpakāyo yasmā phuṭo, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassentoti sambandhitabbaṃ. Yassāti rūpakāyassa. Phuṭattāti byāpitattāti attho. Yathā hi udakena phuṭṭhasarīrassa tādise phoṭṭhabbe phuṭṭhe sukhaṃ uppajjati, evaṃ etehi jhānacittasamuṭṭhitehi rūpehi phuṭṭhasarīrassa. Jhānā vuṭṭhitopīti jhānamhā vuṭṭhitopi. Sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyyāti cittasamuṭṭhitarūpehi avasesatisamuṭṭhitarūpasaṅghaṭṭanena uppannakāyaviññāṇena kāyikaṃ sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya. Etamatthanti vuttanayena cetasikakāyikasukhapaṭisaṃvedanasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ.
“Ya”是表原因的不变词,意思是“因为”。所以说“由于该禅那之因”。“称说”等词是称赞的意思,因此说“意思是称赞”。“如何”是询问称赞的方式。“达到乐之彼岸”,就是达到了乐的终极边际。“由于对乐的贪着”,就是由于对乐的喜爱。在这些地方,取了念也就取了正知,而这里经文中只取了念,所以只说“具念者”为念现前,或是因为前面已说过“正知”。“不染污”,就是因不与烦恼混杂而不染污。在禅那刹那,严格来说只有心所乐可得,所以说“以名身感受乐”。“第三”,是按数目次第的第三等,应依前文所说的方法了知。巴利
Yanti hetuatthe nipāto, yasmāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃjhānahetū’’ti. Ācikkhantītiādīni padāni kittanatthānīti adhippāyenāha ‘‘pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo’’ti. Kintīti pasaṃsanākārapucchā. Sukhapāramippatteti sukhassa paramaṃ pariyantaṃ patte. Sukhābhisaṅgenāti sukhasmiṃ ālayena. Edisesu ṭhānesu satiggahaṇeneva sampajaññampi gahitaṃ hotīti idha pāḷiyaṃ satiyā eva gahitattā evaṃ upaṭṭhitassatitāya satimā icceva vuttaṃ, sampajānoti heṭṭhā vuttattā vā. Asaṃkiliṭṭhanti kilesehi asammissattā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ. Jhānakkhaṇe nippariyāyato cetasikasukhameva labbhatīti ‘‘sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbato tatiyantiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
第四禅那的讨论巴利
Catutthajjhānakathā
因为前面已经说了“先前已”,就引出这样一个追问:“那么,它们的断除是在什么时候呢?”接着回答说:“在四种禅那的近行刹那。”应当这样理解,这就是前后的关联。对于没有按照断除次第来说的,这里所谓的断除次第,就是指能断之法的生起顺序。但如果按照那个次第来说,就应该说“苦、忧、乐、喜”,为什么这里说法不同呢?于是说“在《根分别》中”等等。所谓按开示的次第,就是像“乐根、苦根、喜根、忧根”这样进行的开示顺序。巴利
‘‘Pubbevā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hotī’’ti codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā āha ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe’’ti. Evaṃ veditabbanti sambandho. Pahānakkamena avuttānanti ettha pahānakkamo nāma pahāyakadhammānaṃ uppattipaṭipāṭi. Tena pana vuccamāne ‘‘dukkhaṃ domanassaṃ sukhaṃ somanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, kasmā ito aññathā vacananti āha ‘‘indriyavibhaṅge’’tiādi . Uddesakkamenāti ‘‘sukhindriyaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ domanassindriya’’nti evaṃ pavattauddesakkamena.
那么,为什么只在诸禅里说“灭”呢?这就是这里的关联。问“苦根在哪里”,指的是由自己的缘所生起、还没有被镇伏的苦根。又问“在哪里无余灭尽”,这是在问灭尽的地方,也是在问灭尽的原因。所以,用“在哪里”来问、用“在这里”来答的时候,应当知道这里的“在”也是表示原因。依靠禅那威力所生的所缘,苦根不再生起,就说它无余灭尽。最殊胜的灭就是彻底断除,是以直接对治而达成的止息;这里的“灭”只是断除而已。“在种种转向中”,是指不同于安止路的转向,或者多种转向。因为在安止路中,近行只有一种转向;而另一种因为多次生起,所以是多种转向。因不舒适坐姿而生起的疲劳,就是不舒适坐姿带来的逼恼。“以喜遍满”,是因为喜有遍满的作用,或者因为由喜所生的殊胜色法遍满全身而这样说。因此说“全身都沉浸在乐中”。既然被殊胜色法所触的身体已经是沉浸在乐中的身体,又怎么会从不舒适坐姿的逼恼等生起苦呢?所以说“因为未被对治所破坏”。“即使在寻伺为缘的情况下”,这里的“也”字位置不对,应当把它移到“已断除的”那里连起来。“已断除的忧根”,这句应当和“可能会有生起”连起来。“此”,指忧根,和“生起”相连。从“我如果过久地寻思、伺察,身体也会疲劳,心也会被扰动”这句话,应当知道身心的疲劳是以寻伺为缘的。在“在寻伺存在时”这里,应当把“忧根生起”接上去。在那里,可能会有生起,就是说在第二禅的近行中,即使是已断除的忧根也可能生起。巴利
Atha kasmā jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti sambandho. Kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyanti attano paccayehi uppannaṃ avikkhambhitaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ. Kattha ca aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti nirodhaṭṭhānaṃ nirodhakāraṇaṃ pucchati. Tena katthāti pucchāya etthāti vissajjanepi hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jhānānubhāvanimittañhi anuppajjantaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti vuttaṃ. Atisayanirodho suṭṭhu pahānaṃ ujupaṭipakkhena vūpasamo. Nirodho pahānamattaṃ. Nānāvajjaneti yena āvajjanena appanāvīthi, tato bhinnāvajjane anekāvajjane vā. Appanāvīthiyañhi upacāro ekāvajjano, itaro anekāvajjano anekakkhattuṃ pavattanato. Visamanisajjāya uppannakilamatho visamāsanupatāpo. Pītipharaṇenāti pītiyā pharaṇarasattā pītisamuṭṭhānānaṃ vā paṇītarūpānaṃ kāyassa byāpanato vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hotī’’ti. Paṇītarūpaphuṭṭhasarīrassa sukhokkantakāyattā kuto dukkhuppatti visamāsanupatāpādināti āha ‘‘paṭipakkhena avihatattā’’ti. Vitakkavicārapaccayepīti pi-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, so ‘‘pahīnassā’’ti ettha ānetvā sambandhitabbo. Pahīnassapi domanassindriyassāti idañca ‘‘siyā uppattī’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Etanti domanassindriyaṃ. ‘‘Uppajjatī’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Tassa mayhaṃ aticiraṃ vitakkayato vicārayato kāyopi kilami, cittampi ūhaññī’’ti vacanato kāyacittakhedānaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayatā veditabbā. Vitakkavicārabhāveti ettha ‘‘uppajjati domanassindriya’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tatthassa siyā uppattīti tattha dutiyajjhānūpacāre assa pahīnassapi domanassindriyassa uppatti bhaveyya.
在这里,有些人这样说:说“在那里它可能会有生起”的时候,就已经表明了即使得到禅那的人也会有忧的生起;而这样一来,就等于说明嗔也像贪一样具有非盖的性质。因为离开嗔就不会有忧生起,而且在这里也不应该去想这和《发趣论》有什么矛盾。因为在《发趣论》里说的是:以退失的禅那为所缘而生起的忧;既然以未退失的禅那为所缘而生起的忧根本不可能,那就不能说“得禅那者的忧完全不会生起”,因为即使得到八等至的人也会有忧生起,但他并不是退失禅那的人。这种说法是不合理的,因为不存在具有非盖性质的忧。如果它存在,那么色界和无色界的有情也应该会生起忧,但实际上并不会生起。就像在无色界中,依欲贪盖而说有昏沉睡眠盖、掉举盖、无明盖等,其中并没有把嗔恚、恶作盖列出来;而且在这里,“非盖”这个同义词也被用来指欲贪等,因为它们虽然不是盖,却和盖相似,所以才用盖的同义词来说。至于所说的“即使得到八等至的人也会有忧生起”,这也没有根据,因为生起的忧会使他从禅那退失。应当知道,那些因为轻微的因缘而退失禅那的人,还是能不太费力地使它恢复。“在那里它可能会有生起”这句话只是假设的说法,目的是为了表明忧在近行刹那还没有被断除。正如所说的:“但绝不是在安止里面。”如果那时忧会生起,那就应当认为他的初禅也已经退失了。已经被断除的乐受根,就像喜一样,并不是远离的,所以说“因为邻近”。在种种转向和近行中,已经被断除的支分因为还没有被对治彻底破除,所以可能会在中间生起;为了说明这个意思,才说“已达到安止的”等等。他们说:就像在道之前,有两三个速行心路以同类随观生起;同样,在这里,在安止路之前,也有两三个速行心路只是与舍俱行,因为这样的修习是应该希求的。巴利
Ettha ca yadeke vadanti ‘‘tatthassa siyā uppattīti vadantena jhānalābhīnampi domanassuppatti atthīti dassitaṃ hoti, tena ca anīvaraṇasabhāvo lobho viya dosopi atthīti dīpeti. Na hi dosena vinā domanassaṃ pavattati, na cettha paṭṭhānapāḷiyā virodho cintetabbo. Yasmā tattha parihīnajjhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ domanassaṃ dassitaṃ, aparihīnajjhānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppajjamānassa domanassassa asambhavato jhānalābhīnaṃ sabbaso domanassaṃ nuppajjatīti ca na sakkā vattuṃ aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā, na heva kho so parihīnajjhāno ahosī’’ti, taṃ ayuttaṃ anīvaraṇasabhāvassa domanassassa abhāvato. Yadi siyā, rūpārūpāvacarasattānampi uppajjeyya, na ca uppajjati. Tathā hi āruppe kāmacchandanīvaraṇaṃ paṭicca thinamiddhanīvaraṇaṃ uddhaccanīvaraṇaṃ avijjānīvaraṇantiādīsu byāpādakukkuccanīvaraṇāni anuddhaṭāni, na cettha anīvaraṇatāpariyāyo kāmacchandādīnampi anīvaraṇānaṃyeva nīvaraṇasadisatāya nīvaraṇapariyāyassa vuttattā. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino api tassa uppannattā’’ti, tampi akāraṇaṃ uppajjamānena ca domanassena jhānato parihāyanato. Lahukena pana paccayena parihīnaṃ tādisā naṃ appakasireneva paṭipākatikaṃ karontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tatthassa siyā uppattī’’ti idaṃ pana parikappanavacanaṃ upacārakkhaṇe domanassassa appahīnabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na tveva antoappanāya’’nti. Yadi pana tadā domanassaṃ uppajjeyya, paṭhamajjhānampissa parihīnamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pahīnampi somanassindriyaṃ pīti viya na dūreti katvā ‘‘āsannattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nānāvajjanūpacāre pahīnampi pahānaṅgaṃ paṭipakkhena avihatattā antarantarā uppajjeyya vāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘appanāppattāyā’’tiādimāha. Tādisāya āsevanāya icchitabbattā yathā maggavīthito pubbe dve tayo javanavārā sadisānupassanāva pavattanti, evamidhāpi appanāvārato pubbe dve tayo javanavārā upekkhāsahagatāva pavattantīti vadanti.
“Samāharī”的意思是“令统一、统合之后而说”。“微细”:像苦、乐那样,因为不粗重、不明显,所以是微细;正因如此,它的性质必须靠推度才能知道,所以难以了知。“恶者”:指恶加行者,也就是难调伏的意思。“能够被把握”:意思是可以通过令其知解的方便而被把握。“不苦不乐心解脱”:这里应当看作第四禅。“为显示缘”:为了显示作为证得方法的缘。因此说“因为苦的断除等是它的缘”。这里所说的“苦的断除等”,指的是带有近行的初禅等。“已断除”:因为经中说“五顺下分结的灭尽”。“这些”:指乐等感受。“乐是悦的缘”:由住所、涂香、花鬘、装饰等所产生的身乐,是悦的缘。依据“贤友毗舍佉,于乐受,贪随眠随眠”的说法,所以说“悦是贪的缘”。依据“贤友毗舍佉,于苦受,嗔恚随眠随眠”的说法,所以说“忧是嗔的缘”。“以乐的断除等”:就是以乐等的断除。巴利
Samāharīti samānesi, saṅgahetvā abhāsīti attho. Sukhumāti sukhadukkhāni viya anoḷārikattā avibhūtatāya sukhumā, tato eva anuminitabbasabhāvattā dubbiññeyyā. Duṭṭhassāti duṭṭhapayogassa, duddamassāti attho. Sakkā hoti esā gāhayitunti aññāpohananayena sakkā gāhayitunti adhippāyo. Adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyāti idameva catutthaṃ jhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccayadassanatthanti adhigamassa upāyabhūtapaccayadassanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā’’ti. Dukkhappahānādayoti ca sopacārā paṭhamajjhānādayovettha adhippetā. Pahīnāti vuttāti ‘‘pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147; saṃ. ni. 5.1021) vuttattā. Etāti sukhādayo vedanā. Sukhaṃsomanassassa paccayoti vasanagandhālepanapupphābharaṇasamālepanādinibbattaṃ kāyikasukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo. ‘‘Sukhāya kho, āvuso visākha vedanāya, rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.465) vacanato āha ‘‘somanassaṃ rāgassa paccayo’’ti. ‘‘Dukkhāya kho, āvuso visākha, vedanāya paṭighānusayo anusetī’’ti vacanato vuttaṃ ‘‘domanassaṃ dosassa paccayo’’ti. Sukhādighātenāti sukhādīnaṃ pahānena.
“不苦不乐”在这里,“不苦”就是没有苦,远离苦。因为其中没有苦,所以用“以无苦”来说。“不乐”在这里也是同样的道理。“以此”就是以此遮遣苦乐的说法。“成为对立”在这里是说,第三种受要通过超越苦等而证得,并不是像善与不善那样直接相反。“以体验可意、不可意之反面者为相”,是指体验可意、不可意之反面的中舍所缘,或者以中舍的方式体验与可意、不可意相反者。正因如此,它的作用就是中舍。“现起为不明显”,是说它不像苦、乐那样形相明显,就像山背岩石上的鹿迹一样,要靠推知才可了知,所以它的现起是不明显的形相。这里所说的“乐灭”,是指第四禅的近分定,那是它的立足处,所以说“以乐灭为立足处”。“舍念清净”是省略了后分词的复合词,所以注释说“由舍所生的念清净”。当清净的舍——以一切敌对法而清净,即使在对治敌对法时也不造作——在第四禅中现起时,念就像受到称赞的智慧一样,极其清净、极其明澈,所以说“念的清净,那是舍所作,不是由其他”。“如果这里的中舍性就是所说的‘舍’,那为什么只说念清净呢?”对此,注释说“并非只是……”等。“以念为首”,就是把念放在最上首、作为主导。巴利
Adukkhamasukhanti ettha na dukkhanti adukkhaṃ, dukkhavidūraṃ. Yasmā tattha dukkhaṃ natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhābhāvenā’’ti. Asukhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Etenāti dukkhasukhapaṭikkhepavacanena. Paṭipakkhabhūtanti idaṃ idha tatiyavedanāya dukkhādīnaṃ samatikkamavasena pattabbattā vuttaṃ, na kusalākusalānaṃ viya ujuvipaccanīkatāya. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇāti iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītassa majjhattārammaṇassa, iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītaṃ vā majjhattākārena anubhavanalakkhaṇā. Tato eva majjhattarasā. Avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānāti sukhadukkhāni viya na vibhūtākārā piṭṭhipāsāṇe migagatamaggo viya tehi anumātabbāvibhūtākāropaṭṭhānā. Sukhanirodho nāma idha catutthajjhānūpacāro, so padaṭṭhānaṃ etissāti sukhanirodhapadaṭṭhānā. Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti purimapade uttarapadalopenetaṃ samāsapadanti āha ‘‘upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhi’’nti. Sabbapaccanīkadhammaparisuddhāya paccanīkasamanepi abyāvaṭāya pārisuddhupekkhāya vattamānāya catutthajjhāne sati sampahaṃsanapaññā viya suparisuddhā suvisadā ca hotīti āha ‘‘satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā na aññenā’’ti. Yadi tatramajjhattatā idha ‘‘upekkhā’’ti adhippetā, kathaṃ satiyeva pārisuddhāti vuttāti āha ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādi. Satisīsenāti satiṃ uttamaṅgaṃ katvā, padhānaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
即使这样,为什么偏偏在这里说“舍念清净”呢?针对这个追问,就说了“其中虽然……”等话。在这里,下面三个禅那中虽然也有中舍性,但因为镇伏了敌对法以及缺少助缘,所以不清净;同样,与它相应的那些法因为不具备它,所以在这里才是清净的。为了用譬喻说明这个道理,就说了“然而如同……”等话。“因日光所掩”是指被日光所遮蔽。月牙极其微细,就像在夜里一样,而月牙正好在与它同类的夜间才闪耀,为了显示它被那一夜所包含,就说“以柔和性以及对自己有饶益的缘故,与同类的夜间”。这里其余的内容意思都很明显。巴利
Evamapi kasmā idheva sati ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhī’’ti vuttāti anuyogaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha heṭṭhā tīsu jhānesu vijjamānāyapi tatramajjhattatāya paccanīkābhibhavanato sahāyapaccayavekallato ca apārisuddhi, tathā taṃsampayuttānaṃ tadabhāvato idha pārisuddhīti imamatthaṃ upamāvasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sūriyappabhābhibhavāti sūriyappabhāya abhibhuyyamānattā. Atikkhatāya candalekhā viya rattipi sommasabhāvā sabhāgāya rattiyameva ca candalekhā samujjalatīti sā tassā saṅgayhatīti dassento ‘‘sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā’’ti āha. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
关于宿住随念的讨论巴利
Pubbenivāsakathā
12 以修习离色贪而生的四种无色定,也都归入第四禅,所以说“四禅”。就心一境性来说,就像为了投生一样(为了投生诸有的目的),作为观的基础也是四禅共通的,因此依它们说“四禅”是合理的;但作为神通的基础和灭尽定的基础,只是第四禅独有的,那怎么说成是四禅共通的呢?因为辗转依止的缘故。因为依止的依止也称为依止,原因的原因也称为原因,就像说“用草做成了饭”。这样,在说明目的时,八等至的含摄就成立了。“为心一境性”是指以这些定为目的,为现法乐住之义,这是就纯观行者与漏尽者而说的。因此说“以一心之心思,我将安乐地度过一日”。“为投生诸有”是指为了在诸有中受生之义。因为入灭尽定七日,所以说“七日无心”。为什么他们只入灭尽定七日呢?因为要限定时间,而且这多半是因为依靠段食而活的众生,其执受所成之身,吃了一次食物后,只能维持七日。巴利
12. Rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ catubbidhampi arūpajjhānaṃ catutthajjhānasaṅgahamevāti āha ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti. Yuttaṃ tāva cittekaggatā bhavokkamanatthatā viya vipassanāpādakatāpi catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇāti tesaṃ vasena ‘‘cattāri jhānānī’’ti vacanaṃ, abhiññāpādakatā pana nirodhapādakatā ca catutthasseva jhānassa āveṇikā, sā kathaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sādhāraṇā vuttāti? Paramparādhiṭṭhānabhāvato. Padaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānampi hi padaṭṭhānantveva vuccati, kāraṇakāraṇampi kāraṇanti yathā ‘‘tiṇehi bhattaṃ siddha’’nti. Evañca katvā payojananiddese aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Cittekaggatatthānīti ittasamādhatthāni, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthānīti attho. Cittekaggatāsīsena hi diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāro vutto, sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ekaggacittā sukhaṃ divasaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Bhavokkamanatthānīti bhavesu nibbattiatthāni. Sattāhaṃ nirodhasamāpattiyā samāpajjanato āha ‘‘sattāhaṃ acittakā hutvā’’ti. Kasmā pana sattāhameva nirodhaṃ samāpajjantīti? Tathākālaparicchedakaraṇato, tañca yebhuyyena āhārūpajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ upādinnakappavattassa ekadivasaṃ bhuttāhārassa sattāhameva yāpanato.
这个灭尽定到底是什么?哪些人能入这个定,哪些人不能入?在哪里入?为什么入?又是怎么入的?下面来说明。
这里说的“这个灭尽定到底是什么”,就是指依靠逐步灭尽的方式,让心和心所法不再生起。
哪些人能入这个定,哪些人不能入?所有的凡夫、入流者、一来者,以及干观行的阿那含和阿拉汉,都不能入这个定;而证得八等至的阿那含和诸漏尽者,则能入这个定。
在哪里入?在五蕴有的地方入。为什么?因为必须依靠逐步等至才能入。在四蕴有的地方,连初禅等都不会生起,所以不可能在那里入这个定。
为什么入?因为对诸行的生起和坏灭感到厌离,想要“在现法中成为无心,证得灭尽涅槃,安住于快乐”,所以才入。
怎么入呢?通过止和观两者共同推进,已经完成先前准备工作的人,让非想非非想处灭去,这样就能入这个定。如果只靠止来推进,就会到达非想非非想处等至后停在那里;如果只靠观来推进,就会到达果等至后停在那里;如果靠止和观两者共同推进,让非想非非想处灭去,那个人就能入这个定。以上就是这里的简要说明。巴利
Kā (visuddhi. 2.867-868) panāyaṃ nirodhasamāpatti nāma, ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjanti, kattha samāpajjanti, kasmā samāpajjanti, kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti? Vuccate – tattha kā panāyaṃ nirodhasamāpatti nāmāti yā anupubbanirodhavasena cittacetasikānaṃ dhammānaṃ appavatti. Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti sabbepi puthujjanasotāpannasakadāgāmino sukkhavipassakā ca anāgāmiarahanto na samāpajjanti, aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino pana anāgāmino khīṇāsavā ca samāpajjanti. Kattha samāpajjantīti pañcavokārabhave. Kasmā? Anupubbasamāpattisabbhāvato. Catuvokārabhave pana paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ uppattiyeva natthi, tasmā na sakkā tattha samāpajjituṃ. Kasmā samāpajjantīti saṅkhārānaṃ pavattibhede ukkaṇṭhitvā ‘‘diṭṭhadhamme acittakā hutvā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ patvā sukhaṃ viharissāmā’’ti. Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ hotīti samathavipassanāvasena ussakkitvā katapubbakiccassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodhayato evamassā samāpajjanaṃ hoti. Yo hi samathavaseneva ussakkati, so nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yopi vipassanāvaseneva ussakkati, so phalasamāpattiṃ patvā tiṭṭhati. Yo pana ubhayavaseneva ussakkitvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ nirodheti, so taṃ samāpajjatīti ayamettha saṅkhepo.
这段的详细说明如下:在这里,一位比丘想进入灭尽定,先进入初禅,出定之后,对那里的诸行观无常、观苦、观无我。这种观有三种:行把握观、果等至观、灭尽定观。其中,行把握观不管是弱还是锐利,都一定会成为道的近因。果等至观只有锐利才合适,类似于道的修习。而灭尽定观则不能太弱也不能太锐利才合适,所以他以不太弱也不太锐利的观来观那些行。然后,进入第二禅……乃至进入识无边处,出定之后,在那里同样观诸行。接着,进入无所有处,出定之后,做四种准备工作:不坏别系物、尊重僧团、等待导师召唤、限定寿限。巴利
Ayaṃ pana vitthāro – idha bhikkhu nirodhaṃ samāpajjitukāmo paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassati. Vipassanā ca panesā tividhā saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā phalasamāpattivipassanā nirodhasamāpattivipassanāti. Tattha saṅkhārapariggaṇhanakavipassanā mandā vā tikkhā vā maggassa padaṭṭhānaṃ hotiyeva. Phalasamāpattivipassanā tikkhāva vaṭṭati maggabhāvanāsadisā. Nirodhasamāpattivipassanā pana nātimandanātitikkhā vaṭṭati, tasmā esa nātimandāya nātitikkhāya vipassanāya te saṅkhāre vipassati. Tato dutiyajjhānaṃ…pe… tato viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya tattha saṅkhāre tatheva vipassati. Atha ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya catubbidhaṃ pubbakiccaṃ karoti nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ saṅghapatimānanaṃ satthupakkosanaṃ addhānaparicchedanti.
其中,“不坏别系物”是指:凡是这件物品不跟这位比丘系在一起,而是单独放在别处的——无论是钵和袈裟、床和椅子、住处,还是其他任何一类资具——都要让它不被损坏,不被火、水、风、贼、老鼠等毁掉,应当这样决意。这里的决意方法是:“在此七天之内,愿这个和那个不被火烧,不被水冲走,不被风吹散,不被贼偷走,不被老鼠等咬坏。”这样决意之后,七天之内那件物品不会有任何危险;如果不决意,就会被火等毁坏。这叫做“不坏别系物”。至于跟自身系在一起的——比如下衣、上衣,或者坐的座位——那就不需要另外决意,等至本身就会保护它们。巴利
Tattha nānābaddhaavikopananti yaṃ iminā bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ na hoti, nānābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ pattacīvaraṃ vā mañcapīṭhaṃ vā nivāsagehaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana yaṃ kiñci parikkhārajātaṃ, taṃ yathā na vikuppati, aggiudakavātacoraundūrādīnaṃ vasena na vinassati, evaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tatridaṃ adhiṭṭhānavidhānaṃ ‘‘idañcidañca imasmiṃ sattāhabbhantare mā agginā jhāyatu, mā udakena vuyhatu, mā vātena viddhaṃsatu, mā corehi harīyatu, mā undūrādīhi khajjatū’’ti. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhite taṃ sattāhaṃ tassa na koci parissayo hoti, anadhiṭṭhahato pana aggiādīhi nassati, idaṃ nānābaddhaavikopanaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana ekābaddhaṃ hoti nivāsanapārupanaṃ vā nisinnāsanaṃ vā, tattha visuṃ adhiṭṭhānakiccaṃ natthi, samāpattiyeva naṃ rakkhati.
“僧团期待”是指对僧团的等候、守候,意思是:只要那位比丘还没来,就不举行僧团羯磨。这里,等候本身不是预备工作,而作意“僧团期待”才是预备工作。因此,应当这样作意:“如果在我入灭尽定七天期间,僧团想要做白二羯磨等任何羯磨,只要有比丘来叫我,我就立刻出定。”这样作意之后入定的人,到那时候就一定会出定。如果有人不这样作,僧团聚集后没看见那位比丘,就问“某某比丘在哪里”,听说“他入了灭尽定”,就派一位比丘去:“你去叫他来。”当那位比丘站到能听见的范围内,只要说“贤友,僧团在期待你”,他就出定了。僧团的命令就是这样有分量。所以,应当这样作意,使自己在最初就能出定,应当这样入定。巴利
Saṅghapatimānananti bhikkhusaṅghassa patimānanaṃ udikkhanaṃ, yāva so bhikkhu āgacchati, tāva saṅghakammassa akaraṇanti attho. Ettha ca patimānanaṃ etassa na pubbakiccaṃ, patimānanāvajjanaṃ pana pubbakiccaṃ. Tasmā evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ ‘‘sace mayi sattāhaṃ nirodhaṃ samāpajjitvā nisinne saṅgho apalokanakammādīsu kiñcideva kammaṃ kattukāmo hoti, yāva maṃ koci bhikkhu āgantvā na pakkosati, tāvadeva vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Evaṃ katvā samāpanno hi tasmiṃ samaye vuṭṭhahatiyeva. Yo pana evaṃ na karoti, saṅgho ce sannipatitvā taṃ apassanto ‘‘asuko bhikkhu kuhi’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘nirodhaṃ samāpanno’’ti vutte kañci bhikkhuṃ peseti ‘‘taṃ pakkosāhī’’ti, athassa tena bhikkhunā savanūpacāre ṭhatvā ‘‘saṅgho taṃ āvuso patimānetī’’ti vuttamatteyeva vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Evaṃ garukā hi saṅghassa āṇā nāma, tasmā taṃ āvajjitvā yathā paṭhamameva vuṭṭhāti, evaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ.
关于“师的召唤”:在这里,同样是以作意“师的召唤”作为入定前的准备工作,所以也应当这样作意。其余部分应当依照前面的方式来了知。巴利
Satthupakkosananti idhāpi satthupakkosanāvajjanameva imassa pubbakiccaṃ, tasmā tampi evaṃ āvajjitabbaṃ. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
“寿限的限定”是指对寿命期限的限定。这位比丘应当以善巧来把握寿限的限定,先作意“我自己的寿行在七日之内是会继续运转,还是不会继续运转”,然后才能入定。因为如果寿行会在七日之内断灭,而他却不先作意就入定,那么他的灭尽定就无法阻挡死亡;由于在灭尽定当中不会死亡,他就会在定中中途出定。所以必须先作意这件事再入定。其余那些即使不作意也可以,但这一项则必须作意,所以才这样说。他这样进入无所有处定,出定之后做完这个预备工作,再进入非想非非想处定,经过一个或两个心刹那,就成为无心,触证灭尽。为什么在两个心之后心识不再生起呢?因为这是趣向灭尽的加行。这位比丘把止和观这两法配合起来,依次第登上八等至,这就是渐次灭尽的加行,而不是为了非想非非想处定。由于是趣向灭尽的加行,所以在两个心之后心识不再生起。巴利
Addhānaparicchedoti jīvitaddhānassa paricchedo. Iminā bhikkhunā addhānaparicchedesu kusalena bhavitabbaṃ, ‘‘attano āyusaṅkhārā sattāhaṃ pavattissanti na pavattissantī’’ti āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Sace hi sattāhabbhantare nirujjhanake āyusaṅkhāre anāvajjitvāva samāpajjati, tassa nirodhasamāpatti maraṇaṃ paṭibāhituṃ na sakkoti, antonirodhe maraṇassa natthitāya antarāva samāpattito vuṭṭhāti, tasmā etaṃ āvajjitvāva samāpajjitabbaṃ. Avasesañhi anāvajjitumpi vaṭṭati, idaṃ pana āvajjitabbamevāti vuttaṃ. So evaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya idaṃ pubbakiccaṃ katvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ samāpajjati, athekaṃ vā dve vā cittavāre atikkamitvā acittako hoti, nirodhaṃ phusati . Kasmā panassa dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni na pavattantīti? Nirodhassa payogattā. Idañhi imassa bhikkhuno dve samathavipassanādhamme yuganaddhe katvā aṭṭhasamāpattiārohanaṃ anupubbanirodhassa payogo, na nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyāti nirodhassa payogattā dvinnaṃ cittānaṃ upari cittāni na pavattantīti.
菩萨在前往菩提道场之前,在最后一生中也曾生起过第四禅,但那时只是刚刚生起而已,并不是作为观等的基础。因此,为了加以区别,才说“在菩提树下生起”。“观的基础”,是指在开始修观时作为观的基础。“神通的基础”,这里也是同样的道理。诸佛只在最初开始修行时需要以基础禅那为用,此后就不再为了证得更高的道果、果等至、神通变化等目的而使用它。因为从证得正等觉的那一刻起,一切智与定的作用就只取决于期望而已。“成就一切事”,是指成就次第住等一切事。“给予一切世间出世间功德”:在这里,正因为第四禅是观与神通的基础,所以应当知道世尊的第四禅具有给予一切世间出世间功德的性质。因为道智是一切知智的近因,一切知智就是正等觉,而道智又以第四禅为近因。在世尊证得正等觉的同时,一切佛功德都已掌握在手,而道的证得,是以第四禅为所依的。巴利
Yasmā bodhisattena bodhimaṇḍupasaṅkamanato pubbepi carimabhave catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattitapubbaṃ, tadā pana taṃ nibbattitamattameva ahosi, na vipassanādipādakaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle nibbattita’’nti tato visesetvā vuttaṃ. Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanārambhe vipassanāya pādakaṃ. Abhiññāpādakanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Buddhānañhi paṭhamārambhe eva pādakajjhānena payojanaṃ ahosi, na tato paraṃ uparimaggādhigamaphalasamāpattiabhiññāvaḷañjanādiatthaṃ. Abhisambodhisamadhigamato paṭṭhāya hi sabbaṃ ñāṇasamādhikiccaṃ ākaṅkhāmattapaṭibaddhamevāti. Sabbakiccasādhakanti anupubbavihārādisabbakiccasādhakaṃ. Sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakanti ettha vipassanābhiññāpādakattā eva catutthassa jhānassa bhagavato sabbalokiyalokuttaraguṇadāyakatā veditabbā. Sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi maggañāṇaṃ taṃpadaṭṭhānañca sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ abhisambodhi, tadadhigamasamakālameva ca bhagavato sabbe buddhaguṇā hatthagatā ahesuṃ, catutthajjhānasannissayo ca maggādhigamoti.
说完“成就第四禅而住”之后,因为提到了“他”,所以接着说“他,我”。在“这样入定”这句里,“这样”这个词,是为了显示前面依次证得三种禅那之后所成就的第四禅的等持,因此说“这样,是对第四禅次第的显示”。这是对第四禅和证得它的方法的显示,也就是通过那样的等持次第而获得第四禅定,是对这两者的显示,这就是它的意思。因此说“由此……已说”。其中,“由这次第”是指由证得初禅等开始的次第。虽然“这样”这个词连同入定的等持,已经显示了第四禅的等持,但因为只有念清净之定才是神通的基础,所以特别说“以第四禅定入定”。当舍念清净现起时,由于一切敌对法和随烦恼都已清净,而且在敌对法被止息时不再有干扰,第四禅以及与之相应的诸法就变得极为清净、极为明澈,而这里是以念为首来作开示,所以说“以舍念清净的状态而清净”,意思是由舍产生了念清净。这种清净由于殊胜的缘而有殊胜的运作,它的遍净状态,就像经过研磨的纯净黄金变得光辉闪耀一样,所以说“正因为清净,所以遍净、光辉,这就是所说的意思”。巴利
‘‘Catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihāsi’’nti vatvā ‘‘so’’ti vuttattā āha ‘‘so aha’’nti. Evaṃ samāhiteti ettha evaṃ-saddo heṭṭhā jhānattayādhigamapaṭipāṭisiddhassa catutthajjhānasamādhānassa nidassanatthoti āha ‘‘evanti catutthajjhānakkamanidassanameta’’nti. Catutthajjhānassa tassa ca adhigamamaggassa nidassanaṃ, yena samādhānānukkamena catutthajjhānasamādhi laddho, tadubhayanidassananti attho. Tenāha ‘‘iminā…pe… vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Tattha iminā kamenāti iminā paṭhamajjhānādhigamādinā kamena. Yadipi ‘‘eva’’nti idaṃ āgamanasamādhinā saddhiṃ catutthajjhānasamādhānaṃ dīpeti, satipārisuddhisamādhi eva pana iddhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhāvato padhānanti āha ‘‘catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhite’’ti. Sabbapaccanīkadhammupakkilesaparisuddhāya paccanīkasamanepi abyāvaṭāya pārisuddhupekkhāya vattamānāya catutthajjhānaṃ taṃsampayuttā ca dhammā suparisuddhā suvisadā ca honti, satisīsena pana tattha desanā katāti āha ‘‘upekkhāsatipārisuddhibhāvena parisuddhe’’ti, upekkhāya janitasatipārisuddhisambhavenāti attho. Parisuddhiyā eva paccayavisesena pavattiviseso pariyodātatā sudhantasuvaṇṇassa nighaṃsanena pabhassaratā viyāti āha ‘‘parisuddhattāyeva pariyodāte, pabhassareti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
“以断除乐等缘”,是指依次镇伏乐与喜、苦与忧,也就是镇伏它们各自的贪与嗔之缘。正如所说:“乐是喜的缘,喜是贪的缘;苦是忧的缘,忧是嗔的缘。”贪等法因为使心垢秽不净,所以被称为“污点”;同样,它们以逼近而染污的作用,被称为随烦恼。因此说“正因为没有污点,所以远离随烦恼”。所以说“因为污点,心被随烦恼所染污”,意思是受到逼迫、受到热恼。“善修习”,是指通过达到熟练而善加修习。因此说“达到自在”,意思是通过转向等五种方式,或十四种调伏方式,达到能随意运作。能自在运作的心,被称为“柔软”,就像经过良好鞣制的皮革、经过良好加工的紫胶一样,被称为柔软。“堪任业处”,是指堪任神变等神通作用。“这两者”,就是指柔软与堪任这两种。巴利
Sukhādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ ghātenāti sukhasomanassānaṃ dukkhadomanassānañca yathākkamaṃ rāgadosapaccayānaṃ vikkhambhanena. ‘‘Sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa, dukkhaṃ domanassassa paccayo, domanassaṃ dosassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā rāgādayo cetaso malāsucibhāvena ‘‘aṅgaṇānī’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ upagantvā kilesanaṭṭhena upakkilesāti āha ‘‘anaṅgaṇattā eva ca vigatupakkilese’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgaṇena hi cittaṃ upakkilissatī’’ti, vibādhīyati upatāpīyatīti attho. Subhāvitattāti paguṇabhāvāpādanena suṭṭhu bhāvitattā. Tenāha ‘‘vasībhāvappatte’’ti, āvajjanādinā pañcadhā cuddasavidhena vā paridamanena vasaṃ vattituṃ upagateti attho. Vase vattamānañhi cittaṃ mudūti vuccatīti vase vattamānaṃ cittaṃ paguṇabhāvāpattiyā suparimadditaṃ viya cammaṃ suparikammakatā viya ca lākhā mudūti vuccati. Kammakkhameti vikubbanādiiddhikammakkhame. Tadubhayanti mudutākammaniyadvayaṃ.
在“我不见”等话里,“不”字表示否定。“我”是导师在指称自己。“比丘们”是在呼唤比丘。“其他”是指与现在所说的这个心不同的。“一法”是指哪怕仅仅一个自性之法。“我不见”是连接语。这里的意思是:比丘们,我用一切知智观察,也看不到有任何一个其他的法,能像这个心一样,通过修习达到自在,通过反复地做、多次地修,从而获得殊胜的柔软,因为柔软而堪任,因为堪任业处而堪任。之所以说“这个心”,是因为他自己和那些比丘都亲自现量证见了它。巴利
Nāhantiādīsu (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.1) na-kāro paṭisedhattho. Ahanti satthā attānaṃ niddisati. Bhikkhaveti bhikkhū ālapati. Aññanti idāni vuccamānacittato aññaṃ. Ekadhammampīti ekampi sabhāvadhammaṃ. Na samanupassāmīti sambandho. Ayañhettha attho – ahaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbaññutaññāṇena olokentopi aññaṃ ekadhammampi na samanupassāmi, yaṃ vasībhāvāpādanena bhāvitaṃ tathā punappunaṃ karaṇena bahulīkataṃ evaṃ savisesamudubhāvappattiyā mudu kammakkhamatāya kammaniyañca hoti yathā idaṃ cittanti. Idaṃ cittanti ca attano tesañca paccakkhatāya evamāha.
正如前面所说的清净等状态不会消失,善修习的心就安住在那里面,所以这里说“安住、达到不动”。也就是说,因为安住在这些清净等状态中而安住,正因为安住,才达到不动。就像柔软和堪任通过达到自在而表现出来,达到自在也通过柔软和堪任而表现出来,所以说“或者因为柔软、堪任的状态而安住于自己的掌控之中,所以叫安住”。就像可以通过因来推知果,也可以通过果来推知因。由于不动摇而安住,以及由于相应诸法坚固、不被敌对法所动摇,这是依靠信等力量的威势而产生的,所以说“由信等所摄持,所以达到不动”。巴利
Yathā yathāvuttā parisuddhatādayo na vigacchanti, evaṃ subhāvitaṃ cittaṃ tattha avaṭṭhitaṃ idha ‘‘ṭhitaṃ āneñjappatta’’nti ca vuttanti āha ‘‘etesu parisuddhabhāvādīsuṭhitattā ṭhite, ṭhitattāyeva āneñjappatte’’ti. Yathā mudukammaññatā vasībhāvappattiyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ vasībhāvappattipi mudukammaññatāhi lakkhīyatīti ‘‘mudukammaññabhāvena vā attano vase ṭhitattā ṭhite’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā hi kāraṇena phalaṃ niddhārīyati, evaṃ phalenapi kāraṇaṃ niddhārīyatīti niccalabhāvena avaṭṭhānaṃ āneñjappattiyā ca sampayuttadhammesu thirabhāvena paṭipakkhehi akammaniyatāya ca sambhavataṃ saddhādibalānaṃ ānubhāvena hotīti āha ‘‘saddhādīhi pariggahitattā āneñjappatte’’ti.
现在,为了把略说中已经讲过的内容展开说明,就说了“由信摄持”等这些话。其中,“由信摄持”的意思是:像这样善加修习、达到自在的心,一定会导向对应当证知的诸法的证知——这样的信所摄持,也就是被前面所说的信力所支撑。“由无信”是说:以与信相反的无信为因。“不动”是说:不摇动、不颤动,反而以能带来更高殊胜的状态而安住。“由精进摄持”等说法,也应当按同样的方式理解其义。不过这里有差别:“由精进摄持”是指被能成就自在、调伏自身的精进所撑持;“由念摄持”是指由如前所述、于修习多作中不忘失且探寻善法之趣向的念所撑持;“由定摄持”是指由即于彼处成就无散乱的定所撑持;“由慧摄持”是指由对彼修习中辨别随顺与违逆法之相的慧所撑持。“达光明”是指与智光明俱行。因为,以如前所说的定所增长、成为光明的智,如实照见烦恼聚,由此生起怖畏与愧惧,从而战胜它,而不被它战胜。因此说“不为烦恼黑暗所动摇”。以此显示被智所摄持的愧惧之力。“具足八支”是指依第四禅定,心得等持、清净、洁白、无秽、离随烦恼、柔软、适业、住于不动,具足这八支。或者,不把“等持”本身作为一支,而将住立与不动另立,具足如前所说的八支,应当这样理解其义。“堪能引摄”是指堪能引摄神变等义,堪能令心朝向彼。因此说“对应当证知的诸法的证知”。巴利
Idāni saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘saddhāpariggahitaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha saddhāpariggahitanti evaṃ subhāvitaṃ vasībhāvappattaṃ cittaṃ ekaṃsena abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāya saṃvattatīti evaṃ pavattāya saddhāya pariggahitaṃ yathāvuttasaddhābalena upatthambhitaṃ. Assaddhiyenāti tappaṭipakkhena assaddhiyena hetunā. Na iñjatīti na calati na kampati, aññadatthu uparivisesāvahabhāveneva tiṭṭhati. Vīriyapariggahitantiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – vīriyapariggahitanti vasībhāvāpādanaparidamanasādhanena vīriyena upatthambhitaṃ. Satipariggahitanti yathāvutte bhāvanābahulīkāre asammosādikāya kusalānañca dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamānāya satiyā upatthambhitaṃ. Samādhipariggahitanti tattheva avikkhepasādhanena samādhānena upatthambhitaṃ. Paññāpariggahitanti tassā eva bhāvanāya upakārānupakāradhammānaṃ pajānanalakkhaṇāya paññāya upatthambhitaṃ. Obhāsagatanti ñāṇobhāsasahagataṃ. Obhāsabhūtena hi yathāvuttasamādhānasaṃvaddhitena ñāṇena saṃkilesapakkhaṃ yāthāvato passanto tato utrāsanto ottappanto taṃ abhibhavati, na tena abhibhuyyati. Tenāha ‘‘kilesandhakārena na iñjatī’’ti. Etena ñāṇapariggahitaṃ hirottappabalaṃ dasseti. Aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatanti catutthajjhānasamādhinā samāhitatā parisuddhatā pariyodātatā anaṅgaṇatā vigatupakkilesatā mudubhāvo kammaniyatā āneñjappattiyā ṭhitatāti imehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Atha vā samāhitassa cittassa imāni aṅgānīti ‘‘samāhite’’ti imaṃ aṅgabhāvena aggahetvā ṭhitiāneñjappattiyo visuṃ gahetvā yathāvuttehi aṭṭhahi aṅgehi samannāgatanti attho daṭṭhabbo. Abhinīhārakkhamanti iddhividhādiatthaṃ abhinīhārakkhamaṃ tadabhimukhakaraṇayoggaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘abhiññāsacchikaraṇīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhiññāsacchikiriyāyā’’ti.
当然,镇伏诸盖之后才有初禅的证得,寻等止息之后才有第二禅等的证得。但即便如此,那些盖等并不像从第四禅那样远离或脱离。因此,因为从能令心染污、扰动、踊跃的盖等中善得解脱,就说心的清净与洁白。所以他说“从盖……洁白”。关于“证得禅那的敌对者”这一说法,阿阇梨法护长老采用了“证得禅那之缘”的读法,而否定了“证得禅那的敌对者”这一读法。因为他曾说:巴利
Kāmaṃ nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhetvā eva paṭhamajjhānasamadhigamo, vitakkādivūpasamā eva ca dutiyajjhānādisamadhigamo, tathāpi na tathā te tehi dūrībhūtā, apetā vā yathā catutthajjhānato, tasmā cetaso malīnabhāvasaṅkhobhauppilābhāvakarehi nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu vimuttiyā tassa parisuddhipariyodātatā ca vuttāti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇa…pe… pariyodāte’’ti. Jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkānanti ettha ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti pāṭhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’nti ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhitto. Vuttañhi tena –
“以证得禅那为缘”指的是:以证得禅那为因、依止证得禅那而生起的。“诸恶”指的是:低劣的。“欲行境”指的是:以欲为活动范围、被欲所沉溺的,也就是依“啊,但愿导师只问我之后,再为比丘们说法”这类方式而生起的慢、谄、诳等。“贪欲等”:用“等”字也把那些(慢、谄、诳等)一并收摄进来。在这里应当看到,贪欲以及慢等,是与不能被初禅镇伏的烦恼同属一类的,因为“以证得禅那为缘”这一表述是贯穿下来的。至于能被镇伏的,则已被“盖”这个词所涵盖。那么,那些不能被初禅镇伏的烦恼,在这里怎么会消失呢?因为“一切善法是一切不善法的对治”,这是从损减修行的角度来说的,目的是显示禅那不被执取的状态。然而,有些人认为“欲行境、贪欲等”这些词已经涵盖了忿、恼、欲贪、嗔恚等,于是驳斥“以证得禅那为缘”这个读法,说“以证得禅那为敌对者”才是正确的读法。那只是他们自己的主张,因为那样的读法根本不存在;而且,证得禅那的敌对者就是盖以及与其同类的烦恼,在说明了它们的远离之后,又再指责它们的不存在与消失,这是说不通的。难道在《无秽经》和《事经》中得不到这个意思吗?因为那里只指粗重的恶法。确实如此,但在这里,因为是依已证得第四禅来说的,所以那些烦恼是以微细的方式被涵盖的。不过,这里引用诸经,是因为它们共同具有垢秽随烦恼的性质。正如所说的“依经的随顺”,而不是依经本身。巴利
‘‘Jhānapaṭilābhapaccayānanti jhānapaṭilābhahetukānaṃ jhānapaṭilābhaṃ nissāya uppajjanakānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ ‘aho vata mameva satthā paṭipucchitvā bhikkhūnaṃ dhammaṃ deseyyā’tiādinayappavattānaṃ mānamāyāsāṭheyyādīnaṃ. Abhijjhādīnanti ādi-saddenapi tesaṃyeva saṅgaho. Abhijjhā cettha paṭhamajjhānena avikkhambhaneyyā mānādayo ca tadekaṭṭhā daṭṭhabbā jhānapaṭilābhapaccayānanti anuvattamānattā. Vikkhambhaneyyā pana nīvaraṇaggahaṇena gahitā. Kathaṃ pana paṭhamajjhānena avikkhambhaneyyā idha vigacchantīti? ‘Sabbe kusalā dhammā sabbākusalānaṃ paṭipakkhā’ti sallekhapaṭipattivasena evaṃ vuttaṃ jhānassa aparāmaṭṭhabhāvadassanato. Ye panettha ‘icchāvacarānaṃ abhijjhādīna’nti imehi padehi kopaappaccayakāmarāgabyāpādādayo gahitāti adhippāyena ‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’nti pāṭhaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’nti pāṭhoti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ tathā pāṭhasseva abhāvato, jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkā ca nīvaraṇā ceva tadekaṭṭhā ca, tesaṃ dūrībhāvaṃ vatvā puna tesaṃyeva abhāvavigamacodanāya ayujjamānattā. Nanu ca anaṅgaṇasuttavatthasuttesu ayamattho labbhati oḷārikānaṃyeva pāpadhammānaṃ tattha adhippetattāti. Saccametaṃ, idha pana adhigatacatutthajjhānassa vasena vuttattā sukhumāyeva te gahitā, aṅgaṇupakkilesatāsāmaññena panettha suttānaṃ apadisanaṃ. Tathā hi ‘suttānusārenā’ti vuttaṃ, na pana suttavasenā’’ti.
这一点也必须这样接受:因为确实有些已经证得禅那的人,仍然会有欲求界一类的心念生起。正因如此,阿阇梨法护长老才采用了“证得禅那之缘”这个读法,而否定了“证得禅那之敌对者”这个读法。在《大结节》和《清净道论》的锡兰结节中,解释的都是“证得禅那之缘”这个读法的含义,所以应当采用这个读法,它的含义也应当按照前面所说的方式来理解。因此,“欲求界是指以欲为行境、被欲所支配而生起的种种忿与恼等的条件”这个读法,也应当认为是不正确的。而且正因如此,在《清净道论》中,这个读法完全没有出现。巴利
Avassañcetamevaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ adhigatajjhānānampi kesañci icchāvacarānaṃ pavattisabbhāvatoti . Teneva ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti pāṭhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccanīkāna’’nti ayaṃ pāṭho paṭikkhitto. Mahāgaṇṭhipade visuddhimaggassa sīhaḷagaṇṭhipadepi ca ‘‘jhānapaṭilābhapaccayāna’’nti imasseva pāṭhassa attho vutto, tasmā ayameva pāṭho gahetabbo, atthopi cettha yathāvuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tena ‘‘icchāvacarānanti icchāya avacarānaṃ icchāvasena otiṇṇānaṃ pavattānaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kopaappaccayānanti attho’’ti ayampi pāṭho ayuttoyevāti gahetabbaṃ, tatoyeva ca visuddhimagge ayaṃ pāṭho sabbena sabbaṃ na dassitoti.
通过达到成为神足之基础的状态,是指达到作为神通的近因、作为立足处的状态。由于修习圆满,是指从此以后再也没有需要修的东西,因此堪能引摄的修习已经圆满。由于达到殊胜的状态,是指因为从那时起就被提升到最精勤的地位,所以以最上的意义和不令人满足的意义达到殊胜的状态。而这两句是用来解释修习安住的原因,也就是说:圆满的修习已经安住在达到殊胜的状态中。达到不动,这是对安住的修饰语。因此说“就像达到不动那样安住”。在这个解释方案中,“安住”和“达到不动”这两者合为一支,而“等持”则是另一支。因此,为了指出它和第一种解释方案的差别,而说“如此也是具足八支”。巴利
Iddhipādakabhāvūpagamanenāti iddhiyā pādakabhāvassa padaṭṭhānabhāvassa upagamanena. Bhāvanāpāripūriyāti ito paraṃ kattabbassa abhāvavasena abhinīhārakkhamabhāvanāya paripuṇṇattā. Paṇītabhāvūpagamanenāti tato eva padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya uttamaṭṭhena atittikaraṭṭhena ca paṇītabhāvassa upagamanena. Ubhayañcetaṃ bhāvanāya ṭhitiyā kāraṇavacanaṃ, paripuṇṇāya bhāvanāya paṇītabhāvappattiyā ṭhiteti. Āneñjappatteti idaṃ ṭhitiyā visesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yathā āneñjappattaṃ hoti, evaṃ ṭhite’’ti. Imasmiṃ pakkhe ‘‘ṭhite āneñjappatte’’ti ubhayamekaṃ aṅgaṃ, ‘‘samāhite’’ti pana idampi ekamaṅgaṃ. Tenevassa paṭhamavikappato visesaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘evampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgata’’nti.
他忆念过去生,或者他的这种忆念就是宿命通,因为它是依靠过去生等作为缘才生起的。为了展开说明前面简略说过的“对于宿命通来说,那个智就是为了这个目的”这句话的含义,先展示过去生,再展示其中的念与智,所以说了“过去生”等话。其中,“过去”这个词,根据“一生”等说法,在这里指的是以过去世为对象,所以说“在过去诸生中”。“住”这个词是业作义,除了诸蕴之外并没有所谓居住的法,所以说“曾居住的诸蕴”。这里“曾居住”的意思是在相续中流转,那些法如此一一经历、生起、流转,在那里生起之后又灭去,所以说“曾居住,即曾经历、曾体验、在自己的相续中生起后灭去”。这样从属于自己相续的法角度解释了“住”这个词的含义之后,现在为了不加区分地来说,就说了“或者曾居住的法就是曾居住”,为了解释这一点,又说了“以境域之住”等话。因为即使是作为境域的法,由于对境域的反复接触而被接触、以作为所缘的方式而被体验,也叫做曾居住。而那些法由于有自己之识和他人之识两种境域性,所以有两种,为了展示这两种,说了“自己的”等话。其中,说了“以自己的识所识知的”之后,又说“被区分了的”,这是为了说明这样的意思:那些以境域之住而曾居住的法,并不只是被识认知而已,而是像过去以名、姓、容貌、相、食物等差别,被能作区分的慧所区分而执取那样,这个智也是如此区分而执取的。或者,以他人之识所识知的也是曾居住,这是连接关系。不只是以自己的识,而是也以他人的识所识知的,这是意思。这里也应该把“被区分了的”这个词带进来连接,即:或者也被他人之识所识知、所区分。而对于执取它的作用,应该按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, tassa vā anussaraṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussati taṃnissayādipaccayabhūtaṃ paṭicca uppajjanato. Pubbenivāsānussatimhi yaṃ ñāṇaṃtadatthāyāti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto pubbenivāsaṃ tāva dassetvā tattha satiñāṇāni dassetuṃ ‘‘pubbenivāso’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘pubbe’’ti idaṃ padaṃ ‘‘ekampi jāti’’ntiādivacanato atītabhavavisayaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘atītajātīsū’’ti. Nivāsasaddo kammasādhano, khandhavinimutto ca nivasitadhammo natthīti āha ‘‘nivutthakkhandhā’’ti. Nivutthatā cettha santāne pavattatā, tathābhūtā ca te anu anu bhūtā jātā pavattā, tattha uppajjitvā vigatā ca hontīti āha ‘‘nivutthāti ajjhāvutthā anubhūtā attano santāne uppajjitvā niruddhā’’ti. Evaṃ sasantatipariyāpannadhammavasena nivāsasaddassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni avisesena vattuṃ ‘‘nivutthadhammā vā nivutthā’’ti vatvā taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gocaranivāsenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gocarabhūtāpi hi gocarāsevanāya āsevitā ārammaṇakaraṇavasena anubhūtā nivutthā nāma honti. Te pana duvidhā saparaviññāṇagocaratāyāti ubhayepi te dassetuṃ ‘‘attano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘attano viññāṇena viññātā’’ti vatvā ‘‘paricchinnā’’ti vacanaṃ ye te gocaranivāsena nivutthadhammā, na te kevalaṃ viññāṇena viññātamattā, atha kho yathā pubbe nāmagottavaṇṇaliṅgāhārādīhi visesehi paricchedakārikāya paññāya paricchijja gahitā, tathevetaṃ ñāṇaṃ paricchijja gaṇhātīti imassa atthassa dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Paraviññāṇaviññātāpi vā nivutthāti sambandho. Na kevalaṃ attanova viññāṇena, atha kho paresaṃ viññāṇena viññātāpīti attho. Idhāpi ‘‘paricchinnā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, paresampi vā viññāṇena viññātā paricchinnāti. Tassa ca gahaṇe payojanaṃ vuttanayeneva vattabbaṃ.
那些在过去生中已被他人识知、被区分出来,而识知他们的人即使已经般涅槃,由于他们当时还活着的相续,也能知道那些人过去的活动。为了显示这种达到顶点的宿住随念智所缘的过去生,所以说“对断径者之随念等”。断径者就是正自觉者,对他们的随念就是断径者随念。有些人说:“‘等’字摄取了独觉和佛弟子的随念。”然而,一切断径者都是以无余依涅槃界般涅槃的,因为已经断了轮回之路,所以对他们的随念,就是对他们修行的随念。那种修行简要来说,以执取六种所缘为特征,因此在这里被“以他人之识所识知的执取”所包含。因此应当知道:在过去生中,不是以自己的识所识知的一切已般涅槃的佛陀、独觉、佛弟子的随念,就是断径者随念。而在这里,“等”字还摄取了在过去生中不是以自己的识所识知、也还没有般涅槃的人,不依照现在诸蕴的次第,而是以跳跃的方式所作的随念。不过,像上面所说的断径者随念等,只有佛陀才能获得。因为在过去,诸佛世尊曾这样观见,这样修习道,证得果与涅槃,这样调伏所化众生,在这一点上,其他人的智无论如何都不可能达到。而那些在过去生中以自己的识所识知的人,即使已经般涅槃,由于还系属于蕴,弟子们仍然能随念。以哪种念忆念过去生,那就是宿住随念,应当这样连接起来。我引导,就是把心从禅那的所缘移开,朝向过去生派遣出去,使心倾向于过去生、趣向过去生、归向过去生,这就是意思。巴利
Te ca kho yasmā atītāsu eva jātīsu aññehi viññātā paricchinnā, te ca parinibbutāpi honti, yehi te viññātā, tesaṃ tadā vattamānasantānānusārena tesampi atīte pavatti viññāyatīti sikhāppattaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa visayabhūtaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Chinnavaṭumakā sammāsambuddhā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Ādisaddena paccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānussaraṇāni gayhantī’’ti keci vadanti. Chinnavaṭumakā pana sabbeva anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutā chinnasaṃsāramaggattā, tesaṃ anussaraṇaṃ nāma tesaṃ paṭipattiyā anussaraṇaṃ. Sā pana paṭipatti saṅkhepato chaḷārammaṇaggahaṇalakkhaṇāti tāni idha paraviññāṇaviññātaggahaṇena gahitāni. Tasmā purimāsu jātīsu attano viññāṇena aviññātānaṃ parinibbutānaṃ sabbesampi buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ chinnavaṭumakānussaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Ādi-saddena panettha purimāsu jātīsu attano viññāṇena aviññātānaṃ aparinibbutānampi vattamānakkhandhapaṭipāṭiyā agantvā sīhokkantikavasena anussaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ, ime pana yathāvuttachinnavaṭumakānussaraṇādayo buddhānaṃyeva labbhanti. Na hi atīte buddhā bhagavanto evaṃ vipassiṃsu, evaṃ maggaṃ bhāvesuṃ, phalanibbānāni sacchākaṃsu, evaṃ veneyye vinesunti ettha sabbathā aññesaṃ ñāṇassa gati atthīti. Ye pana purimāsu jātīsu attanova viññāṇena viññātā, te parinibbutepi khandhapaṭibaddhattā sāvakā anussarantiyeva. Yāya satiyā pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, sā pubbenivāsānussatīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Abhinīharinti cittaṃ jhānārammaṇato apanetvā pubbenivāsābhimukhaṃ pesesiṃ, pubbenivāsaninnaṃ pubbenivāsapoṇaṃ pubbenivāsapabbhāraṃ akāsinti attho.
巴利文里说“abhininnāmesi”(令心朝向、令心转向),因为这是针对最上之人的运用,所以这里把“so”与“我”这个词连起来说,就使那个意思变得清楚,因此说“so ahaṃ”(那是我)。Anekavidhaṃ(种种、多种)是指按各种有、生处、趣、识住、有情居等而分为许多种。Pakārehi(以各种方式)是指连同名称、种姓等形态一起。这里与saha(一起)连用时,是具格用法。Pavattita(已转起)是通过说法而转起。因此说“saṃvaṇṇita”(已广说),意思是“已详细说明”。Nivāsa(住)是包含内部差别与共相的用语,为了以遍摄那些差别的意乐来摄持并显示,所以说“tattha tattha nivutthasantāna”(在处处已住的心相续)。Anugantvā anugantvā(随行、随行)是以智之行而随行、随行。Anudevā(随天)是“anu”本身,“da”字母是随连声规则而加入的。说了“abhininnāmesi”之后,又说“anussarāmi”(我随念),因此anusadda(随念一词中的“anu”音)表示心之决意(abhinīhāra)无间忆持,所以说“citte abhininnāmitamatte eva sarāmīti dassetī”(表示只是在心已朝向之时我便忆念)。应当说前行准备:“想要随念宿住的初学比丘,在午后食毕从乞食处返回,独处静坐,依次入四禅,从作为神通基础之第四禅出定后,应当作意最后坐处”,如此等,作为宿住随念智之前行的前方便应当被说。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘abhininnāmesi’’nti uttamapurisappayogattā ‘‘so’’ti ettha ahaṃsaddo ānetvā vuccamāno tadattho pākaṭo hotīti ‘‘so aha’’nti vuttaṃ. Anekavidhanti nānābhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsādivasena bahuvidhaṃ. Pakārehīti nāmagottādiākārehi saddhiṃ. Sahayoge cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Pavattitanti desanāvasena pavattitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saṃvaṇṇita’’nti, vitthāritanti attho. Nivāsanti antogadhabhedasāmaññavacanametanti te bhede byāpanicchāvasena saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘tattha tattha nivutthasantāna’’nti āha. Anugantvā anugantvāti ñāṇagatiyā anugantvā anugantvā. Anudevāti anu eva, da-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. ‘‘Abhininnāmesi’’nti vatvā ‘‘anussarāmī’’ti vuttattā cittassa abhinīhārasamanantarabhāvasaraṇaṃ anusaddo dīpetīti āha ‘‘citte abhininnāmitamatte eva sarāmīti dassetī’’ti. Parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyāti ‘‘pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritukāmena ādikammikena bhikkhunā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena rahogatena paṭisallīnena paṭipāṭiyā cattāri jhānāni samāpajjitvā abhiññāpādakacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya sabbapacchimā nisajjā āvajjitabbā’’ti evamādinā pubbenivāsañāṇassa parikammabhūtaṃ pubbakaraṇaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyya.
“为了显示已开始忆念的宿住之种种差别”这句话,是为了显示已开始的宿住随念的种种差别。“即使一生”是指即使一个存在。因为那是由单一业所产生、以执取和舍弃为界限、包含内在诸法差别的蕴相续,在这里被理解为“生”,因为是生起的,所以称为“生”。因此说“即使一生……蕴相续”。“正在减损”是指正在耗尽、正在灭去。“劫”是指无数劫。它从意义上说是时间,应当知道,这是依当时正在转起的诸行而说其减损。“正在增长,即坏空劫”在这里也是同样的道理。不过,在“时间消耗,时间吞噬众生,一切皆共”等说法中,时间也被说为灭尽,但这里并不是这个意思,因为那样会导致不想要的过失。“坏灭”是灭尽、破坏;“坏灭后安住”是从坏灭之后如此安住。因为是它的根本,即因为它是先行的。“展开”是生起、产生,或者增长。巴利
Āraddhappakāradassanattheti anussarituṃ āraddhassa pubbenivāsassa pabhedadassanatthe. Ekampi jātinti ekampi bhavaṃ. So hi ekakammanibbatto ādānanikkhepaparicchinno antogadhadhammappabhedo khandhappabandho idha ‘‘jātī’’ti adhippeto jāyatīti jātīti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘ekampi…pe… khandhasantāna’’nti. Parihāyamānoti khīyamāno vinassamāno. Kappoti asaṅkhyeyyakappo. So pana atthato kālo, tadā pavattamānasaṅkhāravasenassa parihāni veditabbā. Vaḍḍhamāno vivaṭṭakappoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Yo pana ‘‘kālaṃ khepeti, kālo ghasati bhūtāni, sabbāneva sahattanā’’ti (jā. 1.2.190) ādīsu kālassapi khayo vuccati, so idha nādhippeto aniṭṭhappasaṅgato. Saṃvaṭṭanaṃ vinassanaṃ saṃvaṭṭo, saṃvaṭṭato uddhaṃ tathāṭhāyī saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyī. Tammūlakattāti taṃpubbakattā. Vivaṭṭanaṃ nibbattanaṃ, vaḍḍhanaṃ vā vivaṭṭo.
以火而坏灭的,就是火坏灭。坏灭的界限,就是坏灭的范围。正在坏灭,就是正在毁灭。总是,就是一切时候,意思是在三种坏灭劫的时候也都是如此。这里为了确定并显示所说的“一个佛刹”到底指什么,才说了“佛刹有三种”等等。在如来的结生智等智慧的威力被福德果报激发、自然而然遍满的任何地方,那整个都叫作佛芽出生的刹土,所以说“生刹以一万个轮围为界限”。威力在运转,这里是说:获得神通、心得自在的人,站在威令刹范围内的任何一个轮围中,为自己念诵护咒,即使之后去到别的轮围,他所念的护咒仍然有效,因此这样说。或者也可以说:站在某一个轮围中,为一切众生念诵护咒时,在威令刹中,护咒的威力确实能遍及一切众生,那里的天神也接受护咒,所以说“威力在运转”。所谓“或随其所欲”,是世尊在说自己在同一刹那中以声音令他人了知、并显示自身容貌时,针对所缘刹而说的“或随其所欲”。在何处,就是在无边际、不可测量的所缘刹中。想忆念什么,就忆念什么,因为佛智只随着欲念而运作,所以想忆念什么,就能忆念什么。一个威令刹坏灭,这是说横向坏灭的界限。正在安立,就是正在展开、正在生起。它的毁灭与安立,在《清净道论》中已经说过,我们前面解释“世间解”时也已经顺便说过,所以这里不再重复。巴利
Tejena saṃvaṭṭo tejosaṃvaṭṭo. Saṃvaṭṭasīmāti saṃvaṭṭanamariyādā. Saṃvaṭṭatīti vinassati. Sadāti sabbakālaṃ, tīsupi saṃvaṭṭakālesūti attho. Ekaṃ buddhakkhettanti idha yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ niyametvā dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhakkhettaṃ nāma tividha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Yattake ṭhāne tathāgatassa paṭisandhiñāṇādiñāṇānubhāvo puññaphalasamuttejito saraseneva parijambhati, taṃ sabbampi buddhaṅkurassa nibbattanakkhettaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘jātikkhettaṃ dasasahassacakkavāḷapariyanta’’nti. Ānubhāvo pavattatīti idha iddhimā cetovasippatto āṇākkhettapariyāpanne yattha katthaci cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā attano atthāya parittaṃ katvā tattheva aññaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ gatopi kataparitto eva hotīti katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā tattha ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷe ṭhatvā sabbasattānaṃ atthāya paritte kate āṇākkhette sabbasattānaṃ abhisambhuṇātveva parittānubhāvo tattha devatāhi parittānaṃ sampaṭicchitabbatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘ānubhāvo pavattatī’’ti. Yaṃ yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyāti vuttanti yaṃ visayakkhettaṃ sandhāya ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe sarena abhiviññāpanaṃ attano rūpadassanañca paṭijānantena bhagavatā ‘‘yāvatā vā pana ākaṅkheyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yatthāti yasmiṃ padese anantāparimāṇe visayakkhette. Yaṃ yaṃ ākaṅkhati, taṃ taṃ anussaratīti ākaṅkhamattapaṭibaddhavuttitāya buddhañāṇassa yaṃ yaṃ anussarituṃ icchati, taṃ taṃ anussarati. Ekaṃ āṇākkhettaṃ vinassatīti iminā tiriyato saṃvaṭṭamānaparicchedo vutto. Saṇṭhahantanti vivaṭṭamānaṃ jāyamānaṃ. Tassa vināso ca saṇṭhahanañca visuddhimagge vuttanti amhehipi heṭṭhā ‘‘lokavidū’’ti imassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanādhikāre pasaṅgato vuttattā idha na vuccati.
像这样,通过连带的方式说明了成劫、坏劫等之后,现在为了展示他们按照自己所证得的方式随念,就说“然而,那些所说的坏劫与成劫等”。在这其中,“于此等中”是表简别的处格,因为是从坏劫与成劫的集合中,简别出许多坏劫等。在“在那一坏劫中”这里,应当看出省略了“或”字。由于这个不确定的含义,也就包含了其他无数劫。或者,“在那一坏劫中”是因为在巴利文中从坏劫开始取用,所以才这样说。因为在那里也能看到他在诸有等中轮回了一段时间。或者,应当理解为:这是显示当坏劫正在进行时,他在哪些有等处曾得再生。在“在有中”等句里,是指在欲有等有中,或在卵生等生中,或在诸天等趣中,或在异身异想等识住中,或在有情居处中,或在刹帝利等有情种类中。因为这种宿住随念智是依世尊而说的,所以为了通过名字等来显示其含义,就说“如是名,即 vessantaro 或 jotipālo”等。“或吃米饭肉食”,这是针对在家时期说的。“或吃落果”,这是针对苦行者时期说的。“吃落果”就是吃自己掉落的果实。在“有染、无染等种种”中,有染是指依赖在家而生起的喜等,无染是指依赖出离而生起的喜等。通过“等”字,包含了由远离而生的定乐等。巴利
Evaṃ pasaṅgena saṃvaṭṭādike pakāsetvā idāni yathādhigataṃ tesaṃ anussaraṇākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye panete saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭā vuttā’’tiādimāha. Tattha etesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappasamudāyato anekesaṃ saṃvaṭṭakappādīnaṃ niddhāriyamānattā. Amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappeti ettha vā-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho daṭṭhabbo. Tena ca aniyamatthena itarāsaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānampi saṅgaho siddhoti. Atha vā amumhi saṃvaṭṭakappeti idaṃ saṃvaṭṭakappassa ādito pāḷiyaṃ gahitattā vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi hi imassa katipayakālaṃ bhavādīsu saṃsaraṇaṃ upalabbhatīti. Saṃvaṭṭakappe vā vattamāne yesu bhavādīsu imassa upapatti ahosi, taṃdassanametaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhave vātiādīsu kāmādibhave vā aṇḍajādiyoniyā vā devādigatiyā vā nānattakāyanānattasaññīādiviññāṇaṭṭhitiyā vā sattāvāse vā khattiyādisattanikāye vā. Yasmā idaṃ bhagavato vasena pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā tasseva nāmādivasena atthaṃ yojetvā dassento āha ‘‘evaṃnāmoti vessantaro vā jotipālo vā’’tiādi. Sālimaṃsodanāhāro vāti gihikālaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pavattaphalabhojano vāti tāpasādikālaṃ sandhāya. Pavattaphalabhojanoti sayampatitaphalāhāro. Sāmisanirāmisādippabhedānanti ettha sāmisā gehassitasomanassādayo, nirāmisā nekkhammassitasomanassādayo. Ādi-saddena vivekajasamādhijasukhādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
前面已经总说了这个意思,现在为了把它分别开示出来,就说“atha vā”等话。其中,“amutrāsi”是总说,或者省略了“byāpaniccha”的音,意思是“amutra amutra āsi”(在这里、在那里有)。“amutrā”是“在某某有中”的意思。“udapādi”是“生起”的意思。“idhūpapattiyā”是在此最后有的结生。在以次第向上回溯的人那里,“随其所欲而随念”中的“向上回溯的人”,是指以逆序的智慧向上回溯宿世的人。“回转的人”,是指以随念宿世的方式,随其所欲走到之后又返回的人。“观察”,是指对所随念又随念者的观察。因此,是以原因状态触及所说的这个意思,即“回转者的观察状态”,这样说。“在此结生”是在此最后有中的结生。“无间”是说过去无间。“在彼处”是在某某有中的意思。“生起”是生起。由那些天众,即由兜率天众。“一种姓”是以兜率种姓为一种姓。对于大菩萨相续的最终状态,名为生起天界之业的,确实不被不善业所损害,以此意趣而说“苦只是行苦而已”。然而,大福德天子们在前兆生起时等时候,与不可爱所缘的接触确实是有的,因此不能说“有时连苦苦也不存在”,应知诸法的生灭是行苦。五十七……乃至……为边际,这是依人年数计算而说。其中,若依天年数计算,则只是四千。巴利
Heṭṭhā sāmaññato vuttamevatthaṃ vibhajitvā dassetukāmo ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha amutrāsinti sāmaññaniddesoyaṃ, byāpanicchālopo vā, amutra amutra āsinti vuttaṃ hoti. Anupubbena ārohantassa yāvadicchakaṃ anussaraṇanti ettha ārohantassāti paṭilomato ñāṇena pubbenivāsaṃ ārohantassa. Paṭinivattantassāti pubbenivāsaṃ anussaraṇavasena yāvadicchakaṃ gantvā paccāgacchantassa. Paccavekkhaṇanti anussaritānussaritassa paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Tasmāti vuttassevatthassa kāraṇabhāvena paccāmasanaṃ, paṭinivattantassa paccavekkhaṇabhāvatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Idhūpapattiyāti idha carimabhave upapattiyā. Anantaranti atītānantaramāha. Amutrāti amukasmiṃ bhaveti attho. Udapādinti uppajjiṃ. Tāhi devatāhīti tusitadevatāhi. Ekagottoti tusitagottena ekagotto. Mahābodhisattānaṃ santānassa pariyosānāvatthāyaṃ devalokūpapattijanakaṃ nāma akusalena kammunā anupaddutameva hotīti adhippāyena ‘‘dukkhaṃ pana saṅkhāradukkhamattamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Mahāpuññānampi pana devaputtānaṃ pubbanimittuppattikālādīsu aniṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogo hotiyevāti ‘‘kadāci dukkhadukkhassapi sambhavo natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ, dhammānaṃ uppādanirodhasaṅkhāradukkhanti veditabbaṃ. Sattapaññāsa…pe… pariyantoti idaṃ manussavassagaṇanāvasena vuttaṃ. Tattha devānaṃ vassagaṇanāya pana catusahassameva.
“所谓‘如此’这一说法,是对所述之义的举例说明。而为了表明这是如其所应,不是按次第,就说‘依名与族姓’等。‘被指示’:因为仅凭看见无法了知,当被问‘这人叫什么名字’时,就以名和族姓回答‘Tissa Gotamo’,所以说‘被指示’。‘以容貌等’:指以容貌、食物、感受、寿量等差别。‘Sāmo’中的‘iti’一词是‘等’的意思,或者是‘种类’的意思。由此显示了‘如是等、如是种种差别’。‘名与族姓是指示’:众生依此而被指示,所以指示就是名与族姓。‘其余诸相状’:仅凭看见,众生就依这些而被了知,所以其余的容貌等是相状。‘并非无差别地’:为了把略说之义详细开示,就说‘外道们’等。其中,‘外道’指其他外道。他们是主张业论、主张所作论的人,或是苦行者等。因为外道们在《梵网经》等中只说到四十劫的成坏随念,所以说‘不能超越此’,并说明其原因:‘因为智慧薄弱’等。由此显示:修习毗婆舍那是宿住随念智的殊胜之因。正因如此,由于智慧强,除了上首弟子和大弟子之外,其余普通弟子也能随念百劫、千劫。因此《清净道论》中说:‘诸普通声闻也随念百劫、千劫,因为智慧强。’他们的誓愿就有这么大,也就是百千劫,乃至一二不可说劫;以时间来说,诸大声闻、上首声闻、独觉佛的福智誓愿依次就是这么大的量;声闻、独觉菩提的波罗蜜已成就。如果各位圣者的神通智威力,是由积集菩提资粮的时间所限定的,那么诸佛也应该有局限,所以说‘诸佛则没有局限’。依据‘有多少所知,就有多少智’这句话,如同一切知智一样,诸佛的神通智在自己的境界中也没有局限;在那里,想知什么法,就知道什么法。再者,即使有时间上的限定,由于因、方便、善巧、摄持等,大菩提资粮的慧波罗蜜的作用力殊胜无比,所以没有局限,何况由它所生的神通智呢?所以说‘诸佛则没有局限’。在过去,没有‘这么多劫、不可说劫’这样的时间限定;在未来,也像未来分智一样没有限定。因此说‘随其所欲,就随念之’。巴利
Itīti vuttatthanidassanametaṃ, tañca kho yathārahato, na yathānupubbatoti dassento ‘‘nāmagottavasenā’’tiādimāha. Uddisīyatīti disvāva aviññeyyattā ‘‘ayaṃ ko nāmo’’ti pucchite ‘‘tisso gotamo’’ti nāmagottena uddisīyati. Vaṇṇādīhīti vaṇṇāhāravedayitāyuparicchedehi. Sāmotīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena evamādievaṃpakāranānattatoti dassitaṃ hoti. Nāmagottaṃ uddesoti uddisīyati satto etenāti uddeso nāmagottaṃ. Itare ākārāti ākarīyati disvāva satto viññāyati etehīti itare vaṇṇādayo ākārā. ‘‘No ca kho avisesenā’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamevatthaṃ vitthārena dassento āha ‘‘titthiyā hī’’tiādi. Tattha titthiyāti aññatitthiyā. Te pana kammavādino kiriyavādino tāpasādayo. Yasmā titthiyānaṃ brahmajālādīsu cattālīsāya eva saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ āgataṃ, tasmā ‘‘na tato para’’nti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ vadanto ‘‘dubbalapaññattā’’tiādimāha. Tena vipassanābhiyogo pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇassa visesakāraṇanti dasseti. Tatoyeva ca balavapaññattā ṭhapetvā aggasāvakamahāsāvake itare pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.402) ‘‘pakatisāvakā kappasatampi kappasahassampi anussarantiyeva balavapaññattā’’ti. Ettako hi tesaṃ abhinīhāroti kappānaṃ satasahassampi tadadhikaṃ ekaṃ dve ca asaṅkhyeyyānīti kālavasena evaṃparimāṇo yathākkamaṃ tesaṃ mahāsāvakaaggasāvakapaccekabuddhānaṃ puññañāṇābhinīhāro, sāvakapaccekabodhipāramitā siddhā. Yadi bodhisambhārasambharaṇakālaparicchinno tesaṃ tesaṃ ariyānaṃ abhiññāñāṇavibhavo, evaṃ sante buddhānampissa paricchedatā āpannāti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthī’’ti. ‘‘Yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya buddhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānampi savisaye paricchedo nāma natthīti tattha yaṃ yaṃ ñātuṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ jānanti eva. Atha vā satipi kālaparicchede kāraṇūpāyakosallapariggahādinā sātisayattā mahābodhisambhārānaṃ paññāpāramitāya pavattiānubhāvassa paricchedo nāma natthi, kuto taṃnibbattānaṃ abhiññāñāṇānanti āha ‘‘buddhānaṃ pana paricchedo natthī’’ti. Atīte ‘‘ettakānaṃ kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānī’’ti evaṃ kālaparicchedo natthi anāgate anāgataṃsañāṇassa viya. Tenāha ‘‘yāva icchanti tāva sarantī’’ti.
就这样,从时间差别的角度说明了五种人的宿住随念之后,现在为了显示依所缘取相而有的现行差别,他说“外道们”等。“仅随念蕴的次第”:在这里,蕴的次第就是诸蕴的顺序,而且是从死殁开始,依逆序的方式。不过,有人在这里说“威仪路的次第就是蕴的次第”。为了通过遮遣来阐明已经说过的这个意思,他说“舍弃次第”等。其中,“依死与结生”:就是对自己或他人的每一个生命体,见到死之后,中间不触及任何事物,只以取结生的方式。然而,就像盲人不放舍手杖而行,他们也不舍离蕴的次第而随念,因此说“因为他们如同盲人,不能随意到达想去的地方”。“弟子”:普通弟子、大弟子和上首弟子,都笼统地称为弟子。因为普通弟子也依蕴的次第随念,也依死与结生而跳跃——这是因为他们智慧强利;八十位大弟子也是如此。然而,两位上首弟子并没有依蕴次第的必要。他们见到一个生命体的死,便见到其结生;又见到另一个的死,便见到其结生;就这样,他们也依死与结生跳跃而行。正如秋季正午时分,在四肘深的屋子里,有眼之人对色境看得极为清楚,这是世间公认的。不过,更微细的隔墙等色境,对他而言或许不在感知范围内;但对诸佛来说,并不存在想知道的法不在感知范围内的情况;而是以智光照耀,如同掌中的余甘子,极为明显、极为清晰。因为所知障已彻底断除,所以说“然而诸佛”等。巴利
Evaṃ pañcannaṃ janānaṃ pubbenivāsānussaraṇaṃ kālavibhāgato dassetvā idāni ārammaṇaggahaṇavasenassa pavattivisesaṃ dassento ‘‘titthiyā cā’’tiādimāha. Khandhapaṭipāṭimeva sarantīti ettha khandhapaṭipāṭi khandhānaṃ anukkamo, sā ca kho cutito paṭṭhāya uppaṭipāṭivasena. Keci panettha ‘‘iriyāpathapaṭipāṭi khandhapaṭipāṭī’’ti vadanti. Vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekato vibhāvento āha ‘‘paṭipāṭiṃ muñcitvā’’tiādi. Tattha cutipaṭisandhivasenāti attano parassa vā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ attabhāve cutiṃ disvā antarā kiñci anāmasitvā paṭisandhiyā eva gahaṇavasena. Yathā pana andhā yaṭṭhiṃ amuñcitvā gacchanti, evaṃ te khandhapaṭipāṭiṃ amuñcitvāva sarantīti āha ‘‘tesañhi andhānaṃ viya icchitappadesokkamanaṃ natthī’’ti. Sāvakāti pakatisāvakāpi mahāsāvakāpi aggasāvakāpi sāmaññato vuttā. Pakatisāvakāpi hi khandhapaṭipāṭiyāpi anussaranti , cutipaṭisandhivasenapi saṅkamanti balavapaññattā, tathā asītimahāsāvakā. Dvinnaṃ pana aggasāvakānaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ natthi. Ekassa attabhāvassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhiṃ passanti, puna aparassa cutiṃ disvā paṭisandhinti evaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasenapi saṅkamantā gacchanti. Yathā nāma saradasamaye ṭhitamajjhanhikavelāyaṃ caturatanike gehe cakkhumato purisassa rūpagataṃ supākaṭameva hotīti lokasiddhametaṃ. Siyā pana tassa sukhumataratirokuṭṭādibhedassa rūpagatassa agocaratā, na tveva buddhānaṃ ñātuṃ icchitassa ñeyyassa agocaratā, atha kho taṃ ñāṇālokena obhāsitaṃ hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya supākaṭaṃ suvibhūtameva hoti, tathā ñeyyāvaraṇassa suppahīnattāti āha ‘‘buddhā panā’’tiādi.
在这里,“以狮子跃入的方式”是指以狮子行走扑击的方式。“无论想了解哪种情形”,是指在某一劫、某一存在中,想了解哪种情形。“他们全都能忆念”,是说他们对想了解的那些全都忆念,没有不能忆念的。因为诸佛既不需要按蕴的次第来进行,也不需要通过死亡与结生的方式转换。他们在无数千万劫中,无论下方还是上方,想了解哪种情形,那种情形都自然清楚显现。因此,就像诵读贝叶经时,读到“初禅……乃至第五禅”等,只取开头结尾而简略持诵,不是逐句细读;同样,即使经过无数千万劫,也像贝叶经那样简略,在所想了解的每一处,以智慧直接跃入,以狮子跃入的方式行进。当他们这样行进时,他们的智慧就像一位精于射穿毛发的、如萨拉邦伽鸟般的弓箭手射出的箭,途中不会卡在树木藤蔓等物上,而是直中靶心,不停滞不偏离;同样,在中间的各种投生中,智慧不停滞不偏离,直接取所想了解的每一处情形。巴利
Tattha sīhokkantavasenāti sīhagatipatanavasena. Yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ ākaṅkhantīti yasmiṃ kappe yasmiṃ bhave yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ jānituṃ icchanti. Taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyevāti ñātuṃ icchitaṃ taṃ sabbaṃ sarantiyeva, na na saranti. Buddhānañhi neva khandhapaṭipāṭikiccaṃ, na ca cutipaṭisandhivasena saṅkamanakiccaṃ atthi. Tesañhi anekāsu kappakoṭīsu heṭṭhā vā upari vā yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ pākaṭameva hoti. Tasmā yathā peyyālapāḷiṃ paṭhantā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ…pe… pañcamaṃ jhāna’’ntiādipariyosānameva gaṇhantā saṅkhipitvā sajjhāyanti, na anupadaṃ, evaṃ anekāpi kappakoṭiyo peyyālapāḷiṃ viya saṅkhipitvā yaṃ yaṃ icchanti, tattha tattheva ñāṇena okkamantā sīhokkantavasena gacchanti. Evaṃ gacchantānañca tesaṃ ñāṇaṃ yathā nāma katavālavedhiparicayassa sarabhaṅgasadisassa dhanuggahassa khitto saro antarantarā rukkhalatādīsu asajjamāno lakkheyeva patati na sajjati na virajjhati, evaṃ antarantarāsu jātīsu na sajjati na virajjhati, asajjamānaṃ avirajjhamānaṃ icchiticchitaṭṭhānaṃyeva gaṇhāti.
过去世里的诸蕴,以及和它们相关联的名字、姓氏等这一切,都已经被“宿住”这个词涵盖进去了,所以经文说“令知什么?宿住”。愚痴因为能覆盖、遮蔽,就像黑暗一样,所以经文说“那愚痴本身就是黑暗”等等。所谓“能带来光明”,是说应当被造作,因此“作”就是造作,光明本身就是造作,也就是“光明之作”,意思是依靠它自己的因缘,以光明的性质生起。剩下的部分是赞叹的话,因为说明了能对治、摧破、转动等方面的殊胜。无明已被破除——从这里应当看出,“以了知为义的就是明”这个意思也被显示出来了。为什么?因为从“明已生起”这句可以看出:与明对立的是无明,而这种对立性表现为应当被断除,明则是能断除的。这个道理也适用于另外两句——这里指示的是“黑暗已被破除、已消失。为什么?因为光明已生起”这个意思。由于诸烦恼有灼烧、遍烧的性质,所以精进就是灼烧,因此说“以精进灼烧,是灼烧者”,也就是具有精进的人。所谓“心已发出的人”,是指心已放舍、投入于所想要达成之目标的人。就像“不放逸、灼烧、心已发出而住”,意思是说其他任何像我这样的人也一样。所谓“勤修断行”,是指致力于正勤的人。这里剩下的内容,因为意思明显、又依照前面所说的方式,很容易理解。巴利
Atītabhave khandhā tappaṭibaddhanāmagottāni ca sabbaṃ pubbenivāsantveva saṅgahitānīti āha ‘‘kiṃ viditaṃ karoti? Pubbenivāsa’’nti. Moho paṭicchādakaṭṭhena tamo viya tamoti āha ‘‘sveva moho’’tiādi. Obhāsakaraṇaṭṭhenāti kātabbato karaṇaṃ, obhāsova karaṇaṃ obhāsakaraṇaṃ, attano paccayehi obhāsabhāvena nibbattetabbaṭṭhenāti attho. Sesaṃ pasaṃsāvacananti paṭipakkhavidhamanapavattivisesānaṃ bodhanato vuttaṃ. Avijjā vihatāti etena vijānanaṭṭhena vijjāti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā vijjā uppannāti etena vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjā, paṭipakkhatā cassā pahātabbabhāvena vijjāya ca pahāyakabhāvenāti dasseti. Esa nayo itarasmimpi padadvayeti iminā tamo vihato vinaṭṭho. Kasmā? Yasmā āloko uppannoti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Kilesānaṃ ātāpanaparitāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ ātāpoti āha ‘‘vīriyātāpena ātāpino’’ti, vīriyavatoti attho. Pesitacittassāti yathādhippetatthasiddhiṃ pativissaṭṭhacittassa. Yathā appamattassa ātāpino pahitattassa viharatoti aññassapi kassaci mādisassāti adhippāyo. Padhānānuyogassāti sammappadhānamanuyuttassa. Sesamettha uttānattā vuttanayattā ca suviññeyyameva.
天眼智的讨论巴利
Dibbacakkhuñāṇakathā
13 “死”是指命终。“再生”是指投生。这里用的是表示“近处”义的地格,意思是说:在死的刹那附近、在再生的刹那附近。正如后文将要说的“那些临近死亡的人”等等。“以彼智”是指以天眼智。因为正是以天眼智能了知有情的死与再生。应当说明它的前行准备:“想要生起天眼智的初学善男子,应把作为神通基础的禅那——以遍相为所缘——以一切方式修到堪能引导的程度;然后在火遍、白遍、光明遍这三种遍中,取其中一种作为近处所缘,令其成为近行禅的境界,加以增长、安立”等等。这样就应该说明天眼智的前行准备。巴利
13.Cutiyāti cavane. Upapāteti upapajjane. Samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, cutikkhaṇasāmantā upapattikkhaṇasāmantā cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘ye pana āsannacutikā’’tiādi. Yena ñāṇenāti yena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Dibbacakkhuñāṇeneva hi sattānaṃ cuti ca upapatti ca ñāyati. Parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ siyāti ‘‘dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ uppādetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena kasiṇārammaṇaṃ abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ sabbākārena abhinīhārakkhamaṃ katvā tejokasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇanti imesu tīsu kasiṇesu aññataraṃ āsannaṃ kātabbaṃ, upacārajjhānagocaraṃ katvā vaḍḍhetvā ṭhapetabba’’ntiādinā dibbacakkhuñāṇassa parikammaṃ vattabbaṃ bhaveyya.
那个“我”是指已经立下心愿、发心修行的“我”。“与天相似”是说:属于天界的就是“天”,也就是诸天的净色眼;因为和那个天眼相似,所以这样说。这里说“与天相似”,是为了举出一个较低劣的比喻,实际上这个眼比诸天的天眼还要有大威力。现在为了说明它和天相似,就说了“诸天之……”等话。其中,“善行所生”是指:由于信心增上、见解清净、能见功德等成就,善行圆满,所以由能引生天界的善业所生。“黄痰、胆汁、血等”中的“等”字,包括了风病等。“无滞碍”就是没有受到扰乱。由于没有被黄痰等扰乱,而且业又殊胜,应当知道这是远离随烦恼。远离随烦恼过失的业,就像没有杂草等过失的种子一样,果报殊胜而没有杂染。并且通过因的借代说法,它的果也被这样称呼,比如“白业有白报”。“在远处也”中的“也”字,包含了能够领受微细所缘的能力。“净色眼”就是以四大种净色为特征的眼。“精进修习力所生”:因为只有以精进的策励才能成就,所以一切善的修习都是精进修习;或者说,具足勤行的神足修习,特别是精进修习,依靠它的威力所生,就是精进修习力所生。“智所成眼”就是智眼。“就像那样”:因为远离随烦恼,而且即使在远处也能领受微细的所缘,所以和那个相似。巴利
So ahanti so katacittābhinīhāro ahaṃ. Dibbasadisattāti divi bhavanti dibbaṃ, devānaṃ pasādacakkhu, tena dibbena cakkhunā sadisattāti attho. Dibbasadisattāti ca hīnūpamādassanaṃ devatānaṃ dibbacakkhutopi imassa mahānubhāvattā. Idāni taṃ dibbasadisattaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘devatānañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sucaritakammanibbattanti saddhābahulatāvisuddhadiṭṭhitāānisaṃsadassāvitādisampattiyā suṭṭhu caritattā sucaritena devūpapattijanakena puññakammena nibbattaṃ. Pittasemharuhirādīhīti ādi-saddena vātarogādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Apalibuddhanti anupaddutaṃ. Pittādīhi anupaddutattā kammassa ca uḷāratāya upakkilesavimutti veditabbā. Upakkilesadosarahitañhi kammaṃ tiṇādidosarahitaṃ viya sassaṃ uḷāraphalaṃ anupakkiliṭṭhaṃ hoti. Kāraṇūpacārena cassa phalaṃ tathā voharīyati yathā ‘‘sukkaṃ sukkavipāka’’nti. Dūrepīti pi-saddena sukhumassapi ārammaṇassa sampaṭicchanasamatthataṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pasādacakkhūti catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ pasādalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhu. Vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattanti vīriyārambhavaseneva ijjhanato sabbāpi kusalabhāvanā vīriyabhāvanā, padhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatā vā iddhipādabhāvanā visesato vīriyabhāvanā, tassā ānubhāvena nibbattaṃ vīriyabhāvanābalanibbattaṃ. Ñāṇamayaṃ cakkhu ñāṇacakkhu. Tādisamevāti upakkilesavimuttatāya dūrepi sukhumassapi ārammaṇassa sampaṭicchanasamatthatāya ca taṃsadisameva.
因为是通过天住而获得的,所以说是依靠被称为天住的四种禅那而获得。他用这个理由说明了它的天的状态。因为依止天住,意思是依靠具备八支、达到最殊胜的、被称为根本禅的天住而生起;或者依靠属于天住的、与自己相应的色界第四禅,以它为缘而依止——这里的含义应当这样理解。因为把握光明而有大光辉,所以也是天,意思是依靠遍处光明的帮助而获得,并且自身以智光遍照而有大光辉的状态,所以也是天。大光辉也被称为天,比如在“这天宫”等说法中。因为有大行,意思是具有可敬的行程,令人惊叹的生起,这就是含义。因为它能看见穿过墙壁等处的色法,它的生起确实令人惊叹。他们说“那一切”,是指“着眼于前面所说的五种含义而说”。但有些人说:“通达音声者在光辉和行程等含义中也认可divu这个音,所以‘因为有大光辉、因为有大行’正是针对这两者而说的。因此‘应当依照音声论而了知’这句话,是为了显示‘照耀,所以是天;运行而无碍地生起,所以是天’这个含义。”然而阿阇梨法护长老则说:巴利
Dibbavihāravasena paṭiladdhattāti dibbavihārasaṅkhātānaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena paṭiladdhattā. Iminā kāraṇavasenassa dibbabhāvamāha. Dibbavihārasannissitattāti aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgamena ukkaṃsagataṃ pādakajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ dibbavihāraṃ sannissāya pavattattā, dibbavihārapariyāpannaṃ vā attanā sampayuttaṃ rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ nissāya paccayabhūtaṃ sannissitattāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Ālokapariggahena mahājutikattāpi dibbanti kasiṇālokānuggahena pattabbattā sayaṃ ñāṇālokapharaṇabhāvena ca mahājutikabhāvatopi dibbanti attho. Mahājutikampi hi dibbanti vuccati ‘‘dibbamidaṃ byamha’’ntiādīsu. Mahāgatikattāti mahanīyagamanattā, vimhayanīyappavattikattāti attho. Vimhayanīyā hissa pavatti tirokuṭṭādigatarūpadassanato. Taṃ sabbanti ‘‘heṭṭhā vuttaṃ atthapañcakamapekkhitvā vutta’’nti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘jutigatiatthesupi saddavidū divusaddaṃ icchantīti mahājutikattā mahāgatikattāti idameva dvayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tasmā ‘saddasatthānusārena veditabba’nti idaṃ dibbati jotayatīti dibbaṃ, dibbati gacchati asajjamānaṃ pavattatīti dibbanti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Ācariyadhammapālatthero pana –
为了证得天眼,修行者要修遍作。从意义上说,这就是克服与它对立的东西,所以叫做“胜利欲”。而证得天眼的人具足神通,能像大目犍连长老等人那样,堪能领受诸天的言语并为他们说法,因此在布施、领受的特征以及言语运用中都能自在运作。这样,依住、胜利欲、言说、光辉、行程这些意义,成立这个神通智的天眼性。通达音声的人就在这些意义中认取divu这个音,所以说“这一切都应依照音声论来了知”。巴利
‘‘Dibbacakkhulābhāya yogino parikammakaraṇaṃ tappaṭipakkhābhibhavassa atthato tassa vijayicchā nāma hoti, dibbacakkhulābhī ca iddhimā devatānaṃ vacanagahaṇakkhamanadhammadānavasena mahāmoggallānattherādayo viya dānaggahaṇalakkhaṇe vohāre ca pavatteyyāti evaṃ vihāravijayicchāvohārajutigatisaṅkhātānaṃ atthānaṃ vasena imassa abhiññāñāṇassa dibbacakkhubhāvasiddhito saddavidū ca tesu eva atthesu divusaddaṃ icchantīti ‘taṃ sabbaṃ saddasatthānusārena veditabba’nti vutta’’nti –
“以见之义”是指以色的见为本质。因为众生是用眼睛来看色的。就像肉眼被识所依止,能呈现出分辨平整与不平整的样子,这个眼并不是那样。这个眼自身就能比那更殊胜地执行眼的作用,所以说“由执行眼的作用而如同眼,所以也是眼”。“以见清净之因故”这句话,是为了展开前面略说的含义,而说了“因为这个人”等。执取断见,是因为看不到他世的转生,就执取断见:“这个有情就在这里断灭了,其他的也是这样。”执取新有情出现的见解,是指获得禅那的人,像无因而生者那样执取。比如那个人从无想有情死后转生到这里,后来出家,获得了神通,回忆宿世时,只看到在这一世的转生,无法回忆在那之后投生到无想有的情况,就执取新有情出现的见解:“我是无因而生的,过去并不存在,现在从无变成了有情,其他有情也是这样。”同样,这个人只看到转生,看不到死没,就执取新有情出现的见解。巴利
Dassanaṭṭhenāti rūpadassanabhāvena. Cakkhunā hi sattā rūpaṃ passanti. Yathā maṃsacakkhu viññāṇādhiṭṭhitaṃ samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya pavattati, na tathā idaṃ. Idaṃ pana sayameva tato sātisayaṃ cakkhukiccakārīti āha ‘‘cakkhukiccakaraṇena cakkhumivātipi cakkhū’’ti. Diṭṭhivisuddhihetuttāti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhātīti parato uppattiyā adassanato ‘‘etthe vāyaṃ satto ucchinno, evamitarepī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhātīti jhānalābhī adhiccasamuppanniko viya gaṇhāti. Yathā hi so asaññasattā cavitvā idhūpapanno pabbajito samāno abhiññālābhī hutvā pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto idhūpapattimeva disvā tato paraṃ asaññabhave uppattiṃ anussaritumasakkonto ‘‘ahaṃ adhiccasamuppanno pubbe nāhosiṃ, somhi etarahi ahutvā sattatāya pariṇato, sesāpi sattā tādisāyevā’’ti abhinavasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, evamayampi upapātamattameva disvā cutiṃ apassanto navasattapātubhāvadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti.
现在,为了用另一种方式说明清净的因,又说“或由远离十一种随烦恼”等等。“如所说”是指出《随烦恼经》里所引的经文。在那里,世尊把阿那律、难地亚、金毗罗这三位善男子叫来,为他们开示法时说:“阿那律,你们会不会被这些扰乱?我过去也曾被这些,也就是依着它们而有的十一种随烦恼所扰乱。”巴利
Idāni aññathāpi visuddhikāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekādasaupakkilesavirahato vā’’tiādi. Yathāhāti upakkilesasutte āgatapāḷiṃ nidasseti. Tattha hi anuruddho nandiyo kimiloti ime tayo kulaputte āmantetvā dhammaṃ dassentena ‘‘anuruddhā tumhe kiṃ imehi na āluḷissanti, ahampi imehi upādāya ekādasahi upakkilesehi āluḷitapubbo’’ti dassetuṃ –
阿那律,我在正觉之前、还没有成正觉、还是菩萨的时候,也确实能感知到光明,也能看见各种色相。可是那光明和看见色相,没过多久就消失了。阿那律,我当时这样想:到底是什么因、什么缘,让我的光明消失、看见色相也消失呢?阿那律,我当时这样想:是我生起了疑,因为疑的缘故,我的定退失了;定退失的时候,光明就消失,看见色相也消失。我要这样做,让疑不再生起。巴利
‘‘Ahampi sudaṃ anuruddhā pubbeva sambodhā anabhisambuddho bodhisattova samāno obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṃ, so kho pana me obhāso na cirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpāna’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘vicikicchā kho me udapādi, vicikicchādhikaraṇañca me samādhi cavi, samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ, sohaṃ tathā karissāmi, yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissatī’ti.
阿那律,我就这样不放逸、热诚、心向解脱而安住时,既觉知到光明,也见到种种色相。可是没过多久,那光明就消失了,见色也消失了。阿那律,那时我心里这样想:到底是什么因、什么缘,让我的光明消失、见色也消失呢?阿那律,那时我心里又这样想:是我生起了不作意;因为不作意,我的定退失了;定退失时,光明就消失,见色也消失。我要那样去做,让我以后不再生起疑,也不再有不作意。巴利
‘‘So kho ahaṃ anuruddhā appamatto ātāpī pahitatto viharanto obhāsañceva sañjānāmi dassanañca rūpānaṃ, so kho pana me obhāso na cirasseva antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yena me obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpāna’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘amanasikāro kho me udapādi, amanasikārādhikaraṇañca pana me samādhi cavi, samādhimhi cute obhāso antaradhāyati dassanañca rūpānaṃ, sohaṃ tathā karissāmi, yathā me puna na vicikicchā uppajjissati na amanasikāro’’’ti –
从《中部》第三册第241段的教导开始说起,接着才讲了这段话:“阿那律,我这样知道‘疑是心的随烦恼’之后……”等等。巴利
Ādinā (ma. ni. 3.241) desanaṃ ārabhitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘so kho ahaṃ anuruddhā vicikicchā cittassa upakkilesoti iti viditvā’’tiādi.
在这里,“疑”是指大士增强光明、用天眼看见种种色法时,生起“这到底是什么”的疑惑。可是,由于作意的作用,色法显现在我面前;在看见色法时,疑就生起了。于是他想:“现在我不再作意任何东西。”便保持沉默。针对这种进入沉默的状态,经文说“不作意”。“昏沉睡眠”是指对任何东西都不作意时生起的昏沉睡眠。因为处于那种状态的人没有具有扩展力的作意,所以昏沉睡眠就会生起。“惊恐”是指去除昏沉睡眠后,按照已经开始的作意增强面向雪山的光明,看见达那婆、罗刹、大蟒蛇等时生起的恐惧。“掉举”是指为了去除恐惧而这样思惟:“我所看到的这些恐怖,平时用眼识观察是看不到的;对于未见而想象出来的类似恐怖,那算什么恐怖呢?”依靠对自己省察的善巧,生起了兴奋躁动的状态。“粗重”就是身体的懈怠。当他想:“为了平息昏沉睡眠和惊恐,我策励了过强的精进,因此生起了名为掉举的、染污心定的世间强喜。”于是放松精进时,身体的粗重、疲倦、懈怠就出现了。巴利
Tattha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.241) vicikicchāti mahāsattassa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dibbacakkhunā nānāvidhāni rūpāni passantassa ‘‘idaṃ nu kho ki’’nti uppannā vicikicchā. Manasikāravasena pana me rūpāni upaṭṭhahiṃsu, rūpāni passato vicikicchā uppajjati, tasmā idāni kiñci na manasi karissāmīti tuṇhī bhavati, taṃ tuṇhībhāvappattiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘amanasikāro’’ti. Thinamiddhanti kiñci amanasikarontassa uppannaṃ thinamiddhaṃ. Tathābhūtassa hi savipphārikamanasikārassa abhāvato thinamiddhaṃ uppajjati. Chambhitattanti thinamiddhaṃ vinodetvā yathāraddhamanasikāravasena himavantābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā dānavarakkhasaajagarādayo passantassa uppannaṃ chambhitattaṃ. Uppilanti ‘‘mayā diṭṭhabhayaṃ pakatiyā cakkhuviññāṇena olokiyamānaṃ na passati, adiṭṭhe parikappitasadise kiṃnāma bhaya’’nti bhayassa vinodanavasena cintentassa attano paccavekkhaṇākosallaṃ nissāya uppannaṃ uppilāvitattaṃ. Duṭṭhullanti kāyālasiyaṃ. ‘‘Mayā thinamiddhaṃ chambhitattānaṃ vūpasamanatthaṃ gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ paggahitaṃ, tena me uppilasaṅkhātā cittasamādhidūsitā gehassitā balavapīti uppannā’’ti vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karontassa hi kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ kāyadaratho kāyālasiyaṃ udapādi.
过度策励的精进:心想“我放松精进时,粗重生起了”,于是再次策励精进时所产生的,就是过度策励的精进。过度松懈的精进:心想“我策励精进时,竟成了这样”,于是又放松精进时所产生的,就是过度松懈的精进。贪求:增长面向天界的光明、看见天众时生起的渴爱。因为以“愿我如此”的方式执取而渴求,所以称为贪求,也就是渴爱。种种想:心想“我作意单一类别的色法时,贪求生起了,我将作意种种不同的色法”,于是时而增长面向天界的光明,时而增长面向人间的光明,在作意种种不同色法时所生起的种种想;对于种种不同自性的想,就是种种想。过度审察:心想“我作意种种不同的色法时,种种想生起了,我将只作意单一类别的色法,无论是可意的还是不可意的”,如此作意时生起的对色法的过度审察;过度地、更进一步地审察与观察,就是过度审察。光明:由预备定所生的光明。且不见色法:由于心专注于预备定的光明作意,以天眼不见色法。然而我见色法:在那被预备定光明遍满而安住的处所,我见到成为天眼所缘范围的色法。巴利
Accāraddhavīriyanti ‘‘mama vīriyaṃ sithilaṃ karoto duṭṭhullaṃ uppanna’’nti puna vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato uppannaṃ accāraddhavīriyaṃ. Atilīnavīriyanti ‘‘mama vīriyaṃ paggaṇhato evaṃ jāta’’nti puna vīriyaṃ sithilayato uppannaṃ atilīnavīriyaṃ. Abhijappāti devalokābhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā devasaṅghaṃ passato uppannā taṇhā. ‘‘Evaṃ me hotū’’ti hi abhinivisanavasena jappatīti abhijappā, taṇhā. Nānattasaññāti ‘‘mayhaṃ ekajātikaṃ rūpaṃ manasikarontassa abhijappā uppannā, nānāvidhaṃ rūpaṃ manasikāraṃ karissāmī’’ti kālena devalokābhimukhaṃ kālena manussalokābhimukhaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikaroto uppannā nānattasaññā, nānatte nānāsabhāve saññāti nānattasaññā. Atinijjhāyitattanti ‘‘mayhaṃ nānāvidhāni rūpāni manasikarontassa nānattasaññā udapādi, iṭṭhaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ vā ekajātikameva rūpaṃ manasi karissāmī’’ti tathā manasikaroto uppannaṃ rūpānaṃ atinijjhāyitattaṃ, ativiya uttari katvā nijjhānaṃ pekkhanaṃ atinijjhāyitattaṃ. Obhāsanti parikammasamuṭṭhitaṃ obhāsaṃ. Na ca rūpāni passāmīti parikammobhāsamanasikārappasutatāya dibbacakkhunā rūpāni na passāmi. Rūpāni hi kho passāmīti tena parikammobhāsena pharitvā ṭhitaṭṭhāne dibbacakkhuno visayabhūtāni rūpagatāni passāmi.
“如是等”中的“等”字——巴利
Evamādīti ādi-saddena –
阿那律,我那时整个夜晚、整个白天、整个昼夜都这样想:到底是什么因、什么缘,让我有时候能觉知到光明却看不见色法,有时候能看见色法却觉知不到光明,这样持续整个夜晚、整个白天、整个昼夜呢?阿那律,我那时又这样想:当我不作意色相而作意光明相的时候,就能觉知到光明却看不见色法。当我不作意光明相而作意色相的时候,就能看见色法却觉知不到光明,这样持续整个夜晚、整个白天、整个昼夜。巴利
‘‘Kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindivaṃ tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘ko nu kho hetu, ko paccayo, yvāhaṃ obhāsañhi kho sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi, rūpāni kho passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmi kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindiva’nti. Tassa mayhaṃ anuruddhā etadahosi ‘yasmiñhi kho ahaṃ samaye rūpanimittaṃ amanasikaritvā obhāsanimittaṃ manasi karomi. Obhāsañhi kho tasmiṃ samaye sañjānāmi, na ca rūpāni passāmi. Yasmiṃ panāhaṃ samaye obhāsanimittaṃ amanasikaritvā rūpanimittaṃ manasi karomi. Rūpāni hi kho tasmiṃ samaye passāmi, na ca obhāsaṃ sañjānāmi kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divaṃ kevalampi rattindiva’’nti (ma. ni. 3.243) –
像这样把经文总括起来。巴利
Evamādipāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“属于人类的”就是指人间的,也就是人类所看的色所缘。但因为能看见与此不同的天界色、隔墙色、微细色等等各类色法,所以是“超越人间的”。这样的色法也叫做超越了人类的活动范围,因此说“以超越人类活动范围而见色法”。其中,“人类活动范围”是指人类所施设的地方,也就是通常以眼门能取到的所缘,这就是要表达的意思。这样从所缘的角度说明之后,现在为了从能缘的角度来说明,就说“人间的或”等等。在这里,“超越肉眼”也应该理解为超越了肉眼的职能。即使用天眼智,由于某些色法刹那极其迅速、极其微细,也无法看见;而且天眼智的所缘是当下的色法,那色法又是前生缘,而大心(天眼智)如果没有转向和预备定就不能生起;正在生起的色法不能成为所缘缘,正在坏灭的也不能。所以在死生刹那的色法,用天眼是看不见的,这个说法非常恰当。巴利
Manussānaṃ idanti mānusakaṃ, manussānaṃ gocarabhūtaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ. Tadaññassa pana dibbatirokuṭṭasukhumādibhedassa rūpassa dassanato atikkantamānusakaṃ. Evarūpaṃ tañca manussūpacāraṃ atikkantaṃ nāma hotīti āha ‘‘manussūpacāraṃ atikkamitvā rūpadassanenā’’ti. Tattha manussūpacāranti manussehi upacaritabbaṭṭhānaṃ, pakatiyā cakkhudvārena gahetabbaṃ visayanti adhippāyo. Evaṃ visayamukhena dassetvā idāni visayimukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘mānusakaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi maṃsacakkhātikkamo tassa kiccātikkameneva daṭṭhabbo. Dibbena cakkhunāti dibbacakkhuñāṇenapi daṭṭhuṃ na sakkā khaṇassa atiittaratāya atisukhumatāya kesañci rūpassa, apica dibbacakkhussa paccuppannaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ, tañca purejātapaccayabhūtaṃ, na ca āvajjanaparikammehi vinā mahaggatassa pavatti atthi, nāpi uppajjamānameva rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo bhavituṃ sakkoti, bhijjamānaṃ vā, tasmā cutūpapātakkhaṇe rūpaṃ dibbacakkhunā daṭṭhuṃ na sakkāti suvuttametaṃ.
如果天眼智只以色为所缘,那为什么说“我见众生”呢?因为大多数情况是见到了众生相续中所包含的色,所以才这样说。或者说,因为色是执取众生的原因,所以依世俗表达而这样说,也有论师这么主张。“那些正在死没的”是所意指的,应当这样连接。“像这样的”意思是不处于死生刹那的。所谓以痴为依止的业是低劣的,果报也低劣,所以说“与痴的等流相应”。而以痴为依止性,应当知道是因为善业的前分阶段痴的现行很多。然而,由于那种痴的现行,被染污的善业只产生低劣的出生等,所以低劣的出生等是痴的等流果,因此说“低劣的出生、家族、财富等”。Hīḷite指被轻蔑的。Ohīḷite指特别被轻蔑的。Uññāte指以低劣性被知晓的。Avaññāte指以特别低劣性被识别的。“与无痴的等流相应”中,这里所说的无痴是依相应和依前分而现行的,以此指示三因结生者。“与此相反的”指与那种被轻蔑等状态相反的,即不被轻蔑、不被特别轻蔑、不被低知、不被特别低知、被尊重的意思。巴利
Yadi dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ rūpārammaṇameva, atha kasmā ‘‘satte passāmī’’ti vuttanti? Yebhuyyena sattasantānagatarūpadassanato evaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattagahaṇassa vā kāraṇabhāvato vohāravasena vuttantipi vadanti. Te cavamānāti adhippetāti sambandho. Evarūpeti na cutūpapātakkhaṇasamaṅginoti adhippāyo. Mohūpanissayaṃ nāma kammaṃ nihīnaṃ nihīnaphalaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘mohanissandayuttattā’’ti. Mohūpanissayatā ca kusalakammassa pubbabhāge mohappavattibahulatāya veditabbā. Tāya pana mohappavattiyā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ kusalakammaṃ nihīnameva jātiādiṃ nipphādetīti nihīnajātiādayo mohassa nissandaphalānīti āha ‘‘hīnānaṃ jātikulabhogādīna’’ntiādi. Hīḷiteti garahite. Ohīḷiteti visesato garahite. Uññāteti lāmakabhāvena ñāte. Avaññāteti visesato lāmakabhāvena vidite. Amohanissandayuttattāti ettha amoho sampayuttavasena pubbabhāgavasena ca pavatto kathito, tena ca tihetukapaṭisandhike dasseti. Tabbiparīteti tassa hīḷitādibhāvassa viparīte, ahīḷite anohīḷite anuññāte anavaññāte cittīkateti attho.
Suvaṇṇa 是指颜色好看的。Dubbaṇṇa 是指颜色难看的。而这种颜色的好看与难看,依次是因为业以无嗔为依托、以嗔为依托而产生的,所以论中说“因为与无嗔的等流相应”等等。业以无嗔为依托,应当理解为:业是在被慈心等长期修习所熏染的心相续中生起的。Abhirūpe(好看)和 Virūpe(难看)这里是就体形来说的。因为“色”这个词也可以用来指体形,比如“化作一头大象的色”等说法。但最初说的那个意思,是单就颜色来说的。投生到善趣的,就是善趣者,所以说“在善趣的趣处”,意思是已经投生到善趣。以无贪为志向的有情,慷慨好施、没有悭吝,由于以无贪为依托的业而投生善趣、获得成功,所以说“或者因为与无贪的等流相应,成为富有的、拥有大财富的”。投生到苦趣的,就是恶趣者,所以说“在恶趣的趣处”。以贪为志向的有情,贪婪吝啬,由于以贪为依托的业而投生恶趣、变得丑陋,所以说“或者因为与贪的等流相应,成为贫穷的、缺少饮食的”。Upacita 是指以能带来果报的方式所造的。正如所造的业有能力给出果报,这样造作的就叫已积集。用“正在死没的”等说法来说明天眼的作用,这是通过所缘的对象来说明能缘的作用。“前面的”是指“以天眼”等那些词句而说的。“等”字在这里表示省略,因此意思是:通过“以天眼……我见”这些词句以及“正在死没的”等词句,说明了天眼的作用。而“通过这个词句”是指通过“我了知有情随业而行”这句话。因为“词句”这个词,就是通过它来知道、来了知意义的。巴利
Suvaṇṇeti sundaravaṇṇe. Dubbaṇṇeti asundaravaṇṇe. Sā panāyaṃ suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇatā yathākkamaṃ kammassa adosadosūpanissayatāya hotīti āha ‘‘adosanissandayuttattā’’tiādi. Adosūpanissayatā ca kammassa mettādīhi paribhāvitasantānappavattiyā veditabbā. Abhirūpe virūpeti idaṃ saṇṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. Saṇṭhānavacanopi hi vaṇṇasaddo hoti ‘‘mahantaṃ hatthivaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.138) viya. Paṭhamaṃ vutto pana attho vaṇṇavaseneva vutto. Sundaraṃ gatiṃ gatā sugatāti āha ‘‘sugatigate’’ti, sugatiṃ upapanneti attho. Alobhajjhāsayā sattā vadaññū vigatamaccherā alobhūpanissayena kammunā sugatā samiddhā hontīti āha ‘‘alobhanissandayuttattā vā aḍḍhe mahaddhane’’ti. Dukkhaṃ gatiṃ gatā duggatāti āha ‘‘duggatigate’’ti. Lobhajjhāsayā sattā luddhā maccharino lobhūpanissayena kammunā duggatā durūpā hontīti āha ‘‘lobhanissandayuttattā vā dalidde appannapāne’’ti. Upacitanti phalāvahabhāvena kataṃ. Yathā katañhi kammaṃ phaladānasamatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ upacitaṃ. Cavamānetiādīhi dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttanti visayamukhena visayibyāpāramāha. Purimehīti ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādīni padāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ādīhīti ettha ca-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, tasmā ‘‘dibbena…pe… passāmī’’ti imehi ‘‘cavamāne’’tiādīhi ca dibbacakkhukiccaṃ vuttanti attho. Imināpana padenāti ‘‘yathākammūpage satte pajānāmī’’ti iminā vākyena. Pajjati ñāyati attho imināti hi padaṃ vākyaṃ.
在“领受大苦”这一句里,应当这样理解:这是以天眼智看见色之后,只靠欲界心来了知那些有情正在领受苦。所谓“他”,是指亲见地狱有情之后,安住于已获得天眼智的人。“如此作意”,是说因为想要了知那些地狱有情能招感地狱的业,所以进入作为基础的禅那,从禅那出来之后,再以遍作的方式作意。“是什么业呢”等语,是显示作意的方法。然而,这样遍作之后,进入基础禅那再出来的人,以那个业为所缘,生起转向心;那个转向心灭去之后,有四或五个速行心生起。其中,前面三个或四个——称为遍作、近行、随顺、种姓的心——是欲界心;第四个或第五个则是安止心,属于色界第四禅心。与那个安止心一同生起的智,应当理解为随业往生智。“没有单独的遍作”,这句话的意思是说:没有天眼智,随业往生智就没有单独的遍作。而且应当这样接受,否则随业往生智就不可能是大上心。观看天人的情况也是同样的道理。这里举出地狱有情和天人,应当看作只是举例说明。因为获得天眼的人,只要愿意,对其他各种趣的有情也能这样修。正如后面将会说到的:“以取恶趣来显示畜生趣”等等,以及“以取善趣,人趣也被包含在内”。以那个能招感地狱的业为所缘,就是“以那个业为所缘”。“在粗涩林等处”,其中的“等”字包含了心蔓林等地狱。巴利
Mahantaṃ dukkhamanubhavamāneti ettha dibbacakkhuñāṇena rūpaṃ disvā tesaṃ dukkhānubhavanaṃ kāmāvacaracitteneva jānātīti veditabbaṃ. Soti nerayikasatte paccakkhato disvā ṭhito dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī. Evaṃ manasi karotīti tesaṃ nerayikānaṃ nirayasaṃvattanikassa kammassa ñātukāmatāvasena pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya parikammavasena manasi karoti. Kiṃ nu khotiādi manasikāravidhidassanaṃ. Evaṃ pana parikammaṃ katvā pādakajjhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhitassa taṃ kammaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā āvajjanaṃ uppajjati, tasmiṃ niruddhe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Yesaṃ purimāni tīṇi cattāri vā parikammaupacārānulomagotrabhunāmakāni kāmāvacarāni, catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ catutthajjhānikaṃ, tattha yaṃ tena appanācittena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ ñāṇaṃ, taṃ yathākammūpagañāṇanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Visuṃ parikammaṃ natthī’’ti idaṃ pana dibbacakkhuñāṇena vinā yathākammūpagañāṇassa visuṃ parikammaṃ natthīti adhippāyena vuttaṃ. Evañcetaṃ icchitabbaṃ, aññathā yathākammūpagañāṇassa mahaggatabhāvo eva na siyā. Devānaṃ dassanepi eseva nayo. Nerayikadevaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno hi dibbacakkhulābhī aññagatikesupi evaṃ paṭipajjatiyeva. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘apāyaggahaṇena tiracchānayoniṃ dīpetī’’tiādi, ‘‘sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhatī’’ti ca. Taṃ nirayasaṃvattaniyakammaṃ ārammaṇametassāti taṃkammārammaṇaṃ. Phārusakavanādīsūti ādi-saddena cittalatāvanādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
“如同此智”这句话是说:就像随业往生智没有单独的遍作一样,未来分智也没有单独的遍作。这样就是在说明未来分智同样没有独立的遍作。在这里,指出了其中的原因:“因为这些智确实都是以天眼智为基础的。”这里的意趣是这样的:就像获得天眼的人,把光明扩展到朝向地狱等方向,看见地狱等处的有情之后,以那样的等持和相应的作意,在已经完成遍作的心当中,如实了知他们过去所累积的、能招感地狱等果报的业;同样地,对于任何一位有情,如果想要了知那位有情紧接着要生起的未来自体,就针对那位有情扩展光明,用随业往生智看见他过去或现在所累积的、能产生那个自体的业之后,如果想要了知将由那个业产生的未来自体,就以那样的等持和相应的作意,在已经完成遍作的心当中如实了知。对于那之后的自体,道理也是一样的。这个智就叫作未来分智。因为这两种智,只有在天眼智存在时才能成就,没有天眼智就不能成就。所以说:“这些智是与天眼智一同成就的。”巴利
Yathācimassāti yathā ca imassa yathākammūpagañāṇassa visuṃ parikammaṃ natthi, evaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇassapīti visuṃ parikammābhāvañca nidasseti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘dibbacakkhupādakāneva hi imānī’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yathā dibbacakkhulābhī nirayādiabhimukhaṃ ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā nerayikādike satte disvā tehi pubbe āyūhitaṃ nirayasaṃvattaniyādikaṃ kammaṃ tādisena samādānena tajjena ca manasikārena parikkhate citte yāthāvato jānāti, evaṃ yassa yassa sattassa samanantaraṃ anāgataṃ attabhāvaṃ ñātukāmo, taṃ taṃ odissa ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tena tena atīte etarahi vā āyūhitaṃ tassa nibbattakaṃ kammaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇena disvā tena tena nibbattetabbaṃ anāgataṃ attabhāvaṃ ñātukāmo tādisena samādānena tajjena ca manasikārena parikkhate citte yāthāvato jānāti. Esa nayo tato paresupi attabhāvesu. Etaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇaṃ nāma. Yasmā etaṃ dvayaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇe sati eva sijjhati, nāsati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘imāni dibbacakkhunā saheva ijjhantī’’ti.
以身作恶行,或者从身体生起的恶行,就是“以身恶行”。具体来说:以身所作的恶行,或者从身体生起、因为烦恼染污而成为恶行的,就叫身恶行——应当按这个次第来理解。这里说的“身”,指的是能造作的身。依身表而生起的不善身业,就是身恶行。在某个相续中,业被造作并累积起来,只要饮食还没有断绝,它那种能感果的性质就不会消失,所以可以说他与那业相连,因此说“具备者就是具有者”。说“怀着不利对方之心”,这是为了显示:就像父母对子女、戒师和依止师对弟子那样,如果是真正想利益对方的人,就不会成为呵责者、诽谤者。“以毁坏功德”的意思是,以破坏、毁灭现存的功德。难道以究竟事来诽谤不也是毁坏功德吗?确实如此,但这里说的“功德”,指的是禅那等殊胜的上人法,所以把毁坏戒行单独列出来。因此说“这些人没有沙门法”等等。所谓“沙门法”,是就戒律和自制而言。“知而”是指,知道所诽谤对象的圣者状态而诽谤;“不知而”是指不知道而诽谤。在这里,知与不知并不是衡量标准,圣者状态本身才是标准。因此说“无论哪种情况,都是诽谤圣者”。有人说:“如果不知道对方是圣者,而且没有嗔心,只是在说明其圣者功德的状态,那就不是毁坏功德,因此对他而言不存在诽谤圣者。”这是重业,因为它类似于无间业,所以是重业,但还是可以补救的,通过忏悔可以治愈,不像无间业那样不可补救。巴利
Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ duccaritanti kāyena duṭṭhu caritaṃ, kāyato vā uppannaṃ kilesapūtikattā duṭṭhu caritaṃ kāyaduccaritanti evaṃ yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kāyoti cettha copanakāyo adhippeto. Kāyaviññattivasena pavattaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ. Yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ katupacitaṃ, asati āhārupacchede vipākārahasabhāvassa avigacchanato so tena sahitoyevāti vattabboti āha ‘‘samannāgatāti samaṅgībhūtā’’ti. Anatthakāmā hutvāti etena mātāpitaro viya puttānaṃ, ācariyupajjhāyā viya ca nissitakānaṃ atthakāmā hutvā garahakā upavādakā na hontīti dasseti. Guṇaparidhaṃsanenāti vijjamānānaṃ guṇānaṃ viddhaṃsanena, vināsanenāti attho. Nanu ca antimavatthunāpi upavādo guṇaparidhaṃsanamevāti? Saccametaṃ, guṇāti panettha jhānādivisesā uttarimanussadhammā adhippetāti sīlaparidhaṃsanaṃ visuṃ gahitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘natthi imesaṃ samaṇadhammo’’tiādi. Samaṇadhammoti ca sīlasaṃyamaṃ sandhāya vadati. Jānaṃ vāti yaṃ upavadati, tassa ariyabhāvaṃ jānanto vā. Ajānaṃ vāti ajānanto vā. Jānanājānanañcettha appamāṇaṃ, ariyabhāvo eva pamāṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ubhayathāpi ariyūpavādova hotī’’ti. ‘‘Ariyoti pana ajānato aduṭṭhacittasseva tattha ariyaguṇabhāvaṃ pavedentassa guṇaparidhaṃsanaṃ na hotīti tassa ariyūpavādo natthī’’ti vadanti. Bhāriyaṃ kammanti ānantariyasadisattā bhāriyaṃ kammaṃ, satekicchaṃ pana hoti khamāpanena, na ānantariyaṃ viya atekicchaṃ.
“为了显示它”,就是为了阐明重业等的性质。“厌弃那”,是指厌弃那位长老,或者厌弃那种行为。“极度饥饿”,是指被饥饿极度压倒。“年长者”,因为这是带着“不知道沙门该做和不该做的,或者只是不懂世间惯例”这样的用意说的,所以应当知道,这是通过贬损功德来呵责。“他让我们丢脸”,意思是,当有人说“沙门竟然做出这种事”时,我们抬不起头来。长老明明知道,却还是问:“贤友,你在这教法中有立足处吗?”对方也以通达真理为教法中的立足处,答道:“我是入流者。”长老出于悲悯,向他表明自己:“你诽谤的是漏已尽的人。”因此,那业对他而言就变成了普通业,意思是那业没有成为道的障碍。不过,因为他先前已经是入流者,已经很好地断除了堕入恶趣的因,所以那业根本不能成为他生天的障碍。“若对方比自己年长”,这里《清净道论》说:“应蹲坐而求忏悔。”入流者和斯陀含不会因为嗔怒而不原谅;其余圣者或者出于想利益他,为了让他将来能防护自己,可能不会原谅,所以说“如果他不原谅”。“若对方比自己年长,则站着”,这里《清净道论》也说“蹲坐”。那里是这样说的:巴利
Tassaca āvibhāvatthanti bhāriyādisabhāvassa pakāsanatthaṃ. Taṃ jigucchīti taṃ theraṃ, taṃ vā kiriyaṃ jigucchi. Aticchātoti ativiya khudābhibhūto. Mahallakoti samaṇānaṃ sāruppamasāruppaṃ, lokasamudācāramattaṃ vā na jānātīti adhippāyena vuttattā guṇaparidhaṃsanena garahatīti veditabbaṃ. Amhākaṃ lajjitabbakaṃ akāsīti ‘‘samaṇena nāma evaṃ kata’’nti vutte mayaṃ sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkomāti adhippāyo. Jānanto eva thero ‘‘atthi te āvuso imasmiṃ sāsane patiṭṭhā’’ti pucchi. Itaropi saccābhisamayo sāsane patiṭṭhāti āha ‘‘sotāpanno aha’’nti. Thero taṃ karuṇāyamāno ‘‘khīṇāsavo tayā upavadito’’ti attānaṃ āvi akāsi. Tenassa taṃ pākatikaṃ ahosīti tena assa taṃ kammaṃ maggāvaraṇaṃ nāhosīti adhippāyo. Pubbeva pana sotāpannattā apāyagāmīnaṃ suppahīnabhāvato saggāvaraṇamassa kātumasamatthameva taṃ kammaṃ. Attanā vuḍḍhataro hotīti ettha ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā khamāpetabbo’’ti visuddhimagge vuttaṃ. Sotāpannasakadāgāmino dosenapi nakkhamanti, sesaariyā vā tassa atthakāmā hutvā āyatiṃ saṃvaraṇatthāya na khamāpeyyunti āha ‘‘sace so nakkhamatī’’ti. Attanā vuḍḍhataro hoti, ṭhitakenevāti etthāpi ‘‘ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā’’ti visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttaṃ. Evañhi tattha vuttaṃ –
如果他已经离开这个地方,就应该自己去,或者派同住弟子去,请求对方原谅。如果既不能亲自去,也不能派人去,就去住在那个精舍里的比丘们那里。如果他们比他年轻,就蹲坐着;如果他们比他年长,就按照对年长者所说的方式来做,然后说:尊者,我对某位具寿说了这样那样的话,请那位具寿原谅我。这样请求原谅。即使当面没有得到原谅,也应该这样做。巴利
‘‘Sace disāpakkanto hoti, sayaṃ vā gantvā saddhivihārike vā pesetvā khamāpetabbo. Sace nāpi gantuṃ, na pesetuṃ sakkā hoti, ye tasmiṃ vihāre bhikkhū vasanti, tesaṃ santikaṃ gantvā sace navakatarā honti, ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā, sace vuḍḍhatarā, vuḍḍhesu vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitvā ‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, khamatu me so āyasmā’ti vatvā khamāpetabbaṃ. Sammukhā akhamantepi etadeva kātabba’’nti.
不过,关于这一点,在《清净道论》(2.411)里还有另外一段话是这么说的——巴利
Idaṃ pana parampi tattha (visuddhi. 2.411) vuttaṃ –
如果一位独行的比丘,没有固定的住处,也没人知道他去哪里,他就应该去一位有智慧的比丘那里,说:尊者,我对某位尊者说了这样的话和那样的话,我一遍又一遍地回想,心里越来越懊悔,我该怎么办?那位比丘会说:你不用放在心上,那位长老已经原谅你了,把心平静下来吧。然后他也应该朝着那位圣者所去的方向,合掌恭敬地说:请您原谅我。巴利
‘‘Sace ekacārikabhikkhu hoti, nevassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ, na gataṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati, ekassa paṇḍitassa bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantvā ‘ahaṃ, bhante, asukaṃ nāma āyasmantaṃ idañcidañca avacaṃ, taṃ me anussarato anussarato vippaṭisāro hoti, kiṃ karomī’ti vattabbaṃ. So vakkhati ‘tumhe mā cintayittha, thero tumhākaṃ khamati, cittaṃ vūpasamethā’ti. Tenapi ariyassa gatadisābhimukhena añjaliṃ paggahetvā ‘khamatū’ti vattabba’’nti.
“般涅槃处”是指供养的地方。所谓“就成为平常业”,意思是这样做之后,自己的心得到清净信解,因此那个业既不障碍生天,也不障碍证道——有些人这样解释。在《行藏注》的摩登伽行注释中:巴利
Parinibbutamañcaṭṭhānanti pūjākaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Pākatikameva hotīti evaṃ kate attano cittaṃ pasīdatīti taṃ kammaṃ saggāvaraṇaṃ maggāvaraṇañca na hotīti adhippāyoti keci vadanti. Cariyāpiṭake mātaṅgacaritasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (cariyā. aṭṭha. 2.64) –
对于一位波罗蜜修习圆满、具足种种等至住、戒与见成就、相续善加调伏、安住于大悲的大士来说,由于大士本身是殊胜的福田,而那人内心又粗暴,所以伴随这种人的、被称为诽谤圣者之业与诅咒的粗恶语,就成了现法受业。如果那人不向大士请求忏悔,到第七天就一定会成熟感果。但如果他向大士求得了忏悔,因为善行圆满阻碍了果报成熟,这业就变成不感果之法,成为无效之业。这就是诽谤圣者之恶业以及现法受业的性质。巴利
‘‘Pāramitāparibhāvanasamiddhāhi nānāsamāpattivihāraparipūritāhi sīladiṭṭhisampadāhi susaṅkhatasantāne mahākaruṇādhivāse mahāsatte ariyūpavādakammaabhisapasaṅkhātaṃ pharusavacanaṃ saṃyuttaṃ mahāsattassa khettavisesabhāvato tassa ca ajjhāsayapharusatāya diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ hutvā sace so mahāsattaṃ na khamāpeti, sattame divase vipaccanasabhāvaṃ jātaṃ. Khamāpite pana mahāsatte payogasampattiyā vipākassa paṭibāhitattā avipākadhammataṃ āpajji ahosikammabhāvato. Ayañhi ariyūpavādapāpassa diṭṭhadhammavedanīyassa ca dhammatā’’ti –
因为这是阿阇梨法护长老所说的,所以当他这样请求宽恕之后,那个业由于善行圆满而挡住了果报,成了无效业,也就是成了不感果的法,因此既不会障碍生天,也不会障碍解脱。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttattā evaṃ khamāpite taṃ kammaṃ payogasampattiyā vipākassa paṭibāhitattā ahosikammabhāvena avipākadhammataṃ āpannanti neva saggāvaraṇaṃ na mokkhāvaraṇañca hotīti evamettha attho gahetabbo.
把见解颠倒的人,就是有颠倒见的人。从“执取”的意义上说,就是执取;以邪见为根本去执取各种业,就是邪见业执取者;或者把“因”这层意思也包括进去,以邪见为根本,劝别人去执取各种业的人,就是邪见业执取者。为了说明这个意思,经文才说“以邪见为根本”等等。那些……劝别人执取的人,也应该归入邪见业执取者。“具足戒”等话,是针对根器已经成熟、已经具备圣道的人说的;至于安住于最高圣道的人,那就没什么可说的了。或者也可以这样理解:戒等本身就是最高圣道所包含的。因为安住于最高圣道的人,在现世就能确定证得阿拉汉果,而其他人则不一定。“阿拉汉”就是指阿拉汉果。“如此具足成就”当中,“具足成就”就是圆满、完成,意思是说,这样必定不会落空、必定会实现。也就是说,就像圣道之后无间、不落空地生起果报一样,这里也显示:这个人死后无间、不落空地就投生到地狱。在整个佛陀的教法里,没有比这个比喻说得更严厉的比喻了。“不舍弃那种话”等当中,针对诽谤圣者这件事,说“我以后再也不说这样的话”,就叫舍弃语言;心里想“我以后再也不生这样的心”,就叫舍弃心;舍弃“我以后再也不执持这样的见解”,就叫舍弃见解。如果不这样做,那就既没有舍弃,也没有放下。就像被带下去扔进地狱一样,就是说,像被地狱的狱卒带下去安置在地狱里一样,他就这样被安置在地狱里,他的地狱投生没有任何障碍。这里的道理是:将要堕入地狱的诽谤圣者,因为不肯舍弃自己的执取,所以就像邪见者一样。在这里,通过“不舍弃那种话”等话,说明诽谤圣者正是因为不肯舍弃自己的执取,才成为障碍、带来不利;如果舍弃了,发露罪过,请求原谅,那就不会成为障碍,也不会带来不利,就像已经出罪、已经发露的犯戒一样。以邪见为根本,就没有什么恶是不能做的,因此甚至会成为轮回的桩子,所以说“诸比丘,邪见是一切过失中最严重的”。巴利
Viparītaṃ dassanametesanti viparītadassanā. Samādātabbaṭṭhena samādānāni, kammāni samādānāni yesaṃ te kammasamādānā, micchādiṭṭhivasena kammasamādānā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā, hetuatthaṃ vā antogadhaṃ katvā micchādiṭṭhivasena pare kammesu samādāpakā micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānā. Tayimaṃ atthaṃ dassento ‘‘micchādiṭṭhivasenā’’tiādimāha. Ye ca…pe… samādapenti, tepi micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlasampannotiādi paripakkindriyassa maggasamaṅgino vasena vuttaṃ, aggamaggaṭṭhe pana vattabbameva natthi. Atha vā aggamaggapariyāpannā eva sīlādayo veditabbā. Aggamaggaṭṭhassa hi diṭṭheva dhamme ekaṃsikā aññārādhanā, itaresaṃ anekaṃsikā. Aññanti arahattaṃ. Evaṃsampadamidanti ettha sampajjanaṃ sampadā, nipphatti, evaṃ avirajjhanakanipphattikanti attho, yathā taṃ avassambhāvī, evamidampīti vuttaṃ hoti . Yathā hi maggānantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva phalaṃ nibbattaṃ, evametaṃ imassapi puggalassa cutianantaraṃ avirajjhitvāva niraye paṭisandhi hotīti dasseti. Sakalasmiñhi buddhavacane na imāya upamāya gāḷhataraṃ katvā vuttaupamā atthi. Taṃ vācaṃ appahāyātiādīsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.149) ariyūpavādaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puna evarūpiṃ vācaṃ na vakkhāmī’’ti vadanto vācaṃ pajahati nāma, ‘‘puna evarūpaṃ cittaṃ na uppādessāmī’’ti cintento cittaṃ pajahati nāma, ‘‘puna evarūpiṃ diṭṭhiṃ na gaṇhissāmī’’ti pajahanto diṭṭhiṃ pajahati nāma. Tathā akaronto neva pajahati na paṭinissajjati. Yathābhataṃ nikkhitto evaṃ nirayeti yathā nirayapālehi āharitvā niraye ṭhapito, evaṃ niraye ṭhapitoyeva, nāssa nirayūpapattiyā koci vibandho. Tatrāyaṃ yutti – nirayūpago ariyūpavādī tadādāyakassa avijahanato seyyathāpi micchādiṭṭhīti. Ettha ca ‘‘taṃ vācaṃ appahāyā’’ti evamādivacanena tadādāyakassa appahāneneva ariyūpavādo antarāyiko anatthāvahova, pahānena pana accayaṃ desetvā khamāpanena na antarāyiko anatthāvaho yathā taṃ vuṭṭhitā desitā ca āpattīti dasseti. Micchādiṭṭhivasena akattabbaṃ nāma pāpaṃ natthi, yato saṃsārakhāṇubhāvopi nāma hotīti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāni, bhikkhave, vajjānī’’ti.
比丘们,如来的身体持续存在,因为他已彻底断除了引向再生的纽带;这个身体以及外在的名色。就像在这类说法中一样,这里的“身”是指五蕴的范围。所以论师说“身坏,就是舍弃执取的诸蕴”。
对于还没有离贪的人,死后就是执取另一生的蕴。所以论师说“死后,就是紧接着执取新生的诸蕴”。
身体依靠那个而存在,那个被彻底切断时,身体就坏灭。所以论师说“身坏,就是命根的断绝”。
从这里带来快乐的是铁,福德的,所以论师说“被称为福的铁”。从这里带来快乐的是铁,也就是福业等能产生快乐的东西。因此论师说“或者因为乐的铁不存在”。
没有自主力,因为随业力而转,不能随自己的意愿而转,所以自在离开他们,他们就是无自在者,意思是不能自主。
铁被享受,所以是铁,也就是乐味。所以论师说“被称为乐味的铁”。巴利
‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa kāyo tiṭṭhati (dī. ni. 1. 147), ayañceva kāyo bahiddhā ca nāmarūpa’’nti ca evamādīsu viya idha kāya-saddo khandhapañcakavisayoti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti upādinnakkhandhapariccāgā’’ti. Avītarāgassa maraṇato paraṃ nāma bhavantarūpādānamevāti āha ‘‘paraṃ maraṇāti tadanantaraṃ abhinibbattakkhandhaggahaṇe’’ti. Yena tiṭṭhati, tassa upacchedeneva kāyo bhijjatīti āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedāti jīvitindriyassa upacchedā’’ti. Eti imasmā sukhanti ayo, puññanti āha ‘‘puññasammatā ayā’’ti. Āyanti etasmā sukhānīti āyo, puññakammādīnaṃ sukhasādhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukhānaṃ vā āyassa abhāvā’’ti. Vivasāti kammassa vase vattanato attano vase vattituṃ na sakkontīti vigato vaso etesanti vivasā, avasavattinoti attho. Iyati assādīyatīti ayo, assādoti āha ‘‘assādasaññito ayo’’ti.
“龙王等”里的“等”字,把金翅鸟等也包括进去了。似阿修罗,就是像饿鬼阿修罗。那也就是阿修罗身。“从一切积聚”,就是从一切成就的积聚,也就是一切成就之聚的意思。“以相反之义”,就是针对“善行,或者说美行,因为无过失所以叫善行”这类说法,按身恶行等这些词所说的意义的反面来讲。因为“从此,贤者,往善趣”这句话,人趣也是善趣,所以说“以善趣一词,人趣也被包含在内”。其余部分,因为说理方式和前面一样,而且意义浅显,所以很容易理解。巴利
Nāgarājādīnanti ādi-saddena supaṇṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Asurasadisanti petāsurasadisaṃ. So hīti so asurakāyo. Sabbasamussayehīti sabbehi sampattisamussayehi, sabbasampattirāsitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttavipariyāyenāti ‘‘suṭṭhu caritaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā caritaṃ anavajjattāti sucarita’’ntiādinā kāyaduccaritenātiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vuttassa atthassa vipariyāyena. ‘‘Ito bho sugatiṃ gacchā’’ti (itivu. 83) vacanato manussagatipi sugatiyevāti āha ‘‘sugatiggahaṇena manussagatipi saṅgayhatī’’ti. Sesamettha vuttanayattā uttānatthato ca suviññeyyameva.
漏尽智的讨论巴利
Āsavakkhayañāṇakathā
14 观的基础,就是作为观立足处的东西。观有三种,这是根据观行者个人的差别来分的。大菩萨和独觉菩萨因为由思所成智增长而来,所以他们的观是自然生起的智慧;其他人则因为由闻所成智增长而来,所以他们的观是依靠他人的教导而产生的。这种观,在《清净道论》里讲四界差别时,以“除了非想非非想处,从其余色界禅和无色界禅中的任意一种出定”等等方式,从无色界的门路入手,按照各自界摄受的门路中的某一种,以多种方式做了详细阐明。然而大菩萨的观智,以二千四百万种门路展开分类,依多种理路,含摄着一切知智所依的圣道智之基础的前分智之胎藏,逐渐趋于成熟,极为甚深、微细、极其微妙,不与他人共通。这在注释书里被称为大金刚智。而它的生起分类,以二千四百万种分类作为基础而进入定时,被称为世尊每日所受用的定,数目是二千四百万。这种诸佛的观行,在《最上义美妙》即《清净道论注》中已概要地显示出来,想要了解的人应当从那里去学习。巴利
14.Vipassanāpādakanti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vipassanā ca tividhā vipassakapuggalabhedena. Mahābodhisattānañhi paccekabodhisattānañca cintāmayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā sayambhūñāṇabhūtā, itaresaṃ sutamayañāṇasaṃvaddhitattā paropadesasambhūtā. Sā ‘‘ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesarūpārūpajjhānānaṃ aññatarato vuṭṭhāyā’’tiādinā anekadhā arūpamukhavasena catudhātuvavatthāne vuttānaṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ dhātupariggahamukhānaṃ aññataramukhavasena anekadhāva visuddhimagge nānānayato vibhāvitā. Mahābodhisattānaṃ pana catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassamukhena pabhedagamanato nānānayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasannissayassa ariyamaggañāṇassa adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ pubbabhāgañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ paramagambhīraṃ saṇhasukhumataraṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ hoti. Yaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu mahāvajiraññāṇanti vuccati. Yassa ca pavattivibhāgena catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassapabhedassa pādakabhāvena samāpajjiyamānā catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyā devasikaṃ satthu vaḷañjanakasamāpattiyo vuccanti, svāyaṃ buddhānaṃ vipassanācāro paramatthamañjusāyaṃ visuddhimaggavaṇṇanāyaṃ uddesato dassito, atthikehi tato gahetabbo.
从断除和根绝诸漏的角度说,漏尽就是圣道;按照最殊胜的说明方式,这里指的是阿罗汉道。为了说明“于漏尽有智,即漏尽智”,先说了“对此有此智”,然后说“尽”是依处格,不是对象格,为了表明这一点,又说“因为属于它”。说“这是苦”,是显示当时对苦圣谛已现前把握。说“这些是苦”,是显示对苦加以限定后把握。说“没有比这更多的了”,是显示毫无剩余地把握。因此说“一切苦谛”等等。所谓“以自性相通达”,是指对被称为自性的相,以不迷惑的方式通达。而“不迷惑的通达”,是说当那智生起之后,对苦的自性等的判别不再有迷惑,它就是这样生起的。因此说“如实了知”。“能生起”就是使之产生。“到达那个处所”,是指依止那个作为所缘缘之因的涅槃。因为具有这两者的补特伽罗的证得,就说为这两者的证得。或者,“到达”是到达之因。“不转起”就是无转起之相。或者,那些烦恼在这里不再转起,所以叫不转起,也就是涅槃。“它的”指苦灭。“能令到达”,就是通过作证而正确地令到达。巴利
Āsavānaṃ khepanato samucchindanato āsavakkhayo ariyamaggo, ukkaṭṭhaniddesavasena arahattamaggaggahaṇaṃ. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇanti dassento ‘‘tatra cetaṃ ñāṇa’’nti vatvā khayeti ca ādhāre bhummaṃ, na visayeti dassento ‘‘tappariyāpannattā’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti dukkhassa ariyasaccassa tadā paccakkhato gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Ettakaṃ dukkhanti tassa paricchijja gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Na ito bhiyyoti anavasesetvā gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sabbampi dukkhasacca’’ntiādi. Sarasalakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti sabhāvasaṅkhātassa lakkhaṇassa asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Asammohapaṭivedhoti ca yathā tasmiṃ ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavatti. Tenāha ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti. Nibbattikanti nipphādentaṃ. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ patvāti yaṃ nibbānaṃ maggassa ārammaṇapaccayaṭṭhena kāraṇabhūtaṃ āgamma. Tadubhayavato hi puggalassa patti tadubhayassa pattīti vuttaṃ. Patvāti vā pāpuṇanahetu. Appavattinti appavattinimittaṃ. Te vā na pavattanti etthāti appavatti, nibbānaṃ. Tassāti dukkhanirodhassa. Sampāpakanti sacchikiriyāvasena sammadeva pāpakaṃ.
依烦恼故,就是依被称为漏的烦恼。因为诸漏是苦谛的同义说法,由于它们被苦谛所含摄,而其余诸谛也有与它们集等相应的同义说法,所以说“依同义语”。“显示诸谛”是连接。这里只取诸漏,因为是从“为漏尽智”开始的。同样,正是以漏解脱为首来说一切杂染的解脱。“此是苦”等,以“如实了知”等,在这里说的是混合之道,所以说“讲述与观一同达到顶点的道”。在这里,由于谛通达在当时是过去,所以说了“如实了知”;但依据它在现观时是现在,便用现在时“如是知、如是见”来解说。而那虽然从道刹那之后直到今天都是过去,但它最初成为过去,只能依果刹那来了知,所以说“以‘心解脱’显示果刹那”。或者,“知者、见者”是对原因的解释,即以知为因、以见为因,心从欲漏解脱,如此连接。在这里,以有漏为例,如同有贪一样,有见也被同等遮止,所以见漏的包含也应被看到。巴利
Kilesavasenāti āsavasaṅkhātakilesavasena. Yasmā āsavānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāyo, tappariyāpannattā, sesasaccānañca taṃsamudayādipariyāyo atthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyāyato’’ti. Dassento saccānīti yojanā. Āsavānaṃyeva cettha gahaṇaṃ ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayañāṇāyā’’ti āraddhattā. Tathā hi āsavavimuttisīseneva sabbasaṃkilesavimutti vuttā. Idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsintiādinā missakamaggo idha kathitoti ‘‘saha vipassanāya koṭippattaṃ maggaṃ kathetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca saccappaṭivedhassa tadā atītakālikattā ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ abbhaññāsi’’nti vatvāpi abhisamayakāle tassa paccuppannataṃ upādāya ‘‘evaṃ jānato evaṃ passato’’ti vattamānakālena niddeso kato. So ca kāmaṃ maggakkhaṇato paraṃ yāvajjatanā atītakāliko eva, sabbapaṭhamaṃ panassa atītakālikattaṃ phalakkhaṇeneva veditabbanti āha ‘‘vimuccitthāti iminā phalakkhaṇaṃ dassetī’’ti. Jānato passatoti vā hetuniddesoyaṃ. Jānanahetu dassanahetu kāmāsavāpi cittaṃ vimuccitthāti yojanā. Bhavāsavaggahaṇeneva cettha bhavarāgassa viya bhavadiṭṭhiyāpi samavarodhoti diṭṭhāsavassapi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
因为通过观察已断的烦恼,即使还有业存在,由于未来不再结生,所以知道“生已尽”;又因为通过观察道等,了知“梵行已住”等,所以说“以‘生已尽’等为它的地”。其中,“它的”指观察智,“地”指生起之处。为了说明提出“然而什么是”等质问的用意,并想要回答,所以说“并非他的”等。“并非他的过去生已尽”,意思是并非由修道而尽,因为先前就已尽故。“并非他的未来生已尽”是连接。而“并非未来”是取未来的一般性,用变通的说法来讲。因此说“因为对未来没有努力”。因为努力只在存在的东西上才可能,在不存在的东西上不可能,这是意图。但这里指的是未来的某一特定部分,而要断除它,努力也是可以有的。因此说“然而,道的”等。通过“然而”等,说明由修道,唯以破坏未来生的因的方式而显现为已尽。“在一蕴、四蕴、五蕴有中”等,是取三种有,按前面所说的方式,为了显示生无余地已尽。“那”指如前所说的生,“他”指世尊。巴利
Yasmā pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇena vijjamānassapi kammassa āyatiṃ appaṭisandhikabhāvato ‘‘khīṇā jātī’’ti jānāti, yasmā ca maggapaccavekkhaṇādīhi vusitaṃ brahmacariyantiādiṃ pajānāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘khīṇā jātīti ādīhi tassa bhūmi’’nti. Tattha tassāti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa. Bhūminti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Yenādhippāyena ‘‘katamā panā’’tiādinā codanā katā, taṃ pakāsetvā parihāraṃ vattukāmo āha ‘‘na tāvassā’’tiādi. Na tāvassa atītā jāti khīṇāti maggabhāvanāya na khīṇāti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘pubbeva khīṇattā’’ti. Na anāgatā assa jāti khīṇāti yojanā. Na anāgatāti ca anāgatattasāmaññaṃ gahetvā lesena vadati. Tenāha ‘‘anāgate vāyāmābhāvato’’ti. Vijjamāneyeva hi payogo sambhavati, nāvijjamāneti adhippāyo. Anāgataviseso panettha adhippeto, tassa ca khepane vāyāmopi labbhateva. Tenāha ‘‘yā pana maggassā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yā panā’’ti hi ādinā maggabhāvanāya anāgatajātiyā eva hetuvināsanadvārena khīṇabhāvo pakāsīyati. Ekacatupañcavokārabhavesūti bhavattayaggahaṇaṃ vuttanayena anavasesato jātiyā khīṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tanti yathāvuttajātiṃ. Soti bhagavā.
所谓“梵行住”,在这里就是指道梵行的生起,所以说“已完成”。正见在四谛中以遍知等作用运行,正思惟等也在苦谛中随顺遍知现观而运行,在其余诸谛中则以断现观等方式运行,这是很明显的。因此说“以四道,依遍知、断、作证、修习现观”。“不再有如此状态”——这些种类就是“如此”,其状态就是“如此状态”,说的就是这个意思。而那些种类,在这里指的是作为圣道作用的遍知等,所以说“以如此十六种作用的状态”。因为省察道的时候,它们依靠道的力量而明显显现;而在遍知等当中,断才是主要的,其余都是为了达成这个目的,所以说“或为烦恼灭尽”。或者,这是就省察已断烦恼而说的。“不再有如此状态——了知”,这里还有另一种理解方式:“如此状态”是夺格、与格。因此意思是:从这种状态、从这种种类,也就是从现今存在的蕴相续,我没有未来的蕴相续;而这些被称为最后有的五蕴,已被遍知,无所住立而安住,就像断了根的树一样。因为未以遍知为根者,就是住立。正如说:“诸比丘,若于抟食有贪、有喜、有爱,则识住立、增长”等等。而那些五蕴,随着最后识的灭尽,就像没有燃料的火一样,将无执取而熄灭——他如是了知。巴利
Brahmacariyavāso nāma idha maggabrahmacariyassa nibbattanamevāti āha ‘‘niṭṭhita’’nti. Sammādiṭṭhiyā catūsu saccesu pariññādikiccasādhanavasena pavattamānāya sammāsaṅkappādīnampi dukkhasacce pariññābhisamayānuguṇā pavatti, itarasaccesu ca nesaṃ pahānābhisamayādivasena pavatti pākaṭā eva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘catūhi maggehi pariññāpahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayavasenā’’ti. Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti ime pakārā itthaṃ, tabbhāvo itthattaṃ, tadatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Te pana pakārā ariyamaggabyāpārabhūtā pariññādayo idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘evaṃsoḷasakiccabhāvāyā’’ti. Te hi maggaṃ paccavekkhato maggānubhāvena pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti , pariññādīsu ca pahānameva padhānaṃ, tadatthattāya itaresanti āha ‘‘kilesakkhayāya vā’’ti. Pahīnakilesapaccavekkhaṇavasena vā etaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nāparaṃ itthattāyāti abbhaññāsi’’nti etthāyamaparo nayo – itthattāyāti nissakke sampadānavacanaṃ. Tenāyamattho – itthattāya itthambhāvato imasmā evaṃpakārā idāni vattamānakkhandhasantānā aparaṃ anāgatakkhandhasantānaṃ mayhaṃ natthi, ime pana carimattabhāvasaṅkhātā pañcakkhandhā pariññātā appatiṭṭhā tiṭṭhanti chinnamūlakā rukkhā viya. Apariññātamūlakā hi patiṭṭhā. Yathāha ‘‘kabaḷīkāre ce, bhikkhave, āhāre atthi rāgo atthi nandī atthi taṇhā, patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ viruḷha’’ntiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.64; kathā. 296; mahāni. 7). Te pana pañcakkhandhā carimakaviññāṇanirodhena anupādāno viya jātavedo nibbāyissantīti abbhaññāsinti.
“为省察智所摄持”的意思是:并不像证得前两种智那样只是片面的,而是完整的。“显示”是以总结的方式显示。因为从实质内容来说,前面已经显示过了。这里其余的部分,因为遵循前面所说的方法,所以很容易理解。巴利
Paccavekkhaṇañāṇapariggahitanti na paṭhamadutiyañāṇadvayādhigamaṃ viya kevalanti adhippāyo. Dassentoti nigamanavasena dassento. Sarūpato hi pubbe dassitamevāti. Sesamettha vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
“三次出生”这句话,是要显示这样的意思:“婆罗门,我仅仅以第一种明就已经算是出生了,因为并没有比我更早出生或同时出生的人,所以我是所有众生中最年长、最年老的,更何况以三种明而三次出生呢?”应当这样连接:以宿住随念智来阐明过去分智,因为它以过去为所缘,并且具有与过去分相应的性质。其中,“过去分智”是指对被称为过去蕴、处、界的过去部分毫无障碍的智。由于天眼智以现在为所缘,而随业趣智和未来分智是依靠天眼的力量才成就的,他心智也是依靠天眼才成就的,所以说“以天眼见现在与未来分智”。其中,“以天眼”是指连同附属智一起的天眼智。“现在分与未来分”合起来就是现在未来分,对它的智就是现在未来分智。由于证得漏尽智时,就像一切知智一样,其余不共的智、十力智、不共佛法等不共的佛陀功德也都得以成就,所以说“以漏尽成就一切世间与出世间功德”。因此说“显示了一切一切知功德”。巴利
Tikkhattuṃ jātoti iminā pana idaṃ dasseti ‘‘ahaṃ, brāhmaṇa, paṭhamavijjāya jātoyeva purejātassa sahajātassa vā abhāvato sabbesaṃ vuḍḍho mahallako, kimaṅgaṃ pana tīhi vijjāhi tikkhattuṃ jātoti. Pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇanti atītārammaṇasabhāgatāya tabbhāvībhāvato ca pubbenivāsañāṇena atītaṃsañāṇaṃ pakāsetvāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha atītaṃsañāṇanti atītakkhandhāyatanadhātusaṅkhāte atītakoṭṭhāse appaṭihatañāṇaṃ. Dibbacakkhuñāṇassa paccuppannārammaṇattā yathākammūpagañāṇassa anāgataṃsañāṇassa ca dibbacakkhuvaseneva ijjhanato dibbacakkhuno paribhaṇḍañāṇattā dibbacakkhumhiyeva ca ṭhitassa cetopariyañāṇasiddhito vuttaṃ ‘‘dibbacakkhunā paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇa’’nti. Tattha dibbacakkhunāti saparibhaṇḍena dibbacakkhuñāṇena. Paccuppannaṃso ca anāgataṃso ca paccuppannānāgataṃsaṃ, tattha ñāṇaṃ paccuppannānāgataṃsañāṇaṃ. Āsavakkhayañāṇādhigameneva sabbaññutaññāṇassa viya sesāsādhāraṇañāṇadasabalañāṇaāveṇikabuddhadhammādīnampi anaññasādhāraṇānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ ijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘āsavakkhayena sakalalokiyalokuttaraguṇa’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbepi sabbaññuguṇe pakāsetvā’’ti.
说法随喜的讨论巴利
Desanānumodanakathā
15 喜的遍满使身心充满:意思是由于喜的弥漫,身心都达到圆满。无知:就是无知的意思。因为与“dhī”这个词结合,所以这里是属格意义的宾格用法。超越:在这里是已经越过、已经离开的意思,所以说“在灭尽中可见”。正因为如此,才说“初夜分已经过去”。更超越:就是极其可爱、令人心悦,那样的就是美妙、吉祥,所以说“在美妙中可见”。谁:在天、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等当中,是哪一位。我:我的。足:就是双脚。以神通:以这种天神通。以名声:以这样的随从和范围。照耀:正在闪耀。以超越:以极其可爱、令人向往、美丽。以色:以肤色、身体色泽的光辉。照亮一切方:照亮十个方向,像月亮、像太阳一样,使一切成为一片光明,这是这偈颂的意思。于美丽:指殊胜的、具足的容貌。巴利
15.Pītivipphāraparipuṇṇagattacittoti pītipharaṇena paripuṇṇakāyacitto. Aññāṇanti aññāṇassāti attho. Dhīsaddassa yogato hi sāmiatthe etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Abhikkantāti ettha atikkantā, vigatāti atthoti āha ‘‘khaye dissatī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhikkantataro cāti ativiya kantataro manoramo, tādiso ca sundaro bhaddako nāma hotīti āha ‘‘sundare dissatī’’ti. Koti devanāgayakkhagandhabbādīsu ko katamo. Meti mama. Pādānīti pāde. Iddhiyāti imāya evarūpāya deviddhiyā. Yasasāti iminā edisena parivārena paricchedena. Jalanti vijjotamāno. Abhikkantenāti ativiya kantena kamanīyena abhirūpena. Vaṇṇenāti chavivaṇṇena sarīravaṇṇanibhāya. Sabbā obhāsayaṃ disāti dasapi disā pabhāsento cando viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekālokaṃ karontoti gāthāya attho. Abhirūpeti uḷārarūpe sampannarūpe.
“太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!太殊胜了,乔达摩尊者!”这两句话,是通过重复来表达“善哉,善哉,乔达摩尊者!”这个意思。为了确定它们适用的范围,接着就说“在恐惧时、在愤怒时”等等。
其中,像“贼!贼!”“蛇!蛇!”这类,是在恐惧时的重复。“射!射!”“打!打!”这类,是在愤怒时。“善哉!善哉!”这类,是在赞叹时。“去!去!”“割!割!”这类,是在急促时。“来!来!”这类,是在好奇时。“正觉者!正觉者!这样想着”这类,是在惊叹时。“请前进,尊者!请前进,尊者!”这类,是在欢喜时。“独子在哪里?独子在哪里?”这类,是在忧伤时。“啊,快乐!啊,快乐!”这类,是在明净信心时。
“ca”这个词有汇总未提及之事的含义。由此应当知道,它也涵盖了呵责、不敬等情况。其中,像“恶人!恶人!”这类,是在呵责时。“漂亮的人!漂亮的人!”这类,应当看作是在不敬时。巴利
Abhikkantaṃ bho gotama, abhikkantaṃ bho gotamāti vacanadvayassa ‘‘sādhu sādhu bho gotamā’’ti āmeḍitavasena atthaṃ dassetvā tassa visayaṃ niddhārento āha ‘‘bhaye kodhe’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘coro coro, sappo sappo’’tiādīsu bhaye āmeḍitaṃ. ‘‘Vijjha vijjha, pahara paharā’’tiādīsu kodhe. ‘‘Sādhu sādhū’’tiādīsu pasaṃsāyaṃ. ‘‘Gaccha gaccha, lunāhi lunāhī’’tiādīsu turite. ‘‘Āgaccha āgacchā’’tiādīsu kotūhale. ‘‘Buddho buddhoti cintento’’tiādīsu (bu. vaṃ. 2.44) acchare. ‘‘Abhikkamathāyasmanto, abhikkamathāyasmanto’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.20; a. ni. 9.11) hāse. ‘‘Kahaṃ ekaputtaka, kahaṃ ekaputtakā’’tiādīsu soke. ‘‘Aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’ntiādīsu (udā. 20; cūḷava. 332) pasāde. Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayattho . Tena garahaasammānādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tattha ‘‘pāpo pāpo’’tiādīsu garahāyaṃ. ‘‘Abhirūpaka abhirūpakā’’tiādīsu asammāne daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这里并不是因为重复才说了两次,而是为了显示两种不同的义理,所以才说“或者”等话。针对“殊胜”这个词,是采用了中性词形来说的。而世尊的这番话本身就是开示,所以说“也就是乔达摩尊者的开示”。或者,这只是单纯显示义理,因此应当知道,词性和格位的变化是随义理而变的。第二句也是同样的道理。“去除过患”是指摧毁贪等烦恼;“获得德行”是指成就戒等德行。开示所成就的德行中,哪些是主要的呢?为了先显示这些主要的德行,所以说“由生信、由生慧”。因为世间善法以信为首,出世间善法以慧为首。在“有义”等当中:因为具足戒等义利,所以“有义”;因为具足词的本源和构造,所以“有文”;因为使用浅显易懂的言辞,所以“言辞明了”;因为义理细微难解,所以“义理深奥”;因为用词柔和甜美,所以“悦耳”;因为义理广大清净、令人爱乐,所以“入心”;因为摧破我慢而不自赞,因为折伏顽固忿恨而不毁他;因为以利益心而说,能平息他人贪欲热恼等,所以“悲悯清凉”;因为破除烦恼黑暗,所以“智慧明净”;因为音声如迦陵频伽鸟般美妙,所以“入耳可爱”;因为前后不相违、义理极其清净,所以“堪忍推敲”。正因为入耳可爱,所以“闻之安乐”;正因为堪忍推敲,以及以利益心而说,所以“审察有益”——应当这样理解其义。在“如此等等”中,“等”字应包含:令轮回之轮停止、令正法之轮转动、破除邪说、安立正说、拔除不善根、种植善根、关闭恶趣之门、开启天人之道、止息缠缚、断除随眠等,这些都应摄集于此。巴利
Nayidaṃ āmeḍitavasena dvikkhattuṃ vuttaṃ, atha kho atthadvayavasenāti dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Abhikkantanti vacanaṃ apekkhitvā napuṃsakaliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammassa desanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘yadidaṃ bhoto gotamassa dhammadesanā’’ti. Atthamattadassanaṃ vā etaṃ, tasmā atthavasena liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo veditabbo. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Dosanāsanatoti rāgādikilesaviddhaṃsanato. Guṇādhigamanatoti sīlādiguṇānaṃ sampāpanato. Ye guṇe desanā adhigameti, tesu padhānabhūtā guṇā dassetabbāti te padhānabhūte guṇe tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhājananato paññājananato’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddhāpamukhā hi lokiyā guṇā, paññāpamukhā lokuttarā. Sātthatotiādīsu sīlādiatthasampattiyā sātthato, sabhāvaniruttisampattiyā sabyañjanato. Suviññeyyasaddappayogatāya uttānapadato, saṇhasukhumabhāvena duviññeyyatthatāya gambhīratthato. Siniddhamudumadhurasaddappayogatāya kaṇṇasukhato, vipulavisuddhapemanīyatthatāya hadayaṅgamato. Mānātimānavidhamanena anattukkaṃsanato, thambhasārambhanimmaddanena aparavambhanato. Hitādhippāyappavattiyā paresaṃ rāgapariḷāhādivūpasamanena karuṇāsītalato, kilesandhakāravidhamanena paññāvadātato. Karavīkarutamañjutāya āpātharamaṇīyato, pubbāparāviruddhasuvisuddhatthatāya vimaddakkhamato. Āpātharamaṇīyatāya eva suyyamānasukhato, vimaddakkhamatāya hitajjhāsayappavattitāya ca vīmaṃsiyamānahitatoti evamattho veditabbo. Evamādīhīti ādi-saddena saṃsāracakkanivattanato, saddhammacakkappavattanato, micchāvādavidhamanato, sammāvādapatiṭṭhāpanato, akusalamūlasamuddharaṇato, kusalamūlasaṃropanato, apāyadvārapidhānato, saggamaggadvāravivaraṇato, pariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, anusayasamugghātanatoti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“向下放置”是指被某人放成口朝下的样子。“下端生起”是指本性上就是下端生起的。“揭开”是指使它显露出来。“执手”是指不说“向东走”或“向北走”之类的话,而是抓住他的手,指示说:“这条路没有疑问,就这样走。”“黑月十四”是指黑月中的第十四日。“将倒覆的翻正”,是指把一个本来不能作为容器的器皿,翻转过来使它成为能盛物的容器。因为“下端生起”,所以背离正法;因为“向下放置”,所以安住在非正法上——这两句应当按义理来搭配,而不是按顺序来搭配。欲贪等虽然也是遮蔽者,因为它们属于盖障,但邪见特别能遮蔽众生,因为众生执取邪见,所以说“被邪见的密林所覆盖”。因此世尊说:“比丘们,我说邪见是最严重的过失。”一切通往恶趣的道路都是邪道,是卑劣的道路,而正见等的直接对立面——邪见等八种邪行,就是邪道。正因如此,针对这两者的对立,才说“开示天界与解脱之道”。依于酥油等的灯不像依于油的灯那样明亮,所以取“油灯”的说法。“以这些方式”是指以这些翻覆与揭开、遮蔽与显露等譬喻所譬喻的方式;或者是指以这些如前所说,将无味、无相等在自身中原本并非如此而显现的方式,以显示自己天住的方式,以显示三明而暗示自己一切知功德的方式。因此说“以多种方式开示正法”。巴利
Adhomukhaṭhapitanti kenaci adhomukhaṃ ṭhapitaṃ. Heṭṭhāmukhajātanti sabhāveneva heṭṭhāmukhaṃ jātaṃ. Ugghāṭeyyāti vivaṭaṃ kareyya. Hatthegahetvāti ‘‘puratthābhimukho uttarābhimukho vā gacchā’’tiādīni avatvā hatthe gahetvā ‘‘nissandehaṃ esa maggo, evaṃ gacchā’’ti dasseyya. Kāḷapakkhacātuddasīti kāḷapakkhe cātuddasī kāḷapakkhacātuddasī. Nikkujjitaṃ ukkujjeyyāti ādheyyassa anādhārabhūtaṃ bhājanaṃ ādhārabhāvāpādanavasena ukkujjeyya. Heṭṭhāmukhajātatāya saddhammavimukhaṃ adhomukhaṭhapitatāya asaddhamme patiṭṭhitanti evaṃ padadvayaṃ yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ, na yathāsaṅkhyaṃ. Kāmaṃ kāmacchandādayopi paṭicchādakā nīvaraṇabhāvato, micchādiṭṭhi pana savisesaṃ paṭicchādikā satte micchābhinivesanenāti āha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhigahanapaṭicchanna’’nti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ, bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti. Sabbo apāyagāmimaggo kummaggo kucchito maggoti katvā, sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ ujupaṭipakkhatāya micchādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha micchattadhammā micchāmaggo. Teneva hi tadubhayapaṭipakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘saggamokkhamaggaṃ ācikkhantenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sappiādisannissayo padīpo na tathā, ujjalo yathā telasannissayoti telapajjotaggahaṇaṃ. Etehi pariyāyehīti etehi nikkujjitukkujjanapaṭicchannavivaraṇādiupamopamitabbappakārehi, etehi vā yathāvuttehi arasarūpatādīnaṃ attani aññathā paṭipādanapariyāyehi attano dibbavihāravibhāvanapariyāyehi vijjattayavibhāvanāpadesena attano sabbaññuguṇavibhāvanapariyāyehi ca. Tenāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito’’ti.
“净信所作”是指有净信的人应当做的恭敬供养。在“我皈依”这句话里,iti这个词是被省略地指出的,所以说“我皈依‘皈依’”。因为这里的“去”(gacchāmi)这个词,不像“引导”(neti)等词那样能带两个宾语,所以不能说“我皈依乔达摩”,就像说“把羊领到村里”那样;而应该说“我皈依‘皈依’”。因此要知道,这里iti这个词是被省略地指出的。“皈依”就是庇护处,所以称为“归宿”。而成为归宿,是通过遮(“灾苦”:苦,但“恶”的含义更为恰当,此处作属格)巴利
Pasannākāranti pasannehi kātabbaṃ sakkāraṃ. Saraṇaṃ gacchāmīti ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti. Ettha hi nāyaṃ gamisaddo nīsaddādayo viya dvikammako, tasmā yathā ajaṃ gāmaṃ netīti vuccati, evaṃ ‘‘gotamaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vattuṃ na sakkā, ‘‘saraṇanti gacchāmī’’ti pana vattabbaṃ, tasmā ettha iti-saddo luttaniddiṭṭhoti veditabbaṃ. Saraṇanti paṭisaraṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘parāyaṇa’’nti. Parāyaṇabhāvo ca anatthanisedhanena atthasampaṭipādanena ca hotīti āha ‘‘aghassa tātā hitassa ca vidhātā’’ti. Aghassāti dukkhatoti vadanti, pāpatoti pana attho yutto, nissakke cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Saraṇanti gamanañcettha tadadhippāyena bhajanaṃ tathā jānanaṃ vāti dassento ‘‘iti iminā adhippāyenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gacchāmītiādīsu purimassa purimassa pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Bhajanaṃ vā saraṇādhippāyena upasaṅkamanaṃ, sevanā santikāvacaratā, payirupāsanaṃ vattappaṭivattakaraṇena upaṭṭhānanti evaṃ sabbathāpi anaññasaraṇataṃyeva dīpeti. Gacchāmīti padassa kathaṃ bujjhāmīti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘yesaṃ hī’’tiādi.
“已证得道、已现证灭”这两句,所显示的也只是住于果位的人,而不是住于道位的人。为了说明这一点,所以接着说“在依教奉行的时候”。难道善凡夫不也被称为依教奉行吗?虽然也可以这样说,但严格来说,只有住于道位的人才应当这样称呼,其他人则不是,因为他们还没有进入正性决定。正因如此,只有他们才被称为“在恶趣中不堕落而能保持”。因为只有通过进入正性决定,才有可能解脱恶趣。“被称为”这里的“iti”一词,表示开端的意思,或者表示方式。由此,它涵盖了“诸比丘,无论有为法还是无为法,离贪在它们当中被称为最上”这句经文,或者用“广说”这个词来涵盖。在这里,由于圣道具有出离的性质,而涅槃是成就其意义的因,所以两者在严格意义上都被称为法。因为以涅槃为所缘缘,圣道才能成就其意义;同样,圣果也因“由于那种信尚未止息”等说法,以及由道所断除的烦恼具有寂止断除的作用、随顺出离、是出离的最终归宿,而被称为法。至于教法,则因为是证得出离法的因,按照这种方便说法,也可以获得法的名称。为了说明这个意思已经载于圣典,所以接着说“不仅……”等。巴利
Adhigatamagge sacchikatanirodheti padadvayenapi phalaṭṭhā eva dassitā, na maggaṭṭhāti te dassento ‘‘yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāne cā’’ti āha. Nanu ca kalyāṇaputhujjanopi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjatīti vuccatīti? Kiñcāpi vuccati, nippariyāyena pana maggaṭṭhā eva tathā vattabbā, na itare niyāmokkamanābhāvato. Tathā hi te eva ‘‘apāyesu apatamāne dhāretī’’ti vuttā. Sammattaniyāmokkamanena hi apāyavinimuttasambhavo. Akkhāyatīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā. Tena ‘‘yāvatā, bhikkhave, dhammā saṅkhatā vā asaṅkhatā vā, virāgo tesaṃ aggamakkhāyatī’’ti (itivu. 90; a. ni. 4.34) suttapadaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, ‘‘vitthāro’’ti vā iminā. Ettha ca ariyamaggo niyyānikatāya, nibbānaṃ tassa tadatthasiddhihetutāyāti ubhayameva nippariyāyena dhammoti vutto. Nibbānañhi ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ labhitvā ariyamaggassa tadatthasiddhi, tathāpi ariyaphalānaṃ ‘‘yasmā tāya saddhāya avūpasantāyā’’tiādivacanato maggena samucchinnānaṃ kilesānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānakiccatāya niyyānānuguṇatāya niyyānapariyosānatāya ca. Pariyattidhammassa pana niyyānadhammasamadhigamahetutāyāti iminā pariyāyena vuttanayena dhammabhāvo labbhati eva, svāyamattho pāṭhāruḷho evāti dassento ‘‘na kevala’’ntiādimāha.
“离贪”说的是道。因为一切贪——不管是欲贪、有贪等种种分类——都靠它才能离染、被断除,所以说“离贪”是道。“不动、无忧”说的是果。因为被称为“动”的渴爱,以及以内在燃烧为特征的忧,在果生起时就已经彻底灭尽,所以说“不动、无忧”是果。“无违逆”是说没有冲突、不相违背,也就是合意、殊胜的意思。“纯熟”是因为以熟练的方式生起,或者因为显示了殊胜的功德。就像经里说的:“婆罗门,我未在人间宣说纯熟、殊胜的法,以见与戒的集合——依‘凡此见是圣、能出离,能令奉行者正尽苦,具如是见者住于见同分’所说的见,与‘凡他们戒无缺、无穿、无斑点、无杂色、自在、为智者所赞、无执取、能引生定,具如是戒者住于戒同分’所说的戒,二者集合之义,即结合、和合之义——八人、法见者——依四对人之分,或依个人之分,有八位圣者,因现见了圣法而称为‘法见者’——三皈依处,即三次前往、三次皈依,为三皈依——宣说——将自己内心所证者以语言表达出来。巴利
Rāgavirāgoti maggo kathitoti kāmarāgo bhavarāgoti evamādibhedo sabbopi rāgo virajjati pahīyati etenāti rāgavirāgoti maggo kathito. Anejamasokanti phalanti ejāsaṅkhātāya taṇhāya antonijjhānalakkhaṇassa sokassa ca taduppattiyaṃ sabbaso parikkhīṇattā anejamasokanti phalaṃ kathitaṃ. Appaṭikūlanti avirodhadīpanato kenaci aviruddhaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītanti vā attho. Paguṇarūpena pavattitattā, pakaṭṭhaguṇavibhāvanato vā paguṇaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ nabhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti (ma. ni. 1.283; mahāva. 9). Sabbadhammakkhandhā kathitāti yojanā. Diṭṭhisīlasaṅghātenāti ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā ‘‘yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpehi sīlehi sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.12) evaṃ vuttānaṃ sīlānañca saṃhatabhāvena, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññenāti attho. Saṃhatoti ghaṭito, sametoti attho. Ariyapuggalā hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatā eva. Aṭṭha ca puggalā dhammadasā teti purisayugaḷavasena cattāropi puggalavasena aṭṭheva ariyadhammassa paccakkhadassāvitāya dhammadasā. Tīṇi vatthūni saraṇanti gamanena tikkhattuṃ gamanena ca tīṇi saraṇagamanāni. Paṭivedesīti attano hadayaṅgataṃ vācāya pavedesi.
为了在皈依这件事上具备善巧,需要说明皈依的所缘、分类、果报和杂染等差别,以及皈依者本身,所以经中说“为了在皈依上具备善巧,应当了知皈依……”,因为离开这些,皈依本身就根本无法成立。
其中,先从词义上说,“皈依”的意思是杀害。应当知道这个词是依据表示“杀害”的词根sara来理解的。因此,对于已经皈依的人,正是通过这个皈依行为,杀害、灭尽轮回的怖畏、内心的恐惧、身体的痛苦,以及一切堕入恶趣的痛苦。这个词专门指三宝。
另一种解释是:佛陀以利益众生为目的而说法,比如“诸比丘,应当具足戒而住”等,劝导众生行善;又以遮止不善为目的,比如“杀生确实有恶报,来世有恶果”等,通过显示过患等方式,使众生远离无益之事,从而杀害众生的怖畏,灭除因不行利益、行无益之事而生的灾难。法——也就是道——通过度脱轮回的荒漠而杀害众生的怖畏;另一种法(涅槃)则通过给予安稳而杀害怖畏。僧伽因为是无上的应供处,即使对微小的布施和恭敬,也能使众生获得广大的果报,从而杀害众生的怖畏。因此,按照这样分别说明的方式,三宝就是皈依。
以“世尊是正自觉者,法是善说,僧是善行道者”这样生起的对三宝的净信和尊重,断除了邪见、疑、痴、不信等烦恼,就以这三宝为皈依、为归宿、为去处、为庇护、为避难所——这样生起的、以三宝为归宿的心念,就是皈依,因为它以此为目标而趣向。
具备如上所说的这种心念的众生,就是“皈依者”。他以所说的这种心念,这样趋近、亲近、服侍、奉侍:“这三宝是我的皈依,是我的归宿。”或者这样说:他了知、觉悟。以上就是皈依、皈依行为,以及皈依者这三者应当了知。巴利
Saraṇagamanassa visayappabhedaphalasaṃkilesabhedānaṃ viya kattu ca vibhāvanā tattha kosallāya hotīti ‘‘saraṇagamanesu kosallatthaṃ saraṇaṃ…pe… veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ tena vinā saraṇagamanasseva asambhavato. Tattha saraṇanti padatthato tāva hiṃsatīti saraṇaṃ. Hiṃsatthassa hi sarasaddassa vasenetaṃ padaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā saraṇagatānaṃ teneva saraṇagamanena vaṭṭabhayaṃ cittutrāsaṃ kāyikaṃ dukkhaṃ duggatipariyāpannaṃ sabbampi dukkhaṃ hanati, vināsetīti attho. Ratanattayassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ . Atha vā hite pavattanena ‘‘sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.64) atthe niyojanena ahitā ca nivattanena ‘‘pāṇātipātassa kho pana pāpako vipāko, pāpakaṃ abhisamparāya’’ntiādinā ādīnavadassanādimukhena anatthato nivattanena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati, hitāhitesu appavattipavattihetukaṃ byasanaṃ apavattikaraṇena vināseti buddho. Bhavakantārauttaraṇena maggasaṅkhāto dhammo sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati, itaro assāsadānena. Appakānampi dānavasena pūjāvasena ca upanītānaṃ sakkārānaṃ vipulaphalapaṭilābhakaraṇena sattānaṃ bhayaṃ hiṃsati saṅgho anuttaradakkhiṇeyyabhāvato, tasmā imināpi vibhajitvā vuttapariyāyena ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti evaṃ pavattaratanattayapasaādataggarukatāhi vidhutadiṭṭhivicikicchāsammohaassaddhiyāditāya vihatakileso tadeva ratanattayaṃ saraṇaṃ parāyaṇaṃ gati tāṇaṃ leṇanti evaṃ pavattiyā tapparāyaṇatākārappavatto cittuppādo saraṇagamanaṃ saraṇanti gacchati etenāti katvā. Tena yathāvuttacittuppādena samannāgato satto saraṇanti gacchati, vuttappakārena cittuppādena ‘‘etāni me tīṇi ratanāni saraṇaṃ, etāni parāyaṇa’’nti evaṃ upeti bhajati sevati payirupāsati, evaṃ vā jānāti, bujjhatīti attho. Evaṃ tāva saraṇaṃ, saraṇagamanaṃ, yo ca saraṇaṃ gacchati, idaṃ tayaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依的类别有两种:出世间皈依和世间皈依。其中,出世间皈依是见谛者在道刹那,通过断除皈依的随烦恼,以涅槃为所缘,从作用上圆满于整个三宝。从意义上说,证得四圣谛本身就是出世间皈依。在那里,涅槃法以作证现观的方式,道法以修习现观的方式,在被通达的同时就成就了皈依的意义;而佛陀的功德作为声闻的行境,以遍知现观的方式,圣僧的功德也同样如此。因此说“从作用上圆满于整个三宝”。而且,圆满时是同时圆满的,不像世间皈依那样按次序圆满,因为它是通过无痴通达而通达的。然而,有些人说:“皈依不是以涅槃为所缘而生起的,而是因为道已被证得,所以皈依也就被证得了,就像某些三明者等的世间明等一样。”按他们这样说,那就只有世间皈依,没有出世间皈依了。这是不合理的,因为两种皈依都应该被认可。世间皈依则是凡夫通过镇伏皈依的随烦恼,以佛陀等功德为所缘而圆满。从意义上说,就是对佛陀等对象生起“正自觉者世尊”这样的信心,以及如前所说的以信为先导的正见;在十种福业事中,这被称为见正直业。这里,“信心生起”应当理解为显示了像被父母等鼓励的孩子那样,与智不相应的皈依。“正见”则显示了与智相应的皈依,因为它是从世间理解的角度,以正确的方式如实看待佛陀的善觉、法的善法性以及僧的善行道。巴利
Saraṇagamanappabhede pana duvidhaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ lokuttaraṃ lokiyañca. Tattha lokuttaraṃ diṭṭhasaccānaṃ maggakkhaṇe saraṇagamanupakkilesasamucchedanena ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhati. Atthato catusaccādhigamo eva hi lokuttarasaraṇagamanaṃ. Tattha hi nibbānadhammo sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena, maggadhammo bhāvanābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhiyamānoyeva saraṇagamanatthaṃ sādheti, buddhaguṇā pana sāvakagocarabhūtā pariññābhisamayavasena, tathā ariyasaṅghaguṇā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kiccato sakalepi ratanattaye ijjhatī’’ti . Ijjhantañca saheva ijjhati, na lokiyaṃ viya paṭipāṭiyā asammohapaṭivedhena paṭividdhattā. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘na saraṇagamanaṃ nibbānārammaṇaṃ hutvā pavattati, maggassa adhigatattā pana adhigatameva hoti ekaccānaṃ tevijjādīnaṃ lokiyavijjādayo viyā’’ti, tesaṃ lokiyameva saraṇagamanaṃ siyā, na lokuttaraṃ. Tañca ayuttaṃ duvidhassapi icchitabbattā. Lokiyaṃ pana saraṇagamanaṃ puthujjanānaṃ saraṇagamanupakkilesavikkhambhanena ārammaṇato buddhādiguṇārammaṇaṃ hutvā ijjhati. Taṃ atthato buddhādīsu vatthūsu ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā’’tiādinā saddhāpaṭilābho yathāvuttasaddhāpubbaṅgamā ca sammādiṭṭhi, dasasu puññakiriyavatthūsu diṭṭhijukammanti vuccati. Ettha ca ‘‘saddhāpaṭilābho’’ti iminā mātādīhi ussāhitadārakādīnaṃ viya ñāṇavippayuttasaraṇagamanaṃ dassitanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Sammādiṭṭhī’’ti iminā pana ñāṇasampayuttaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ dassitaṃ buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca lokiyāvabodhavaseneva sammā ñāyena dassanato.
这种世间皈依有四种表现方式:献出自身、以彼为归宿、进入弟子身份、顶礼。其中,献出自身就是这样说:“从今天起,我把自身献给佛、献给法、献给僧”,为了超越轮回之苦,把自己的身体舍弃给佛等。以彼为归宿就是这样说:“从今天起,请你们记住,我以佛为归宿、以法为归宿、以僧为归宿”,这样生起以彼为归宿的状态。进入弟子身份就是这样说:“从今天起,请你们记住,我是佛的弟子、法的弟子、僧的弟子”,这样进入弟子身份。顶礼就是这样说:“从今天起,请你们记住,我只对佛、法、僧这三宝做问讯、起迎、合掌、恭敬的行为”,这样对佛等做最高的礼敬。这四种方式中,只要做了其中任何一种,就已经算是受持了皈依。巴利
Tayidaṃ lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ catudhā pavattati attasanniyyātanena tapparāyaṇatāya sissabhāvūpagamanena paṇipātenāti. Tattha attasanniyyātanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ attānaṃ buddhassa niyyātemi, dhammassa, saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva saṃsāradukkhanittharaṇatthaṃ attano attabhāvassa pariccajanaṃ. Tapparāyaṇatā nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ahaṃ buddhaparāyaṇo dhammaparāyaṇo saṅghaparāyaṇoti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ tapparāyaṇabhāvo. Sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ buddhassa antevāsiko, dhammassa, saṅghassā’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ sissabhāvūpagamo. Paṇipāto nāma ‘‘ajja ādiṃ katvā ‘ahaṃ abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ buddhādīnaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ vatthūnaṃ karomī’ti maṃ dhārethā’’ti evaṃ buddhādīsu paramanipaccakāro. Imesañhi catunnaṃ ākārānaṃ aññatarampi karontena gahitaṃyeva hoti saraṇagamanaṃ.
另外,也要这样理解自我奉献:“我把自身奉献给世尊,把自身奉献给法,把自身奉献给僧;我奉献生命。我的自身已经奉献了,我的生命已经奉献了。我以生命为尽头皈依佛,佛是我的皈依、我的庇护、我的救护。”还有:“我确实见到了导师,我见到的就是世尊;我确实见到了善逝,我见到的就是世尊;我确实见到了正等觉者,我见到的就是世尊。”像这样,应当看作如同大迦叶长老的皈依一样,是进入弟子身份。巴利
Apica ‘‘bhagavato attānaṃ pariccajāmi, dhammassa saṅghassa attānaṃ pariccajāmi, jīvitaṃ pariccajāmi, pariccattoyeva me attā, pariccattaṃyeva me jīvitaṃ, jīvitapariyantikaṃ buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, buddho me saraṇaṃ leṇaṃ tāṇa’’nti evampi attasanniyyātanaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Satthārañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmi, sugatañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmi, sammāsambuddhañca vatāhaṃ passāmi, bhagavantameva passāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.154) evaṃ mahākassapattherassa saraṇagamanaṃ viya sissabhāvūpagamanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
我将四处游行,从一个村到另一个村,从一个城到另一个城。
我礼敬正等正觉者,也礼敬法的善妙法性。
我们将四处游行,从一个村庄到另一个村庄,从一座山到另一座山……善法性。巴利
‘‘So ahaṃ vicarissāmi, gāmā gāmaṃ purā puraṃ; Namassamāno sambuddhaṃ, dhammassa ca sudhammataṃ. (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194); ‘‘Te mayaṃ vicarissāma, gāmā gāmaṃ nagā nagaṃ…pe… sudhammata’’nti. (su. ni. 182) –
同样地,应当知道这就像阿拉瓦卡、萨塔吉拉、赫玛瓦塔等皈依的情形一样,是以彼为归宿。难道这些阿拉瓦卡等不是顺着正道而来皈依的吗?为什么说他们的皈依是以彼为归宿的皈依呢?因为即使是通过正道来皈依的人,也用“我将游行,从村到村”等话表明了以彼为归宿的方式,所以才那样说。再者,梵摩婆罗门从座位上起身,把上衣偏袒一肩,以头面礼敬世尊的双足,用嘴亲吻世尊的双足,又用手抚摸,并报出自己的名字:“我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩贤者,我是梵摩婆罗门,乔达摩贤者。”这样的礼拜也应当看作皈依。巴利
Evampi āḷavakasātāgirahemavatādīnaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ viya tapparāyaṇatā veditabbā. Nanu cete āḷavakādayo maggeneva āgatasaraṇagamanā, kathaṃ tesaṃ tapparāyaṇatāsaraṇagamanaṃ vuttanti? Maggenāgatasaraṇagamanehipi ‘‘sohaṃ vicarissāmi gāmā gāma’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 194) tehi tapparāyaṇatākārassa paveditattā tathā vuttaṃ. Atha kho brahmāyu brāhmaṇo uṭṭhāyāsanā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā bhagavato pādesu sirasā nipatitvā bhagavato pādāni mukhena ca paricumbati, pāṇīhi ca parisambāhati, nāmañca sāveti ‘‘brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo, brahmāyu ahaṃ, bho gotama, brāhmaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 2.394) evampi paṇipāto daṭṭhabbo.
不过,这种礼拜按亲属、恐惧、师长、应受供养这四种情况分成四类。其中,只有以“应受供养”为理由而行的礼拜才算皈依,另外三种——因亲属关系、因恐惧等而行的礼拜——不算。因为皈依只以最殊胜的对象为准而成立,也只以最殊胜的对象为准而失去。所以,如果一个释迦族人或者拘利族人心里想“佛陀是我们的亲戚”而礼拜,他的皈依根本就没有成立。或者有人因为害怕,心想“沙门乔达摩受到国王尊敬,有大威力,要是不礼拜他,他可能会害我”,因此礼拜,他的皈依也没有成立。又比如在菩萨时期,有人回忆起曾在世尊身边学过什么,或者在佛住世时期——巴利
So panesa ñātibhayācariyadakkhiṇeyyatāvasena catubbidho hoti. Tattha dakkhiṇeyyatāhetukena paṇipātena saraṇagamanaṃ hoti, na itarehi ñātibhayādivasappavattehi tīhi paṇipātehi. Seṭṭhavaseneva hi saraṇaṃ gayhati, seṭṭhavasena bhijjati, tasmā yo sākiyo vā koliyo vā ‘‘buddho amhākaṃ ñātako’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘samaṇo gotamo rājapūjito mahānubhāvo avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhayena vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ. Yopi bodhisattakāle bhagavato santike kiñci uggahitaṃ saramāno buddhakāle vā –
用一份来享用财富,用两份来经营事业;
第四份就该存起来,遇到灾难时就能派上用场。巴利
‘‘Ekena bhogaṃ bhuñjeyya, dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye; Catutthañca nidhāpeyya, āpadāsu bhavissatī’’ti. (dī. ni. 3.265) –
接受了这样一类现世教诫之后,如果心想“他是我的老师”而向他顶礼,那皈依其实并没有真正受持。但如果他期待的是来世或导向解脱的教诫而顶礼,那只是在礼敬应受供养者而已。只有当他心想“此人是世间最殊胜的应受供养者”而顶礼时,才算真正受持了皈依。巴利
Evarūpiṃ diṭṭhadhammikaṃ anusāsaniṃ uggahetvā ‘‘ācariyo me’’ti vandati, aggahitameva hoti saraṇaṃ, samparāyikaṃ pana niyyānikaṃ vā anusāsaniṃ paccāsīsanto dakkhiṇeyyapaṇipātameva karoti. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ loke aggadakkhiṇeyyo’’ti vandati, teneva gahitaṃ hoti saraṇaṃ.
已经这样受持皈依的男居士或女居士,即使对出家加入外道的亲属,心想“这是我的亲属”而向他行礼,皈依也不会破,更何况对没有出家的人。同样,因为害怕而对国王行礼,皈依也不会破。因为国王受到全国人的尊敬,如果有人不对他行礼,他可能会加害。同样,对任何教技艺的老师,即使是外道,心想“这是我的老师”而向他行礼,皈依也不会破。应当这样理解皈依受持的各种情况。巴利
Evaṃ gahitasaraṇassa ca upāsakassa vā upāsikāya vā aññatitthiyesu pabbajitampi ñātiṃ ‘‘ñātako me aya’’nti vandatopi saraṇagamanaṃ na bhijjati, pageva apabbajitaṃ. Tathā rājānaṃ bhayavasena vandato. So hi raṭṭhapūjitattā avandiyamāno anatthampi kareyyāti. Tathā yaṃ kiñci sippasikkhāpakaṃ titthiyampi ‘‘ācariyo me aya’’nti vandatopi na bhijjati. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa pabhedo veditabbo.
皈依的果报解说巴利
Saraṇagamanaphalakathā
在这里,关于出世间的皈依,四种沙门果是异熟果,因为这里所说的出世间皈依就是指圣道本身。而让整个轮回之苦不再生起、彻底息灭,则是利益果。关于这一点,确实这样说过:巴利
Ettha ca lokuttarassa saraṇagamanassa cattāri sāmaññaphalāni vipākaphalaṃ ariyamaggasseva lokuttarasaraṇagamananti adhippetattā. Sakalassa pana vaṭṭadukkhassa anuppādanirodho ānisaṃsaphalaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
如果有人皈依佛、法、僧,
他以正慧看清四圣谛。
苦、苦的生起,以及超越苦,
以及通往苦的止息的圣八支道。
这个皈依处确实安稳,这个皈依处是无上的。
依靠这个皈依,就能从一切苦中解脱出来。巴利
‘‘Yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato; Cattāri ariyasaccāni, sammappaññāya passati. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ dukkhasamuppādaṃ, dukkhassa ca atikkamaṃ; Ariyañcaṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ, dukkhūpasamagāminaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ kho saraṇaṃ khemaṃ, etaṃ saraṇamuttamaṃ; Etaṃ saraṇamāgamma, sabbadukkhā pamuccatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 190-192);
另外,还要从“不执为常”等方面,来了知皈依所带来的利益果报。因为这样说过:巴利
Apica niccato anupagamanādivasena petassa ānisaṃsaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
比丘们,这是不可能的,绝无机会:一个见具足的人会把任何行法执为常、执为乐,会把任何法执为我;会夺走母亲的生命,夺走父亲的生命,夺走阿罗汉的生命;会以嗔恨心让如来流血;会分裂僧团;会宣称另有导师。这种事根本不可能存在。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, sukhato upagaccheyya, kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, paduṭṭhacitto tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.128; a. ni. 1.276).
不过,世间皈依的果报就是投生善趣和获得财富。这话确实是说过的——巴利
Lokiyassa pana saraṇagamanassa bhavasampadāpi bhogasampadāpi phalameva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
凡是已经皈依佛陀的人,
他们不会堕入恶趣之地。
舍弃了人身之后,
他们将使天众充满。巴利
‘‘Ye keci buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gatāse, Na te gamissanti apāyabhūmiṃ; Pahāya mānusaṃ dehaṃ, Devakāyaṃ paripūressantī’’ti.(dī. ni. 2.332; saṃ. ni. 1.37);
另外还有一种说法:巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
那时,帝释天带着八万天众来到尊者大目犍连所在的地方……帝释天站在一边后,尊者大目犍连对他说:“帝释,皈依佛确实很好。帝释,正是因为皈依佛,这里有些众生在身体坏灭、死后投生到善趣天界。他们以十种方面胜过其他天人:天寿、天色、天乐、天誉、天主权,以及天界的色、声、香、味、触。”巴利
‘‘Atha kho sakko devānamindo asītiyā devatāsahassehi saddhiṃ yenāyasmā mahāmoggallāno tenupasaṅkami…pe… ekamantaṃ ṭhitaṃ kho sakkaṃ devānamindaṃ āyasmā mahāmoggallāno etadavoca ‘sādhu kho, devānaminda, buddhasaraṇagamanaṃ hoti, buddhasaraṇagamanahetu kho, devānaminda, evamidhekacce sattā kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjanti. Te aññe deve dasahi ṭhānehi adhigaṇhanti dibbena āyunā dibbena vaṇṇena sukhena yasena ādhipateyyena dibbehi rūpehi saddehi gandhehi rasehi phoṭṭhabbehī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.341).
这个道理对法和僧也是一样。巴利
Esa nayo dhamme saṅghe ca.
另外,也要依据《毗罗摩经》等,来了知皈依的果报差别。就像《毗罗摩经》(增支部9.20)里说的:婆罗门毗罗摩布施了八万四千个金盆、银盆、铜盆,每个都有四分之一迦梨沙那么大,依次装满银、金、黄金;还有八万四千头象、八万四千匹马、八万四千辆车、八万四千头乳牛、八万四千名少女、八万四千张床座、八万四千俱胝件衣服,全都用各种装饰品庄严;还有无法计量的硬食、软食等种种食物。他连续七年七个月不间断地举行这样的大布施。可是,布施给一位入流者,果报比这更大;布施给一百位入流者,不如布施给一位一来者;布施给一位一来者,不如布施给一位不来者;布施给一位不来者,不如布施给一位阿罗汉;布施给一位阿罗汉,不如布施给一位独觉佛;布施给一位独觉佛,不如布施给正等觉者;布施给正等觉者,不如布施给以佛为首的僧团;布施给以佛为首的僧团,不如为四方僧团建造寺院;而建造寺院,又不如皈依,皈依的果报更大。这是经中明确宣说的。对此确实这样说过:巴利
Apica velāmasuttādivasenapi saraṇagamanassa phalaviseso veditabbo. Tathā hi velāmasutte (a. ni. 9.20) ‘‘karīsassa catutthabhāgappamāṇānaṃ caturāsītisahassasaṅkhyānaṃ suvaṇṇapātirūpiyapātikaṃsapātīnaṃ yathākkamaṃ rūpiyasuvaṇṇahiraññapūrānaṃ sabbālaṅkārapaṭimaṇḍitānaṃ caturāsītiyā hatthisahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā assasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā rathasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā dhenusahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā kaññāsahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā pallaṅkasahassānaṃ caturāsītiyā vatthakoṭisahassānaṃ aparimāṇassa ca khajjabhojjādibhedassa āhārassa pariccajanavasena sattamāsādhikāni satta saṃvaccharāni nirantaraṃ pavattavelāmamahādānato ekassa sotāpannassa dinnaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato sataṃ sotāpannānaṃ dinnadānato ekassa sakadāgāmino, tato ekassa anāgāmino, tato ekassa arahato, tato ekassa paccekasambuddhassa, tato sammāsambuddhassa, tato buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa dinnadānaṃ mahapphalataraṃ, tato cātuddisaṃ saṅghaṃ uddissa vihārakaraṇaṃ, tato saraṇagamanaṃ mahapphalatara’’nti pakāsitaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ –
居士,婆罗门毗罗摩所行的那场大布施,如果让人供养一位具足正见的人,这个果报比那场大布施更大。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ, gahapati, velāmo brāhmaṇo dānaṃ adāsi mahādānaṃ, yo cekaṃ diṭṭhisampannaṃ bhojeyya, idaṃ tato mahapphalatara’’nti (a. ni. 9.20) –
Ādi. 应当这样理解皈依的果报。巴利
Ādi. Evaṃ saraṇagamanaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ.
皈依的杂染与类别之论巴利
Saraṇagamanasaṃkilesabhedakathā
在这里,世间皈依会因为对三宝的无知、疑惑、邪见等而变得染污,它没有大光明,不光亮,不清净,不洁白,也不广大,不殊胜。这里所说的无知,就是对三宝功德的不了知,对三宝迷惑不解。所谓疑惑,就是“佛到底存在还是不存在”这样的犹豫不决。所谓邪见,应当理解为:把三宝的功德颠倒地执取为没有功德。而出世间的皈依则没有杂染。世间皈依的坏灭又有两种:有过失的和没有过失的。其中,有过失的皈依是因为皈依其他导师等而自我出卖,这种皈依带来不好的果报。没有过失的皈依则发生在命终之时。因为世间皈依就像受持学处一样,未设定时间限制,只以寿命为终点,所以它会随着五蕴的坏灭而坏灭,这种坏灭因为没有果报,所以不算有结果。出世间的皈依则根本没有坏灭,因为即使在来世,圣弟子也不会皈依其他导师。应当这样理解皈依的杂染和坏灭。巴利
Tattha ca lokiyasaraṇagamanaṃ tīsu vatthūsu aññāṇasaṃsayamicchāñāṇādīhi saṃkilissati, na mahājutikaṃ, na ujjalaṃ aparisuddhaṃ apariyodātaṃ hoti, na mahāvipphāraṃ anuḷāraṃ. Ettha ca aññāṇaṃ nāma vatthuttayassa guṇānaṃ ajānanaṃ tattha sammoho. ‘‘Buddho nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā vicikicchā saṃsayo. Micchāñāṇaṃ nāma tassa guṇānaṃ aguṇabhāvaparikappanena viparītaggāhoti veditabbaṃ. Lokuttarassa pana saraṇagamanassa natthi saṃkileso. Lokiyassa ca saraṇagamanassa duvidho bhedo sāvajjo anavajjo ca. Tattha sāvajjo aññasatthārādīsu attaniyyātanādīhi hoti, so aniṭṭhaphalo. Anavajjo pana kālakiriyāya hoti. Lokiyañhi saraṇagamanaṃ sikkhāpadasamādānaṃ viya aggahitakālaparicchedakaṃ jīvitapariyantameva hoti, tasmā tassa khandhabhedena bhedo, so avipākattā aphalo. Lokuttarassa pana nevatthi bhedo. Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako aññaṃ satthāraṃ na uddisatīti. Evaṃ saraṇagamanassa saṃkileso ca bhedo ca veditabbo.
为什么这里没有提到清净呢?难道阐明清净不也是对这(皈依)的善巧吗?确实如此,不过清净的含义已经通过讲杂染而从义理上显示出来了,所以没有单独提出来。因为对于无明等杂染的成因,通过让它们完全不再生起,以及断除已经生起的,这就是清净。这样,在这里应当理解“皈依、皈依之行”等等的详细展开。接着,为了说明这里不讲述上述详细展开的理由,他说了“但若在此说此”等话。其中,“皈依解说”是指《沙门果经》中所说的皈依解说。巴利
Kasmā panettha vodānaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu vodānavibhāvanāpi tattha kosallāya hotīti? Saccametaṃ, taṃ pana saṃkilesaggahaṇena atthato dīpitaṃ hotīti na gahitaṃ. Yāni hi tesaṃ saṃkilesakāraṇāni aññāṇādīni , tesaṃ sabbena sabbaṃ anuppādanena uppannānañca pahānena vodānaṃ hotīti. Evamettha ‘‘saraṇaṃ saraṇagamana’’ntiādīnaṃ papañco veditabbo. Imassa pana yathāvuttapapañcassa idha avacane kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘so pana idha vuccamāno’’tiādi. Tattha saraṇavaṇṇanatoti sāmaññaphalasutte vuttasaraṇavaṇṇanato.
近事男身份的说明巴利
Upāsakattapaṭivedanākathā
“应当这样受持”意思是“应当这样了知”。在这里,“谁是近事男?”是在问他的体性,因此接下来就是在问:具有什么样特征的人才是近事男?“为什么?”是在问原因。借此说明:是以什么样的生起相,使“近事男”这个词固定用在那个人身上。所以说“为什么称为近事男?”因为一个词所表示对象的生起相,正是那个含义成为这种状态的原因。“他的戒是什么?”意思是:这个近事男的戒是怎样的?具备多少戒才算是具戒者?“他的活命是什么?”意思是:这个近事男的正确谋生方式是什么?而正命是通过远离邪命来实现的,所以对此也加以分别说明。“什么是败坏?”意思是:什么戒或什么活命的败坏?因为紧接着要说的就是规则或禁止。“什么是成就?”这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Evaṃdhāretūti evaṃ jānātūti attho. Ettha ko upāsakoti sarūpapucchā, tasmā kiṃlakkhaṇo upāsakoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kasmāti hetupucchā. Tena kena pavattinimittena upāsakasaddo tasmiṃ puggale niruḷhoti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘kasmā upāsakoti vuccatī’’ti. Saddassa hi abhidheyyapavattinimittaṃ tadatthassa tabbhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kimassa sīlanti kīdisaṃ assa upāsakassa sīlaṃ, kittakena sīlenāyaṃ sīlasampanno nāma hotīti attho. Ko ājīvoti ko assa sammāājīvo. So pana micchājīvassa parivajjanena hotīti sopi vibhajīyati. Kā vipattīti kassa sīlassa ājīvassa vā vipatti. Anantarassa hi vidhi vā paṭisedho vā. Sampattīti etthāpi eseva nayo.
这个杂项应当如何理解?回答是:所谓“近事男”是谁?就是在刹帝利等种姓当中,任何已经皈依三宝的在家人。这里的关键条件就是皈依本身,而不是种姓之类的差别。正如经文所说:“摩诃男,一个人皈依佛、皈依法、皈依僧,摩诃男,到这一步,就是近事男。”巴利
Idaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ veditabbanti kathaṃ veditabbaṃ? Vuccate – ko upāsakoti khattiyādīsu yo koci tisaraṇaṃ gato gahaṭṭho. Saraṇagamanameva hettha kāraṇaṃ, na jātiādiviseso. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
为什么叫优婆塞?因为亲近奉事三宝。正是通过这样的皈依,以及对三宝恭敬、尊重、崇敬地亲近奉事,才这样说。因为他亲近奉事佛,所以是优婆塞;亲近奉事法,所以是优婆塞;亲近奉事僧,所以是优婆塞。巴利
Kasmā upāsakoti ratanattayaupāsanato. Teneva saraṇagamanena tattha ca sakkaccakiriyāya ādaragāravabahumānādiyogena payirupāsanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. So hi buddhaṃ upāsatīti upāsako. Dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ upāsatīti upāsako.
他的戒是什么?就是五种远离。这里所说的“远离”,是指杀生等恶行中的坏戒,被称为“怨敌”;因为对这种怨敌的思量、杀害和毁灭,所以五种远离称为“离”,因为这种戒以远离为根本。正如经中所说:“摩诃男,当居士远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离诸酒放逸处,摩诃男,到这种程度,居士就是具戒者。”巴利
Kimassasīlanti pañca veramaṇiyo. Veramaṇiyoti cettha veraṃ vuccati pāṇātipātādīsu dussīlyaṃ, tassa mananato hananato vināsanato veramaṇiyo pañca viratiyo viratippadhānattā tassa sīlassa. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yato kho, mahānāma, upāsako pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hoti, adinnādānā, kāmesumicchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭivirato hoti. Ettāvatā kho, mahānāma, upāsako sīlavā hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.1033).
什么是活命?就是舍弃五种邪命买卖之后,如法、公平地维持生活。正如经中所说:比丘们,有五种买卖是优婆塞不应做的。是哪五种?武器买卖、人口买卖、肉类买卖、酒类买卖、毒药买卖。比丘们,这五种买卖是优婆塞不应做的。巴利
Ko ājīvoti pañca micchāvaṇijjā pahāya dhammena samena jīvitakappanaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā. Katamā pañca? Satthavaṇijjā sattavaṇijjā maṃsavaṇijjā majjavaṇijjā visavaṇijjā. Imā kho, bhikkhave, pañca vaṇijjā upāsakena akaraṇīyā’’ti (a. ni. 5.177).
这里说到,武器贸易是指自己制造武器货物,或者让别人制造,或者用各种方式取得现成的武器货物之后拿去贩卖。人口贸易是指贩卖人口。肉类贸易是指像屠夫等人那样,把鹿、猪之类的动物养大,处理好肉之后拿去贩卖。酒类贸易是指调制任何一种酒之后拿去贩卖。毒药贸易是指调制或收集毒药之后拿去贩卖。其中应当知道,武器贸易因为是以伤害他人为手段,所以说不应该做;人口贸易因为会使人失去自由身份;肉类和毒药贸易因为是以杀生为因;酒类贸易因为是一切放逸的根源。巴利
Ettha ca satthavaṇijjāti āvudhabhaṇḍaṃ katvā vā kāretvā vā yathākataṃ vā paṭilabhitvā tassa vikkayo. Sattavaṇijjāti manussavikkayo. Maṃsavaṇijjāti sūnakārādayo viya migasūkarādike posetvā maṃsaṃ sampādetvā vikkayo. Majjavaṇijjāti yaṃ kiñci majjaṃ yojetvā tassa vikkayo. Visavaṇijjāti visaṃ yojetvā saṅgahetvā vā tassa vikkayo. Tattha satthavaṇijjā paroparodhanimittatāya akaraṇīyā vuttā, sattavaṇijjā abhujissabhāvakaraṇato, maṃsavisavaṇijjā vadhahetuto, majjavaṇijjā pamādaṭṭhānatoti veditabbā.
什么是失坏?就是戒和谋生方式的失坏、破裂、败坏和毁损,这就是他的失坏。另外,凡是让他变成贱民、污垢、被人厌弃的东西,也应当知道就是他的失坏。从义理上说,这些就是无信等五种法。正如所说的——巴利
Kā vipattīti yā tasseva sīlassa ca ājīvassa ca vipatti bhedo kopo pakopo ca, ayamassa vipatti. Apica yāya esa caṇḍālo ceva hoti malañca paṭikuṭṭho ca, sāpissa vipattīti veditabbā. Te ca atthato assaddhiyādayo pañca dhammā honti. Yathāha –
比丘们,一个具足五种法的在家男信徒,就是在家信徒中的贱民、在家信徒中的污垢、在家信徒中的渣滓。是哪五种呢?他没有信仰,不持戒,迷信吉兆,相信吉兆而不相信业,到佛法之外去寻找应受供养的人,并且先在那里做供养。巴利
‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakacaṇḍālo ca hoti upāsakamalañca upāsakapaṭikuṭṭho ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Assaddho hoti, dussīlo hoti, kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, maṅgalaṃ pacceti, no kammaṃ , ito ca bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, tattha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.175).
在这里,“近事男中的卑劣者”就是指低劣的近事男。对佛陀等以及业与业果的信仰的反面,就是无信、邪胜解;具足如上所说的无信,就是无信者。依照前面所说的坏戒和坏正命,就是恶戒者。“凭这种所见等,这叫做吉祥”——如此具足凡愚所构想出来的、被称为迷信的所见、所闻、所觉的吉兆,就是迷信吉兆者。“信吉兆”就是相信所见吉兆等各种吉兆。“而非业”就是不相信业本身。“从此之外”就是在此一切知佛陀的教法之外的外道中。“寻求应供者”就是把恶行者当作应受供养者来寻求。“先行作福”就是首先行布施、恭敬等善业。在这里,把寻求应供者和先行作福合为一事,应当知道就是所说的五法。巴利
Ettha ca upāsakapaṭikuṭṭhoti upāsakanihīno. Buddhādīsu kammakammaphalesu ca saddhāvipariyāyo assaddhiyaṃ micchādhimokkho, yathāvuttena assaddhiyena samannāgato assaddho. Yathāvuttasīlavipattiājīvavipattivasena dussīlo. ‘‘Iminā diṭṭhādinā idaṃ nāma maṅgalaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ bālajanaparikappitakotūhalasaṅkhātena diṭṭhasutamutamaṅgalena samannāgato kotūhalamaṅgaliko. Maṅgalaṃ paccetīti diṭṭhamaṅgalādibhedaṃ maṅgalameva pattiyāyati. No kammanti kammassakataṃ no pattiyāyati. Itobahiddhāti ito sabbaññubuddhasāsanato bahiddhā bāhirakasamaye. Dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesatīti duppaṭipannaṃ dakkhiṇārahasaññī gavesati. Pubbakāraṃ karotīti dānamānanādikaṃ kusalakiriyaṃ paṭhamataraṃ karoti. Ettha ca dakkhiṇeyyapaayesanapubbakāre ekaṃ katvā pañca dhammā veditabbā.
所谓“成就”,就是指他的戒成就和正命成就,以及那些让他成为珍宝等的信等五种法。正如所说的——巴利
Kāsampattīti sāva tassa sīlasampadā ca ājīvasampadā ca sampatti, ye cassa ratanabhāvādikarā saddhādayo pañca dhammā. Yathāha –
比丘们,具足五种法的在家男信徒,就是在家男信徒中的珍宝,就是在家男信徒中的红莲花,就是在家男信徒中的白莲花。是哪五种法呢?他有信仰,持守戒行,不迷信吉兆,相信业果而不信吉兆,不在这个教法之外去寻找应当供养的人,并且在这个教法之内先做布施。巴利
‘‘Pañcahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato upāsako upāsakaratanañca hoti upāsakapadumañca upāsakapuṇḍarīko ca. Katamehi pañcahi? Saddho hoti, sīlavā hoti, na kotūhalamaṅgaliko hoti, kammaṃ pacceti, no maṅgalaṃ, na ito bahiddhā dakkhiṇeyyaṃ pariyesati, idha ca pubbakāraṃ karotī’’ti.
在这里,因为能让四众弟子都生起欢喜,所以近事男本身就是宝,称为近事男宝;因为具足功德庄严、名声远播、戒香芬芳,所以近事男本身就是莲花,称为近事男莲花;同样,近事男白莲也应这样理解。这里剩下的内容,应按照前面讲过失时所说的相反情况来理解。像这样,“谁是近事男”等这些杂项内容,应当详细地了解。然而,为了说明为什么不在这里把这些杂项内容展开来讲,他说了“因为那会过于沉重”等话。巴利
Ettha ca catunnampi parisānaṃ ratijananaṭṭhena upāsakova ratanaṃ upāsakaratanaṃ, guṇasobhākittisaddasugandhatāhi upāsakova padumaṃ upāsakapadumaṃ, tathā upāsakapuṇḍarīko ca veditabbo. Sesamettha vipattiyaṃ vuttavipariyāyena viññeyyaṃ. Evamidaṃ ‘‘ko upāsako’’tiādikaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ vitthārato veditabbaṃ. Imassa pana pakiṇṇakassa idha vitthāretvā avacane kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘taṃ atibhāriyakaraṇato’’tiādi.
“Ādimhīti”的意思是“在最初”。“Koṭiyanti”的意思是“在最终的边际”。“Vihāraggenāti”的意思是“以住处的某一部分”,也就是“住在这个房间的人得到这个菠萝蜜果实”等等,按各自居住处的部分来理解。“Ajjatanti”就是“今天”的意思。“Pāṇehi upetanti”通过这个说明了他的皈依是尽形寿的,说了“只要我的生命还在延续”等等之后,又以生命供养三宝并守护皈依。为了阐明那位婆罗门心中生起的意图,他说了“我”等话。所谓“Pāṇehi upetanti”,意思是:只要我的生命还在维持,皈依就还在;皈依不是仅仅靠嘴上说说,也不是仅仅一次心生起,而是以舍弃生命的程度尽形寿地皈依。这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Ādimhīti ādiatthe. Koṭiyanti pariyantakoṭiyaṃ. Vihāraggenāti ovarakakoṭṭhāsena, ‘‘imasmiṃ gabbhe vasantānaṃ idaṃ panasaphalaṃ pāpuṇātī’’tiādinā taṃtaṃvasanaṭṭhānakoṭṭhāsenāti attho. Ajjatanti ajja icceva attho. Pāṇehi upetanti iminā tassa saraṇagamanassa āpāṇakoṭikataṃ dassento ‘‘yāva me jīvitaṃ pavattatī’’tiādīni vatvā puna jīvitenapahaṃ vatthuttayaṃ paṭipūjento saraṇagamanañca rakkhāmīti uppannaṃ tassa brāhmaṇassa adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ahañhī’’tiādimāha. Pāṇehi upetanti hi yāva me pāṇā dharanti, tāva saraṇaṃ upetaṃ, upento na vācāmattena na ekavāraṃ cittuppādanamattena, atha kho pāṇānaṃ pariccajanavasena yāvajīvaṃ upetanti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“请接受”就是“请悦纳”的意思。而这种悦纳,是内心中的领受,所以(注释者)说“请领受”。“身肢”:他们说身体本身就是肢,或者身体的肢分如头等就是身肢,这里说的是头等身体的部分。“语肢”:就是“好,可以”这类话的肢分、组成部分。而语的发动,应当知道就是语的生起。“在内部”:就是在自己心相续的内部。“令忍生起”:就是使忍辱运转起来,生起欢喜之意。也有“持忍”这样的读法,意思是把生起的欢喜留在内部,不通过言语表露出来。巴利
Adhivāsetūti sādiyatu, taṃ pana sādiyanaṃ manasā sampaṭiggaho hotīti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchatū’’ti. Kāyaṅganti kāyameva aṅganti vadanti, kāyassa vā aṅgaṃ sīsādi kāyaṅgaṃ, sīsādi sarīrāvayavanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vācaṅganti ‘‘hotu sādhū’’ti evamādivācāya aṅgaṃ avayavaṃ. Vācaṅgassa copanaṃ vācāya pavattanamevāti veditabbaṃ. Abbhantareyevāti attano cittasantāneyeva. Khantiṃ cāretvāti khantiṃ pavattetvā, ruciṃ uppādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Khantiṃ dhāretvā’’tipi pāṭho, uppannaṃ ruciṃ abbhantareyeva dhāretvā vacībhedena apakāsetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
那么,毗兰若婆罗门又是怎么知道世尊默许的呢?他其实没办法直接看透世尊的心念活动,那为什么经文里说“了知世尊的默许”呢?虽然他没能力直接看透世尊的心念活动,但他擅长观察各种迹象,通过随顺和相违的推理方式,还是推断出来了。为了说明这一点,经文接着说“如果沙门乔达摩对我……”等等。“擅长观察各种迹象”,意思是善于辨认心念活动的迹象,也就是善于看穿对方的意图。“正面”,意思是面向,并不是背对世尊。“礼拜”,意思是以五体投地来礼敬。“十指合拢而闪耀”,是把两只手的十根手指并拢在巴利
Kathaṃ pana verañjo brāhmaṇo bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ aññāsi. Na hi tena sakkā bhagavato cittappavatti paccakkhato viññātuṃ, tasmā ‘‘bhagavato adhivāsanaṃ viditvā’’ti kasmā vuttanti ce? Kiñcāpi tena na sakkā cittappavatti paccakkhato viññātuṃ, tathāpi ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāya anvayabyatirekavasena anumānato aññāsīti dassento āha ‘‘sace me samaṇo gotamo’’tiādi. Ākārasallakkhaṇakusalatāyāti cittappavattiākāravijānane chekatāya, adhippāyavijānane kusalatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dasanakhasamodhānasamujjalanti dvīsu hatthesu dasannaṃ nakhānaṃ samodhānena ekībhāvena samujjalantaṃ. Añjalinti hatthapuṭaṃ. Paṭimukhoyevāti abhimukhoyeva, na bhagavato piṭṭhiṃ dassetvāti attho. Vanditvāti pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā.
16 在丰收时节,就是谷物成熟丰收的时候。在谷物极度便宜时,就是价格低到极点的时候,那时只要给出一点点东西,就能换到大量的早稻和晚稻,指的就是那样的时节。稻米等谷物是早稻,绿豆、黄豆等是晚稻。这里说的是以两种方式进行的努力,所以叫“二努力”。为了说明这是一个省略了中间词的依主释复合词,注释者说“以两种方式进行的努力”。Īhanaṃ īhitaṃ,Īhita这个词是表示动作的名词,所以说“Īhita就是活动”。其中,活动就是行为。那么这是谁的行为呢?注释者说“心的活动”,意思是心的行为、心的运用。因此注释者说“心的努力”。那么,这里Īhita怎么以两种方式进行呢?注释者说“我们能否得到”等。其中,“我们能否得到”这是就贫困者而说的。“我们能否活命,还是不能”这是就富者而说的,应当如此理解。Bhikkhamānā就是乞求。也有“Duhitikā”这样的读法。在那里也应当以同样的方式理解其义。因为以du替代dvi这个词,就有了这样的说明。或者,在这里以快乐不可能作任何努力,所以是苦的努力,即duhitikā,意思是生活艰难的努力。巴利
16.Susassakālepīti sampannasassakālepi. Atisamagghepīti atisayena appagghepi, yadā kiñcideva datvā bahuṃ pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇaṃ gaṇhanti, tādise kālepīti attho. Sāliādi dhaññaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ, muggamāsādi aparaṇṇaṃ. Dvidhā pavattaṃ īhitaṃ etthāti dvīhitikāti majjhapadalopībāhiratthasamāsoyamīti dassento āha ‘‘dvidhā pavattaīhitikā’’ti. Īhanaṃ īhitanti īhitasaddoyaṃ bhāvasādhanoti āha ‘‘īhitaṃ nāma iriyā’’ti. Tattha iriyāti kiriyā. Kassa panesā kiriyāti āha ‘‘cittairiyā’’ti, cittakiriyā cittappayogoti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘cittaīhā’’ti. Kathaṃ panettha īhitassa dvidhā pavattīti āha ‘‘lacchāma nu kho’’tiādi. Tattha lacchāma nu khoti idaṃ duggatānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Jīvituṃ vā sakkhissāma nu kho, noti idaṃ pana issarānaṃ vasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Bhikkhamānāti yācamānā. ‘‘Duhitikā’’tipi pāṭho. Tatthāpi vuttanayenevattho veditabbo. Dvi-saddassa hi du-saddādesenāyaṃ niddeso hoti. Dukkhaṃ vā īhitaṃ ettha na sakkā koci payogo sukhena kātunti duhitikā, dukkarajīvitappayogāti attho.
把“du”这个音里的 u 改成 va,就成了“dvīhitikā”,这是另一种解说,所以他说“或者”等等。“byādhi”“rogo”这些词,是“āturatā”(患病)的同义词。由此说明,所谓“setaṭṭikā”(白条病)是一种病。不过这种病是由虫害引起的。据说有一种虫子会钻进稻茎中间的节,因为被它钻穿,长出来的稻穗也吸不到乳浆,所以他说“断乳”等等。巴利
Du-sadde vā ukārassa vakāraṃ katvā dvīhitikāti ayaṃ niddesoti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Byādhi rogoti etāni ‘‘āturatā’’ti imassa vevacanāni. Tena setaṭṭikā nāma ekā rogajātīti dasseti. So pana rogo pāṇakadosena sambhavati. Eko kira pāṇako nāḷamajjhagataṃ gaṇṭhiṃ vijjhati, yena viddhattā nikkhantampi sālisīsaṃ khīraṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Tenāha ‘‘pacchinnakhīra’’ntiādi.
“Vuttasassa”说的是已经播下去的谷物。“Tattha”是指在毗兰若。“这里所说的只是禾秆”,意思是这里只说到禾秆而已;这是省略了前一个词的末分而作的说明。因此说“只是禾秆生成”。那里所播下的,只成了禾秆,果实并没有长出来,这就是意思。而“sampajjati”这个词,在这里表明“salākāvuttā”中的“vutta”是“成就、产生”的意思。“以禾秆”是指用竹子、藤、棕榈叶等做成的签条。“在谷物售卖者之处”是指售卖谷物者,即在他们附近。“在买主之处”是指购买谷物的人。“买后”是指拿取之后。“在谷物处理处”是指仓库附近,即量度谷物之处。“paggaha”是指所执持之物,即钵。“为团食而行乞后”是指以行乞为因缘。巴利
Vuttasassanti vapitasassaṃ. Tatthāti verañjāyaṃ. Salākāmattaṃ vuttaṃ etthāti salākāvuttā, purimapade uttarapadalopenāyaṃ niddeso. Tenāha ‘‘salākā eva sampajjatī’’ti. Yaṃ tattha vuttaṃ vāpitaṃ, taṃ salākāmattameva ahosi, phalaṃ na jāyatīti attho. Sampajjatīti ca iminā ‘‘salākāvuttā’’ti etthāyaṃ vuttasaddo nipphattiatthoti dasseti. Salākāyāti veḷuvilīvatālapaṇṇādīhi katasalākāya. Dhaññavikkayakānaṃ santikanti dhaññaṃ vikkiṇantīti dhaññavikkayakā, tesaṃ samīpanti attho. Kayakesūti dhaññagaṇhanakesu. Kiṇitvāti gahetvā. Dhaññakaraṇaṭṭhāneti koṭṭhāgārassa samīpaṭṭhāne, dhaññaminanaṭṭhāneti vuttaṃ hoti . Vaṇṇajjhakkhanti kahāpaṇaparikkhakaṃ. Nasukarā uñchena paggahena yāpetunti paggayhatīti paggaho, patto. Tena paggahena pattenāti attho, pattaṃ gahetvā bhikkhācariyāya yāpetuṃ na sakkāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘paggahena yo uñcho’’tiādi. Nasukarāti sukarabhāvo ettha natthīti nasukarā. Piṇḍāya caritvāti piṇḍāya caraṇahetu. Hetuatthepi hi tvāsaddameke icchanti.
从北道来的人,或者以北道为住处的人,按语法构词规则本来应该说成“uttarāpathakā”,却被说成了“uttarāhakā”。因此经文里说“北道居民”等等。或者也可以认为,巴利原文本来就是“uttarāpathakā”。不过有些人用另一种方式解释这个词的意思,比如说“带来北方殊胜物品的人叫uttarāhakā”,或者说“带来更高价钱的人叫uttarāhakā”,等等。“在马匹起身之处”是指产马的地方。“Verañjaṃ”是指在毗兰若,这里的词形是处格用了业格的形式。“Mandiraṃ”是指马厩。“以圆形马厩闻名”是说因为建成圆形的样子,所以被人们知道是圆形马厩。这样建成的马厩很多,所以用了复数来表达。也有人说,每十匹马住的地方,各算一个圆形马厩。“不能承受长途”是指不能长时间维持,也就是说不能长久持续下去。巴利
Uttarāpathato āgatā, uttarāpatho vā nivāso etesanti uttarāpathakāti vattabbe niruttinayena ‘‘uttarāhakā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uttarāpathavāsikā’’tiādi. ‘‘Uttarāpathakā’’icceva vā pāḷipāṭho veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘uttaraṃ visiṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ āharantīti uttarāhakā, uttaraṃ vā adhikaṃ agghaṃ nentīti uttarāhakā’’tiādinā aññena pakārena atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Assānaṃ uṭṭhānaṭṭhāneti assānaṃ ākaraṭṭhāne. Verañjanti verañjāyaṃ. Bhummatthe hetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Mandiranti assasālaṃ. Assamaṇḍalikāyoti paññāyiṃsūti parimaṇḍalākārena katattā assamaṇḍalikāyoti pākaṭā ahesuṃ. Evaṃ katānañca assasālānaṃ bahuttā bahuvacananiddeso kato. Dasannaṃ dasannaṃ assānaṃ vasanokāso ekekā assamaṇḍalikātipi vadanti. Addhānakkhamā na hontīti dīghakālaṃ pavattetuṃ khamā na honti, na cirakālappavattinoti vuttaṃ hoti.
恒河南边是不合适的地方,北边是合适的地方,基于这个意思才说“因为他们不……”等等。生在恒河南岸的人,就是南道地方的人。“我们的佛陀”——这样把佛陀当成自己所有的,就是“执佛为己有者”。其余几句也是这样理解。“准备了”——意思是办成。“以常供食之概略”指以常供食的方式。“清晨时分”——这里的处格是当作业格用,所以说“意思是清晨时分”。或者这是表示持续关联的业格,为了说明这一点,就按持续关联之义如何成立,那样显示其义而说“或者清晨时分”等等。Evanti(“这样”)是指在如此按后文所说方式解释其义时。难道住在精舍里的人不也是穿着下衣而坐的吗?那么为什么说“穿着”呢?回答说“以精舍穿着换衣之故”等等。精舍穿着换衣,应理解为:在精舍安坐时所穿的下衣,又在入村时摇动、从这边那边整理好,郑重地穿着。因此说“因为他们在那之前未曾未穿过”。Pattacīvaramādāyāti——拿了钵与衣。这里的“拿”不仅仅是用手,而是以任何方式执持,为了说明这一点,就按可能之义作解释:“以手持钵”等等。巴利
Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇā disā appatirūpadeso, uttarā disā patirūpadesoti adhippāyenāha ‘‘na hi te’’tiādi. Gaṅgāya dakkhiṇatīrajātā dakkhiṇāpathamanussā. ‘‘Amhākaṃ buddho’’ti evaṃ buddhaṃ mamāyantīti buddhamāmakā. Evaṃ sesesupi. Paṭiyādetunti sampādetuṃ. Niccabhattasaṅkhepenāti niccabhattākārena. Pubbaṇhasamayanti idaṃ bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘pubbaṇhasamayetiattho’’ti. Accantasaṃyoge vā idaṃ upayogavacananti dassetuṃ yathā accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati, tathā atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘pubbaṇhe vā samaya’’ntiādi. Evanti evaṃ pacchā vuttanayena atthe vuccamāne. Nanu ca vihāre nisīdantāpi antaravāsakaṃ nivāsetvāva nisīdanti, tasmā ‘‘nivāsetvā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasenā’’tiādi. Vihāranivāsanaparivattanañca vihāre nisinnakāle nivatthampi puna gāmappavesanasamaye cāletvā ito cito ca saṇṭhapetvā sakkaccaṃ nivāsanamevāti veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi te tato pubbe anivatthā ahesu’’nti. Pattacīvaramādāyāti pattañca cīvarañca gahetvā. Gahaṇañcettha na kevalaṃ hattheneva, atha kho yena kenaci ākārena dhāraṇamevāti dassento yathāsambhavamatthayojanaṃ karoti ‘‘pattaṃ hatthehī’’tiādinā.
“无论走到哪里”是指在各处圆形马厩中,走到哪里就算哪里。在臼里捣了又捣再吃——这里要问:那些比丘为什么自己这样做来吃呢?难道得到了之后,让净人煮粥或饭,或者自己煮来吃,就不可以吗?所以解释说“长老们没有净人”等等。说明了比丘们不管如法不如法都这样做是不合适的之后,又显示这也是不如法的,所以说“也不许可”。因为不携带锅碗等器具,没有很多物品,所以说“生活轻便”。“少欲务”是指除沙门法之外,不热衷于其他事务。“各自所得的一份”是指各自的那一份。“巴利
Gatagataṭṭhāneti assamaṇḍalikāsu sampattasampattaṭṭhāne. Udukkhale koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā paribhuñjantīti ettha kasmā pana te bhikkhū sayameva evaṃ katvā paribhuñjanti, kimevaṃ laddhaṃ kappiyakārakehi yāguṃ vā bhattaṃ vā pacāpetvā sayaṃ vā pacitvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘therānaṃ koci kappiyakārako natthī’’tiādi. Kappiyākappiyabhāvaṃ anapekkhitvā bhikkhūnaṃ evaṃ kātuṃ sāruppaṃ na hotīti vatvā puna akappiyabhāvampi dassento āha ‘‘na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti. Bhājanādipariharaṇavasena bahubhaṇḍikatāya abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘sallahukavuttitā’’ti. Sakaṃ sakaṃ paṭivīsanti attano attano koṭṭhāsaṃ. Appossukkāti samaṇadhammato aññattha nirussāhā. Tadupiyanti tadanurūpaṃ. Pisatīti cuṇṇeti. Puññañāṇavisesehi kattabbakammassa manāpatā hotīti āha ‘‘puññavatā’’tiādi. Nanti naṃ patthapulakaṃ. ‘‘Na tato paṭṭhāyā’’ti vacanato tato pubbe bhagavato piṇḍāya caraṇampi dassitanti veditabbaṃ.
“得到了”就是“获得之后”。也有人写作“已得”,意思是并没有得到做侍者的机会。那么,长老是什么时候得到做侍者的机会的呢?据说,有一次世尊和那伽沙摩罗长老一起在旅途中行走,来到一个岔路口。长老离开道路说:“世尊,我走这条路。”世尊就对他说:“来吧,比丘,我们走这条路。”他说:“那这样,世尊,请您拿好您的衣钵,我走这条路。”说完就开始把衣钵往地上放。世尊说:“拿来吧,比丘。”接过衣钵就走了。那位比丘走另一条路时,盗贼抢走了他的衣钵,还打破了他的头。他想:“现在世尊是我的依靠,没有别人了。”于是流着血来到世尊面前。世尊问:“比丘,这是怎么回事?”他就把事情的经过禀告了。世尊安慰他说:“比丘,别担心,我们正是为了阻止这件事才那样做的。”巴利
Laddhāti labhitvā. ‘‘Laddho’’ti vā pāṭho, upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ neva laddhoti attho. Kadā pana thero upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhoti? Vuccate (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.11; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.219-223) – ekadā kira bhagavā nāgasamālattherena saddhiṃ addhānamaggappaṭipanno dvedhāpathaṃ patto. Thero maggā ukkamma ‘‘bhagavā ahaṃ iminā maggena gacchāmī’’ti āha. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘ehi bhikkhu, iminā gacchāmā’’ti āha. So ‘‘handa bhagavā tumhākaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhatha, ahaṃ iminā gacchāmī’’ti vatvā pattacīvaraṃ chamāyaṃ ṭhapetuṃ āraddho. Atha bhagavā ‘‘āhara bhikkhū’’ti vatvā pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gato. Tassapi bhikkhuno itarena maggena gacchato corā pattacīvarañceva hariṃsu, sīsañca bhindiṃsu. So ‘‘bhagavā dāni me paṭisaraṇaṃ, na añño’’ti cintetvā lohitena gaḷantena bhagavato santikaṃ āgami. ‘‘Kimidaṃ bhikkhū’’ti ca vutte taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘mā cintayi bhikkhu, etaṃ kāraṇaṃyeva te nivārayimhā’’ti vatvā samassāsesi.
有一次,世尊和弥醯长老一起前往东竹鹿苑的姜图村。在那里,弥醯在姜图村乞食后,看见河边有一座令人欢喜的芒果园,就对世尊说:“世尊,请您拿着衣钵,我要在这座芒果园里修沙门法。”世尊再三劝阻,他还是去了,结果被不善的念头缠住,回来以后把这件事报告给世尊。世尊说:“正是因为预见到这件事,我们才劝阻你。”然后世尊渐次前往舍卫城。在那里,世尊坐在香室精舍中铺设好的殊胜佛座上,被比丘僧团围绕,对比丘们说:“比丘们,我现在已经年老了。有些比丘听我说‘我们走这条路’,却走另一条路;有些比丘把我的衣钵丢在地上。你们应该知道那位一直侍奉我的比丘。”比丘们心中生起了对法的警策。这时,舍利弗尊者起身,礼敬世尊后说:“世尊,我正是因为希求您这样的境界,才在百千劫以上的无数劫中圆满诸波罗蜜。像我这样有大智慧的人,难道不适合做侍者吗?我来侍奉您。”世尊拒绝他说:“够了,舍利弗。你所安住的地方不会空虚无益,你的教导与诸佛的教导相似,我不需要你来承担侍者的事。”用同样的方式,以大目犍连为首,八十位大弟子都起身请求。世尊全都拒绝了。巴利
Ekadā pana bhagavā meghiyattherena saddhiṃ pācīnavaṃsamigadāye jantugāmaṃ agamāsi. Tatrāpi meghiyo jantugāme piṇḍāya caritvā nadītīre pāsādikaṃ ambavanaṃ disvā ‘‘bhagavā tumhākaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhatha, ahaṃ etasmiṃ ambavane samaṇadhammaṃ karomī’’ti vatvā bhagavatā tikkhattuṃ nivāriyamānopi gantvā akusalavitakkehi anvāsatto paccāgantvā taṃ pavattiṃ ārocesi. Tampi bhagavā ‘‘idameva te kāraṇaṃ sallakkhayitvā nivārayimhā’’ti vatvā anupubbena sāvatthiṃ agamāsi. Tattha gandhakuṭipariveṇe paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘bhikkhave, idānimhi mahallako, ekacce bhikkhū ‘iminā maggena gacchāmā’ti vutte aññena gacchanti, ekacce mayhaṃ pattacīvaraṃ bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipanti, mayhaṃ nibaddhupaṭṭhākaṃ bhikkhuṃ jānāthā’’ti. Bhikkhūnaṃ dhammasaṃvego udapādi. Athāyasmā sāriputto uṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, tumheyeva patthayamāno satasahassakappādhikaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūresiṃ, nanu mādiso mahāpañño upaṭṭhāko nāma vaṭṭati, ahaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti āha. Taṃ bhagavā ‘‘alaṃ, sāriputta, yassaṃ disāyaṃ tvaṃ viharasi, asuññāyeva sā disā, tava ovādo buddhānaṃ ovādasadiso, na me tayā upaṭṭhākakiccaṃ atthī’’ti paṭikkhipi. Etenevupāyena mahāmoggallānaṃ ādiṃ katvā asītimahāsāvakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Sabbe bhagavā paṭikkhipi.
阿难长老却只是默不作声地坐着。于是比丘们对他说:“贤友,僧团正在请求侍者的人选,你也去请求吧。”阿难说:“贤友,请求得来的位置算什么呢?难道导师看不见我吗?如果他愿意,他会说‘让阿难来侍奉我’。”这时世尊说:“比丘们,不必由别人去鼓动阿难,他自己明白之后就会来侍奉我。”于是比丘们说:“起来吧,贤友阿难,起来吧,贤友阿难,向十力尊请求侍者之位吧。”长老起身后,提出了四个拒绝条件和四个请求条件,一共八项。巴利
Ānandatthero pana tuṇhīyeva nisīdi. Atha naṃ bhikkhū āhaṃsu ‘‘āvuso, bhikkhusaṅgho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ yācati, tvampi yācāhī’’ti. Yācitvā laddhaṭṭhānaṃ nāma āvuso kīdisaṃ hoti, kiṃ maṃ satthā na passati, sace rocessati, ‘‘ānando maṃ upaṭṭhātū’’ti vakkhatīti. Atha bhagavā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, ānando aññena ussāhetabbo, sayameva jānitvā maṃ upaṭṭhahissatī’’ti āha. Tato bhikkhū ‘‘uṭṭhehi āvuso ānanda, uṭṭhehi, āvuso ānanda, dasabalaṃ upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ yācāhī’’ti āhaṃsu. Thero uṭṭhahitvā cattāro paṭikkhepe ca catasso ca āyācanāti aṭṭha vare yāci.
有四种拒绝,名叫:他说:“尊者世尊,如果世尊不把自己得到的殊胜衣给我,不把乞来的食物给我,不允许我住在同一间香室,不接受邀请前往时也不带我去——这样我才侍奉世尊。”世尊问:“阿难,你在这里看到了什么过患?”他回答说:“尊者,如果我得到这些东西,就会有人议论说:‘阿难享用着十力尊所得的殊胜衣,享用着乞来的食物,住在同一间香室,随同赴一处邀请;他得到这些利益才侍奉如来,像这样侍奉的人有什么了不起呢?’”他请求了这四种拒绝。巴利
Cattāropaṭikkhepā nāma ‘‘sace me, bhante bhagavā, attanā laddhaṃ paṇītaṃ cīvaraṃ na dassati , piṇḍapātaṃ na dassati, ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vasituṃ na dassati, nimantanaṃ gahetvā na gamissati, evāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṃ panettha, ānanda, ādīnavaṃ addasā’’ti vutte āha ‘‘sacāhaṃ, bhante, imāni vatthūni labhissāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘ānando dasabalena laddhaṃ paṇītaṃ cīvaraṃ paribhuñjati, piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjati, ekagandhakuṭiyaṃ vasati, ekanimantanaṃ gacchati, etaṃ lābhaṃ labhanto tathāgataṃ upaṭṭhāti, ko evaṃ upaṭṭhahato bhāro’’’ti. Ime cattāro paṭikkhepe yāci.
阿难提出了四个请求。他说:“尊者,如果我代您接受邀请后,您肯赴约;如果远方国土、远方地区的人前来拜见世尊时,我能在他到达的那一刻就引他去见世尊;如果我心中生起疑惑时,能立刻前去亲近世尊;还有,世尊在我不在场时所说的法,能回来再为我讲一遍——这样我就来侍奉世尊。”世尊问他:“阿难,你在这里看到了什么好处?”他回答说:“尊者,这里有具足信心的善家子弟,因为没有机会见到世尊,就来对我说:‘尊者阿难,请您明天和世尊一起到我们家来应供。’如果世尊不去那里,我就无法在他们盼望的那一刻引他们见世尊、消除他们的疑惑,就会有人议论说:‘阿难侍奉十力尊有什么用呢?世尊连这点帮助都不给他。’还有,当我不在场时,他们会问我:‘贤友阿难,这首偈颂、这部经、这个本生故事是在哪里说的?’如果我答不上来,就会有人议论说:‘贤友,你连这些都不知道,那你为什么像影子一样长年累月跟在世尊身边不离开呢?’所以,我希望世尊在我不在场时所说的法,也能再为我讲一遍。”他提出了这四个请求,世尊都答应了他。就这样,他获得了这八项恩惠,成为常随侍者。巴利
Catasso āyācanā nāma ‘‘sace, bhante bhagavā, mayā gahitaṃ nimantanaṃ gamissati, sacāhaṃ tiroraṭṭhā tirojanapadā bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgataparisaṃ āgatakkhaṇe eva bhagavantaṃ dassetuṃ lacchāmi, yadā me kaṅkhā uppajjati, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamituṃ lacchāmi, tathā yaṃ bhagavā mayhaṃ parammukhaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, taṃ āgantvā mayhaṃ kathessati, evāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kaṃ panettha, ānanda, ānisaṃsaṃ passasī’’ti vutte āha ‘‘idha, bhante, saddhā kulaputtā bhagavato okāsaṃ alabhantā maṃ evaṃ vadanti ‘sveva, bhante ānanda, bhagavatā saddhiṃ amhākaṃ ghare bhikkhaṃ gaṇheyyāthā’ti. Sace bhagavā tattha na gamissati, icchitakkhaṇeyeva parisaṃ dassetuṃ kaṅkhañca vinodetuṃ okāsaṃ na lacchāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘kiṃ ānando dasabalaṃ upaṭṭhāti, ettakampissa anuggahaṃ bhagavā na karotī’ti. Bhagavato ca parammukhā maṃ pucchissanti ‘ayaṃ, āvuso ānanda, gāthā idaṃ suttaṃ idaṃ jātakaṃ kattha desita’nti. Sacāhaṃ taṃ na sampāyissāmi, bhavissanti vattāro ‘ettakampi, āvuso, na jānāsi, kasmā tvaṃ chāyā viya bhagavantaṃ na vijahanto dīgharattaṃ ciraṃ vicarī’ti. Tenāhaṃ parammukhā desitassapi dhammassa puna kathanaṃ icchāmī’’ti. Imā catasso āyācanā yāci. Bhagavāpissa adāsi. Evaṃ ime aṭṭha vare gahetvā nibaddhupaṭṭhāko ahosi.
他就是为这个侍者职位,圆满了百千劫所积聚的波罗蜜,得到了果报;得到果报之后,成为侍者中最首要的一位,侍奉世尊。这位长老从获得侍者职位的时候起,就以两种水、三种齿木、洗脚、按摩背部,以及打扫香室和香室周围等事务来侍奉世尊,心里想着:“这个时候应该为导师做这件事,那个时候应该做那件事”,就这样一件件去完成。他拿着一把大火炬,一夜之间绕着香室和香室周围走了九圈。他心里想:“如果我被昏沉睡眠压倒,世尊叫我的时候,我就没办法应答了。”所以他整夜手都不放开火炬。正是针对他当时还没有得到固定侍者职位这件事,才说“但还没有得到侍者职位”。所谓没有固定侍者,就是没有常设的侍者。不过,世尊刚成道的时候,不固定的侍者有很多,为了说明这一点,才说“有时是那伽沙摩罗长老”等等。他既是亲戚,又因为具备殊胜的功德而最为优胜,所以叫“亲戚中最胜者”。在这类事情上,正是这个人最合适;意思是说,遇到危难时,备办物资来布施,由亲戚来做更为恰当。巴利
Tasseva ṭhānantarassa atthāya kappasatasahassaṃ pūritānaṃ pāramīnaṃ phalaṃ pāpuṇi, pāpuṇitvā ca upaṭṭhākānaṃ aggo hutvā bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhahi. Thero hi upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhakālato paṭṭhāya bhagavantaṃ duvidhena udakena tividhena dantakaṭṭhena pādaparikammena piṭṭhiparikammena gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanenāti evamādīhi kiccehi upaṭṭhahanto ‘‘imāya nāma velāya satthu idaṃ nāma laddhuṃ vaṭṭati, idaṃ nāma kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā taṃ taṃ nipphādento mahatiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ gahetvā ekarattiṃ gandhakuṭipariveṇaṃ nava vāre anupariyāyati. Evañhissa ahosi ‘‘sace me thinamiddhaṃ okkameyya, bhagavati pakkosante paṭivacanaṃ dātuṃ nāhaṃ sakkuṇeyya’’nti. Tasmā sabbarattiṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ hatthena na muñcati, evametassa nibaddhupaṭṭhākaṭṭhānassa aladdhabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘no ca kho upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhā’’ti. Nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthīti niyatupaṭṭhāko nāma natthi. Aniyatupaṭṭhākā pana bhagavato paṭhamabodhiyaṃ bahū ahesuṃ, te dassento āha ‘‘kadāci nāgasamālatthero’’tiādi. Ñāti ca so pasatthatamaguṇayogato seṭṭho cāti ñātiseṭṭho. Evarūpesu ṭhānesu ayameva patirūpoti āpadāsu āmisassa abhisaṅkharitvā dānaṃ nāma ñātakeneva kātuṃ yuttataranti adhippāyo.
所谓“被魔罗转了心”,就是心被魔罗搅动、操控;或者说,是因为魔罗的威神力而心生迷乱。所以接着说“转了心、迷乱了心”等等。“就算……魔罗也能把他们转了心”:这是因为在弗沙佛住世的时代,他所积攒的不善业在当时得到了成熟的机会,于是现前了。这一点在《譬喻》中已经说过:巴利
Mārāvaṭṭanāyāti mārena katacittāvaṭṭanāya, mārānubhāvena sañjātacittasammohenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘āvaṭṭetvā mohetvā’’tiādi. Tiṭṭhantu…pe… tampi māro āvaṭṭeyyāti phussassa bhagavato kāle katupacitassa akusalakammassa tadā laddhokāsavasena upaṭṭhitattā. Vuttañhetaṃ apadāne –
我在弗沙佛的教法里,辱骂过他的弟子。
你们吃大麦吧,享用大麦吧,不要吃稻米饭。
因为那个业报,我整整三个月都在吃大麦。
那时我受到一位婆罗门的邀请,住在毗兰若城。巴利
‘‘Phussassāhaṃ pāvacane, sāvake paribhāsayiṃ; Yavaṃ khādatha bhuñjatha, mā ca bhuñjatha sālayo. ‘‘Tena kammavipākena, temāsaṃ khāditaṃ yavaṃ; Nimantito brāhmaṇena, verañjāyaṃ vasiṃ tadā’’ti. (apa. thera 1.39.88-89);
心被缠缚,是指心被覆盖、被压制。被魔转变之后才来,是说被魔转变而离开之后,他们才来。由于无法胜任,是因为没有能力。已送来的施食,是指煮好之后送来的施食。定期布施,是说限定“在这段时间里我们要供养世尊”,按每日固定供养而设立的布施。已献出的物品,是指想着“这东西是给佛陀受用四种资具的”,送到精舍后布施出去的物品。不能,就是做不到。以送来施食的方式,就是通过送来施食的做法。一寻光明,是从周身散发出一寻大小的光明。这里应当知道,随好相和一寻光明失去光辉,就是障碍。因此说“即使是月神、日神、天、梵天……”等等。因为随好相和一寻光明连成一片,所以说“到达随好相和一寻光明的区域”。所谓一切知智的障碍,就是对所知诸法的遮蔽。巴利
Pariyuṭṭhitacittoti pariyonaddhacitto, abhibhūtacittoti attho. Āvaṭṭitapariyosāne āgamiṃsūti mārena āvaṭṭetvā gate pacchā āgamiṃsu. Avisahatāyāti asakkuṇeyyatāya. Abhihaṭabhikkhāyāti pacitvā abhihariyamānabhikkhāya. Nibaddhadānassāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhagavato dassāmā’’ti niccabhattavasena paricchinditvā ṭhapitadānassa. Appitavatthassāti ‘‘idaṃ buddhassa catupaccayaparibhogattha’’nti vihāraṃ netvā dinnavatthuno. Na visahatīti na sakkoti. Abhihaṭabhikkhāsaṅkhepenāti abhihaṭabhikkhānīhārena . Byāmappabhāyāti samantato byāmamattāya pabhāya. Ettha ca anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya ca nippabhākaraṇaṃ antarāyoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘candimasūriyadevabrahmānampi hī’’tiādi. Anubyañjanānaṃ byāmappabhāya ekābaddhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘anubyañjanabyāmappabhāppadesaṃ patvā’’ti. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa antarāyo nāma ñeyyadhammesu āvaraṇaṃ.
世尊听到了捣臼的声音。那么,是不是他自己生起了捣臼的声音呢?对此,他说“正在捣碎谷粒的人们……”等等。“有利益的”,就是能达成目的的。“无利益的”,是指依于无益的言语。“杀害的期望”是处格。在哪个对象上、以什么方式完成杀害,那个对象就是以那种方式被杀害了,所以说“正是通过这条道路,对那种言语的杀害就是断除”——这就是所说的意思。或者,应当这样理解:这是把处格理解为表示所有者而说的。而言语的断除,应当知道是通过断除以它为根源的烦恼而实现的。巴利
Assosi kho bhagavā udukkhalasaddanti kiṃ sayameva uppannaṃ udukkhalasaddaṃ assosīti ceti āha ‘‘patthapatthapulakaṃ koṭṭentāna’’ntiādi. Atthasañhitanti payojanasādhakaṃ. Anatthasañhiteti anatthanissite vacane. Ghātāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Yasmiñca yena ghāto nipphādīyati, tasseva tena ghāto kato nāma hotīti āha ‘‘maggeneva tādisassa vacanassa ghāto samucchedoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Sāmiatthe vā bhummavacananti maññamāno evamāhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vacanassa ca samugghāto tammūlakilesānaṃ samugghātenāti veditabbaṃ.
“ākāra”(相状)是指:以自己的方式相应,成就有限定、有界限的果报,所以“ākāra”就是原因。因此说:“以诸相状,就是以诸原因。”“与事缘相应”是指依当前之事而发生。通过那个提问把违犯公开出来,就是通过“比丘,听说你确实……”这样的提问,揭露那位比丘所犯的违犯;而揭示违犯是为了什么?是为了允许制定这条学处。巴利
Ākaroti attano anurūpatāya samariyādaṃ saparicchedaṃ phalaṃ nipphattetīti ākāro kāraṇanti āha ‘‘ākārehīti kāraṇehī’’ti. Aṭṭhuppattiyuttanti paccuppannavatthuṃ nissāya pavattaṃ. Tāya pucchāya vītikkamaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvāti ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādipucchāya tena bhikkhunā katavītikkamaṃ pakāsetvā, vītikkamappakāsanañca kimatthamidaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti anujānanatthaṃ.
“没有什么可再说的”,因为前面已经讲过其中的道理,这里就表示确实没有任何新的内容可说。因此说“正如前面已经说过的”等等。“善哉善哉”是赞叹时重复的话语,所以说“令具寿阿难欢喜”。“在两种情况中”,指的是被称为说法和制定学处的两种原因。“取一种”,是指取“我们将说法”这样所说的原因。“如此饥荒”,是说在这样的困境中才能得到乞食,也就是在这样的饥荒时节或地方。“乞食难得”,是对这个意思的解释。“仅此足维生”,因为少欲知足的少希求,而说“以此严节”。“已制伏贪”,以利养为缘而生起的断夜、断安居之贪欲也不存在。因为不需巴利
Natthi kiñci vattabbanti pubbe vuttanayattā na kiñci ettha apubbaṃ vattabbamatthīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe vuttameva hī’’tiādi. Sādhu sādhūti idaṃ pasaṃsāyaṃ āmeḍitavacananti āha ‘‘āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ sampahaṃsento’’ti. Dvīsu ākāresūti dhammadesanasikkhāpadapaññattisaṅkhātesu dvīsu kāraṇesu. Ekaṃ gahetvāti dhammaṃ vā desessāmāti evaṃ vuttakāraṇaṃ gahetvā. Evaṃdubbhikkheti evaṃ dukkhena labhitabbā bhikkhā etthāti evaṃdubbhikkhe kāle, dese vā. Dullabhapiṇḍeti etasseva atthadīpanaṃ. Bhājanādipariharaṇavasena bahubhaṇḍikatāya abhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘imāya sallahukavuttitāyā’’ti. Ettakameva alaṃ yāpetunti uttari patthanābhāvato pana ‘‘iminā ca sallekhenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dubbhikkhaṃ vijitanti ettha hi bhikkhānaṃ abhāvo dubbhikkhaṃ ‘‘nimmakkhika’’ntiādīsu viya. Bhikkhābhāvoyeva hi taṃnimittacittavighātānaṃ abhāvato bhikkhūhi vijito vase vattito. Lobho vijitoti āmisahetu ratticchedavassacchedasamuṭṭhāpako loluppādopi tesaṃ nāhosīti āmisalolatāsaṅkhāto lobho vijito. Icchācāro vijitoti ‘‘āmisahetu aññamaññassa uttarimanussadhammappakāsanavasena guṇavaṇijjaṃ katvā jīvikaṃ kappessāmā’’ti evaṃ pavattaicchācārassa abhāvato yathāvutto icchācāro vijito. Cittuppādamattassapi anuppannabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cintā vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Punappunānusocanavasena pana cittapīḷāpi nāhosīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vighāto vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“断夜”,是指为了七日事务外出,在外面让天亮,就算作断夜;如果没有这样做,即使有七日事务要去办,也因为哪里都没去,所以不算断夜。注疏里之所以把为了七日事务而离开住处的情况称为“断夜”,是因为针对“七日事务”和“别住”而说的。也正因为这样,在《雨安居犍度注》里说“这是论藏之外对断夜的判定”,接着又以“为了听法,没有受请的人不可以去”等说法,专门分析了七日事务。《大注》里也说:“为了七日事务而去,即使只有一位比丘,也没有断夜。”这样看来,应当知道:断夜只因为七日事务而发生,不是别的原因,这就是断夜的定义。这里,在存在所谓“资具缺乏”这种断雨安居原因的情况下,也提到了断夜,所以《小结文》和《中结文》说:凡是能得到断雨安居原因的地方,为了七日事务前去也是可以的。这个道理说得很对,在《雨安居犍度》中关于断雨安居的部分已经讲过了。巴利
Ratticchedo vāti sattāhakaraṇīyavasena gantvā bahi aruṇuṭṭhāpanavasena ratticchedo vā na kato sattāhakiccavasenapi katthaci agatattā. Sattāhakiccavasena vippavāsañhi sandhāya ratticchedoti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, tatoyeva ca vassūpanāyikakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199) ‘‘ayaṃ panettha pāḷimuttakaratticchedavinicchayo’’ti vatvā ‘‘dhammassavanatthāya animantitena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’tiādinā sattāhakaraṇīyameva vibhattaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘sattāhakiccena gantvā ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā na kato’’ti. Evañca katvā ratticchedo nāma sattāhakaraṇīyavasena hoti, na aññathāti ratticchedalakkhaṇañca kathitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ettha ca paccayavekallasaṅkhāte vassacchedakāraṇe sati ratticchedassapi vuttattā yattha vassacchedakāraṇaṃ labbhati, tattha sattāhakiccena gantumpi vaṭṭatīti siddhanti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttaṃ vassūpanāyikakkhandhake vassacchedādhikāre –
当时,在某个住处入雨安居的比丘们,他们所在的村庄被盗贼洗劫了。他们把这件事禀告了世尊。世尊说:“比丘们,我允许你们去那个村庄。”巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena aññatarasmiṃ āvāse vassūpagatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ gāmo corehi vuṭṭhāsi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena gāmo tena gantu’’nti (mahāva. 201) –
这里也跟注疏里的这段话相吻合:“如果村庄不远,就在那里乞食,然后回到寺院住下。如果很远,就以七天为期限,让天亮(明相)升起。如果做不到,就干脆在那附近合适的地方住下。”正因为如此,当村庄被洗劫、乞食得不到食物时,世尊虽然讲到雨安居中断也算无罪,但还是说“诸比丘,我允许你们前往那个村庄”——所以,得不到食物才是中断雨安居的原因。其中,注疏里“如果很远,就以七天为期限,让天亮升起”这句话,成立的就是这个道理:当有中断雨安居的原因时,也可以为了七天之内要办的事而外出。巴利
Ettha ‘‘sace gāmo avidūragato hoti, tattha piṇḍāya caritvā vihārameva āgantvā vasitabbaṃ. Sace dūragato, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo. Na sakkā ce hoti, tattheva sabhāgaṭṭhāne vasitabba’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201) iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanenapi saṃsandanato. Tathā hi gāme vuṭṭhite bhikkhāya abhāvato vassacchedepi anāpattiṃ vadantena bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena gāmo tena gantu’’nti (mahāva. 201) vuttattā bhikkhāya abhāvo vassacchedakāraṇaṃ. Tattha ‘‘sace dūragato, sattāhavārena aruṇo uṭṭhāpetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 201) idaṃ aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ vassacchedakāraṇe sati sattāhakiccena gantumpi vaṭṭatīti imamatthaṃ sādheti.
另外,有人这样说道:巴利
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ kenaci –
“断夜”是就七日事而说的。据说《大注》里讲:为了七日事外出,即使只有一位比丘,也没有做过断夜或断雨安居。因此有些人认为:在有断雨安居的因缘时,可以做七日事。但持律者们不接受,所以应当审察注疏的意趣。巴利
‘‘Ratticchedoti sattāhakiccaṃ sandhāya vutto, sattāhakaraṇīyena gantvā ratticchedo vā vassacchedo vā ekabhikkhunāpi na katoti vuttaṃ kira mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, tasmā vassacchedassa kāraṇe sati sattāhakiccaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti eke. Vinayadharā pana na icchanti, tasmā aṭṭhakathādhippāyo vīmaṃsitabbo’’ti.
而那只说明迷惑者自己在让别人产生愚痴罢了。因为看不到持律者们不认可的理由,这与注疏相违,也不合理。既然有因缘能成立即使断雨安居也无犯,那么在这种情况下,不经过断雨安居就以七日出差事前往,为什么不可以呢?这是合理的。“我们到后安居时在那里入雨安居”,这句话是在说明那些比丘有适当的思惟,并不是在说明什么特别的含义。因为由于饥荒,确实有断雨安居的情况,所以在前安居时即使断雨安居也无犯。在后安居时,因为不想入安居而前往也没有过失,因为后安居的入安居日还没有到。巴利
Taṃ pana sayaṃ sammūḷhassa paresaṃ mohuppādanamattaṃ. Na hi vinayadharānaṃ anicchāya kāraṇaṃ dissati aṭṭhakathāya virujjhanato yuttiabhāvato ca. Yañhi kāraṇaṃ vassacchedepi anāpattiṃ sādheti, tasmiṃ sati vinā vassacchedaṃ sattāhakiccena gantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti kā nāma yutti. ‘‘Pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmā’’ti idaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anurūpaparivitakkanapaadīpanaṃ, na pana visesatthaparidīpanaṃ. Tathā hi dubbhikkhatāya vassacchedakaraṇasabbhāvato purimikāya tāva vassacchedepi anāpatti. Pacchimikāyaṃ anupagantukāmatāya gamanepi natthi doso pacchimikāya vassūpanāyikadivasassa asampattabhāvato.
不在任何方面以推崇某种功德的心态去认为。显示之后,是指以已经获得的禅那等功德来显示之后。如果按照“我们以后再确立戒”这种说法去做,就会有养护身体的行为,而那样行持贪欲之行就不清净,也没有活命遍净,所以应当再次努力,安住在防护之中,因此说“我们以后再确立戒”。巴利
Na kismiñci maññantīti kismiñci guṇe sambhāvanavasena na maññanti. Pakāsetvāti paṭiladdhajjhānādiguṇavasena pakāsetvā. ‘‘Pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti vuttanayena kucchipaṭijaggane sati tathāpavattaicchācārassa aparisuddhabhāvato ājīvasuddhiyā ca abhāvato puna vāyamitvā saṃvare patiṭṭhātabbanti āha ‘‘pacchā sīlaṃ adhiṭṭhaheyyāmā’’ti.
“这是什么?”这句话是带着责备的语气说的。用精米煮成、浇上肉汁的饭,就是精肉饭。“会轻视”是指以看不起的心态越过它去评判,也就是把它看成低劣、下贱。所以说“会使它成为被轻贱、被蔑视的”。放在下面、当作卑贱来认知,就是“被轻贱”。“被蔑视”是它的同义词。“那个”指的就是这个地区。“以这种行持”指在毗兰若所圆满修习的、极其难行的行持。“依止你们”指依止你们这种少欲的行持。“被称为梵行同伴的”指六群比丘等人。“坐在你们中间”就是坐在你们当中,也就是和你们坐在一起的意思。“卑慢”指过度的傲慢。这里因为低劣,所以把过度的傲慢说成“卑慢”,并不是指轻蔑地认为。阿难,后世的人会轻视你们这些善士所战胜的精肉饭——经文这样连接起来解释其含义。这里说的是:得到什么就满足于什么,因为已经断除了对精肉饭的贪求,而后世的人因为无法断除对它的贪求,就会轻视你们所战胜、所制伏的精肉饭。巴利
Kiṃ idanti garahaṇavasena vuttaṃ. Sālitaṇḍulehi sampāditaṃ maṃsena upasittaṃ odanaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ. Atimaññissatīti avaññātakaraṇavasena atikkamitvā maññissati, lāmakaṃ nihīnaṃ katvā maññissatīti vuttaṃ hoti . Tenāha ‘‘oññātaṃ avaññātaṃ karissatī’’ti. Heṭṭhā katvā nihīnaṃ katvā ñātaṃ oññātaṃ. Avaññātanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Svāyanti so ayaṃ janapado. Imāya paṭipattiyāti verañjāyaṃ pūritāya sudukkarāya paṭipattiyā. Tumhe nissāyāti tumhākaṃ imaṃ appicchapaṭipadaṃ nissāya. Sabrahmacārīsaṅkhātāti chabbaggiyādayo vuttā. Tumhākaṃ antare nisīditvāti tumhākaṃ majjhe nisīditvā, tumhehi saddhiṃ nisīditvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Omānanti atimānaṃ. Atimānoyeva hettha nihīnatāya ‘‘omāna’’nti vutto, na pana hīḷetvā maññanaṃ. Tumhehi, ānanda, sappurisehi vijitaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ pacchimā janatā atimaññissatīti evamettha pāḷiṃ yojetvā atthaṃ vaṇṇayanti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yaṃ laddhaṃ, teneva tussitvā sālimaṃsodanapatthanāya chinnattā ca tumhehi vijitaṃ abhibhūtaṃ sālimaṃsodanaṃ pacchimā janatā tattha patthanaṃ chindituṃ asamatthatāya atimaññissatīti.
大目犍连的狮子吼论巴利
Mahāmoggallānassa sīhanādakathā
17 “尊者”“天爱”“贤善者”,这些都是亲切的称呼方式,所以说“尊者是亲切的称呼”。因为智者以亲切的方式称呼别人时,会用“贤善者”“天爱”或“尊者”来称呼,所以面对面称呼时用“友”,背后称呼时用“尊者”,这也是一种称呼方式。这种亲切的话语是出于尊重、恭敬和顺从,因此说“这是尊重、恭敬、顺从的敬称”。因为功德广大,所以叫大目犍连,并不是因为有个小目犍连,所以说“他既是大,又因为功德广大”。“地肤”是指支撑大地的水层下方表面,在大地底层因水流冲击而出现、被水流淹没的地面区域所生的泥层那样的、极为甘美的地味。那对我不合适,意思是未经允许就做,对我来说是不恰当的。如果未经允许就做,就像世尊随心所欲做任何事都不需请求允许一样,我也会那样,这样就等于把自己和世尊等同起来,像是出于慢心而做,所以说“就会像与世尊并驾齐驱一样”。把自己和别人视为一对、一双、等同,并执取“我有什么差别”,这叫作并驾齐驱。巴利
17. Āyasmāti vā devānaṃpiyāti vā bhadrabhavanti vā piyasamudācāro esoti āha ‘‘āyasmātipiyavacanameta’’nti. Viññujātikā hi paraṃ piyena samudācarantā ‘‘bhava’’nti vā ‘‘devānaṃpiyā’’ti vā ‘‘āyasmā’’ti vā samudācaranti, tasmā sammukhā sambodhanavasena āvusoti, tirokkhaṃ āyasmāti ayampi samudācāro. Tayidaṃ piyavacanaṃ garugāravasappatissavasena vuccatīti āha ‘‘garugāravasappatissādhivacanameta’’nti. Guṇamahattatāya mahāmoggallāno, na cūḷamoggallānassa atthitāyāti āha ‘‘mahā ca so guṇamahantatāyā’’ti. Pappaṭakojanti pathavīsandhārakaṃ udakaṃ āhacca ṭhite mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatale samuṭṭhitaṃ udakoghena ajjhotthaṭe bhūmippadese sañjātakaddamapaṭalasadisaṃ atimadhurapathavīmaṇḍaṃ. Na me taṃ assa patirūpanti taṃ anāpucchā karaṇaṃ na me anucchavikaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. Anāpucchā karontena ca yathā bhagavā icchiticchitaṃ kiñci anāpucchā karoti, evamahampīti bhagavatā samānaṃ katvā attānaṃ mānena kataṃ viya bhavissatīti āha ‘‘yugaggāho viya bhagavatā saddhiṃ kato bhaveyyā’’ti. Parena hi saddhiṃ attānaṃ yugaṃ yugaḷaṃ samānaṃ katvā gāho, tassa mama vā ko visesoti gahaṇaṃ yugaggāho.
“具足”是指具备成就。不过在这里,特指味道的成就,因为要以总称说明具体含义。因此说“具足的意思是甘美、美味”。具足有三种:圆满具足、具备具足、甘美具足。其中——巴利
Sampannanti sampattiyuttaṃ. Sā panettha rasasampatti adhippetā sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato. Tenāha ‘‘sampannanti madhuraṃ sādurasanti attho’’ti. Tividhañhi sampannaṃ paripuṇṇasamaṅgīmadhuravasena. Tattha –
拘希耶,鹦鹉在吃那长得饱满的稻田;
梵天,我告诉你,我不想去阻拦他们。巴利
‘‘Sampannaṃ sālikedāraṃ, suvā bhuñjanti kosiya; Paṭivedemi te brahme, na ne vāretumussahe’’ti. (jā. 1.14.1) –
这叫作圆满具足。所谓圆满,就是从各方面都已达到、获得,所以称为具足。“以这个巴帝摩卡防护而具足、正具足、已进入、正进入、具足、具备”(《分别论》511),这叫作具备具足。具备者,就是正确地达到、已去、已进入,所以称为具足。“在那里,那棵树有圆满的果实和近果”(《中部》2.48),这叫作甘美具足。这里所指的,应当理解为甘美具足。近果,就是果实很多。它的,指大地的底层。为了以譬喻说明,就是为了用譬喻来显示。无虫卵,就是没有过失。这里的没有过失,是因为没有苍蝇等,所以说“无蝇”等。这里没有苍蝇,所以是无蝇。据说在这里,“蝇”这个词也泛指蝇卵。因此,在三处复合词注释中说:“为了阐明‘无蝇’的意思,说‘无蝇卵’,意思是远离苍蝇及其卵。”然而,在这里我们的主张是:“苍蝇的卵叫作蝇卵,这里没有蝇卵,所以是无蝇卵。以此说明远离蝇卵,而‘无蝇’则说明根本没有苍蝇。”据说这是小苍蝇所造的蜜。所有蜜,是指大苍蝇、蜜蜂等所造的。最上,指最高。最胜,指最受称赞。美味,指味道美妙。有营养,指极具营养。巴利
Idaṃ paripuṇṇasampannaṃ nāma. Paripuṇṇampi hi samantato pannaṃ pattanti sampannanti vuccati. ‘‘Iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto upagato samupagato sampanno samannāgato’’ti (vibha. 511) idaṃ samaṅgīsampannaṃ nāma. Samaṅgīpi hi sammadeva panno gato upagatoti sampannoti vuccati. ‘‘Tatrassa rukkho sampannaphalo ca upapannaphalo cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.48) idaṃ madhurasampannaṃ nāma. Tattha madhurasampannaṃ idhādhippetanti veditabbaṃ. Upapannaphaloti bahuphalo. Assāti pathaviyā heṭṭhimatalassa. Opammanidassanatthanti upamāya nidassanatthaṃ. Anīḷakanti niddosaṃ. Niddosatā cettha makkhikādirahitatāyāti āha ‘‘nimmakkhika’’ntiādi. Natthi ettha makkhikāti nimmakkhikaṃ. Makkhikāsaddena cettha makkhikaṇḍakampi sāmaññato gahitanti vadanti. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘nimmakkhikanti imassevatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ nimmakkhikaṇḍakanti vuttaṃ, makkhikāhi tāsaṃ aṇḍakehi ca virahitanti attho’’ti. Ayaṃ panettha amhākaṃ khanti ‘‘makkhikānaṃ aṇḍāni makkhikaṇḍāni, natthi ettha makkhikaṇḍānīti nimmakkhikaṇḍanti. Iminā makkhikānaṃ aṇḍehi rahitatā vuttā, ‘nimmakkhika’nti iminā pana makkhikānaṃyeva abhāvo vutto’’ti. Etaṃ kira madhūti khuddakamakkhikāhi katamadhu. Sabbamadhūhīti mahāmakkhikabhamaramakkhikādikatehi. Agganti uttamaṃ. Seṭṭhanti pasatthatamaṃ. Surasanti sobhanarasaṃ. Ojavantanti accantamojasampannaṃ.
“乞求之语”这一说法,是用它来排除接受、随喜等含义。“一只手”就是一个手掌。为了说明“我将变化出来”这句话的意思,所以接着说“我将使它变得像大地一样”。“这究竟是不是大地呢?”这句话,是在显示:因为变化出来的大地和原本的大地看起来一样,于是生起疑惑——“这到底是我们的大地,还是别的大地?”固定而广阔的聚落叫“村”,贸易兴盛的大聚落叫“大村”,说的就是这个意思。“或者这不是颠倒”,这是在提示前一种主张。为什么这不是颠倒呢?回答说“因为具神通者的神通境界不可思议”。其意是:仅仅依靠神通之力,那些众生的那种颠倒就不会存在。现在,为了显示另一种获得颠倒的情况,说道“然而这样”等。责骂是指当面责骂。诽谤是指背后辱骂。巴利
Āyācanavacanametanti iminā sampaṭicchanasampahaṃsanādiatthaṃ nivatteti. Ekaṃ hatthanti ekaṃ pāṇitalaṃ. ‘‘Abhinimminissāmī’’ti vuttamatthaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘pathavīsadisaṃ karissāmī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ nu kho pathavī, udāhu na ayanti iminā nimmitapathaviyā pakatipathaviyā ca sandissamānattā ‘‘esā nu kho amhākaṃ pathavī, udāhu aññā’’ti uppajjamānakukkuccaṃ dasseti. Nibaddhavipulāgamo gāmo nigamo, pavattitamahāāyo mahāgāmoti vuttaṃ hoti. Na vā esa vipallāsoti pubbapakkhaṃ nidasseti. Kasmā panesa vipallāso na hotīti āha ‘‘acinteyyo hi iddhimato iddhivisayo’’ti. Iddhibaleneva tesaṃ sattānaṃ tādiso vipallāso na bhavissatīti adhippāyo. Idāni aññathā vipallāsappaṭilābhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ panā’’tiādi. Garahantāti sammukhā garahantā. Upavadantāti parammukhā akkosantā.
难道不是已经遮止了去北俱卢洲乞食吗?那么,为什么没有说众生也会因此获得颠倒呢?于是说“在那里,虽然……”等。虽然没有明说,但因为前面已经特别提到“众生也会获得颠倒”,所以可以知道,正是以这个原因,世尊也遮止了去北俱卢洲乞食。因此,为了说明这里也应当采用那个原因,就说“应依前面所说的方法来理解”。意思是,“众生也会获得颠倒”这一句,虽然在这里没有说,也应当引过来建立关联。它的含义也应当知道与前面所说的相似。这是针对后面所说的“然而这样获得颠倒……”等不同的义理分别而说的。至于那里所说的“他们成就了那些功德后,在饥荒时翻转大地,享用了地衣和苔藓”,应当去掉这句,而理解为:他们成就了那些功德后,在饥荒时前往北俱卢洲,游行乞食而享用。这里应当这样连接。“以一步之距”中,“步之距”指举足、放足,也就是一步的放置,因此是说以一步的放置。由于以一步之距应当跨越的距离,以及两脚并拢时,两脚之间大约有一拃手的距离,因此。“决意仅如田埂大小”的意思是,决意仅如一拃手量的田埂大小。巴利
Nanu ca uttarakuruṃ piṇḍāya gamanaṃ paṭisedhetvā vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti kāraṇaṃ na vuttaṃ, tasmā kimettha kāraṇanti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Yadipi na vuttaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyu’’nti pubbe adhikatattā teneva kāraṇena piṇḍāya uttarakurugamanampi bhagavatā paṭisiddhanti viññāyati, tasmā tadeva kāraṇaṃ idhāpi gahetabbanti dassento āha ‘‘pubbe vuttanayeneva gahetabba’’nti. Vipallāsampi sattā paṭilabheyyunti idaṃ idha avuttampi ānetvā sambandhitabbanti adhippāyo. Atthopi cassa vuttasadisameva veditabboti. ‘‘Evaṃ pana vipallāsaṃ paṭilabheyyu’’ntiādinā pacchā vuttameva atthavikappaṃ sandhāya vadati. Yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle pathaviṃ parivattetvā pappaṭakojaṃ paribhuñjiṃsū’’ti, taṃ apanetvā te guṇe nibbattetvā dubbhikkhakāle uttarakuruṃ gantvā piṇḍāya caritvā paribhuñjiṃsūti evamettha yojanā kātabbā. Ekena padavītihārenāti ettha padassa vītiharaṇaṃ nikkhipanaṃ padavītihāro, padanikkhepo, tasmā ekena padanikkhepenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekena padavītihārena atikkamitabbaṭṭhānañca samagamanena dvinnaṃ padānaṃ antare muṭṭhiratanamattaṃ, tasmā. Mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvāti muṭṭhiratanappamāṇaṃ mātikāmattaṃ adhiṭṭhāyāti attho.
关于请求制定戒律的讨论巴利
Vinayapaññattiyācanakathā
18 “律的制定”这句话,是针对先前还没有制定的学处而说的。因为长老是放下已制定的学处不谈,而针对现在应当制定的学处和诵巴帝摩卡这件事,才说:“世尊,现在正是时候;善逝,现在正是时候。愿世尊为弟子们制定学处,诵巴帝摩卡。”世尊也——巴利
18.Vinayapaññattiyāti pubbe apaññattasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Thero hi paññattasikkhāpadāni ṭhapetvā idāni paññapetabbasikkhāpadāni pātimokkhuddesañca sandhāya ‘‘etassa bhagavā kālo, etassa sugata kālo, yaṃ bhagavā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyya, uddiseyya pātimokkha’’nti (pārā. 21) āha. Bhagavatāpi –
尊者,是什么因、什么缘,使得从前学处较少,却有更多比丘以究竟智安住?尊者,又是什么因、什么缘,使得如今学处较多,却只有较少比丘以究竟智安住?跋陀利,事情就是这样:当众生衰败、正法隐没时,学处就变得更多,而以究竟智安住的比丘就更少。跋陀利,只要某些会导致漏的法还没在僧团里出现,导师就不会为弟子制定学处。巴利
‘‘Ko nu kho, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yena pubbe appatarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni ahesuṃ, bahutarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahiṃsu. Ko pana, bhante, hetu, ko paccayo, yena etarahi bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti, appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantīti. Evametaṃ, bhaddāli, hoti, sattesu hāyamānesu saddhamme antaradhāyamāne bahutarāni ceva sikkhāpadāni honti, appatarā ca bhikkhū aññāya saṇṭhahantīti. Na tāva, bhaddāli, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti, yāva na idhekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā saṅghe pātubhavantī’’ti –
就像在这部《跋陀利经》里那样,针对某些已经制定、以及此后还要制定的学处,说了“舍利弗,只要……导师就不会为弟子制定学处”。也正是在这部注疏里,“自己煮食既不符合沙门身份,也不被允许”这句话,以及“没有做成隔夜或隔年”这句话,应当理解为:它们是先前已制定学处确实存在的依据。至于其余学处和诵巴帝摩卡,是因为长老请求才制定的,所以说“从根本开始显示因缘”。“独处”是指去到没有人、远离人群的地方。这是通过远离群体杂处,来说明长老的身远离。“宴坐”是指心从种种所缘的运转中收回来,正确地安住其中,心在那里不向外散乱。这是通过没有心的杂处,来说明他获得了前分的心远离。“久”是就时间而言,在极相续中用的是对格;“久”是指与长时间相应的持续,以没有间断来说。巴利
Imasmiṃ bhaddālisutte (ma. ni. 2.145) viya ekaccesu paññattesupi tato paraṃ paññapetabbāni sandhāya ‘‘na tāva, sāriputta, satthā sāvakānaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idheva ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti, na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘ratticchedo vā vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti vacanañca pubbe paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ sabbhāve pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesasikkhāpadānañceva pātimokkhuddesassa ca therassa āyācanena paññattattā ‘‘mūlato pabhuti nidānaṃ dassetu’’nti āha. Rahogatassāti raho janavivittaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatassa. Tena gaṇasaṅgaṇikābhāvena therassa kāyavivekamāha. Paṭisallīnassāti nānārammaṇacārato cittassa nivattiyā paṭi sammadeva nilīnassa tattha avisaṭacittassa. Tena cittasaṅgaṇikābhāvenassa pubbabhāgiyaṃ cittavivekamāha. Ciranti kālāpekkhaṃ accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Cirāti cirakālayuttā ṭhiti abhedena vuttā.
“不能”是指无法判定这件事。先说明了注疏里讲的方法之后,现在为了展示上座部的立场,而说“然而大莲华长老……”等等。即使在注疏里,也说“不能”,因为即使知道,也无法完全准确地判定,所以这样说。达到十六种智慧的顶点,是指在《中部·无随烦恼经》的教导中——巴利
Etaṃna sakkotīti etaṃ vinicchinituṃ na sakkoti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayaṃ dassetvā idāni theravādaṃ dassento āha ‘‘mahāpadumatthero panā’’tiādi. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘na sakkotī’’ti idaṃ yasmā jānamānopi sammadeva paricchindituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā vuttanti vadanti. Soḷasavidhāya paññāya matthakaṃ pattassāti majjhimanikāye anupadasuttantadesanāya (ma. ni. 3.93) –
比丘们,舍利弗有大智慧;比丘们,舍利弗有广博的智慧;比丘们,舍利弗有欢悦的智慧;比丘们,舍利弗有迅捷的智慧;比丘们,舍利弗有锐利的智慧;比丘们,舍利弗有穿透的智慧。巴利
‘‘Mahāpañño bhikkhave sāriputto, puthupañño bhikkhave sāriputto, hāsapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, javanapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, tikkhapañño bhikkhave sāriputto, nibbedhikapañño bhikkhave sāriputto’’ti –
像这样提到的六种大智慧等,加上同一部经里说到的九种次第住定智慧,以及阿拉汉道智慧——这十六类智慧,是在声闻弟子的范围内达到了最高顶点的。巴利
Evamāgatā mahāpaññādikā cha, tasmiṃyeva sutte āgatā navānupubbavihārasamāpattipaññā, arahattamaggapaññāti imāsaṃ soḷasappabhedānaṃ paññānaṃ sāvakavisaye ukkaṭṭhakoṭippattassa.
那么,世尊为什么在这里只讲了毗婆尸等七位佛的梵行久住或不久住,而不像在《佛种姓经》的开示中那样讲二十五位佛,或者更多呢?因为,凡是那些正自觉者的证悟教法至今仍然确定无疑地存续着、还没有消失,世尊为了称扬他们,才在这里讲述了毗婆尸等世尊的梵行久住或不久住。因为只有他们的声闻弟子,不论当时还是现在,都安住在净居天,而其他佛的声闻弟子已经般涅槃了。据说,悉达多佛、提舍佛、弗沙佛的声闻弟子虽然也投生在净居天,但一投生就立刻像这个教法中的优波迦等人一样证得阿拉汉,不久就般涅槃了,并没有在那些地方住满寿命。不过,诸佛前后出现的次第规则,是就同一世界体系中辗转轮回的众生住处而说的,所以跟这一点并不矛盾。应当这样理解。巴利
Kasmā panettha bhagavā vipassīādīnaṃ sattannaṃyeva buddhānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ kathesi, na buddhavaṃsadesanāyaṃ viya pañcavīsatiyā buddhānaṃ, tato vā pana bhiyyoti? Yesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ paṭivedhasāsanaṃ ekaṃsato nicchayena ajjāpi dharati, na antarahitaṃ, te eva kittento vipassīādīnaṃyeva bhagavantānaṃ brahmacariyassa ciraṭṭhitikāciraṭṭhitikabhāvaṃ idha kathesi. Tesaṃyeva hi sāvakā tadā ceva etarahi ca suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitā, na aññesaṃ parinibbutattā. Siddhatthatissaphussānaṃ kira buddhānaṃ sāvakā suddhāvāsesu uppannā uppattisamanantarameva imasmiṃ sāsane upakādayo viya arahattaṃ adhigantvā na cirasseva parinibbāyiṃsu, na tattha tattha sāvakā yāvatāyukaṃ aṭṭhaṃsūti vadanti. Apubbācarimaniyamo pana aparāparaṃ saṃsaraṇakasattāvāsavasena ekissā lokadhātuyā icchitoti na tenetaṃ virujjhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
19 这里不需要用“不共因、共缘”这样的分类来分析。提出这个问题,是为了追问毗婆尸佛等佛陀的梵行为什么不久住或久住的原因,所以论师说:“因和缘,这两个都是原因的叫法。”因为“依靠它而产生果”,所以“因”这个词是从“工具”的角度来说的,因此说“依靠它而有它的果”等等。如果把“因”这个词从“行为者”的角度来解释,也不是说不通,因为它带来果、成为果的原因,所以叫“因”。缘于那个原因而来、生起,意思是:缘于那个因,它的果就来了、生起了、产生了。巴利
19. Asādhāraṇo hetu, sādhāraṇo paccayoti evamādivibhāgena idha payojanaṃ natthi, vipassīādīnaṃ pana brahmacariyassa aciraṭṭhitikatāya ciraṭṭhitikatāya ca kāraṇapucchāparattā codanāyāti āha ‘‘hetu paccayoti ubhayametaṃ kāraṇādhivacana’’nti. Hinoti tena phalanti hetūti karaṇasādhanoyaṃ hetusaddoti āha ‘‘tena tassa phala’’ntiādi. Kattusādhanopi hetusaddo no na yujjati hinoti phalassa hetubhāvaṃ upagacchatīti hetūti. Taṃ paṭicca eti pavattatīti taṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca tassa phalaṃ eti pavattati nibbattatīti attho.
“他们成了疲倦者”意思是:他们成了不操心的人,成了没有干劲的人。然而,那种没有干劲并不是因为懈怠,所以说“不是因懈怠而疲倦”,意思是:他们并不是因为懈怠才成为疲倦者。对此,说明了原因:“因为并非……”等。“或懈怠”这一句,说明没有以昏沉睡眠为因而生起的不善法。“或精进衰退”这一句则表明:即使没有懈怠,哪怕是对仅靠别人施舍剩饭维生的人,佛陀也照样认真恭敬地说法,因此对任何人来说,在说法这件事上都不存在没有干劲的情况,因为一切佛陀都以同等的干劲来说法。所以说“因为诸佛……”等。“精进衰退”就是精进减弱,意思是干劲不足。“精进增盛”就是精进增强,意思是干劲很大。“快速”就是迅疾。“于法尊重者”就是尊重法的人。“于法有恭敬者”就是对法有恭敬心的人。在毗婆尸世尊的时代,人寿是八万岁;在尸弃佛的时代,人寿是七万岁;在毗舍浮佛的时代,人寿是六万岁,所以说“据说在他们的时代,众生是长寿的”。“证悟”就是通达领悟。巴利
Kilāsunoahesunti appossukkā ahesuṃ, nirussāhā ahesunti attho. Sā pana nirussāhatā na ālasiyavasenāti āha ‘‘na ālasiyakilāsuno’’ti, ālasiyavasena kilāsuno nāhesunti attho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Ālasiyaṃ vāti iminā thinamiddhavasappavattānaṃ akusalānaṃ abhāvamāha. Osannavīriyatā vāti iminā pana ‘‘ālasiyābhāvepi antamaso annabhāranesādānampi sakkaccaṃyeva dhammaṃ desetī’’ti vacanato yassa kassacipi dhammadesanāya nirussāhatā natthīti dīpeti sabbesaṃ samakeneva ussāhena dhammadesanāya pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘buddhā hī’’tiādi. Osannavīriyāti ohīnavīriyā, appossukkāti attho. Ussannavīriyāti adhikavīriyā, mahussāhāti attho. Vegenāti javena. Dhamme garu etesanti dhammagaruno. Dhamme gāravametesanti dhammagāravā. Vipassissa bhagavato kāle asīti vassasahassāni āyuppamāṇaṃ sikhissa sattati vassasahassāni, vessabhussa saṭṭhivassasahassāni āyuppamāṇanti āha ‘‘tesaṃ kira kāle dīghāyukā sattā’’ti. Abhisamentīti paṭivijjhanti.
“由于无过失”,是指没有违犯的过失。因为并不是以“在此违犯中,这叫某某罪”这样的犯罪方式来制定,而是以说法的方式,如“舍弃杀生,远离杀生”等,只制定了教诫学处,所以说“没有以七罪聚的方式制定命令学处”。“每过六年”应理解为省略的说法。或者,因为着眼于每六年结束的那一天而说“每一次”,所以这里的属格是就那个而言。整个瞻部洲的所有比丘僧团都在同一个地方举行布萨——这是句子的关联。问:那是什么地方?答:在般度摩提王都等等。那时,仙人堕处是一个叫安稳的园林,但因为施舍给鹿群作为安全居所,所以叫鹿野苑,因此说“在安稳的鹿野苑”。巴利
Niddosatāyāti vītikkamadosassa abhāvato. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vītikkame ayaṃ nāma āpattī’’ti evaṃ āpattivasena apaññapetvā ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.8, 194) dhammadesanāvasena ovādasikkhāpadānaṃyeva paññattattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattāpattikkhandhavasena āṇāsikkhāpadaṃ apaññatta’’nti. Channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ accayenāti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā channaṃ channaṃ vassānaṃ osānadivasaṃ apekkhitvā ‘‘sakiṃ saki’’nti vuttattā tadapekkhamidaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Sakalajambudīpe sabbopi bhikkhusaṅgho ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne uposathaṃ akāsīti sambandho. Katamaṃ taṃ ṭhānanti āha ‘‘bandhumatiyā rājadhāniyā’’tiādi. Isipatanaṃ tena samayena khemaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ hoti, migānaṃ pana abhayavāsatthāya dinnattā migadāyoti vuccati. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘kheme migadāye’’ti.
不与异类人混杂,一万乃至两万比丘也居住在那里。但在《长部注》中说:“那些全都是能容纳一万二千比丘的大寺,与无畏山寺、支提山寺、心山寺相似。”Uposathārocikā 就是宣告布萨者。据说那些天神每过一年,就到处去宣告:“诸位贤友,一年已经过去,现在还剩五年,五年过后,应当前往槃头摩帝王都诵波罗提木叉。”同样,过了两年时宣告:“诸位贤友,两年已经过去,还剩四年,四年过后,应当前往槃头摩帝王都诵波罗提木叉。”照这样,过了三年、四年、五年时也宣告。因此说“诸位贤友,一年已过”等等。Sānubhāvā 就是具有神通威力。据说,那些比丘,是指依靠天神威力而前往的比丘们。Pācīnasamuddante 就是在东海附近的地方。Gamiyavatta 就是出行者应当做的整理住处等义务。Uposathagga 就是举行布萨的场所。Gatāva honti 就是依靠天神威力已经到达。Te 就是所有人各自依靠自己的威力和天神的威力而前往。巴利
Abbokiṇṇāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhusahassāni vasantīti visabhāgapuggalehi asaṃsaṭṭhāni dasapi vīsatipi bhikkhūnaṃ sahassāni vasanti. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘te sabbepi dvādasasahassabhikkhugaṇhanakā mahāvihārā abhayagiricetiyapabbatacittalapabbatavihārasadisā ca ahesu’’nti vuttaṃ. Uposathārocikāti uposathārocanakā. Tā kira devatā ekamhi vasse nikkhante tattha tattha gantvā ārocenti ‘‘nikkhantaṃ kho, mārisā, ekaṃ vassaṃ, pañca dāni vassāni sesāni, pañcannaṃ vassānaṃ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’’ti. Tathā dvīsu vassesu nikkhantesu ‘‘nikkhantāni kho, mārisā, dve vassāni , cattāri vassāni sesāni, catunnaṃ vassānaṃ accayena bandhumatī rājadhānī upasaṅkamitabbā pātimokkhuddesāyā’’ti ārocenti. Imināva nayena tīsu catūsu pañcasu vassesu atikkantesu ārocenti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mārisā ekaṃ vassaṃ atikkanta’’ntiādi. Sānubhāvāti iddhānubhāvena sānubhāvā. Te kira bhikkhūti ye devatānubhāvena gacchanti, te sandhāya vadati. Pācīnasamuddanteti pācīnasamuddassa samīpadese. Gamiyavattanti gamikehi kātabbaṃ senāsanapaṭijagganādivattaṃ. Uposathagganti uposathakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Gatāva hontīti devatānubhāvena gatā eva honti. Teti attano attano ānubhāvena devatānubhāvena ca gatā sabbepi.
在“忍耐是最高的”等语句中(长部注2.90;法句注2.185),能忍受、承受、安忍他人的诽谤、他人的伤害,以及冷热等各类损害功德的情况,这就叫忍耐。而这种忍耐能特别地烧毁、破除戒等法的敌对法,所以是最高的、最上的苦行。忍受、忍耐就是安忍,这是忍耐的同义词。文法家把安忍解释为忍耐,所以这里的含义应当这样理解:“被称为安忍的、属于忍耐的安忍,名为最高的苦行。”诸佛说涅槃是最高的:因为以有的状态连接下一个有,也就是以有爱的方式而结合;或者,因为有渴爱者未来还会再生,业与果一起被结缚,所以称为“缚”。从被称为“缚”的渴爱中出离,就是涅槃,因为渴爱在那里完全不存在。而诸佛以寂静、殊胜、微妙、吉祥、安稳等一切方式,说那涅槃是最高的。巴利
Khantī paramantiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.90; dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.185) parūpavādaṃ parāpakāraṃ sītuṇhādibhedañca guṇoparodhaṃ khamati sahati adhivāsetīti khanti. Sā pana sīlādīnaṃ paṭipakkhadhamme savisesaṃ tapati santapati vidhamatīti paramaṃ uttamaṃ tapo. Titikkhanaṃ khamanaṃ titikkhā. Khantiyāyevetaṃ vevacanaṃ. Akkharacintakā hi khamāyaṃ titikkhāsaddaṃ vaṇṇenti, tasmā evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo ‘‘titikkhāsaṅkhātā adhivāsanakhanti nāma uttamaṃ tapo’’ti. Nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhāti bhavena bhavantaraṃ vināti bhavanikantibhāvena saṃsibbati, sataṇhasseva vā āyatiṃ punabbhavabhāvato phalena saddhiṃ kammaṃ vināti saṃsibbatīti vānanti saṅkhyaṃ gatāya taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ nibbānaṃ tattha tassā sabbaso abhāvato. Taṃ nibbānaṃ pana santapaṇītanipuṇasivakhemādinā sabbākārena paramanti vadanti buddhā.
“出家者不害他人”:如果一个人因为没有安忍的忍耐力,而去伤害、压迫、折磨别人,那他就不能算是出家者,因为他没有真正出离应当出离的法。第四句只是第三句的另一种说法,意思没有差别。“出家者不”是“不是沙门”的另一种说法,“害他人”是“恼害他人”的另一种说法。或者,“害他人”是指毁坏戒律。因为戒律在最殊胜的意义上被称为“他”,“他”这个词有最胜的含义,就像“知人我胜劣者”等用法一样。如果沙门恼害任何众生,成为害他者,毁坏自己的戒律,那他就不能算是出家者,这就是这里的意思。或者,如果一个人因为没有安忍的忍耐力而成为害他者,甚至夺取蚊子、虻虫等微小众生的生命,那他就确实不是出家者。为什么呢?因为他没有出离、没有去除罪恶的污垢。“出离自己的污垢,所以称为出家者”(法句388),这就是出家者的特征。即使不杀害、不夺命,但用棍棒等去恼害别人,他也是在恼害他人,也不是沙门。为什么呢?因为他没有止息恼害。因为已经止息,所以称为沙门,这就是沙门的特征。正如所说:“因为已经止息诸恶,所以称为沙门”(法句265)。巴利
Na hi pabbajito parūpaghātīti yo adhivāsanakhantirahitattā paraṃ upaghāteti bādhati vihiṃsati, so pabbajito nāma na hoti pabbājetabbadhammassa apabbājanato. Catutthapādo pana tatiyapādasseva vevacanaṃ anatthantarattā. ‘‘Na hi pabbajito’’ti etassa hi ‘‘na samaṇo hotī’’ti vevacanaṃ. ‘‘Parūpaghātī’’ti etassa ‘‘paraṃ viheṭhayanto’’ti vevacanaṃ. Atha vā parūpaghātīti sīlūpaghātī. Sīlañhi uttamaṭṭhena ‘‘para’’nti vuccati parasaddassa seṭṭhavācakattā ‘‘puggalaparoparaññū’’tiādīsu viya. Yo ca samaṇo paraṃ yaṃ kañci sattaṃ viheṭhayanto parūpaghātī hoti attano sīlavināsako, so pabbajito nāma na hotīti attho. Atha vā yo adhivāsanakhantiyā abhāvā parūpaghātī hoti, paraṃ antamaso ḍaṃsamakasampi jīvitā voropeti, so na hi pabbajito. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Pāpamalassa apabbājitattā anīhaṭattā. ‘‘Pabbājayamattano malaṃ, tasmā pabbajitoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 388) idañhi pabbajitalakkhaṇaṃ . Yopi naheva kho upaghāteti na māreti, apica daṇḍādīhi viheṭheti, sopi paraṃ viheṭhayanto samaṇo na hoti. Kiṃkāraṇā? Vihesāya asamitattā. Samitattā samaṇoti vuccatīti idañhi samaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Samitattā hi pāpānaṃ, samaṇoti pavuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 265) hi vuttaṃ.
另外,世尊给比丘们诵说波罗提木叉时,因为波罗提木叉的教说以戒为根本,而戒特别要对治的就是嗔害,为了开示调伏嗔害的方法,一开始就说“忍耐是至高苦行”。由此说明了应对不可意境的方法;而通过“安忍”一词,则说明了应对可意境的方法。通过这两者,也显示了“克服已生的不满和已生的贪乐而安住”这个含义。诸佛说,由于渴爱之缚的止息,涅槃是至高无上的。其中,“忍耐”显示了没有加行方面的过失,“安忍”显示了没有内心倾向方面的过失。同样,“忍耐”显示了能忍受他人的过错,“安忍”显示了不触犯他人。这样,从正面依理显示了波罗提木叉之后,现在为了从反面显示它,而说了“不”等话。由此显示:就像夺取众生的生命,以及用手、土块、棍棒等伤害他人,被称为害他、恼害他人一样,同样,偷盗他人财物、邪淫、妄语、离间语、以粗恶语刺伤人心、无意义的闲话、贪图他人所有、思惟断灭、邪执,也都是害他、恼害他人。因此,无论谁造作任何不善业道和业,他就不成为出家者,也不成为沙门。巴利
Apica bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisanto pātimokkhakathāya ca sīlappadhānattā sīlassa ca visesato doso paṭipakkhoti tassa niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ādito ‘‘khantī paramaṃ tapo’’ti āha. Tena aniṭṭhassa paṭihananūpāyo vutto, titikkhāggahaṇena pana iṭṭhassa, tadubhayenapi uppannaṃ aratiṃ uppannaṃ ratiṃ abhibhuyya viharatīti ayamattho dassito. Taṇhāvānassa vūpasamanato nibbānaṃ paramaṃ vadanti buddhā. Tattha khantiggahaṇena payogavipattiyā abhāvo dassito, titikkhāggahaṇena āsayavipattiyā abhāvo. Tathā khantiggahaṇena parāparādhasahatā, titikkhāggahaṇena paresu anaparajjhanā dassitā. Evaṃ kāraṇamukhena anvayato pātimokkhaṃ dassetvā idāni byatirekato taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena yathā sattānaṃ jīvitā voropanaṃ paraṃ pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi viheṭhanañca ‘‘parūpaghāto paraṃ viheṭhana’’nti vuccati, evaṃ tesaṃ sāpateyyāvaharaṇaṃ parāmasanaṃ visaṃvādanaṃ aññamaññabhedanaṃ pharusavacanena mammaghaṭṭanaṃ niratthakavippalāpo parasantakābhijjhānaṃ ucchedacintanaṃ micchābhinivesanañca upaghāto paraviheṭhanañca hotīti yassa kassaci akusalassa kammapathassa kammassa ca karaṇena pabbajito samaṇo ca na hotīti dasseti.
在第二首偈颂中,“一切恶”指一切不善,也就是所有十二种不善、一切心所生的有罪过之法。“不作”就是不令它生起。所谓“作”,就是在自己的相续中令它生起,因此遮止它就叫“不作”,即不令生起。“善”指四地所摄的善。因为下文将要说的“这是诸佛的教法”,所以“善”这个词指的是圣道之法,以及作为其资粮的三地善法。“具足”就是令其具足,从意义上说,就是证得、获得那种善。“自心清净”就是令自己的心明净,使心达到光净的状态,彻底清净。而这要通过阿拉汉道才能成就。这里,因为住于最上道的人,其心才被称为彻底清净,而在最上果的刹那,心已经清净,不再需要再次清净,所以是就清净已经究竟完成这一点,才说“而这要通过阿拉汉道才能成就”。这样,以戒的防护断除一切恶,以世间和出世间的止观成就善,以阿拉汉果令心清净——这就是诸佛的教法、教诫、教示。巴利
Dutiyagāthāya sabbapāpassāti sabbākusalassa sabbassapi dvādasākusalassa sabbacittuppādasaṅgahitassa sāvajjadhammassa. Akaraṇanti anuppādanaṃ. Karaṇañhi nāma tassa attano santāne uppādananti tappaṭikkhepato akaraṇaṃ anuppādanaṃ. Kusalassāti catubhūmikakusalassa. ‘‘Kusalassā’’ti hi idaṃ ‘‘etaṃ buddhāna sāsana’’nti vakkhamānattā ariyamaggadhamme tesañca sambhārabhūte tebhūmikakusale dhamme bodheti. Upasampadāti upasampādanaṃ. Taṃ pana atthato tassa kusalassa samadhigamo paṭilābho. Sacittapariyodapananti attano cittassa jotanaṃ cittassa pabhassarabhāvakaraṇaṃ sabbaso parisodhanaṃ. Taṃ pana arahattena hoti. Ettha ca yasmā aggamaggasamaṅgino cittaṃ sabbaso pariyodapīyati nāma, aggaphalakkhaṇe pana pariyodapitaṃ hoti puna pariyodapetabbatāya abhāvato, tasmā pariniṭṭhitapariyodapanataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ pana arahattena hotī’’ti. Iti sīlasaṃvarena sabbapāpaṃ pahāya lokiyalokuttarāhi samathavipassanāhi kusalaṃ sampādetvā arahattaphalena cittaṃ pariyodapetabbanti etaṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhi.
第三偈中,“不诽谤”是指不用言语诽谤任何人。“不伤害”是指不以身体和心意伤害任何人,因为即使只是以心念对他人起不利之想等,也属于伤害行为,所以应当避免。“于巴提摩卡”:那巴提摩卡是超越一切、最上的戒,或者能让人从善趣的怖畏中解脱、从恶趣的怖畏中解脱;或者谁守护它,它就让谁解脱,因此称为巴提摩卡;于那巴提摩卡中。“防护”是指具有不违犯七种犯聚之相的防护。“知节量”是指在饮食上知节量,即根据接受和受用来知道适量。“以及边远的坐卧处”是指远离人群拥挤、无人嘈杂、独处的坐卧处。这里应当知道,仅以两种资具就说明了四种资具的知足,因为以资具知足这一共同名称,其余两种也依照征引的方式被说明了。“于增上心精勤”:作为毗婆舍那基础的八等至心是增上心,而道果心更是增上心;对那所说的增上心精勤,就是反复修习的意思。“此乃诸佛之教”:这不诽谤他人、不伤害他人、于巴提摩卡防护、于接受和受用知节量、亲近独处坐卧处、以及于增上心精勤,就是诸佛之教、教诫、训示。巴利
Tatiyagāthāya anupavādoti vācāya kassaci anupavadanaṃ. Anupaghātoti kāyena manasā ca kassaci upaghātākaraṇaṃ manasāpi paresaṃ anatthacintanādivasena upaghātakaraṇassa vajjetabbattā. Pātimokkheti yaṃ taṃ paatimokkhaṃ atipamokkhaṃ uttamaṃ sīlaṃ, pāti vā sugatibhayehi mokkheti duggatibhayehi, yo vā naṃ pāti, taṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkhanti vuccati, tasmiṃ pātimokkhe ca. Saṃvaroti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ avītikkamalakkhaṇo saṃvaro. Mattaññutāti bhojane mattaññutā paṭiggahaṇaparibhogavasena pamāṇaññutā. Pantañca sayanāsananti janasaṅghaṭṭavirahitaṃ nijjanasambādhaṃ vivittaṃ senāsanañca. Ettha dvīhiyeva paccayehi catupaccayasantoso dīpitoti veditabbo paccayasantosasāmaññena itaradvayassapi lakkhaṇahāranayena jotitabhāvato. Adhicitte ca āyogoti vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ adhicittaṃ, tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ, tasmiṃ yathāvutte adhicitte āyogo ca, anuyogoti attho. Etaṃ buddhāna sāsananti etaṃ parassa anupavadanaṃ anupaghātanaṃ pātimokkhe saṃvaro paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaññutā vivittasenāsanasevanaṃ adhicittānuyogo ca buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ ovādo anusiṭṭhi.
不过要明白,这些是诸佛诵戒时所用的偈颂。所以论中说“正是以这种方式”等等。“直到教法终结”这句话,是就住世诸佛的教诫所及的终点而说的;意思是,只要诸佛还住世,就应当诵戒。因为教诫波罗提木叉只有诸佛才诵,声闻弟子不诵。这段的关联是:只有在初觉时期才有诵戒。这里说的“初觉”,《大结集注》里说是以二十年为限。之所以取“初觉就是二十年”来说,是因为下面的义注中已经讲过:“世尊在初觉的二十年里,并没有固定的侍者。”不过阿阇梨法护长老说:“在四十五年中,最初十五年是初觉。”如果这样算,中间十五年就是中觉,最后十五年就是后觉,三觉的时间就相等了,这也说得通。因为以十五年为一段,正好凑满四十五年。而义注中因为十五年长的初觉也包含在二十年之内,所以说“在初觉的二十年间”,这样也可以理解。巴利
Imā pana sabbabuddhānaṃ pātimokkhuddesagāthā hontīti veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘eteneva upāyenā’’tiādi. Yāva sāsanapariyantāti dharamānakabuddhānaṃ anusāsanapariyantaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, yāva buddhā dharanti, tāva uddisitabbataṃ āgacchantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ovādapātimokkhañhi buddhāyeva uddisanti, na sāvakā. Paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva uddesamāgacchantīti sambandho. Paṭhamabodhi cettha vīsativassaparicchinnāti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Tañca heṭṭhā aṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘bhagavato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthī’’ti kathitattā ‘‘paṭhamabodhi nāma vīsativassānī’’ti gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘pañcacattālīsāya vassesu ādito pannarasa vassāni paṭhamabodhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evañca sati majjhe pannarasa vassāni majjhimabodhi, ante pannarasa vassāni pacchimabodhīti tiṇṇaṃ bodhīnaṃ samappamāṇatā siyāti tampi yuttaṃ. Pannarasattikena hi pañcacattālīsa vassāni pūrenti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pannarasavassappamāṇāya paṭhamabodhiyā vīsativassesuyeva antogadhattā ‘‘paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare’’ti vuttanti evampi sakkā viññātuṃ.
难道不是这样吗:虽然已经制定了一些学处,但当时还没有允许诵教令巴帝摩卡,后来因为长老请求才被允许。既然如此,为什么说“从制定学处的时候起,就开始诵教令巴帝摩卡”呢?虽然制定了一些学处之后,教令巴帝摩卡还没有被允许,但如果没有制定学处,教令巴帝摩卡就不存在,只有在已经制定学处的情况下才有。为了说明这个意思,才说“从制定学处的时候起”。东园:因为建在舍卫城东边,所以得到这个名字的大寺。鹿子母讲堂:鹿子长者之母、被称为鹿子母的毗舍佉大近事女所建造的殿堂。无因:就是否定原因。无机会:就是否定条件。两者都是在否定原因。因:就是以那个原因。巴利
Nanu ca kānici sikkhāpadāni paññapetvāpi na tāva āṇāpātimokkhaṃ anuññātaṃ pacchā therassa āyācanena anuññātattā, tasmā kathametaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhuti āṇāpātimokkhameva uddisīyatī’’ti, yadipi kānici sikkhāpadāni paññapetvāva āṇāpātimokkhaṃ na anuññātaṃ, tathāpi apaññatte sikkhāpade āṇāpātimokkhaṃ natthi, kintu paññatteyevāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sikkhāpadapaññattikālato pana pabhutī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pubbārāmeti sāvatthiyā pācīnadisābhāge katattā evaṃladdhavohāre mahāvihāre. Migāramātupāsādeti migāraseṭṭhino mātuṭṭhāniyattā migāramātāti saṅkhyaṃ gatāya visākhāmahāupāsikāya kārite pāsāde. Aṭṭhānanti hetupaṭikkhepo. Anavakāsoti paccayapaṭikkhepo. Ubhayenapi kāraṇameva paṭikkhipati. Yanti yena kāraṇena.
所谓“他们”,指的是那些比丘。说“在现前声闻弟子面前出家”,是指那些最末后的、像须跋陀那样的现前声闻弟子面前出家的人。关联是:以刹帝利族等来说,就是各种不同的家族。或者按高下家族、殊胜财富等家族来说,就应该理解为:按高下家族,或按殊胜财富等家族。其中,依刹帝利、婆罗门,或依刹帝利、婆罗门、居士,应知为高族;依其余者,为低族。按殊胜财富等家族来说,就是按拥有殊胜、更殊胜、最胜受用等的家族来说。“殊胜”一词再次出现,是为了显示极其殊胜,就像“苦苦”等说法中那样。通过“等”字,应知也包含了殊胜与不殊胜者。巴利
Tesanti bhikkhūnaṃ. Sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajitāti sabbantimānaṃ subhaddasadisānaṃ sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajite sandhāya vadati. Khattiyakulādivaseneva vividhā kulāti sambandho. Uccanīcauḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti uccanīcakulavasena uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha khattiyabrāhmaṇavasena vā khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ vasena vā uccakulatā veditabbā, sesānaṃ vasena nīcakulatā. Uḷāruḷārabhogādikulavasena vāti uḷārataratamaupabhogavantādikulavasena. Uḷārātisayajotanatthañhi puna uḷāraggahaṇaṃ ‘‘dukkhadukkha’’ntiādīsu viya. Ādi-saddena uḷārānuḷārānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“守护梵行”这句话,是在说明前面已经说过的意思,接着开示说“长久护持所传之法”。即使学处还没有制定,如果他们属于同一种姓等,就会像各自家族传承的典籍那样,不会使之消失。然而,因为学处也还没有制定,而这些比丘又不属于同一种姓等,所以才会消失。为了说明这个意思,才说了“因为同名……所以互相恼害”等话。既然如此,为什么在“久住”那一段里也说“种种名”等呢?这是为了说明:即使他们有种种种姓等差异,教法之所以能长久流传,正是因为制定了学处。教法的长久流传,正是依靠学处的制定。应当知道:诸佛在自身般涅槃之后,如果还有应当调伏的众生存在,就会制定学处;如果没有,就不制定。就像依身门、语门所生起的表业而转起的心,因为是随那表业而转起,所以说“由身语门而转起”;这里也应这样理解。“如”在这里只是个虚词。以品摄、五十摄等:就是按戒蕴品、大品等品来归类,按根本五十、中五十等五十来归类。由“等”字,应当知道还包括相应等摄。巴利
Brahmacariyaṃ rakkhantīti vuttamevatthaṃ pakāsetvā dassento āha ‘‘ciraṃ pariyattidhammaṃ pariharantī’’ti. Apaññattepi sikkhāpade yadi samānajātiādikā siyuṃ, attano attano kulānugataganthaṃ viya na nāseyyuṃ. Yasmā pana sikkhāpadampi apaññattaṃ, ime ca bhikkhū na samānajātiādikā, tasmā vināsesunti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā ekanāmā…pe… tasmā aññamaññaṃ viheṭhentā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ciraṭṭhitikavārepi ‘‘nānānāmā’’tiādi vuttanti? Satipi tesaṃ nānājaccādibhāve sikkhāpadapaññattiyā eva sāsanassa cirappavattīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sikkhāpadapaññattivaseneva sāsanassa cirappavatti. Yasmā buddhā attano parinibbānato uddhampi vinetabbasattasambhave sati sikkhāpadaṃ paññapenti, asati na paññapenti, tasmāti veditabbo. Yathā kāyavacīdvārasaṅkhātaṃ viññattiṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā pavattamānampi cittaṃ tassāyeva viññattiyā vasena pavattanato ‘‘kāyavacīdvārehi pavatta’’nti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ. Vaggasaṅgahapaṇṇāsasaṅgahādīhīti sīlakkhandhavaggamahāvaggādivaggasaṅgahavasena mūlapaṇṇāsamaajhamapaṇṇāsādipaṇṇāsasaṅgahavasena. Ādi-saddena saṃyuttādisaṅgaho veditabbo.
“应当这样思惟,不应当这样思惟”这句话里,“这样”是指对所教导的教诫,从规则和遮止两方面所表现出的方式的把握;这是为了显示正思惟和邪思惟生起的方式,以阐明它们的利益和过患。因此说“应当思惟出离思惟等三种思惟”等等。这里由“等”字应当知道是包括了无瞋思惟和无害思惟。其中,出离:因为从贪欲出离,所以是无贪;因为从诸盖出离,所以是初禅;因为从一切不善法出离,所以是一切善法;因为从一切有为行出离,所以是涅槃。依亲依止、相应、作所缘而与出离相应的思惟,就是出离思惟,也就是正思惟。这个思惟在不净禅的前分阶段属于欲界,在不净禅中属于色界,以那禅为基础而生起的道果时属于出世间。无瞋是瞋恚的对治法,或者因为通过它不对任何人起瞋恚,所以是无瞋,也就是慈。与所说的无瞋相应的思惟,是无瞋思惟。这个思惟在慈禅的前分阶段属于欲界,依慈的修习而证得的初禅中属于色界,以那禅为基础而生起的道果时属于出世间。无害是害的对治法,或者因为通过它不伤害众生,所以是无害,也就是悲。与它相应的思惟,是无害思惟。这个思惟在悲禅的前分阶段属于欲界,依悲的修习而证得的初禅中属于色界,以那禅为基础而生起的道果时属于出世间。巴利
Evaṃvitakketha, mā evaṃ vitakkayitthāti ettha evanti yathānusiṭṭhāya anusāsaniyā vidhivasena paṭisedhanavasena ca pavattitākāraparāmasanaṃ, sā ca sammāvitakkānaṃ micchāvitakkānañca pavattiākāradassanavasena pavattati atthaānisaṃsassa ādīnavassa ca vibhāvanatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nekkhammavitakkādayo tayo vitakke vitakkethā’’tiādi. Ettha ādi-saddena abyāpādavitakkaavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha nekkhammaṃ vuccati lobhato nikkhantattā alobho, nīvaraṇehi nikkhantattā paṭhamajjhānaṃ, sabbākusalehi nikkhantattā sabbo kusalo dhammo, sabbasaṅkhatehi nikkhantattā nibbānaṃ, upanissayato sampayogato ārammaṇakaraṇato ca nekkhammena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko nekkhammavitakko, sammāsaṅkappo. So asubhajjhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, asubhajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Byāpādassa paṭipakkho abyāpādo, kañcipi na byāpādenti etenāti vā abyāpādo, mettā. Yathāvuttena abyāpādena paṭisaṃyutto vitakko abyāpādavitakko. So mettājhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti, mettābhāvanāvasena adhigate paṭhamajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Vihiṃsāya paṭipakkhā, na vihiṃsanti vā etāya satteti avihiṃsā, karuṇā. Tāya paṭisaṃyutto vitakko avihiṃsāvitakko. So karuṇājhānassa pubbabhāge kāmāvacaro, karuṇābhāvanāvasena adhigate paṭhamajjhāne rūpāvacaro, taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro.
难道不是因为无贪、无嗔、无痴彼此不相离,所以依它们生起的这些出离思惟等,因为彼此不混杂而无法区分确定吗?并非无法确定。因为当无贪以决定、成熟、现行等方式成为主导时,另外两个就跟随它。比如,当以无贪为主导、重视出离的心生起时,获得机会的出离思惟就站住了脚。而与它相应的无嗔,具有无嗔的特相,依它的力量,这个思惟本身就可能具有无嗔思惟的性质;而一旦有无嗔思惟的性质,由于对任何众生都不伤害的本性,无害思惟的性质也可能出现。其余两个跟随这个出离思惟,因为它们的自相不可见,所以当它存在时它们就存在,当它不存在时它们就不存在,应当这样推断。同样,当以慈为主导的心生起时,其余两个跟随它。当以悲为主导的心生起时,其余两个跟随它。巴利
Nanu ca alobhādosāmohānaṃ aññamaññāvirahato nesaṃ vasena uppajjanakānaṃ imesaṃ nekkhammavitakkādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ asaṅkarato vavatthānaṃ na hotīti? No na hoti. Yadā hi alobho padhāno hoti niyamitapariṇatasamudācārādivasena, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Tathā hi yadā alobhappadhāno nekkhammagaruko cittuppādo hoti, tadā laddhāvasaro nekkhammavitakko patiṭṭhahati. Taṃsampayuttassa pana adosalakkhaṇassa abyāpādassa vasena yo tasseva abyāpādavitakkabhāvo sambhaveyya, sati ca abyāpādavitakkabhāve kassacipi aviheṭhanajātikatāya avihiṃsāvitakkabhāvo ca sambhaveyya. Te itare dve tasseva nekkhammavitakkassa anugāmino sarūpato adissanato tasmiṃ sati honti, asati na hontīti anumāneyyā bhavanti. Evameva yadā mettāpadhāno cittuppādo hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā karuṇāpadhāno cittuppādo hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti.
“欲思惟等”这里,通过“等”这个字,应当知道也包含了瞋思惟和害思惟。其中,与欲相应的思惟就是欲思惟。这里,欲有两种:事欲和烦恼欲。在事欲这方面,是依所缘而与诸欲相应的思惟,叫欲思惟;在烦恼欲这方面,则是依相应而与欲相应的思惟,应当这样搭配理解。与瞋相应的思惟就是瞋思惟。与害相应的思惟就是害思惟。在这三者中,前两种可以在众生和诸行上生起。欲思惟,是在思惟可爱的、可意的众生或诸行时生起;瞋思惟,是从对不可爱的、不可意的众生或诸行生气、注视的那一刻开始,一直到想要毁灭它们时生起;害思惟不在诸行上生起。因为诸行根本没有所谓“应该让它受苦”这回事,只有在想着“愿这些众生被杀、或被消灭、或被毁灭、或不存在”的时候,害思惟才在众生上生起。那么,为什么说“诸行根本没有所谓应该让它受苦”呢?难道那些被认为应该受苦的、被称为众生的,从究竟意义上来说不也是诸行吗?确实如此,但它们因为具有诸根、有识,所以能感受苦,因此它们被视为众生,成为害思惟的所缘。至于那些不能感受苦、不具备上述特征的,针对它们才说“害思惟不在诸行上生起”。巴利
Kāmavitakkādayoti ettha ādi-saddena byāpādavitakkavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha kāmapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko kāmavitakko. Ettha hi dve kāmā vatthukāmo ca kilesakāmo ca. Tattha vatthukāmapakkhe ārammaṇavasena kāmehi paṭisaṃyutto vitakko kāmavitakko, kilesakāmapakkhe pana sampayogavasena kāmena paṭisaṃyuttoti yojetabbaṃ. Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko byāpādavitakko. Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko vihiṃsāvitakko. Tesu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmavitakko hi piye manāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati, byāpādavitakko appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva vināsanā uppajjati, vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjati. Saṅkhāro hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthi, ‘‘ime sattā haññantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesu’’nti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati. Atha kasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāro dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthī’’ti, nanu ye dukkhāpetabbāti icchitā sattasaññitā, tepi atthato saṅkhārā evāti? Saccametaṃ, te pana indriyabaddhā saviññāṇakatāya dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti, tasmā te vihiṃsāvitakkassa visayā icchitā sattasaññitā. Ye pana na dukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedenti vuttalakkhaṇāyogato, te sandhāya ‘‘vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
不执取而心从诸漏解脱:这里,“从诸漏”是用具格来说明作者;“诸心”是复数主格;“解脱”是业格词。因此,应当这样理解这里的含义:以诸漏为作者,不执取——即不以所缘的方式执取——诸心得以解脱。所以说“他们之心”等。“以诸漏”:这里也是用具格来说明作者。“解脱”是业格词。“不执取它们而解脱”:就是那些漏不以所缘的方式执取那些心,而使它们解脱。这里,“诸心”是复数对格,“解脱”是作者格词。以无生灭而灭尽:未来以不生起为名的灭尽而灭尽的诸漏。不执取而解脱:不以所缘的方式执取而使诸心解脱。心得开敷:因殊胜智光所触而开敷之心。依前文:依“于某可怖畏的林丛”之文。因此说“所谓于某可怖畏的林丛,在那里”。“所作”:这个词是表示被动语态的词,所以说“于可怖畏所作,即可怖畏之作用”。可怖畏的作用即是所作,于那可怖畏所作之中。巴利
Anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsūti ettha āsavehīti katthuatthe karaṇaniddeso, cittānīti paccattabahuvacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ, tasmā āsavehi kattubhūtehi anupādāya ārammaṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimuccitānīti evamettha attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘tesañhi cittānī’’tiādi. Yehi āsavehīti etthāpi kattuatthe eva karaṇaniddeso. Vimucciṃsūti kammasādhanaṃ. Na tetāni gahetvā vimucciṃsūti te āsavā tāni cittāni ārammaṇavasena na gahetvā vimucciṃsu vimocesuṃ. Ettha hi cittānīti upayogabahuvacanaṃ, vimucciṃsūti kattusādhanaṃ. Anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamānāti āyatiṃ anuppattisaṅkhātena nirodhena nirujjhamānā āsavā. Aggahetvā vimucciṃsūti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena aggahetvā cittāni vimocesuṃ. Vikasitacittā ahesunti sātisayañāṇarasmisamphassena samphullacittā ahesuṃ. Purimavacanāpekkhanti ‘‘aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍe’’ti vuttavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ vuttaṃ aññatarasmiṃ bhiṃsanake vanasaṇḍeti, tatrā’’ti. Katanti bhāvasādhanavāci idaṃ padanti āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasmiṃhoti, bhiṃsanakakiriyāyā’’ti. Bhiṃsanassa karaṇaṃ kiriyā bhiṃsanakataṃ, tasmiṃ bhiṃsanakatasmiṃ.
现在,为了说明另一种义理连接方式,他说了“或者”等话。在这个义理解释中,“令人恐惧”,就是令人恐惧的东西,令人恐惧的东西本身就是“令人恐惧的”;在应当说“它的状态是令人恐惧的状态”时,省略了ta这个音,所以说成“令人恐惧性”。为了说明这一点,他说了“在‘令人恐惧性’中,意思是‘令人恐惧的状态’”等话。“多数”这个说法,也应该按照“有毛者”的方式去连接,而不是只按“毛”的方式,所以他说了“或者,对多数而言”等话。巴利
Idāni aññathāpi atthayojanaṃ dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ atthavikappe bhiṃsayatīti bhiṃsano, bhiṃsano eva bhiṃsanako, tassa bhāvo bhiṃsanakattanti vattabbe ta-kārassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘bhiṃsanakata’’nti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘bhiṃsanakatasminti bhiṃsanakabhāveti attho’’tiādi. Yebhuyyaggahaṇaṃ lomavantavasenapi yojetabbaṃ, na lomavasenevāti āha ‘‘bahutarānaṃ vā’’tiādi.
按人双来说,就是按人的时间来说;具体是指按人的寿命长短来说。三部结文里都说:“最后一位像须跋陀那样。”这是把当时存在的两个人的寿命期限完整地拿来,然后说“十万……乃至……八十”。在“只有两个人双”这句话里,“人双”指的是人的一对所持续的时间。这只是说法上的概念,从实际含义上说,人本身就是“人双”。世尊在世时算一个人双,般涅槃后算一个人双,所以说“只有两个人双”。不过要知道,世尊般涅槃后,只有一个人双,梵行只住立了八万年。巴利
Purisayugavasenāti purisakālavasena, purisānaṃ āyuppamāṇavasenāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Sabbapacchimako subhaddasadiso’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ kāle vijjamānānaṃ dvinnaṃ purisānaṃ āyuparicchedaṃ sakalameva gahetvā ‘‘satasahassaṃ…pe… aṭṭhāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dveyeva purisayugānīti ettha purisānaṃ yugappavattikālo purisayugaṃ. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana purisova purisayugaṃ. Dharamāne bhagavati ekaṃ purisayugaṃ, parinibbute ekanti katvā ‘‘dveyeva purisayugānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Parinibbute pana bhagavati ekameva purisayugaṃ asītiyeva vassasahassāni brahmacariyaṃ aṭṭhāsīti veditabbaṃ.
20 弟子双,就是指弟子们本身就是弟子双。不能胜任,就是达不到。使执取胎,就是为了让一切知智得以出生,而令其执持智胎。巴利
20.Sāvakayugānīti sāvakā eva sāvakayugāni. Asambhuṇantenāti apāpuṇantena. Gabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassāti sabbaññutaññāṇassa vijāyanatthaṃ ñāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpentassa.
21 21. “什么是连接”是指:前后文之间有什么连接、有什么关联,这就是它的意思。“期望学处制定的请求”中,因为被请求,所以叫“请求”;学处的制定本身就是请求,也就是“学处制定的请求”;因为期望那个,所以是“期望学处制定的请求的”,这是处格,意思是“对于那个被请求的学处制定”,也就是处格的说法。因为“在那里”这个词所指的,正是与请求相关的学处制定本身,所以后面会说“在那里,对于那个学处制定”。“所说的”是指:通过“应制定学处”这句话所说的学处制定,意思是“已被请求”。“在那里,对于那个学处制定”是指对于那个被请求的学处制定。“非时”是指对于学处制定来说,不是时候。巴利
21.Koanusandhīti pubbāparakathānaṃ kiṃ anusandhānaṃ, ko sambandhoti attho. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhanti yācīyatīti yācanā, sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva yācanā sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanā, taṃ apekkhatīti sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, yāciyamānasikkhāpadapaññattiapekkhaṃ bhummavacananti vuttaṃ hoti. Yācanavisiṭṭhā sikkhāpadapaññattiyeva hi ‘‘tatthā’’ti iminā parāmaṭṭhā, teneva vakkhati ‘‘tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā’’ti. Yaṃ vuttanti ‘‘sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeyyā’’ti iminā yaṃ sikkhāpadapaññapanaṃ vuttaṃ, yācitanti attho. Tattha tassā sikkhāpadapaññattiyāti tassaṃ yāciyamānasikkhāpadapaññattiyanti attho. Akālanti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ.
在“漏所依处”这个词里,“所依处”是处格的意思,所以注释里说“诸漏住于这些之中”等等。那么,哪些是诸漏?哪些法是它们所依之处?于是说“在那些有现世的和后世的”等等。现世的,比如被人诽谤等;后世的,就是堕入恶趣、属于恶趣的种种苦。那些漏依各种因缘而现起,所以叫漏。“对这些”,是指对被人诽谤等诸漏。“那些”,是指违犯的法。如果没有漏所依处的法,制定学处有什么过失,才要这样说呢?因此说“如果制定的话”等等,意思是:如果没有看到违犯的过失,如果就制定的话。背后骂人是“他谤”,在别人的话里挑毛病是“他难”,当面指责是“讥毁过失”。巴利
Āsavaṭṭhānīyāti ettha adhikaraṇe anīyasaddoti āha ‘‘āsavā tiṭṭhanti etesū’’tiādi . Ke pana te āsavā, ke ca dhammā tadadhikaraṇabhūtāti āha ‘‘yesu diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikā’’tiādi. Diṭṭhadhammikā parūpavādādayo, samparāyikā āpāyikā apāyadukkhavisesā. Te āsavanti tena tena paccayavasena pavattantīti āsavā. Nesanti parūpavādādiāsavānaṃ. Teti vītikkamadhammā. Asati āsavaṭṭhānīye dhamme sikkhāpadapaññattiyaṃ ko doso, yenevaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘yadi hi paññapeyyā’’tiādi, vītikkamadosaṃ adisvā yadi paññapeyyāti adhippāyo. Parammukhā akkosanaṃ parūpavādo, parehi vacanesu dosāropanaṃ parūpārambho, sammukhā garahanaṃ garahadoso.
“怎么会缠住呢”是连接语。与“如何”这个词结合时,应当看作未来时的用法。“随从者”就是跟随的人。“财富蕴”就是财富堆。“这些是我们的”,因为这样被知道,所以叫“亲属”;以祖父、父亲、儿子等一代代轮转的意义,叫“轮转”,亲属本身就是轮转,所以叫“亲属轮转”。“以衣食为最上而知足”,意思是在衣食上以最上、最殊胜而知足;也就是说,在寻求衣食时,以少欲的方式安住在最上、最殊胜的状态。或者,衣食本身就是他们的最上、最高极限,他们不寻求、不期望比这更高的任何非法的东西,所以叫“以衣食为最上者”;这种状态就是“以衣食为最上性”,他们在这种最上性中知足。“在他们当中,谁呢”,就是在具有如上所说功德的那些比丘当中,是谁呢。成为世间染污的:因为属于世间,又会被烦恼所接触,所以成为世间染污。仅以出家为开端:就是以“远离杀生”等为开端的出家之门。这个:就是不淫等的不做。力:就是有能力制定学处。力:就是能如实通达一切法的智慧之力。会动摇:就是会变坏。要彰显这个道理,就是不会停留在原来的位置上,意思是不会停留在概念施设的位置上。不善巧:因为不知道适合治疗的时候,所以不善巧、不聪明。不增长、不幸、灾难、痛苦。应当提前:就是在生疮之前就应当。使皮肤完好:就是使皮肤好看。愚医:就是不明智的医生。并且使我到达血液耗尽:应当改变格位来理解。巴利
Kathañhi nāma paliveṭhessatīti sambandho, kathaṃ-saddayoge anāgatappayogo daṭṭhabbo. Anvāyikoti anuvattako. Bhogakkhandhanti bhogarāsiṃ. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī, pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivaṭṭanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo, ñātīyeva parivaṭṭo ñātiparivaṭṭo. Ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhāti ghāsacchādane paramatāya uttamatāya santuṭṭhā, ghāsacchādanapariyesane sallekhavasena paramatāya ukkaṭṭhabhāve saṇṭhitāti attho. Ghāsacchādanameva vā paramaṃ paramā koṭi etesaṃ na tato paraṃ kiñci asāmisajātaṃ pariyesanti paccāsīsanti cāti ghāsacchādanaparamā, tesaṃ bhāvo ghāsacchādanaparamatā, tassaṃ ghāsacchādanaparamatāya santuṭṭhā. Tesu nāma koti yathāvuttaguṇavisiṭṭhesu tesu bhikkhūsu ko nāma. Lokāmisabhūtanti lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbattā lokāmisabhūtaṃ. Pabbajjāsaṅkhepenevāti ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādinā pabbajjāmukheneva. Etanti methunādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ. Thāmanti sikkhāpadānaṃ paññāpanakiriyāya sāmatthiyaṃ. Balanti yāthāvato sabbadhammānaṃ paṭivedhasamatthaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ. Kuppeyyāti kuppaṃ bhaveyya. Etassevatthassa pākaṭakaraṇaṃ na yathāṭhāne tiṭṭheyyāti, paññattiṭṭhāne na tiṭṭheyyāti attho. Akusaloti tikicchituṃ yuttakālassa aparijānanato akusalo acheko. Avuddhi anayo, byasanaṃ dukkhaṃ. Paṭikaccevāti gaṇḍuppādanato paṭhamameva. Sañchaviṃ katvāti sobhanacchaviṃ katvā. Bālavejjoti apaṇḍitavejjo. Lohitakkhayañca maṃ pāpetīti vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ.
“非时示现”,是指在制定学处(戒条)上的非时示现。“令病平息”,是指使身体安适。“己之师职”:“师职”指作为老师的身份,或者老师的职责,即自身所处的老师地位,或所承担的教导之责。这里用方位格是表示目的。“威德昭著”,是指威德已经显明于众人。巴利
Akālaṃ dassetvāti sikkhāpadapaññattiyā akālaṃ dassetvā. Rogaṃ vūpasametvāti phāsuṃ katvā. Sake ācariyaketi ācariyassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā ācariyakaṃ, tasmiṃ attano ācariyabhāve, ācariyakamme vā. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Viditānubhāvoti pākaṭānubhāvo.
“数量众多”是指出家的人很多。因为在教法里,有些法本来会成为漏的依处,却不再生起;由于住处充足,所以那些以贪著住处等为因、在教法里会成为漏的依处的某些法,就不再生起。按照这个道理,应当理解这里已经统摄了“随法学戒”等戒条。巴利
Vipulabhāvenāti pabbajitānaṃ bahubhāvena. Sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjantīti yasmā senāsanāni pahonti, tasmā āvāsamacchariyādihetukā sāsane ekacce āsavaṭṭhānīyā dhammā na uppajjanti. Iminā nayenāti etena padasodhammasikkhāpadādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
“利得的最上广大”:“利得”是指能获得衣等资具的条件,它的“最上”、“广大”就是指殊胜或数量众多。“多闻的状态”就是博学多闻。“以不恰当的方式浮起”:是指以不善巧的方式执取,以颠倒的方式去理解,这就是它的意思。“以味与味相合”:是以本质与本质相合——在允许使用的敷具等物中,由于同属乐触这一共性,对执取触的味也生起无罪想,于是以非执取触的味与执取触的味相合,也就是把两者等同看待。“彰显非法、非律、非师教者”:以“我如此了知世尊所说之法……”等话语,将导师的教法说成非法、非律而加以彰显(参见波逸提第四一八条)。巴利
Lābhaggamahattanti cīvarādilabhitabbapaccayo lābho, tassa aggaṃ mahattaṃ paṇītatā bahubhāvo vā. Bahussutassa bhāvo bāhusaccaṃ. Ayoniso ummujjamānāti anupāyena abhinivisamānā, viparītato jānamānāti attho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti sabhāvena sabhāvaṃ saṃsanditvā, anuññātapaccattharaṇādīsu sukhasamphassasāmaññato upādinnaphassarasepi anavajjasaññitāya anupādinnaphassarasena upādinnaphassarasaṃ saṃsanditvā, samānabhāvaṃ upanetvāti attho. Uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃsatthusāsanaṃ dīpentīti ‘‘tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādinā (pāci. 418) satthusāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā dīpenti.
在这里所说的“义”中,指的是“舍利弗,比丘僧团确实没有过失”(波罗夷21)这样说的比丘僧团这个义。那么,为什么说破戒者像盗贼呢?所以说“他们其实不是沙门……”等等。“与黑法相应”,是因为与被称为破戒的恶法相应。“光辉”,是指戒行光辉。“被称为精髓”,因为戒等功德是教法和梵行的精髓,所以被称为精髓。巴利
Imasmiṃ attheti ‘‘nirabbudo hi, sāriputta, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (pārā. 21) evaṃ vuttabhikkhusaṅghasaññite atthe. Kathaṃ pana dussīlānaṃ corabhāvoti āha ‘‘te hi assamaṇāva hutvā’’tiādi. Kāḷakadhammayogāti dussīlatāsaṅkhātapāpadhammayogato. Pabhassaroti pabhassarasīlo. Sāroti vuccantīti sāsanabrahmacariyassa sārabhūtattā sīlādayo guṇā ‘‘sāro’’ti vuccanti.
“一切卑劣功德”是指一切功德低劣,或者功德微少。这里说“他是入流者”,是针对阿难长老说的。“已入流”就是已经进入道流。因为对敌对法毫无剩余地流动、驱除,所以称圣道为流,因此说“流是道的异名”。“入流者”是指具足此道的人。用这句话说明具道者为入流者之后,又以例证阐明这个含义,现在为了指出这里所指的人,所以说“但此处”等。这里的“已入”一词,像“为证果而修行者”等(相应部5.488)那样,是现在时,所以说“以道给予果名”。确实,与道相似的八支或七支的果被赋予“流”这个名称,而在过去时中,则是依自性得名。因为在道刹那,确实称为入道流;在果刹那,则称为已入。巴利
Sabbaparittaguṇoti sabbehi nihīnaguṇo, appaguṇo vā. So sotāpannoti ānandattheraṃ sandhāya vadati. Sotaṃ āpannoti maggasotaṃ āpanno. Paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ anavasesato savanato pellanato soto ariyamaggoti āha ‘‘sototi ca maggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Sotāpannoti tena samannāgatassa puggalassāti iminā maggasamaṅgī sotāpannoti vatvā tamevatthaṃ udāharaṇena sādhetvā idāni idhādhippetapuggalaṃ niddhāretvā dassento āha ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Idha āpannasaddo ‘‘phalasacchikiriyāya paṭipanno’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.488) viya vattamānakālikoti āha ‘‘maggena phalassa nāmaṃ dinna’’nti. Maggena hi attanā sadisassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa vā sattaṅgikassa vā phalassa sototi nāmaṃ dinnaṃ, atītakālikatte pana sarasatova nāmalābho siyā. Maggakkhaṇe hi maggasotaṃ āpajjati nāma, phalakkhaṇe āpanno.
“堕入”是指掉进丑陋、有苦、有恼的地方,也就是把人抛进恶趣之苦中。“法”指自性,所以说“不是把自己抛入恶趣的自性”。另一种说法,“法”指能把人抛入恶趣的有身见等不善法。如果那个人因为完全断除了不善法而不再有这种不善法,那么他既然没有把自己抛入恶趣的自性,所以说“不是把自己抛入恶趣的自性”。为什么?这是在问没有堕落法性的原因。“能令人堕入恶趣”就是能使人堕入恶趣。“堕落自性”就是生起的自性。“决定者”,从最低限度第七有以上,因无生起的法性而决定。“以正决定之道”即由正性决定之道所获得的道。“决定者”,或者从最低第七有以上,因不再生起的法性而决定。“正觉”即以上三道所著称的正觉。正觉者,即圣道。而这里因为已证得初道,所以其余的道是以应当证得的方式而可希求的。因此说“必定能到达上三道”。必定到达上三道者,即“能到达者”,也就是须陀洹。巴利
Virūpaṃ sadukkhaṃ saupāyāsaṃ nipātetīti vinipāto, apāyadukkhe khipanako. Dhammoti sabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvo’’ti. Atha vā dhammoti apāyesu khipanako sakkāyadiṭṭhiādiko akusaladhammo. Yassa pana so akusaladhammo natthi sabbaso pahīnattā, so yasmā apāyesu attānaṃ vinipātanasabhāvo na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na attānaṃ apāyesu vinipātanasabhāvoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Kasmāti avinipātanadhammatāya kāraṇaṃ pucchati. Apāyaṃ gamentīti apāyagamanīyā. Vinipātanasabhāvoti uppajjanasabhāvo. Sammattaniyāmena maggenāti sammā bhavaniyāmakena paṭiladdhamaggena. Niyatoti vā heṭṭhimantato sattamabhavato upari anuppajjanadhammatāya niyato. Sambodhīti uparimaggattayasaṅkhātā sambodhi. Sambujjhatīti hi sambodhi, ariyamaggo. So ca idha paṭhamamaggassa adhigatattā avasiṭṭho eva adhigantabbabhāvena icchitabboti. Tenāha ‘‘uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpako’’ti. Uparimaggattayaṃ avassaṃ sampāpuṇātīti sampāpako, sotāpanno.
22 “随法”是指随顺出世间法的法。“不告而”是对“不询问而”这个词的解释。“出发作国域游行”:这里的iti这个词因为意思已经明白,所以没有说出来,在其他类似的地方也是这样。其中,“国域游行”就是在国域中行走;行走就是游行,这本身就是游行,在国域中的游行就是国域游行。“出发作彼”就是出发,意思是前往国域旅行。“正出发时”用限定词表明并非不出发。在“出发作国域游行”这里,为了说明世尊游行出发的方式,所以说“作国域游行时”等等。所谓游行,有两种:急行和不急行。其中,即使很远也看到应当度化的人,为了度化他而急速前往,叫做急行,这应当从迎接大迦叶长老等事例中了解。确实,世尊迎接大迦叶长老时,片刻间就走了三伽浮他;为了阿罗婆迦走了三十由旬;为了央掘魔罗也是这样;为了补库萨提走了四十五由旬;为了摩诃劫宾那走了一百二十由旬;为了达尼耶走了七百由旬;为了法将的共住弟子林住帝沙沙弥走了一百二十三伽浮他,这是急行。如果按照村、镇、城的次序,每天走一由旬或半由旬,以乞食等方式利益世间而行,这叫做不急行。世尊作这种游行时,在大圈、中圈、末圈这三个圈中的某一个中行走。其中,因为说的是“国域游行”,所以这里指的是不急行。为了分别说明这一点,所以说“大圈、中圈”等等。巴利
22.Anudhammatāti lokuttaradhammānugato dhammo. Anapaloketvāti padassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘anāpucchitvā’’ti. Janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantīti ettha iti-saddo gamyamānatāya na vutto, evaṃ aññatthāpi īdisesu ṭhānesu. Tattha janapadacārikanti janapadesu caraṇaṃ, caraṇaṃ vā cāro, so eva cārikā, janapadesu cārikā janapadacārikā. Taṃ pakkamanti, janapadagamanaṃ gacchantīti attho. Pakkamantiyevāti avadhāraṇena no na pakkamantīti dasseti. ‘‘Janapadacārikaṃ pakkamantī’’ti ettha ṭhatvā bhagavato cārikāpakkamanavidhiṃ dassento āha ‘‘janapadacārikaṃ carantā cā’’tiādi. Cārikā ca nāmesā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.254; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.254) duvidhā turitacārikā ceva aturitacārikā ca. Tattha dūrepi bodhaneyyapuggalaṃ disvā tassa bodhanatthāya sahasā gamanaṃ turitacārikā nāma, sā mahākassapattherapaccuggamanādīsu daṭṭhabbā. Bhagavā hi mahākassapattheraṃ paccuggacchanto muhuttena tigāvutamagamāsi, āḷavakassatthāya tiṃsayojanaṃ, tathā aṅgulimālassa, pukkusātissa pana pañcacattālīsayojanaṃ, mahākappinassa vīsayojanasataṃ, dhaniyassatthāya sattayojanasatāni agamāsi, dhammasenāpatino saddhivihārikassa vanavāsītissasāmaṇerassa tigāvutādhikaṃ vīsayojanasataṃ agamāsi, ayaṃ turitacārikā. Yaṃ pana gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭiyā devasikaṃ yojanaaḍḍhayojanavasena piṇḍapātacariyādīhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhantassa gamanaṃ, ayaṃ aturitacārikā nāma. Imaṃ pana cārikaṃ caranto bhagavā mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍalaṃ antimamaṇḍalanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maṇḍalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ carati. Tattha ‘‘janapadacārika’’nti vuttattā aturitacārikāva idhādhippetā. Tameva vibhajitvā dassento āha ‘‘mahāmaṇḍalaṃ majjhimamaṇḍala’’ntiādi.
其中,“最末圈”是指小圈;或者因为其他圈都包含在它里面,所以叫最末圈,说的就是最内圈。那么,这些圈的规模有多大呢?回答说“其中大圈是九百由旬”等等。九百由旬的地方也只属于中土范围,再超出这个范围就不在考虑之内,因为不会以急行的方式前往。从出发的时候起,所到之处四周各一百由旬内都会人声鼎沸,先到的人能够邀请;在其余两圈中的供养会流入大圈。诸佛世尊在那些村落、集镇里住一天或两天,通过接受食物等资具来摄受大众,又以法施增长导向解脱的善法,所以说“在村落、集镇等处,通过接受食物等资具摄受大众”等等。止与观还很稚嫩——这里的“观稚嫩”,是名色分别智、度疑清净智、思惟智、道非道智这四种智的统称;“止的稚嫩”则应当理解为近行定。“如果在雨安居期间比丘们的止观还很稚嫩”,这只是一个举例说明。也由于其他原因,比如中圈所化众生的智慧成熟等,如果想在中圈游化,就要住满四个月之后才出发。巴利
Tattha antimamaṇḍalanti khuddakamaṇḍalaṃ, itaresaṃ vā maṇḍalānaṃ antogadhattā antimamaṇḍalaṃ, abbhantarimamaṇḍalanti vuttaṃ hoti. Imesaṃ pana maṇḍalānaṃ kiṃ pamāṇanti āha ‘‘tattha mahāmaṇḍalaṃ navayojanasatika’’ntiādi. Navayojanasatikampi ṭhānaṃ majjhimadesapariyāpannameva, tato paraṃ nādhippetaṃ turitacārikāvasena agamanato. Yasmā nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu samantato yojanasataṃ ekakolāhalaṃ hoti, purimaṃ purimaṃ āgatā nimantetuṃ labhanti, itaresu dvīsu maṇḍalesu sakkāro mahāmaṇḍalaṃ osarati, tattha buddhā bhagavanto tesu tesu gāmanigamesu ekāhaṃ dvīhaṃ vasantā mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhanti, dhammadānena ca vivaṭṭūpanissitaṃ kusalaṃ vaḍḍhenti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘gāmanigamādīsu mahājanaṃ āmisapaṭiggahena anuggaṇhantā’’tiādi. Samathavipassanā taruṇā hontīti ettha taruṇā vipassanāti saṅkhāraparicchedane ñāṇaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇe ñāṇaṃ sammasane ñāṇaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samathassa taruṇabhāvo pana upacārasamādhivasena veditabbo. ‘‘Sace pana antovasse bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanā taruṇā hontī’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena majjhimamaṇḍale cārikaṃ caritukāmā cātumāsaṃ vasitvāva nikkhamanti.
给了自恣的认可,就是以同意的方式给予。摩揭陀月(九月)的第一天——这是按照现在通行的说法,指迦底迦月(十月)下半月的初一。他们,指那些佛陀。因为应当由他们来调伏,所以说“他们的所化众生”。“所化众生”就是应当通过游化来调伏的众生。在摩揭陀月也住在那里,到弗沙月(十二月)的第一天——这也应当看作只是举例。即使住满四个月,如果佛陀的所化众生根器还没成熟,就等着他们根器成熟,再住一个月、两个月、三个月或四个月,然后由大比丘僧团围绕而出,按前面说的方式利益世间,用七个月、六个月、五个月或四个月完成游化。“只为了所化众生”——这个限定词表明,他们不是为了衣服等缘故而游化。确实,在这三个区域中无论到哪里游化,都不是为了衣服等缘故,而是出于对世间的悲悯:那些贫苦、愚痴、衰老、生病的人心想“什么时候能来见如来?我游化的时候,大众就能见到如来,其中有些人会心生净信,有些人会用花鬘等供养,有些人会布施一匙之食,有些人会舍弃邪见而成为具正见者,这将给他们带来长久的利益和安乐”,佛陀就是这样出于对世间的悲悯而游化。巴利
Pavāraṇāsaṅgahaṃ datvāti anumatidānavasena datvā. Māgasirassa paṭhamadivaseti māgasiramāsassa paṭhamadivase. Idañcetarahi pavattavohāravasena kattikamāsassa aparapakkhapāṭipadadivasaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tesanti tesaṃ buddhānaṃ. Tehi vinetabbattā ‘‘tesaṃ vineyyasattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vineyyasattāti ca cārikāya vinetabbasattā. Māgasiramāsampi tattheva vasitvā phussamāsassa paṭhamadivaseti idampi nidassanamattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Catumāsavutthānampi buddhānaṃ vineyyasattā aparipakkindriyā honti, tesaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ āgamayamānā aparampi ekamāsaṃ vā dviticatumāsaṃ vā tatthevavasitvā mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivārā nikkhamitvā purimanayeneva lokaṃ anuggaṇhantā sattahi vā chahi vā pañcahi vā catūhi vā māsehi cārikaṃ pariyosāpenti. Veneyyavasenevāti avadhāraṇena na cīvarādihetu carantīti dasseti. Tathā hi imesu tīsu maṇḍalesu yattha katthaci cārikaṃ carantā na cīvarādihetu caranti, atha kho ye duggatabālajiṇṇabyādhikā, te ‘‘kadā tathāgataṃ āgantvā passissanti, mayi pana cārikaṃ carante mahājano tathāgatadassanaṃ labhissati, tattha keci cittāni pasādessanti, keci mālādīhi pūjessanti, keci kaṭacchubhikkhaṃ dassanti, keci micchādassanaṃ pahāya sammādiṭṭhikā bhavissanti, taṃ nesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti evaṃ lokānukampāya cārikaṃ caranti.
另外,诸佛世尊还会以四种原因四处游化:为了让身体通过经行得到舒适;为了等待合适的时机出现;为了给比丘们制定学处;为了觉悟各地那些根器已经成熟、应当被教化的众生。诸佛世尊还会以另外四种原因四处游化:为了让众生皈依佛,或者皈依法,或者皈依僧;为了用广大的法雨让四众得到满足。诸佛世尊还会以另外五种原因四处游化:为了让众生远离杀生,远离不与取,远离欲邪行,远离妄语,远离饮酒等放逸之处。诸佛世尊还会以另外八种原因四处游化:为了让众生证得初禅,证得第二禅……乃至证得非想非非想处定。诸佛世尊还会以另外八种原因四处游化:为了让众生证得入流道,证得入流果……乃至证得阿拉汉果。巴利
Apica catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti jaṅghavihāravasena sarīraphāsukatthāya, aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāya, bhikkhūnaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya, tattha tattha paripākagatindriye bodhaneyyasatte bodhanatthāyāti. Aparehipi catūhi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, dhammaṃ, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchissantīti vā, mahatā dhammavassena catasso parisā santappessāmāti vā. Aparehipi pañcahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti pāṇātipātā viramissantīti vā, adinnādānā, kāmesumicchācārā, musāvādā, surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā viramissantīti vā. Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ paṭilabhissantīti vā, dutiyaṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ paṭilabhissantīti vā. Aparehipi aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi buddhā bhagavanto cārikaṃ caranti sotāpattimaggaṃ adhigamissantīti vā, sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattaphalaṃ sacchikarissantīti vāti.
就像采花的人边走边采花一样,用这个比喻来说明:好比花匠看到一大片花丛,就在那里停留很久,采完花之后,看到花已经采光的花丛,就不再那里耽搁,放下那个地方,去别处继续边走边采花;同样地,诸佛在村庄、城镇等地,如果那里有很多应当受教化的众生,就会在那里住很久来教化他们,等教化完了,对于那些已经没有应度众生的村庄等地,就不再耽搁,放下那里,去别的有很多应度众生的村庄等地居住游化。正是因为这个道理,即使在极小的最末轮围中,由于具足亲依止缘的众生很多,他们也会游化长达七个月之久。巴利
Pupphāni ocinantā viya carantīti iminā yathā mālākāro bahuṃ pupphagacchaṃ disvā tattha cirampi ṭhatvā pupphāni ocinitvā pupphasuññaṃ gacchaṃ disvā tattha papañcaṃ akatvā taṃ pahāya aññattha gantvā pupphāni ocinanto vicarati, evameva buddhāpi yattha gāmanigamādīsu vineyyasattā bahū honti, tattha cirampi vasantā te vinetvā vineyyasuññagāmādīsu papañcaṃ akatvā taṃ pahāya aññattha bahuvineyyakesu gāmādīsu vasantā vicarantīti dasseti. Tatoyeva ca atikhuddakepi antimamaṇḍale upanissayavantānaṃ bahubhāvato tāva bahumpi kālaṃ sattamāsapariyantaṃ cārikaṃ caranti.
因为涅槃的自性是寂静的,或者因为它是烦恼止息的因,所以涅槃是寂静的;又因为它是快乐的因,所以是快乐的。因此说“以寂静、快乐的涅槃为所缘”。所谓“一万轮围”,就是指作为众生出生之处的1万个世界。这是依天和梵天来说的,而人类则只在这同一个轮围中成为可被教化觉悟的人。“观察可教化的众生”,是指先以大悲遍满,然后展开一切知智之网,观察进入这网中的可教化众生。据说诸佛进入大悲定,从定中出来后,心里决意:“哪些众生有能力、智慧已经成熟、今天应当由我来调伏,愿他们出现在我的智中。”他们一作意,当时堪受调伏的一个、两个或许多应度者就进入一切知智的范围,这就是佛的威力。对于这样进入范围的众生,佛观察他们的宿世资粮、过去行持、过去因,以及现在正在修的行道。因为为了摄受应度众生而作意时,他们首先以应度者的身份出现。然后,为了考察“将会怎样”,佛从皈依等方面观察某种成就,从而观察他们过去积累的资粮。巴利
Santasabhāvattā kilesasamaṇahetutāya vā santaṃ nibbānaṃ, sukhakāraṇatāya ca sukhanti āha ‘‘santaṃ sukhaṃ nibbānamārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti. Dasasahassacakkavāḷeti jātikkhettabhūtāya dasasahassilokadhātuyā. Idañca devabrahmānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, manussā pana imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe bodhaneyyā honti. Bodhaneyyasattasamavalokananti paṭhamaṃ mahākaruṇāya pharitvā pacchā sabbaññutaññāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā tassa anto paviṭṭhānaṃ bodhaneyyasattānaṃ samolokanaṃ. Buddhā kira mahākaruṇāsamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā tato vuṭṭhāya ‘‘ye sattā bhabbā paripākañāṇā ajjayeva mayā vinetabbā, te mayhaṃ ñāṇassa upaṭṭhahantū’’ti cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāya samannāharanti. Tesaṃ saha samannāhārā eko vā dve vā bahū vā tadā vinayūpagā veneyyā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthamāgacchanti, ayamettha buddhānubhāvo. Evaṃ āpāthamāgatānaṃ pana nesaṃ upanissayaṃ pubbacariyaṃ pubbahetuṃ sampativattamānañca paṭipattiṃ olokenti. Veneyyasattapariggaṇhanatthañhi samannāhāre kate paṭhamaṃ nesaṃ veneyyabhāveneva upaṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Atha ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti saraṇagamanādivasena kañci nipphattiṃ vīmaṃsamānā pubbupanissayāni olokenti.
“已进入”是指已经告知,或者已经进入大众当中。“两次”是指一年当中两次。据说在佛陀在世时,比丘们每年集会两次:临近入雨安居的时候和自恣的时候。临近入雨安居时,十位、二十位、三十位、四十位乃至五十位比丘,成群结队地为求业处而来。世尊和他们互相问候之后,问道:“比丘们,为什么在临近入雨安居时还四处游走?”于是他们请求说:“世尊,我们是为了求业处而来的,请给我们业处。”导师根据他们的性格倾向,对贪行者给不净业处,对嗔行者给慈心业处,对痴行者则告诉他:“诵习、遍问、适时听法、适时讨论法,这些对你合适。”虽然对痴行者来说,入出息念业处也是合适的,但为了让他成为能修习业处的器皿、去除迷惑,首先让他投入诵习、遍问、听法、讨论法。对寻行者给入出息念业处。对信行者,前六种随念特别合适,为了显示修习这些随念的前行实践,用令人净信的经典来阐明佛的善觉、法的善法性、僧的善行道。对智行者,死随念、寂止随念、四界差别、食厌想特别合适,为了让他们看到这些的助益之法,就讲述与无常等相关的甚深经典。他们取得业处后,如果合适,就住在导师身边;如果不合适,就询问合适的住处后离开。他们住在那里,采取三个月的修行方式,努力精进,有的证得入流果,有的证得一来果,有的证得不还果,有的证得阿罗汉果。然后,雨安居结束、自恣之后,他们回到导师身边,报告说:“世尊,我在您身边取得业处后,证得了入流果……乃至……我证得了最高的果位——阿罗汉果。”他们报告已获得的功德,并进一步请求业处,以便证得尚未证得的。因此说:“在入雨安居前,为了取得业处……乃至……更进一步为了取得业处。”巴利
Otiṇṇeti ārocite, parisamajjhaṃ vā otiṇṇe. Dvikkhattunti ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare dvikkhattuṃ. Buddhakāle kira ekekasmiṃ saṃvacchare dve vāre bhikkhū sannipatanti upakaṭṭhavassūpanāyikakāle ca pavāraṇākāle ca. Upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya dasapi vīsampi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi bhikkhū vaggavaggā hutvā kammaṭṭhānatthāya āgacchanti. Bhagavā tehi saddhiṃ sammoditvā ‘‘kasmā, bhikkhave, upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vicarathā’’ti pucchati. Atha te ‘‘bhagavā kammaṭṭhānatthaṃ āgatamha, kammaṭṭhānaṃ no dethā’’ti yācanti. Satthā tesaṃ cariyavasena rāgacaritassa asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ deti, dosacaritassa mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ, mohacaritassa ‘‘uddeso paripucchā kālena dhammassavanaṃ kālena dhammasākacchā idaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāya’’nti ācikkhati. Kiñcāpi hi mohacaritassa ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ sappāyaṃ, kammaṭṭhānabhāvanāya pana bhājanabhūtaṃ kātuṃ sammohavigamāya paṭhamaṃ uddesaparipucchādhammassavanadhammasākacchāsu niyojeti. Vitakkacaritassa ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Saddhācaritassa visesato purimā cha anussatiyo sappāyā, tāsaṃ pana anuyuñjane ayaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipattīti dassetuṃ pasādanīyasuttantena buddhasubodhitaṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca pakāseti. Ñāṇacaritassa pana maraṇassati upasamānussati catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhārepaṭikūlasaññā visesato sappāyā, tesaṃ upakāradhammadassanatthaṃ aniccatādipaṭisaṃyutte gambhīre suttante katheti. Te kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sace sappāyaṃ hoti, satthu santike eva vasanti. No ce hoti, sappāyaṃ senāsanaṃ pucchantā gacchanti. Tepi tattha vasantā temāsikaṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā ghaṭentā vāyamantā sotāpannāpi honti sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi arahantopi. Tato vutthavassā pavāretvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘bhagavā ahaṃ tumhākaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sotāpattiphalaṃ patto…pe… ahaṃ aggaphalaṃ arahatta’’nti paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocenti, upari anadhigatassa adhigamāya kammaṭṭhānañca yācanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pure vassūpanāyikāya ca kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthaṃ…pe… upari kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇatthañcā’’ti.
这里“āyāma”中的“ā”和“āgaccha”意思相同,所以注释说“āyāma就是āgaccha yāma”,意思是“来,我们走吧”,也就是“来,我们一起去”。至于“Ānanda”,世尊是因为长老经常在身边侍候才叫他,并不是因为当时没有比丘住在导师身边。事实上,当时住在世尊身边的比丘僧团有五百人之多。不过长老会告诉比丘们:“各位贤友,请拿好衣钵,世尊想去某个地方。”因为经文里说“那时,世尊吩咐尊者阿难”,这里“回应了世尊”中的“世尊”是属格,实际上和“吩咐”这个词相关联,所以用“回应了世尊的话”来表达这个意思。而这里的“Bhagavato”则是和“回应”搭配的与格,就像“对提婆达多回应”那样。“Paccassosi”中的“paṭi”表示面向,所以注释说“面向而听”,意思是:面向世尊,恭敬地听,而不是漠不关心地听。巴利
Āyāmāti ettha ā-saddo ‘‘āgacchā’’ti iminā samānatthoti āha ‘‘āyāmāti āgaccha yāmā’’ti, ehi gacchāmāti attho. Ānandāti bhagavā santikāvacarattā theraṃ ālapati, na pana tadā satthu santike vasantānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ abhāvato. Pañcasataparimāṇo hi tadā bhagavato santike bhikkhusaṅgho. Thero pana ‘‘gaṇhathāvuso pattacīvarāni, bhagavā asukaṭṭhānaṃ gantukāmo’’ti bhikkhūnaṃ āroceti. ‘‘Atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ āmantesī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘bhagavato paccassosī’’ti idha bhagavatoti sāmivacanaṃ āmantanavacanameva sambandhīantaraṃ apekkhatīti iminā adhippāyena ‘‘bhagavato vacanaṃ paṭiassosī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bhagavatoti pana idaṃ patissavasambandhena sampadānavacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa paṭissuṇotī’’ti. Paccassosīti ettha paṭi-saddo abhimukhavacanoti āha ‘‘abhimukho hutvā suṇī’’ti. Bhagavato mukhābhimukho hutvā adhivāsetvā suṇi, na udāsino hutvāti adhippāyo.
这个神通是因为以客比丘的身份而作的,所以才说“从城门开始”。在“以金色液网般的光芒”这句里,“rasa”这个词是水的同义词,“piñjara”这个词是金色的同义词,所以意思是:像金色水流一样的金色光芒。“Samujjotayamāno”的意思是照亮。“Assa”指毗兰若婆罗门。“想靠近世尊坐下”的意思是想要走到世尊跟前坐下,也就是说想坐在世尊旁边。巴利
Tassa pāṭihāriyassa āgantukavasena katattā vuttaṃ ‘‘nagaradvārato paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāhi rasmīhīti ettha rasa-saddo udakapariyāyo, piñjara-saddo hemavaṇṇapariyāyo, tasmā suvaṇṇajaladhārā viya suvaṇṇavaṇṇāhi rasmīhīti attho. Samujjotayamānoti obhāsayamāno. Assāti verañjassa brāhmaṇassa. Bhagavantaṃ upanisīditukāmoti bhagavantaṃ upagantvā nisīditukāmo, bhagavato samīpe nisīditukāmoti vuttaṃ hoti.
婆罗门,我们受你邀请,已度过雨安居——这句经文里的关联应当这样理解。“应给”就是“应当给予”。“并非没有”并不是说不存在,而是说确实存在。或者,这里应当从语尾变化来看含义,所以说“或者”等等。由此表明,因为这里是通称,所以用的是中性词来表达。“没有”就是“我们没有”。“不”的解释就是“没有”。就像那些不愿布施的人一样,所以说“如同”等等。“拥有众多财富资具”中,“财富”指满足,“财富资具”就是满足的资具,意思是满足的原因。他们拥有众多财富、谷物、金银、各种装饰品、金器等各类资具,所以叫“拥有众多财富资具”。这些拥有众多财富资具却吝啬的人,就像他们不愿布施一样,我们也没有不愿布施的心,应当这样关联。“那在这里从何可得”中,“那”指那个原因,或者那件事。“这里”指在家生活。在第二种含义解释中,“那”指所施之物。“这里”指在这三个月期间内。“以”指由于那个原因,或者指行为。在第二种含义解释中,“以”指所施之物。巴利
Brāhmaṇa tayā nimantitā vassaṃvutthā amhāti pāḷiyaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Dātabbo assāti dātabbo bhaveyya. No asantoti neva avijjamāno, kintu vijjamānoyevāti dīpeti. Vinā vā liṅgavipallāsenettha attho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Iminā sāmaññavacanato ettha napuṃsakaliṅganiddesoti dasseti. No natthīti no amhākaṃ natthi. Noti vā etassa vivaraṇaṃ natthīti. Kesaṃ adātukāmatā viyāti āha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Pahūtavittūpakaraṇānanti ettha vittīti tuṭṭhi, vittiyā upakaraṇaṃ vittūpakaraṇaṃ, tuṭṭhikāraṇanti attho. Pahūtaṃ dhanadhaññajātarūparajatanānāvidhālaṅkārasuvaṇṇabhājanādibhedaṃ vittūpakaraṇametesanti pahūtavittūpakaraṇā, tesaṃ pahūtavittūpakaraṇānaṃ maccharīnaṃ yathā adātukāmatā, evaṃ no adātukāmatāpi natthīti sambandho. Taṃ kutettha labbhāti ettha tanti taṃ kāraṇaṃ, taṃ kiccaṃ vā. Etthāti gharāvāse. Dutiye pana atthavikappe tanti deyyadhammassa parāmasanaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ temāsabbhantareti attho. Yanti yena kāraṇena, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā. Dutiye pana atthavikappe yanti yaṃ deyyadhammanti attho.
为了让婆罗门明白“不必再想着在家生活的障碍”,也就是让他明白:“婆罗门,这不是在家生活的障碍造成的,而是魔的圈套。”所谓“随应当时之机”,是指随顺他当时内心的倾向。因为他当时那种趋向出离的智慧还未成熟,所以只开示了内在层面的意义,因此说“开示了现世与来世的利益”,意思是让他当下亲眼看清。“于善法”指三界中的善法。“于此”指在善法上如法劝导之后。“令婆罗门振奋”,是指正确地一层层引导他深入,使他在修福之行中变得锐利明净。而这实际上就是激发他的热忱,所以说“令生热忱”。这样,由修福之行生起的热忱,必然伴随着这样的功德,并能成实现世等利益。因此,以这种热忱以及他自身所具有的功德来令他欢喜,正确地使他达到喜悦满足的状态。巴利
Alaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhacintāyāti saññāpetvāti brāhmaṇa netaṃ gharāvāsapalibodhena kataṃ, atha kho mārāvaṭṭanenāti brāhmaṇaṃ saññāpetvā. Taṅkhaṇānurūpāyāti yādisī tadā tassa ajjhāsayappavatti, tadanurūpāyāti attho. Tassa tadā tādisassa vivaṭṭasannissitassa ñāṇaparipākassa abhāvato kevalaṃ abbhantarasannissito eva attho dassitoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ atthaṃ sandassetvā’’ti, paccakkhato vibhāvetvāti attho. Kusale dhammeti tebhūmake kusale dhamme. Tatthāti kusaladhamme yathāsamādapite. Nanti brāhmaṇaṃ. Samuttejetvāti sammadeva uparūpari nivesetvā puññakiriyāya tikkhavisadabhāvaṃ āpādetvā. Taṃ pana atthato tassa ussāhajananaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘saussāhaṃ katvā’’ti. Evaṃ puññakiriyāya saussāhato evarūpaguṇasamaṅgitā ca niyamato diṭṭhadhammikādiatthasampādananti evaṃ saussāhatāya aññehi ca tasmiṃ vijjamānaguṇehi sampahaṃsetvā sammadeva haṭṭhatuṭṭhabhāvaṃ āpādetvā.
如果世尊降下了法宝之雨,那他为什么没有证得殊胜的果证呢?因为他没有具备亲依止缘。既然如此,世尊为什么还那样为他降下法宝之雨呢?回答说:虽然他当时没有证得殊胜果证,但为了将来证得涅槃,前后所说的法都成了习气分,应当这样理解。因为世尊的说法绝不会没有意义。三个月的所施物,就是指应当布施三个月的物品。哪一天,就是在哪一天。巴利
Yadi bhagavā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassi, atha kasmā so visesaṃ nādhigacchi? Upanissayasampattiyā abhāvato. Yadi evaṃ kasmā bhagavā tassa tathā dhammaratanavassaṃ vassīti? Vuccate – yadipi tassa visesādhigamo natthi, āyatiṃ pana nibbānādhigamatthāya vāsanābhāgiyā ca sabbā purimapacchimadhammakathā ahosīti daṭṭhabbā. Na hi bhagavato niratthakā dhammadesanā atthi. Temāsikopi deyyadhammoti temāsaṃ dātabbopi deyyadhammo. Yaṃ divasanti yasmiṃ divase.
23 “以佛为引导者”是指以佛陀为引导者的比丘僧团,意思是把佛陀当作最上首。“随所需而做”是说按照需要,当时用食物做了安排。拒绝接受递上来的食物,可以通过手势、面部表情或言语来表示,所以说“以手势”等。“手已从钵移开”中,手已离开钵,这个说法是不同搭配关系的外在复合词,因此说“手已从钵移开”等。也有写成“onittapattapāṇi”的,意思是钵已洗净,即通过去除食物等使钵清净,手和钵都干净,把钵放在一边坐下。“羽褐与绸绢布”中,是羽褐布和绸绢布。其中,在羽褐之处所生者名为羽褐,也有人说是某种蚕丝。而绢布则是中国布。在“āyoga”等中,“āyoga”是系带,是肩带,用于钵袋等物。“药油”是以药混合制成的油。“皮囊”是皮革制成的油容器。给每位比丘布施了价值千钱的油,这是关联。巴利
23.Buddhapariṇāyakanti buddho pariṇāyako etassāti buddhapariṇāyako, bhikkhusaṅgho. Taṃ buddhapariṇāyakaṃ, buddhajeṭṭhakanti attho. Yāvadatthaṃ katvāti yāva attho, tāva bhojanena tadā katanti adhippāyo. Dātuṃ upanītabhikkhāya paṭikkhepo nāma hatthasaññāya mukhavikārena vacībhedena vā hotīti āha ‘‘hatthasaññāyā’’tiādi. Onītapattapāṇinti ettha onīto pattato pāṇi etassāti onītapattapāṇīti bhinnādhikaraṇavisayoyaṃ saddo bāhiratthasamāsoti āha ‘‘pattato onītapāṇi’’ntiādi. ‘‘Onittapattapāṇi’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho onittaṃ nānābhūtaṃ vinābhūtaṃ āmisāpanayanena vā sucikataṃ pattaṃ pāṇito assāti onittapattapāṇi , taṃ onittapattapāṇiṃ, hatthe ca pattañca dhovitvā ekamante pattaṃ nikkhipitvā nisinnanti attho. Pattuṇṇapaṭṭapaṭe cāti pattuṇṇapaṭe ca paṭṭapaṭe ca. Tattha pattuṇṇapadese bhavā pattuṇṇā, kosiyavisesātipi vadanti. Paṭṭāni pana cīnapaṭāni. Āyogādīsu āyogoti paṭiāyogo, aṃsabaddhakaṃ pattatthavikādīsu. Bhesajjatelānanti bhesajjasampākena sādhitatelānaṃ. Tumbānīti cammamayatelabhājanāni. Ekamekassa bhikkhuno sahassagghanakaṃ telamadāsīti sambandho.
举行了大祭祀,就是作了大布施。与妻子儿女一同礼敬后坐下,意思是和妻子儿女一起礼敬之后坐下。三个月是表示持续关系的业格。他坐下时心想:我今天就要听闻这三个月里应当听闻的法。为了圆满他的这个心愿而说法,所以说令其心愿圆满。跟随,就是随行。巴利
Mahāyāgaṃ yajitvāti mahādānaṃ datvā. Saputtadāraṃ vanditvā nisinnanti puttadārehi saddhiṃ vanditvā nisinnaṃ. Temāsanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. ‘‘Temāsaṃ sotabbadhammaṃ ajjeva suṇissāmī’’ti nisinnassa taṃ ajjhāsayaṃ pūretvā desitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘paripuṇṇasaṅkappaṃ kurumāno’’ti. Anubandhitvāti anugantvā.
诸佛并没有所谓的不喜乐与不安,所以说“随心所愿、随其所好而住”。因为“喜乐”和“喜爱”在意义上其实是一回事。这里的“喜乐”一词是“喜好”的同义词,不是“贪著享乐”的同义词。如果是因为贪著享乐而住在某处,当那些享乐的事物消失时,他可能就对那个地方产生不喜乐;但漏尽者根本没有这种情况,更何况诸佛。所以,诸佛并不是因为喜乐而住在某处、等喜乐消失后才去别处;而是为了调伏应受教化的人而住在某处,等这件事办成了,就为了调伏其他应受教化的人而前往别处,这就是这里说的“随其所好”。未至索雷城等地,是指没有进入大游行路线上作为必经之地的索雷城等城镇。波耶伽城,既是村子的名称,也是渡口的名称。恒河,就是名为恒河的河流。他由此而下,这里的“此”是表示原因的业格,所以说“他由此而下”。巴利
Buddhānaṃ anabhiratiparitassitā nāma natthīti āha ‘‘yathājjhāsayaṃ yathārucitaṃ vāsaṃ vasitvā’’ti. Abhirantaṃ abhiratīti hi atthato ekaṃ. Abhirantasaddo cāyaṃ abhirucipariyāyo, na assādapariyāyo. Assādavasena ca katthaci vasantassa assādavatthuvigamanena siyā tassa tattha anabhirati, tayidaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ natthi, pageva buddhānaṃ, tasmā abhirativasena katthaci vasitvā tadabhāvato aññattha gamanaṃ nāma buddhānaṃ natthi, vineyyavinayanatthaṃ pana katthaci vasitvā tasmiṃ siddhe vineyyavinayatthameva tato aññattha gacchanti, ayamettha yathāruci. Soreyyādīni anupagammāti mahāmaṇḍalacārikāya vīthibhūtāni soreyyanagarādīni anupagantvā. Payāgapatiṭṭhānanti gāmassapi adhivacanaṃ titthassapi. Gaṅgaṃ nadinti gaṅgaṃ nāma nadiṃ. Tadavasarīti ettha tanti karaṇatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘tena avasari tadavasarī’’ti.
“一切善见”的意思是:从四面八方、完完全全地让人生起净信,所以叫“一切善见”,也就是属于那“一切善见”的。这里,“于一切善见的……在一切善见性中”这一句里,“在此”是指向前面那句话的,“此”是指向接下来要说的理由的。连接关系是这样的:前面说到“于一切善见的律藏注释”,那么,那里所说的那个名为“一切善见”的注释,对于那“一切善见”的注释,在它的“一切善见性”中、在它“一切善见”的状态中、在它完全令人产生净信这一点上,有这样一件事。是什么事呢?就是说“从师师相承”等等。巴利
Samantapāsādikāyāti samantato sabbaso pasādaṃ janetīti samantapāsādikā, tassā samantapāsādikāya. Tatridaṃ samantapāsādikāya samantapāsādikattasminti ettha tatrāti purimavacanāpekkhaṃ, idanti vakkhamānakāraṇavacanāpekkhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘samantapāsādikāya vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāyā’’ti, tatra yā sā samantapāsādikāti saṃvaṇṇanā vuttā , tassā samantapāsādikāya saṃvaṇṇanāya samantapāsādikattasmiṃ samantapāsādikabhāve sabbaso pasādajanakatte idaṃ hoti. Kiṃ hotīti āha ‘‘ācariyaparamparato’’tiādi.
从“师师相承”这一角度来说,就是依据“优波离、陀娑迦”等(见《附随》3)所说的内容,来说明师师相承。从“阐明因缘与事由的分类”这一角度来说,就是从阐明因缘的分类和阐明事由的分类两方面来说。其中,应当知道,通过开示外因缘、内因缘和学处因缘来阐明因缘的分类;而阐明上座部的主张,则是阐明事由的分类。从“远离外道”这一角度来说,就像在“依她自己的认许,你们应当驱摈比丘尼梅谛耶”等处(《波罗夷》384)那样,通过驳斥那些邪行外道的错误见解,并因此确立自己的主张,从而使自宗清净。巴利
Ācariyaparamparatoti ‘‘upāli dāsako’’tiādinā (pari. 3). Vuttaācariyaparamparato. Nidānavatthuppabhedadīpanatoti nidānappabhedadīpanato vatthuppabhedadīpanato ca. Tattha bāhiranidānaabbhantaranidānasikkhāpadanidānadassanavasena nidānappabhedadīpanaṃ veditabbaṃ, theravādappakāsanaṃ pana vatthuppabhedadīpanaṃ. Parasamayavivajjanatoti ‘‘sakāya paṭiññāya mettiyaṃ bhikkhuniṃ nāsethā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 384) micchāpaṭipannānaṃ paresaṃ laddhinirākaraṇato, tatoyeva ca attano samayapatiṭṭhāpanena sakasamayavisuddhito.
“文句清净”是指:通过校订原文来使文句清净;或者依照声明的学问,先展示词源分析,再说明词的构成,这就是文句清净。“显示分别纲目的差别”是指:针对“三种女人”等词语的分类,按照与之相应的方式来显示纲目的差别。“正观”是指以智慧之眼正确观察的人,意思是审察的人。“不可信”是指能引起不信的。“此处”是指在《普端严》中。与“正观的智者”相关联。因此应当这样连接:这部注释就是以《普端严》之名流传的。为了说明这是对谁所说、由谁所说的法的注释,所以说了“对于律……”等话。巴利
Byañjanaparisodhanatoti pāṭhasodhanena byañjanaparisodhanaṃ veditabbaṃ, saddasatthānusārena vā nibbacanaṃ dassetvā padanipphattidassanaṃ byañjanaparisodhanaṃ. Vibhaṅganayabhedadassanatoti ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādipadabhājanassa anurūpavasena nayabhedadassanato. Sampassatanti ñāṇacakkhunā sammā passantānaṃ, upaparikkhantānanti attho. Apāsādikanti appasādāvahaṃ. Etthāti samantapāsādikāya. Sampassataṃ viññūnanti sambandho. Tasmā ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā samantapāsādikātveva pavattāti yojetabbaṃ. Kassa kena desitassa saṃvaṇṇanāti āha ‘‘vinayassā’’tiādi.
以上是《普端严》律藏注释中《显明精义复注》的内容。巴利
Iti samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya sāratthadīpaniyaṃ